IRIS Net Dokumentati Online Help All 20338629771

IRIS-Net

en User Manual
IRIS-Net Table of Contents | en 3
Table of contents
1 IRIS-Net 5
1.1 Preface 5
1.2 Basics of IRIS-NET 6
1.3 Introduction 10
1.4 IRIS-Net Objects 18
1.5 How to... 45
1.6 Reference 77
2 REMOTE AMPLIFIER 101
2.1 P-Series 101
2.2 RCM-26 176
2.3 RCM-28 243
2.4 RCM-810 288
3 REV WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM 307
3.1 Introduction 307
3.2 REV Device 308
3.3 REV Control Panel 308
3.4 Setup & Control 310
4 DIGITAL MATRIX 315
4.1 NetMax N8000 System Controller 315
4.2 P 64 Digital Matrix 338
4.3 N8000 and P 64 361
5 TOUCH PANELS 524
5.1 TPI-5 524
5.2 TPI-8/TPI-12 535
6 DIGITAL SOUND PROCESSOR 544
6.1 DX38 Digital Sound Processor 544
6.2 DSP 244 571
6.3 DSP 600 FIR-TUNE 598
6.4 Dx46 FIR-DRIVE 644
6.5 Dx46 and DSP 600 689
7 PWS PROGRAMMABLE WALL STATION 705
7.1 PWS Device 705
7.2 Operation 706
7.3 Configuration 706
7.4 Button Types 709
8 PROMATRIX 8000 714
8.1 DPM 8016 Paging Manager 717
8.2 DPC 8000 Call Station 789
8.3 PMX-CSK Call Station Kit 804
8.4 DPA 8000 Power Amplifier 811
8.5 DCS Digital Control System 819
9 PROMATRIX 6000 828
9.1 PMX-4CR12 828
9.2 PMX-4R24 877
9.3 PMX-15CST 881
9.4 PMX-CSK 895
Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

IRIS-Net Table of Contents | en 4
9.5 PMX-2P500 895

10 PAVIRO 900
10.1 PVA-4CR12 900
10.2 PVA-4R24 948
10.3 PVA-15CST 952
10.4 PVA-CSK 965
10.5 PVA-2P500 970

IRIS-Net IRIS-Net | en 5
IRIS-Net
Preface
IRIS-Net - Intelligent Remote & Integrated Supervision - is an efficient PC-program running under Windows. It allows
configuring, controlling and monitoring of a complete PA-system from one central location. Control and monitoring up
to 250 Remote Power Amps is possible from a single or from several PC's. The IRIS-Net System provides a complete
overview of the entire system status at all times plus real-time control of all relevant system parameters. IRIS-Net
allows the creation of customized graphical user interfaces to optimally match any application offering easy control and
monitoring even for large and complex installations and PA systems.
To get the most out of the IRIS-Net software we recommend that you read through all the topics in this help file
carefully.
Notes on The IRIS-Net Documentation

The left hand side of the Online Help allows convenient selection of individual chapters. Chapters that consist of
several subchapters carry a book icon, which opens by double clicking on it. Chapters may include reference links to
other chapters that provide related information. Double clicking such a link opens the corresponding chapter.

Basics of IRIS-NET
IRIS-Net System Requirements

Processor Dual core CPU
OS Windows 7 (32-Bit or 64-Bit), Windows 8 or Windows 8.1

Project Generator or Dx46/DSP 600: The .Net framework (3.5sp1 or higher) is required.
Dante: Windows 7 64-Bit recommended
RAM 2 GB (more is recommended)
Hard Disk 2 GB of free space
Video 1024x768, High Color (16 Bit)
Network Ethernet port and/or 1 USB port per 100 amplifiers

Audio network: Gigabit Ethernet port
Installation

This manual guides the user through the installation process of IRIS-Net using the following operation systems:
Windows 9x, NT, 2000, XP and 7.
1. In Windows click on Start > Run. The Run dialog box appears.
2. Click on the Browse... button. The Browse... dialog box appears.
3. Select the directory in which the IRIS-Net installation file is located.
4. Select "setup.exe" and click on the Open button. The IRIS-Net installation program starts. Follow the instructions
of the installation program.
5. When the installation is finished you can start IRIS-Net from Windows via Start > All Programs > IRIS-Net > IRISNet.
IRIS-Net Directory Structure

This section provides information about IRIS-Net directories and the contained files which, after installing the software
package, are stored on your computer’s hard disk. IRIS-Net’s default installation path is C:\Program Files\IRIS-Net\§
Version §. All subfolders are created in this directory. During installation, defining any other installation path is possible
as well. Subfolders and files will then be created at the new location.
Files installed in the main folder
Amongst others, the main IRIS-Net program folder holds the following files:
Filename Description
IRISnet.exe This is the executable program file. A double click on the file’s icon starts the IRIS-Net
application.
IRIS_readme.pdf ReadMe document offering additional information.

Subdirectories

\Bitmaps.


This folder contains several picture files in bitmap format, e.g. loudspeakers, racks, front views of different devices,
logos, etc. which, for example, can be used to design the graphical representation of a PA-system within an IRIS-Net
project. Creating your own bitmaps and saving them in this folder is possible as well.

\Controls.

This directory holds all IRIS-Net controls. Controls are composed of system files that are of no direct relevance for the
user and bitmap graphics. The latter define the looks of a control. Creating and adding custom bitmaps which then
represent your own specific controls is possible.

\Documentation.

This folder contains manuals and documents related to IRIS-Net plus subdirectories that hold the manuals for several
devices and systems.

\Driver.

This folder holds Windows drivers for different interfaces and applications. At the moment, it also includes two
subdirectories. Prior to using/installing drivers and interfaces, please make sure to consult the corresponding help
files.

\Firmware.

This directory contains the firmware files of all the devices that can be used with the IRIS-Net software.

\Help.

This folder holds all help files. These files have the extension .htm.

\Projects.

This directory is for saving your IRIS-Net project files. We recommend creating a separate project folder for every new
project under the path \Projects and to save all the files related to an individual project in the corresponding project
folder. Strictly following this convention greatly facilitates transferring a project from one PC to another because you
only need to copy the project folder including its entire contents and save it under the same name on the other PC
under the following path \IRIS-Net\Projects.
The IRIS-Net package includes example projects ”Demo System Small” and ”XLC Demo System” which can be used to
form the basis for creating your own projects. The two projects are also good examples to get familiar with IRIS-Net’s
hierarchical file structure and the way a project should properly be saved.

\RCM-24 Presets.

The Default Presets F01 and U01 - U08 are located in this folder. Default presets are for initializing a power amplifier as
soon as it is included in an IRIS-Net worksheet via drag-and-drop. The subfolders contain factory-presets for speaker
cabinets.

\RCM-26 Presets.

The Default Presets F01, F02, O01, O02 and U01 - U06 are located in this folder. Default presets are for initializing a
power amplifier as soon as it is included in an IRIS-Net worksheet via drag-and-drop. The subfolders contain factory-
presets for speaker cabinets.


\Speaker Files.

The speaker files for different loudspeaker cabinets are located in this folder. Speaker files contain measured transfer
functions (frequency response and phase response) of loudspeaker systems. IRIS-Net lets you import and display this
data. This allows the user to see the frequency and phase response of set filter, x-over, level, phase and delay
parameters as well as the resulting acoustical transfer function of DSP parameters in use with the measured speaker
data.

\Speaker Settings.

This folder holds the configuration files for several different loudspeaker cabinets. Each model has its own directory,
which houses the files for each loudspeaker cabinet of the particular model. Contained in these files are factory
predefined and optimized settings - equalization (PEQ), x-over, level trim, alignment delay, and compressor/limiter - for
the corresponding loudspeaker. IRIS-Net allows importing and applying those speaker settings to a single amplifier
channel or to complete groups of amplifiers. So, basically at the push of a button, the user can establish optimal
settings for the connected speaker cabinet.

\Tools.

This folder holds the IRIS-Net Project Generator. For using the IRIS-Net Project Generator execute the file setup.exe.

\User Controls.

The preconfigured control panels contained in this directory can be utilized in IRIS-Net projects. The control panels
consist of one or more controls and a bitmap picture to provide graphical display of the panel. The functions of each
control come factory-preconfigured, so that activating a control panel is a matter of simply connecting it to the desired
devices or groups. IRIS-Net also provides the possibility for the user to create custom user controls, which should be
save in this folder as well.
All other subdirectories contain IRIS-Net system files, which are of no further significance for the user. As a matter of
fact, the opposite is the case. Altering the contents of these subfolders is categorically not advisable.

Introduction
Creating A New Project

An IRIS-Net project includes the complete configuration as well as the parameter, operation and monitoring settings for
a Remote Power Amplifier System. Creating and saving various user control panels is possible. Individual password
protection per page is provided.
Configuration of A Remote Power Amplifier System Using a PC-CAN-Interface

1. Start The IRIS-Net Software. IRIS-Net starts creating a new project and opens an empty "Configuration Page"
worksheet.
2. Saving. Name your new project before saving (File Save). Creating a separate folder for each project in the
directory \IRIS-Net\Projects\ is strongly recommended. All files associated with a specific project (e.g. bitmaps)
need to be located within that particular folder. Periodically saving the project is generally good advice.
3. Creating Devices. Clicking the right mouse button within the Worksheet opens a Configuration Dialog. Click on
Add Devices... using the left mouse button, drag the required power amps out of the device list and drop them in
the worksheet area. Specify the number of devices to be created as well as the start address. The devices appear
together with a PC-icon on the computer screen when hitting OK. The symbol of the PC represents the control-PC
and the CAN-interface.
4. Network Connection. If your computer is already linked to a remote power amp network, you are able to go
ONLINE. The network dialog window indicates which power amps are connected/linked and whether the
connection is okay or not. Now is the moment to decide, whether you want to continue with the configuration in
ON-LINE or OFF-LINE mode.
5. Creating Groups. Open the Configuration Dialog by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is located
over the worksheet window. Use the left mouse button and click on Add Control...and drag a Group element into
the worksheet. Right clicking on the Group icon followed by a click on Properties opens the group properties
dialog. Now, you are able to make the desired settings. It is also here, that you can specify which panel opens by
double-clicking the group icon. Creating groups is always recommended, when several power amps or power amp
channels are to be controlled or configured simultaneously. Typical examples are:
– System Group: Switching On / Off, Change Presets, Master EQ
– HF / LF Groups: Uniform configuration for X-Over and speaker system equalization
– Left / Right Groups: Common operation features of the PA system (left / right)
6. Loading Preset Data into Groups. While being in the Group Properties dialog you can specify that double-clicking
the group icon automatically opens the Setup & Control window. The IMPORT PRESET and EXPORT PRESET soft
keys are located on the DSP FLOW DIAGRAM page under the DSP tab. Clicking IMPORT PRESET opens a selection
box that allows choosing from the Preset files. Selecting and opening a file transmits its stored parameters to all
power amps associated with that group. Afterward, you need to save these setting in a free User Memory
(U02...U08).
7. Setting Group Parameters. Opening the Setup & Control window by double-clicking a group icon lets you use the
DSP Dialogs to set all parameters of all power amps within one group at the same time. This ensures that all
parameter values of all devices within a group are identical.
8. Creating Additional Pages. Open the Configuration Dialog by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is
located over the worksheet window. Use the left mouse button and click on Add Layer. This creates a new page
(layer). Now, you have to name it (e.g. Control Page). IRIS-Net allows the use of up to 32 layers.
9. Designing User Control Panels. The IRIS-Net software allows the creation of various control panels, which can be
customized to suit the needs of a project and the needs of the users. Freely programmable control elements,
bitmaps, text boxes and scripts are provided for you to do so. Selecting Add Control in the Configuration Dialog
(right click on the worksheet) opens a list of control elements. Drag the needed elements into the worksheet area

and place them as desired. To select and place bitmaps and text boxes, follow the same procedure accordingly
(Add Bitmap..., Add Textbox...). In case you need several similar control groups, start with creating one group.
Once you are finished with that particular group, select the entire group by dragging a highlight box around it and
Copy/Paste it. Alternatively you can save the complete group as a User Control (Save User Control menu
command) and reuse the User Control in various other projects.
10. Programming User Control Panels. Control elements of control panels can be used to control or to indicate various
power amp parameters. A click with the right mouse button onto the control element opens the corresponding
configuration dialog. Choose Administrate Connections and select the desired connection for the control element
(power amps, groups, other control elements) from the connections list. Select Modify Properties for setting/
modifying the control element’s properties. Click in the line on the right next to function and select one or several
parameters to be controlled from the parameter listing. If needed, set additional control element properties
accordingly. Afterwards, make sure to test the control element’s functions.
11. Programming Power Amplifier Parameters. A double click on a power amplifier icon opens the Amplifier Control
Panel. The Amplifier Control Panel allows naming power amps and channels, switching power amps on / off,
setting level controls and mutes, and assigning and monitoring input or output signals to the monitor bus. Click on
the SET button to open the Setup & Control Window. This window includes five different pages: Config & Info,
DSP, Speaker, Load, Supervision & Test. "Config & Info" provides information about power amplifier type,
firmware revision and configuration. In addition you are able to program the power-on delay, enter power amp and
channel names, and specify functions of the GPIO port. Furthermore, programming job functions (control
functions, which are sent and received via the CAN-network) is also possible. "DSP" allows setting all DSP
parameters and saving them in presets. Recalling presets, import (read from file) and export (save to file) is
possible as well. The DSP parameters include Master EQ, Master Delay, Routing, Channel EQ, X-Over with Level
Trim and Alignment Delay as well as Dynamic functions including compressors and limiters. On the "Speaker" page
you are able to select loudspeaker files with measured frequency and phase responses and assign them to
individual power amplifier channels. This response plots can be displayed in EQ and X-Over windows to allow
optimized parameter settings. "Load" provides information about measured output voltages and currents and the
resulting calculated load. You can set the limits for the allowable impedance range and start impedance tests of a
defined frequency range. Impedance graphs can be saved as reference measurements with tolerance spread.
"Supervision & Test" provides indication of different fault types. You are able to select which failures result in a
fault messages. Activating the pilot tone function is also performed on this page. Also provided is a test tone
generator for manual testing.
12. Password Protection. Each page (layer) can be protected by an individual password. Programming different
access rights is possible as well. Open the password dialog in the Menu Configuration, Passwords.... Enter a
password for the system administrator (probably you) and add new users (New User) if needed. You have to enter
the user names, passwords and access rights. Specifying at least an administrator password and protecting the
configuration page against unwanted access is generally recommended.

Configuration Of A Remote Power Amplifier System Using a NetMax N8000 System Controller

1. Start The IRIS-Net Software. IRIS-Net starts creating a new project and opens an empty "Configuration Page"
worksheet.
2. Saving. Name your new project before saving (File Save). Creating a separate folder for each project in the
directory \IRIS-Net\Projects\ is strongly recommended. All files associated with a specific project (e.g. bitmaps)
need to be located within that particular folder. Periodically saving the project is generally good advice.
3. Creating N8000 System Controller. Clicking the right mouse button within the Worksheet opens a Configuration
Dialog. Click on Add Devices... using the left mouse button, drag a N8000 out of the device list and drop them in
the worksheet area. Specify the number of devices to be created. The devices appear together with a PC-icon on
the computer screen when hitting OK. The symbol of the PC represents the control-PC and the NCP-interface.

4. Creating Power Amps. Clicking the right mouse button within the Worksheet opens a Configuration Dialog. Click
on Add Devices... using the left mouse button, drag the required power amps out of the device list and drop them
in the worksheet area. Specify the number of devices to be created as well as the start address. The interface of
the N8000 is preselected. The amplifiers appear on the computer screen when hitting OK.
5. Network Connection. If your computer is already connected to the N8000, you are able to go ON-LINE. Check the
N8000 manual for details about Ethernet configuration. The network dialog window indicates which power amps
are connected/linked and whether the connection is okay or not. Now is the moment to decide, whether you want
to continue with the configuration in ON-LINE or OFF-LINE mode.
6. Creating Groups. Open the Configuration Dialog by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is located
over the worksheet window. Use the left mouse button and click on Add Control...and drag a Group element into
the worksheet. Right clicking on the Group icon followed by a click on Properties opens the group properties
dialog. Now, you are able to make the desired settings. It is also here, that you can specify which panel opens by
double-clicking the group icon. Creating groups is always recommended, when several power amps or power amp
channels are to be controlled or configured simultaneously. Typical examples are:
– System Group: Switching On / Off, Change Presets, Master EQ
– HF / LF Groups: Uniform configuration for X-Over and speaker system equalization
– Left / Right Groups: Common operation features of the PA system (left / right)
7. Loading Preset Data Into Groups. While being in the Group Properties dialog you can specify that double-clicking
the group icon automatically opens the Setup & Control window. The IMPORT PRESET and EXPORT PRESET soft
keys are located on the DSP FLOW DIAGRAM page under the DSP tab. Clicking IMPORT PRESET opens a selection
box that allows choosing from the Preset files. Selecting and opening a file transmits its stored parameters to all
power amps associated with that group. Afterward, you need to save these setting in a free User Memory
(U02...U08).
8. Setting Group Parameters. Opening the Setup & Control window by double-clicking a group icon lets you use the
DSP Dialogs to set all parameters of all power amps within one group at the same time. This ensures that all
parameter values of all devices within a group are identical.
9. Creating Additional Pages. Open the Configuration Dialog by clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is
located over the worksheet window. Use the left mouse button and click on Add Layer. This creates a new page
(layer). Now, you have to name it (e.g. Control Page). IRIS-Net allows the use of up to 32 layers.
10. Designing User Control Panels. The IRIS-Net software allows the creation of various control panels, which can be
customized to suit the needs of a project and the needs of the users. Freely programmable control elements,
bitmaps, text boxes and scripts are provided for you to do so. Selecting Add Control in the Configuration Dialog
(right click on the worksheet) opens a list of control elements. Drag the needed elements into the worksheet area
and place them as desired. To select and place bitmaps and text boxes, follow the same procedure accordingly
(Add Bitmap..., Add Textbox...). In case you need several similar control groups, start with creating one group.
Once you are finished with that particular group, select the entire group by dragging a highlight box around it and
Copy/Paste it. Alternatively you can save the complete group as a User Control (Save User Control menu
command) and reuse the User Control in various other projects.
11. Programming User Control Panels. Control elements of control panels can be used to control or to indicate various
power amp parameters. A click with the right mouse button onto the control element opens the corresponding
configuration dialog. Choose Administrate Connections and select the desired connection for the control element
(power amps, groups, other control elements) from the connections list. Select Modify Properties for setting/
modifying the control element’s properties. Click in the line on the right next to function and select one or several
parameters to be controlled from the parameter listing. If needed, set additional control element properties
accordingly. Afterwards, make sure to test the control element’s functions.
12. Programming Power Amplifier Parameters. A double click on a power amplifier icon opens the Amplifier Control
Panel. The Amplifier Control Panel allows naming power amps and channels, switching power amps on / off,
setting level controls and mutes, and assigning and monitoring input or output signals to the monitor bus. Click on
the SET button to open the Setup & Control Window. This window includes five different pages: Config & Info,

DSP, Speaker, Load, Supervision & Test. "Config & Info" provides information about power amplifier type,
firmware revision and configuration. In addition you are able to program the power-on delay, enter power amp and
channel names, and specify functions of the GPIO port. Furthermore, programming job functions (control
functions, which are sent and received via the CAN-network) is also possible. "DSP" allows setting all DSP
parameters and saving them in presets. Recalling presets, import (read from file) and export (save to file) is
possible as well. The DSP parameters include Master EQ, Master Delay, Routing, Channel EQ, X-Over with Level
Trim and Alignment Delay as well as Dynamic functions including compressors and limiters. On the "Speaker" page
you are able to select loudspeaker files with measured frequency and phase responses and assign them to
individual power amplifier channels. This response plots can be displayed in EQ and X-Over windows to allow
optimized parameter settings. "Load" provides information about measured output voltages and currents and the
resulting calculated load. You can set the limits for the allowable impedance range and start impedance tests of a
defined frequency range. Impedance graphs can be saved as reference measurements with tolerance spread.
"Supervision & Test" provides indication of different fault types. You are able to select which failures result in a
fault messages. Activating the pilot tone function is also performed on this page. Also provided is a test tone
generator for manual testing.
13. Password Protection. Each page (layer) can be protected by an individual password. Programming different
access rights is possible as well. Open the password dialog in the Menu Configuration, Passwords.... Enter a
password for the system administrator (probably you) and add new users (New User) if needed. You have to enter
the user names, passwords and access rights. Specifying at least an administrator password and protecting the
configuration page against unwanted access is generally recommended.
How to edit an existing project?

This paragraph explains how to edit a project that already exists. Due to the fact that IRIS-Net provides the possibility
for different users to have different access permissions assigned within a single project, editing options might be
highly restricted by the Administrator.
1. Start the IRIS-Net program. IRIS-Net starts, creates a new project and opens a new worksheet named "Layer 1".
2. Open an already existing project. Select File > Open. The Open dialog box appears. Select the desired project
directory and then the according project file (extension .ds) and click on the Open button.
3. Enter the password (optional). The Login dialog box appears automatically if the project that you are about to
open is password protected. Enter the Administrator user's password in the Enter Password: text field.
4. Edit the project. Now you are able to edit the project, i.e. change devices, controls and displays/indicators of the
current project. Besides changing parameters and configurations, you can also add new or remove elements. Save
the project (optional). If you have altered the project and want to save the changes, select File > Save to save the
project under the same name. In case you want to save the project under a new name, select File > Save As... and
enter a new file name.
Going On-Line
IRIS-Net allows working off-line or on-line. The two modes differ from each other in the way of selecting executable
operations. Upon opening, the IRIS-Net application is automatically in offline mode. This mode allows the creation and
editing of a project. The dialog that appears when pressing the "On-line" button in the "Button Bar" differs, depending
on the interfaces used in the project. The Ethernet On-line Dialog appears fro each Ethernet interface used in the
project. The CAN On-line Dialog is displayed for each CAN interface that is used.

Ethernet On-line Dialog

Element Description
Name of the device. The checkbox in front of the name of a device

allows selecting the unit as a connecting device. A connection will
be established only with selected devices.
The IP address of the device in IRIS-Net. Connection fails, if the IP

address specified in IRIS-Net differs from the actual IP address of
the unit.
Indicates the current connection status of the device.
Read All from Selected Devices Reads all settings of connected device and transfers them to IRIS-
Net.
Load Amplifier Presets Additionally reads the presets of all connected Remote Amplifiers.
Send All to Selected Devices Writes the DSP configuration and all settings into memory of
connected devices.
Save Amplifier Presets Additionally writes the presets of all Remote Amplifiers.
RCM-24: Save Current DSP Settings to Reserved Additionally writes the current DSP settings into the User Memory
User Memory U01 U01 of all power amplifiers with RCM-24 Remote Control Module
installed.
Connect only (data would not be synchronized) No synchronization; i.e. data (DSP configuration, settings, presets)
is not transferred to the devices nor read from the devices.

CAN On-line Dialog
Element Description
Name of the Remote Amplifier.
Indicates the current connection status of the device.
Name of the PC-to-Remote Amplifier interface.
Reads all settings and presets of the Remote Amplifier(s).
Writes all settings and presets into memory of the Remote Amplifier(s).
Additionally writes the current DSP settings into the User Memory U01 of all
Remote Amplifiers with RCM-24 Remote Control Module installed.
Project Password Protection

The "Password Database" Window allows creating new user accounts. It is possible to grant or to deny a user access to
specific layers within a project.

Element Description
A project's password protection can be activated or deactivated.
If a user has a "blank" password, on opening, the project is automatically loaded with his
access rights.
Username.
The user's password. This column is only visible when the administrator account is being
used.
The layers that can be accessed by the user.
Creates a new user account and adds it to the List of Users.
Deletes the user(s) that have been selected/marked in the List of Users.
This field allows entering the user's name.

CAUTION: A user name may not contain a","(comma).
This field allows entering a password for the user.

CAUTION: A user name may not contain a","(comma).

This field allows entering the numbers that correspond to the layers which are accessible for
the user. Several layers have to be separated by commas. Using hyphens for separation
indicates that the layers are interrelated.
Opens the "Layers" Window which allows selecting those layers that are accessible for a
user.
Keeps the changes that have been made and closes the window.
Discards the changes that have been made and closes the window.

The Layers dialog allows selecting the layers that are accessible for the selected user.

IRIS-Net Objects
Object List
The Object List provides access to all necessary elements for creating and editing IRIS-Net projects. By default IRIS-Net
opens with the Object Bar being located on the left-hand side of the worksheet. However, placing the Object Bar at any
position within the IRIS-Net worksheet is possible as well. Displaying or hiding the Object Bar is possible via View
menu.
Object Bar Categories
Category Description
The Devices category lists IRIS-Net devices, which can be included in the worksheet via drag
and drop.
The Interfaces category lists all ports and interfaces which IRIS-Net supports. You can drag
and drop Interfaces into the worksheet and afterwards establish connections with existing
Devices. Some Interfaces are automatically created and assigned.
The Controls category lists all available controls.
The User Controls category lists pre-defined control panels that allow easy creation of
project and client-specific user and display panels. Creating custom User Controls and
adding them to the list is possible as well.
This category lists custom-designed and pre-defined Bitmaps, which the user can select and
include in an IRIS-Net project.
Select one of the Textboxes listed in this category to place a text message in the IRIS-Net
worksheet. The dialog box for entering the text opens automatically.

Object List categories can also be accessed from the Configuration menu or the Configuration Dialog Box (click right
mouse button in the worksheet) and be displayed in an individual window. For detailed explanation of elements and
their utilization, please refer to the according chapters.
Adding Devices
Devices are units and components, which can be configured, controlled and monitored within IRIS-Net. Examples are:
Remote Amps, signal processors, speaker controllers, corresponding modules and peripheral devices. The list of
devices that IRIS-Net supports expands constantly.
All currently available IRIS-Net Devices can be accessed from the Objects Bar (listed under the category Devices) or
from the separate Devices window, which opens after clicking on the item Add Device. Add Device is available from the
IRIS-Net Configuration menu or from the contextual menu within the IRIS-Net worksheet.
The following illustration shows the Objects Bar with the Devices listing being open. The devices are categorized in
groups to provide a better overview. Opening and closing the group lists is possible by clicking on the arrow icon at the
right. The contents of the devices list depends on the actually installed IRIS-Net version and on the devices that are
actually available, i.e. it can differ from the lists shown.


To add devices to an IRIS-Net project, first select the desired device in the Object Bar (or from the Devices window)
and then drag and drop it into the worksheet. A dialog box opens, which lets you specify device-related settings such
as amount of desired devices, address range, and interfaces. The illustration shows how to add a P3000RL power amp
to an IRIS-Net project. The following table lists the possible settings that are available in the Amplifier Dialog.
Element Description
If an appropriate interface (between PC and device) already exists in the IRIS-

Net project, you can select that interface from the drop-down field.
Select an interface from the drop-down field, to automatically include it in the

IRIS-Net project.

Specify the amount of units of the selected type.
The CAN-Bus address of the selected device. If more than a single device is to
be added to the project, addresses are assigned in ascending order.

The dialog box closes upon hitting the OK button and the previously specified amount of devices appears in the IRIS-
Net worksheet. Devices can be selected, dragged around and repositioned at will. Double clicking on a device opens
the corresponding configuration dialog box. For further detail, please refer to the according chapters.
Adding Interfaces
Interfaces serve as gateways between the PC that runs the IRIS-Net application and devices that can be configured,
controlled and monitored from within IRIS-Net, e.g. interfaces between PCs and a CAN-Bus.
Interfaces that are supported by IRIS-Net are listed under the Interfaces category in the Objects Bar and in the
separate Interfaces window. This window opens when you choose Add Interface from the IRIS-Net Configuration menu
or from the contextual menu within the IRIS-Net worksheet. To include an interface in an IRIS-Net project you just have
to select the desired interface in the Interfaces list of the Objects List (or in the Interfaces window) and drag & drop it
over into the worksheet. Newly added interfaces are by default not connected to any device. To assign devices to an
interface, select Administrate Connections form the contextual menu of a device and select the desired interface.
The following illustration shows the Objects List with the Interfaces list being open. The listed interfaces are divided
into groups to provide a better overview. Opening and closing the group lists is possible through clicking on the arrow
icon in the top right corner. The content of the interfaces list depends on the actually installed IRIS-Net version, i.e. it
may differ from the list as shown in the following illustration.
Element Description
PCAN USB Interface (UCC1) between USB port of a PC and CAN bus.
PCAN PCI PCI board serves as interface between PC and CAN bus.
PCAN PCMCIA PCMCIA card serves as interface between PC and CAN bus.
Adding Controls
IRIS-Net Controls are located in the Objects List under the Controls category and in the separate Controls window. The
window opens when you choose Add Control from the IRIS-Net Configuration menu from the contextual menu within
the IRIS-Net worksheet. Several different controls like buttons, switches, displays, Window Controls, Panels, groups,
etc. are available. The listed controls are divided into groups to provide a better overview. Opening and closing the
group lists is possible through clicking on the arrow icon in the top right corner. Using drag & drop you can include
controls in the IRIS-Net worksheet to design a suitable user and or indicator panel for your project. An example of how
to configure a control is provided below.
The following illustration shows the Objects List with the Controls list being open. The content of the controls list
depends on the actually installed IRIS-Net version and on the devices that are currently available, i.e. it may differ from
the list as shown in the following illustration. The table also provides a short description for each control.


Button Controls
Element Name Description
Push Button Pushbutton for executing a function or for opening an IRIS-Net dialog box
Radio Button Several pushbuttons that trigger each other, e.g. for switching or changing
functions or parameters
Switch Button Switch button for switching between two states, e.g. On/Off
Rocker Switch Rocker switch for switching between two states, e.g. On/Off

Parameter Controls
Combo Box Windows Combo Box for selecting parameters or functions from a list
Edit Edit field for entering and displaying values or text, e.g. names
Fader Fader for setting parameter values
Bar Graph Bar graph display horizontal for graphical indication of parameter values, e.g.
operational states
Knob Knob for setting parameter values
Mini Edit Label block for displaying names in signal flow diagrams

Mini Routing Routing block for setting the output routing in signal flow diagrams
Spin Edit Windows Spin Edit for entering values via Up/Down selection buttons or direct
editing

Display Controls
Display Value Display field for displaying values or text, e.g. names
LED LED indicator for signaling operational states or errors
Meter Bar graph display vertical for graphical indication of parameter values, e.g. meter
instruments
Scale Scale for labeling vertical bar graph indicators
Image List Image List for switching between different images

Advanced Controls
MasterEQ PEQ user panel for a single or a group of Master EQs

ChannelEQ PEQ user panel for a single or a group of Channel EQs
Mini Delay Delay block for displaying delay settings
Mini Dynamics Dynamic block for displaying settings of dynamic

processors
Mini MasterEQ Master EQ Block for displaying Equalizer settings
Mini Channel EQ Block for displaying Equalizer settings

ChannelEQ
Mini XOver X-Over Block for displaying Frequency Crossover settings
XOver X-Over user panel for a single or a group of Frequency

Crossover blocks

Special Controls
Group Group for grouping several similar components, e.g. devices, channels, etc.
Dante Dante Control for a DM-1 Dante Modul (e.g. of a N8000) and RCM-28 remote
Control amplifiers.
Possible connections:
TG-5.Dante.ChA, TG-5.Dante.ChB, TG-7.Dante.ChA, TG-7.Dante.ChB,
H2500.Dante.ChA, H2500.Dante.ChB, H5000.Dante.ChA, H5000.Dante.ChB,
N8000.DSP.DanteIn_x.Chy, P64.DSP.DanteIn_x.Chy

How to configure a Control
For using a Control it must be configured with one or more parameters. A parameter always consists of two
components, a "Function" and a "Connection". If one of the two components is missing, the Control will not work. In
this example a Switch button shall be used to simultaneously switch several amps of a project on or off.
1. Drag and drop a Switch button from the list into the IRIS-Net worksheet.
2. Click with the right mouse button on the Switch button and select Modify Properties from the switch button’s
contextual menu. The Switch Button Class window appears.
3. Edit the button’s appearance and labeling in the Switch Button Class window.
4. Click on the Modify Functions / Connections button. The Modify Functions & Connections window appears.
5. Enter power in the Filter text field (using a filter is optional). Only objects that include the parameter power are
being displayed in the functions list, which is shown in the left part of the window. The functions are grouped by
devices used in the project. Within the devices the functions a grouped for comfortable browsing. Grouping within
a device can be deactivated via the entry "Function Structure" in the groups context menu.
6. Click at the symbol "+" in front of one amplifier in order to see the list of functions.
7. Select Power from the functions of the amplifier (see picture below).
8. All amps that are included in the current project are being displayed in the Objects list, which is shown in the right
part of the window.

9. Select all desired amps in the Objects list and drag them over into the Connections field of the Switch Button.
Class window
10. Close the Modify Functions & Connections and Switch Button Class windows.
This completes the configuration of the switch button. It can now be used to switch the selected amps on or off.
Adding User Controls

User Controls are links between a single or several Control Elements and a single or several Bitmaps. In addition to
using the User Controls that are included in the IRIS-Net package you can also create custom User Controls and save
them to disc. IRIS-Net’s preconfigured User Controls are to be found in the Objects Bar category User Controls and in
the separate User Controls window. This window opens when you choose Add User Control from the IRIS-Net
Configuration menu or from the contextual menu within the IRIS-Net worksheet. Using Drag & Drop you can select User
Controls from the list and include them in the IRIS-Net worksheet to create an adequate user and display panel. An
example of how to configure a User Control is provided below.
The User Controls listing is divided into several categories. When creating a new User Control the category of the User
Control can be selected in the Save User Control dialog.



The Locally Used category holds all User Controls, which are used in the current project. The Globally Available
category holds all User Controls that are stored in the IRIS-Net User Controls folder. The content of the list depends on
the actually installed IRIS-Net version and on the devices that are currently available, i.e. it may differ from the list as
shown in the following illustration. The table provides a short description for each User Control.

RCM-24 User Controls
Following sets of connections are used in following table:
– RCM-24-Amp: P900RL,P1200RL,P3000RL,P900RT,P1200RT
– RCM-24-Amp-Channel: P900RL.ChA, P900RL.ChB, P1200RL.ChA, P1200RL.ChB, P3000RL.ChA, P3000RL.ChB,
P900RT.ChA, P900RT.ChB, P1200RT.ChA, P1200RT.ChB
Picture Name Description
Amp_MUTE+Supervision The MUTE A and MUTE B buttons activate ChA.Mute or

ChB.Mute. In the text field you can set the amp’s CAN-
address. In Standby or Protection mode the LED lights red.
Otherwise, it lights green. Possible Connections: RCM-24-
Amp.
Amp_MUTE_Panel The MUTE A and MUTE B buttons activate ChA.Mute or

ChB.Mute. A click on the amp itself opens the Amplifier
Control Panel. Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp.
Amp_MUTE_Panel_02 The MUTE A and MUTE B buttons activate ChA.Mute or

ChB.Mute.
Amp_Supervision_01 In Standby or Protection mode the LEDs light red. Otherwise,

they light green. LEDs can be labeled. Possible Connections:
RCM-24-Amp.
Amp_Supervision_02 In Standby or Protection mode the LEDs light red. Otherwise,

they light green. LEDs can be labeled. Use the POWER button
to switch the amp on or off. Possible Connections: RCM-24-
Amp.

Group_LEDs_01 The three LEDs on the top indicate clipping (CLIP) or whether
the limiter (LIMIT) or the compressor (COMP) of the DSP is
active. The two LEDs on the bottom indicate that the unit
entered Protection (PROT) mode or that the amp’s limiter
(LIMIT) has been activated. Possible Connections: RCM-24-
Amp.
Labelled_LED_01 The LED lights red at the occurrence of the load at the
amplifier's output going outside the range set by the minimum
and maximum impedance values (a open or shorted line) or
when the unit is in Standby or Protection mode. Otherwise,
the LED is black. Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp.
Labelled_LED_03 The LED lights red at the occurrence of the load at the
amplifier's output going outside the range set by the minimum
and maximum impedance values (a open or shorted line) or
when the unit is in Standby, Protection or MUTE mode.
Otherwise, the LED lights green. Possible Connections:
RCM-24-Amp.
Master_EQ_Panel_01 Equalizer panel with label field for the RCM-26 Remote Amp.
Use the Master EQ button to open the Master EQ dialog.
Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp-Channel.
Master_EQ_Panel_02 Equalizer panel with label field for the RCM-26 Remote Amp.
Use the Master EQ button to open the Master EQ dialog.
Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp-Channel.
Memory_Panel_01 Load user memory presets 2...8 or save to user memory

presets 3...8. Overwriting user memory preset 2 is not
possible. Number and name of the currently active user
memory is being indicated. Possible Connections: RCM-24-
Amp.
Memory_Panel_02 Load user memory presets 2...8 or save to user memory 2...8.
Number and name of the currently active user memory is
being indicated. Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp.

ShelvingEQ_Freq_Gain_02 Equalizer panel with label field for the RCM-24 Remote Amp.
Pre-set for band 5 of the channel equalizer. Equalizer type,
frequency, gain and BYPASS can be set. Possible
Connections: RCM- 24-Amp.
System_Supervision_01 The amplifier LED lights red when in Standby or Protection

mode. Otherwise, the LED lights green. The speaker LED
lights red at the occurrence of the load at the amplifier's
output going outside the range set by the minimum and
maximum impedance values (a open or shorted line).
Otherwise, the LED lights green. Possible Connections:
RCM-24-Amp.

– RCM-26-Amp: TG-5, TG-7, H2500, H5000
– RCM-26-Amp-Channel: TG-5.ChA, TG-5.ChB, TG-7.ChA, TG-7.ChB, H2500.ChA, H2500.ChB, H5000.ChA, H5000.ChB
PowerH_Panel_01 In Online mode the LED light green. Otherwise, the LED
light red. The LEDs below the CAN address field light
green / yellow when the amplifiers is Power / Standby
mode. ON button for switching the amp's power on or
off. Possible Connections: RCM-26-Amp.
PowerH_Panel_02 In Online mode the LED light green. Otherwise, the LED
light red. The LEDs below the CAN address field light
green / yellow when the amplifiers is Power / Standby
mode. ON button for switching the amp's power on or
off. Additionally two LEDs for VU data of amplifier
inputs. Possible Connections: RCM-26-Amp.
RCM-26_Group_Panel_0 These three LEDs indicate clipping (CLIP) or whether

1 the limiter (LIMIT) or the compressor (COMP) of the
DSP is active. Fader and MUTE buttons for controlling
and LED bar graph meter for monitoring the amp’s
output channel. Clicking onto the ”0” marking resets the
fader to 0 dB. Possible Connections: RCM-26-Amp-
Channel.

RCM-26_Master_EQ_Pa Equalizer panel with label field for the RCM-26 Remote
nel_01 Amp. Use the Master EQ button to open the Master EQ
dialog. Possible Connections: RCM-26-Amp- Channel.
RCM-26_Master_Panel_ Fader and MUTE button for controlling the amplifier.

01 Clicking onto the ”0” marking resets the fader to 0 dB.
RCM-26_Master_Panel_ Fader and MUTE button for controlling the amplifier.

02
RCM-26_Memory_Displa Number and name of the currently active factory/user/

y_01 owner memory is being indicated. Possible Connections:
RCM-26-Amp.
RCM-26_Memory_Panel Load user memory presets 1...6 or save to user memory

_01 1...6. Number and name of the currently active user
memory is being indicated. Possible Connections:
RCM-26-Amp.

_02 1...6. User memory 1 is protected and can not be
overwritten. Number and name of the currently active
user memory is being indicated. Possible Connections:
RCM-26-Amp.


_04 1...6. Number and name of the currently active user
memory is being indicated. Editing preset title is
possible. Possible Connections: RCM-26-Amp.
RCM-26_Supervision_Fl CAN address and name of amplifier is indicated. The

ags_01 Temp LED lights red when temperature of the the

amplifier is to high. Otherwise, the LED lights green. The
Prot A/B LED lights red when amp channel A or channel
B is in Protection mode. Otherwise, the LED lights
green. The A/B LoZ LED lights red at the occurrence of
the load at the amplifier's output is to low (a shorted
line). Otherwise, the LED lights green. The A/B hiZ LED
lights red at the occurrence of the load at the amplifier's
output is to high (a open line). Otherwise, the LED lights
green. The white arrow buttons opens the Supervision &
Test or Load dialog of the amplifier. Possible
Connections: RCM-26-Amp.

– RCM-28-Amp: TG-5, TG-7, H2500, H5000
RCM-28_Group_Panel_01 These three LEDs indicate clipping

(CLIP) or whether the peak limiter
(LIM. PEAK) or the TEMP limiter (LIM.
TEMP) of the DSP is active. Fader and
MUTE buttons for controlling and LED
bar graph meter for monitoring the
amp’s output channel. Clicking onto
the ”0” marking resets the fader to 0
dB. Possible Connections: RCM-28-
Amp-Channel.
RCM-28_Memory_Display_01 Number and name of the currently

active factory/user/owner memory is
being indicated. Possible

RCM-28_Memory_Panel_01 Load user memory presets 1...10 or

save to user memory 1...10. Number
and name of the currently active user
memory is being indicated. Possible
RCM-28_Memory_Panel_02, 03 and 04 Load user memory presets 1...10 (or

11..20 or 21..30) or save to user
memory 1...10 (or 11..20 or 21..30).
Possible Connections: RCM-28-Amp.

RCM General User Controls
– RCM-24-Amp: P900RL,P1200RL,P3000RL,P900RT,P1200RT
– RCM-24-Amp-Channel: P900RL.ChA, P900RL.ChB, P1200RL.ChA, P1200RL.ChB, P3000RL.ChA, P3000RL.ChB,
P900RT.ChA, P900RT.ChB, P1200RT.ChA, P1200RT.ChB
– RCM-26-Amp: TG-5, TG-7, H2500, H5000
Delay_Panel_01 Delay value and bypass for the channel delay (X-Over) of a
remote amp. Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp-Channel,
RCM-26-Amp-Channel
Delay_Panel_02 Delay value and bypass for the master delay of a remote amp.
Possible Connections: RCM- 24-Amp-Channel, RCM-26-Amp-
Channel

Delay_Panel_03 Delay value and bypass for the master delay of a remote amp.
Possible Connections: RCM- 24-Amp-Channel, RCM-26-Amp-
Channel
Group_Panel_01 These three LEDs indicate clipping (CLIP) or whether the limiter
(LIMIT) or the compressor (COMP) of the DSP is active. Fader
and MUTE buttons for controlling and LED bar graph meter for
monitoring the amp’s output levels (maximum of both
channels). Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp, RCM-26-Amp
Group_Panel_02 These two LEDs indicate whether the limiter (LIMIT) or the
compressor (COMP) of the DSP has been activated. Fader and
MUTE button for controlling the amplifier. The LED bar graph
meter is for monitoring the amp’s output levels (maximum of
both channels). Clicking onto the ”0” marking resets the fader
to 0 dB. Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp, RCM-26- Amp
Group_Panel_03 Indicates the output levels of the two channels. Fader and MUTE
button for controlling the amplifier. Possible Connections:
RCM-24-Amp, RCM-26-Amp

Group_Panel_GainTrim_ These three LEDs indicate clipping (CLIP) or whether the limiter
01 (LIMIT) or the compressor (COMP) of the DSP is active. Fader
and MUTE button for controlling the amplifier. The LED bar
graph meter is for monitoring the amp’s output levels (maximum
of both channels). Clicking onto the ”0” marking resets the
fader to 0 dB. Possible Connections: RCM-24- Amp, RCM-26-
Amp
Group_POWER_01 Power-on/off a group of amps with safety dialog when powering

off. Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp, RCM-26-Amp
Labelled_MUTE_02 MUTE button with label field. Possible Connections: RCM-24-

Amp-Channel, RCM-26-Amp- Channel, N8000.DSP.AnalogIn.ChX,
N8000.DSP.AnalogMicIn.ChX, N8000.DSP.Analog Out. ChX,
N8000.DSP.AutoMixer.ChInX, N8000.DSP.AutoMixer.ChOutX,
N8000.DSP.CobraNetIn.ChX, N8000.DSP.CobraNetOut.ChX,
N8000.DSP.DigitalIn.ChX, N8000.DSP.LSpkBlock.ChX,
N8000.DSP.Matrix.InputX, N8000.DSP.Matrix.OutputX,
N8000.DSP.MatrixRouter.InputX,
N8000.DSP.MatrixRouter.OutputX, N8000.DSP.Mixer.ChInX,
N8000.DSP.Mixer.ChOutX, N8000.DSP.PriorityMatrix.InputX,
N8000.DSP.PriorityMatrix.OutputX, N8000.DSP.XOver.ChX
Labelled_POWER_01 POWER button with label field. Possible Connections: RCM-24-

Amp, RCM-26-Amp
Master_Delay_02 Delay control for the RCM-24 Remote Amp with label field. The
delay interval can be entered, BYPASS button and indication
(graphical and numerical) of the set delay. Possible
Connections: RCM-24-Amp-Channel, RCM-26-Amp-Channel

Master_Panel_01 Switches the amp’s power on or off with safety dialog when
powering off. Fader and MUTE button for controlling the
amplifier. Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp, RCM-26-Amp
Master_Panel_02 Switches the amp’s power on or off with safety dialog when
powering off. Fader and MUTE button for controlling the
amplifier. Clicking onto the „0“ marking resets the fader to 0 dB.
Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp, RCM-26-Amp
Rack_Panel_3Hu_Label_ Rack panel with MUTE button and label field. Possible
MUTE Connections: RCM-24-Amp, RCM- 26-Amp
Sb121_State_01 The LED in the center of the loudspeaker symbol lights red at
the occurrence of the load at the amplifier's output going
outside the range set by the minimum and maximum impedance
values (a open or shorted line) or when the unit is in Protection
or MUTE mode. Otherwise, the LED is invisible. Possible
Connections: RCM-24-Amp-Channel, RCM-26- Amp-Channel
Sx300_State_01 The LEDs in the loudspeaker symbol light red at the occurrence
of the load at the amplifier's output going outside the range set
by the minimum and maximum impedance values (a open or
shorted line) or when the unit is in Protection or MUTE mode.
Otherwise, the LED is invisible. Possible Connections: RCM-24-
Amp-Channel, RCM-26-Amp-Channel

System_POWER_MUTE_ Power-on/off and mute a single or a group of amps. Possible

01 Connections: RCM-24-Amp, RCM-26-Amp
System_Supervision_02 The amplifier LED lights red when at least one of the errors
selected in the dialog Supervision & Test occurs. Otherwise, the
LED lights green. The speaker LED lights red at the occurrence
of the load at the amplifier's output going outside the range set
by the minimum and maximum impedance values (a open or
shorted line). Otherwise, the LED lights green. Possible
Connections: RCM-24-Amp, RCM-26-Amp
Testgenerator_01 Test tone generator panel with label field for the Remote
Amplifier. Possible Connections: RCM-24-Amp, RCM-26-Amp

Matrix User Controls
Dante_Panel_ Selection of Dante device and Dante channel, MUTE button and editable channel
01 description. Indication of LINK status, Signal and 0 dB. Possible Connections:
N8000.DSP.DanteIn.ChX

Level_Panel_ Fader and MUTE button for controlling and LED bar graph meter for monitoring a input/
01 output level. Possible Connections: N8000.DSP.AnalogIn.ChX,
N8000.DSP.AnalogMicIn.ChX, N8000.DSP.AnalogOut.ChX, N8000.DSP.AutoMixer.ChInX,
N8000.DSP.AutoMixer.ChOutX, N8000.DSP.DigitalIn.ChX
Level_Panel_ Fader, MUTE button and INV button for controlling and LED bar graph meter for
02 monitoring a input/output level. Possible Connections: N8000.DSP.AnalogIn.ChX,
N8000.DSP.AnalogMicIn.ChX, N8000.DSP.AnalogOut.ChX, N8000.DSP.AutoMixer.ChInX,
N8000.DSP.AutoMixer.ChOutX, N8000.DSP.DigitalIn.ChX
Level_Panel_ Fader, MUTE button and INV button for controlling and LED bar graph meter for
03 monitoring a microphone input level. Additionally Gain, MIC/LINE button and Phantom
Power button. Possible Connection: N8000.DSP.AnalogMicIn.ChX
Interface User Controls
CAN_Interface_Sta Shows the momentary state of the CAN bus, the amount of devices
te_01 connected to the bus and the current transfer rate. Possible
Connections: UCC1
CAN_Interface_Sta Shows the momentary state of the CAN bus and the current transfer
te_02 rate. Use the CAN button to open the CAN Interface dialog. Possible
Connections: UCC1

Miscellaneous User Controls
Labelled_SPEAKER General loudspeaker with label. Possible Connections: - none -

_01

EOL User Controls
EOL_LED_Panel_0 The Short LED lights red if the voltage at the amplifier‘s output 1, 2, 3 or 4
1 is below the EOL VOLTAGE threshold set in the Supervision & Test tab of
the amplifier. Otherwise, the LED lights green.
The Open LED lights red if the current at the amplifier‘s output 1, 2, 3 or 4
is below the EOL CURRENT threshold set in the Supervision & Test tab of
The Zmin LED lights red at the occurrence of the load at the amplifier's
output 1, 2, 3 or 4 is to low (below the LOW THRESH set in the
Supervision & Test tab of the amplifier). Otherwise, the LED lights green.
The Zmax LED lights red at the occurrence of the load at the amplifier's
output 1, 2, 3 or 4 is to high (above the HIGH THRESH set in the
Possible Connections: CPS4.5, CPS4.10, CPS8.5, DSA 8405, DSA 8410,
DSA 8805
EOL_LED_Panel_0 The Short LED lights red if the voltage at the amplifier‘s output 5, 6, 7 or 8
2 is below the EOL VOLTAGE threshold set in the Supervision & Test tab of
The Open LED lights red if the current at the amplifier‘s output 5, 6, 7 or 8
is below the EOL CURRENT threshold set in the Supervision & Test tab of
The Zmin LED lights red at the occurrence of the load at the amplifier's
output 5, 6, 7 or 8 is to low (below the LOW THRESH set in the
The Zmax LED lights red at the occurrence of the load at the amplifier's
output 5, 6, 7 or 8 is to high (above the HIGH THRESH set in the
Possible Connections: CPS8.5, 8805
EOL_U_I_Load_Pa Indicates the current voltage, current and load at the amplifier‘s output 1,
nel_01 2, 3 or 4. Possible Connections: CPS4.5, CPS4.10, CPS8.5, DSA 8405, DSA
8410, DSA 8805
EOL_U_I_Load_Pa Indicates the current voltage, current and load at the amplifier‘s output 5,
nel_02 6, 7 or 8. Possible Connections: CPS8.5, DSA 8805


How to configure a User Control
The example shows how an PowerH_Panel_01 is used to control an amplifier.
1. Use Drag & Drop to include an PowerH_Panel_01_1 in the IRIS-Net worksheet.
2. Click with the right mouse button on the Panel select Administrate Connection from the contextual menu. The
“Connections for PowerH_Panel_01_1” window appears.
3. Check the Devices checkbox, in this case you could uncheck all other checkboxes. You can use the Filter in the
Connections dialog to filter the list of available objects.
4. Select the desired amplifier from the list and drag it over into the Connections field within the Panel Class
window.
5. Close the “Connections for PowerH_Panel_01_1” window.

6. You can edit the appearance of the User Control (e.g. setting a background color or transparency) in the Panel
Class windows.
This completes the configuration of the Amp_MUTE_Panel. It is now ready for use.

Adding Graphics
IRIS-Net graphics are available from the Bitmaps category in the Objects List and from the separate Bitmaps window.
The window opens when selecting the Add Bitmap command in the IRIS-Net Configuration menu or by using the
contextual menu in the IRIS-Net worksheet. The list is divided into two categories. The category Locally Used lists all
Bitmaps that are being utilized in the project that is currently open. The category Globally Available lists all Bitmaps,
which are stored in the IRIS-Net Bitmaps Folder.
Using custom designed bitmap graphics (in file format bmp, jpg or png) within IRIS-Net projects along with the ones
that come with the software package is possible. The color RGB=255,0,255 (HTML=ff00ff) is reserved for defining
areas within bitmap graphics that appear transparent within IRIS-Net (e.g. Rack_15HU). You can copy new Bitmaps into
IRISNet’s Bitmaps Folder or you can add a new graphic to the IRIS-Net worksheet using Drag & Drop. Just select the
desired file in the Windows Explorer and drag it over into the worksheet.

Picture Name
CDR1000
CD_Player
HP Procurve Switch 2626
Panel_grey_166x105

Rack_15HU
Rack_Panel_1HU
view_greybkgnd

Adding Textboxes
Textboxes, which can be used to create text labels in an IRIS-Net project, are to be found under the Objects Bar
category Textboxes and in the separate Textboxes window. This window opens when you choose Add Textboxes from
the IRISNet Configuration menu or from the contextual menu within the IRIS-Net worksheet. The window lists a
selection of textboxes with different pre-set font sizes. To include a textbox in a project you just have to drag the box
out of the list and drop it into the IRIS-Net worksheet.
The following illustration shows the Textboxes window. The table also provides a short description for each item listed.
Element Description
MS Sans Serif, 8 Textbox using Sans Serif font size 8.

The entry Modify Properties in the contextual menu of a textbox opens the TEXTBOX Class dialog box.
Element Description
Opens the Edit Textbox window, which allows editing the text contents and appearance
of a textbox.
Indicated text.
Opens a file selection box to create a link to an external file from the textbox. Double
clicking on the textbox within the IRIS-Net-worksheet executes the previously selected
file, i.e. the operating system starts the program that is associated with the file and then
opens the selected file.

Using Groups
IRIS-Net provides Groups as special control elements. Groups are used for combining a variety of objects. Actions
applied to a group are applied to all objects of the group. An object can be included in various groups at the same time.
Function-specific groups provide a very convenient way to carry out actions that always apply to a specific group of
objects.


Symbol Dialog
Element Description
Selects the group control to be edited in the dialog.
Deletes the currently selected group.
The label displayed on the group icon in the IRIS-Net worksheet.
Selects an object class. The drop down list displays all classes with at least one object
contained in the current IRIS-Net worksheet.
All objects of the object-class currently selected in the dropdown field “class” are added
to the group.
Sets the font used for the group icon label in the IRIS-Net worksheet.

Sets the background color of the group icon in the IRIS-Net worksheet.
Selects the dialog that will be opened when the user double-clicks the group icon in the
IRIS-Net worksheet. Which dialogs are available for selection depends on the devices
used in the project. Detailed descriptions for the dialogs is provided in the help chapters
reference of the related device.
Opens the Connections dialog to add or remove objects contained in the group.
Closes the Group Class window.
Opens a window showing extended options for the group.
Connections
The “Connections for...” window is used to select the desired group members.
Objects can be selected in the lower part of the window. A single object can be selected by clicking on it with the left
mouse button. Several consecutive objects can be selected by selecting the first object then selecting the last object
while pressing the Shift key simultaneously with the mouse click. Individual objects can be toggled between selected
and deselected by pressing the Ctrl key simultaneously with the mouse click.
The contents of the list can be determined in two different ways. Either through selecting the types to be shown using
the checkboxes in the upper part of the window, or by setting object details using the “+” or the “–“ buttons.

Element Description
Allows selection of the Device object-type (devices, for example amplifiers) to be displayed in the object
list.

Allows selection of the Groups object-type (Groups) to be displayed in the object list.
Allows selection of the Interface object-type to be displayed in the object list.
Allows selection of the Controls object-type to be displayed in the object list.
The "+" key increases the amount of detail for the displayed objects, which allows adding individual
subparts or sections of an object to the group. The "-" key decreases the amount of detail.
Adds the currently selected objects to the group and closes the “Connections for...” window.
Cancels the current object selection and closes the “Connections for...” window.
Editing Object visibility

IRIS-Net offers the possibility to individually specify the visibility status of each object per layer. This option greatly
simplifies the design of projects which include layers with similar appearance. Creating an object with its visibility flag
unchecked for all layers hides the object from the entire project.
When editing the visibility of an object, please proceed as follows:
1. Highlight the object in the IRIS-Net worksheet
2. Click the right mouse button to open the context menu of the selected object.
3. Select the context menu entry “Edit Object Visibility”. The Layer Selection dialog appears.
4. In the Layer Selection dialog, select the layers on which the previously highlighted object shall be visible.
Element Description
Layer names within the project
Operation to be executed when switching to the layer (e.g. RCM24_1*ChA.

Mute=1)
Operation to be executed when leaving the layer (e.g. RCM24_1*ChA .Mute=1)
Shows all hidden objects on the current layer

How to...
Editing Project Info

The Project Info Dialog provides the user with the possibility to document and save project data in the project file.
Among other parameters it is possible to specify project name, project number, location plus additional information on
the project author. The COMMENT field provides space for a brief description of the project.
The Project Info Dialog is accessed by selecting the menu entry Info in the Main-Menu.
Software update
If a Internet connection is available, updating IRIS-Net is possible via Internet. The Software Update Dialog is accessed
by selecting the menu entry ? > Search for Updates ...


Element Description
Check for Updates.. Checks for software updates at the IRIS-Net update server.
Current Version Indicates the version of the installed IRIS-Net application.
Download Press this button to download the update or release.
Info... Press this button to see information about the update.
Show Notifications in Taskbar Check this option if notifications about software updates should be shown in the
Taskbar.
Edit Application Settings

The Settings dialog allows the user to edit attributes of IRIS-Net. Amongst others, the user can specify whether and if
so, which events shall be included in the IRIS-Net event log. The Settings dialog is accessed from the menu Edit >
Settings....

Element Description
Start with last loaded Project Specifies whether the last opened project shall be reopened when IRIS-Net is
launched.
Display Username on Login Specifies whether the user name has to be entered in addition to the
password when opening protected project files.
User Login and Logout Specifies whether user logins and logouts shall be recorded in the event log.
Going Online or Offline Specifies whether going on-line or off-line shall be recorded in the event log.
Project Change Specifies whether loading another project shall be recorded in the event log.
Application Start Specifies whether launching IRIS-Net shall be recorded in the event log.
Startup Layer for current project Specifies the layer that is shown when the project file is opened.
Active Layer after IRIS-Net Specifies the layer that is shown after the screensaver has been activated.
Screensaver
Using the SPL Calculator

The SPL Calculator provides information about the theoretical SPL resulting from given equipment and given distance
between speaker system and sound reinforcement destination. The calculations are based on the theoretically ideal
coupling of the single components. Since in practical use several other influences and parameters add to the actually
achieved SPL, the results of this computation only represent an approximation.
Selecting ”SPL Calculator” in the Tools Selecting Menu provides access to the SPL Calculator.
Element Description
This field is for entering the speaker cabinet’s average nominal SPL (see
data sheet).
Enter the power output of the amplifier in this field. Since the amp’s
actual outputted power depends on the impedance of the load connected,
the entered value has to match the load that is actually connected.
Distance between the cabinet’s grille and the aimed destination of the
sound reinforcement.
Enter the number of speaker cabinets.
Clicking this soft key starts the calculation.
This field shows the resulting SPL in dB.
Clicking onto this button closes the SPL Calculator.
Limiter Threshold Calculator

The Limiter Threshold Calculator provides information about the limiter threshold to be set for given equipment and
given loudspeaker systems data. The Limiter Threshold Calculator makes no claim to be pinpoint accurate; i.e. results
should be regarded as benchmarks.
Selecting the entry Limiter Threshold Calculator in the Tools menu provides access to the Limiter Threshold Calculator.


Element Description
Power Limit Enter the maximum power consumption of the loudspeaker cabinet used (refer
to datasheet) in this field.
Nominal Impedance Enter the impedance of the loudspeaker cabinet used (refer to datasheet) in
this field.
Amp Type Select the used type of power amplifier in this dropdown menu.
Limiter Threshold This field shows the result of the calculation in dBu. The value is also shown in
dBu.
Clicking onto this button closes the Limiter Threshold Calculator.
Using the Event Scheduler

The Event Scheduler is divided into three windows. On the Events tab you can create and edit nonrecurring as well as
periodically recurring events. The Day Programs tab allows creating lists of daily recurring events. The Holiday tab lets
you specify periods – like for example school holidays – during which an alternative Day Program shall be used instead
of the standard Day Program.
Events
This window allows creating nonrecurring as well as periodically recurring events. If an event occurs, a macro is being
executed.

Element Description
Creates a new event, which is added at the end of the event list.
Events marked in the Event list will be deleted.
Opens the Event Parameters window for editing the parameters of the selected event.
Opens the Macro Selection Dialog window. Here you are able to select the macro that will
be executed when the event occurs that has previously been selected from the event list.
Copy a single or various marked events from the event list. Copied events can be pasted
to the end of the event list.
Event name. Left-click on the name of a previously marked event to enter a new name for
this event.
Event type. Double-clicking on an event’s corresponding entry in the event list allows
changing the event type in the Event Parameters window.
Event parameter. Double-clicking on an event’s corresponding entry in the event list

allows changing the selected parameter in the Event Parameters window.
Macro to be executed in case of occurrence of the event. Double-clicking on an event’s

corresponding entry in the event list lets you select a macro in the Macro Selection Dialog
window.
Saving of modified events in the event list.

Time settings for an event are made in the Event Parameters window. It is possible to program nonrecurring as well as
periodically recurring activations of events.

Element Description
The event is scheduled to be activated only once on a specific day and

at a specific time.
The event is scheduled to be activated once a year on a specific day of

the year and at a specific time.
The event is scheduled to be monthly activated on a specific day of the

month and at a specific time.
The event is scheduled to be weekly activated on a specific weekday

and at a specific time.
The event is scheduled to be daily activated at a specific time.
The event is scheduled to be hourly activated at a specific time

(min:sec).
The event is scheduled to be activated every minute at a specific time

(seconds).
The event is scheduled to be activated on selected weekdays of each

week and at a specific time.
The Macro Selection Dialog window allows selecting the macro to be executed on the occurrence of an event.

Day Programs
This window allows creating and editing Day Programs. A Day Program represents a list of defined times throughout
the day. At each of these points in time a freely selectable macro will be executed.

Element Description
Creates a new Day Program and adds it to the Day Program list.
The Day Programs selected in the Day Program list will be deleted.
New Entry creates a new entry in the event list of the currently selected Day Program. New
events are numbered consecutively with their time being set to 12:00:00 as a standard.

Events selected in the event list of the Day Program will be deleted.
Opens the Set Time window which lets you edit the time set for the event that is currently
selected in the event list.
Opens the Macro Selection Dialog window for selecting the macro to be executed for the event
currently selected in the event list.
Copy a single or various marked events from the event list. Copied events can be pasted to the
end of the event list.
Day Program List. Selecting a Day Program displays a list of associated events which can be
edited. Left-click on the name of a previously selected Day Program to enter a new name for
this Day Program.
Event name. Left-click on the name of a previously marked event to enter a new name for this
event.
Execution time of an event. Double clicking on an event’s corresponding entry in the event list
allows setting the time in the Set Time window.
Macro to be executed on the occurrence of the event. Double-clicking on an event’s

corresponding entry in the event list lets you select a macro in the Macro Selection Dialog
window.

The Set Time window allows setting the time for an event in the Day Program.
Setting the desired time is possible either by turning the hour hand of the conventionalized clock using the mouse or
through entering the numerical value in the time field.

Holiday
This window holds a list of holidays (periods). A specific Day Program is being executed during a holiday. Specifying
different holidays offers the possibility to execute various Day Programs during particular periods within a year.
Element Description
New Holiday creates a new entry in the list of holidays. New holidays are numbered in
ascending order, whereas the current date is set as standard (once only) period of a new

holiday.
The holidays selected in the holiday list are being deleted.
Opens the Holiday Parameters window for editing the period of the holiday currently
selected in the holiday list.

Opens the Dayprog Selection Dialog window for selecting the Day Program to be
executed during the period corresponding to the holiday currently selected in the holiday
list.
Copy a single or various marked holidays from the holiday list. Copied holidays can be
pasted to the end of the holiday list.
Name of a holiday. Left-click on the name of a previously marked holiday to enter a new
name for this holiday.
Type of holiday. Double clicking on the holiday’s corresponding entry in the holiday list
allows changing the type of that specific holiday in the Holiday Parameters window.
Parameters of a holiday. Double clicking on the holiday’s corresponding entry in the

holiday list lets you change parameters in the Holiday Parameters window.
Day Program to be executed of a holiday. Double clicking on the holiday’s corresponding

entry in the holiday list allows selecting the Day Program to be executed in the Dayprog
Selection Dialog window.
Saving of modified holidays in the holiday list.
The period corresponding to a holiday can be specified in the Holiday Parameters window. A holiday always lasts a
single day or several consecutive days. A single day can be one specific date or a periodically recurring date. When
selecting several days, dates must be in consecutive order.
Element Description
The period of a holiday is set to once only for a specific day.
The period of a holiday is set to once per year for a specific day.
The period of a holiday is set to once per month for a specific

day of the month.
The period of a holiday is set to once per week for a specific

weekday.
The period of a holiday is set to a time span between two days

which need to be specified. These two days are included in the
period.


The Dayprog Selection Dialog window allows selecting the Day Program to be executed during a holiday.

Using the Macro Editor

The Macro Editor window provides access to the Macros tab (see below), Triggers tab and Conditions tab.

Macros
This window allows creating and editing macros. Macros are used to change the status of objects. Objects can be
devices (e.g. a N8000 System Controller) as well as elements in IRIS-Net (e.g. controls).


Element Description
Creates a new macro. The macro gets added to the end of the macro list.
The macros that have been selected in the macro list are deleted.
Opens the Operation window which allows selecting variables, whose value is to be
set by the macro selected in the macro list.

Opens the Object Parameter window for setting the value which the macro shall
assign to the selected variable.
Pressing this button executes the macros that have been selected in the macro list.
Copy a single or various marked macros from the macro list. Copied macros can be
pasted to the end of the macro list.
Name of the macro. Left-click on the name of a previously selected macro to enter a
new name for this macro.
The variable that is set when the macro is being executed.
The value that is assigned to the variable when the macro is being executed.
System-internal identifier of the macro

The Operation window allows selecting the variable for which the value is to be set by the macro. A variable always
consists of an object and the related function. From the window’s right section it is possible to choose the desired
variable through selecting those types of objects that are to be shown in the object list.
The window’s left section allows selecting a function that relates to the previously chosen object.


Element Description
Only functions that include the text entered here are being displayed in the
functions list, which is shown in the left part of the window.

Check if filter should be case sensitive.
Selecting a single or various object types is possible. Only objects that

comply with the selected types are shown in the list of objects, which greatly
simplifies finding the desired object quickly.
The function that has been selected in the function list is assigned to the
macro that is currently being edited.
The object that has been selected in the object list as well as the function
that has been selected in the functions list are assigned to the macro that is
currently being edited.
The object that has been selected in the object list is assigned to the macro
that is currently being edited.
Closes the Operation window and returns to the Macros window.

The Object Parameters window allows entering the value that is to be assigned to a variable.

Triggers
Triggers are used to execute macros that depend on the existence of a certain condition. When a condition occurs
(when the condition's status changes from „false“ to „true“), a Trigger can start an associated ON-macro. If a condition
is not true anymore (when the condition's status changes from "true" to "false"), a Trigger can start an associated OFF-
macro.

Element Description
Creates a new Trigger. The Trigger is added at the end of the Trigger List.
All Triggers selected in the Trigger List will be deleted.
Opens the Condition Selection Dialog Window, which lets the user assign a
condition to the Trigger that is currently selected in the Trigger List.
Opens the ON Macro Selection Dialog Window, which lets the user select the macro
that is to be executed when the status of the corresponding condition changes
from "false" to "true".
Opens the OFF Macro Selection Dialog Window, which lets the user select the macro
that is to be executed when the status of the corresponding condition changes
from "true" to "false".
Copies a single or a selection of Triggers previously marked in the Trigger List. The
copied Trigger(s) can be pasted at the end of the Trigger List.
The name of the Trigger. Left-clicking on the name of a Trigger that has previously
been selected in the Trigger List lets the user assign a new name to the Trigger.
The condition associated to the Trigger. Double-clicking on the Trigger's

corresponding entry in the Trigger List lets the user select the condition to be
assigned to the Trigger from the Condition Selection Dialog Window.
The ON-macro of the Trigger. Double-clicking on the Trigger's corresponding entry in

the Trigger List lets the user select the macro in the ON Macro Selection Dialog
Window.
The OFF-macro of the Trigger. Double-clicking on the Trigger's corresponding entry

in the Trigger List lets the user select the macro in the OFF Macro Selection Dialog
Window.

The Condition Selection Dialog Window lets the user select the condition to be associated to the Trigger.


The ON Macro Selection Dialog Window lets the user select the macro that will be executed when the status of the
condition changes from "false" to "true". Equally, the OFF Macro Selection Dialog Window lets the user select the
macro that will be executed when the status of the condition changes from "true" to "false".

Conditions

Element Description
Creates a new Condition. The Condition is added at the end of the Condition
List.
All Conditions selected in the Condition List will be deleted.
Opens the Condition Properties Window, which lets the user assign parameters
to the Condition.
Copies a single or a selection of Conditions previously marked in the Condition

List. The copied Condition(s) can be pasted at the end of the Condition List.
The name of the Condition. Left-clicking on the name of a Condition that has
previously been selected in the Condition List lets the user assign a new name
to the Condition. The magnifier symbol in front of a Condition's name signals
the current status of the Condition. A white magnifier symbol indicates that the
Condition is "false" while a green magnifier symbol indicates that the Condition
is "true".
The type of a Condition can be "is equal", "is lower" or "timespan". Double-
clicking on a Condition's corresponding entry in the Condition List lets the user
select the type for the Condition in the Condition Properties Window.
The properties of a Condition. Double-clicking on a Condition's corresponding

entry in the Condition List lets the user select the properties of a Condition in
the Condition Properties Window.
The value that the selected variable has to equal or fall below.
System internal identifier of a Condition.

The Condition Properties Window lets the user configure a Condition. The configuration determines whether a Condi‐
tion is "true" or "false". There are three different types of conditions that constitute a configuration:
– "Is equal": a condition is true when a variable exactly equals a specific value. Otherwise, the condition is false.

– "Is lower": a condition is true when a variable is truly lower than a specific value. Otherwise, the condition is false.
– "Timespan": within a certain period of time the condition is true either exactly once or periodically (in adjustable
intervals) for a specified time span. At all other times the condition is false.

Condition in dependency of a variable
The Dialog for the configuration of a 'Condition in dependency of a variable' is identical structured for the logical ope‐
rators "is equal" and "is lower".

Element Description
Opens the Operation Window, which lets the user select the variable (=
objects and keywords) that is to be used for the equation/comparison.

The value that the selected variable has to equal or fall below.

The Operation Window lets the user select the variable whose value is relevant for the Condition. A variable always con‐
sists of an object and an associated function. To select a variable, the window's right frame lets the user select the
types of objects that will appear in the Object List. Now, the function to be associated to the previously selected
object can be selected in the left frame of the window.



Timed Condition
A Timed Condition is always defined by a Period of Time, during which the Condition is "true" for a specified Duration.
The Period of Time may occur once (Onetime) or periodically (every ...). Appropriately, the Duration should not exceed
the selected Period of Time.
Element Description
Starting from the beginning of the Period of Time, the Condition is “true” exactly
once for the Duration.
Starting immediately from the beginning of the Period of Time, the Condition is
recurringly "true" every x minute(s) during the Duration.

recurringly "true" every x hour(s) during the Duration.

recurringly "true" every x day(s) during the Duration.


recurringly "true" every x week(s) during the Duration.

"true" for the Duration, if the first day of the Period of Time falls on the selected

weekday. Otherwise, starting from the beginning of the Period of Time, the
Condition is "true" on every selected x weekday(s) at start time of the Period of Time
and for the Duration.
recurringly "true" every x month(s) during the Duration.

recurringly "true" every x year(s) during the Duration.

"true" for the Duration, if the first day of the Period of Time falls on the selected x
weekday of a month. Otherwise, starting from the beginning of the Period of Time,
the Condition is "true" on every selected x weekday(s) of a month at start time of the
Period of Time and for the Duration.
"true" for the Duration, if the first day of the Period of Time falls on the selected x
weekday of a month. Otherwise, starting from the beginning of the Period of Time,
the Condition is "true" on every selected x last weekday(s) of a month at start time
of the Period of Time and for the Duration.
The Period of Time has a start time (start time on a start day) and an end time (end
time on an end day). Within this Period of Time the Condition is once or periodically
"true" for the Duration.
The Duration during which the Condition shall be "true" at one point in time or at
numerous points in time. The syntax for entering the Duration is: week (w), days (d),
hours (h), minutes (m), and seconds (s). Values have to be separated by the letters
indicated in parentheses.

Example:
A Condition shall be "true" for a time span of 90 minutes. Some of the allowable
syntaxes for entering the Duration are: 0w0d1h30m0s; 1h30m; 90m; 89m60s
For a Condition that is periodically "true" on specific weekdays, the desired

weekday(s) can be selected. The List of Weekdays is displayed only if one of the
following types of Conditions has been activated:
selected weekday,
selected weekday in month or
last selected weekday in month

Using the Scene Editor

A Scene consists of a freely configurable number of actions. Examples for actions that can be part of a Scene are: DSP
parameters, GPIO settings, remote amplifier parameters or the loading of presets.
Element Description
This creates a new Scene. Creating a new Scene closes the currently opened Scene. A window
opens requesting the user to acknowledge this step: "Do you want to save your changes?"
Button Yes: Saves the currently opened Scene. In case the currently opened Scene already has
a name and has previously been saved, the Scene is simply overwritten. The “Save as…” dialog
window opens when a Scene has not been saved before. This window allows assigning a name
to a Scene.
Button No: Changes applied to a Scene are not being saved.
Button Cancel: Cancels the creation of a new Scene.
Creates a new entry in a Scene.
Deletes the currently marked entries of a Scene.
Lets the user edit the column-entry Action of the selected Scene entry by opening the
Operation dialog.
Lets the user edit the column-entry Parameter of the selected Scene entry by opening the
Object Parameter dialog.
Adds a comment line to a Scene.
Copying or Pasting in a single or various Scene entries.
Action that is being executed when recalling a Scene.
Parameter of an action that is being executed when recalling a Scene.
Loads a previously saved Scene.

Saves a Scene.
Saves the Scene under a different name.
Searching/Configuring devices on the Ethernet

The Device Scan dialog allows configuration of the network interfaces of non-OMNEO-devices that are accessible from
the PC via Ethernet. A device can be configured even where illegal/incorrect network settings would prevent normal
communication (i.e., an invalid or conflicting IP address). Use the OCA Scan dialog (see Searching OMNEO-devices on
the Ethernet, page 66) to scan for OMNEO devices.
Notice!
Firewalls can cause problems when using the IRIS-Net Device Scan.

Selecting the entry Device Scan in the Tools menu lets you access the Device Scan dialog.

Element Description
Device Type Shows the types of devices which, upon pressing the SCAN button, are accessible via Ethernet.
List Selecting a list entry lists only devices of this specific type.
MAC ADDR Shows the MAC address of the detected devices
INTERFACE Shows the interface of the detected devices.
DHCP Shows the status of the DHCP parameter of the detected devices. If DHCP is "ON" the network
settings for a device are assigned by a DHCP server. If DHCP is "OFF" network settings must be
configured manually.
HINT: Activate DHCP (“ON”) only if a DHCP server is available in your Ethernet.

NETWORK Shows the network settings of the device in the format: IP address / subnet mask GW: gateway
SETTINGS address
SYSTEM NAME Shows the system name of the device
SOFTWARE Shows the firmware version of the device

VERSION
IRIS-Net If a device is part of the current project, this column shows the name assigned to the device in this
specific project.
Starts a search for devices on the Ethernet network.
Use this button to restart the device that has been selected in the devices list. Before the device
restarts, a dialog box appears, asking the user to enter user name and password.

Use this button to configure the device that has been selected in the devices list. Pressing the
CONFIG button opens the Config dialog box.
Clicking onto this button closes the Device Scan dialog.

Editing network settings
Double click at the network settings of a device in the Devices list to open the dialog for editing the network settings.
Following table lists the default username and password for supported devices.
Device Firmware version Default user name Default password
N8000 all netmax netmax
P 64 all netmax netmax
DPM 8016 < 1.16.0 dpm dpuser
DPM 8016 >= 1.16.0 admin 0000
PVA-4CR12 all admin 0000
PMX-4CR12 all admin 0000
Searching OMNEO-devices on the Ethernet

The OCA Scan dialog allows configuration of OMNEO-devices that are accessible from the PC via Ethernet.
HINT: Firewalls can cause problems when using the OCA Scan dialog.
Selecting the entry OCA Scan in the Tools menu lets you access the OCA Scan dialog.

Element Description
Device Type List Shows the types of devices which, upon pressing the SCAN button, are accessible via
Ethernet. Selecting a list entry lists only devices of this specific type.
Count Number of devices accessible via Ethernet.
DEVICE NAME Shows the MAC address of the detected devices.

HINT: There are two drag & drop functionalities for devices listed here. The first option is to
drop a device from the OCA Scan dialog into the IRIS-Net worksheet. A new RCM-28 remote
amplifier will be created and automatically linked to the dropped device. The second option
is to drop a device from the OCA Scan dialog onto an existing RCM-28 remote amplifier in
the worksheet. By doing this the existing RCM-28 remote amplifier will be renamed and
linked to the dropped device.
IRIS-NET NAME Double click to assign a IRIS-Net device name to the OMNEO device.
MAC ADDR Shows the MAC address of the detected devices.
IP Shows the IP address of the detected devices.
SYSTEM ROLE Shows the system role of the device.
FIRMWARE VERSION Shows the firmware version of the device.

To update the amplifier firmware, select one or more amplifiers in the devices list, then right
click in this column. The amplifier firmware update dialog appears, there you can select the
new firmware version and initiate the update procedure by clicking on the Send & Update
button.

FIRMWARE TYPE Shows the firmware type of the device.

To edit the firmware type, select one or more amplifiers in the devices list, then right click in
this column. The Firmwaretype selection dialog appears, there you can select the firmware
type depending on your network topology or application:
– Transparent
– RapidSpanningTree
– GlitchFreeAudio
Note: You have to reset the device after changing the firmware type.
FIND Double click to activate the find function of the OMNEO device.
Scan This button starts a search for devices on the Ethernet network.
Close Clicking onto this button closes the OCA Scan dialog.
Using the PA Event Log

The Event Log chronologically lists internal IRIS-Net events and events that occurred during the operation of devices
that are included in the project. This, for example, aids when troubleshooting the system.
Element Description
Devices Allows the selection of devices or device types to be included in the Event List.
Type Allows the selection of fault types to be included in the Event List.
Export to File Entries selected in the Event List are saved in a file.
or
Download Logs
from Selected
Devices
Opens the Event Logging Setup dialog.
Date and time of an event.

The type of an event.
The device that triggered the event.
The sub-system of the device that triggered the event.
Textual description of an event.

Event Logging Setup
This dialog allows specifying the event type to appear in the Log File. Events are defined as problems (errors) that
occurred within the system, but also messages providing information about the system status or changes in the status.
Selecting event types is possible in two different ways: either by selecting the TYPE of an event or by selecting sub-
systems of the devices employed in the project to be monitored. In addition, this dialog offers the possibility to edit
the logging characteristics of N8000s or DPM 8016s that are included in the project and the characteristics of the
central logging file that is stored on the PC.
Element Description
EVENT TYPES Selection of event types to appear in the Event Log.

– ERRORS
– WARNINGS
– INFORMATION
(N8000/P 64) or
AUDIOEVENTS
(DPM 8016)
Selection of devices or sub-systems to appear in the Event Log.
SELECT DEVICE Selection of a N8000 or DPM 8016 in the project whose logging characteristics are to be
edited.
ENABLE LOGGING The selected device writes an Event Log when this checkbox is checked.
(N8000/P 64 only)

Deletes the entire Event Log of the selected N8000/P 64 or DPM 8016.
LOG BUFFER FULL An entry appears in the Event Log if this checkbox is checked and the Event Log memory of
WARNING (N8000/P 64 the device runs low.
only)
USED MEMORY Displays the available Event Log memory of a the device. 0% indicates that the memory is
empty.
LOGGING START Displays date and time of the first (e.g. oldest) entry in the Event Log.
(DPM 8016 only)
LAST ENTRY (DPM 8016 Displays date and time of the last (e.g. newest) entry in the Event Log.
only)
LOG FILE(S) (N8000/ Displays the storage location at which the currently used log file is saved on the PC in
P 64 only) relation to the IRIS-Net installation path.
Opens a dialog for selecting the log file.

(N8000/
P 64 only)
DAYS PER FILE (N8000/ Number of days after which a new log file is being created.
P 64 only)
ENTRIES PER FILE Number of entries at which, when exceeded, a new log file is being created.
(N8000/P 64 only)
Changing available devices

The devices shown in the Object List can be customized. Use the IRIS-Net Device Options dialog window. The dialog
window opens automatically the first time IRIS-Net is run. For later customization, you can find the dialog window in
the menu Edit > Device Options.
Select the groups of devices that should be available in the Object List. Project files containing devices that are not
selected in this dialog can still be opened and edited.
Remote Control Network / Interface

The network for the Remote Control power amps is based on the CAN-bus standard. This popular protocol has been
used for many years in automotive, industrial and security applications. The CAN-bus is a balanced serial interface for
command and data transmission. Controlling the power amplifiers is performed from a Windows based PC running
IRIS-Net – Intelligent Remote & Integrated Supervision – software. The UCC1 USB-CAN Converter serves as the

interface between the PC and the CAN-bus. For more detailed information please refer to the UCC1 owner’s manual.
Up to 100 devices can be connected to a single CAN-Bus with a maximum total cable length of 1,000 metres. An
additional CAN-bus is needed for controlling more than 100 devices while the IRIS-Net software will support a total of
250 amplifiers. The network topology used by the CAN-bus is based on a “bus or line topology”, i.e. all participants are
connected via a single two-wire cable (Twisted-Pair cable, shielded or unshielded) with the cabling daisy-chained from
one participant on the bus to the next, allowing unlimited communication among all devices. In general, it does not
matter whether a participant on the bus is a power amplifier or a UCC1 USB-CAN converter, this flexibility allows a
UCC1 (and its associated PC) to be inserted at any position on the network. Incorporating several UCC1's on a single
CAN-bus is also possible. A total of up to 100 devices can be operated on a single CAN-bus. Since the CAN-interfaces of
all EV/DC devices are galvanically isolated from the rest of the circuitry, network cabling also carries a common ground
conductor (CAN_GND) ensuring that all CAN-interfaces in the network are connected to a common ground potential.
The UCC1 provides the possibility for switching the CAN-ground to circuit-ground.
Each participant on the bus system has two RJ-45 connectors for the Remote CAN-bus. These sockets are connected in
parallel to serve as input and output (for connecting through) for the data transfer within the remote-network. The
CAN-bus must be terminated at both ends using 120 Ω terminator plugs, two of which – CAN-TERM 120 Ω – are
supplied with the UCC1. Connect one of these to the RJ-45 socket of the first and the other to the socket of the last
appliance on the CAN-bus.
The following illustration shows an example of the data-bus wiring.


In addition to the CAN-bus data signal, network cabling also carries the balanced monitor audio signal for monitoring
the power amp inputs and outputs. This monitor-bus allows software-controlled monitoring of the input and output si‐
gnals of all power amps that are included in the remote network, without the need for additional wiring. This balanced
line level audio signal is present at the UCC1’s XLR-type MONITOR Output connector. Typical uses include connecting
it to a spare input of a mixing console or an active monitor speaker so that an engineer can easily monitor the audio
signal at the input or output of any amplifier on the network. The CAN-bus standard provides several different data
transfer rates, with the data rate being indirectly proportional to the bus cable length. Small networks allow baud rates
up to 500 kbit/s. For very large networks reducing the baud rate (minimum 10 kbit/s) is necessary. The following table
indicates the relation between baud rate and bus length or in other words network dimensioning:
Data transfe rrate Bus Length
500 kbit/s 100 m
250 kbit/s 250 m
125 kbit/s 500 m
62,5 kbit/s 1000 m
20 kbit/s 2500 m
10 kbit/s (Default) 5000 m

With all remote power amps, the factory data rate setting defaults to 10 kbit/s. The use of repeaters is generally recom‐
mended when the bus-length exceeds 1,000 m.
CAN-Bus Cable Specifications
According to the ISO 11898-2 standard, CAN-bus data transfer cabling has to be carried out using Twisted-Pair cables
with or without shielding providing a characteristic impedance of 120 Ω. Both ends of a CAN-bus need to be
terminated with 120 Ω termination-plugs.
The maximum bus-length depends on the actual data transfer rate, the kind of data transfer cable being used, and the
total number of participants on the bus. The following table shows the most essential parameters for CAN-networks
consisting of up to 64 participants:
Data Transmission Cable

Bus Length (inm) Termination (inΩ) Max. Data Transfer Rate
Resistance per
Unit Length (in Cable Diameter
mΩ/m)
0...40 < 70 0,25...0,34 mm² 124 1000 kbit/s bei 40 m

AWG23, AWG22
40...300 < 60 0,34...0,6 mm² 127 500 kbit/s bei 100 m

AWG22, AWG20
300...600 < 40 0,5...0,6 mm² 150...300* 100 kbit/s bei 500 m

AWG 20
600...1000 < 26 0,75...0,8 mm² 150...300* 62,5 kbit/s bei 1000 m

AWG 18

* With longer cables and many participants on the CAN-bus, termination resistors with higher impedance than the
specified 120 Ω are recommended to reduce the ohmic load of the interface drivers and therefore the voltage drop bet‐
ween the two cable-ends.
The following table is meant for first assessment of necessary cable diameters for different bus lengths and bus-par‐
ticipant numbers:
Number of Units on the CAN-Bus

Bus Length (inm)
32 64 100
100 0,25 mm² or AWG24 0,34 mm² or AWG22 0,34 mm² or AWG22

Additionally, the length of branch lines – for participants that are not directly connected to the CAN-bus – is also of
importance. For data transfer rates of up to 125 kbit/s, the maximum length of a single stub cable should not exceed 2
m. For higher bit rates a maximum length of only 0.3 m is recommended. The entire length of all branch lines in a
network should not exceed 30 m.
General Note:
– As long as only short distances (up to 10 m) are concerned, common RJ-45 patch cables with 100 Ω characteristic
impedance (AWG 24 / AWG 26) can be used for the cabling inside of a rack-shelf system.
– The previously outlined guidelines for network cabling are mandatory as far as the rack-shelve interconnection or
fixed installations are involved.

Setting up a Remote Amplifier System

A Remote Power Amplifier System is a computer-controlled audio system that consists of a single or multiple Remote
Power Amps and a single or multiple PCs with the IRIS-Net software. Communication is established via CAN Remote
Control Network. An UCC1 USB-CAN Converter (or e.g. a Netmax N8000 System Controller) serves as interface for
linking to the PC.

Setting Up A Remote Amplifier System using a UCC1 USB-CAN Converter
When creating / installing a Remote Power Amplifier System, please make sure to keep the following information in
mind:
1. Address Setting
First, make sure to set the addresses of all Remote Power Amps with your network correctly (address selector
switch on the rear panel of the power amps). CAN-networks allow addresses between 01 and 250. Set addresses
and settings in the corresponding IRIS-Net project have to match.
Caution!
Assign each address only once within a specific system. Network conflicts will result otherwise.
! Consequences
The default factory-settings for all Remote Power Amplifiers are:
Parameter Value
Address 00
Data transfer rate 10 kbit/s
Preset F01 (all filters bypassed / linear, level 0dB, muting off)
2. Connecting An UCC1 USB-CAN Converter To The PC

Connect the UCC1 USB-CAN Converter to an USB port on your PC. The STATUS LED has to light as soon as the
operating system recognizes the UCC1 (IRIS-Net has not yet been started). As soon as the IRIS-Net Software has
been started, the STATUS LED should blink indicating that the communication between the IRIS-Net application
and the UCC1 has been established.
Caution!
Make sure to install all necessary drivers before using the UCC1. Advice on how to install the
! drivers is provided in the Readme-File, chapter "Installation".
Consequences
3. Network Connection Establish remote network connections (CAN-Bus) between UCC1 and all Remote Power
Amps. Make sure to keep the CAN-Bus cable specifications in mind.
4. Initial Operation Make sure that no signal is present at the inputs of the remote power amps when switching their
power on for the first time. Otherwise, since the power amps are set to full-range operation (F01), high output
levels can result in severe damage to the connected speaker systems. To configure the Remote Power Amplifier
System according to your requirements, start the IRIS-Net Software and open the corresponding project-file.
Please also bear in mind the following chapters, which lay out the procedures when creating and editing IRIS-Net
projects.

Setting Up A Remote Amplifier System using a NetMax N8000 System Controller
When creating / installing a Remote Power Amplifier System, please make sure to keep the following information in
mind:

1. Address Setting First, make sure to set the addresses of all Remote Power Amps with your network correctly
(address selector switch on the rear panel of the power amps). CAN-networks allow addresses between 01 and
250. Set addresses and settings in the corresponding IRIS-Net project have to match.
Caution!
Assign each address only once within a specific system. Network conflicts will result otherwise.
! Consequences
The default factory settings for all remote power amplifiers are:
Parameter Value
Address 00
Data transfer rate 10 kbit/s
Preset F01 (all filters bypassed / linear, level 0dB, muting off)
2. Connecting a N8000 System Controller to the PC Connect the N8000 System Controller to an Ethernet port on
your PC. Please see the N8000 owner‘s manual for details.
3. Network Connection Establish remote network connections (CAN-Bus) between the N8000 and all Remote Power
Amps. Make sure to keep the CAN-Bus cable specifications in mind.
4. Initial Operation Make sure that no signal is present at the inputs of the remote power amps when switching their
power on for the first time. Otherwise, since the power amps are set to full-range operation (F01), high output
levels can result in severe damage to the connected speaker systems. To configure the Remote Power Amplifier
System according to your requirements, start the IRIS-Net Software and open the corresponding project-file.
Please also bear in mind the following chapters, which lay out the procedures when creating and editing IRIS-Net
projects.
Set CAN baud rate
1. Changing Baud rate of P-Series Remote Amplifiers for changing the Baud Rate to 10 kBit/s, power-off the power
amp using its POWER-switch on the front panel. Disconnect the power amp from the CAN network, set its address
to 00 and power-on the power amp again. Power-off the power amp and readjust the address-switches to their
correct settings. Now you can reconnect the CAN network and use the power amp. This operation will reset the
baud rate as well as all DSP settings to the factory-shipped defaults (F01)! Other baud rates can be selected by
setting the address of the amplifier during the same procedure according to following table.
Address Data transfer rate
00 10 kbit/s
Address Data transfer rate
FE 62,5 kbit/s
FD 125 kbit/s
FC 250 kbit/s
FB 500 kbit/s
Caution!
Make sure that all Remote Power Amps within one CAN network are always set to an identical
! baud rate. Otherwise, if power amps within a particular network are set to different baud rates,
network communications is not possible!
Consequences

2. Disable possibility to change baud rate The option Baud rate freeze allows the protection of the amplifier from a
(unintended) baud rate change. For activating this option select "Modify Properties" from the amplifiers context
menu in IRIS-Net. Change the value of property Baud rate freeze from 0 to 1. If Baud rate freeze is activated, the
baud rate can be changed neither via Address-Switch nor via IRIS-Net. For changing baud rate you have to
deactivate Baud rate freeze.
Caution!
The option Baud rate freeze must be used carefully. Activate Baud rate freeze of a amplifier only if
! all amplifiers at a CAN network have the same baud rate and the baud rate will not be changed in
the future.
Consequences

Reference
Main Window
Number Element Description
1 Title Bar The title bar shows the name of the currently opened project file and IRIS-Net. "Noname"
is displayed when opening a new project file or when the current project has not been
saved yet. The Minimize, Maximize/Restore Size and Close/Quit IRIS-Net buttons are
located on the right.
2 Menu Bar Commands that can be carried out in IRIS-Net are grouped in categories. These categories
are shown in the menu bar. Clicking on one of these categories displays the
corresponding command list.
3 Tool Bar Frequently used commands are arranged as buttons in the tool bar. The button of a
command that is not available is grayed-out. Clicking the button has no effect.
4 Layer If a project file includes various layers, switching between these layers is possible by
Selection Bar selecting the corresponding tab in the Layer Selection Bar. Left-clicking on a previously
selected tab allows renaming this tab. Right-clicking on a tab opens a context menu which
allows changing the order of the layers within the project.
5 Object List The Object List contains all categories of objects that can be arranged in the worksheet.
6 Connect Bar The Connect Bar provides access to the on-line dialog.

7 Status Window The Status Window displays IRIS-Net system status messages. Additionally, the name of
the currently logged-in user is shown underneath the Status Window.
8 Worksheet In the Worksheet, the user can arrange control and display panels of a project by dragging
objects out of the Object List and dropping them into the Worksheet.
Menus, Commands and Symbol bar

A context menu offers a limited set of choices that are available in the current state, or context, of the object, device or
application.
1. Position the cursor over the desired object.
2. A click with the right mouse button opens the context menu at the spot where you have clicked.

Menu “File”
Element Shortcut Description
New Ctrl+N Creates a new project file.
Open... Ctrl+O Loads an existing project.
Reload... Ctrl+R Reloads the current project.
Save Ctrl+S Saves a project.
Save As... Saves an existing project under another name.
Print Setup... Change the printer and printing options.
Last used project files The last four projects used are listed here.
Exit Shuts the program down.

Menu “Edit”
Element Shortcut Description
Cut Ctrl+X Removes the selected item(s) and places them on the clipboard.
Copy Ctrl+C Places a copy of the selected item(s) on the clipboard.
Paste Ctrl+V Insert item(s) from the clipboard.
Delete Del Deletes the selected item(s).
Settings... Opens the Settings dialog.
Device Options... Opens the IRIS-Net Device Options dialog.
Network Settings… Opens a dialog to select the Ethernet interface (e.g. network card of
the PC) to use for OMNEO or Ethernet devices.

Menu “View”
Element Description
Toolbars Shows the toolbar below the menu bar.

Status Bar Shows the status bar at the bottom of the IRIS-Net workspace window.
Object List Shows the object list at the left of the IRIS-Net workspace window.

Menu “Configuration”
Element Description
Add Device... A click on Add Device opens the IRIS-Net Device List allowing you to drag new devices into the
worksheet area.
Add Interface... A click on Add Interface opens the IRIS-Net Interface List allowing you to drag new interfaces into
the worksheet area.
Add Control... A click on Add Control opens the IRIS-Net Controls List and lets you create new controls.
Add User A click on Add User Controls opens the User Controls List and allows adding predefined or user-
Controls... defined control panels to the project.
Add Bitmap... Select Add Bitmap to add any of the supplied or self-designed bitmaps to your IRIS-Net project.
Add Textbox... Select Add Textbox to open the dialog box for text entries.
Modify Properties Modify Properties opens the IRIS-Net Properties Dialog where you can make or change basic
settings of a project.
Add Layer A click on Add Layer lets you add a new page (layer) to the IRIS-Net project. A new register
(Layer x) is created in the IRIS-Net worksheet. Assign a meaningful name to the new register, e.g.
"Control Page". You can lay out the new page and add controls according to your preferences.
IRIS-Net allows the use of up to 32 layers.
Delete Layer A click on Delete Layer deletes the currently active page (layer) from the IRIS-Net project.
CAUTION:
Delete Layer erases the entire contents of the currently active page. However, as long as the
project is not saved, all data is still present in the project file. If you inadvertently have
deleted a page, use Reload to revert to the last saved project state. Once you have saved your
project after deleting a page, all information/data of that specific page is gone.

Passwords... A click on Passwords opens the IRIS-Net Password Dialog which lets you define access rights to
your project.
Logout Click on Logout to log out of the actual IRIS-Net project. Now you can log in again using a
different password and different access rights if these have been configured in the project.

Menu “Tools”
Element Description
SPL Calculator Opens the window SPL Calculator.
Limiter Threshold Opens the window Limiter Threshold Calculator

Calculator
Event Scheduler Opens the window Event Scheduler.
Macro Editor Opens the window Macro Editor. There are the tabs Macros, Triggers and Conditions.
Scene Editor Opens the window Scene Editor.
Event Log Opens the IRIS-Net Event Log.
Device Scan Opens the window Device Scan.

PA Event Log Opens the window PA Event Log
OCA Scan Opens the window OCA Scan.
Dante Configuration Opens the window Network View. In this window you can edit the routing in your Dante
network.

Menu “RCM-24”
Element Description
Configuration via CAN Hardware Opens the window Configuration
Control Functions Opens the window Control Functions.
System Check Opens the window RCM-24 System Check.
Overview Opens the window RCM-24 Overview.

Menu “RCM-26”
Element Description
Configuration via CAN Hardware Opens the window Configuration

System Check Opens the window RCM-26 System Check

Menu “RCM-810”
Element Description

Menu “RCM-28”
Element Description
System Check Opens the window RCM-28 System Check

Menu “Matrix”
Element Description
Configuration via USB Opens the window NetMax Configuration via USB.
Real Time Clock Opens the window Set N8000 Real Time Clock for editing real time clock of all NetMax
devices in the project
Superblocks Opens the window Matrix Superblocks for deleting Superblocks.

Menu “?”
Element Description
Project Info Opens the window Project Info
Help Topics Opens IRIS-Net help (this document)
Quick Start Guide... Opens the IRIS-Net Quick Start Guide.
Search for Updates ... Opens the Software Update dialog.
About IRIS.... Shows the current application software version.

Symbol Bar
Element Description
New Creates a new project file.
Open Loads an existing project.
Reload Reloads the current project.

Save Saves a project.
About Lists the current application software version.
Online/Offline If current status is offline, Online opens the window Going online.

Please note following hint concerning the Going online dialog:
When being online with a DPM 8016, the IRIS-Net Configuration reads out system parameters which may differ from
the default settings (e.g. running impedance measurement). If these changes are coming from other devices except the
local PC, and the configuration file shall be saved after being online with the system, the user is asked if he wants to
keep the original version or take the current version including the modified parameters.

Controls
PushButton
The IRIS-Net Control of the type "PushButton" is the equivalent of a button. The button has two states: pressed and
unpressed. Left-clicking on the "PushButton" Control activates the "pressed" state. The "unpressed" state is restored
immediately after releasing the mouse button. The button's appearance in both states can be freely configured.
Activating a safety dialog when pressing the button is additionally possible. One or more parameters that are activated
in the "pressed" state can be assigned to a PushButton.

Element Description
Select Control Object Switching between Controls for editing is possible if a variety of Controls of the type
"PushButton" are used in a project.
The currently selected PushButton is deleted in the IRIS-Net project.
Caption Text label of the PushButton. The entered text is always displayed centered.
Confirm Text If it is intended that a safety dialog appears when left-clicking on the button, this field lets
the user enter an explanatory text to be displayed in that safety dialog. If no text is being
entered, the safety dialog does not appear.
Textcolor when Button is Color of the button label when in the "pressed" state. The button opens the Color dialog
pressed which allows selecting between predefined and user-definable colors.
Textcolor when Button is FColor of the button label when in the "unpressed" state. The button opens the Color
unpressed dialog which allows selecting between predefined and user-definable colors.
Font Displays the currently selected typeface for button labeling. The button opens the
"Typeface" dialog which allows selecting font type, font style/weight, and font size.
Bitmap Displays the filename of the bitmap graphic file that is currently used to represent the
pushbutton. The button opens the "Bit- maps" dialog which allows selecting the desired
bitmap file to represent the pushbutton.
Dialog opened by Click Allows selecting a dialog that opens when pressing the PushButton.
Lists the functions (WHAT-part of the parameter) that are active when the PushButton is
in the "pressed" state. Removing items is possible by opening the contextual menu of the
function that is to be deleted and selecting the entry "Delete Entry".

Lists the devices/objects (WHERE-part of the parameter) for which the selected functions
will be active when the PushButton is in the "pressed" state. Removing items is possible
by opening the contextual menu of the Connection that is to be deleted and selecting the
entry "Delete Entry".
Opens the "Modify Functions & Connections" dialog that lets the user select the
parameter(s) of the PushButton to be modified.
Closes/cancels the "PushButton Class" dialog.
Opens the "Properties for PushButton" dialog.
Property Description
bitmap Path and filename of bitmap used for button. Path must be entered relative to \IRIS-Net.
caption Caption of button
Capture accel Only used if mode is "increment" or "decrement". Every capture period ms the new value is
calculated by: new_value = old_value * capturea- ccel
Capture period Every capture period ms the state of the button is polled.
confirm Text of confirm dialog.

click Action that should be executed when the PushButton is clicked. See following table Click for
details.
Dialog entries List of dialogs included in Drop Down Dialog opened by Click.
font Font type and font size, separated by comma.
function Active function if button is in pressed state. Multiple functions are separated by comma.
interval The parameter connected with the PushButton is polled every interval ms. Enter "0" if the
parameter should not be polled.
mode absolute for 0/1 at state unpressed/pressed

increment/decrement for increase/decrease of parameter during state pressed
properties If mode = absolute: State of push button (0 = unpressed, 1 = pressed)

If mode = increment or decrement: Lower border of influenced parameter.
Text color deprecated
Text color when Color of caption in state pressed, given in hexadecimal format:: 0x00BBGGRR with BB = blue, GG
pressed = green, RR = red
Text color when Color of caption in state unpressed, given in hexadecimal format:: 0x00BBGGRR with BB = blue,
unpressed GG = green, RR = red

Property click.
Type Format Example Comment
Execute a file doc*open=<path and doc*open=c:\alarm.mp3 Every file type can be executed,
file name> Microsoft Windows uses the default
application (depending on file
extension) for executing the file (e.g.
*.pdf --> Adobe Reader, *.mp3 -->
Winamp). Absolute or relative path
description is possible.
Set parameter <Device>*<Keyword>= N8000_1*DSP.AnalogIn_ Setting illegal parameters should be

value <Value> 1.Ch3.Mute=1 avoided.
Change layer changelayer=<number changelayer=3 Moving layers (via context menu "Move
OfLayer> to left/right") does not change its
number, find number via property
"layeractive" of worksheet properties.
Execute a script script=<path and file script=.\Scripts Absolute or relative path description is
name> \SeparateRooms.dss possible.
Execute a scene script=<path and file script=.\Scenes Absolute or relative path description is
name> \SeparateRooms.scn possible.
Open a template template=<templateNa template=N8000_PEQ_5 See directory \IRIS-Net\Templates for

me> Band_Mono "PEQ 5 available templates. "Window Title" is
<"Window Title"> %c Band" %c displayed in the title bar of the
template window..

Going online/offline *online=<0/1> *online=1 use 1 for going online, use 0 for going
offline
Change user of Change current Change current Entering the password of the user is
IRIS-Net user=<UserName> user=NewUser1 not required when "logging in" via
PushButton. This option should be
used for changing set of accessible
layers only.
Fullscreen/window fullscreen=<yes/no> fullscreen=yes Use "yes" for fullscreen mode, use "no"
mode for window mode.
Execute channel A chasweep=0/<number chasweep=0/150: 1 The impedance test is executed at

impedance test of of measurements>: 1 10000 Hz, 20000 Hz, 0 channel A of the RCM-26 remote
RCM- 26 amplifier <start freq> Hz, <stop s, -10 dB, solo, post amplifiers connected to the button.
freq> Hz, 0 s, <level>
dB, solo, post
Execute channel B chbsweep=0/<number chbsweep=0/150: 1 The impedance test is executed at

impedance test of of measurements>: 1 10000 Hz, 20000 Hz, 0 channel B of the RCM-26 remote
RCM- 26 amplifier <start freq> Hz, <stop s, -10 dB, solo, post amplifiers connected to the button.
freq> Hz, 0 s, <level>
dB, solo, post
Execute impedance impedancecurve=0/0: impedancecurve=0/0: 0 The impedance test is executed at the

test (RCM-24) 0 <start freq> Hz, 20 Hz, 20000 RCM-24 remote amplifiers connected
<stop freq> Hz, 200 Hz, 200 ms, -10 dB, -10 to the button.
ms, dB, solo, post
<level A> dB, <level B>
dB, solo, post
Loads a preset in *LoadPreset=<preset N8000 or P 64: Possible connections are the remote
the device(s) number> *LoadPreset=01 amplifier, the Dx46 or DSP 600, or
(RCM-24 amplifier, N8000_x.DSP or P64_x.DSP.
RCM-26 amplifier, Remote Amplifier or
Dx46/DSP 600 or Dx46/ DSP 600:
N8000/P 64) *LoadPreset=U01
connected to the
PushButton.
Saves a preset (or *SavePreset=<preset N8000 or P 64: Possible connections are the remote
scene) in the number> *SavePreset=01 amplifier, the Dx46 or DSP 600, or
device(s) (RCM-24 N8000_x.DSP or P64_x.DSP.
amplifier, RCM-26 Remote Amplifier or
amplifier, Dx46/ DSP 600:
Dx46/DSP 600 or *SavePreset=U01
N8000/P 64)
connected to the
PushButton.

Templates
A control panel for a single or several device(s) can be accessed via a Group or a Push Button. Call up the contextual
menu of a Group or a Push Button and select the desired control panel under the menu item "Dialog opened by Click".
General information on how to use Groups is provided in the chapter "Working with Groups". Available control panels
are listed in the following table:
Template Description
ArrayPEQ_5band_UI
DSP600DSPUI
DSP600UI
DSP600Userpanel
DSPUI
DX38UI
DX46DSPUI
DX46UI
DX46Userpanel
InputGEQ_31band_UI
InputPEQ_10band_UI
Master EQ UI x Band x = 3, 4, 5, 6
N8000_Delay_xms x = 10, 100, 500, 2000
N8000_GEQ_xWay_Mono x = 10, 15, 31
N8000_LSC_xWay_Mono x = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
N8000_PEQ_xBand(_Mono) x = 3, 5, 7 ,12
N8000_ToneControl_Mono
N8000_ToneGenerator
OutputPEQ_6band_UI
RCM26DSPUI
RCM26RemoteAmpsUI
RCM28DSPUI
RCM28RemoteAmpsUI
Remote Amps UI
System Crossover_xWay x = 4,5,6,7,8

The description of the controls or indicators included in the templates is given in the section of the corresponding
device. A selection of templates is described on the following pages.


Remote Amps UI
The "Remote Amps UI" control panel is the equivalent of the Setup & Control Window of an RCM-24 Remote Amplifier.
The control panel is accessed via a Push Button or a Group and is used for the synchronized control of various
amplifiers. The RCM-24 Remote Amplifiers to be controlled have to be linked to the Push Button or the Group via the
menu item "Administrate Connection" of the corresponding contextual menu.
For more detailed information please refer to the corresponding chapters of the Remote Amplifier.
Tab Description
Config & Info This page provides information about the amplifier and allows making several basic settings as well
as programming control functions.
DSP The DSP page provides an overview plus access to all DSP functions (Filter, Delay, X-Over, and
Dynamics) of the amplifier.
Speaker This page allows loading and displaying speaker data.
Load This page provides access to several settings for impedance/load monitoring and impedance
testing.
Supervision & This page allows configuring monitoring and surveillance functions and setting the test tone
Test generator.

Single Channel Group Dialog (DSPUI)
The Single Channel Group Dialog (for RCM-24 remote amplifiers) is used for linearization and secure operation of a
single loudspeaker. An equalizer, a crossover and a compressor/limiter are presented in separate window. This allows
comfortably adjusting all the specific settings that are necessary for the operation of a single loudspeaker chassis (or
individual way of a loudspeaker system) in a separate window. All settings/parameters can be saved in configuration
files (Speaker Settings). Pre-defined configuration files (Speaker Settings) are available for loudspeakers from Electro-
Voice and DYNACORD . The Single Channel Group Dialog can be accessed via a Group or a Push Button. In the
properties of the respective element you have to select the setting "DSPUI" in the dropdown field "Dialog opened by
Double Click". The channels of the RCM-24 Remote Amplifiers to be controlled have to be linked to the Push Button or

the Group via the menu item "Administrate Connection" of the corresponding contextual menu. The two tabs "DSP"
and "Speaker" can be found in the main window of the Single Channel Group Dialog. The DSP tab provides access to
the flow diagram to make all necessary settings.

Element Description
The flow diagram selector lets you select different function blocks, where the actually selected
block is displayed in a yellow engaged field.
Select A or B if the setting should be valid for the corresponding channel of the connected
amplifier. Select A and B if the setting should be valid for both amplifier channels.
The Channel EQ block displays the 5 Channel EQs of the corresponding output channel. The 5
LEDs indicate which EQ-bands are being used while the graph shows the frequency response of
the Channel EQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the
CHANNEL EQ page.
Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all
parameters of the corresponding EQ block to any other EQ block within the same project.
This block represents the crossover within the corresponding output channel. The graph shows
the frequency response that results from the set X-Over parameters. Three additional LEDs
indicate the status of gain trim, polarity and delay. A single click with the left mouse button onto
this block opens the X-OVER page.
parameters of the corresponding X-Over block to any other X-Over block within the same project.

The numerical field is identical to the numerical field below the level controls in the Amplifier
Control Panel. So the field indicates the actually set attenuation, by which the internally specified
amplification is attenuated, in dB.
The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding amplifier output to -∞.
Clicking the MUTE button with the left mouse button mutes the corresponding amplifier output.
The MUTE button is virtually pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with

the left mouse button disables the mute-function and the amplifier output is again active. The
MUTE button is virtually disengaged and not lit.
This block provides graphical display of the dynamics functions of the corresponding output. The
two LEDs indicate whether compressor or limiter have been activated. The graph provides
indication of the set values.
parameters of the corresponding Dynamics block to any other Dynamics block within the same
project.
The text field allows specifying a name for the corresponding output channel.
After clicking onto EXPORT SPEAKERSETTING a Save File dialog box appears. Enter the correct
path of the directory that you want to save the data in. Enter a file name (without extension).

Click onto the SAVE button to store the speaker setting together with the corresponding file
name.
After clicking onto IMPORT SPEAKERSETTING an Open File dialog box appears. Enter the correct
path of the directory in which the desired file is located and select the desired preset file to be

opened. This loads and afterwards displays all DSP parameters that are stored within that file.
IRIS-Net allows importing loudspeaker presets that have been created in Electro-Voice RACE by
clicking onto the button IMPORT RACE FILE to open the following dialog box.


First, you have to select the desired RACE file by use of the Browse... button. Because a RACE file can hold the data of
up to 31 EV Dx38, you need to continue by selecting the desired device from the RACE file within the dialog SELECT
DEVICE FROM RACE FILE. At the end you have to specify which of the four Dx38 output channels should be assigned to
the corresponding amplifier channels. Clicking onto OK button completes the process.
Caution!
The loaded RACE file becomes instantly audible when in on-line mode. Be sure to select the
! desired file with the correct set of parameters. In the worst case, this could lead to severe
damage to the connected loudspeaker cabinets due to improper signal processing!
Consequences
The Speaker Dialog offers the possibility to load the datasets of different loudspeaker systems, assign it to the
amplifier channels and display the acoustic results of this virtual combination. The speaker system datasets, which are
provided as ”speaker files” (*.spk), contain factory-measured frequency- and phase responses of all common Electro-
Voice and DYNACORD loudspeaker systems. Some examples are provided in the IRIS-Net directory Speaker Files.
The speaker data as well as any settings made in this window have no direct influence on the transfer function of the
amps. Nevertheless, they provide the user with the possibility for creating loudspeaker systems presets of a higher
quality. Overlaying the measured frequency- and phase responses in the equalizer and crossover windows enables the
user to customize the filter parameters.
Clicking on the Speaker tab in the DSPUI window opens the Speaker page.

RCM26RemoteAmpsUI
The "RCM26RemoteAmpsUI" control panel is the equivalent of the Setup & Control Window of the Remote Amplifiers
with installed RCM-26 module.
The control panel is accessed via a Push Button or a Group and is used for the synchronized control of various
amplifiers. The Remote Amplifiers to be controlled have to be linked to the Push Button or the Group via the menu item
"Administrate Connection" of the corresponding contextual menu.
Tab Description
DSP The DSP page provides an overview plus access to all DSP functions (Filter, Delay, X-Over, Limiters)
of the amplifier.
testing.
Test generator.

For more detailed information please refer to the corresponding chapters of the Remote Amplifier.

RCM26DSPUI
The RCM26DSPUI Dialog is used for linearization and secure operation of a single loudspeaker. An FIR-filter, equalizer,
a crossover and limiters are presented in separate window. This allows comfortably adjusting all the specific settings
that are necessary for the operation of a single loudspeaker chassis (or individual way of a loudspeaker system) in a
separate window. All settings/parameters can be saved in configuration files (Speaker Settings). Pre-defined
configuration files (Speaker Settings) are available for loudspeakers from Electro-Voice and DYNACORD.
The RCM26DSPUI Dialog can be accessed via a Group or a PushButton. In the properties of the respective element you
have to select the setting "RCM26DSPUI" in the dropdown field "Dialog opened by Double Click". The two tabs "DSP"
and "Speaker" can be found in the main window of the RCM26DSPUI Dialog. The DSP tab provides access to the flow
diagram to make all necessary settings.


Element Description
The flow diagram selector lets you select different function blocks,
where the actually selected block is displayed in a yellow engaged
field.
Here you can assign the output channel routing. The A and B buttons
allow selecting the input signal for the corresponding output channel.
Clicking with the right mouse button onto the dB display opens a
fader.
Channel EQ Block:
The Channel EQ block displays the 6 Channel EQs of the
corresponding output channel. The 6 LEDs indicate which EQ-bands
are being used while the graph shows the frequency response of the

Channel EQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this
block opens the CHANNEL EQ page. Clicking with the right mouse
button opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all
parameters of the corresponding EQ block to any other EQ block
within the same project.
Crossover Block:
This block represents the crossover within the corresponding output
channel. The graph shows the frequency response that results from
the set X-Over parameters. Three additional LEDs indicate the status

of gain trim, polarity and delay. A single click with the left mouse
button onto this block opens the X- OVER page.
Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu,
which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding X-Over
block to any other X-Over block within the same project.

FIR Filter Block:

This block represents the FIR Filter within the corresponding output
channel. The graph shows the frequency response that results from
the set FIR parameters. The LED indicate if the FIR Filter is being

used. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens
the FIR page.
which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding FIR Filter
block to any other FIR Filter block within the same project.
Level Block:
The numerical field is identical to the numerical field below the level
controls in the Amplifier Control Panel. So the field indicates the
actually set attenuation, by which the internally specified amplification

is attenuated, in dB.
The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the
corresponding amplifier output to -∞. Clicking the MUTE button with
the left mouse button mutes the corresponding amplifier output. The
MUTE button is virtually pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE
button once again with the left mouse button disables the mute-
function and the amplifier output is again active. The MUTE button is
virtually disengaged and not lit.
Limiters Block:
This block provides graphical display of the limiters functions of the
corresponding output. The two LEDs indicate whether peak limiter or
thermal limiter have been activated. The graph provides indication of

the set values.
which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding Limiters
block to any other Limiters block within the same project.
Output Block:
The text field allows specifying a name for the corresponding output
channel.
A click with the right mouse button onto OUT A or OUT B opens the
Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters of the
corresponding output channel (Routing, Channel EQ, X-Over, FIR
Filter, Dynamics) to any other output channel within the same project.
However, it is important to bear in mind that the DSP data only is
being copied. Impedance or speaker data is not copied.
Allows import and export of Speaker Settings. A Speaker Settings file
contains the loudspeaker specific settings for DSP blocks Channel EQ,
Crossover, FIR Filter and Dynamics & Protect. The text field allows
editing the description of the Speaker Setting file.


Crossover, FIR Filter and Dynamics & Protect. The text field allows
editing the description of the Speaker Setting file.
IRIS-Net allows importing loudspeaker presets that have been created

in Electro-Voice RACE by clicking onto the button IMPORT RACE FILE
to open the following dialog box.

Caution!
Consequences
Voice and DYNACORD loudspeaker systems. Some examples are provided in the IRIS-Net directory Speaker Files.
user to customize the filter parameters.



Master EQUI x Band
The "Master EQ" control panel is available in three different versions - offering three, four, or five band EQs. Any
individual Remote Amplifier's equalizer band that exists in the IRIS-Net project may be assigned to each of the Master
EQ bands. The control panel is accessed via a Push Button or a Group. The desired devices with equalizer bands to be
controlled assigned to, have to be linked to the Push Button or the Group via the menu item "Administrate Connection"
of the corresponding contextual menu.

System Crossover_x Way
The "IRIS System X-Over" control panel features several independent frequency crossover channels. Any individual
crossover channel that exists in the IRIS-Net project may be assigned to each of the System X-Over bands, which
allows controlling the crossovers of a specific amplifier as well as those of various units from a single window. The
control panel is accessed via a Push Button or a Group. The devices with crossovers to be controlled assigned to, have
to be linked to the parent object (the accessing object) via the menu item "Administrate Connection" of the
corresponding contextual menu.


N8000_GEQ_xWay
The "N8000_GEQ_xWay" control panel is available in three different versions - offering 10, 15, or 31 band GEQs. It is
the equivalent of the DSP Block Window "GEQ" of a N8000. The control panel is accessed via a Push Button or a Group
and is used for the synchronized control of several N8000. The GEQs to be controlled have to be linked to the Push
Button or the Group via the menu item "Administrate Connection" of the corresponding contextual menu.


N8000_LSC_xWay_Mono
The "N8000_LSC_xWay" control panel is available in five different versions - offering one, two, three, four, or five
channels. It is the equivalent of the DSP Block Window "Monaural Loudspeaker Controller" of a N8000. The
Loudspeaker Controllers to be controlled have to be linked to the Push Button or the Group via the menu item
"Administrate Connection" of the corresponding contextual menu.

N8000_PEQ_xBand (_Mono)
The "N8000_PEQ_xBand_Mono" control panel is available in five different versions - offering three, five, seven, or twelve
band PEQs. It is the equivalent of the DSP Block Window "Mono PEQ" of a N8000.
Element Description
Press this button to update the settings of all connected PEQs.


N8000_ToneControl_Mono
The "N8000_ToneControl_Mono" control panel is the equivalent of the DSP Block Window "Tone Control Mono" of a
N8000.

N8000_ToneGenerator_Mono
The "N8000_ToneGenerator_Mono" control panel is the equivalent of the DSP Block Window "Tone Generator Mono" of
a N8000.

N8000_Delay_xms
The "N8000_Delay_xms" control panel is the equivalent of the DSP Block Window "Mono Delay 10/100/500/2000 ms" of
a N8000.

IRIS-Net REMOTE AMPLIFIER | en 101
REMOTE AMPLIFIER
P-Series
Introduction
The IRIS-Net software (Intelligent Remote & Integrated Supervision) runs under Windows and allows configuring,
controlling and monitoring a complete PA-system from a single or from several PCs. Any operational status, e.g. power-
on, temperature, level, limiting, activation of protections, deviation of the output impedance, etc., are centrally
recorded and displayed, which offers the opportunity to react and interfere even before the occurrence of critical
operational states. Programming automated actions that are carried out when exceeding or falling short of certain
threshold values is possible as well. All parameters, e.g. power-on/off, level, mute, filters, etc. are controlled in real-
time and can be stored in any power amplifier.
Monitoring the connected loudspeaker systems is performed by continuously measuring output currents and voltages
of individual power amplifier channels. Each exceeding or falling short of set thresholds is instantly signaled and
logged. In this way, short-circuits or line interruptions, as they might occur during normal operation, are recognized
and displayed immediately. The integrated impedance test function allows checking the connected loudspeaker
systems more precisely. Together with the current/voltage testing function the integrated sweep-generator is employed
to measure the connected loudspeakers’ and cables’ impedance over the entire frequency range. The resulting
impedance graph is displayed on the PC-screen. Comparing the measured impedance progression with a reference
value is possible at all times, which allows recognizing even the slightest defects or irregularities of the loudspeaker
systems.
Next to its controlling and monitoring capabilities, the IRIS-Net System provides comprehensive signal processing
functions. A total of 20 parametric filters, X-over functions, delays, routing and level control as well as compressors and
limiters per each channel are included. All parameters can be freely edited and stored in up to eight user presets within
the remote amplifiers. Independent from network control all DSP settings (filter, delay, level) are maintained incase of
failure. Additionally, the control inputs of the power amps can be used for network-independent switching to another
preset (e.g. alarm settings with maximum energy for voice and text announcements).
Therefore, the IRIS-Net System fulfills even the highest safety requirements.

Remote Power Amps

Electro-Voice PRECISION SERIES REMOTE CONTROL Series of power amps employ most advanced technologies
offering a truly remarkable combination of outstanding audio performance, highest reliability and operational stability.
The gapless protection circuitry concept not only protects each power amp itself but also prevents the connected
loudspeaker systems from being damaged. These extensive protections include Dynamic Audio Limiters, DC/HF-
Protections, Back-EMF-Protection, Inrush Current Limiter, Short Circuit Protection and of course Thermal Overload
Protection for the output transistors and mains transformers.
Three-speed high performance fans guarantee outstanding thermal stability at absolute low running noise. The
ventilation is directed front-to-rear allowing trouble-free operation even in smaller amp-racks.
Comprehensively dimensioned power supply units with low-leakage toroidal transformers provide extensive headroom
far above the stated nominal power. Mechanical construction and workmanship also comply with the highest precision
manufacturing standards. The rigid sheet steel chassis resists even the most wearing touring operation.
The Electro-Voice PRECISION SERIES REMOTE CONTROL Series consists of the following remotely controlled power
amps:
– P3000RL 2 x 1300 W / 4 Ohm
– P1200RL 2 x 600 W / 4 Ohm
– P900RL 2 x 450 W/ 4 Ohm
– P1200RT 2 x 590 W / 100 V
– P900RT 2 x 410 W/ 100 V
Each power amplifier employs an RCM-24 Remote Control module, which allows integration into a Remote Control Net-
work consisting of up to 100 power amps. Detailed information on the individual modules is provided in the
corresponding manuals.

How to...
CHECKING/EDITING THE CONFIGURATION
Each remote amplifier in a project has an RCM-24 (Remote Control Module) installed. A PCI/USB-CAN-Interface can be
used to connect the CAN-Interface of an RCM-24 to the PC. Existing RCM-24 modules are configured in the
Configuration Window. When using a PCI-CAN-Interface or USB-CAN-Interface, the window needs to be opened via the
menu item "RCM-24 | Configuration via CAN Hardware".
Devices to be configured can be chosen in the left side of the window while the right side of the window selects the
data to be viewed during the configuration procedure.
Element Description
All devices in the list are selected for configuration.
Resets the current selection of devices to be configured.
Name of the device.
The current status of the device.
Only the settings of (a) RCM-24 module(s) will be shown.
Only the presets of (a) RCM-24 module(s) will be shown.
All parameters, i.e. settings and presets, of (a) RCM-24 module(s) will be
shown.
Writes the selected parameters into the RCM-24 module(s).
Reads the selected parameters out of the RCM-24 module(s).

Compares the settings of selected data in IRIS-Net and the RCM-24

modue(s).
Displays the differences in the parameters found during the comparison.

TESTING THE CONNECTED LOUDSPEAKER SYSTEMS
IRIS-Net allows convenient analysis of all loudspeaker systems connected to remote amplifiers used in a project. All
remote amplifiers are listed in the RCM-24 System Check Window.
Loudspeaker system checks can be performed for various power amplifiers at the same time.

Element Description
Takes the power amps selected in the list out of Standby Mode.
Puts the amplifiers selected in the list into Standby Mode.
Starts testing loudspeaker systems that are connected to power amps selected in the
list of amplifiers.
The measuring data of the previous test are stored as reference.
The level at which the loudspeaker systems test is performed.
Selects all amplifiers in the amplifier list.
Deselects all amplifiers in the amplifier list.
The measurement of the previous test is stored into a file.

Name of the amplifier consisting of CAN address, internal IRIS-Net name, and type of
amplifier.
The current status of the amplifier.
The current status of the amplifier's channel "A".
The current status of the amplifier's channel "B".

OVERVIEW OF ALL AMPS USED IN A PROJECT
The Overview Window shows all remote amplifiers of the current project. Names can be assigned to amplifiers as well
as to their input and output channels. Comfortable assignment of names in projects that include a large number of
amplifiers is possible through exporting a structured text file.
This text file can be edited using basically any text editor application. The modified text file can be imported into IRIS-
Net and the names included in the file are automatically assigned to the corresponding amplifiers as well as to their
respective input and output channels.
Caution!
Using * (asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a name is not permissible.
! Consequences

Element Description
Opens a text file containing the names of amplifiers including their input and output channels that
has previously been exported (and edited).

Stores a text file containing the names of amplifiers including their input and output channels.
The CAN-BUS address of a remote amplifier.
The remote amplifier model.
The name of a remote amplifier.
The name of input channel "A".
The name of input channel "B".
The name of output channel "A".
The name of output channel "B".

Amplifier Control Panel

Double clicking with the left mouse button on an amplifier gets you to the Amplifier Control Panel, which provides
access to the most important controls and indications of the selected amplifier.

Simultaneously opening several Amplifier Control Panels and placing them in any order on the computer screen is
possible as well. For dragging the panel windows around, please use the left mouse button and click on the title bar at
the top of the window. Keep the mouse button pressed while dragging the panel.
Element Description
Amplifier Type
(generated during amplifier selection or read from the amp while being on-line)
Using the left mouse button, click on the Close button to close the Amplifier Control Panel.
A name can be assigned to each amplifier to specify its use or position. Click on the gray-shaded
entry field below the Amplifier Type field and enter the desired name. Press Return on the keyboard
to acknowledge the entered name.
HINT: Entering amplifier names is also possible with in the Setup & Control Panel on the Config &
Info page.

The Online / Offline indicator signals whether the selected amplifier is included in the network or
off-line. The red OFFLINE indicator signals that the corresponding amplifier is off-line and that
therefore no communication is possible.
The green ONLINE indicator shows that the corresponding amplifier is on-line and that sending and

receiving data is possible. When on-line, any parameter changes are immediately transmitted and
active.
The amplifier channels are named channel A and B. A name can be assigned to each channel to
easily identify its allocation and use. Using the left mouse button, click in the entry field and enter

the desired name for the channel. Press Return on the keyboard to acknowledge your entry.
HINT: Entering channel names is also possible within the Setup & Control Panel on the Config &
Info page.
The CLIP indicator lights whenever the signal of the internal signal processor clips. The signal
processor’s headroom is 12 dB, which is no problem when using normal filter settings. However,
when drastically increasing the level of several adjacent or overlapping filters, distortion of high-
level signals may occur, which the CLIP indicator indicates. In that case reducing the signal-level or
trying a bit more moderate equalizer setting is recommended.
The LIMIT indicator lights whenever the digital limiter of the corresponding channel is activated, e.g.
when the signal level exceeds the specified threshold and the output level is being limited to this
value.
The COMP indicator lights when the digital compressor of the corresponding channel is activated,
e.g. when the signal level exceeds the specified threshold and the output level being reduced.
The LOAD indicator shows whether the load connected to the amplifier output is within the
allowable range or if short-circuit or line interruption has occurred. The green OK-indication signals
that the connected load is between the specified lower and upper limit values. These values are set

in the Setup & Control Panel in the Load screen. The red OPEN indication signals line interruption.
It lights whenever the connected load exceeds the upper limit value. The red SHORTED indication
signals short-circuit at the amplifier output. It lights whenever the connected load falls below the
lower limit value.
HINT: The connected load is monitored continually as soon as a signal with a voltage of > 250 m V
is present at the output. Calculation of signal levels below that threshold is not possible and the
indicator shows the last acquired state.
The TEMP display shows the amplifier’s internal temperature as a graph. The indicator lights green
whenever the amplifier is operated in its normal operational temperature range. The indicator lights
yellow whenever the amplifier builds up heat because of continuous high output. However, since the
internal fans provide sufficient ventilation there is no risk of thermal overload in this state. As soon
as temperature indication changes to red, reducing the output level is strongly recommended.
Otherwise the amplifier might cease operation because of thermal overload.
When the red PROTECT indicator lights, one of the internal protections (thermal overload, short-
circuit, Back-EMF, HF at the output, etc.) has been activated. In that case, the amplifier is separated
via output relay from the connected load to prevent possible damage of the loudspeaker systems or
the amplifier itself. The cause for the fault, a short-circuited speaker line for instance, must be
remedied. In case of thermal overload, you have to wait some time until the amplifier automatically
re-enters normal operation.
(see also Supervision & Test for additional fault information)

The LIMIT indicator lights as soon as the internal dynamic limiter is activated, which is the case
when the amplifier is operated at maximum output. Short-term blinking is not a problem, since the
internal limiter controls input levels of up to +20dBu down to a distortion rate of approximately 1%.
However, if this indicator lights permanently, reducing the output level is strongly recommended to
protect the connected loudspeaker systems from being damaged by capacity overload.
The Input Level Meters provide indication of the corresponding audio levels at the amplifier inputs
in dBu. The amplifier’s nominal input level is
+6dBu, the maximum level can be as high as +21dBu. In general, it is recommended that the
amplifier be operated in a range between 0 and
+10dBu. Only signal peaks should be at higher levels.
The level controls are for adjusting the overall amplification of the corresponding amplifier channel.
Setting the level controls to a value between 0dB and -6dB provides full output capacity. The
numerical field below the level controls indicates the set level, by which the output amplification is
attenuated, in dB.
The Output Level Meters provide indication of the corresponding audio levels at the amplifier
outputs. Indication in dB is relative to amplifier full-modulation. A 0dB output level (full-modulation)
is indicated in yellow.
The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding amplifier output to -∞.
Clicking the MUTE button with the left mouse button mutes the corresponding amplifier output. The
MUTE button is virtually pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with the left
mouse button disables the mute-function and the amplifier output is again active. The MUTE button

is virtually disengaged and not lit.
Clicking this switch activates the STATUS indicator on the amplifier’s rear panel as well as in the
amplifier’s front panel window in the IRIS-Net software. Normally, the STATUS indicator blinks only
during serial communication. Once the STATUS switch is engaged, the STATUS indicator blinks in a
steady but fast sequence. This function is meant for checking communication and for identifying or
searching an amplifier in a large system setup.
The address field indicates the set amplifier address. Assigning a new address is also possible by
clicking into the field with the left mouse button and entering the desired amplifier address.
Available values are 1 to 250. Press Return on the computer keyboard to acknowledge your entry.
The assigned address and the address specified by the setting of the selection switch on the
amplifier’s rear panel have to be identical. Each address can exist only once within a system.

These buttons allow assigning amplifier channels to the monitor bus. The monitor bus allows
monitoring any amplifier input or output signals within an installation. INPUT A / B selects the
corresponding input signal while OUTPUT A / B allows switching between the output signals of
channels A and B. Simply click on an amp channel’s icon to select it for monitoring. The
corresponding channel is assigned to the monitor bus. Any previous selection is simultaneously
canceled, so that only the actually selected amp channel can be monitored. Clicking the button of
an active amp channel separates the channel from the monitor bus.
This field indicates the active factory or user preset. Each remote amp has a factory setting F01
offering linear settings and eight user-programmable presets U0...U08 for storing random user data.
Loading and saving presets is done in the Setup & Control window.
Clicking on the SET button opens the Setup & Control Window, which provides access to all
amplifier- and DSP-parameters, control and monitoring functions plus additional function groups.
This soft-key allows switching an amplifier on or off. The STANDBY and POWER indicators signal the
actual operational status. The Config & Info window allows programming individual power-on delays
for each amplifier.
Note: The power-on delay defaults to „Address * 150 ms“. For address 8 the power-on delay default
would be for example: 8 * 150 ms = 1200 ms.
These indicators show the amp’s actual operational status. STANDBY lights whenever the amplifier
is in stand-by mode. POWER lights whenever the amplifier is powered-on and ready for operation. If
neither one of the indicators lights, the amplifier is either off-line or powered-off.

Control Functions
Communication amongst amplifiers is possible through sending and receiving messages that are referred to as "job
codes". In principle, a job code is a function number. Amplifiers send these function numbers via the CAN bus. A single
or several amplifiers are able to receive and interpret these job codes and execute the associated functions. Each
amplifier can send and receive up to 5 different job codes.
The Control Functions Window lists the job code numbers that are used by all the amplifiers in a project like they were
defined in the amplifiers' Config & Info Window. When clicking on a number in the list of job code numbers in the left
part of the window, all amplifiers using this number are listed in the right part of the window. This, for example, allows
determination whether a specific job code number has been configured for all amplifiers in a project.

Setup & Control

The Setup & Control window allows configuring all amplifier parameters. It also provides access to different test
functions. The window is divided into several pages according to the corresponding function groups:
Window Description
DSP The DSP page provides an overview plus access to all DSP functions (Filter, Delay, X-Over,
Dynamics) of the amplifier.

testing.
Test generator.

Clicking on the soft key SET in the Amplifier Control Panel opens the Setup & Control window.

CONFIG & INFO
The Config & Info window provides information and basic settings for the selected amplifier. Additionally, editing labels
and configuring control functions is possible as well.
To select the page click onto the Configuration & Information register in the Setup & Control Window.

Element Default Range Description
Shows the amplifier type
Shows the amp software’s version number (operating

system, firmware)
Shows the amplifier’s operating mode (only with

P3000RL). The P3000RL can be operated in NORMAL or
BRIDGED mode.
Address * 50...4000 ms Allows programming an amplifier’s power-on delay. Setting

150 ms 50 ms Steps different delay times is recommended to prevent the mains
fuse from blowing when powering on several amps at the
same time.
The value defaults to address * 150 ms
The labels of an amplifier and its input and output channels

are shown in a clear structure. All labels can be edited.
Changes are immediately adopted in the different panels
and windows (amplifier control panel, flow diagram,
overview).

A control port offering two control inputs and two control outputs is located on the amplifier’s rear panel. The
functions of these inputs and outputs can be randomly programmed. For example, the control inputs (GPI) can be used
for power- on / stand-by or preset switching as well as for changing parameters. The control outputs (GPO) are for
signaling internal statuses. They can directly trigger LEDs, control lamps or relays. In the Supervision & Test window
the states of the control inputs are displayed and you have the possibility to switch the control outputs manually. For
more information and electrical specifications of the control port, please refer to the amplifier manuals.
Control Inputs: Each status change of a control input can trigger a function. Different functions can be assigned for the
opening (OFF) or closing (ON) of a contact.
Example:
This example shows the programming of two control inputs where IN1 switches the amplifier on or off and IN2 selects
presets U02 or U03.
– IN1 ON: Power on (closing the contact of control input 1 switches the amplifier on)
– IN1 OFF: Power off (opening the contact of control input 1 switches the amplifier to stand-by)
– IN2 ON: Preset U03 (closing the contact of control input 2 selects preset U03)
– IN2 OFF: Preset U02 (opening the contact of control input 2 selects preset U02)

IN 1 ON This provides a listing of the two control inputs and their

IN 1 OFF statuses ON and OFF. The entries in the corresponding lines
IN 2 ON specify the action when closing (ON) or opening (OFF) a
IN 2 OFF contact.
(empty) This column allows assigning functions to a control input’s

statuses. Clicking the desired line in the Function menu
opens a dialog field that shows all accessible functions. The
table "Input and Receive Job Functions" lists all functions
together with their individual settings.
(empty) Here you can set the different function parameters. For more
information, please refer to the table "Input and Receive Job
Functions".
(empty) Certain functions allow specifying optional parameter values.
0 ms 0...10027 Here you can program delay or debouncing times. Following

ms a status change the assigned function is initiated after the
16.33 ms set time interval has past.
Steps

Control Outputs: Internal status changes inside of the amplifier, like for example operational faults, alerts when
exceeding parameter limits, and internal operational statuses can be signaled to external systems or central control
units.
Example:
This example shows the programming of two control outputs where OUT1 signals whether the amplifier’s power is
switched ON or OFF while OUT2 signals faulty operation.
– OUT1 ON: Power (control output 1 is closed when the amplifier’s power is switched on)
– OUT1 OFF: Invert Power (control output 1 is open when the amplifier’s power is switched off / stand-by mode)
– OUT2 ON: Errorflag (control output 2 is closed when operational faults according to the parameter list have
occurred)
– OUT2 OFF: Invert Errorflag (control output 2 is open when no faults have occurred)
0 OUT 1 ON This provides a listing of the two control outputs and their statuses
OUT 1 OFF ON and OFF. The entries in the corresponding lines specify which
OUT 2 ON status results in the closing (ON) or opening (OFF) of a contact.
OUT 2 OFF

(empty) This column allows assigning internal events (conditions) to a

control output’s statuses. Clicking the desired line in the Function
menu opens a dialog field that shows all accessible functions. The
table "Output and Transmit Job Conditions" lists all functions
information, please refer to the table "Output and Transmit Job
Conditions".
0 ms 0...10027 ms Here you can program delay or debouncing times. An event is

16.33 ms signaled following an internal status change and after the specified
Steps time interval has past.
(empty) (empty) / X This column allows entering whether a status is signaled when the
specified Condition is „true“ (no entry) or
„false“ (click „X“ to signal an inverted state).
(empty) This column displays the SYNC flag. „X“ specifies that the output is
synchronized with a sync-signal. This flag is erased when entering a
new Function.

Jobs
For amplifiers to be able to communicate with each other, it is possible to send and receive Job Codes. In principle, a
job code is a function number that an amplifier transmits via CAN-bus and that is received and interpreted by another
or several other amplifiers. Each amplifier is capable of transmitting and receiving up to 5 different job codes.
Programming job codes is nearly identical to the programming of control inputs and outputs.
Receive Jobs: A receive job is a function that is carried out as soon as the corresponding function number (the Receive
Job Code) is received.
Example:
This example shows the programming of four Receive Jobs. Jobs No. 1 and 2 switch the amplifier’s power on or off
while jobs No. 3 and 4 select presets U03 or U02. The fifth Receive Job has not been configured.
– Receive Job Nr. 1: Power on (receiving Job Code 1 switches the amplifier’s power on)
– Receive Job Nr. 2: Power off (receiving Job Code 2 switches the amplifier into stand-by mode)
– Receive Job Nr. 3: Preset U03 (receiving Job Code 3 selects preset U03)
0 1...10 Here, you can specify which incoming job code numbers a
23 specific amplifier recognizes. Entering random numbers between
0 and 1023 is possible.

(empty) This column allows assigning an individual function to each job

code received. Clicking the desired line in the Function menu
opens a dialog field that shows all accessible functions. The
table "Input and Receive Job Functions" lists all functions
information, please refer to the table "Input and Receive Job
Functions".

HINT: Programming identical control functions or receive jobs for several amps is easily accomplished by creating a
group that includes all the desired amps and afterwards perform the programming in the group’s Configuration &
Information dialog. All settings are automatically applied to all amplifiers of that group, which saves time and effort and
additionally reduces the risk of programming errors.
Transmit Jobs: Transmit Job defines a function number that is sent as soon as a specific internal event (condition)
occurs in the amplifier.
Example:
This example shows the programming of four Transmit Jobs. Jobs No. 1 and 2 are triggered by control input 1. Jobs
No. 3 and 4 are triggered by the status signaled from control input 2. The fifth transmit job has not been configured.
– Transmit Job Nr. 1: GPI IN1 (Job Code 1 is transmitted when control input 1 is closing)
– Transmit Job Nr. 2: Invert GPI IN1 (Job Code 2 is transmitted when control input 1 opens)

0 1...1023 Here, you can specify which job code numbers an amplifier
transmits on the occurrence of specific events. Entering
random numbers between 0 and 1023 is possible.
(empty) This column allows specifying an event (condition) that

triggers the corresponding transmit job code. Clicking the
desired line in the Condition menu opens a dialog field that
shows all accessible functions. The table "Output and
Transmit Job Conditions" lists all functions together with
their individual settings.
information, please refer to the table "Output and Transmit
Job Conditions".

0 ms 0...10027 Here, you can program delay or debouncing times. A

ms transmit job code is sent following a specific event and after
16.33 ms the specified time interval has past.
Steps
This column allows entering whether a job code is

transmitted when the specified Condition is "true" (no entry)
or "false" (click "X" to signal an inverted state).

Input and Receive Job functions: The following table lists all functions together with their individual settings, which
can be triggered via control input or Receive Job.
Function Parameter Opt. Value Function executed
Empty - - None
Power off on flip Power Off (Standby) Power On

Power-status change (ON to Stand-by and reverse)
Absolute All DSP Corresponding Set the specified absolute parameter value for the selected
parameters Parameter parameter
Value
(parameter-
dependent)
Relative All DSP Parameter Changes the actual value of the selected parameter by the specified
parameters Value Off- set offset value
(parameter-
dependent)
Flip Parameters Changes the status of the selected parameter (e.g. bypass On / Off)
with two
statuses
Preset U01 - U08, F01 Changes a preset to the specified preset number
Monitor Relay, IN A, IN on, off Activates respectively deactivates the selected monitor bus signal
B, OUT A, OUT
B
Ground A, B Resets the ground-fault error flag of selected amplifier channels

fault
Memo flag Set, Clear, Sets, erases or changes selected memory flags. Up to 16 memory
Toggle Memo flags are available and simultaneously accessible.
flags 1 - 16
Measurem Generator Starts the test generator with a tone signal of the specified frequency
ent frequency, at the levels specified for channels A / B for the selected duration (0
Time, Level A / ms = infinite)
B

Output and Transmit Job Conditions: The following table lists all amplifier statuses that can be used for triggering
control outputs or for sending Transmit Job Codes.

Function Parameter Opt.Value Invert Triggering Event/Status Change
Empty - - Not configured
Power Power On
X Power Off (Standby)
Absolute all DSP parameters Corresponding Set parameter value reached or

Parameter Value X exceeded Set parameter value
(parameter- declined
dependent)
Temp Temperature in °C Set temperature reached or exceeded

X Set temperature declined
VU IN A, IN B, OUT A, OUT B, Amp Level in dB Set level reached or exceeded Set level
Limiter A/B, DSP X declined
Limiter A/B, Compressor A/B
GPI IN 1, IN 2 Control input 1 / 2 closed (ON)

X Control input 1 / 2 open (OFF)
Errorflag All internal fault conditions Single or several error flags set None
X of the selected error flags set
Memoflag Enable for selected flags as Memory flags match the selected bit-
well as bit-pattern of flags 1 - X pattern Memory flags do not match the
16 selected bit-pattern
Preset U01 - U08, F01 Specified preset selected

X Other than the specified preset
selected

DSP

The DSP pages provide overview and access to all DSP parameters of an amplifier. Within this window you can use the
Flow Diagram Selector to link to different function groups.

FLOW DIAGRAM SELECTOR
The Flow Diagram Selector can be accessed from any DSP page offering navigation means within the DSP signal
processing functions. The Flow Diagram Selector lets you select different function blocks, where the actually selected

A short description of each DSP page is provided in the following table. Please refer to the corresponding chapters for
a more detailed explanation.
Page Description
Flow The signal flow display provides an overview of an amplifier’s DSP settings. This area also includes all
Diagram controls for the preset location and preset file management.
Master EQ The MASTER EQ page provides access to the two 5-band parametric equalizers of the amplifier inputs.
Master This page allows the programming of delay lines for the amplifier channels A and B as well as for the
Delay summed input A+B.
Channel The CHANNEL EQ page offers access to the two 5-band parametric equalizers of the amplifier outputs for
EQ speaker equalization.
X-Over Frequency crossover-filters as well as the parameters gain, polarity and alignment-delay for both
channels are located in the X-OVER area.
Dynamics This page provides access to compressor and limiter of each amplifier channel.

The DSP functions of a remote amplifier can be accessed by clicking onto the SET key in the Amplifier Control Panel
followed by a click on the DSP register in the Setup & Control Window.

FLOW DIAGRAM
The FLOW DIAGRAM window shows a signal flow diagram, which offers a quick overview of all DSP setting of an
amplifier. Labeling and routing channels can be done directly in the diagram. Clicking onto the corresponding function
blocks lets you access all other DSP parameters. All parameters that are necessary for the saving, loading and
previewing of loudspeaker presets are also accessible from this window.
The FLOW DIAGRAM window opens when clicking on the first, fourth or eighth block in the Flow Diagram Selector.



Function Blocks
Element Description
Input Block:
The text field allows specifying a name for the corresponding input channel.
A click with the right mouse button onto IN A or IN B opens the Copy & Paste
menu, which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding input
channel (Master EQ, Master Delay) to any other input channel within the
same project.
Master EQ Block:
The Master EQ block displays the 5 Master EQs of the corresponding input
channel. The 5 LEDs indicate which EQ-bands are being used while the
graph shows the frequency response of the Master EQ block. A single click
with the left mouse button onto this block opens the MASTER EQ page.
Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu, which
allows copying all parameters of the corresponding EQ block to any other EQ
block within the same project.
Master Delay Block:

This displays the Master Delay of the input channels. The corresponding LED
signals whether a delay has been programmed or not. The delay-value is
displayed together with the measurement unit next to the LED. The graph
shows the approximate usage of delay memory capacity. A single click with
the left mouse button onto this block opens the MASTER DELAY page.
allows copying all parameters of the corresponding Master Delay block to
any other Master Delay block within the same project.

Routing Block:
Here you can assign the output channel routing. The selection can be
performed using the two combination boxes or directly in the graphic display
by grabbing the left ends of the yellow respectively green lines with the
mouse and dragging and dropping them over the desired input channel.
A click with the right mouse button onto routing block opens the Copy &
Paste menu of all DSP settings, which allows copying all DSP parameters of
an amplifier to any other amplifier within the same project.
Channel EQ Block:
The Channel EQ block displays the 5 Channel EQs of the corresponding
output channel. The 5 LEDs indicate which EQ-bands are being used while
the graph shows the frequency response of the Channel EQ block. A single
click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the CHANNEL EQ
page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu,
which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding EQ block to any
other EQ block within the same project.
Crossover Block:
channel. The graph shows the frequency response that results from the set
X-Over parameters. Three additional LEDs indicate the status of gain trim,
polarity and delay. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block
opens the X- OVER page.
allows copying all parameters of the corresponding X-Over block to any other
X- Over block within the same project.
Level Block:
The numerical field is identical to the numerical field below the level controls
in the Amplifier Control Panel. So the field indicates the actually set
attenuation, by which the internally specified amplification is attenuated, in
dB.
The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding
amplifier output to -∞. Clicking the MUTE button with the left mouse button
mutes the corresponding amplifier output. The MUTE button is virtually
pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with the left
mouse button disables the mute-function and the amplifier output is again
active. The MUTE button is virtually disengaged and not lit.

Dynamics Block:
This block provides graphical display of the dynamics functions of the
corresponding output. The two LEDs indicate whether compressor or limiter
have been activated. The graph provides indication of the set values.
allows copying all parameters of the corresponding Dynamics block to any
other Dynamics block within the same project.
Output Block:
channel.
A click with the right mouse button onto OUT A or OUT B opens the Copy &
Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding
output channel (Routing, Channel EQ, X-Over, Dynamics) to any other output
channel within the same project. However, it is important to bear in mind
that the DSP data only is being copied. Impedance or speaker data is not
copied.

Status Indication
Element Description
The MEMORY display shows the number according to the actually audible preset.
However, this is only true if the EDITED LED lights green, i.e. no DSP parameter has
been changed since the last RECALL.
NAME indicates the name of the actually audible preset.
The EDITED indicator provides information whether a parameter has been altered
since the last RECALL. If the indicator lights red, parameters have been edited and
therefore differ from the ones of the preset that is shown.

Store / Recall / Preview
Element Description
Lets you select a preset number. The selection is valid for all following actions, e.g. RECALL,
PREVIEW or STORE.
This field allows assigning a name to a preset before saving it. The name is stored as well and
is displayed in the status line NAME after performing a RECALL.
STORE saves all momentary set DSP parameters together with the entered name into the
specified preset.

RECALL loads and displays all DSP parameters that are stored in the selected preset.
CAUTION: The loaded preset becomes instantly audible when in on-line mode. Be sure to
select the desired preset with the correct set of parameters. In the worst case, this could
lead to severe damage to the connected loudspeaker cabinets due to improper signal
processing!
PREVIEW reads and displays all DSP parameters that are stored in the selected preset.
This function is used to display and check a preset’s contents, without actually loading the
preset. You can neither listen to the preset nor edit its contents, as long as you do not
explicitly load it using the RECALL function.

Import / Export of Preset Files
IRIS-Net allows the storing of all DSP parameters of an amplifier together with the according preset name in a file, and
to load amplifier parameters from these files. Therefore, IRIS-Net creates a sub-directory \Presets during installation,
where all factory-presets are saved in to. It is recommended to save your own presets in this directory as well. For
improved organization, creating more sub-directories within the directory /Presets is permissible.
Element Description
After clicking onto IMPORT PRESET appears an Open File dialog box. Enter the correct path of the
directory in which the desired file is located and select the desired preset file to be opened. This loads

and afterwards displays all DSP parameters that are stored within that file.
CAUTION: The loaded preset becomes instantly audible when in online mode. Be sure to select the
desired preset with the correct set of parameters. In the worst case, this could lead to severe
damage to the connected loud speaker cabinets due to improper signal processing!
After clicking onto EXPORT PRESET a Save File dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the
directory that you want to save the data in. Enter a file name (without extension). Click onto the SAVE

button to store all DSP parameters together with the corresponding file name. “.ds” is automatically
added as file extension.

Import of EV RACE Files
Element Description




Caution!
Consequences

MASTER EQ
Both input channels of a remote amplifier employ 5-band parametric equalizers each, which allow programming highly
variable full-range speaker equalization to match a PA-system to different environmental and acoustical requirements.
In many cases post-mixing console parametric equalization becomes redundant.
The Master-EQ is selected by clicking on the second block of the flow diagram selector or by double clicking on the
MASTER EQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.



Graphics Display Indication
Element Description
Switches between frequency (magnitude) and phase response (phase) indication
Switch for selecting dB-axis scaling of 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or 50 dB (± 25 dB)
Shows the resulting transfer function of all filter and level trim settings – the visible and audible
result at the amplifier outputs. The audible result is displayed in bright colors while “electrical”
graphs are indicated in dark colors.
Selecting “separate” results in a separated display of the two amplifier channels’ transfer
functions while “sum” shows the summed signal of the amplifier channels.
Switch for including programmed delays in the frequency or phase response indication. The
delays mainly affect phase response indication. Indicating the amplifier channels’ summed signals
reveals very clearly the effect that the delays have on the frequency response, e.g. as notch filter
effect.
Switch for additionally indicating measured speaker transfer functions. For this function to be
effective you first have to load speaker data in the “Speaker” register sheet.

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting input A or input B for filter editing.

A click with the right mouse button opens the “Copy & Paste” menu, which allows convenient

copying all EQs of the corresponding input to any other EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters
Name of the corresponding filter band.

A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the “Copy &
Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of the
according filter to any other EQ within the same project.
PEQ PEQ. TYPE defines the filter type.

Loshelv. PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable frequency, Q

Hishelv, and gain.
Hipass, Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high shelving
Lopass equalizer with the following editable parameters: frequency, slope and
gain.
Lopass / Hipass creates low pass respectively high pass filters with
adjustable frequency and slope.
6dB/Oct 6dB/Oct, SLOPE sets the steepness or filter-order of low or high shelving
12dB/Oct equalizers and low or high pass filters. Setting different slopes within

the transmission range is possible. That, in conjunction with the Q-
parameter, offers the possibility for a hi-pass filter to be programmed
for B6-alignment, which describes a drastic rise in the cut-off frequency
range.
63 / 250 / 20 Hz...20 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or the
1000 / cut-off frequency of shelving

4000 / 16000 kHz and Hi / Lo pass filters.
Hz
0.7 0.4...40.0 Q defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ. A high Q-value
results in a narrowband filter,

(PEQ), while a small Q-value results in a broadband filter. The Q-value also sets
the quality and thus the res-
0.4...2.0 ponse of Hi, Lo and All pass filters with slopes of 12dB/oct.
(Hi-/
Lopass)
0 dB -18...+12 GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation (reduction) of

dB parametric EQs or low shelving and high shelving equalizers.

BYPASS switches the corresponding filter ON (not engaged) or OFF

(engaged), which allows for quick A / B-evaluation of the actual effect

that a filter has on the sound.

Filter Editing via “Mouse Movement” in the Graphics Display

A white dot in the frequency response display represents an active filter (BYPASS not engaged). Clicking with the left
mouse button on this dot and keeping the mouse button pressed down allows changing the selected filter’s frequency
by moving the mouse to the left or to the right as well as its amplification (depending on the selected filter type) by
moving the mouse up or down. Clicking with the right mouse button on the white dot and keeping the mouse button
pressed down allows changing the Q-values of parametric EQs.
For an improved overview the name of the corresponding filter band appears in color as soon as the mouse cursor is
positioned over its white dot. An additional white graph indicates the frequency response of the actually selected filter.

MASTER DELAY
Individual master delays can be set for each input channel of a remote amplifier. Setting a different delay for the
summed signal of the two input channels is also possible. Master Delays are mainly used to compensate for different
natural delay times in the audio signal, as they are common when two sound sources reproducing identical audio
information are located further apart.
You can select the master delay window by clicking onto the third block in the Flow Diagram Selector or by double
clicking onto the MASTER DELAY block in the flow diagram.

Channel Parameters
Channel name
A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the Copy &

Paste menu, which allows copying all master delay parameters of
the selected input to any other master delay within the same
project.

Channel identification
project.
2.0 ms 2.0...1000 DELAY allows delaying the corresponding input channel’s audio
ms signal by an adjustable period of time.

HINT: The amplifier accepts settings up to a total delay time of
1365ms per channel, including Master Delay and X-OVER Delay.
If a comparably long alignment delay has already been set for the
X-OVER, the delay time that is available for the master delay
scan fall below 1000ms!
BYPASS allows activating (button not engaged) or deactivating

(button engaged) the corresponding delay.

General Parameters
ms ms, samples, ft, in, This lets you select the unit of measurement for the delays.
m, cm,
µs, s
20 °C -20...60 °C or Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In case you
-4...140 °F have chosen a distance value as unit of measurement for the delay,
delay times are corrected in relation to temperature. Temperatures
can be entered as °C or °F.

Editing Delays by Dragging the Mouse in the Graphics Display
The graphics display shows the corresponding speaker symbol in color as soon as a delay has been activated. Clicking
with the left mouse button onto the speaker icon and keeping the mouse button pressed allows dragging the symbol to
the right or the left, which results in a change of the selected channel’s delay time. A delay’s title lights in color as soon
as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding icon to provide improved overview and handling.

CHANNEL EQ
Both output channels of a remote amplifier employ 5-band parametric equalizers each, mainly for speaker equalization.
Except for the possibility to select All pass as filter type, these filters are identical to the ones of the master-EQ's.
The Channel-EQ is selected by clicking on the fifth block of the flow diagram selector or by double clicking on the
CHANNEL EQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.



Element Description
Shows the resulting transfer function of all filter and level trim settings, the visible and audible
result at the amplifier outputs. The audible result is displayed in bright colors while electrical
Selecting separate results in a separated display of the two amplifier channels’ transfer functions
while sum shows the summed signal of the amplifier channels.
effect.
effective you first have to load speaker data in the Speaker register sheet.

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting output A or output B for filter editing.

A click with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows convenient

copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters

A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the „Copy &
Paste“ menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of the
PEQ PEQ. Loshelv. TYPE defines the filter type.

Hishelv, Hipass, PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable frequency, Q
Lopass, and gain.
Allpass Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high shelving
equalizer with the following editable parameters: frequency, slope and
gain.
Allpass is a filter which only affects the phase but not the frequency
response of the transmission function.
range.
63 / 250 / 20 Hz...20 kHz FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or the
1000 / cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass filters.
4000 /
16000 Hz
(PEQ), results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-value results in a
0.4...2.0 (Hi-/ broadband filter. The Q-value also sets the quality and thus the
Lopass), response of Hi, Lo and All pass filters with slopes of 12dB/oct.
0.4...2.0
(Allpass)
GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation (reduction) of

parametric EQs or low shelving and high shelving equalizers.
first first, second ORDER (only available with All pass filters) sets the desired filter order
of an All pass filter. A 1st order All pass filter rotates the phase by 180°,
a 2nd order All pass filter rotates the phase by 360°.


Filter Editing via Mouse Movement in the Graphics Display

by moving the mouse to the left or to the right as well as its gain or cut (depending on the selected filter type) by

X-OVER
The X-Over window allows accessing the frequency crossover with Hi- and Lo-Pass filters, a delay, gain-trim and
polarity selector switch, which are provided for each output channel of a remote amplifier. By means of these
parameters you are able to correctly configure a multi-way speaker system’s individual frequency bands, compensate
for natural delays and adjust levels.
Clicking on the sixth block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double clicking on the X-OVER block in the large signal flow
diagram opens the X-Over window.

The graphics display offers several different indication modes, as described in the following table. Indication generally
includes all effects of filters that are located pre X-Over (Master EQ, Channel EQ), which always provides precise over-
view and control of the resulting frequency response at this point.
Element Description

effect.

Channel Parameters
Channel name
A click with the right mouse button on this field opens

the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all X-
Over parameters of the corresponding output to any
other X-Over within the same project.
thru, 20 Hz RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the HI-PASS filter.

thru, 6dB, Different types of filters (Bessel, Butterworth,
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/ Linkwitz/Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct. and 24
Q=0.6, dB/Oct. can be set as filter response. Selecting filter
12dB/Q=0.7, 12dB/ frequencies between 20 Hz and 20 kHz is possible as
Q=0.8, well.
12dB/Q=1.0, 12dB/ A click with the right mouse button onto the HIPASS
Q=1.2, field opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/ copying all parameters of the corresponding HI- PASS
Q=2.0, filter to any HI-PASS filters within the same project.
Bessel 12dB,
Butterworth 12dB,
Linkwitz/Riley 12dB,
Bessel 18dB,
Butterworth 18dB,
Bessel 24dB, Butter-
worth 24dB,
Linkwitz/Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz

thru, 20000 RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the LO-PASS filter.
Hz thru, 6dB, Different types of filters (Bessel, Butterworth,
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/ Linkwitz/Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct. and 24
Q=0.6, dB/Oct. can be set as filter response. Selecting filter
12dB/Q=0.7, 12dB/ frequencies between 20 Hz and 20 kHz is possible as
Q=0.8, well.
12dB/Q=1.0, 12dB/ A click with the right mouse button onto the LOPASS
Q=1.2, field opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/ copying all parameters of the corresponding LO- PASS
Q=2.0, filter to any LO-PASS filters within the same project.
Bessel 12dB,
Butterworth 12dB,
Bessel 18dB,
Butterworth 18dB,
Bessel 24dB, Butter-
worth 24dB,
Linkwitz/Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz
0 dB -30 dB...6 dB GAIN TRIM allows increasing the level of the

corresponding channel by up to 6 dB or lowering it by
up to 30 dB to allow level adjustment among
individual frequency bands.
normal normal, inverted The POLARITY parameter offers the possibility to

invert a channels audio signal, i.e. to rotate its phase
by 180°. Inverting the signal may become necessary
for some specific crossover settings to eliminate the
risk of sound cancellation at the crossover frequency.
The effect of the polarity parameter becomes obvious
when displaying the summed signal of the two
amplifier channels (switch set to Sum).

0.0 ms 0.0...1000.0 ms DELAY allows delaying the audio signal of the

corresponding output by an adjustable period of time.
This delay method is typically used as time-alignment-
delay to overcome negative sound effects like they
result from different distances between loudspeaker
systems within one cabinet or the positioning of
speakers in a PA- installation that otherwise would
cause a high amount of natural delay.
HINT: The amplifier accepts settings up to a total
delay time of 1365 ms per channel including
MASTER DELAY and X-OVER DELAY. If a comparably
long MASTER DELAY has already been set, the
remaining delay time that is available for the output
delay can fall below 1000ms!
BYPASS allows activating (button not engaged) or

deactivating (button engaged) the corresponding
delay.

General Parameters
m, cm,
µs, s
20 °C -20...60 °C or Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In case

-4...140 °F you have chosen a distance value as unit of measurement for the
delay, delay times are corrected in relation to temperature.
Temperatures can be entered as °C or °F.

Editing X-Over Filters by Dragging the Mouse in the Graphics Display
Active X-Over filters (Response not set to thru) are indicated by a white dot on the frequency response curve, which
represents the corresponding filter. A click with the left mouse button onto this dot and keeping the mouse button
pressed down lets you set the frequency of the corresponding filter by moving the mouse to the left or the right.
A filter’s title lights in color as soon as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding white dot to provide
improved overview and handling. An extra white graph is displayed in addition, representing the frequency response of
the corresponding selected filter.

DYNAMICS
Each output channel of a remote amplifier offers a compressor and a limiter. These functions can be accessed via the
dynamics window to change the corresponding parameters providing reliable protection for the connected speaker
systems against sudden peaks and overload.
Clicking onto the seventh block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double clicking onto the DYNAMICS block in the large
flow diagram opens the dynamics window.



Channel Parameters
Element Description
Channel name
A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows

copying all dynamics parameters of the corresponding channel to any other channels within
the same project.

Compressor Parameters
A click with the right mouse button on this field

opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying
all compressor parameters of the corresponding
channel to any other channels within the same
project.
21 dBu -9.0...+21.0 The THRESHOLD parameter determines the audio

dBu or signal level above which the compressor starts

0.27...8.70 operating.
V
5 ms 0...99 ms ATTACK determines how fast the compressor

reduces amplification when the threshold is

exceeded.
250 ms 50...999 ms RELEASE determines how fast the compressor

returns to normal amplification, after the audio

signal level declined the threshold.

2:1 1 : 1, 1.4: 1, RATIO determines the amount of compression that

2: 1, the audio signal is compressed when exceeding the

4: 1, 8:1 threshold. The setting of 4 : 1 for example relates to
a reduction of the audio signal by the factor 4.
BYPASS switches the compressor on (button is not

engaged) or off (button is engaged). This allows

quick A / B-comparison of the compressed and non-
compressed audio signals.

Limiter Parameters

opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying
all limiter parameters of the corresponding channel
to any other channels within the same project.
21 dBu -9.0...+21.0 THRESHOLD determines the audio signal level above

dBu or which the limiter starts operating.
0.27...8.70
V
250 ms 50...999 ms RELEASE determines how fast the limiter returns to

normal amplification, after the audio signal level
declined the threshold.
BYPASS switches the limiter on (button is not

engaged) or off (button is engaged). This allows
quick A / B-comparison of the limited and non-
limited audio signals.

General Parameters
dBu dBu / This lets you select the unit for the threshold parameter. The
Volts selected setting applies to compressor and limiter as well.
dig. dig. This lets you set the absolute level for margin indication. You
Clip Clip, can select between Digital Clip (relates to +21 dBu) and
Limi- ter Limiter Threshold.

Thresh The margin level indicates the distance between signal level
and the set absolute level. The displayed margin always
relates to the highest actual signal level reading.

Indications
Element Description
These indicators show the reduction in dB that is applied to the audio signal by the compressor (COMP)
or limiter. Level reduction is indicated as vertical yellow bar graph.
The margin level indicates the distance between signal level and the set absolute level. The displayed
margin relates to the highest actual signal level reading since the last reset of the indicator. The LED
changes from green to red as soon as the signal level reaches or exceeds the set absolute level (Digital
Clip / Limiter Threshold). A click with the right mouse button onto the margin level followed by click onto
Reset re-sets indication.

Editing Compressor / Limiter Parameters by Dragging the Mouse in the Graphics Display
Active compressors or limiters (bypass button is not engaged) are indicated by a white dot in the graphics display
representing its function. A click with the left mouse button onto this dot and keeping the mouse button pressed down
lets you set the threshold for the corresponding compressor or limiter by vertically dragging the mouse. A click with the
right mouse button onto the white dot of a compressor and keeping the mouse button pressed down lets you edit the
ratio of compression.
A compressor’s / limiter’s title lights in color as soon as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding
white dot to provide improved overview and handling.

Speaker
Voice loudspeaker systems. Some examples are provided in the IRIS-Net directory Speaker Files.
user to customize the filter parameters. The summing display mode shows the result of amplifier plus speaker transfer
functions.
Clicking on the Speaker tab in the Setup & Control window opens the Speaker page.

Indication on the Graphic Display
Element Description
Switch for toggling between frequency response (magnitude) and phase response
(phase) display
Switch for adjusting the scale of the amplifier axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25
dB)
Switching the display of the corresponding speaker data for an amplifier channel on/off is
performed using the ”Show Speaker A” and ”Show Speaker B” switches.

Channel Parameters
Channel description and channel name

Clicking the button LOAD SPEAKER FILE opens a dialog that

allows the selection of the desired speaker file. Different
loudspeaker files can be found in the Speaker files IRIS-Net
folder. The name of the loaded loudspeaker model is shown in
the black-shaded field on the right.
Clicking the CLEAR SPEAKER DATA button clears the

previously loaded measured speaker data of the selected
channel.
1 1...8 The NUMBER OF SPEAKERS parameter allows the user to

specify the number of speaker systems connected to the

corresponding channel. Doubling the number of speakers
results in a level increase of 6 dB within the selected channel.
Set- ting an amount from 1 to 8 is possible.

Load
The Load window provides access to all settings and functions for testing and monitoring the load connected to the
amplifier outputs.
The constantly measured output voltage and output current values of the Remote Power Amplifiers are indicated within
the Load window. As soon as the output voltage of the signal present exceeds 150 mV, the resulting load is calculated
and indicated. If the set thresholds are being exceeded or fallen short of, a corresponding message appears in the
Load display of the Amplifier Control Panel. This dialog box permits to independently set the upper and lower
thresholds for each power amp channel.
Within the Load window it is also possible to measure speaker impedance graphs and save them as references. The
frequency range (start frequency, stop frequency) and the generator level of the sine-sweep test signal that is
generated for this test can be adjusted. Specifying a tolerance field for the saved reference graphs is possible as well.
A fault message is displayed in the event that a measurement exceeds or falls short of the tolerance range during
system check. Select the Load window by clicking on the Load tab in the Setup & Control Window.

The switches Show Load plot A and Show Load plot B

turn the indication of the corresponding impedance

graphs ON or OFF.
The switches Show Reference A and Show Reference B

turn the indication of the corresponding reference

impedance graphs ON or OFF.
1000 Ohm 50 Ohm...10 DIAGRAM RANGE allows zooming in or out the diagram’s
kOhm impedance range (Y- axis).

Parameters And Indications For The Continuous Monitoring Of The Load Connected
The load display indicates the quotient of measured voltage

and current (U/I).
This indication shows the actual measured load, the

progression, and the set value range. The orange needle

indicates the actual value. The bright green bar indicates
which loads have already been measured while being on-line.
A red indication signals that the value exceeded or fell short
of the set value range. The dark green area represents the
allowable value range for the load of the corresponding power
amp channel. The set HIGH THRESH respectively LOW
THRESH values define the limits for this value range. Moving
the cursor over the indication bar brings up a tool-tip context
menu showing the numerical value of the lowest, the highest,
and the actually measured load values. Clicking with the right
mouse button on the indication bar, followed by a click on
Reset, clears the previously measured load values (bright
green and red ranges disappear).
The VOLTAGE display provides continuous indication of the

corresponding power amp channel’s output voltage.

The CURRENT display provides continuous indication of the

corresponding power amp channel’s output current.

300 Ohm 0.0 Ohm...70 HIGH THRESH sets the upper limit of the allowable
kOhm impedance range (= minimum load). Once this value is

exceeded, an OPEN fault message (line interrupt) appears in
the Amplifier Control Panel.
1.0 0hm 0.0 Ohm...70 LOW THRESH sets the lower limit of the allowable impedance
kOhm range (= maximum load). Once this value is fallen short of, a

SHORTED fault message (line short-circuit) appears in the
Amplifier Control Panel.

Parameters for Impedance Measurement
LO LO, HI GEN. LEVEL sets the generator level for speaker impedance
testing. The generator level LO corresponds to -10dBu (245

mV), the generator level HI corresponds to 0dBu (775 mV).
CAUTION: Extremely high levels during measurement may
result in seriously damaging connected components.
20 Hz 20 Hz...20 SWEEP START sets the start frequency of the sine-sweep

kHz signal for speaker impedance testing.

20 kHz 20 Hz...20 SWEEP STOP sets the stop frequency of the sine-sweep

Clicking the START TEST soft-key launches the speaker

impedance test. The generated sine-sweep signal sweeps
over the previously defined frequency range. The graph of the
measured impedance values is indicated in the Load plot
display. Clicking this soft-key again cancels the test at any
time.
10% 5%...50% Clicking the SET REF. CH. A and/or SET REF. CH. B soft-key
saves the last test as reference. Clicking the CLEAR REF. CH.
A and/or CLEAR REF. CH. B soft-key clears the corresponding
reference. TOLERANCE defines the allowable deviation of the
impedance graph. Actual measured test results and saved
tolerance ranges are being compared during system check. A
fault message is displayed if any point of the actual
measurement falls outside of this tolerance range. The
tolerance range is graphically displayed as spread in the
corresponding color that surrounds the reference graph.
Supervision & Test

The Supervision & Test Dialog integrates functions for testing and monitoring power amps.
You can check control input states and trigger control outputs. A testing generator that provides sine, pink noise and
white noise signal output allows acoustical testing. Status indicators for general power amp operation, the two
amplifier channels and the load connected, indicate whether everything is okay or where failures occurred. You have
the option to choose, which errors are combined and indicated in a general fault message.
A click on the Supervision & Test tab selects the page while in the Setup & Control Window.


CONTROL INPUTS AND CONTROL OUTPUTS
Element Description
This dialog indicates the actual states of the two freely programmable control inputs IN1 and IN2.
A green indicator signals "not active", i.e. the control input is open or "high". A red indicator signals
"active", in that case the control input is connected to the ground or "low".
This dialog is for manually controlling the two Open Collector control outputs OUT1 and OUT2.
Not engaged (blue) indicates that the control output is deactivated or highly resistive while engaged
(red) indicates that the control output is activated and connected to the ground (closed).
HINT: When a control output has already been programmed, the programmed function defines the
state of the control output and manual control is not possible.

For detailed explanation on how to program control inputs and outputs please refer to chapter Config & Info.
TEST GENERATOR PARAMETERS
The test generator allows outputting a selected test-tone at an adjustable level via the power amps channel A and/or
channel B which allows testing the cable run from the amplifier output to the connected loudspeaker systems as well
as testing the functionality of the loudspeaker components.
SINE SINE, WHITE, Type selects the test tone's signal-type. Available choices are: sine
PINK signal, white noise or pink noise.
1000 Hz 20...20000 Hz Freq defines the frequency of the sine signal. This parameter is not
available when WHITE or PINK has been chosen as a test-tone signal.
dBu dBu, V Unit selects the unit of the generator level. If the push-button is not
engaged, the level is shown in dBu. When it is engaged, the output
voltage is indicated in volts.

0 dBu or -60...+10 dBu These controls are for setting output level [dBu] or output voltage [V] of
0.775 V or the corresponding amplifier outputs.
0.001...2.451
V
OFF OFF, ON These ON/OFF push-buttons activate or deactivate test-tone signal

output via corresponding amplifier channels.
CAUTION: Make sure to set a suitable output level, before activating
the generator. Extreme output levels can lead to permanent damage
of the connected loudspeaker systems!

ERROR DETECTION
Error detection lists the individual STATE of fault indications. Errors collected are amp failure, channel failure, cable
interruption, short-circuits, load deviation, ground fault, erroneous communication via the CAN bus as well as fault
messages of other amps. A green STATE indicator signals normal operation. A red STATE indicator signals error
detection.
If one of the corresponding DETECT boxes is marked, the state of that message is additionally included in the COLLEC-
TED ERROR STATE. When activating the HOLD option, the indicator stays red after the occurrence of an error. If the
HOLD option is not active, indication returns to green, once the fault is not detected anymore. Pressing the CLEAR but-
ton in the COLLECTED ERROR STATE line resets the indicator from red to green and stored errors are deleted. The
COLLECTED ERROR STATE indicator resembles exactly the Amplifier State indicator of the System Check Window. The
collected fault state message can be outputted via a control output. For detailed explanation please refer to chapter
Config & Info.

Detailed explanation of individual fault indications
Error type Description
PROTECT A red Protect indicator signals that one of the amp's internal protections has been activated
which usually results in auto-separating the power amps from the connected load via output
relays to protect the connected loudspeaker systems and the power amp from being
damaged. The Protect indicator lights for approx. 2 seconds during power-on operation.

OVER TEMPERATURE This indicator lights red when the power amp's temperature exceeds the pre-set threshold,
which defaults to 110 °C. If necessary, changing the temperature threshold is possible via
THERMAL LIMIT.
The power amp, however, is protected against thermal overload at all times, independent of
the indication.
COMMUNICATION This indicator shows whether communication at the CAN bus interface is normal (green) or
when a problem exists (red). The power amp automatically detects whether commands
from a PC or another central control unit are missing and signals the problem via the
Communication Flag.
SHORTED / LOAD LO This indicator lights red when the measured impedance value of the corresponding power
amp output falls below a pre-set minimum or when it is shorted. Setting the minimum value
is possible in the Load dialog.
OPEN / LOAD HI This indicator lights red when the measured impedance value of the corresponding power
amp output exceeds a pre-set maximum or when cable interruption is detected. Setting the
maximum value is possible in the Load dialog.
SUPERVISION Each amplifier channel can be monitored via internal pilot-tone signal. Pilot-tone signal (19
kHz, -10dBu) as well as detection and evaluation are active when the GENERATOR ON/OFF
switch is engaged. The indicator lights green as long as the pilot-tone signal is detected with
a sufficient level at the power amp output. A missing pilot-tone signal or a drop in its level
below -14 dBu / 150 mV results in fault detection. Indication changes to red.
INPUT PILOT A remote amplifier's audio inputs support pilot-tone detection and evaluation. Using an
DETECTION externally generated pilot-tone signal allows the monitoring of audio cables and analog input
stages. The threshold for 19 kHz pilot-tone evaluation is set to -40 dBu / 7.75 mV. The
indicator lights green when an external pilot-tone signal coming from mixer, matrix,
controller, etc. is detected. A missing pilot- tone signal or a drop in its level below the
evaluation threshold causes the indicator to change to red. Only mark the DETECT box next
to the indicator when an external pilot-tone signal actually exists and input monitoring has
been configured.
OUTPUT PILOT This indicator is for amplifier monitoring via external pilot-tone signal. In that case, internal
DETECTION pilot-tone generation needs to be switched off to avoid interference between the two
signals. Detection and evaluation is performed at the amplifier output. The indicator lights
green when a 19 kHz pilot-tone signal with a level of at least -14 dBu / 150mV is detected. A
missing pilot-tone signal or a drop in its level below -14 dBu (threshold) results in error
detection. The indicator changes to red.
CAUTION: The externally fed pilot-tone signal passes through the entire signal path of the
remote amplifier, i.e. the signal is influenced by filtering and x-over settings. When
setting the external pilot-tone generator's level, make sure to mind possible
amplification/attenuation applied by internal filters.
GROUND FAULT This indicator only exists for power amps with 100V transformer outputs (P900RT and
P1200RT). Speaker cabling is realized in 100V technique, i.e. usually without ground
reference - floating. If the indicator lights red, the evaluation circuit has detected a ground
fault at the amplifier output or in the loudspeaker cabling. Once detected, a ground fault is
stored in the power amp. After remedying the cause of the ground fault, press the CLEAR
button to clear the indication.

EXTERNAL AMPLIFIER A RCM-24 remote amplifier is capable of detecting and indicating the operational state of
STATE other RCM-24 amps within a CAN network. The addresses of all amps that are to be
monitored are entered in the ADDR field, e.g. 2-4,6,11. The FAULTY field indicates the amp
addresses for which errors have been detected and the COLLECTED ERROR STATE has
been activated (red). The indicator changes to red as soon as at least one amplifier in the
list shows erroneous operation.
COLLECTED ERROR COLLECTED ERROR STATE is a collected fault message that combines all error types
STATE detected for which the DETECT box had been marked. The HOLD function allows keeping
the COLLECTED ERROR STATE for later evaluation while CLEAR clears the indication after
remedying the cause of the fault.
The COLLECTED ERROR STATE indication is identical to the indication in the Amplifier
Status column within the System Check Window. The collected fault message can be
outputted via local control output and can also be used to transmit a fault message to other
power amps, where it is detected via EXTERNAL AMPLIFIER STATE.
System Examples
DEMO SYSTEM SMALL
The IRIS-Net project ”Demo System Small” is an example of a small EV remote amplifier system installation. This 2-way
stereo system includes the following equipment: 2x P3000RL, 2x Sx300 and 2x Sb121. This example is meant to
provide the necessary information to understand the entire set-up and configuration flexibility offered through the use
of the IRIS-Net software for such a system. The corresponding project file ”Demo System Small.ds” is located in the
following directory: ”\IRIS-Net\Projects\Demo System Small”.
The following documentation provides information of individual IRIS-Net pages, panels and parameter windows that
have been created and/or used for the realization of this project. Additional explanations for the bitmap graphics are
provided in yellow-shaded text fields.

Layer 1: Configuration Page



DSP Parameter Window


Layer 2: Control Page

Config & Info Window


XLCDEMOPROJECT
Layer 1: Administration Page


Layer 2: Amplifiers Page

Layer 3: Speaker Supervision Page

Layer 4: Speaker Mutes Page


Layer 5: Control Page

RS-232 Protocol for EV P-Series

The RS-232 port is located on the rear panel of EV P-Series remote power amps. It can be used as interface for the con-
nection of media control systems or facility management systems. RS-232 allows controlling and polling all parameters.
Communication is performed using an easy to implement ASCII protocol which allows easy integration of remote amps
in media and/or touch-panel applications. For programming notes and a complete description of the protocol please
refer to the following chapters.

RS-232SETTINGS
The RS-232 interface of the RCM-24 remote power amps is permanently configured allowing full duplex operation. Set
values are:
Parameter Setting
Baud Rate 19200 bits per second
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control Xon / Xoff

The command string "*** RCM-24 command mode entered ***" is sent to RS-232 after powering on the remote amp and
after a short initializing period. The RS-232 interface is now ready for communication.

ASCIICONTROLPROTOCOL
A simple ASCII string protocol, which is referred to as ASCII Control Protocol is implemented in the remote amps.
Commands are organized in a tree structure with up to 5 levels. The slash "/" or a space " " can be used for separation.
The question mark "?" can be utilized to query parameter settings or commands of the corresponding level. To step one
level down you have to enter "../".
The following table lists the ASCII Control Protocol commands with brief explanations.

Read
Level1 Level2 Level3 Level4 Level5 Write Values
Commands for RS232 communication
/COMM /LINEFEED R/W ON, OFF Linefeed state for RS232

communication
/PROMPT R/W ON, OFF Prompt state for RS232

communication
/ECHO R/W ON, OFF Echo state for RS232 communication

Amplifier / Channel Names
/NAME /AMP R/W up to 30 Amp name

characters
/IN_A R/W Input A name
/IN_B R/W Input B name
/OUT_A R/W Output A name
/OUT_B R/W Output B name

Amplifier Power On / Stand-by and

Operational State
/POWER /SWITCH R/W ON, OFF Switch amp ON / OFF or read out ON /
OFF state
/DELAY R/W 0...255 Power-On-Delay in steps of 20ms.

[*20ms] 0 sets the default value, dependent on
amp address.
/STANDBY R ON, OFF Read out the amp's Stand-by state
/PROTECT R ON, OFF Read out the amp's Protect state

Connect/Disconnect Amplifier
/SERVICE /CAN / 0...255 Transparent ASCII Control Protocol

CONN connection via CAN to remote RCM,
ECT writhe CAN address (1...250) of RCM
to connect to, or write 0 to disconnect.
Active remote connection is shown as
address in brackets before the prompt.

Commands for Level Indication
/METER /AUTO R/W ON, OFF Setting for automatic level meters
transmission via CAN

/QUIET R/W 0...255 Pause between level meters

[ms] transmission via CAN
/VU /RLS R/W 0...255 Release time for Input / Output level
[ms/ meters
dB]
/ R/W -128...127 Threshold for Input level meters

INPTR [dB] transmission via CAN
S
/ R/W -128...127 Threshold for Output level meters

OUTT [dB] transmission via CAN
RS
/LIMIT /RLS R/W 0...255 Release time for Limiter level meters
[ms/
dB]
/TRS R/W -128...127 Threshold for Limiter level meters

[dB] transmission via CAN
/READ R Read out all level meters
/U R Read out all output voltages
/I R Read out all output currents
/Z R/W Read out all output impedance values

including MIN / MAX values that
occurred. Writing the channel name (A,
B) deletes MIN / MAX values.

Commands for Amplifier Temperature

Indication
/TEMP /ACT R -20...150 Read out actual amp temperature

[°C]
/HI R/W 20...150 Threshold for thermal overload flag.

[°C] The flag is set as soon as the
temperature threshold is reached.
/HYS R/W 0...40 [°C] Hysteresis for thermal overload flag.

The flag is deleted, as soon as the
temperature falls below the threshold
minus hysteresis.

Commands for Audio Monitoring

/MONI R/W NONE, List of active elements for Audio

RELAY, Monitoring. Input and output channels
IN_A, can be monitored. RELAY switches
OUT_A, active channels onto the monitor bus.
IN_B,
OUT_B

Commands for DSP Parameters
/PRM /IDX100 R/W Read and write of DSP parameter

values via index numbers. For further
...
details please refer to "Descrip- tion of
/IDX1A5 R/W General DSP Parameters" and/or "DSP
Parame- ter Index Table".
/LOAD R/W 1...8, F1 Load User Presets U01...U08 or Factory

Presets F01. Readout of preset data
loaded last. An asterisk '*' behind the
preset number indicates that values
have already been edited.
/SAVE W 1...8 Save User Preset U01...U08.
/TITLE R/W bis 16 Preset name

Zeichen
/DLYTEMP R/W -20.0...+60. Ambient temperature for the

0 [°C] calculation of delays with distance
values.
/DLYUNIT R/W MS, SAMP- Delay unit. Delay values are read out
LES, FT, IN, with the here set unit. When writing
M, CM, US, delay values with /PRM/IDX... , the
S stated unit is saved together with the
value.

Commands for Control Inputs / Control

Outputs
/CONTROL /IN1 / R ON, OFF State of the control input

STATE
/ON /TIME R/W 0...10.0 [s] Delay / debounce time during

activation

/FNCT R/W NOTHING, Function during activation.

POWER, For further details please refer to the
ABS, REL, table "Control Inputs - GPI Functions"
TOG- GLE, below.
PRESET,
MONI,
GFRES,
MEMFLAG,
MEAS,
TEST- GEN
/PRM /... Parameter and values for the functions

mentioned before
/OFF ... (same as above but for the

deactivation of control inputs)
/IN2 ... (same as above but for the control

input 2)
/OUT1 / R/W ON, OFF State of the Control Output

STATE
/ON /TIME R/W 0...10.0 [s] Delay / debounce time for the
programmed condition
/FNCT R/W NOTHING, Condition that activates a control

POWER, output.
ABS, For further details please refer to the
TEMP, VU, table "Control Outputs - GPO
CTL_IN, Functions" on this page.
ERR- FLAG,
MEMFLAG,
PRESET
/INV R/W ON, OFF Inverts the result of the programmed

condition
/SYNC R/W ON, OFF Lets you select whether the control
outputs can be synchronized using a
special CAN-command.
/PRM /.. Parameters and values for functions

mentioned above
/OFF ... (same as above but for switching off a

control output)
/OUT2 ... (same as above but for the control

output 2)
/MEMFLAG /SET R/W NONE, List of currently set Memo flags

1...16

/CLR R/W NONE, List of currently reset Memo flags

1...16

Commands for Receive and Transmit

job codes
/JOB /RX1 /ID R/W 0...1023 Number (ID) for job code to be
received. Each power amp can receive
and interpret up to 5 job codes.
/FNCT R/W NOTHING, Function when receiving a job code.

POWER, For further details please refer to table
ABS, REL, "Job Codes - Receive Functions" on
TOG- GLE, this page.
PRESET,
MONI,
GFRES,
MEMFLAG,
MEAS,
TEST- GEN
/PRM /... Parameters and values for functions

mentioned above
... (same as above but for receiving Job

Codes 2 to 5)
/RX5 ...
/TX1 /ID R/W 0...1023 Number (ID) for job code to be

transmitted. Each power amp can
transmit up to 5 job codes.
/TIME R/W 0...10.0 [s] Delay / debounce time for programmed

condition
/FNCT R/W NOTHING, Condition that triggers the

POWER, transmission of a job code. For further
ABS, details please refer to table "Job
TEMP, VU, Codes - Transmit Functions" on this
CTL_IN, page.
ERR- FLAG,
MEMFLAG,
PRESET

condition

mentioned above
... (same as above but for transmitting

Job Codes 2 to 5)

/TX5 ...
/LAST /RX R/W 0000...03F The ID (hex code) of the last received
F job code is displayed during reading.
Writing simulates the reception of a job
code with the stated ID (hex code) by
the power amp.
/TX R/W 0000...03F The ID (hex code) of the last

F transmitted job code is displayed
during reading. Writing transmits a job
code with the stated ID (hex code).

Commands for the Pilot Tone

Generator
/PILOT /A / R/W ON, OFF Pilot tone generator ON / OFF for

SWITC channel A
H
/ R/W -128...+20 Pilot tone generator level for channel A

LEVEL [dBu]
/ R ON, OFF Channel A pilot tone error

ERRO
R
/ R ON, OFF Pilot tone recognized at input A

INPUT
/ R ON, OFF Pilot tone at output A

OUTP
UT
/B ... (same as above, but for channel B)

Commands for Amplifier Output Load
/LOAD /A /MIN R/W Lower output load threshold for

channel A (interpretation in error flag
ZMIN_A)
/MAX R/W Upper output load threshold for

channel A (interpretation in error flag
ZMAX_A)
/B ... (same as above, but for channel B)
/MEAS RW Reading displays the actual output load

A, B values including MIN and MAX values
that occurred.
Writing the channel names resets MIN
and MAX values.


Commands for Error and Status

Requests
/ERRFLAG /ACT R/W NONE, List of currently set status and error
POWER, flags.
STANDBY, Writing resets the flags GNDFLT_A,
PROTECT, GNDFLT_B, COLL- ECT, GLOBAL,
OVT, PRSGATE.
GNDFLT_A,
GNDFLT_B,
ZMIN_A,
ZMIN_B,
ZMAX_A,
ZMAX_B,
PILOT_A,
PILOT_B,
PRE- SET,
PCDUMP,
DIRTY,
PWR-
GOOD,
CAN-
POLL,
BRIDGED,
COLLECT,
GLOBAL,
MEAS,
Z_VLD_A,
Z_VLD_B,
EEPROM,
PRSGATE,
PLT_IN_A,
PLT_OUT_A
, PLT_IN_B,
PLT_OUT_B
/COLLECT R/W Flag template for Collected Error Flag

(a list of status and error flags as
mentioned above).
The state is buffered (Hold function)
when COLLECT is listed in the
template.
/GLBMASK R/W NONE, Template for monitoring GLOBAL

0...255 status and error flags of external CAN
devices.
/GLOBAL R NONE, List of external CAN devices with set

0...255 GLOBAL status and error flags.


Commands for Test Generator
/SERVICE /GEN /A / R/W ON, OFF Generator ON / OFF for channel A

SWITCH
/GAIN R/W -128...50 Generator output level for channel A

[dBu]
/B ... R/W (identical parameters for channel B)
/ R/W SINE, Test Generator signal type

MODE WHITE,
PINK
/ R/W 10.0...2000 Test Generator Frequency, when SINE

FREQ 0 has been selected
U .0 [Hz]
/MIX R/W ON, OFF Wanted signal and Generator signal

mixed (ON) or Generator solo (OFF)
/PRE R/W ON, OFF Generator signal fed in at the input or

at the output

Examples:
– /POWER/SWITCH ON switches amp's power on
– /TEMP/ACT ? queries the amp temperature
– /TEMP/ACT 65 reply to query: 65 °C
– /ERRFLAG/ACT ? queries operational state and error flags
– /ERRFLAG/ACT POWER,GLOBAL reply to query: Power is On, Global Error detected (Collected Error in external
CAN-devices)
– /ERRFLAG/GLOBAL ? queries for which external CAN-devices errors have been detected
– /ERRFLAG/GLOBAL 3-4 reply to query: Collected Error Flags on amps 3 and 4 are set
GENERAL DSP PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
Parameter Value/Settings Description
level -128...+6 [dB] -128dB is identical to MUTE
trim level -30...+6 [dB]
mute 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = MUTE
polarity 0/1 0 = Normal, 1 = Invertiert
route 0/1/2 0 = IN A, 1 = IN B, 2 = IN A+B
delay Delay value with unit (time or distance)

HINT: Reading displays the delay value independent
of the saved unit. Writing also stores the stated unit.
bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
eq type 0...5 0 = PEQ, 1 = LOSHELV, 2 = HISHELV, 3 = LOCUT, 4 =

HICUT, 5 = ALLPASS

eq slope 0/1/2 0 = 0dB/Oct, 1 = 6dB/Oct, 2 = 12dB/Oct
eq frequ 20...20000 [Hz]
eq gain -18...+12 [dB]
eq quality 0.4...40 EQ Quality
xover type 0...17 0 = Off, 1 = 6dB-Butterworth, 2 = 12dB/Q0.5, 3 = 12dB/

Q0.6, 4 = 12dB/Q0.7, 5 = 12dB/Q0.8, 6 = 12dB/Q1.0, 7
= 12dB/
Q1.2, 8 = 12dB/Q1.5, 9 = 12dB/Q2.0, 10 = 12dB-Bessel,
11 = 12dB-Butterworth, 12 = 12dB-Linkwitz, 13 = 18dB-
Bessel, 14 = 18dB-Butterworth, 15 = 24dB-Bessel, 16 =
24dB-Butterworth, 17 = 24dB-Linkwitz

DSP PARAMETER INDEX TABLE
Index Description Index Description
/PRM/IDX100 input A delay bypass /PRM/IDX160 output A eq2 quality
/PRM/IDX101 input A delay /PRM/IDX161 output A eq3 bypass
/PRM/IDX102 input A eq1 bypass /PRM/IDX162 output A eq3 type
/PRM/IDX103 input A eq1 type /PRM/IDX163 output A eq3 slope
/PRM/IDX104 input A eq1 slope /PRM/IDX164 output A eq3 frequ
/PRM/IDX105 input A eq1 frequ /PRM/IDX165 output A eq3 gain
/PRM/IDX106 input A eq1 gain /PRM/IDX166 output A eq3 quality
/PRM/IDX107 input A eq1 quality /PRM/IDX167 output A eq4 bypass
/PRM/IDX108 input A eq2 bypass /PRM/IDX168 output A eq4 type
/PRM/IDX109 input A eq2 type /PRM/IDX169 output A eq4 slope
/PRM/IDX10A input A eq2 slope /PRM/IDX16A output A eq4 frequ
/PRM/IDX10B input A eq2 frequ /PRM/IDX16B output A eq4 gain
/PRM/IDX10C input A eq2 gain /PRM/IDX16C output A eq4 quality
/PRM/IDX10D input A eq2 quality /PRM/IDX16D output A eq5 bypass
/PRM/IDX10E input A eq3 bypass /PRM/IDX16E output A eq5 type
/PRM/IDX10F input A eq3 type /PRM/IDX16F output A eq5 slope
/PRM/IDX110 input A eq3 slope /PRM/IDX170 output A eq5 frequency
/PRM/IDX111 input A eq3 frequ /PRM/IDX171 output A eq5 gain
/PRM/IDX112 input A eq3 gain /PRM/IDX172 output A eq5 quality
/PRM/IDX113 input A eq3 quality /PRM/IDX173 output B level
/PRM/IDX114 input A eq4 bypass /PRM/IDX174 output B trim level
/PRM/IDX115 input A eq4 type /PRM/IDX175 output B delay bypass

/PRM/IDX116 input A eq4 slope /PRM/IDX176 output B delay
/PRM/IDX117 input A eq4 frequ /PRM/IDX177 output B mute
/PRM/IDX118 input A eq4 gain /PRM/IDX178 output B polarity
/PRM/IDX119 input A eq4 quality /PRM/IDX179 output B route
/PRM/IDX11A input A eq5 bypass /PRM/IDX17A output B compressor

bypass
/PRM/IDX11B input A eq5 type /PRM/IDX17B output B compressor type

(ratio)
/PRM/IDX11C input A eq5 slope /PRM/IDX17C output B compressor

threshold
/PRM/IDX11D input A eq5 frequ /PRM/IDX17D output B compressor

attack
/PRM/IDX11E input A eq5 gain /PRM/IDX17E output B compressor

release
/PRM/IDX11F input A eq5 quality /PRM/IDX17F output B limiter bypass
/PRM/IDX120 input B delay bypass /PRM/IDX180 output B limiter threshold
/PRM/IDX121 input B delay /PRM/IDX181 output B limiter release
/PRM/IDX122 input B eq1 bypass /PRM/IDX182 output B xover hipass

type
/PRM/IDX123 input B eq1 type /PRM/IDX183 output B xover hipass

frequ
/PRM/IDX124 input B eq1 slope /PRM/IDX184 output B xover lopass

type
/PRM/IDX125 input B eq1 frequ /PRM/IDX185 output B xover lopass

frequ
/PRM/IDX126 input B eq1 gain /PRM/IDX186 output B eq1 bypass
/PRM/IDX127 input B eq1 quality /PRM/IDX187 output B eq1 type
/PRM/IDX128 input B eq2 bypass /PRM/IDX188 output B eq1 slope
/PRM/IDX129 input B eq2 type /PRM/IDX189 output B eq1 frequ
/PRM/IDX12A input B eq2 slope /PRM/IDX18A output B eq1 gain
/PRM/IDX12B input B eq2 frequ /PRM/IDX18B output B eq1 quality
/PRM/IDX12C input B eq2 gain /PRM/IDX18C output B eq2 bypass
/PRM/IDX12D input B eq2 quality /PRM/IDX18D output B eq2 type
/PRM/IDX12E input B eq3 bypass /PRM/IDX18E output B eq2 slope
/PRM/IDX12F input B eq3 type /PRM/IDX18F output B eq2 frequ
/PRM/IDX130 input B eq3 slope /PRM/IDX190 output B eq2 gain

/PRM/IDX131 input B eq3 frequ /PRM/IDX191 output B eq2 quality
/PRM/IDX134 input B eq4 bypass /PRM/IDX194 output B eq3 slope
/PRM/IDX135 input B eq4 type /PRM/IDX195 output B eq3 frequ
/PRM/IDX136 input B eq4 slope /PRM/IDX196 output B eq3 gain
/PRM/IDX137 input B eq4 frequ /PRM/IDX197 output B eq3 quality
/PRM/IDX13A input B eq5 bypass /PRM/IDX19A output B eq4 slope
/PRM/IDX13B input B eq5 type /PRM/IDX19B output B eq4 frequ
/PRM/IDX13C input B eq5 slope /PRM/IDX19C output B eq4 gain
/PRM/IDX13D input B eq5 frequ /PRM/IDX19D output B eq4 quality
/PRM/IDX13E input B eq5 gain /PRM/IDX19E output B eq5 bypass
/PRM/IDX13F input B eq5 quality /PRM/IDX19F output B eq5 type
/PRM/IDX140 input A+B delay /PRM/IDX1A0 output B eq5 slope

bypass
/PRM/IDX141 input A+B delay /PRM/IDX1A1 output B eq5 frequ
/PRM/IDX142 output A level /PRM/IDX1A2 output B eq5 gain
/PRM/IDX143 output A trim level /PRM/IDX1A3 output B eq5 quality
/PRM/IDX144 output A delay /PRM/IDX1A4 output A configuration

bypass
/PRM/IDX145 output A delay /PRM/IDX1A5 output B configuration
/PRM/IDX146 output A mute
/PRM/IDX147 output A polarity
/PRM/IDX148 output A route
/PRM/IDX149 output A compressor

bypass
/PRM/IDX14A output A compressor

type (ratio)
/PRM/IDX14B output A compressor

threshold
/PRM/IDX14C output A compressor

attack
/PRM/IDX14D output A compressor

release

/PRM/IDX14E output A limiter

bypass
/PRM/IDX14F output A limiter

threshold
/PRM/IDX150 output A limiter

release
/PRM/IDX151 output A xover

hipass type

hipass frequ

lopass type

lopass frequ
/PRM/IDX155 output A eq1 bypass
/PRM/IDX156 output A eq1 type
/PRM/IDX157 output A eq1 slope
/PRM/IDX158 output A eq1 frequ
/PRM/IDX159 output A eq1 gain
/PRM/IDX15A output A eq1 quality
/PRM/IDX15B output A eq2 bypass
/PRM/IDX15C output A eq2 type
/PRM/IDX15D output A eq2 slope
/PRM/IDX15E output A eq2 frequ
/PRM/IDX15F output A eq2 gain

Control Inputs - GPI Functions

Every control input can be programmed with individual functions for switching on (/CONTROL/INx/ON/...) and
switching off (/CONTROL/INx/OFF/...). When the state of a control input changes, the programmed function is
executed after the previously set delay or debounce times are expired (up to 10 sec.). Available functions are explained
in the following table.
Job Codes - Receive Functions

Job codes are distributed throughout the CAN network via broadcast commands. Each job code has a freely definable
number (ID). Received job codes can trigger the same functions as local GPI control inputs. Receiving a job code with
the defined number (ID) triggers the function with its specified parameter values. Available functions for /JOB/RXx/
FNCT/... and corresponding parameters /JOB/RXx/PRM/... are identical with local GPI functions, as outlined in the
table.

Function Parameter Range Description
NOTHING No function
POWER Controls Power On / Stand-by
../PRM/ ON Switched the amp's power to ON

SWITCH
OFF Switches the amp in Stand-by mode
FLIP Toggles between ON and Stand-by and vice versa
ABS Sets the selected DSP parameter to an absolute value
../PRM/IDX 100...1A5 Selects the DSP parameter via index number
../PRM/ Relative change of the parameter

VALUE
REL Changes the selected DSP parameter in relation to the actual value
../PRM/ Relative change of the parameter

VALUE
TOGGLE Toggles a DSP parameter between 0 and 1 (this only makes sense for
flag parameters, e.g. MUTE, BYPASS, etc.)
PRESET Loads a DSP preset
../PRM/NR 1...8, F1 Selects an user preset U01 to U08 or a factory preset F01
MONI Controls the selection for the audio monitoring bus
../PRM/SEL NONE, RELAY, Selects audio monitoring parameters. All combinations are possible.
IN_A, OUT_A, IN_B,
OUT_B
../PRM/ ON, OFF Switches the selected audio monitoring parameter ON or OFF
SWITCH
GFRES Deletes stored Ground Fault flags in selected channels
../PRM/CHAN A, B Any combination of output channels is possible
MEMFLAG Manipulates general Memo flags
../PRM/CLR NONE, 1...16 Clears selected flags
../PRM/ NONE, 1...16 Changes the state of selected flags. Use CLR and TOGGLE together,
TOGGLE so that selected flags are set afterwards.
MEAS Initiates impedance testing at a fixed frequency
../PRM/ 10...20000 [Hz] Generator frequency for impedance test

FREQU
../PRM/ -128...+50 [dBu] Generator level for impedance test in channel A

GAIN_A

../PRM/ -128...+50 [dBu] Generator level for impedance test in channel B

GAIN_B
../PRM/TIME 0.0, 0.1...4.17 Impedance test time span. 0.0 = continuously ON

[ms]
../PRM/MIX ON, OFF Wanted signal and Generator signal mixed
../PRM/PRE ON, OFF Generator signal fed in at the input (On) or output (Off) of the DSP
signal chain
TESTGEN Defines parameters for the audio testing generator
../PRM/A/ ON, OFF Switches the testing generator at channel A ON

SWITCH
../PRM/A/ -128...+50 [dBu] Defines the testing generator output level for channel A
GAIN
../PRM/B/... (same as above but for channel B)
../PRM/ SINE, WHITE, PINK Defines the testing generator's signal type
MODE
../PRM/ 10...20000 [Hz] Defines the generator frequency, when SINE is selected
FREQU
../PRM/MIX ON, OFF Wanted signal and Testing generator signal mixed
../PRM/PRE ON, OFF Testing generator signal fed in at the input (On) or output (Off) of the
DSP signal chain
ROUTING Manipulates the routing parameters in both channels simultaneously
../PRM/A A, B, A+B, Sets an input as audio source for output A

NO_CHANGE
../PRM/B A, B, A+B, Sets an input as audio source for output B

NO_CHANGE

CONTROL OUTPUTS - GPO FUNCTIONS
Two conditions can be programmed for each control output which either activate the output (/CONTROL/OUTx/ON/...)
or deactivate the output (/CONTROL/OUTx/OFF/...). When the assigned function (/CONTROL/OUTx/ON/FNCT or /
CONTROL/OUTx/OFF/FNCT) is recognized as "true" and the state is maintained for at least the set delay or debounce
times (up to 10 sec.), the control output changes to activated (On) or deactivated (Off). The INV parameter allows in-
verting the state of the assigned function. Synchronizing the switching of control outputs is possible by means of a
special system-wide CAN command, when SYNC is set to ON. Available functions and corresponding settings are ex-
plained in the following table.

JOB CODES - TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS
Job codes are distributed throughout the CAN network via broadcast command. Each job code has a freely definable
number (ID). Identical conditions can be assigned to job codes and control outputs. A job code with a defined number
(ID) is transmitted, when the corresponding condition for (/JOB/TXx/FNCT) is recognized as "true" and the state is
maintained for at least the set delay or debounce times (up to 10 sec.). The INV parameter allows inverting the state of
the assigned function. Available functions for /JOB/TXx/FNCT/... as well as corresponding parameters /JOB/TXx/PRM/
... are identical to local GPO functions, as outlined in the table.

NOTHING No function
POWER Interpretation results in "true", when the power amp is powered on

(even during power-on delay) and "false", when the amp's power is off.
ABS Interpretation results in "true", when the DSP parameter value is higher
or equals the reference value.
../PRM/ Reference value

VALUE
TEMP Interpretation results in "true", when the measured amplifier

temperature is higher or equals the reference value.
../PRM/ -20...150 [°C] Temperature reference value

CELSIUS
VU Interpretation results in "true", when at least one of the selected values

is higher or equals the programmed reference value.
../PRM/SEL IN_A, OUT_A, Any combination of the values listed is possible. ALIM = Amplifier
ALIM_A, Limiter
DLIM_A, DLIM = DSP Limiter COMP = DSP Compresser
COMP_A, IN_B.
OUT_B, ALIM_B,
DLIM_B,
COMP_B
../PRM/DB [dB] VU reference value
CTL_IN Interpretation results in "true", when the selected control input is

activated.
../PRM/IDX 1, 2 Selects a control input
ERRFLAG Interpretation results in "true", when one of the selected flags is set.
Any combination of the flags listed is possible.
../PRM/MASK POWER set, when the power is OFF
STANDBY set, when the amplifier is in Stand-by mode
PROTECT set, when the amp's Protect mode is activated
OVT set, when the amp's thermal limit is exceeded
GNDFLT_A, set, when ground fault has been detected

GNDFLT_B
ZMIN_A, set, when the measured output load is out of limit value range
ZMIN_B,
ZMAX_A,
ZMAX_B

PILOT_A, set, when pilot tone monitoring returns errors

PILOT_B
DIRTY set, when the actual preset has been edited but has not been saved yet
PWRGOOD set, when Power Good interpretation returns errors
CANPOLL set, when the CAN Polling timed out
BRIDGED set, when the power amp is operated in Bridged Mode (only with
P3000RL)
COLLECT set, when the amp's Collected Error Flag is ON
GLOBAL set, when the amp's External Amplifier Error Flag is ON
MEAS set, when the internal testing generator has been activated for output
load measurement
Z_VLD_A, set, when output load measuring is not possible because of missing or
Z_VLD_B too low signal
EEPROM set when there is an error in EEPROM administration
PRSGATE if not set, only limited preset changes are possible
PLT_IN_A, set, when the 19kHz pilot tone signal applied to the amplifier input is
PLT_IN_B not recognized
PLT_OUT_A, set, when the 19kHz pilot tone signal applied to the amplifier output is
PLT_OUT_B not recognized
MEMFLAG Interpretation results in "true", when the actual state of the selected
memo flags resembles the reference pattern.
../PRM/MASK NONE, 1...16 Selects memo flags to be interpreted (listing)
../PRM/ NONE, 1...16 Defines the expected reference pattern for memo flags
VALUE
PRESET Interpretation results in "true", when the actual preset is identical to a

selected preset.
../PRM/DIRTY ON, OFF Selection is also valid, when parameters have been changed (dirty)
../PRM/USER NONE, 1...8 List of selected user presets
../PRM/FACT NONE, 1 List of selected factory presets

Firmware Upgrade
The firmware of EV remote amps is stored in a FLASH-memory chip. This technology has been chosen to be able to pro-
vide the users with new software without the hassle of physically exchanging memory chips inside of a remote
amplifier. Using IRIS-Net, upgrading the firmware is possible via the CAN Remote Control Interface. In this way you can
install new firmware and future software extensions to always keep your EV Remote Amplifier System up-to-date.

Caution!
Upgrading the firmware is always a very sensible procedure – comparable to updating the OS in
! the FLASH-memory of a PC. Therefore, obeying the following precautions and instructions is
absolutely mandatory:
Consequences

1. Make sure your mains supply is absolutely stable and the mains fuse is sufficiently dimensioned to be capable of
handling all amplifiers connected.
Loss of power during the upgrade would result in the firmware installation being incomplete or deleted and the
remote amplifier could not be operated. In such a case installing the firmware is only possible through the use of a
special FLASH boot loader via RS-232 interface.
For details please contact an authorized service center or our technical support.
2. Simultaneously upgrading the firmware of more than four remote amplifiers is not recommended. Performing a fir-
mware-upgrade for the first time, only connect a single remote amp. Once you are familiar with the upgrading pro-
cedure, you can connect and update 2, 3 or 4 amps at the same time.
3. Only connect the remote amps to the CAN Remote Control network that are to be updated. Disconnect any other
remote amps from the CAN-bus during the upgrade. Make sure to carefully mind all regulations for the CAN
Remote Control network, especially the 120 Ω termination at both ends of the bus.
4. Check the status of the CAN-interface. The parameter “State” has to show “OK”. The values of the error flags “l h
o (ov ot to) wr” may not change or rise to guarantee proper remote amp connection.
5. Even when fault messages appear during the upgrade procedure, the irrevocable rule is: NEVER SWITCH OFF THE
POWER OF AN AMPLIFIER THAT IS TO BE UPGRADED!
If any fault messages are indicated, repeating the upgrade procedure for the affected remote amplifier step-by-
step is possible. If in doubt or in need of assistance, please contact an service center or our technical support.

HOW TO UPGRADE THE FIRMWARE
1. Connect the desired remote amp(s) via CAN-bus to your PC.
2. Start the IRIS-Net software and open your project. Your remote amps and the icon of a PC with CAN-label should
appear on your screen. The PC-icon represents the CAN-interface of your PC or notebook.
3. Double-clicking onto the PC-icon opens the CAN-interface window. CAN-bus status and connected remote amps
are displayed. This window display is available in off-line mode.

4. Make sure to check the following parameters before upgrading:
Element Description
Baud rate Indicates the set baud rate. Normally you don’t have to change the system’s baud rate for upgrading.
RCM-24 Indicates the addresses of the remote amps connected. Make sure that the addresses shown are only
the ones of remote amps that you want to upgrade.
State Indicates the CAN-interface status. This has to read “OK”. Otherwise, starting the firmware upgrade is
not permissible.
l h o (... Indicates different error flags. Under no circumstance the first 3 digits may rise. Clicking into the white
field and entering “0” resets the error flags.
Band width Indicates the used bandwidth of the CAN-bus in percent. Make sure to check that the CAN-bus is not
used too busy, i.e. high data traffic.
5. The CAN-interface window provides a toolbar (top line). Clicking onto the U-icon (Update) opens the Module
Selection dialog. Select RCM-24 and click the Continue button.
6. The actual firmware file including version number and date is indicated and can be selected in the line “Firmware”.
The IRIS-Net software package always includes the most up-to-date remote amplifier firmware version. The
corresponding file is located in the directory: \IRIS-Net\Firmware\RCM-24. This path also appears in the line
“Location”. If you want to install a different (preferably newer) firmware version, you have to copy the
corresponding file into this directory first.

7. Click onto the button “Select Devices...” to open a list of all remote amps connected. Select the amp(s) that you
want to update and click into the “OK” filed. The list should only show amps that you want to update. No other
amplifier should be connected to the CAN-bus. When performing the firmware upgrade for the first time,
connecting only a single amplifier is recommended to become familiar with the upgrading procedure.
8. The addresses of the selected remote amp(s) are shown in the firmware update window on the right side next to
the button “Select Devices...” and in the line “Active Devices”. Clicking onto “Start Update” starts the upgrade
procedure. The single steps of the update are shown in the “Messages” window. The progress of some parts of
the upgrade which take a little longer is indicated through dots behind the corresponding name. The message “ok”
has to appear at the end of each line. The following example shows how to upgrade the firmware of the remote
amps with the addresses 1 and 2 to firmware version V 1.18.

9. The message “Finishing ... ok” indicates that upgrading has been successful. The remote amp(s) are reset. After-
wards they are again ready for operation. The upgrade procedure is finished and you can close the dialog window
or proceed with upgrading other remote amps.

ADDITIONAL NOTES CONCERNING A FIRMWARE UPGRADE
– The line “Active Devices” indicates which of the selected remote amps are still to be updated. Amps for which the
update process timed out are taken off the list. These devices are still capable of receiving upgrade commands.
However, the software does not wait for acknowledgements of the concerned amps any longer.
– If the IRIS-Net-software recognizes an error or “Time Out” during upgrading, it automatically switches to “Single
Step” mode, which offers the possibility to repeat the upgrade in single steps. If a “Time Out” message is
displayed while upgrading is in progress, under no circumstance switch off any amps!
– As soon as “Single Step” is checked off, all buttons below the single step field become active. The upgrade can
now be performed manually, step- by-step in the sequence as described below. If one of the commands does not
finish “ok”, you have to restart the upgrade procedure from the beginning.
Step Description
Start Update Activates update mode for the selected devices.

The messages window shows “Update started (addresses)” .. and after a short period of time “ok”.
Verify Compares the firmware installed in the remote amps with the selected firmware file.
The messages window shows “Verifying (addresses)”...a progression-bar indicates the approximate
duration of the process. Detected differences are indicated at the end of the process, e.g. “done,
Errors detected for...”. If no errors time-outs are detected, you can proceed with the update.
Erase Flashes Deletes the actual firmware and clears the FLASH-memory of a remote amplifier.
The messages window shows “Erasing (addresses)”..... and after a short period of time “ok”.
Program Loads the new firmware into the FLASH-memory of a remote amplifier.
The messages window shows “Programming (addresses)"........ A progression-bar indicates the
approximate duration of the programming. “ok” appears in the message window after some time.

Checksum Evaluates the checksum of the newly installed firmware.

The messages window shows “Checksum (addresses)” .. and after a short period of time “ok”. This
is a short form of the “Verify” process.
Stop Update Finishes upgrading.

The messages window shows “Finishing (addresses)" .. and after a short period of time “ok”. The
remote amps quit the update mode and start in normal mode.
Now, you can exit the upgrade dialog or proceed with upgrading other remote amps.
– If “Time Out” errors still occur during the programming, repeat the procedure in single step mode in the following
sequence: Start Update - Pro- gram.
– If the checksum evaluation shows errors, repeat the entire upgrade procedure. Don’t forget to uncheck “Single
Step” mode, for the upgrade to run automatically.

RCM-26
Using RCM-26 remote amplifiers

The IRIS-Net software (Intelligent Remote & Integrated Supervision) runs under Windows and allows configuring,
controlling and monitoring a complete PA-system from a single or from several PCs. Any operational status, e.g. power-
on, temperature, level, limiting, activation of protections, deviation of the output impedance, etc., are centrally
recorded and displayed, which offers the opportunity to react and interfere even before the occurrence of critical
operational states. Programming automated actions that are carried out when exceeding or falling short of certain
threshold values is possible as well. All parameters, e.g. power-on/off, level, mute, filters, etc. are controlled in real-
time and can be stored in any power amplifier.
Monitoring the connected loudspeaker systems is performed by continuously measuring output currents and voltages
of individual power amplifier channels. Each exceeding or falling short of set thresholds is instantly signaled and
logged. In this way, short-circuits or line interruptions, as they might occur during normal operation, are recognized
and displayed immediately. The integrated impedance test function allows checking the connected loudspeaker
systems more precisely. Together with the current/voltage testing function the integrated sweep-generator is employed
to measure the connected loudspeakers’ and cables’ impedance over the entire frequency range. The resulting
impedance graph is displayed on the PC-screen. Comparing the measured impedance progression with a reference
value is possible at all times, which allows recognizing even the slightest defects or irregularities of the loudspeaker
systems.
Besides controlling and monitoring amplifiers, the RCM-26 also offers all conventional signal processing functions, like
parametric equalizers, frequency crossovers, delays and limiters. Beyond that, FIR-filters are available to optimize the
amplifiers and loudspeaker system. All DSP-settings can be freely edited and stored in user presets directly on the
module. Independent from network control all DSP settings (filter, delay, level) are maintained incase of failure.
Furthermore, the RCM-26 provides a control port with freely programmable control inputs and control outputs. Control
inputs (GPI's) allow the connection of switches. IRIS-Net offers the possibility to program a variety of logic functions
for the inputs (e.g. switching to an alarm-preset with maximum energy in the speech area). Control outputs (GPO's)
allow the connection of external components, which, for example, are used to signal specific states to peripheral
equipment. Consequently, an amplifier with a RCM-26 module installed corresponds to highest safety requirements.
The RCM-26 has been designed with uncompromising audio quality in mind. Analog audio inputs (internally) and an
AES3 (AES/EBU) digital audio input with XLR-type connector are provided. The use of the digital audio input offers a
dynamic range of 128 dB. Using the analog audio input offers a dynamic range of 120 dB, which, by the way, is an
absolute peak value for digital audio devices.

Remote Amplifiers
The Remote Control Module RCM-26 can be used in following power amplifiers:

DYNACORD POWERH SERIE
– H 2500 2 x 1450 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 2000 W / 2 Ohm
– H 5000 2 x 2500 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 3500 W / 2 Ohm

ELECTRO-VOICE TOUR GRADE SERIE
– TG-5 2 x 1450 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 2000 W / 2 Ohm
– TG-7 2 x 2500 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 3500 W / 2 Ohm
The power amplifiers marks a milestone in the design and the production of high-performance power amplifiers. The
innovative 3-stage Grounded Bridge Class H Topology with ”floating” switching power supply unit offers very high and
stable output with extreme high efficiency on an extremely high performance level at minimum weight.
PowerH / Tour Grade Series amplifiers are ideal for driving professional touring, high-end Concert-Sound and Pro-
Sound applications. Next to classical protections, this new design employs the multi-stage ATP system (Advanced
Thermal Protection) for the first time, which in most cases prevents the power amplifier from switching off when the
temperature exceeds a critical level. The newly designed MCS system (Mains Current Supervision) prevents power
amplifier breakdown caused by the activation of the automatic circuit breaker. For this, among other things, the MCS
system uses the highly precise measurement of the RMS value of the actual mains current consumption. Information
about the status of the power amplifier and its internal protections is provided on a LC-display. By utilizing the
optionally available remote control module that is compatible with IRIS-Net, this power amplifier additionally offers
comprehensive remote monitoring and remote control functions plus a universal 2-channel digital audio controller
(DSP) including highly precise FIR-filtering.

access to the most important controls and indications of the selected amplifier. Simultaneously opening several
Amplifier Control Panels and placing them in any order on the computer screen is possible as well. For dragging the
panel windows around, please use the left mouse button and click on the title bar at the top of the window. Keep the
mouse button pressed while dragging the panel.

Element Description
Amplifier Type
HINT: Entering amplifier names is also possible within the Setup & Control Panel on the Config &
Info page.
CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a name is not permissible.

active.


Info page.
The LIMIT indicator lights whenever the digital limiter of the corresponding channel is activated,
e.g. when the signal level exceeds the specified threshold and the output level is being limited to
this value.
The TL indicator lights when the thermal limiter of the corresponding channel is activated.
allowable range or if short-circuit or line interruption has occurred.
The green OK-indication signals that the connected load is between the specified lower and upper

limit values. These values are set in the Setup & Control Panel in the Load screen.
The red OPEN indication signals line interruption. It lights whenever the connected load exceeds
the upper limit value.
The red SHORTED indication signals short-circuit at the amplifier output. It lights whenever the
connected load falls below the lower limit value.
HINT: The connected load is monitored continually as soon as a signal with a voltage of > 150 mV
whenever the amplifier is operated in its normal operational temperature range. The indicator lights
yellow whenever the amplifier builds up heat because of continuous high output. However, since
the internal fans provide sufficient ventilation there is no risk of thermal overload in this state. As
soon as temperature indication changes to red, reducing the output level is strongly recommended.
Otherwise the amplifier might cease operation because of thermal overload.
The MUTE indicator lights when the amplifier is muted. This occurs e.g. during speaker switch-on
delay or switching the amplifiers input sensitivity.
When the red PROT indicator lights, one of the internal protections (thermal overload, short-circuit,
Back-EMF, HF at the output, etc.) has been activated
However, a lit PROT LED does not necessarily mean that the signal path gets switched off. The
differentiated protections concept of the power amp results in several protection circuits being
activated one after another, which ensures that under normal circumstances the power amplifier
will stay in the safe and stabile operating range. In case the amplifier needs to be switched off to
prevent power amplifier and connected speaker systems from being damaged, this is indicated by
the PROT and MUTE LEDs being lit simultaneously.

attenuated, in dB.
The currently used audio input (ANLG or AES3) is indicated.
MUTE button is virtually pressed and lights red.
Clicking the MUTE button once again with the left mouse button disables the mute-function and the

amplifier output is again active. The MUTE button is virtually disengaged and not lit.
AMP MODE indicates the operation mode of the power amplifier blocks. Possible settings are
NORMAL and BRIDGED. Switching the amp mode is only possible locally at the power amplifier,
details can be found in the amplifiers owner's manual.
GAIN/SENSITIVITY displays the amplifiers constant gain of +35 dB.
AMP ROUTING shows how the audio inputs handle the input signals. Possible settings are DUAL
and PARALLEL. Switching the amp routing is only possible locally at the power amplifiers, details
can be found in the amplifiers owner's manual.

These buttons allow assigning amplifier channels to the monitor bus. The monitor bus allows
monitoring any amplifier input or output signals within an installation. INPUT A / B selects the
corresponding input signal while OUTPUT A / B allows switching between the output signals of
channels A and B. Simply click on an amp channel’s icon to select it for monitoring. The
corresponding channel is assigned to the monitor bus. Any previous selection is simultaneously
canceled, so that only the actually selected amp channel can be monitored. Clicking the button of
an active amp channel separates the channel from the monitor bus.
This field indicates the active factory, user or owner preset. Each remote amp has two factory
setting F01 (48 kHz) and F02 (96 kHz) offering linear settings and six user-programmable presets
U01...U06 for storing random user data. There are also two password-protected owner presets.
Loading and saving presets is done in the Setup & Control window.
POWER CONSUMPTION indicates the current power consumption of the power amplifier in VA.
for each amplifier.
HINT: The power-on delay defaults to “Address*150ms”. For address 8 the power-on delay
default would be for example: 8*150ms=1200ms.
These indicators show the amp’s actual operational status.

STANDBY lights whenever the amplifier is in stand-by mode. POWER lights whenever the amplifier is
powered-on and ready for operation. If neither one of the indicators lights, the amplifier is either
off-line or powered-off.
Setup & Control

Window Description
Config. & Info This page provides information about the amplifier and allows making several basic settings as well
of the amplifier.

testing.
Test generator.

Clicking on the „SET“ soft key in the Amplifier Control Panel opens the Setup & Control window.
Config & Info

is possible in this window.
To select the page click on the Configuration & Information tab in the Setup & Control Window.

Amplifier Info
Element Description
AMPLIFIER Shows the amplifier type

MODEL
AMPLIFIER Shows the amplifier‘s software version number (operating system, firmware)
FIRMWARE
RCM-26 Shows the remote control module‘s software version number (operating system, firmware)
FIRMWARE
OPERATING Shows the amplifier’s operating mode. The power amplifier can be operated in NORMAL or
MODE BRIDGED mode.
AMP ROUTING Shows how the amplifier's audio inputs handle the input signals. Possible amp routings are DUAL
and PARALLEL.
GROUND LIFT Shows the setting of the amplifier's GROUND LIFT switch. Possible settings are GROUNDED and
UNGROUNDED.
UPTIME Shows the uptime of the amplifier (standby not included) since the last reset of the Event Log.
For further details about the amplifier’s Event Log please refer to the owner's manual.
MAINS VOLTAGE Shows the mains voltage and the mains current consumption.


Amplifier Setup
GAIN/ GAIN/SENSITIVITY displays the amplifiers constant gain of +35 dB.

SENSITIVITY
POWER DELAY Address * 50...4000 ms Allows programming an amplifier’s power-on delay. Setting different
150 ms 50 ms Steps delay times is recommended to prevent the mains fuse from blowing
when powering on several amps at the same time.
BREAKER Show the current setting of the amplifier's Mains Circuit Breaker
Protection. For further details about this protection please refer to
the owner's manual.
INPUT SELECT Allow selecting the audio input. The analog audio input (ANALOG) or
the digital audio input (AES/ EBU) are available.
HINT: The value of the property “Audio Input” corresponds to the
currently used audio input. You can write the value “ANLG” to this
property to select the analog audio input. You can write the value
“AES” to this property to select the digital audio input.

Digital Input
Indicates if the digital audio input is synchronized to the input signal

(LOCKED LED on) or if synchronization was not successful (ERROR-
LED off).
HINT: The current state of the digital audio input is available via the
property “StateFlags. AES Locked” also.
SAMPLE RATE 96 kHz 32...129 Shows the sample rate of the digital input signal.
kHz
Auto Switch Activate this control if the audio input should switch from digital
Enable input to analog input automatically if the digital input signal is not
OK.
HINT: The value of the property “Audio Input Switching. AES Fail.
Enable” corresponds to this control.

Amplifier & Channel Labels
Element Description
The labels of an amplifier and its input and output channels are shown in a clear
structure. All labels can be edited. Changes are immediately reflected in the different
panels and windows (amplifier control panel, flow diagram, and overview).
CAUTION: Using*(asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a name is not permissible.

SWITCHING AUDIO INPUTS AUTOMATICALLY
RCM-26 remote amplifiers allow automatic switching from the AES feed to the analog input in the case of failure of the
AES signal or input. This feature allows a redundant analog signal to be fed to the amplifier and automatically switch
over to the “backup” signal without user intervention.
Open the Modify Properties dialog from the context menu of the RCM-26 remote amplifier in the IRIS-Net worksheet.
Following table lists the relevant properties for automatic audio input switching.
Property Default Range Description
Audio Input Switching. AES 0 0, 1 Set the value to 1 to enable the auto fall back function
Fail. Enable which switches from AES to analog input in case of an AES
error. This property corresponds to the „Auto Switch
Enable“ control found in the Config & Info window.
Audio Input Switching. AES 1s 0 to 120 s Configures the duration the AES error had to be present on
Fail. Time the input to trigger the AES / analog switching.
Audio Input Switching. AES 0 0, 1 Setting this property to 1 enables the automatic switching
Good. Enable from analog input to AES input in case the AES signal is
OK.
HINT: This works only if the values of both properties –
Audio Input Switching. AES Fail. Enable and Audio Input
Switching. AES Good. Enable-are set to 1.
Audio Input Switching. AES 5s 0 to 120 s Configures the duration the AES signal had to be in
Good. Time „Locked“ state, to switch back from analog to the AES
input.
Audio Input Switching. AES 0 0, 1 Shows that the AES signal is locked and without errors for
Ok Flag longer than the configured Audio Input Switching. AES
Good Time.
Audio Input Switching. AES 0 0, 1 Shows that the AES input is used as amplifier audio input.
Selected Flag
Audio Input Switching. 0 - Counts how often the Auto Switch ganged the input.
Counter

Control Port
functions of these inputs and outputs can be programmed in a variety of ways. For example, the control inputs (GPI)
can be used for power-on / stand-by or preset switching as well as for changing parameters. The control outputs (GPO)
are for signaling internal statuses. They can directly trigger LEDs, control lamps or relays. In the Supervision & Test
window the states of the control inputs are displayed and you have the possibility to switch the control outputs
manually. For more information and electrical specifications of the control port, please refer to the amplifier‘s manual.
Example:
presets U02 or U03.
IN 1 ON This provides a listing of the two control inputs and their statuses ON and OFF.
IN 1 OFF The entries in the corresponding lines specify the action when closing (ON) or
IN 2 ON opening (OFF) a contact.
IN 2 OFF
(empty) This column allows assigning functions to a control input’s statuses. Clicking
the desired line in the Function menu opens a dialog field that shows all
accessible functions. The table "Input and Receive Job Functions" lists all func-
tions together with their individual settings.
(empty) Here you can set the different function parameters. For more information,
please refer to the table "Input and Receive Job Functions".
0 ms 0...10027 ms Here you can program delay or debouncing times. Following a status change
16.33 ms the assigned function is initiated after the set time interval has past.
Steps

Control Outputs: Internal status changes inside of the amplifier, such as operational faults, alerts when exceeding
parameter limits, and internal operational statuses can be signaled to external systems or central control units.
Example:

– OUT2 ON: Errorflag (control output 2 is closed when operational faults according to the parameter list have
occurred)
– OUT2 OFF: Invert Errorflag (control output 2 is open when no faults have occurred)
0 OUT 1 ON This provides a listing of the two control outputs and their statuses ON and
OUT 1 OFF OFF. The entries in the corresponding lines specify which status results in
OUT 2 ON the closing (ON) or opening (OFF) of a contact.
OUT 2 OFF
(empty) This column allows assigning internal events (conditions) to a control

output’s statuses. Clicking the desired line in the Function menu opens a
dialog field that shows all accessible functions. The table "Output and
Transmit Job Conditions" lists all functions together with their individual
settings.
please refer to the table "Output and Transmit Job Conditions".
0 ms 0...10027 ms Here you can program delay or debouncing times. An event is signaled
16.33 ms following an internal status change and after the specified time interval has
Steps past.
(empty) (empty) / X This column allows entering whether a status is signaled when the specified
Condition is „true“ (no entry) or „false“ (click „X“ to signal an inverted
state).
synchronized with a sync- signal. This flag is erased when entering a new
Function.

Jobs
Example:

0 1...1023 Here, you can specify which incoming job code numbers a specific amplifier
recognizes. Entering random numbers between 0 and 1023 is possible.
(empty) This column allows assigning an individual function to each job code received.
Clicking the desired line in the Function menu opens a dialog field that shows all
accessible functions. The table "Input and Receive Job Functions" lists all functions
(empty) Here you can set the different function parameters. For more information, please
refer to the table "Input and Receive Job Functions".

HINT: Programming identical control functions or receive jobs for several amps is easily accomplished by creating
Programming identical control functions or receive jobs for several amps is easily accomplished by creating a group
that includes all the desired amps and afterwards perform the programming in the group’s Configuration&
Information dialog. All settings are automatically applied to all amplifiers of that group, which saves time and effort
and additionally reduces the risk of programming errors.
Example:
0 1...65536 Here, you can specify which job code numbers an amplifier transmits on the
occurrence of specific events. Entering random numbers between 0 and 65536
is possible.

(empty) This column allows specifying an event (condition) that triggers the
corresponding transmit job code. Clicking the desired line in the Condition
menu opens a dialog field that shows all accessible functions. The table
"Output and Transmit Job Conditions" lists all functions together with their
individual settings.
0 ms 0...10027 ms Here, you can program delay or debouncing times. A transmit job code is sent
16.33 ms following a specific event and after the specified time interval has past.
Steps
This column allows entering whether a job code is transmitted when the
specified Condition is "true" (no entry) or "false" (click "X" to signal an inverted
state).

Input and Receive Job Function: The following table lists all functions together with their individual settings, which
Empty - - None

Value
(parameter-
dependent)
(parameter-
dependent)
Flip Parameters Changes the status of the selected parameter (e.g. bypass On / Off)
with two
statuses
Preset U01 - U08, F01 Changes a preset to the specified preset number
Monitor Relay, IN A, IN on, off Activates respectively deactivates the selected monitor bus signal
B, OUT A, OUT
B
flags 1 - 16

Measurem Generator Starts measurement with a tone signal of the specified frequency at
ent frequency, the levels specified for channels A / B for the selected duration (0 ms
Time, Level A / = infinite)
B
Test Channel, Signal Starts the test generator with selected signal type or of the specified
generator type, frequency at the levels specified for channels A / B for the selected
Frequency, duration (0 ms = infinite)
Solo/Pre, Level

Power Power On
Absolute all DSP parameters Corresponding Set parameter value reached or exceeded
Parameter Value X Set parameter value declined
(parameter-
dependent)
Temp Temperature in °C Set temperature reached or exceeded Set

X temperature declined
VU IN A, IN B, OUT A, OUT B, Level in dB Set level reached or exceeded Set level

Limiter A/B, X declined
Compressor A/B
GPI IN 1, IN 2 Control input 1 / 2 closed (ON) Control input

X 1 / 2 open (OFF)
Errorflag All internal fault Single or several error flags set None of the
conditions X selected error flags set
Memoflag Enable for selected flags Memory flags match the selected bit-pattern
as well as bit- pattern of X Memory flags do not match the selected bit-
flags 1 - 16 pattern
Preset U01 - U08, F01-F02, O01- Specified preset selected

O02 X Other than the specified preset selected
DSP



Selte Description
Flow The signal flow display provides an overview of an amplifier’s DSP settings. This area also includes all
Diagram controls for the preset location and preset file management.
Master EQ The MASTER EQ page provides access to the two 6-band parametric equalizers of the amplifier inputs.
Master This page allows the programming of delay lines for the amplifier channels A and B.
Delay
Channel The CHANNEL EQ page offers access to the two 6-band parametric equalizers of the amplifier outputs for
EQ speaker equalization.
X-Over Frequency crossover-filters as well as the parameters gain, polarity and alignment-delay for both
channels are located in the X-OVER area.
FIR-Filter This page provides a FIR-Filter for each amplifier channel.
Limiters This page provides access to Peak Anticipation limiter and Thermal limiter of each amplifier channel.

followed by a click on the DSP register in the Setup & Control Window.

FLOW DIAGRAM
The FLOW DIAGRAM window shows a signal flow diagram, which offers a quick overview of all DSP setting of an
amplifier. Labeling and routing channels can be done directly in the diagram. Clicking onto the corresponding function
blocks lets you access all other DSP parameters. All parameters that are necessary for the saving, loading and
previewing of loudspeaker presets are also accessible from this window.
The FLOW DIAGRAM window opens when clicking on the first, fourth or ninth block in the Flow Diagram Selector.

Function blocks
Element Description
Input Block:
The text field allows specifying a name for the corresponding input
channel. The drop down allows selecting the audio input type of the
corresponding input channel.

HINT: Selecting different audio input types for the amplifier's input
channels is not possible.
A click with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu,
which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding input channel
(Master EQ, Master Delay) to any other input channel within the same
project.
Master EQ Block:
The Master EQ block displays the 6 Master EQs of the corresponding
input channel. The 6 LEDs indicate which EQ-bands are being used
while the graph shows the frequency response of the Master EQ block.

A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the
MASTER EQ page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy
& Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters of the
corresponding EQ block to any other EQ block within the same project.
Master Delay Block:

This displays the Master Delay of the input channels. The corresponding
LED signals whether a delay has been programmed or not. The delay-
value is displayed together with the measurement unit next to the LED.

The graph shows the approximate usage of delay memory capacity. A
single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the
MASTER DELAY page.
which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding Master Delay
block to any other Master Delay block within the same project.
Routing Block:
Here you can assign the output channel routing. The A and B buttons
allow selecting the input signal for the corresponding output channel.
Clicking with the right mouse button onto the dB display opens a fader.
A click with the right mouse button onto routing block opens the Copy
& Paste menu of all DSP settings, which allows copying all DSP
parameters of an amplifier to any other amplifier within the same
project.

Channel EQ Block:
The Channel EQ block displays the 6 Channel EQs of the corresponding
output channel. The 6 LEDs indicate which EQ-bands are being used
while the graph shows the frequency response of the Channel EQ block.

A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the
CHANNEL EQ page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the
corresponding EQ block to any other EQ block within the same project.
Crossover Block:
channel. The graph shows the frequency response that results from the
set X-Over parameters. Three additional LEDs indicate the status of gain

trim, polarity and delay. A single click with the left mouse button onto
this block opens the X- OVER page.
which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding X-Over block
to any other X-Over block within the same project.
FIR Filter Block:

This block represents the FIR Filter within the corresponding output
channel. The graph shows the frequency response that results from the
set FIR parameters. The LED indicate if the FIR Filter is being used. A

single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the FIR
page.
which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding FIR Filter
block to any other FIR Filter block within the same project.
Level Block:
The numerical field is identical to the numerical field below the level
controls in the Amplifier Control Panel. So the field indicates the
actually set attenuation, by which the internally specified amplification

is attenuated, in dB.
The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the
corresponding amplifier output to -∞. Clicking the MUTE button with the
left mouse button mutes the corresponding amplifier output. The MUTE
button is virtually pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button
once again with the left mouse button disables the mute-function and
the amplifier output is again active. The MUTE button is virtually
disengaged and not lit.
Limiters Block:
This block provides graphical display of the limiter functions of the
corresponding output. The two LEDs indicate whether peak limiter or
thermal limiter have been activated. The graph provides indication of

the set values.
which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding Limiters
block to any other Limiters block within the same project.



Crossover, FIR Filter and Limiters. The text field allows editing the
description of the Speaker Setting file.
Output Block:
channel.
A click with the right mouse button onto OUT A or OUT B opens the

corresponding output channel (Routing, Channel EQ, X-Over, FIR Filter,
Dynamics) to any other output channel within the same project.
However, it is important to bear in mind that the DSP data only is being
copied. Impedance or speaker data is not copied.

Status Indication
Element Description
However, this is only true if the EDITED LED lights green, i.e. no DSP parameter has been
changed since the last RECALL.
NAME indicates the name of the actually audible preset.
The EDITED indicator provides information whether a parameter has been altered since
the last RECALL. If the indicator lights red, parameters have been edited and therefore
differ from the ones of the preset that is shown.

Store / Recall / Preview
Element Description
STORE saves all momentary set DSP parameters into the actually loaded preset.

STORE TO...saves all momentary set DSP parameters into a selectable User Preset. In online
mode the parameters can be saved into a selectable Owner Preset. A click with the left mouse
button opens the "Store To Preset" dialog, where the preset can be selected and a name can
be assigned to the preset.

In online mode the password protection of the owner presets can be activated. Press the Set
Password button to open the „Set Owner Password“ dialog.

Enter the password into the text boxes and confirm the password by pressing the OK button.
For editing protected Owner presets press the Unlock Owner Presets button and enter the
password.

RECALL loads and displays all DSP parameters that are stored in the selected preset.
processing!
PREVIEW reads and displays all DSP parameters that are stored in the selected preset.
This function is used to display and check a preset’s contents, without actually loading the
preset. You can neither listen to the preset nor edit its contents, as long as you do not
explicitly load it using the RECALL function.

Preset after Startup
Element Description
After switching on the power amplifier a specified Preset can be loaded or the last DSP settings can
be restored. Click the ASSING... button with the left mouse button opens the Assign Startup Preset
dialog, where the Preset to be recalled or Audible for restoring last DSP settings can be selected.

Switching sample rate
Element Description
The RCM-26 Remote Control Module allows signal processing with a sample rate of 48 kHz or
96 kHz.
HINT: Switching sample rate is only possible in off-line mode.

to load amplifier parameters from these files. Therefore, IRIS-Net creates a sub-directory \Presets during installation,
where all factory-presets are saved in to. It is recommended to save your own presets in this directory as well. For
improved organization, creating more sub-directories within the directory /Presets is permissible.
Element Description
After clicking onto IMPORT PRESET appears an „Open File“ dialog box. Enter the correct path of the

CAUTION: The loaded preset becomes instantly audible when in on-line mode. Be sure to select the
damage to the connected loud speaker cabinets due to improper signal processing!
After clicking onto EXPORT PRESET a „Save File“ dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the

button to store all DSP parameters together with the corresponding file name. „.ds“ is automatically

Element Description

Caution!
Consequences

MASTER EQ
Both input channels of a remote amplifier employ 6-band parametric equalizers each, which allow programming highly
variable full-range speaker equalization to match a PA-system to different environmental and acoustical requirements.
In many cases post-mixing console parametric equalization becomes redundant.
The Master-EQ is selected by clicking on the second block of the flow diagram selector or by double clicking on the
MASTER EQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.


Element Description
Shows the resulting transfer function of all filter and level trim settings – the visible and audible
result at the amplifier outputs. The audible result is displayed in bright colors while “electrical”
Selecting “separate” results in a separated display of the two amplifier channels’ transfer
functions while “sum” shows the summed signal of the amplifier channels.
effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description

A click with the right mouse button opens the “Copy & Paste” menu, which allows convenient

copying all EQs of the corresponding input to any other EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters

A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the “Copy &
Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of the


Hishelv, and gain.
gain.

range.
31/ 125 / 20 Hz...20 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or the

2000 / 8000 / kHz and Hi / Lo pass filters.
20000 Hz

(Hi-/
Lopass)







MASTER DELAY
You can select the master delay window by clicking onto the third block in the Flow Diagram Selector or by double
clicking onto the MASTER DELAY block in the flow diagram.

Channel Parameters
Channel name

project.
project.

0.0 ms 0.0...2000 DELAY allows delaying the corresponding input channel’s audio
ms signal by an adjustable period of time.

BYPASS allows activating (button not engaged) or deactivating

(button engaged) the corresponding delay.

General Parameters
m, cm,
µs, s
20 °C -20...60 °C or Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In case you
delay times are corrected in relation to temperature. Temperatures
can be entered as °C or °F.

the right or the left, which results in a change of the selected channel’s delay time. A delay’s title lights in color as soon
as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding icon to provide improved overview and handling.

CHANNEL EQ
Both output channels of a remote amplifier employ 6-band parametric equalizers each, mainly for speaker equalization.
Except for the possibility to select All pass as filter type, these filters are identical to the ones of the master-EQ's. The
Channel-EQ is selected by clicking on the fifth block of the flow diagram selector or by double clicking on the
CHANNEL EQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.

Graphics display Indication
Element Description
effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting output A or output B for filter editing.

A click with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows convenient

copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters

A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the „Copy &
Paste“ menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of the


Hishelv, and gain.
Lopass, equalizer with the following editable parameters: frequency, slope and
Allpass gain.


range.


1000 / 4000 / kHz and Hi / Lo pass filters.
16000 Hz

(Hi-/
Lopass),
0.4...2.0
(All-
pass)


first first, ORDER (only available with All pass filters) sets the desired filter order
second of an All pass filter. A 1st order All pass filter rotates the phase by 180°,
a 2nd order All pass filter rotates the phase by 360°.



Filter Editing via Mouse Movement in the Graphics Display


X-OVER
polarity selector switch, which are provided for each output channel of a remote amplifier. By means of these
Clicking on the sixth block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double clicking on the X-OVER block in the large signal flow
diagram opens the X-Over window.

Element Description
delays mainly affect phase response indication. Indicating the amplifier channels’ summed signal
effect.

Channel Parameters
Channel name

opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows
copying all X-Over parameters of the corresponding
output to any other X-Over within the same project.

thru, 6dB, Different types of filters (Bessel, Butterworth,
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/ Linkwitz/Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct. and
Q=0.6, 24 dB/Oct. can be set as filter response. Selecting
12dB/Q=0.7, 12dB/ filter frequencies between 20 Hz and 20 kHz is
Q=0.8, possible as well.
12dB/Q=1.0, 12dB/ A click with the right mouse button onto the
Q=1.2, HIPASS field opens the Copy
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/ & Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters
Q=2.0, of the corresponding HI-PASS filter to any HI-PASS
Bessel 12dB, filters within the same project.
Butterworth 12dB,
Bes- sel 18dB,
Butterworth 18dB,
Bessel 24dB,
Butterworth 24dB,
Linkwitz/Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz
Hz thru, 6dB, Different types of filters (Bessel, Butterworth,
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/ Linkwitz/Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct. and
Q=0.6, 24 dB/Oct. can be set as filter response. Selecting
12dB/Q=0.7, 12dB/ filter frequencies between 20 Hz and 20 kHz is
Q=0.8, possible as well.
12dB/Q=1.0, 12dB/ A click with the right mouse button onto the
Q=1.2, LOPASS field opens the Copy
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/ & Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters
Q=2.0, of the corresponding LO-PASS filter to any LO-PASS
Bessel 12dB, filters within the same project.
Butterworth 12dB,
Bes- sel 18dB,
Butterworth 18dB,
Bessel 24dB,
Butterworth 24dB,
Linkwitz/Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz


corresponding channel by up to 6 dB or lowering it
by up to 30 dB to allow level adjustment among
individual frequency bands.
normal normal, inverted The POLARITY parameter offers the possibility to

invert a channels audio signal, i.e. to rotate its
phase by 180°. Inverting the signal may become
necessary for some specific crossover settings to
eliminate the risk of sound cancellation at the
crossover frequency. The effect of the polarity
parameter becomes obvious when displaying the
summed signal of the two amplifier channels
(switch set to Sum).

corresponding output by an adjustable period of
time.
This delay method is typically used as time-
alignment-delay to overcome negative sound effects
like they result from different distances between
loudspeaker systems within one cabinet or the
positioning of speakers in a PA-installation that
otherwise would cause a high amount of natural
delay.

deactivating (button engaged) the corresponding
delay.

General Parameters
m, cm,
µs, s
20 °C -20...60 °C or -4...140 Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here.

°F In case you have chosen a distance value as unit of
measurement for the delay, delay times are corrected in
relation to temperature. Temperatures can be entered as
°C or °F.

Editing X-Over Filters by Dragging the Mouse in the Graphics Display
pressed down lets you set the frequency of the corresponding filter by moving the mouse to the left or the right.
A filter’s title lights in color as soon as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding white dot to provide


FIR-FILTER
This page provides access to the two FIR filters in the amplifier's output channels. FIR filters can be generated from
scratch, imported from files or exported to files for later use.
Clicking on the seventh block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double clicking on the FIR block in the large signal flow
diagram opens the FIR window.

Graphics display Indication
Element Description
effect.

Channel Parameters
Element Description
Channel name
A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the Copy & Paste menu,
which allows copying all FIR filter parameters of the corresponding output to
any other FIR filter within the same project.
Description of the actually used FIR filters.
After clicking onto LOAD FIR appears an "Open File..." dialog box. Enter the
correct path of the directory in which the desired file is located and select the
desired FIR file to be opened. This loads and afterwards displays all FIR filter
parameters that are stored within that file.
CAUTION: The loaded FIR filter file becomes instantly audible when in on-line
mode. Be sure to select the desired FIR file with the correct set of
parameters. In the worst case, this could lead to severe damage to the
connected loudspeaker cabinets due to improper signal processing!
After clicking onto EXPORT FIR a "Save File..." dialog box appears. Enter the
correct path of the directory that you want to save the data in. Enter a file name
(without extension). Click onto the SAVE button to store the FIR filter
parameters together with the corresponding file name. ".gkf" is automatically
Clears the actually used FIR filter settings. A Default-FIR-Filter (Thru) is

activated instead.
Clicking onto the GENERATE FIR buttons opens the Filter Design dialog.
BYPASS switches the corresponding FIR filter ON (not engaged) or OFF

(engaged), which allows for quick A / B- evaluation of the actual effect that a
filter has on the sound.
HI PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Hi pass filter.
LO PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Lo pass filter.
Allows increasing the level of the corresponding channel by up to 6 dB or

lowering it by up to 30 dB.

The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader setting and
additionally provides the possibility for entering a desired value.
The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding
amplifier output to -∞. Clicking the MUTE button with the left mouse button
mutes the corresponding amplifier output. The MUTE button is virtually pressed
and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with the left mouse button
disables the mute-function and the amplifier output is again active. The MUTE
button is virtually disengaged and not lit.

FIR Filter Design
The ORDER is set to 512.
200 Hz 20...20000 HI PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Hi pass filter.
ms
2000 Hz 20...20000 LO PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Lo pass filter..
ms
40 dB 21...100 dB STOP RIPPLE sets the slope of the FIR filter.
Allows selecting the FIR filter type of the corresponding output

channel.

by moving the mouse to the left or to the right.


LIMITERS
Each output channel of a remote amplifier offers a Peak Anticipation limiter and a Thermal limiter. These functions can
be accessed via the Limiters window to change the corresponding parameters providing reliable protection for the
connected speaker systems against sudden peaks and (thermal) overload.
Clicking onto the eight block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double clicking onto the LIMITERS block in the large flow
diagram opens the Limiters window.

Channel Parameters
Element Description
Channel name
A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows

copying all limiters parameters of the corresponding channel to any other channels within
the same project.

Peak Limiter Parameters
A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the Copy
& Paste menu, which allows copying all peak limiter parameters
of the corresponding channel to any other channels within the
same project.
+56 dBu +26.0...+56.0 THRESHOLD determines the audio signal level above which the
dBu limiter starts operating.

or
15.46...488.99 V
100 ms 10...999 ms RELEASE determines how fast the limiter returns to normal
amplification, after the audio signal level declined the threshold.

BYPASS switches the peak limiter on (button is not engaged) or

off (button is engaged). This allows quick A / B-comparison of

the limited and non-limited audio signals.

Thermal Limiter Parameters
& Paste menu, which allows copying all thermal limiter
parameters of the corresponding channel to any other channels
BYPASS switches the thermal limiter on (button is not engaged)

or off (button is engaged). This allows quick A / B-comparison of

the limited and non-limited audio signals.

General Parameters
dBu dBu / Volts This lets you select the unit for the threshold parameter.

Indications
Element Description
These indicators show the reduction in dB that is applied to the audio signal by the peak limiter or
thermal limiter. Level reduction is indicated as vertical yellow bar graph.

Editing Limiter Parameters by Dragging the Mouse in the Graphics Display
Active limiters (bypass button is not engaged) are indicated by a white dot in the graphics display representing its
function. A click with the left mouse button onto this dot and keeping the mouse button pressed down lets you set the
threshold for the corresponding limiter by vertically dragging the mouse.
A limiter’s title lights in color as soon as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding white dot to
provide improved overview and handling.
Speaker
Voice loudspeaker systems. Some examples are provided in the IRIS-Net directory Speaker Files.
HINT: When importing a speaker setting into a output channel the corresponding speaker file is imported
automatically.
functions.



Element Description
(phase) display
dB)
Switching the display of the corresponding speaker data for an amplifier channel on/off is
performed using the ”Show Speaker A” and ”Show Speaker B” switches.

Channel Parameters
Channel description and channel name

Clicking the button LOAD SPEAKER FILE opens a

dialog that allows the selection of the desired

speaker file. Different loudspeaker files can be found
in the Speaker files IRIS-Net folder.
The name of the loaded loudspeaker model is shown
in the black-shaded field on the right.
Clicking the CLEAR SPEAKER DATA button clears the

previously loaded measured speaker data of the
selected channel.
1 1...8 The NUMBER OF SPEAKERS parameter allows the

user to specify the number of speaker systems
connected to the corresponding channel. Doubling
the number of speakers results in a level increase of 6
dB within the selected channel. Set- ting an amount
from 1 to 8 is possible.
Load

amplifier outputs.
system check.

HINT: The speaker impedance test is optimized for low impedance.

Select the Load window by clicking on the Load tab in the Setup & Control Window.


Graphic Display Indication
The switches "Show Load plot A" and "Show Load plot
B" turn the indication of the corresponding impedance

graphs ON or OFF.
The switches "Show Reference A" and "Show Reference

B" turn the indication of the corresponding reference

The switch V toggles the unit of the Y-axis between Ohm

and Volt.
1000 Ohm 50 Ohm...10 DIAGRAM RANGE allows zooming in or out the diagram’s
kOhm or 0.5 V... impedance range (Y- axis).

100 V

Parameters and Indications for the Continuous Monitoring of the Load Connected
The load display indicates the quotient of measured voltage

and current (U/I).
This indication shows the actual measured load, the

progression, and the set value range. The orange needle
indicates the actual value. The bright green bar indicates
which loads have already been measured while being on-
line. A red indication signals that the value exceeded or fell
short of the set value range. The dark green area represents
the allowable value range for the load of the corresponding
power amp channel. The set HIGH THRESH respectively
LOW THRESH values define the limits for this value range.
Moving the cursor over the indication bar brings up a tool-
tip context menu showing the numerical value of the
lowest, the highest, and the actually measured load values.
Clicking with the right mouse button on the indication bar,
followed by a click on Reset, clears the previously
measured load values (bright green and red ranges
disappear).





300 Ohm 0.0 Ohm...70 HIGH THRESH sets the upper limit of the allowable
kOhm impedance range (= minimum load). Once this value is
exceeded, an OPEN fault message (line interrupt) appears
in the Amplifier Control Panel.
1.0 0hm 0.0 Ohm...70 LOW THRESH sets the lower limit of the allowable
kOhm impedance range (= maximum load). Once this value is
fallen short of, a SHORTED fault message (line short-
circuit) appears in the Amplifier Control Panel.

Parameters For Impedance Measurement
-40 dB -45...-5 dB GEN. LEVEL sets the generator level for speaker impedance
testing.
CAUTION: Extremely high levels during measurement may
result in seriously damaging connected components.
20 Hz 20 Hz...20 SWEEP START sets the start frequency of the sine-sweep


20 kHz 20 Hz...20 SWEEP STOP sets the stop frequency of the sine-sweep

Clicking the START TEST soft-key launches the speaker

impedance test. The generated sine-sweep signal sweeps
over the previously defined frequency range. The graph of the
measured impedance values is indicated in the Load plot
display. Clicking this soft-key again cancels the test at any
time.
10% 5%...50% Clicking the SET REF. CH. A and/or SET REF. CH. B soft-key
saves the last test as reference. Clicking the CLEAR REF. CH.
A and/or CLEAR REF. CH. B soft-key clears the corresponding
reference. TOLERANCE defines the allowable deviation of the
impedance graph. Actual measured test results and saved
tolerance ranges are being compared during system check. A
fault message is displayed if any point of the actual
measurement falls outside of this tolerance range. The

Supervision & Test

The Supervision & Test Dialog integrates functions for testing and monitoring power amps.

Element Description


as testing the functionality of the loudspeaker components


SINE SINE, WHITE, PINK Type selects the test tone's signal-type. Available choices are: sine
signal, white noise or pink noise.
available when WHITE or PINK has been chosen as a test-tone signal.
PRE/SOLO POST/MIX, POST/ MIX/SOLO determines whether the generated signal should be
SOLO, PRE/MIX, mixed with an existing signal. PRE/POST determines if the signal
PRE/SOLO should be generated at the front (PRE) or the rear (POST) of the
signal processing chain.
0.775 V 0.001...2.451 V These controls are for setting output voltage [V] of the
corresponding amplifier outputs.
0 dBu -60...+10 dBu These controls are for setting output level [dBu] of the
corresponding amplifier outputs.

CAUTION: Make sure to set a suitable output level, before
activating the generator. Extreme output levels can lead to
permanent damage of the connected loudspeaker systems!

Error Detection
detection.
Config & Info.


Error art Description
FAULT DISPLAY The red FAULT DISPLAY indicator lights, if a error message is indicated at the amplifier's front
LC-Display.
THERMAL WARNING The power amplifier is protected against thermal overload and will reduce the output power if
the internal temperature exceeds a fixed threshold value (please refer to the owner‘s manual
for more details). In this case the THERMAL WARNING indicator lights red.
With the THERMAL HEADROOM parameter in IRIS-Net the threshold for the THERMAL
WARNING indication can be changed to get the warning indication already at lower
temperatures, meaning before the amplifier reduces the output power. The THERMAL
HEADROOM can be adjusted from 0 to 30 °C which means a temperature warning indication
could be configured up to 30 °C before reduction.
NETWORK This indicator shows whether communication at the CAN bus interface is normal (green) or
when a problem exists (red). The power amp automatically detects whether commands from a
PC or another central control unit are missing and signals the problem via the Communication
Flag.
PROTECT / When the red PROTECT / REDUCTION indicator lights, one of the internal protections (thermal
REDUCTION overload, short-circuit, Back-EMF, HF at the output, etc.) has been activated. The differentiated
protections concept of the power amp results in several protection circuits being activated one
after another, which ensures that under normal circumstances the power amplifier will stay in
the safe and stabile operating range.
PROTECTION MUTE When the red PROTECT MUTE indicator lights, the signal path gets switched off. The amplifier
needs to be switched off to prevent power amplifier and connected speaker systems from
being damaged, this is indicated by the PROTECT and MUTE-LEDs being lit simultaneously.
SHORTED / LOAD LO This indicator lights red when the measured impedance value of the corresponding power amp
output falls below a pre-set minimum or when it is shorted. Setting the minimum value is
possible in the Load dialog.
OPEN / LOAD HI This indicator lights red when the measured impedance value of the corresponding power amp
output exceeds a pre-set maximum or when cable interruption is detected. Setting the

stages. The threshold for 19 kHz pilot-tone evaluation is set to -40 dBu / 7.75 mV. The indicator
lights green when an external pilot-tone signal coming from mixer, matrix, controller, etc. is
detected. A missing pilot-tone signal or a drop in its level below the evaluation threshold
causes the indicator to change to red. Only mark the DETECT box next to the indicator when
an external pilot-tone signal actually exists and input monitoring has been configured.
DETECTION pilot-tone generation needs to be switched off to avoid interference between the two signals.
Detection and evaluation is performed at the amplifier output. The indicator lights green when
a 19 kHz pilot-tone signal with a level of at least -14 dBu / 150mV is detected. A missing pilot-
tone signal or a drop in its level below -14 dBu (threshold) results in error detection. The
indicator changes to red.
remote amplifier, i.e. the signal is influenced by filtering and x-over settings. When setting
the external pilot-tone generator's level, make sure to mind possible amplification/
attenuation applied by internal filters.
AMPLIFIER STATE A RCM-26 remote amplifier is capable of detecting and indicating the operational state of other
RCM-26 amps within a CAN network. The addresses of all amps that are to be monitored are
entered in the ADDR field, e.g. 2-4,6,11. The FAULT field indicates the amp addresses for
which errors have been detected and the COLLECTED ERROR STATE has been activated (red).
The indicator changes to red as soon as at least one amplifier in the list shows erroneous
operation.
COLLECTED ERROR COLLECTED ERROR STATE is a collected fault message that combines all error types detected
STATE for which the DETECT box had been marked. The HOLD function allows keeping the
COLLECTED ERROR STATE for later evaluation while CLEAR clears the indication after
The COLLECTED ERROR STATE indication is identical to the indication in the Amplifier Status
column within the RCM-26 System Check Window.
RS-232 Protocol for RCM-26

The RS-232 port is located on the rear panel of RCM-26 remote power amps. It can be used as interface for the
connection of media control systems or facility management systems. RS-232 allows controlling and polling all
parameters. Communication is performed using an easy to implement ASCII protocol which allows easy integration of
remote amps in media and/or touch-panel applications. For programming notes and a complete description of the
protocol please refer to the following chapters.

RS-232 SETTINGS
The RS-232 interface of the RCM-26 remote power amps is permanently configured allowing full duplex operation. Set
values are:
Parameter Setting
Data Bits 8
Parity None

Stop Bits 1
The command string "*** RCM-26 command mode entered ***" is sent to RS-232 after powering on the remote amp and
after a short initializing period. The RS-232 interface is now ready for communication.

ASCII CONTROL PROTOCOL
A simple ASCII string protocol, which is referred to as ASCII Control Protocol is implemented in the remote amps.
Commands are organized in a tree structure with up to 6 levels. The slash "/" or a space " " can be used for separation.
The question mark "?" can be utilized to query parameter settings or commands of the corresponding level. To step one
level down you have to enter "../".
Read
Level1 Level2 Level3 Level4 Level5 Write Values Description
/COMM /LINEFEED R/W ON, OFF Linefeed state for RS232 communication
/PROMPT R/W ON, OFF Prompt state for RS232 communication
/ECHO R/W ON, OFF Echo state for RS232 communication

Amplifier / Channel Names
/NAME /DEVICE R/W up to 30 Amp name

characters
/IN_A R/W Input A name
/IN_B R/W Input B name
/OUT_A R/W Output A name
/OUT_B R/W Output B name

Amplifier Power On / Stand-by and

Operational State
/POWER /SWITCH R/W ON, OFF Switch amp ON / OFF or read out ON /
OFF state
/DELAY R/W 0...6.35 s Power-On-Delay in seconds.

Connect/Disconnect Amplifier
/ /CAN / 0...255 Transparent ASCII Control Protocol

SERVICE CONNE connection via CAN to remote RCM,
CT write CAN address (1...250) of RCM to
connect to, or write 0 to disconnect.
Active remote connection is shown as
address in brackets before the prompt.


Commands for Level Indication
/METER /READ R Read out all actual vu and output U/I

values

Commands for Amplifier Temperature

Indication
/TEMP /MODULE R 10...137.5 Read out actual RCM-26 temperature

[°C]
/SUPPLY R 10...137.5 Read out actual power supply

[°C] temperature (primary side)
/ATMO R 10...137.5 Read out actual atmosphere

[°C] temperature (in chassis)
/CHAN_A /AMP R 10...137.5 Read out actual channel A output

[°C] amplifier temperature
/ R 10...137.5 Read out actual power supply

SUPPLY [°C] temperature (channel A, secondary side)
/TH_HR R 0...127.5 [K] Read out thermal headroom of channel A
/ /TRS R/W 20...150 Threshold for thermal headroom

TH_TRS [°C] (THRM_HDRM) flag. The flag is set as
soon as the headroom falls below this
threshold.
/ /HYS R/W 0...40 [°C] Hysteresis for thermal headroom

TH_TRS (THRM_HDRM) flag. The flag is deleted,
as soon as the headroom rise above the
threshold plus hysteresis.
/CHAN_B ... R Same as above for input channel B
/OVT_TRS /TRS R/W 20...150 Threshold for thermal overload (OVT)

[°C] flag. The flag is set as soon as the
temperature threshold is reached by at
least one temperature value.
/HYS R/W 0...40 [°C] Hysteresis for thermal overload (OVT)

flag. The flag is deleted, as soon as the
temperature falls below the threshold
minus hysteresis.

Commands for Audio Monitoring

/MONI R/W NONE, List of active elements for Audio

RELAY, IN_A, Monitoring. Input and output channels
OUT_A, can be monitored. RELAY switches
IN_B, OUT_B active channels onto the monitor bus.

Commands for DSP Parameters
/PRM /IN_A /IDX00 R/W Read and write of input channel A DSP
parameter values via index numbers. For
...
further details please refer to DSP
/IDX2B R/W Parameter Index Table
/IN_B ... Same as above for input channel B
/OUT_A /IDX00 R/W Read and write of output channel A DSP

parameter values via index numbers. For
...
/IDX41 R/W Parameter Index Table
/OUT_B Save as above for output channel B
/DLYTEMP R/W -20.0...+60.0 Ambient temperature for the calculation

[°C] of delays with distance values.

Commands for Presets
/PRESET /LOAD R/W U1...U6, Load User Presets U1...U6, Owner

O1...O2, Presets O1...O2 or Factory Presets
F1...F2 F1...F2. Readout of preset data loaded
last. The string "(edited)" behind the
preset number indicates that values
have already been edited.
/SAVE W U1...U6, Save User Preset or Owner Preset

O1...O2
/TITLE R/W up to 16 Preset Name

characters
/INITIAL R/W U1...U6, Selection of user/owner/factory/actual

O1...O2, preset to be loaded after reset
F1...F2, A
/PRSGATE R/W ON, OFF State of identical named error/statusflag

which prevents from dangerous
changes of output configuration.
/OWNER / R/W OK, FALSE, Write "password" to identify owner until

PASSW "password" next reset. Saving owner presets and
ORD password definition can only be done if
this state is 'OK'. Read value (OK,
FALSE) if the owner is identified
successfully.

/ R/W ON, OFF, Read if an owner password is already

PROTE "new Pass- defined (ON, OFF). Write "new
CT word" Password" to define a new password
(up to 16 characters). Writing is only
possible if /PRE- SET/OWNER/
PASSWORD is "OK".

Commands for Control Inputs/Control

Outputs
/ /IN1 /STATE R ON, OFF State of the control input

CONTRO
L
/ON /TIME R/W 0...10.0 [s] Delay / debounce time during activation
/FNCT R/W NOTHING, Function during activation.

POWER, For further details please refer to the
ABS, REL, table "Control Inputs - GPI Functions"
TOG- GLE, below.
PRESET,
MONI,
MEMFLAG,
MEAS,
TEST- GEN
/PRM /... Parameter and values for the functions

mentioned before
/OFF ... (same as above but for the deactivation

of control inputs)
/IN2 ... (same as above but for the control input

2)
/OUT1 /STATE R/W ON, OFF State of the Control Output
/ON /TIME R/W 0...10.0 [s] Delay / debounce time for the
programmed condition
/FNCT R/W NOTHING, Condition that activates a control

POWER, output.
ABS, TEMP, For further details please refer to the
VU, CTL_IN, table "Control Outputs - GPO Functions"
ERR- FLAG, on this page.
MEMFLAG,
PRESET

condition

/SYNC R/W ON, OFF Lets you select whether the control
outputs can be synchronized using a
special CAN-command.
/PRM /.. Parameters and values for functions

mentioned above
/OFF ... (same as above but for switching off a

control output)
/OUT2 ... (same as above but for the control

output 2)
/MEMFLAG /SET R/W NONE, List of currently set Memo flags

1...16
/CLR R/W NONE, List of currently reset Memo flags

1...16

Commands for Receive and Transmit job

codes
/JOB /RX1 /ID R/W 0...FFFF Number (ID) in hex for job code to be
received. Each power amp can receive
and interpret up to 5 job codes.
/FNCT R/W NOTHING, Function when receiving a job code.

POWER, For further details please refer to table
ABS, REL, "Job Codes - Receive Functions" on this
TOG- GLE, page.
PRESET,
MONI,
MEMFLAG,
MEAS,
TEST- GEN

mentioned above
...
/RX5 ... (same as above but for receiving Job

Codes 2 to 5)
/TX1 /ID R/W 0...FFFF Number (ID) for job code to be

transmitted. Each power amp can
transmit up to 5 job codes.
/TIME R/W 0...10.0 [s] Delay / debounce time for programmed

condition

/FNCT R/W NOTHING, Condition that triggers the transmission

POWER, of a job code. For further details please
ABS, TEMP, refer to table "Job Codes - Transmit
VU, CTL_IN, Functions" on this page.
ERR- FLAG,
MEMFLAG,
PRESET

condition

mentioned above
... (same as above but for transmitting Job

Codes 2 to 5)
/TX5 ...
/LAST /RX R/W 0000...03FF The ID (hex code) of the last received
job code is displayed during reading.
Writing simulates the reception of a job
code with the stated ID (hex code) by
the power amp.
/TX R/W 0000...03FF The ID (hex code) of the last transmitted

job code is displayed during reading.
Writing transmits a job code with the
stated ID (hex code).

Commands for Error and Status

Requests
/STFLAG /DEVICE /ACT R/W see table List of currently set status and error
Device State flags of device. Writing resets some
Flags flags.
/ R/W Flag template for Collected Error Flag (a

COLLE list of status and error flags as
CT mentioned above).
when COLLECT is listed in the template.
/IN_A /ACT R/W see table List of currently set status and error
Input flags of input A. Writing resets some
Channel flags.
Flags


...
/IN_B ... (same as above for input channel B)
/OUT_A /ACT R/W see table List of currently set status and error
Out- put flags of output A. Writing resets some
Channel flags.
State flags

...
/OUT_B ... (same as above for output channel B)

Commands for analog and digital (AES/

EBU) audio inputs
/INPUT /MANUAL R/W AD, AES Read out actual used audio input.
Writing selects the analog or digital
audio input.
/AUTO / R/W AD, AES Read out actual used audio input.
ACTUAL Writing selects the analog or digital
audio input.
/FB R/W ON, OFF Activates the automatic fallback from

digital to analog audio input.
/ R/W 0...1000.0 Automatic fallback time in seconds. With

FB_TIM [s] automatic audio input selection enabled
E and AES audio input status not ok for
longer than this time, audio input
selection will fall back from AES to
analog input.
/FF R/W Activates the automatic fall-forward from

analog to AES input
/ R/W Automatic fall-forward time in seconds.

FF_TIM With automatic audio input selection
E enabled and AES audio input status ok
for longer than this time, audio input
selection will fall forward from analog to
AES input.
/AES /LOCK R ON, OFF Read out actual lock stat of AES input
/SF R Read out sample rate of AES input signal



Examples:
– /POWER/SWITCH ON ; switches amp's power on
– /TEMP/MODULE ? ; queries the remote control module temperature
– /TEMP/MODULE 65 ; reply to query: 65 °C
– /STFLAG/DEVICE/ACT ? ; queries operational state and error flags
– /STFLAG/ACT POWER,GLOBAL ; reply to query: Power is On, Global Error detected (Collected Error in external
CAN-devices)
– /STFLAG/GLOBAL ? ; queries for which external CAN-devices errors have been detected
– /STFLAG/GLOBAL 3-4 ; reply to query: Collected Error Flags on amps 3 and 4 are set

Input channel A or B
Index Parameter Description Value Range Value Description
/IDX00 delay bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX01 delay 1.68467...2000 ms
/IDX02 eq1 bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX03 eq1 type 0...5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX04 eq1 slope 0...2 0 = 0dB bypass, 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX05 eq1frequency 20...20000 Hz
/IDX06 eq1 gain -18...12 dB
/IDX07 eq1 quality 0.4...40

allpass
/IDX0A eq2 slope 0...2 0=0dB bypass, 1=6dB, 2=12dB
/IDX0B eq2frequency 20...20000 Hz
/IDX0C eq2 gain -18...12 dB
/IDX0D eq2 quality 0.4...40
/IDX0E eq3 bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX0F eq3 type 0...5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX10 eq3 slope 0...2 0=0dB bypass, 1=6dB, 2=12dB


allpass
/IDX1A eq5 bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX1B eq5 type 0...5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX1C eq5 slope 0...2 0=0dB bypass, 1=6dB, 2=12dB
/IDX1D eq5frequency 20...20000 Hz
/IDX1E eq5 gain -18...12 dB
/IDX1F eq5 quality 0.4...40

allpass
/IDX26 testgenerator enable 0/1 0 = OFF, 1 = ON
/IDX27 testgenerator level -128...+40 dB(u) at amplifier output, -128dB for Mute
/IDX28 not used
/IDX29 not used
/IDX2A route 0...2 0=A, 1=B, 2=A+B
/IDX2B 19kHz pilot notch filter 0/1 0=disable, 1=enable

Output channel A or B
Index Parameter Value Value Description

Description Range
/IDX00 level -128...+6 dB
/IDX01 mute 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = MUTE
/IDX02 route 0...3 0 = nothing, 1 = A, 2 = B, 3 = A+B
/IDX03 level trim -30...+6 dB
/IDX04 delay bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS

/IDX05 delay 0...350
/IDX06 polarity 0/1 0 = normal, 1 = inverted
/IDX07 compressor 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS (obsolete with firmware V1.15)

bypass
/IDX08 compressor type 0...4 0 = 1/1, 1 = 1/1.4, 2 = 1/2, 3 = 1/4, 4 = 1/8 (obsolete with firmware V1.15)
(ratio)
/IDX09 compressor -30...0 dB (obsolete with firmware V1.15)

threshold
/IDX0A compressor attack 0...99 ms (obsolete with firmware V1.15)
/IDX0B compressor 10...999 ms (obsolete with firmware V1.15)

release
/IDX0C limiter bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX0D limiter threshold -30...0 dB
/IDX0E limiter release 10...999 ms
/IDX0F hipass xover type 0...17 0 = off, 1 = butter6, 2 = s12q05, 3 = s12q06, 4 = s12q07, 5 = s12q08, 6 =
s12q10, 7 = s12q12, 8 =
s12q15, 9 = s12q20, 10 = bessel12, 11 = butter12, 12 = linkwz12, 13 =
bessel18, 14 = butter18, 15 = bessel24, 16 = butter24, 17 = linkwz24
/IDX10 hipass xover 20...20000 Hz

frequency
/IDX11 lopass xover type 0...17 0 = off, 1 = butter6, 2 = s12q05, 3 = s12q06, 4 = s12q07, 5 = s12q08, 6 =
s12q10, 7 = s12q12, 8 =
s12q15, 9 = s12q20, 10 = bessel12, 11 = butter12, 12 = linkwz12, 13 =
bessel18, 14 = butter18, 15 = bessel24, 16 = butter24, 17 = linkwz24
/IDX12 lopass xover 20...20000 Hz

frequency
/IDX14 eq1 type 0...5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 = allpass
/IDX16 eq1 frequency 20...20000 Hz
/IDX1A eq2 type 0...5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 = allpass
/IDX1B eq2 slope 0...2 0 = 0dB bypass, 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX1C eq2 frequency 20...20000 Hz
/IDX1D eq2 gain -18...12 dB

/IDX1E eq2 quality 0.4...40
/IDX1F eq3 bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX2A eq4 quality 0.4...40
/IDX2B eq5 bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX2C eq5 type 0...5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 = allpass
/IDX2D eq5 slope 0...2 0 = 0dB bypass, 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX2E eq5 frequency 20...20000 Hz
/IDX2F eq5 gain -18...12 dB
/IDX37 fir filter can't be represented by numerical value
/IDX38 fir filter bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX39 testgenerator 0/1 0 = OFF, 1 = ON

enable
/IDX3A testgenerator level -128...+40 dB(u) at power amp output
/IDX3B not used
/IDX3C not used
/IDX3D pilotgenerator 0/1 0 = off, 1 = on

enable

/IDX3E pilotgenerator -128...+40 dB(u) at power amp output

level
/IDX3F config type 0...7 0 = fullrange, 1 = sub, 2 = sublo, 3 = lo, 4 = lomid, 5 = mid, 6 = midhi, 7 = hi
/IDX40 config description can't be represented by numerical value
/IDX41 speaker can't be represented by numerical value

protection
/IDX42 thermo limiter can't be represented by numerical value

STATE/ERROR FLAGS
The available state/error flags are divided into following groups:
– Global power amplifier / remote control module (Device State Flags),
– Amplifier's input channels (Input Channel State Flags)
– Amplifier's output channels (Output Channel State Flags)

Device State Flags
Flag Description
POWER The amplifier is in powered state (after power up delay gone) (collect / GPO reads inverted)
STANDBY The amplifier is in standby state
CANPOLL There is a timeout at master PCs CAN polling
NONVLT There is a error in non volatile memory handling
COLLECT Locally collected error state detection via individual mask for device and all input/output channels (can
be cleared by command)
GLOBAL Globally collected error state of all selected other amps
OVT Amplifier temperature is above upper limit
DIRTY Current preset parameter setting is edited
PRSGATE The possibility of a "dangerous" preset change is enabled
BRIDGED The amplifier's bridged mode is selected.
PARALLEL The amplifier's parallel routing is selected
GNDLIFT The connection switch "chassis to ground" is open
LEVELCTRL The level controls at the power amp's front panel are disabled
VOLTDOUB The mains voltage-doubler is active, 115V-mode
THERMSD The thermal shutdown is active
CBPWARN The circuit-breaker-protection is close before action
AESLOCK The AES/EBU digital audio interface is in locked state (collect / GPO reads inverted)
ERRDISP The LC-display indicates a error message
AESERROR The AES/EBU digital audio interface is in erratic state
VLT_WARN Mains voltage warning

OWNER_PW A password for owner presets protection is defined
OWNER_ID The owner is identified by password, manipulation of owner presets is possible (can be cleared by
command)
AES_OK Die AES/EBU Schnittstelle ist in Ordnung
AESINPUT Es wird das Audio-Signal der AES/EBU Schnittstelle statt dem Audio-Signal am analogen Eingang
verwendet
CANADDR Die CAN-Adresse wurde per Software gewählt, die Adress-Einstellung an der Blende des RCM-26 wird
ignoriert

Input Channel State Flags
Flag Description
PILOT The 19 kHz pilot tone is not detected above threshold

Output Channel State Flags
Flag Description
PSOVL The SMPS reports overload
HFDET The power amplifier reports excessive HF level
SHORTED A low impedance load or short-circuit is detected
THERMPROT The amplifier's thermal protection is active (protect-mode)
PROTECT In general: protect-mode active
AMPFAIL A amplifier failure was detected (output is muted via relay off)
MUTE The output is muted via relay off
GNDFLT A ground fault has occurred
GAINRED The amplifier's gain reduction is active (protect-mode)
DISHI Rail voltage: step high disabled
DISMID Rail voltage: step mid disabled
Z_VALID The calculated load value (U/I) is actually valid
Z_MIN The load is below minimum, shorted
Z_MAX The load is above maximum, open
PILOT The 19 kHz pilot tone is not detected above threshold
MEAS The sweep measurement is active
THRM_HDRM The thermal headroom is below minimum

Control Inputs - GPI Functions

Every control input can be programmed with individual functions for switching on (/CONTROL/INx/ON/...) and
switching off (/CONTROL/INx/OFF/...). When the state of a control input changes, the programmed function is
executed after the previously set delay or debounce times are expired (up to 10 sec.). Available functions are explained
in the following table.

Job Codes - Receive Functions

Job codes are distributed throughout the CAN network via broadcast commands. Each job code has a freely definable
number (ID). Received job codes can trigger the same functions as local GPI control inputs. Receiving a job code with
the defined number (ID) triggers the function with its specified parameter values. Available functions for /JOB/RXx/
FNCT/... and corresponding parameters /JOB/RXx/PRM/... are identical with local GPI functions, as outlined in the
table.
NOTHING No function
POWER Controls Power On / Stand-by
../PRM/SWITCH ON Switches the amp's power to ON
OFF Switches the amp in Stand-by mode
FLIP Toggles between ON and Stand-by and vice versa
ABS Sets the selected DSP parameter to an absolute

value
../PRM/TYPE IN / OUT IN selects input channel, OUT selects output

channel
.../PRM/CHAN A / B / A,B Selects channel A, or channel B, or channel A

and B
../PRM/IDX 00...FF Selects the DSP parameter via index number
../PRM/VALUE New absolute parameter value
REL Changes the selected DSP parameter in relation

to the actual value
../PRM/TYPE IN / OUT IN selects input channel, OUT selects output

channel

and B
../PRM/VALUE Relative change of the parameter
TOGGLE Toggles a DSP parameter between 0 and 1 (this

only makes sense for flag parameters, e.g. MUTE,
BYPASS, etc.)
.../PRM/TYPE IN / OUT IN selects input channel, OUT selects output

channel


and B
PRESET Loads a DSP preset
../PRM/NR U1...U6, Selects an user preset User Preset (Ux), a

F1...F2, Factory Preset (Fx) or a Owner Preset (Ox)
O1...O2
MONI Controls the selection for the audio monitoring

bus
../PRM/SEL NONE, Selects audio monitoring parameters. All

RELAY, IN_A, combinations are possible.
OUT_A, IN_B,
OUT_B
../PRM/SWITCH ON, OFF Switches the selected audio monitoring

parameter ON or OFF
MEMFLA Manipulates general Memo flags

G
../PRM/CLR NONE, 1...16 Clears selected flags
../PRM/TOGGLE NONE, 1...16 Changes the state of selected flags. Use CLR and
TOGGLE together, so that selected flags are set
afterwards.
MEAS Initiates impedance testing at a fixed frequency
../PRM/CHAN A/B/AB Selects channel A, or channel B, or channel A

and B
../PRM/FREQU 10...20000 Generator frequency for impedance test

[Hz]
../PRM/LEVEL -128...+50 Generator level for impedance test

[dBu]
../PRM/TIME 0.0, Impedance test time span. 0.0 = continuously ON

0.1...1000
[ms]
../PRM/Q 0.0...60 Quality of band pass filter
../PRM/MIX ON, OFF Wanted signal and Generator signal mixed
../PRM/PRE ON, OFF Generator signal fed in at the input (ON) or

output (OFF) of the DSP signal chain
TESTGEN Defines parameters for the audio testing

generator
../PRM/ A / B / A,B Selects input channel A, or input channel B, or

INPCHAN input channel A and B

../PRM/ A / B / A,B Selects output channel A, or output channel B,

OUTCHAN or output channel A and B
../PRM/LEVEL -128...+50 Defines the testing generator output level

[dBu]
../PRM/MODE OFF, SINE, Defines the testing generator's signal type

WHITE, PINK
../PRM/FREQU 10...20000 Defines the generator frequency, when SINE is

[Hz] selected
../PRM/MIX ON, OFF Wanted signal and Testing generator signal

mixed
AUDIO_IN Selection of audio input
.../PRM/SWITCH AD, AES, Select the analog audio input (AD), the AES/EBU
FLIP input (AES) order toggles (FLIP) audio input
selection from analog to AED/EBU and vice versa

CONTROL OUTPUTS - GPO FUNCTIONS
Two conditions can be programmed for each control output which either activate the output (/CONTROL/OUTx/ON/...)
or deactivate the output (/CONTROL/OUTx/OFF/...). When the assigned function (/CONTROL/OUTx/ON/FNCT or /
CONTROL/OUTx/OFF/FNCT) is recognized as "true" and the state is maintained for at least the set delay or debounce
times (up to 10 sec.), the control output changes to activated (On) or deactivated (Off). The INV parameter allows
inverting the state of the assigned function. Synchronizing the switching of control outputs is possible by means of a
special system-wide CAN command, when SYNC is set to ON. Available functions and corresponding settings are
explained in the following table.

JOB CODES - TRANSMIT FUNCTIONS
Job codes are distributed throughout the CAN network via broadcast command. Each job code has a freely definable
number (ID). Identical conditions can be assigned to job codes and control outputs. A job code with a defined number
(ID) is transmitted, when the corresponding condition for (/JOB/TXx/FNCT) is recognized as "true" and the state is
maintained for at least the set delay or debounce times (up to 10 sec.). The INV parameter allows inverting the state of
the assigned function. Available functions for /JOB/TXx/FNCT/... as well as corresponding parameters /JOB/TXx/
PRM/... are identical to local GPO functions, as outlined in the table.
NOTHING No function
POWER Interpretation results in "true", when the power amp is

powered on (even during power-on delay) and "false", when
the amp's power is off.
ABS Interpretation results in "true", when the DSP parameter value

is higher or equals the reference value.
../PRM/TYPE IN / OUT IN selects input channel, OUT selects output channel
../PRM/CHAN A/B/ Selects channel A, or channel B, or channel A and B

A,B

../PRM/VALUE Reference value for comparison
TEMP Interpretation results in "true", when the measured amplifier

temperature is higher or equals the reference value.
../PRM/ -20...150 Temperature reference value

CELSIUS [°C]
VU Interpretation results in "true", if any of the selected VU in any

of the selected channels is higher or equals the programmed
reference value.
../PRM/SEL NONE, IN, Any combination of the values listed is possible. LIM = Limiter
OUT, CMP = compressor
CMP, LIM
../PRM/CHAN A/B/ Selects channel A, or channel B, or channel A and B

A,B
../PRM/DB [dB] VU reference value
CTL_IN Interpretation results in "true", when the selected control

input is activated.
../PRM/IDX 1, 2 Selects a control input
ERRFLAG Interpretation results in "true", when one of the selected flags

is set. Any combination of the flags listed is possible.
../PRM/ Mask for device state/error flags

DEVICE
../PRM/IN_A Mask for input channel A state/error flags
../PRM/IN_B Mask for input channel B state/error flags
../PRM/OUT_A Mask for output channel A state/error flags
../PRM/OUT_B Mask for output channel B state/error flags
MEMFLA Interpretation results in "true", when the actual state of the

G selected memo flags resembles the reference pattern.
../PRM/MASK NONE, Selects memo flags to be interpreted (listing)

1...16
../PRM/VALUE NONE, Defines the expected reference pattern for memo flags
1...16
PRESET Interpretation results in "true", when the actual preset is

identical to a selected preset.
../PRM/DIRTY ON, OFF Selection is also valid, when parameters have been changed
(dirty)
../PRM/USER NONE, List of selected user presets

1...6

../PRM/ NONE, 1, List of selected owner presets

OWNER 2
../PRM/FACT NONE, 1, List of selected factory presets

2
Firmware Upgrade

The firmware of RCM-26 remote amps is stored in a FLASH-memory chip. This technology has been chosen to be able
to provide the users with new software without the hassle of physically exchanging memory chips inside of a remote
install new firmware and future software extensions to always keep your Remote Amplifier System up-to-date.
The RCM-26 firmware is divided into a part for basic amplifier functions (e.g. power on/off, CAN communication) and a
part for extended functions (e.g. signal processing). Even if the firmware update procedure does not finish
successfully, basic amplifier functions stay functional and the update procedure can be repeated.

Caution!
Consequences

1. Simultaneously upgrading the firmware of more than four remote amplifiers is not recommended.


Necessary preparations




Make sure to check the following parameters before upgrading:
Element Description
RCM-xx[x] Indicates the addresses of the remote amps connected. Make sure that the addresses shown are only
not permissible.
Bandwidth Indicates the used bandwidth of the CAN-bus in percent. Make sure to check that the CAN-bus is not

You can update the firmware of the remote control module or the firmware of the amplifier itself.

Firmware update of the Remote Control Module
1. The CAN-interface window provides a toolbar (top line). Clicking onto the U-icon (Update) opens a Module
Selection dialog.
2. Select RCM-26 and click onto "Continue".

want to update and click the “OK” button. The list should only show amps that you want to update. No other
5. The addresses of the selected remote amp(s) are shown in the firmware update window on the right side next to
the button “Select Devices...” and in the line “Active Devices”. Clicking onto “Start Update” starts the upgrade
procedure. The single steps of the update are shown in the “Messages” window. The progress of some parts of
the upgrade which take a little longer is indicated through dots behind the corresponding name. The message “ok”
has to appear at the end of each line. The following example shows how to upgrade the firmware of the remote
amp with the address 1 to firmware version V 1.01.

6. The message “Finishing .. ok” indicates that upgrading has been successful. The remote amp(s) are reset. After-

Firmware update of the amplifier
Selection dialog.
2. Select TG PowerH Amplifier and click onto Continue
corresponding file is located in the directory: \IRIS\Firmware\TG POWERH. This path also appears in the line
4. Select the amplifier that you want to update and click the “OK” button. The list should only show amps that you
want to update. No other amplifier should be connected to the CAN-bus.
5. Clicking onto “Start Update” starts the upgrade procedure. The single steps of the update are shown in the
“Messages” window. The progress of some parts of the upgrade which take a little longer is indicated through
dots behind the corresponding name. The message “ok” has to appear at the end of each line. The following
example shows how to upgrade the firmware of the remote amp with the address 2 to firmware version V 1.03.


Step Description
Start Activates update mode for the selected devices.

Update The messages window shows “Update started (addresses)” .. and after a short period of time “ok”.
Verify Compares the firmware installed in the remote amps with the selected firmware file.
The messages window shows “Verifying (addresses)”...a progression-bar indicates the approximate
duration of the process. Detected differences are indicated at the end of the process, e.g. “done, Errors
detected for...”. If no errors time-outs are detected, you can proceed with the update.
Erase Deletes the actual firmware and clears the FLASH-memory of a remote amplifier.
Flashes The messages window shows “Erasing (addresses)”..... and after a short period of time “ok”.
The messages window shows “Programming (addresses)"........ A progression-bar indicates the
approximate duration of the programming. “ok” appears in the message window after some time.

The messages window shows “Checksum (addresses)” .. and after a short period of time “ok”. This is a
short form of the “Verify” process.
Stop Finishes upgrading.

Update The messages window shows “Finishing (addresses)" .. and after a short period of time “ok”. The remote
amps quit the update mode and start in normal mode.
Now, you can exit the upgrade dialog or proceed with upgrading other remote amps.


sequence: Start Update - Program.

RCM-28
The RCM-28 Remote Control Module is a two-channel digital controller module for live sound reinforcement, PA and
fixed installation applications. The module can be used in Electro-Voice Tour Grade and DYNACORD PowerH Amplifier
models. Installing the RCM-28 turns a conventional amplifier into a remote amplifier, which, at any time, provides a
complete overview of the overall system status and control of all system parameters.
RCM-28 modules allow the integration of amplifiers into a OMNEO network with up to 100 devices in a single subnet
without additional hardware. This offers the possibility to control and monitor an entire sound system from one or
more PCs using the IRIS-Net - Intelligent Remote & Integrated Supervision - software package. All operational states,
such as power-on status, temperature, modulation, limiting, activation of protections, deviation from the load
impedance, etc., are centrally registered and displayed in IRIS-Net. This provides the possibility to react, and to
selectively intervene even before critical operational states arise. Programming an automatic reaction, when specific
thresholds are being exceeded or fallen below, is also possible.
With an RCM-28 installed, the integrated impedance testing function allows very precise monitoring of the connected
loudspeaker systems. The impedance testing function utilizes the internal test tone signal generator and voltage/
current measuring to determine the impedance of the loudspeaker systems including crossovers and cables over the
entire frequency range. IRIS-Net plots an impedance curve of the measured impedance that can be compared with a
previously stored reference curve at any time. This reveals even smallest loudspeaker defects or deficiencies instantly.
Parameters, such as power on/off, level, muting, filters, etc. can be controlled in real-time and stored in the amplifier.
Besides controlling and monitoring amplifiers, the RCM-28 also offers all conventional signal processing functions, such
as parametric equalizers, frequency crossovers, delays, Peak Anticipation and TEMP limiters. Beyond that, linear-phase
FIR-filters and digital loudspeaker protection algorithms are available to optimize the amplifiers and loudspeaker sys-
tem. All DSP-settings can be freely edited and stored in user presets directly on the module. In the event of network
failure or loss of power, all settings (filters, delay, level, etc.) stay intact, independent of the control by the network.
Additionally, the RCM-28 provides a control port with freely programmable control inputs and control outputs. Control
inputs (GPIs) allow the connection of switches. IRIS-Net offers the possibility to program a variety of logic functions for
the inputs (e.g. switching to an alarm-preset with maximum energy in the speech area). Control outputs (GPOs) allow
the connection of external components, which, for example, are used to signal specific states to peripheral equipment.
Consequently, an amplifier with a RCM-28 module installed corresponds to highest safety requirements.
The RCM-28 has been designed with uncompromising audio quality in mind. Analog audio inputs (internally, pre or post
fader), an AES3 (AES/EBU) digital audio input with XLR-type connector and an OMNEO port for connection to OMNEO
or Dante audio networks are provided.

OMNEO
OMNEO is a media networking architecture for professional applications. Using standard IP Ethernets, media products
that integrate OMNEO can be assembled into networks of 2 to 10,000 cooperating devices that exchange studio-quality
synchronized multichannel audio and share common control systems.
OMNEO's media transport technology is Audinate's Dante, a high-performance standards-based, routable IP media
transport system. OMNEO's system control technology is OCA, for Open Control Architecture, an open public standard
for control and monitoring of professional media networks.
For additional information, please see the OMNEO Resource Guide available at www.electrovoice.com or www.dy-
nacord.com

Remote Amplifiers

DYNACORD POWERH SERIES
– H 2500 2 x 1450 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 2000 W / 2 Ohm
– H 5000 2 x 2500 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 3500 W / 2 Ohm

ELECTRO-VOICE TOUR GRADE SERIES
– TG-5 2 x 1450 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 2000 W / 2 Ohm
– TG-7 2 x 2500 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 3500 W / 2 Ohm
The power amplifiers mark a milestone in the design and the production of high-performance power amplifiers. The
innovative 3-stage Grounded Bridge Class H Topology with ”floating” switching power supply unit offers very high and
stable output with extreme high efficiency on an extremely high performance level at minimum weight.
PowerH / Tour Grade Series amplifiers are ideal for driving professional touring, high-end Concert-Sound and Pro-
Sound applications. Next to classical protections, this new design employs the multi-stage ATP system (Advanced
Thermal Protection) for the first time, which in most cases prevents the power amplifier from switching off when the
temperature exceeds a critical level. The newly designed MCS system (Mains Current Supervision) prevents power
amplifier breakdown caused by the activation of the automatic circuit breaker. For this, among other things, the MCS
system uses the highly precise measurement of the RMS value of the actual mains current consumption. Information
about the status of the power amplifier and its internal protections is provided on a LC-display. By utilizing the
optionally available remote control module that is compatible with IRIS-Net, this power amplifier additionally offers
comprehensive remote monitoring and remote control functions plus a universal 2-channel digital audio controller
(DSP) including highly precise FIR-filtering.



Element Description
Amplifier Type
HINT: The amplifier name is the network-wide OMNEO device name and will be used for
identifying a device in the network. Make sure that the name occurs only once in a network.
Each device must have a different name.
Info page.
The Online / Offline indicator signals whether the selected amplifier is currently communicating
with IRIS-Net. The red OFFLINE indicator signals that the corresponding amplifier is off-line and that

active.


Info page.
The LIMIT indicator lights whenever the digital limiter of the corresponding channel is activated,
e.g. when the signal level exceeds the specified threshold and the output level is being limited to
this value.
The TL indicator lights when the loudspeaker TEMP limiter of the corresponding channel is
activated.
allowable range or if short-circuit or line interruption has occurred. The green OK-indication signals
that the connected load is between the specified lower and upper limit values. These values are set

in the Setup & Control Panel in the Load screen. The red OPEN indication signals line interruption.
It lights whenever the connected load exceeds the upper limit value. The red SHORTED indication
signals short-circuit at the amplifier output. It lights whenever the connected load falls below the
lower limit value.
whenever the amplifier is operated in its normal operational temperature range. The indicator
lights yellow whenever the amplifier builds up heat because of continuous high output. However,
since the internal fans provide sufficient ventilation there is no risk of thermal overload in this state.
As soon as temperature indication changes to red, reducing the output level is strongly
recommended. Otherwise the amplifier might cease operation because of thermal overload.
delay or when the amplifier is switched off by the protection circuit (see below).
When the red PROT indicator lights, one of the internal protections (thermal overload, short-circuit,
Back-EMF, HF at the output, etc.) has been activated
However, a lit PROT LED does not necessarily mean that the signal path gets switched off. The
differentiated protections concept of the power amplifier results in several protection circuits being
activated one after another, which ensures that under normal circumstances the power amplifier
will stay in the safe and stabile operating range. In case the amplifier needs to be switched off to
prevent power amplifier and connected speaker systems from being damaged, this is indicated by
the PROT and MUTE LEDs being lit simultaneously.

attenuated, in dB.
The currently used audio input (ANLG, AES or OMN..) is indicated.

AMP MODE indicates the operation mode of the power amplifier blocks. Possible settings are
NORMAL and BRIDGED. Switching the amp mode is only possible locally at the power amplifier,
details can be found in the amplifiers owner's manual.
GAIN/SENSITIVITY displays the amplifiers gain or input sensitivity.

IMPORTANT NOTE: A RCM-28 firmware update with version V2.0.10 or higher will enable the
Sensitivity switch on the amplifier rear panel. Please make sure that the Sensitivity switches of
all amplifiers in your system are set correctly. In previous firmware versions the amplifier gain
was fixed to +35 dB if a RCM-28 module was installed.
AMP ROUTING shows how the audio inputs handle the input signals. Possible settings are DUAL
and PARALLEL. Switching the amp routing is only possible locally at the power amplifiers, details
can be found in the amplifiers owner's manual.

Clicking this switch activates the LOCK indicator on the amplifier’s rear panel and all amplifier front
panel LEDs, as well as in the amplifier’s front panel window in the IRIS-Net software. This function
is meant for identifying or searching an amplifier in a large system setup.
The number field indicates the set amplifier object number. This is an ascending number which will
be assigned automatically when the amplifier will be created in the IRIS-Net work sheet. It is the
same number as shown on the device front panel in IRIS-Net.
These buttons allow assigning amplifier channels to the RCM-28 OMNEO output 3, which is
reserved for monitoring. This allows monitoring any amplifier input or output signals within an
installation. INPUT A / B selects the corresponding input signal while OUTPUT A / B allows
switching between the output signals of channels A and B. Simply click on an amp channel’s icon to
select it for monitoring. The corresponding channel is assigned to OMNEO output channel 3 of the
amplifier. Any previous selection is simultaneously canceled, so that only the actually selected amp
channel can be monitored. Clicking the button of an active amp channel separates the channel from
the monitor bus.
For monitoring you have to select the desired amplifier output 3 in the Network View dialog and
assign it to an OMNEO/Dante receiver, e.g. the Dante Virtual Sound Card.
This field indicates the active factory or user preset. Each remote amp has two factory setting F01
(linear thru) and F02 (DSP Bypass) offering linear settings and thirty user-programmable presets
U01...U30 for storing random user data. Loading and saving presets is done in the Setup
& Control window.
POWER CONSUMPTION indicates the current power consumption of the power amplifier in VA.
for each amplifier.
HINT: The power-on delay defaults to „Object No. * 150 ms“. For object no. 8 the power-on delay
default would be for example: 8 *150 ms = 1200 ms.

Setup & Control

Window Description
of the amplifier.

testing.
Test generator.
OMNEO This page provides access to the OMNEO interface and routing parameters.

Clicking on the „SET“ soft key in the Amplifier Control Panel opens the Setup & Control window.

Config & Info

To select the page click on the Configuration & Information tab in the Setup & Control Window.

Amplifier Info
Element Description
AMPLIFIER Shows the amplifier type

MODEL
AMPLIFIER Shows the amplifier‘s software version number (operating system, firmware)
FIRMWARE
RCM-28 Shows the remote control module‘s software version number (operating system, firmware)
FIRMWARE
OPERATING Shows the amplifier’s operating mode. The power amplifier can be operated in NORMAL or
MODE BRIDGED mode.
AMP ROUTING Shows how the amplifier's audio inputs handle the input signals. Possible amp routings are DUAL
and PARALLEL.
GROUND LIFT Shows the setting of the amplifier's GROUND LIFT switch. Possible settings are GROUNDED and
UNGROUNDED.

UPTIME Shows the uptime of the amplifier (standby not included) since the last reset of the Event Log.
For further details about the amplifiers's Event Log please refer to the owner's manual.
MAINS VOLTAGE Shows the mains voltage and the mains current consumption.
IP ADDRESS Shows the IP address of the remote module‘s primary interface. The IP address of the secondary
interface can be seen in the OMNEO page.
MAC ADDRESS Shows the MAC address of the remote control modul's primary interface. The MAC address of the
secondary interface is one number higher and can be seen in the OMNEO page.

Amplifier Setup
GAIN/ GAIN/SENSITIVITY displays the amplifiers gain or input sensitivity.

SENSITIVITY IMPORTANT NOTE: A RCM-28 firmware update with version V2.0.10
or higher will enable the Sensitivity switch on the amplifier rear
panel. Please make sure that the Sensitivity switches of all
amplifiers in your system are set correctly. In previous firmware
versions the amplifier gain was fixed to +35 dB if a RCM-28 module
was installed.
POWER DELAY Object No. * 50...6350 ms Allows programming an amplifier’s power-on delay. Setting different
BREAKER Show the current setting of the amplifier's Mains Circuit Breaker
Protection. For further details about this protection please refer to
the owner's manual.
INPUT SELECT Analog Analog, AES/ Allow selecting the audio input to be amplified. The analog audio
EBU, OMNEO input (ANALOG), the digital audio input (AES/EBU) or the OMNEO
audio input are available.
HINT: The value of the property “AudioInput” corresponds to the
currently used audioinput. You can write the value “ANLG” to this
property to select the analog audioinput. You can write the value
“AES” to this property to select the digital audioinput. You can
write the value “NET” to this property to select the OMNEO
networkinput.
BREAKIN Analog Analog, AES/ Allows selecting the audio input of the amplifier to be output via the
EBU, Auto two OMNEO audio network Tx channels. The analog audio input
(Analog) or the digital audio input (AES/EBU) are available. Select
Auto to output the digital audio signal and switch from digital input to
analog input automatically if the digital input signal is not OK.

Digital Input

Indicates if the digital audio input is synchronized to the input

signal (LOCKED LED on) or if synchronization was not
successful (ERROR-LED on).
HINT: The current state of the digital audio input is available
via the properties “State Flags. AES Locked” and “State Flags.
AES ERROR” also.

AES/EBU SAMPLE RATE 32...192 Shows the sample rate of the AES/EBU input signal.
kHz
Auto Switch Enable Press the SET button if the audio input should switch from
digital input to analog input automatically if the digital input
signal is not OK.
The value of the property “Audio Input Switching. AES Fail.
Enable” corresponds to this control.

Element Description
structure. All labels can be edited. Changes are immediately reflected in the different
panels and windows (amplifier control panel, flow diagram, and overview).

SWITCHING AUDIO INPUTS AUTOMATICALLY
RCM-28 remote amplifiers allow automatic switching from the AES feed to the analog input in the case of failure of the
AES signal or input. This feature allows a redundant analog signal to be fed to the amplifier and automatically switch
over to the „backup“ signal without user intervention.
Open the Modify Properties dialog from the context menu of the RCM-28 remote amplifier in the IRIS-Net worksheet.
Following table lists the relevant properties for automatic audio input switching.
Property Default Range Description
Audio Input Switching. AES 0 0, 1 Set the value to 1 to enable the auto fall back function
Fail. Enable which switches from AES to analog input in case of an AES
error. This property corresponds to the „Auto Switch
Enable“ control found in the Config & Info window.
Audio Input Switching. AES 1s 0 to 120 s Configures the duration the AES error had to be present on
Fail. Time the input to trigger the AES / analog switching.
Audio Input Switching. AES 0 0, 1 Setting this property to 1 enables the automatic switching
Good. Enable from analog input to AES input in case the AES signal is
OK.
HINT: This works only if the values of both properties –
Audio Input Switching. AES Fail. Enable and Audio Input
Switching. AES Good. Enable – are set to 1.

Audio Input Switching. AES 5s 0 to 120 s Configures the duration the AES signal had to be in
Good. Time „Locked“ state, to switch back from analog to the AES
input.
Audio Input Switching. AES 0 0, 1 Shows that the AES signal is locked and without errors for
Ok Flag longer than the configured Audio Input Switching. AES
Good. Time.
Audio Input Switching. AES 0 0, 1 Shows that the AES input is used as amplifier audio input.
Selected Flag
Audio Input Switching. 0 - Counts how often the Auto Switch ganged the input.
Counter

Control Port
functions of these inputs and outputs can be programmed in a variety of ways. For example, the control inputs (GPI)
can be used for power-on / stand-by or preset switching as well as for changing parameters. The control outputs (GPO)
are for signaling internal statuses. They can directly trigger LEDs, control lamps or relays. In the Supervision & Test
window the states of the control inputs are displayed and you have the possibility to switch the control outputs
manually. For more information and electrical specifications of the control port, please refer to the amplifier‘s manual.
Example:

presets U02 or U03.

Control Port IN 1 OFF This provides a listing of the two control inputs and their statuses ON and
IN IN 1 ON OFF. The entries in the corresponding lines specify the action when closing
IN 2 OFF (ON) or opening (OFF) a contact.
IN 2 ON
Function (empty) This column allows assigning functions to a control input’s statuses. Clicking
the desired line in the Function menu opens a dialog field that shows all
accessible functions. The table "Input and Receive Job Functions" lists all
functions together with their individual settings.

Parameter (empty) Here you can set the different function parameters. For more information,
Opt. Value (empty) Certain functions allow specifying optional parameter values.
Debounce 0 ms 0...10027 ms Here you can program delay or debouncing times. Following a status change
Time 16.33 ms the assigned function is initiated after the set time interval has passed.
Steps

Control Outputs: Internal status changes inside of the amplifier, such as operational faults, alerts when exceeding
parameter limits, and internal operational statuses can be signaled to external systems or central control units.
Example:

– OUT2 OFF: Invert Error flag (control output 2 is open when no faults have occurred)
– OUT2 ON: Error flag (control output 2 is closed when operational faults according to the parameter list have
occurred)
Control Port OUT 1 OFF This provides a listing of the two control outputs and their statuses ON and
OUT OUT 1 ON OFF. The entries in the corresponding lines specify which status results in
OUT 2 OFF the closing (ON) or opening (OFF) of a contact.
OUT 2 ON
Condition (empty) This column allows assigning internal events (conditions) to a control
output’s statuses. Clicking the desired line in the Function menu opens a
dialog field that shows all accessible functions. The table "Output and
Transmit Job Conditions" lists all functions together with their individual
settings.
Debounce 0 ms 0...10027 ms Here you can program delay or debouncing times. An event is signaled
Time 16.33 ms following an internal status change and after the specified time interval has
Steps past.
Invert (empty) (empty) / X This column allows entering whether a status is signaled when the specified
Condition is „true“ (no entry) or


Jobs
job code is a function number that an amplifier transmits via OMNEO and that is received and interpreted by another or
several other amplifiers. Each amplifier is capable of transmitting and receiving up to 5 different job codes.
Caution!
Job codes make the remote triggering of functions from one amplifier to another very convenient
by sending remote commands over the network. This can reduce cabling and make installation
easier. The job code transmission mechanism in the RCM-28 uses UDP, which does not have the
same delivery confirmation and retransmission characteristics as TCP. Due to this, while the
! operation and transmission of these codes is generally very stable and reliable, there is a very
small chance that a message may be lost due to heavy network traffic. If job code or GPI
functionality is needed for a mission-critical or life safety application, it is recommended to use a
network with enough free bandwidth and make sure that no other heavy network traffic can
occur, or to use direct hardwiring to GPIs on each amplifier instead of job codes.
Consequences

Example:

Receive 0 1...1023 Here, you can specify which incoming job code numbers a specific amplifier
Job No recognizes. Entering random numbers between 0 and 1023 is possible.
Function (empty) This column allows assigning an individual function to each job code received.
Clicking the desired line in the Function menu opens a dialog field that shows all
accessible functions. The table "Input and Receive Job Functions" lists all functions
Parameter (empty) Here you can set the different function parameters. For more information, please
refer to the table "Input and Receive Job Functions".


group that includes all the desired amps and afterwards perform the programming in the group’s Configuration&
Example:

Transmit 0 1...65536 Here, you can specify which job code numbers an amplifier transmits on the
Job No occurrence of specific events. Entering random numbers between 0 and 65536
is possible.
Condition (empty) This column allows specifying an event (condition) that triggers the
transmission of the corresponding job code. Clicking the desired line in the
Condition menu opens a dialog field that shows all accessible functions. The
table "Output and Transmit Job Conditions" lists all functions together with
Debounce 0 ms 0...10027 ms Here, you can program delay or debouncing times. A transmit job code is sent
Time 16.33 ms following a specific event and after the specified time interval has past.
Steps
Invert This column allows entering whether a job code is transmitted when the
specified Condition is "true" (no entry) or "false" (click "X" to signal an inverted
state).

Input and Receive Job Functions: The following table lists all functions together with their individual settings, which
Empty - - None


Value
(parameter-
dependent)
(parameter-
dependent)
Toggle Parameters Changes the status of the selected parameter (e.g. bypass On / Off)
with two
statuses
Preset U01-U30, F01, Changes a preset to the specified preset number

F02
flags 1 - 16
Measurem Generator Starts measurement with a tone signal of the specified frequency at
ent frequency, the levels specified for channels A / B for the selected duration (0 ms
Time, Level A / = infinite)
B
Test Channel, Signal Starts the test generator with selected signal type or of the specified
generator type, frequency at the levels specified for channels A / B for the selected
Frequency, duration (0 ms = infinite)
Solo/Pre, Level

Power Power On
Absolute all DSP parameters Corresponding Set parameter value reached or exceeded Set
Parameter Value X parameter value declined
(parameter-
dependent)
Temp Temperature in °C Set temperature reached or exceeded Set

X temperature declined

VU Channel A or B: Input, Level in dB Set level reached or exceeded Set level

Output, PEAK Limiter, X declined
TEMP Limiter
GPI IN 1, IN 2 Control input 1 / 2 closed (ON) Control input

X 1 / 2 open (OFF)
State Flag All internal fault Single or several error flags set None of the
conditions X selected error flags set
Memo flag Enable for selected flags Memory flags match the selected bit-pattern
as well as bit- pattern of X Memory flags do not match the selected bit-
flags 1 - 16 pattern
Preset U01-U30, F01, F02 Specified preset selected

X Other than the specified preset selected
DSP

The Flow Diagram Selector can be accessed from any DSP page offering navigation icons within the DSP signal
processing functions. The Flow Diagram Selector lets you select different function blocks, where the currently selected
block is highlighted.

Page Description
IN / RTG / The signal flow display provides an overview of an amplifier’s DSP settings. This area also includes all
OUT controls for the preset location and preset file management.
INPUT PEQ The Input Parametric EQ page provides access to the two 10-band parametric equalizers of the amplifier
inputs.
INPUT DLY This page allows the programming of delay lines for the amplifier channels A and B.
ARRAY The Array Parametric EQ page offers access to the 5-band parametric equalizers of the amplifier outputs.
PEQ
ARRAY DLY This page allows the programming of delay lines for the output channels.
SPEAKER The Output Parametric EQ page offers access to the two 6-band parametric equalizers of the amplifier
PEQ outputs for speaker equalization.
SPEAKER Frequency crossover-filters as well as the parameters trim, polarity and delay for both channels are
XOV located in the Output X-Over area.
SPEAKER This page provides a FIR-Filter for each amplifier channel.

FIR

SPEAKERD This page allows the programming of delay lines for the output channels.
LY
SPEAKER This page provides access to Peak Anticipation limiter and TEMP thermal limiter of each amplifier
LIM channel.

followed by a click on the DSP tab in the Setup & Control Window.

FLOW DIAGRAM
The FLOW DIAGRAM window shows a signal flow diagram, which offers a quick overview of all DSP settings of an
amplifier. Routing channels can be done directly in the diagram. Clicking onto the corresponding function blocks lets
you access all other DSP parameters. All parameters that are necessary for the saving and loading of loudspeaker
presets are also accessible from this window.

Function blocks
Element Description
INPUT PEQ Block:

The INPUT PEQ block displays the 10 EQs of the corresponding input channel. The graph shows the
frequency response of the EQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens
the Input Parametric EQ page.

INPUT DELAY Block:

This displays the Delay of the input channels. The delay-value is displayed together with the
measurement unit. The graph shows the approximate usage of amount of delay being applied. A
single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Input Delay page.

parameters of the corresponding Delay block to any
other Input Delay block within the same project.

ROUTING Block:
Here you can assign the output channel routing. The circles next to A and B allow selection of the
input signal for the corresponding output channel. The circle next to the + allows selection of the
summed input signal for the corresponding output channel.
A click with the right mouse button onto routing block opens the Copy & Paste menu of all DSP
settings, which allows copying all DSP parameters of an amplifier to any other RCM-28 amplifier
ARRAY PEQ Block:

The ARRAY PEQ block displays the 5 Array EQs of the corresponding output channel. The 5 LEDs
indicate which EQ-bands are being used while the graph shows the frequency response of the PEQ
block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Array Parametric EQ page.

parameters of the corresponding ARRAY PEQ block to any other EQ block within the same project.
ARRAY DELAY Block:

This displays the Array Delay of the output channels. The delay-value is displayed together with the
measurement unit. The graph shows the approximate amount of delay being applied. A single click
with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Array Delay page.

parameters of the corresponding Delay block to any other ARRAY DELAY block within the same
project.
SPEAKER PROCESSING PEQ Block:

The SPEAKER PROCESSING PEQ block displays the 6 Channel EQs of the corresponding output
channel. The 6 LEDs indicate which EQ-bands are being used while the graph shows the frequency
response of the PEQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Out-

put Parametric EQ page.
parameters of the corresponding Speaker EQ block to any other EQ block within the same project.
SPEAKER PROCESSING X-OVER Block:

This block represents the crossover within the corresponding output channel. The graph shows the
frequency response that results from the set X- Over parameters. Three additional LEDs indicate the
status of gain trim (TRIM), polarity (INV) and delay (DLY). A single click with the left mouse button

onto this block opens the Output X-Over page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy
& Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding X-Over block to any other
X-Over block within the same project.
SPEAKER PROCESSING FIR FILTER Block:

This block represents the FIR Filter within the corresponding output channel. The graph shows the
frequency response that results from the set FIR parameters. The LED indicates if the FIR Filter is
being used. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Output FIR page.

parameters of the corresponding FIR Filter block to any other FIR Filter block within the same
project.

SPEAKER PROCESSING DELAY Block:

This displays the SPEAKER PROCESSING DELAY of the output channels. The delay-value is displayed
together with the measurement unit. The graph shows the approximate amount of delay being
applied. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Speaker Processing

Delay page.
parameters of the corresponding Delay block to any other Speaker Delay block within the same
project.
SPEAKER PROCESSING LIMITERS Block:

This block provides graphical display of the limiter functions of the corresponding output. The two
LEDs indicate whether peak limiter or TEMP limiter have been activated. The graph provides

parameters of the corresponding Limiters block to any other Limiters block within the same project.
Output Block:
A click with the right mouse button onto OUT A or OUT B opens the Copy & Paste menu, which
allows copying of all parameters of the corresponding output channel to any other RCM-28 output
channel within the same project. However, it is important to bear in mind that the DSP data only is
being copied. Impedance or speaker data is not copied.
The numerical field is identical to the numerical field below the level controls in the User panel. The
MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding output to -∞. Clicking the MUTE
button with the left mouse button mutes the corresponding output. The MUTE button is virtually
pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with the left mouse button disables the
mute-function and the output is again active. The MUTE button is virtually disengaged and not lit.
The IMP or EXP buttons allow import and export of Speaker Settings. A Speaker Settings file
contains the loudspeaker specific settings for the SPEAKER PROCESSING blocks. The text field
allows editing the description of the Speaker Setting file to be exported. Importing a Speaker Setting
automatically imports the corresponding Speaker File.

Status Indication
Element Description
However, this is only true if the EDITED LED lights green, i.e. no DSP parameter has been

changed since the last RECALL.
NAME indicates the name of the actually audible preset. A new name can be assigned in
this field before a preset will be stored to an User Preset.
the last RECALL. If the indicator lights green, parameters have been edited and therefore


Store / Store to / Recall
Element Description
STORE STORE saves all momentary set DSP parameters into the actually loaded preset.
STORE TO... STORE TO...saves all momentary set DSP parameters into a selectable User Preset. A click
with the left mouse button opens the "Store Preset" dialog, where the preset can be selected.
If a new preset name is desired it shall be assigned in the NAME field before pressing the
STORE TO ... button.

RECALL... RECALL loads and displays all DSP parameters that are stored in the selected preset.
processing!
PROTECT... The user presets of the RCM-28 can be password protected, so they can only be overwritten
when the user knows the password. A click with the left mouse button opens the “Protect
User presets” dialog, where the password can be entered. Press the Set Password button to
activate the protection. Enter the password and press the Unlock User presets button to
deactivate the password protection.

Preset after Startup
Element Description
The indicated preset is loaded after power on or reset of the power amplifier. If no preset number is
indicated the last used setting is loaded after power on or reset.
Clicking the ASSIGN .. button opens the Set Initial Preset... dialog. In this dialog a factory preset or
user preset can be selected as startup preset.

Clicking the X buttons clears the Startup preset selection.

to load amplifier parameters from these files. Therefore, IRIS-Net creates a sub-directory \RCM-28 Presets during
installation, where all factory-presets are saved in to. It is recommended to save your own presets in this directory as
well. For improved organization, creating more sub-directories within the directory \RCM-28 Presets is permissible.
Element Description
After clicking onto IMPORT PRESET an „Open File“ dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the
After clicking onto EXPORT PRESET a „Save File“ dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the
button to store all DSP parameters together with the corresponding file name. „.ds“ is automatically

INPUT PARAMETRIC EQ
Both input channels of the RCM-28 employ 10-band parametric equalizers each, which allow programming highly
variable speaker equalization to match a PA-system to different environmental and acoustical requirements.

Element Description

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting input A or input B for filter editing and display.
A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which allows convenient
copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other PEQ filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters

A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the ”Copy &
Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of
the according filter to any other EQ within the same project.

Hishelv, Hipass, PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable frequency, Q

Lopass and gain.
Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high shelving
equalizer with the following editable parameters: frequency, slope
and gain.
adjustable frequency, slope and Q.
6dB/Oct 6dB/Oct, 12dB/ SLOPE sets the steepness or filter-order of low or high shelving
Oct equalizers and low or high pass filters. Setting different slopes
within the transmission range is possible.
31 / 63 / 125 / 20 Hz to 20 kHz FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or

250 / 500 / 1k / the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass filters.

2k / 4k / 8k / 16k
Hz
0.7 0.4 to 40.0 Q defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ. A high Q-
(PEQ), 0.4 to 2.0 value results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-value results in a

(Hi-/Lopass) broadband filter. The Q-value also sets the quality and thus the
response of Hi, Lo and All pass filters with slopes of 12dB/oct..
0 dB -18 to +12 dB GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation (reduction)

of parametric EQs or low shelving and high shelving equalizers.

The caption of this button indicates the current state of the filter.
Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the filter (Bypass), which
allows for quick A / B-evaluation of the actual effect that a filter has
on the sound.
Press the EQ FLAT button to reset all filters to type PEQ with 0 dB.

Filter Editing via ”Mouse Movement” in the Graphics Display
by moving the mouse to the left or to the right as well as its magnitude (depending on the selected filter type) by
pressed down allows changing the Q-values of parametric EQs and Hipass/Lopass filters.
positioned over its white dot.

INPUT DELAY
Individual input delays can be set for each input channel of the power amplifier.
HINT: The Input Delay parameter is especially useful for delay lines. In this case the required delay depends only on
the position of the delay line and is identical for all band passes, e.g. output channels of the power amplifier. By
editing the Input Delay parameter the delays of all output channels routed to this input are adjusted automatically.

Channel Parameters
Channel name.
A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy &
Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all delay
parameters of the corresponding input to any other delay

0 ms 0 to 1000 DELAY allows delaying the corresponding input channel’s

ms audio signal by an adjustable period of time. Entering a
value only or a value and unit is possible.
The caption of this button indicates the current state of the

delay. Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the input

delay.

General Parameters
ms ms, samples, This lets you select the unit of measurement for the delays.
ft, in, m, cm,
µs, s
20 °Celsius -20 to 60 °C Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In case you have
-4 to 140 °F chosen a distance value as unit of measurement for the delay, delay times
are corrected in relation to temperature. Temperatures can be entered as
°C or °F.

Editing Delays by “Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display
the right or the left, which results in a change of the selected channel’s delay time. A delay’s title is shown black as
soon as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding icon to provide improved overview and handling.

ARRAY PARAMETRIC EQ
All output channels employ 5-band parametric equalizers each, mainly for speaker equalization of arrays. Except for the
possibility to select “All pass” as filter type, these filters are identical to the ones of the input EQ's.

The graphics display offers several different display modes, as described in the following table. Display generally
includes all effects of filters that are located pre Array Parametric EQ (input PEQ), which always provides precise
overview and control of the resulting frequency response at this point.
Element Description
Switch for displaying frequency response (magnitude) or phase response (phase)
Switch for scaling the dB-axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)
Displays the resulting transfer function of all filter and level settings and therefore graphically
displaying the audible result at the amplifier‘s outputs.

The ”Sum” switch causes display of the summed signal of the output channels, including Output
level and Mute. If the ”Sum ” switch is not pressed the output channels’ transfer functions are

indicated separately.
Switch for including programmed delays in the frequency or phase response indication. The delays
mainly affect phase response indication. Indicating the sound system processor channels’ summed

signals reveal very clearly the effect that the delays have on the frequency response, e.g. as notch
filter effect.
Switch for additionally displaying measured speaker transfer functions. For this function to be
effective you first have to load speaker data in the ”Speaker” tab.

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting output A or B for filter editing.
A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all
EQs of the corresponding output to any other RCM-28 Array EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters

A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the ”Copy & Paste”

menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of the according
filter to any other EQ within the same project.

Hishelv, Hipass, PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable frequency, Q and
Lopass, Allpass gain.
Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high shelving equalizer
with the following editable parameters: frequency, slope and gain.
6dB/Oct 6dB/Oct, 12dB/ SLOPE sets the steepness or filter-order of low or high shelving equalizers
Oct and low or high pass filters. Setting different slopes within the
transmission range is possible.

50 / 100 / 20 Hz to 20 kHz FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or the cut-
500 / off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass filters.
1k / 5k Hz
0.7 0.4 to 40.0 Q defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ. A high Q-value
(PEQ), 0.4 to results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-value results in a broadband
2.0 filter. The Q-value also sets the quality and thus the response of Hi, Lo and
(Hi-/Lo-/ All pass filters with slopes of 12dB/oct..
Allpass)
0 dB -18 to +12 dB GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation (reduction) of

first first, second ORDER (only available with Allpass filters) sets the desired filter order of
an All pass filter. A 1st order All pass filter rotates the phase by 180°, a 2nd
order All pass filter rotates the phase by 360°.
The caption of this button indicates the current state of the filter. Press the
ACTIVE button to deactivate the filter (Bypass), which allows for quick A /

B-evaluation of the actual effect that a filter has on the sound.

pressed down allows changing the Q-values. For an improved overview the name of the corresponding filter band
appears in color as soon as the mouse cursor is positioned over its white dot. An additional white graph indicates the
frequency response of the actually selected filter.

ARRAY DELAY
Individual array delays can be set for each output channel of the power amplifier.

HINT: The Array Delay parameter can be used for adjusting the individual cabinets within a loudspeaker cluster,
such as a subwoofer array or a center loudspeaker cluster. For example, in a speaker cluster consisting of two horn-
loaded loudspeakers, it is helpful to apply 3-5 ms of delay to one of the loudspeakers in the cluster to improve the
coverage in the overlap of the horn patterns. Additionally, the array delay provides a convenient section to apply
dedicated delay to individual subwoofer cabinets to create gradient or beam-formed arrays.



Channel Parameters
Channel name.

parameters of the corresponding output to any other delay
0 ms 0 to 100 Delay allows delaying the corresponding output channel’s

ms audio signal by an adjustable period of time.

delay. Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the delay.

General Parameters
ft, in, m, cm,
µs, s
°C or °F.

Editing Delays by ”Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display


OUTPUT PARAMETRIC EQ
All output channels employ 6-band parametric equalizers each, mainly for speaker equalization. Except for the
possibility to select ”All pass” as filter type, these filters are identical to the ones of the input EQ's.

includes all effects of filters that are located pre Output Parametric EQ, which always provides precise overview and
control of the resulting frequency response at this point.
Element Description
Switch for scaling the dB- axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)
Displays the resulting transfer function of all filter and level trim settings and therefore graphically
displaying the audible result at the amplifier‘s outputs.

The ”Sum” switch causes display of the summed signal of the output channels, including output
level and mute. If the ”Sum ” switch is not pressed the output channels’ transfer functions are


signals reveal very clearly the effect that the delays have on the frequency response, e.g. as notch
filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description


EQs of the corresponding output to any other RCM-28 Output EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters


menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of the according
filter to any other EQ within the same project.

Loshelv. PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable frequency, Q and
Hishelv, gain.
Hipass, Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high shelving equalizer
Lopass, with the following editable parameters: frequency, slope and gain.
Allpass Lopass / Hipass creates low pass respectively high pass filters with
6dB/Oct 6dB/Oct, SLOPE sets the steepness or filter-order of low or high shelving equalizers
12dB/ Oct and low or high pass filters. Setting different slopes within the transmission
range is possible.
20 / 62 / 20 Hz to 20 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or the cut-off

250 / 1k kHz frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass filters.
/ 4k / 16k
Hz
0.7 0.4 to 40.0 Q defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ. A high Q-value results
(PEQ), 0.4 to in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-value results in a broadband filter. The
2.0 Q-value also sets the quality and thus the response of Hi, Lo and All pass
(Hi-/Lo-/ filters with slopes of 12dB/oct..
Allpass)
0 dB -18 to +12 dB GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation (reduction) of

first first, second ORDER (only available with All pass filters) sets the desired filter order of an
All pass filter. A 1st order All pass filter rotates the phase by 180°, a 2nd
order All pass filter rotates the phase by 360°.

The caption of this button indicates the current state of the filter. Press the
ACTIVE button to deactivate the filter (Bypass), which allows for quick A / B-

evaluation of the actual effect that a filter has on the sound.


OUTPUT X-OVER
The Output X-Over window allows accessing the frequency crossover with Hi- and Lo-Pass filters, a delay, gain-trim and
polarity selector switch. By means of these parameters you are able to correctly configure a multi-way speaker
system’s individual frequency bands, compensate for natural delays and adjust levels.

The graphics display offers several different display modes, as described in the following table. Indication generally
includes all effects of filters that are located pre X-Over (e.g. Array Parametric EQ), which always provides precise over-
Element Description
displaying the audible result at the amplifier‘s outputs. The audible result is displayed in bright

colors while all ”electrical” graphs are drawn in dark colors.

The ”Sum” switch causes display of the summed signal of the output channels. If the ”Sum ” switch
is not pressed the output channels’ transfer functions are indicated separately.



signals reveals very clearly the effect that the delays have on the frequency response, e.g. as notch
filter effect.

Channel Selection

Element Description


copying all X-Over settings of the corresponding output to any other X-Over within the same project.
Press the Link button to link following parameters of the LOPASS filter of OUTPUT A and HIPASS
filter of OUTPUT B:

RESPONSE
FREQ

Channel parameter

thru, 6dB, Different types of filters (Bessel, Butterworth, Linkwitz/
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/Q=0.6, Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct. and 24 dB/Oct. can
12dB/Q=0.7, be set as filter response. Selecting filter frequencies
12dB/Q=0.8, 12dB/Q=1.0, between 20 Hz and 20 kHz is possible as well.

12dB/Q=1.2, A click with the right mouse button on the HIPASS field
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/Q=2.0, opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all
Bessel 12dB, Butterworth parameters of the corresponding HI-PASS filter to any HI-
12dB, Linkwitz/Riley 12dB, PASS filters within the same project.
Bessel 18dB, Butterworth
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Butterworth 24dB, Linkwitz/
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz to 20 kHz


kHz thru, 6dB, Different types of filters (Bessel, Butterworth, Linkwitz/
12dB/Q=1.2, A click with the right mouse button on the LOPASS field
Bessel 12dB, Butterworth parameters of the corresponding LO-PASS filter to any LO-
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz to 20 kHz
0 dB -30 dB to 6 dB TRIM allows increasing the level of the corresponding

channel by up to 6 dB or lowering it by up to 30 dB to
allow level adjustment among individual frequency bands.
Normal Normal, Inverted The POLARITY parameter offers the possibility to invert a
channels audio signal, i.e. to rotate its phase by 180°.
Inverting the signal may become necessary for some
specific crossover settings to eliminate the risk of sound
cancellation at the crossover frequency. The effect of the
polarity parameter becomes obvious when displaying the
summed signal of the two amplifier channels (switch set to
“Sum”).
0 ms 0.0 to 20 ms DELAY allows the delay of the audio signal from the
HINT: The X-Over Delay parameter is used for the
alignment of transducers within cabinets. Optimized
delay values are included in Speaker Settings and should
not be edited.
Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the delay (Bypass),

which allows for quick A / B-evaluation of the actual effect

that the delay has on the sound.

Editing X-Over Filters by ”Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display

Active X-Over filters (Response not set to „thru“) are indicated by a white dot on the frequency response curve, which
pressed down lets you set the frequency of the corresponding filter by moving the mouse to the left or the right. A
filter’s title ”lights” in color as soon as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding white dot to provide
improved overview and handling.

OUTPUT FIR

Each output of the RCM-28 offers a 512 taps FIR filter.
Element Description
displaying the audible result at the amplifier‘s outputs. The audible result is displayed in bright

colors while all ”electrical” graphs are drawn in dark colors.



filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description

A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying of

all FIR filter settings of the corresponding output to any other FIR filter within the same project.

Channel Parameters
Element Description
Description of the FIR filter currently in use.
After clicking onto LOAD the "Open File..." dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the
directory in which the desired file is located and select the desired FIR file to be opened. This loads

and afterwards displays all FIR filter parameters that are stored within that file.
CAUTION: The loaded FIR filter file becomes instantly audible when in on-line mode. Be sure to
select the desired FIR file with the correct set of parameters. In the worst case, this could lead
to severe damage to the connected loudspeaker cabinets due to improper signal processing!
After clicking on EXPORT FIR a "Save File..." dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the
directory that you want to save the data in. Enter a file name (without extension). Click on the SAVE

button to store the FIR filter parameters together with the corresponding file name. ".gkf" is
automatically added as file extension.
Clears the current FIR filter settings. A Default-FIR-Filter (Thru) is activated instead.
Clicking on the NEW button opens the Filter Design dialog.
Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the filter (Bypass), which allows for quick A / B-evaluation of
the actual effect that the filter has on the sound.

Adjusts the gain of the signal between -30 dB and +6 dB.
The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader setting.
Clicking the MUTE button with the left mouse button mutes the corresponding output. The MUTE
button is virtually pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with the left mouse

button disables the mute-function and the output is again active. The MUTE button is virtually

FIR-Filter Design
ORDER of the FIR filter.
1600 Hz 20 to 19999 HI PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Hi pass filter.
Hz
16 kHz 21 to 20000 LO Pass sets the cut-off frequency of the Lo pass filter.
Hz
40 dB 21 to 100 dB STOP RIPPLE sets the slope of the FIR filter.
Band Pass Allows selection of the FIR filter type of the corresponding
output channel.
Press this button to generate the FIR filter.

OUTPUT DELAY

Individual output delays can be set for each output channel of the power amplifier.

HINT: The power amplifier’s output delays can be used to compensate for the positioning of cabinets or speaker
arrays relative to each other or the original sound source, for example aligning the PA to the stage or aligning the
full-range loudspeakers to the subwoofers. The Output Delay parameter determines the delay time of the
corresponding channel or the distance between different loudspeaker clusters.



Channel Parameters
Channel name.
A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which

allows convenient copying all delay parameters of the corresponding output
to any other delay within the same project.
0 ms 0 to Delay allows delaying the corresponding output channel’s audio signal by an

1000 ms adjustable period of time.
Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the output delay.

General Parameters
ft, in, m, cm,
µs, s
20 ° -20 to 60 °C Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In case you have
Celsius -4 to 140 °F chosen a distance value as unit of measurement for the delay, delay times are
corrected in relation to temperature. Temperatures can be entered as °C or
°F.


OUTPUT LIMITERS

Each output channel of the power amplifier offers a peak limiter and a TEMP limiter. These functions can be accessed
via the Output Limiters window to change the corresponding parameters providing reliable protection for the
connected speaker systems against sudden peaks and overload.

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting output A or B for limiter editing.


limiter settings of the corresponding output to any other limiter within the same project.

Limiter Parameters
Indicates the gain of the power amplifier.
692 Vpk 22 Vpk to 692 Vpk AMP THRESH determines the audio signal level at
the amplifier output above which the peak limiter
starts operating.
21 dBu -9 dBu to 21 dBu DSP THRESH determines the audio signal level at
the RCM-28 output above which the peak limiter
starts operating.
User User, Hi, Mid, Lo, Sub TYPE allows a user to select a loudspeaker type,
and the software will enter appropriate default time
constants for the loudspeaker type selected.
Speaker settings include factory-defined time
constants, so this section is only for use when
creating DSP settings from scratch.

0 ms 0 to 50 ms ATTACK determines how fast the limiter reduces

amplification when the threshold is exceeded.
100 ms 10 to 1000 ms RELEASE determines how fast the limiter returns to

Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the peak

limiter.
The ACTIVATED LED lights green if the TEMP limiter

is active.
A note is shown below the LED if the TEMP limiter
is not included in a setting or bypassed.

Gain Reduction Meters
Element Description
These indicators show the reduction in dB that is applied to the audio signal by the Peak Anticipation
limiter (PEAK) or the TEMP limiter (TEMP LIMITER). Level reduction is indicated as vertical bar graph,
the color corresponds to the selected channel.

Editing Limiter Parameters by “Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display
Active limiters (BYPASS button is not engaged) are indicated by a white dot in the graphics display representing its

Speaker
Voice or DY- NACORD loudspeaker systems. Some examples are provided in the IRIS-Net directory Speaker Files.

HINT: When importing a speaker setting into a output channel the corresponding speaker file is imported
automatically.

functions.

Element Description
(phase) display
dB)

Channel Parameters
No The name of the loaded loudspeaker model is shown in the black-shaded

speaker field.

1 1 to 10 The NUMBER parameter allows the user to specify the number of speaker
systems connected to the corresponding channel. Doubling the number of

speakers results in a level increase of 6 dB within the selected channel in the
DSP windows.
Clicking the LOAD button opens a dialog that allows the selection of the
desired speaker file.
Clicking the CLEAR button clears the previously loaded measured speaker
data of the selected channel.
Load
amplifier outputs.
system check.

HINT: The speaker impedance test is optimized for low impedance.

The switches "Show Loadplot A" and "Show Loadplot B"

turn the indication of the corresponding impedance

graphs ON or OFF.

The switches "Show Reference A" and "Show Reference

B" turn the indication of the corresponding reference

10 kOhm 50 Ohm...10 DIAGRAM RANGE allows zooming in or out the diagram’s

kOhm impedance range (Y- axis).

Parameters And Indications For The Continuous Monitoring Of The Load Connected
The load display indicates the quotient of measured voltage and

current (U/I).
This indication shows the actual measured load, the progression, and
the set value range. The orange needle indicates the actual value.
The bright green bar indicates which loads have already been
measured while being on-line. A red indication signals that the value
exceeded or fell short of the set value range. The dark green area
represents the allowable value range for the load of the
corresponding power amp channel. The set HIGH THRESH
respectively LOW THRESH values define the limits for this value
range. Moving the cursor over the indication bar brings up a tool- tip
context menu showing the numerical value of the lowest, the
highest, and the actually measured load values. Clicking with the
right mouse button on the indication bar, followed by a click on
Reset, clears the previously measured load values (bright green and
red ranges disappear).


300 0 Ohm...10 HIGH THRESH sets the upper limit of the allowable impedance range
Ohm kOhm (= minimum load). Once this value is exceeded, an OPEN fault
message (line interrupt) appears in the Amplifier Control Panel.
1 0hm 0 Ohm... LOW THRESH sets the lower limit of the allowable impedance range
300 Ohm (= maximum load). Once this value is fallen short of, a SHORTED
fault message (line short- circuit) appears in the Amplifier Control
Panel.

Parameters For Impedance Measurement
Element Defaul Range Description

t
0 dBu -10 / 0 / GEN. LEVEL sets the generator level for speaker impedance testing.
10 dBu CAUTION: Extremely high levels during measurement may result in
seriously damaging connected components.

20 Hz 20 Hz...20 SWEEP START sets the start frequency of the sine-sweep signal for
kHz speaker impedance testing.
20 kHz 20 Hz...20 SWEEP STOP sets the stop frequency of the sine-sweep signal for
kHz speaker impedance testing.
Clicking the START TEST soft-key launches the speaker impedance

test. The generated sine-sweep signal sweeps over the previously

defined frequency range. The graph of the measured impedance
values is indicated in the Loadplot display. Clicking this soft-key again
cancels the test at any time.
10% 5%...50% Clicking the SET REF. CH. A and/or SET REF. CH. B soft-key saves the
last test as reference. Clicking the CLEAR REF. CH. A and/or CLEAR
REF. CH. B soft-key clears the corresponding reference. TOLERANCE

defines the allowable deviation of the impedance graph. Actual
measured test results and saved tolerance ranges are being compared
during system check. A fault message is displayed if any point of the
actual measurement falls outside of this tolerance range. The
Clicking the CLEAR. CH. soft-key clears the current loadplot. Clicking
the EXPORT REF. CH. soft-key stores the current loadplot to a file.
Clicking the IMPORT REF. CH. soft-key loades a stored loadplot from a
file.
Supervision & Test

The Supervision & Test Dialog integrates functions for testing and monitoring power amplifiers.

Element Description


as testing the functionality of the loudspeaker components
Pink Noise Sine, White Type selects the test tone's signal-type
Noise, Pink
Noise
available when White Noise or Pink Noise has been chosen as a test-tone
signal.
PRE/SOLO POST/MIX, MIX/SOLO determines whether the generated signal should be mixed
POST/SOLO, with an existing signal. PRE/POST determines if the signal should be
PRE/MIX, PRE/ generated at the front (PRE) or the rear (POST) of the signal processing
SOLO chain.
0.775 V 0.001...2.451 V These controls are for setting output voltage [V] of the corresponding
amplifier outputs.
0 dBu -60...+10 dBu These controls are for setting output level [dBu] of the corresponding
amplifier outputs.

CAUTION: Make sure to set a suitable output level, before activating
the generator. Extreme output levels can lead to permanent damage of
the connected loudspeaker systems!

Error Detection
interruption, short-circuits, load deviation, ground fault, erroneous communication as well as fault messages of other
amps. A green STATE indicator signals normal operation. A red STATE indicator signals error detection.
HOLD option is not active, indication returns to green, once the fault is no longer detected. Pressing the CLEAR button
in the COLLECTED ERROR STATE line resets the indicator from red to green and stored errors are deleted. The
Config & Info.
Error type Description
FAULT DISPLAY The red FAULT DISPLAY indicator lights, if a error message is indicated at the amplifier's front
LC-Display.
THERMAL WARNING The power amplifier is protected against thermal overload and will reduce the output power if
the internal temperature exceeds a fixed threshold value (please refer to the owner‘s manual
for more details). In this case the THERMAL WARNING indicator lights red.
With the THERMAL HEADROOM parameter in IRIS-Net the threshold for the THERMAL
WARNING indication can be changed to get the warning indication already at lower
temperatures, meaning before the amplifier reduces the output power. The THERMAL
HEADROOM can be adjusted from 0 to 30 °C which means a temperature warning indication
could be configured up to 30 °C before reduction.
PROTECTION / When the red PROTECTION / REDUCTION indicator lights, one of the internal protections
REDUCTION (thermal overload, short-circuit, Back-EMF, HF at the output, etc.) has been activated. The
differentiated protections concept of the power amp results in several protection circuits
being activated one after another, which ensures that under normal circumstances the power
amplifier will stay in the safe and stabile operating range.
PROTECTION MUTE When the red PROTECTION MUTE indicator lights, the signal path is switched off. The
amplifier needs to be switched off to prevent power amplifier and connected speaker systems
from being damaged, this is indicated by the PROTECT and MUTE-LEDs being lit
simultaneously.
SHORTED / LOAD LO This indicator lights red when the measured impedance value of the corresponding power
amp output falls below a pre-set minimum or when it is shorted. Setting the minimum value is
possible in the Load dialog.
OPEN / LOAD HI This indicator lights red when the measured impedance value of the corresponding power
amp output exceeds a pre-set maximum or when cable interruption is detected. Setting the
stages. The threshold for 19 kHz pilot-tone evaluation is set to -40 dBu / 7.75 mV. The
indicator lights green when an external pilot-tone signal coming from mixer, matrix, controller,
etc. is detected. A missing pilot-tone signal or a drop in its level below the evaluation
threshold causes the indicator to change to red. Only mark the DETECT box next to the
indicator when an external pilot-tone signal actually exists and input monitoring has been
configured.

DETECTION pilot-tone generation needs to be switched off to avoid interference between the two signals.
Detection and evaluation is performed at the amplifier output. The indicator lights green when
a 19 kHz pilot-tone signal with a level of at least -14 dBu / 150mV is detected. A missing pilot-
tone signal or a drop in its level below -14 dBu (threshold) results in error detection. The
indicator changes to red.
remote amplifier, i.e. the signal is influenced by filtering and x-over settings. When setting
the external pilot-tone generator's level, make sure to mind possible amplification/
attenuation applied by internal filters.
COLLECTED ERROR COLLECTED ERROR STATE is a collected fault message that combines all error types
STATE detected for which the DETECT box had been marked. The HOLD function allows keeping
the COLLECTED ERROR STATE for later evaluation while CLEAR clears the indication after
OMNEO
The OMNEO Dialog integrates functions for configuring and monitoring the OMNEO network. A click on the OMNEO tab
selects the page while in the Setup & Control Window.

OMNEO ROUTING
Element Description
DEVICE Select the OMNEO device that is the signal source of the audio signal to be used in the RCM-28.
Different OMNEO devices can be selected for INPUT CHANNEL A or B.
CHANNEL Select the OMNEO channel to be used in the INPUT CHANNEL A or B.

INTERFACE SETTINGS
PRIMARY/SECONDARY INTERFACE
Element Description
IP ADDRESS Indicates the IP address of the primary or secondary interface.
MAC Indicates the MAC address of the primary or secondary interface.

ADDRESS
INTERFACE Indicates the Ethernet speed of the primary or secondary interface (e.g. 1 GBit).
STATUS
TX Indicates the current total transmit bandwidth in use.

UTILISATION
TX ERRORS Indicates the number of transmit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) or packet errors detected since
last restart.
RX Indicates the current total receive bandwidth in use.

UTILISATION
RX ERRORS Indicates the number of receive Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) or packet errors detected since last
restart.

CLOCK SYNCHRONISATION
Element Description
LATENCY Select the receive latency time of the RCM-28.
MASTER Indicates the name of the device that is clock master on that network.
PREFERRED The LED lights, if this device is clock master on that network. Pressing the SET button raises the
MASTER priority of the device in the clock master election. If only one device on the network has this button
pressed this ensures that the selected device becomes clock master. When multiple devices have
their SET button pressed, the master will be elected from within that group. This is a convenient
method of controlling the group of devices from which the master can be selected.
Firmware upgrade
The RCM-28 FWUT FirmWare Update Tool is available in the download sections of www.dynacord.com or www.electro-
voice.com

RCM-810
Using RCM-810 remote amplifiers

The IRIS-Net software (Intelligent Remote & Integrated Supervision) runs under Windows and allows configuring, cont-
rolling and monitoring a complete PA-system from a single or from several PCs. Any operational status, e.g. power-on,
temperature, limiting, activation of protections, deviation of the output impedance, etc., are centrally recorded and
displayed, which offers the opportunity to react and interfere even before the occurrence of critical operational states.
Programming automated actions that are carried out when exceeding or falling short of certain threshold values is
possible as well. All parameters, e.g. power-on/off, mute etc. are controlled in real-time and can be stored in any power
amplifier. Monitoring the connected loudspeaker systems is performed by continuously measuring output currents and
voltages of individual power amplifier channels. Each exceeding or falling short of set thresholds is instantly signaled
and logged. In this way, short-circuits or line interruptions, as they might occur during normal operation, are
recognized and displayed immediately.
Furthermore, the RCM-810 provides a control port with freely programmable control inputs and control outputs.
Control inputs (GPI's) allow the connection of switches. IRIS-Net offers the possibility to program a variety of logic
functions for the inputs. Control outputs (GPO's) allow the connection of external components, which, for example,
are used to signal specific states to peripheral equipment. Consequently, an amplifier with a RCM-810 module installed
corresponds to highest safety requirements.

Remote Amplifiers
DYNACORD DSA SERIE
– DSA 8204 2 x 450 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 650 W / 2 Ohm
– DSA 8405 4 x 500 W / 2...4 Ohm
– DSA 8410 4 x 1000 W / 2...4 Ohm
– DSA 8805 8 x 500 W / 2...4 Ohm
ELECTRO-VOICE CPS SERIE
– CPS2.4 2 x 450 W / 4 Ohm or 2 x 650 W / 2 Ohm
– CPS4.5 4 x 500 W / 2...4 Ohm
– CPS4.10 4 x 1000 W / 2...4 Ohm
– CPS8.5 8 x 500 W / 2...4 Ohm


Indications and Functions of the Amplifier Control Panel

Element Description
Info page. CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a name is not permissible.

active.
The amplifier channels are named channel 1 to n (n = number of channels). A name can be assigned
to each channel to easily identify its allocation and use. Using the left mouse button, click in the

entry field and enter the desired name for the channel. Press Return on the keyboard to
acknowledge your entry.
Info page.

allowable range or if short-circuit or line interruption has occurred.
The green OK-indication signals that the connected load is between the specified lower and upper
limit values. The red OPEN indication signals line interruption. It lights whenever the connected load
exceeds the upper limit value. The red SHORTED indication signals short-circuit at the amplifier
output. It lights whenever the connected load falls below the lower limit value.
delay.
When the red PROTECT indicator lights, one of the internal protections (thermal overload, short-
circuit, Back-EMF, HF at the output, etc.) has been activated.
The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding amplifier output to –∞.

MAX. OUTPUT PWR indicates the configured maximum output power of the channel (for 4 and 8
channel amplifiers only).
MIN. IMPEDANCE indicates the configured minimum impedance of the channel (for 4 and 8 channel
amplifiers only).
GAIN/SENSITIVITY displays the amplifiers constant gain (for 4 and 8 channel amplifiers only).
Clicking on the VLD SET button of a 4 or 8 channel amplifier opens the VLD tab in the Setup &
Control window. The LED indicator next to the button lights when VLD of the channel is activated.

AMP ROUTING shows how the audio inputs handle the input signals (4 and 8 channel amplifiers
only). Possible settings are DUAL and PARALLEL/BRIDGED. Switching the amp routing is only
possible locally at the power amplifiers, details can be found in the amplifiers owner's manual.
amplifier-, control and monitoring functions.
for each amplifier.
HINT: The power-on delay defaults to "Address * 150 ms". For address 8 the power-on delay
default would be for example: 8 * 150 ms = 1200 ms.

Setup & Control

Window Description
Test generator.
VLD This page allows configuring the VLD of 4 and 8 channel amplifiers.

Clicking on the soft key SET in the Amplifier Control Panel opens the Setup & Control window.
Config & Info

To select the page click onto the Configuration & Information register in the Setup & Control Window.


Amplifier Info
Element Description
AMPLIFIER MODEL Shows the amplifier type
AMPLIFIER FIRMWARE Shows the amp software’s version number (operating system, firmware)
RCM-810 FIRMWARE Shows the remote control module software’s version number (operating system,
firmware)
UPTIME Shows the uptime of the amplifier (standby not included).

Amplifier Setup
POWER DELAY Address * 50...4000 ms Allows programming an amplifier’s power-on delay. Setting different
The value defaults to address * 150 ms
This dialog indicates the actual states of the two freely programmable
control inputs IN1 and IN2. A green indicator signals "not active", i.e.
the control input is open or "high". A red indicator signals "active", in
that case the control input is connected to the ground or "low".
This dialog is for manually controlling the two Open Collector control
outputs OUT1 and OUT2. Not engaged (blue) indicates that the
control output is deactivated or highly resistive while engaged (red)
indicates that the control output is activated and connected to the
ground (closed).

HINT: When a control output has already been programmed, the
programmed function defines the state of the control output and
manual control is not possible.

Element Description
structure. All labels can be edited. Changes are immediately adopted in the different
panels and windows (amplifier control panel, flow diagram, overview).

Control Port
functions of these inputs and outputs can be randomly programmed. For example, the control inputs (GPI) can be used
for power- on / stand-by or preset switching as well as for changing parameters. The control outputs (GPO) are for
signaling internal statuses. They can directly trigger LEDs, control lamps or relays. In the Supervision & Test window
the states of the control inputs are displayed and you have the possibility to switch the control outputs manually. For
more information and electrical specifications of the control port, please refer to the amplifier manuals.
Example:
This example shows the programming of two control inputs where IN1 switches the amplifier on or off.
IN 1 ON This provides a listing of the two control inputs and their statuses ON and
IN 1 OFF OFF. The entries in the corresponding lines specify the action when
IN 2 ON closing (ON) or opening (OFF) a contact.
IN 2 OFF
(empty) This column allows assigning functions to a control input’s statuses.

Clicking the desired line in the Function menu opens a dialog field that
shows all accessible functions. The table "Input and Receive Job
Functions" lists all functions together with their individual settings.
0 ms 0...10027 ms Here you can program delay or debouncing times. Following a status
16.33 ms change the assigned function is initiated after the set time interval has
Steps past.

Control Outputs: Internal status changes inside of the amplifier, like for example operational faults, alerts when
exceeding parameter limits, and internal operational statuses can be signaled to external systems or central control
units.
Example:
– OUT2 ON: StateFlag (control output 2 is closed when operational faults according to the parameter list have
occurred)
– OUT2 OFF: Invert StateFlag (control output 2 is open when no faults have occurred)
0 OUT 1 ON This provides a listing of the two control outputs and their statuses ON and
OUT 1 OFF OFF. The entries in the corresponding lines specify which status results in the
OUT 2 ON closing (ON) or opening (OFF) of a contact.
OUT 2 OFF
(empty) This column allows assigning internal events (conditions) to a control output’s
statuses. Clicking the desired line in the Function menu opens a dialog field
that shows all accessible functions. The table "Output and Transmit Job
Conditions" lists all functions together with their individual settings.
0 ms 0...10027 ms Here you can program delay or debouncing times. An event is signaled following
16.33 ms an internal status change and after the specified time interval has past.
Steps
(empty) (empty) / X This column allows entering whether a status is signaled when the specified
Condition is „true“ (no entry) or
synchronized with a sync-signal. This flag is erased when entering a new
Function.

Jobs


Example:
This example shows the programming of two Receive Jobs. Jobs No. 1 and 2 switch the amplifier’s power on or off
0 1...1023 Here, you can specify which incoming job code numbers a specific amplifier
recognizes. Entering random numbers between 0 and 1023 is possible.
(empty) This column allows assigning an individual function to each job code
received. Clicking the desired line in the Function menu opens a dialog field
that shows all accessible functions. The table "Input and Receive Job
Functions" lists all functions together with their individual settings.

group that includes all the desired amps and afterwards perform the programming in the group’s Configuration &

Example:

0 1...65536 Here, you can specify which job code numbers an amplifier transmits on
the occurrence of specific events. Entering random numbers between 0
and 65536 is possible.
(empty) This column allows specifying an event (condition) that triggers the
corresponding transmit job code. Clicking the desired line in the Condition
menu opens a dialog field that shows all accessible functions. The table
"Output and Transmit Job Conditions" lists all functions together with
0 ms 0...10027 ms Here, you can program delay or debouncing times. A transmit job code is
16.33 ms sent following a specific event and after the specified time interval has
Steps past.
This column allows entering whether a job code is transmitted when the
specified Condition is "tru" (no entry) or "false" (click "X" to signal an
inverted state).

Input and Receive Job Function: The following table lists all functions together with their individual settings, which

Empty - - None

Absolute Mute 0 = not Set the specified absolute parameter value for the selected parameter
muted, 1 =
muted
Toggle Mute Changes the status of the selected parameter
Memoflag Set, Clear, Sets, erases or changes selected memory flags. Up to 16 memory flags
Toggle are available and simultaneously accessible.
Memoflags 1 -
16

Function Parameter Opt.Value Invert Triggering Event / Status

Change

Power Power On
Absolute Mute 0 = not Set parameter value reached or

muted, 1 = X exceeded Set parameter value
muted declined
Temp Temperature in Set temperature reached or

°C X exceeded Set temperature
declined
VU Out 1...n Level in dB Set level reached or exceeded

X Set level declined
GPI IN 1, IN 2 Control input 1 / 2 closed (ON)

X Control input 1 / 2 open (OFF)
Stateflag All internal fault Single or several stateflags set

conditions X None of the selected stateflags
set
Memoflag Enable for Memory flags match the

selected flags as X selected bit-pattern Memory
well as bit- flags do not match the selected
pattern of flags bit-pattern
1 - 16
Supervision & Test

The Supervision & Test Dialog integrates functions for testing and monitoring power amps. Status indicators for
general power amp operation, the amplifier channels and the load connected, indicate whether everything is okay or
where failures occurred. You have the option to choose, which errors are combined and indicated in a general fault
message.

Error Detection
detection.
Config & Info.

Element Description
AMPLIFIER
THERMAL WARNING This indicator lights red when the power amp's temperature exceeds the pre-set threshold,
which defaults to 110 °C. If necessary, changing the temperature threshold is possible via
THERMAL LIMIT.
The power amp, however, is protected against thermal overload at all times, independent of
the indication.
NETWORK This indicator shows whether communication at the CAN bus interface is normal (green) or
when a problem exists (red). The power amp automatically detects whether commands from a
PC or another central control unit are missing and signals the problem via the Communication
Flag.
WATCHDOG This indicator lights red when the power amp‘s watchdog has been activated. Press the CLEAR
AMPLIFIER button to clear the indication.
WATCHDOG This indicator lights red when the module‘s watchdog has been activated. Press the CLEAR
MODULE button to clear the indication.
CHANNEL 1...n
THERMAL WARNING This indicator lights red when the power amp's output channel temperature exceeds the pre-
set threshold. The power amp, however, is protected against thermal overload at all times,
independent of the indication.
PROTECT / When the red PROTECT / REDUCTION indicator lights, one of the internal protections (thermal
REDUCTION overload, short-circuit, Back-EMF, HF at the output, etc.) has been activated.
PROTECTION MUTE When the red PROTECT MUTE indicator lights, the signal path gets switched off. The amplifier
needs to be switched off to prevent power amplifier and connected speaker systems from
being damaged, this is indicated by the PROTECT and MUTE-LEDs being lit simultaneously.

LOAD This indication shows the actual measured load, the progression, and the set value range. The
orange needle indicates the actual value. The bright green bar indicates which loads have
already been measured while being on-line. A red indication signals that the value exceeded or
fell short of the set value range. The dark green area represents the allowable value range for
the load of the corresponding power amp channel. The set HIGH THRESH respectively LOW
THRESH values define the limits for this value range. Moving the cursor over the indication bar
brings up a tool-tip context menu showing the numerical value of the lowest, the highest, and
the actually measured load values. Clicking with the right mouse button on the indication bar,
followed by a click on Reset, clears the previously measured load values (bright green and red
ranges disappear).
SHORTED / LOAD LO This indicator lights red when the measured impedance value of the corresponding power amp
output falls below a pre-set minimum LOW THRESH or when it is shorted.
OPEN / LOAD HI This indicator lights red when the measured impedance value of the corresponding power amp
output exceeds a pre-set maximum HIGH THRESH or when cable interruption is detected.
OUTPUT PILOT This indicator is for amplifier monitoring via external pilot-tone signal. Detection and evaluation
DETECTION is performed at the amplifier output. The indicator lights green when a 19 kHz pilot-tone signal
with a level of at least -14 dBu / 150mV is detected. A missing pilot-tone signal or a drop in its
level below -14 dBu (threshold) results in error detection. The indicator changes to red.
EOL SHORTED This indicator lights red if the voltage at the amplifier‘s output is below the EOL VOLTAGE
threshold.
EOL OPEN This indicator lights red if the current at the amplifier‘s output is below the EOL CURRENT
threshold
EOL VOLTAGE Threshold for EOL SHORTED error indication.
EOL CURRENT Threshold for EOL OPEN error indication.
DETECTION
AMPLIFIER STATE A RCM-810 remote amplifier is capable of detecting and indicating the operational state of
other RCM-810 amps within a CAN network. The addresses of all amps that are to be
monitored are entered in the ADDR field, e.g. 2-4,6,11. The FAULT field indicates the amp
addresses for which errors have been detected and the COLLECTED ERROR STATE has been
activated (red). The indicator changes to red as soon as at least one amplifier in the list shows
erroneous operation.
MASTER
COLLECTED ERROR COLLECTED ERROR STATE is a collected fault message that combines all error types detected
STATE for which the DETECT box had been marked. The HOLD function allows keeping the
COLLECTED ERROR STATE for later evaluation while CLEAR clears the indication after
Variable Load Drive (VLD)

The VLD window allows configuration of the "Variable Load Drive" mode of the amplifier output channels. For each
channel the maximum output power and minimum impedance can be set. Additionally a 50 Hz Low Cut Filter can be
activated for each channel. To select the page click onto the VLD register in the Setup & Control Window.

Element Description
MAX. OUTPUT Set the maximum output power of the channel.

POWER
MIN. IMPEDANCE Set the minimum impedance connected to the channel.
50 HZ LOW CUT Activates the 50 Hz Low Cut filter.
VLD ACTIVE Activates the VLD mode of the channel. This checkbox has an effect only if the amplifier output
channel is operated in output mode 2 Ohm/ VLD. In the output modes 4 Ohm, 70 V or 100 V the
setting of the checkbox has no effect on the output channel.
Firmware Upgrade
The firmware of RCM-810 remote amps is stored in a FLASH-memory chip. This technology has been chosen to be able
to provide the users with new software without the hassle of physically exchanging memory chips inside of a remote
install new firmware and future software extensions to always keep your Remote Amplifier System up-to-date.
The RCM-810 firmware is divided into a part for basic amplifier functions (e.g. power on/off, CAN communication) and
a part for extended functions (e.g. signal processing). Even if the firmware update procedure does not finish
successfully, basic amplifier functions stay functional and the update procedure can be repeated.

Caution!
Consequences

1. Simultaneously upgrading the firmware of more than four remote amplifiers is not recommended.



Necessary preparations
Make sure to check the following parameters before upgrading:
Element Description
RCM-xx[x] Indicates the addresses of the remote amps connected. Make sure that the addresses shown are only
not permissible.
Bandwidth Indicates the used bandwidth of the CAN-bus in percent. Make sure to check that the CAN-bus is not
You can update the firmware of the remote control module or the firmware of the amplifier itself.

Firmware update of the Remote Control Module

1. The CAN-interface window provides a toolbar (top line). Clicking onto the U-icon (Update) opens an Module
Selection dialog.
2. Select RCM-810 and click onto "Continue".
connecting only a single amplifier is recommended to become familiar with the upgrading procedure. The
addresses of the selected remote amp(s) are shown in the firmware update window on the right side next to the
button “Select Devices...” and in the line “Active Devices”.
example shows how to upgrade the firmware of the remote amplifiers with the addresses 1 and 2 to firmware
version V 1.02.


Firmware update of the amplifier
Selection dialog.
2. Select CPS DSA Amplifier and click onto Continue.
corresponding file is located in the directory: \IRIS\Firmware\CPS DSA. This path also appears in the line
4. Select the amplifier that you want to update and click the “OK” button. The list should only show amps that you
want to update. No other amplifier should be connected to the CAN-bus.

example shows how to upgrade the firmware of the remote amp with the address 1 to firmware version V 1.01.

ADDITIONAL NOTES CONCERNING A FIRMWARE UPGRADE
Step Description
Start Update Activates update mode for the selected devices.

The messages window shows “Update started (addresses)” .. and after a
short period of time “ok”.
Verify Compares the firmware installed in the remote amps with the selected
firmware file.
The messages window shows “Verifying (addresses)”...a progression-bar
indicates the approximate duration of the process. Detected differences
are indicated at the end of the process, e.g. “done, Errors detected for...”.
If no errors time-outs are detected, you can proceed with the update.
Erase Flashes Deletes the actual firmware and clears the FLASH-memory of a remote
amplifier.
The messages window shows “Erasing (addresses)”..... and after a short
period of time “ok”.

The messages window shows “Programming (addresses)"........ A
progression-bar indicates the approximate duration of the programming.
“ok” appears in the message window after some time.

The messages window shows “Checksum (addresses)” .. and after a short
period of time “ok”. This is a short form of the “Verify” process.
Stop Update Finishes upgrading.

The messages window shows “Finishing (addresses)" .. and after a short
period of time “ok”. The remote amps quit the update mode and start in
normal mode.
Now, you can exit the upgrade dialog or proceed with upgrading other
remote amps.
sequence: Start Update - Program.

IRIS-Net REV WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM | en 307
REV WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM
Introduction

The REV Wireless Microphone system combines frequency agility and ease of use like no other. The REV transmitters
and receivers operate over a 24 MHz bandwidth in the UHF portion of the spectrum. The high quality audio circuitry
and advanced Radio Frequency (RF) signal processing offer broadcast quality signal-to-noise and audio clarity.
The system features include:
Advanced ClearScan technology for selecting clear channels and inter-modulation free groups
– 960 Radio Channels, user programmable or factory installed
– LCD Displays for ease of viewing
– Patented DSP Phase Diversity System
– CAN Bus Port for computer monitor, control, and updating (connection via UCC1 USB-CAN Converter)
– Adjustable Unbalanced Line Level 1/4 inch output jack
– Adjustable Balanced Microphone Line Level XLR output jack
– Front Panel Power ON/OFF Switch
– Permanent Flash Memory for frequency/system storage
– Front Panel Software Control of Squelch and Audio Output settings
– Combination Squelch (Amplitude and Tone) system prevents false squelch
– Lockout feature to prevent accidental channel changes
– Sound Check mode to speed walk testing and provide tangible results
– Backlit LCD displays on transmitters for easy adjustment on dark stages
– "Smart" battery feature in the 9V transmitters means there is no wrong orientation
– Interchangeable heads on the handheld transmitters
– Cast magnesium case on the bodypack transmitter

– Optimized Guitar settings on transmitter and receiver

The REV Wireless Microphone system can be connected to the PC using one of following devices:
– UCC1 USB-CAN Converter
– Electro-Voice NetMax N8000 System Controller
– DYNACORD P 64 Matrix Manager
REV Device
The REV Devices can be accessed from the Objects Bar (listed under the category Electro-Voice) or from the separate
Devices window, which opens after clicking on the item Add Device. Add Device is available from the IRIS-Net
Configuration menu or from the contextual menu within the IRIS-Net worksheet.
To add devices to an IRIS-Net project, first select the desired device REVS or REVD in the Object Bar (or from the
Devices window) and then drag and drop it into the worksheet. A dialog box opens, which lets you specify device-
related settings such as amount of desired devices, address range, and interfaces.
REV Control Panel

Double clicking with the left mouse button on an REV device gets you to the REV Control Panel, which provides access
to the most important controls and indications of the selected microphone system. Simultaneously opening several
REV Control Panels and placing them in any order on the computer screen is possible as well. For dragging the panel
windows around, please use the left mouse button and click on the title bar at the top of the window. Keep the mouse
button pressed while dragging the panel.
Caution!
REV Control Panel will be displayed with a red title bar and a text stating “Low Battery” when the
! current battery level goes below the current Low Battery Alarm Level. Also REV Control Panel is
popped up if it is not already open or brought to the foreground if it is already open.
Consequences

Indications and Functions of the REV Control Panel
Element Description
Using the left mouse button, click on the Close button to close the REV Control Panel.
The Online / Offline indicator signals whether the selected receiver is included in the network or
off-line. The red OFFLINE indicator signals that the corresponding receiver is off-line and that
therefore no communication is possible. The green ONLINE indicator shows that the
corresponding receiver is on-line and that sending and receiving data is possible. When on-line,

any parameter changes are immediately transmitted and active.

The receiver can be assigned a group. Click on the gray-shaded entry field below the GP label and
enter the desired group. Press Return on the keyboard to acknowledge the entered group. The
group value can only be in the range 1-21.
The REV system guitar optimization mode requires both the transmitter and receiver be placed
into guitar mode. Clicking on the microphone bitmap puts the device in guitar mode and bitmap
changes to a guitar. Clicking on the guitar bitmap puts the device in voice mode and bitmap
changes to a microphone.
The receiver can be assigned a channel. Click on the gray-shaded entry field below the CH label
and enter the desired channel. Press Return on the keyboard to acknowledge the entered
channel. The channel value can only be in the range 1-16.
The FREQ indicator displays the current operating frequency of the receiver. The change to the
frequency value is accepted only when online and only for a user group. The frequency should be
within the operating frequency range. Press Return on the keyboard to acknowledge the entered
frequency
A name can be assigned to each microphone to specify its use or position. Click on the gray-
shaded entry field below the MIC NAME label and enter the desired name. Press Return on the
keyboard to acknowledge the entered name.
HINT: Name shall be alphanumeric and no special character except space is allowed. Name
shall be utmost 8 characters in length.
The antenna diversity indicator signals the current diversity status. The green indication on the
left antenna indicates that the signal is fed through the left antenna. The green indication on the
right antenna indicates that the signal is fed through the right antenna.
The multicolor battery level indicator shows the current battery status of the body-pack or the
microphone. The indication is active only when the group and channel and the operating
frequency on the REV receiver and microphone are same. The threshold battery level below

which the status is indicated in red depends on the low battery alarm level property configurable
on the REV Configuration dialog. A green indicates the battery is full.
The AU display shows the current level of audio input to the receiver. The value in the range 0-10
is indicated in green, 11-50 is indicated in yellow and 51-100 is indicated in red

The RF display shows the current strength of the RF signal input to the receiver. The value in the
range 0-10 is indicated in red, 11-50 is indicated in yellow and 51-100 is indicated in green.

Error status led is a priority based indicator that displays error status in battery level (High
priority), audio level (Medium priority) or RF signal strength (low priority). The led flashes in red
for a battery error, orange for an audio level error, amber for RF signal strength error based on
the precedence of their priority levels. The led is hollow if there are no errors.
The edition of REV properties can be locked or unlocked. Pressing on the lock bitmap on the
panel locks the edition. Pressing on lock again unlocks it.
HINT: Locking or unlocking can be done only when no operation is performed currently on the
receiver.

CAN ID allows you to modify the address of the receiver on the worksheet. Click on the gray-
shaded entry field below the CAN ID label and enter the desired CAN address. Press Return on
the keyboard to confirm the CAN address entered. This address must be the same as the CAN
address specified in the REV menu. Each address can only be used once within a system.
Both the REV-S (single receiver) and the REV-D (dual receivers) use two consecutive CAN
addresses. The CAN address of the left receiver (REV-D only) is always odd, the CAN address of
the right receiver (both REV-S and REV-D) is always one higher than the left address and hence it
is always even. In the IRIS-Net worksheet only the even CAN address is displayed on the receiver
icon.
HINT: Changing the address of the left receiver will automatically change the address of the
right receiver and vice-versa.
The MUTE button is for attenuating the microphone level to –∞. Clicking the MUTE button with
the left mouse button mutes the microphone. The MUTE button is virtually pressed and lights
red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with the left mouse button disables the mute-function
and the microphone is again active. The MUTE button is virtually disengaged and not lit.
microphone-, control and monitoring functions.
Setup & Control

The Setup & Control window allows configuring all microphone parameters. It also provides access to different test
functions. Clicking on the soft key SET in the REV Control Panel opens the Setup & Control window. The Setup &
Control window allows performing more advanced operations on the receiver like Clear-Scan, Analyze and Sound
Check operations.
Element Description
Clear Scan This tab provides option for performing Clear Scan All and Clear Scan group operations on
the receiver
Clear Scan Band This tab provides option for performing Clear Scan Band operations on the receiver T
Analyze This tab provides option for performing Analyze operations on the receiver
Misc This tab provides option for performing Sound check and other miscellaneous operations
on the receiver

ClearScan
ClearScan All or ClearScan group operation can be performed from this tab. The operations can be performed only if
the application is online. This tab is displayed by default when the dialog is opened. Options selected as Scan All pres-
sing start button starts the ClearScan All operation and a progress bar gets displayed. The progress bar disappears and
the results get displayed once the scan all operation is complete on the receiver. Click on stop when a ClearScan All/
Group operation is in progress aborts the operation.
Results of ClearScan All operation
Clicking on the one of the rows displayed automatically changes the scan option to scan group. Pressing start perform
a scan group operation on the currently selected group.
ClearScan group operation can also be performed as an isolated operation and not as a continuation to the ClearScan
All operation. In this case the scan operation is performed on the currently selected group.
Results of ClearScan Group operation
The result displayed is in the descending order of the clarity of the channels available in that group.
Click on one of the cells displayed. Press Apply to apply the currently selected group and channel to the receiver. Apply
All option is enabled only if all the following conditions are satisfied:
– All the REV receivers present in the CAN bus have the same frequency band of operation
– The number of REV receivers present in the CAN bus is lesser than or equal to the number of free channels
present in that group.
HINT: A REVD is counted as 2 receivers.
Click on Apply All to apply the group and channel to all the receivers present in the CAN bus. The clearest channel gets
applied in the ascending order of their CAN addresses i.e. the receiver with the least CAN address gets assigned with
the most clearest channel in the group.
Element Description
Online/Offline The Online / Offline indicator signals whether the selected receiver is included in the network or off-
line. The red OFFLINE indicator signals that the corresponding receiver is off-line and that therefore
no communication is possible. The green ONLINE indicator shows that the corresponding receiver is
on-line and that sending and receiving data is possible. When on-line, any parameter changes are
immediately transmitted and active.
Left Rcvr / Select the left or the right receiver.

Right Rcvr HINT: The receiver selection option is disabled in a REVS receiver.
Scan All Scan all o f the groups (factory and user)

Scan Group Scan the group currently selected
Start Start the scan of the selected receiver
Stop Stop the scan of the selected receiver
ClearScan Band
Clicking the ClearScan Band tab displays the option for performing the ClearScan Band operation on the receiver. Click
Start to start the scan band operation. As this is a continuous operation the scan band operation will continue until it is
manually stopped. Click Stop to stop the operation. This feature is useful for selecting one clear channel in a very busy
RF environment.
Element Description

Stop Stop the scan of the selected receiver
Analyzer
Clicking the Analyzer tab displays the option for performing the Analyze operation on the receiver. Click Start to start
the Analyze operation. As this is a continuous operation it will continue until it is manually stopped. Click Stop to stop
the operation. Sample Step and Dwell Time values can be modified from the list of values displayed in their respective
combo-boxes.

Element Description

Sample Step Set the sample step width in kHz.

(kHz)
Dwell Time Set the dwell time in seconds.

(sec)
Stop Stop the scan of the selected receiver.
Misc

Element Description
Online/Offline The Online / Offline indicator signals whether the selected receiver is included in the network or
off-line. The red OFFLINE indicator signals that the corresponding receiver is off-line and that
therefore no communication is possible. The green ONLINE indicator shows that the corresponding
receiver is on-line and that sending and receiving data is possible. When on-line, any parameter
changes are immediately transmitted and active.
Left Rcvr / Right Select the left or the right receiver.

Rcvr HINT: The receiver selection option is disabled in a REVS receiver.
Tone Select „On“ to activate the dropout tone. When the receiver increments the dropout counter, it will
also send a 1 kHz audio tone out the output so you can hear where on the stage the drop occurs.
Select „Off“ to turn off the tone.
Audio This Peak Hold Audio Meter allows you to set the transmitter gain as high as possible for the
application which maximizes the signal to noise ratio. Sing, yell or play the guitar at the loudest
desired volume and adjust the gain so the meter peaks between 50 and 100.
RF Signal This Low Hold RF Meter will tell you if you have adequate coverage in the performance area. If the
RF level drops below 10 on the meter during a walk of the desired area, reposition the antennas, or
change the channel and retest.
Count Counter indicates the number of times the range was exceeded or some interference problems that
was dealt with.
Start Click Start to start the Sound check operation
Stop Click Stop to stop the Sound check operation
Current Group Current group indicates the group currently assigned to the receiver.
Copy Group Copy group option lists the available user groups in the receiver.
Copy Selecting a group and clicking this button copies a group in to the selected user group.
Clear Group Clear group option is enabled only if the current group is a user group. Clear group option lists the
available user groups in the receiver.
Clear Selecting a group and clicking this button clears the selected user group.
Squelch The squelch setting can be used to maximize range or immunity to noise.
Audio Out Audio Out lists option for modifying the audio output to either „Mic“ or „Line“
XLR Level Allows adjusting the signal level at the XLR output.
HINT: XLR Level is editable only if the Audio Out is selected as ‘Line’.
Hi Z Level Allows adjusting the signal level at the Hi Z output.

IRIS-Net DIGITAL MATRIX | en 315
DIGITAL MATRIX
NetMax N8000 System Controller
NetMax is a modular, network-compatible and freely configurable audio system with which complete system solutions
can be constructed. These system solutions exactly meet the customers’ requirements. Applications are all kinds of
professional audio installations, complex building sound reinforcement systems as well as concert sound applications.
NetMax integrates all components ranging from the matrix to the speakers including system control and system
monitoring in a common audio concept. The configuration, operation and monitoring of a NetMax system are handled
by the IRIS-Net - Intelligent Remote & Integrated Supervision PC Software.
The central unit of NetMax is the N8000 system controller with up to 32 audio channels, mixer and matrix functions,
signal processing and extensive control and monitoring functions. Several N8000 can be connected via a CobraNet or
Dante audio network so that a large, decentralized audio system can be assembled.
NetMax also manages other Electro-Voice IRIS-Net-enabled devices, such as amplifiers, wireless microphones an
external controllers. The connection is directly effected via CAN to N8000.
A NetMax system meets all relevant safety requirements. All audio connections, interfaces and processor systems are
monitored and displayed in case of fault. By using CobraNet or Dante redundant networks can be assembled.
N8000 Device
Start by creating an N8000 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an N8000 from the Object Bar’s Devices category or
from the Devices window into the worksheet (see also chapters: Devices and Configurations menu). The following
dialog box appears:
Enter the required number of devices and select a communication interface. Click on the OK button to accept these
settings. The specified number of N8000 Devices will be created and displayed in the worksheet. Selected devices can
be dragged around and repositioned at will. To select a device either click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle
around it or hold down the 'ctrl' key and click on the device. In either case a successfully selected device is shown with
a red border around it.

Double clicking on an N8000 device icon opens the configuration dialog window. Double clicking on a device for the
first time will open the General dialog box. Here, you can specify initial settings that are necessary for further
configuration and communication. Additional configuration windows can be navigated to by clicking on the icons at the
top of the window. However, as a basic rule, IRIS-Net will remember which window was used last and reopen to this
window next time you double click on the N8000 device icon.
The following table lists all available N8000 dialogs with a short description for each. For more detailed information,
please refer to the appropriate chapters.
Dialog Description
General This window allows hardware settings to be configured, e.g. input/output

module slots, network settings, device name, system time and firmware
version.
DSP The DSP window lets you configure all DSP-parameters of the N8000.
Audio Net This window provides detailed information and configuration of the
CobraNet CM-1 module or Dante DM-1 module.
Interface From this window the N8000 CAN bus, RS-232 ports and GPIO control
port interfaces can all be configured.
HINT: Ethernet interface settings are explained under General dialog in
the paragraph Network Settings.
Supervision This window provides an overview of the operational state and current
fault status of the N8000.
Task Engine This window lets you configure the N8000 Task Engine.
General Dialog
Double clicking on a N8000 by default opens the General dialog box. Here, the user can make basic settings that are
necessary for flawless operation. All elements of the displayed N8000 front panel are active in on-line mode and
correspond to the actual indicators on the unit.
Element Description
A click on the FIND button lets the LEDs on the front panel of the
N8000 blink. When on-line, this allows for easy identification of the
N8000 the user communicates with at the moment.

This view represents the rear panel of a N8000 with module slots
and extension cards. In off-line mode, clicking onto the slots with
the right mouse button and by exchanging, adding or deleting
extension cards, allows defining the unit’s configuration. When on-

line, the display shows the actually installed extension cards.
Differences from the off-line configuration are recognized and
marked in yellow or red.
HINT: A yellow indicator signals that the hardware equipment
differs from the software configuration. However, this difference
does not cause any problems during on-line operation. A red
indicator signals an existing conflict between hardware and
software configurations, which needs to be remedied, either by
customizing the N8000’s hardware equipment or through
modifying the software configuration.
Indicates the IP address of the N8000’s Ethernet port (factory

setting: 192.168.1.100). Enter the address of the N8000 with which
you want to establish on-line communication.
Indicates the Ethernet port’s network mask (factory setting:

255.255.255.0).
Indicates the standard gateway of the Ethernet port (factory setting:

192.168.1.1).
Indicates the MAC address of the connected N8000 when on-line.

The MAC address of the N8000 is also shown on a label on the unit’s
rear panel.
IRIS-Net internal device name of the N8000.
IRIS-Net project filename.
INFO This button displays information concerning the IRIS-Net project file.
Date and time of the N8000 system clock.
SET This button opens the system clock settings dialog box.
SYNC This button syncs the N8000 system clock to the PC system clock.
Indicates the firmware version of the N8000 when on-line.
Reboots the N8000.
DSP Dialog
The DSP window lets the user configure all DSP functions of the NetMax N8000. This is possible by selecting DSP-
Blocks of the Processing Objects categories on the left side of the screen and dragging them into the DSP worksheet.
DSP- Blocks can be freely positioned and wired within the worksheet. Double clicking on a DSP-Block’s icon allows
editing its configuration and settings in detail.


Element Description
The currently active Preset is shown here. Selecting a preset is possible from the Preset
List in the Preset Manager.
The EDITED indicator lights green if the momentarily active settings correspond to the
Preset that had been loaded last. In case parameters of the loaded Preset have been
changed, the EDITED indicator lights red.
Stores the DSP configuration’s current settings in the active Preset.
Opens the Preset Manager.
Represents the hardware configuration of the N8000. Clicking with the right mouse
button on one of the slots, when in off-line mode, allows editing the configuration. The
indication represents the actual configuration when on-line. A red/yellow indicator signals
differences between actual and off-line configuration (see also General Dialog).
This indicates the DSP system’s estimated load. Adding supplementary DSP-Blocks is not
possible when the actual load (DSP LOAD or DSP RAM) reaches 100%. Adding
supplementary Delay-Blocks is not possible when the actual load (DELAY MEM) reaches
100%.

RIGHTS WHEN EDITING THE DSP CONFIGURATION

There are several ways to restrict the rights for editing the DSP configuration of a N8000. Generally, editing the DSP
configuration is only possible when logged-in in IRIS-Net as administrator. Therefore, it is advisable to create additional
user accounts in an IRIS-Net project, besides the administrator account, and to assign appropriate passwords. Please
also refer to the corresponding chapter "Password Protection of a Project" on.
In addition, there is the option to determine for each single DSP block, whether a user that has no administrator rights
may open the associated configuration dialog box.

To prevent access to the configuration dialog of a DSP block, you must be logged in as administrator. Open the
contextual menu of the corresponding DSP block and deselect the contextual menu item "Dialog Visible".

PRESET MANAGER

The Preset Manager takes care of managing all N8000 presets. A preset holds all parameters of the current DSP
configuration, e.g. equalizer settings, matrix nodes or delay values. Presets also hold the labels of input and output
blocks, e.g. Analog Input, Analog Output, 8-Channel Mic Input, CobraNet Input and CobraNet Output. Labels of all
other DSP-Blocks, e.g. matrix labels are not included.
Presets have no influence on the DSP configuration itself - amount, type and wiring of DSP-Blocks.
Element Description
List of all NetMax N8000 presets. Selecting a preset with the left
mouse button shows a description of the correspondent preset in
the Preset Description window.

Adds a new preset to the preset list that holds the DSP
configuration’s current settings. Up to 60 presets can be used.
Number of the preset. Up to 60 presets can be used.
Name of the preset.
A preset includes all dsp settings.
Audio outputs are muted during recall of the preset when the
option MUTE AUDIO DURING RECALL is activated.
Stores the preset that you have selected and all current
parameters in the preset list.
Loads the selected preset into the preset list.
Deletes the selected preset from the list.
Shows a description of the selected preset.
The preset that you have selected in the preset list is automatically
loaded upon power-on or restart of the N8000. With no startup-

preset assigned, the N8000 starts using the settings that were
active before it had been switched off.
HINT: If no start-up preset is assigned, under certain
circumstances not all parameter changes can be restored after a
restart of the N8000. In this case the audio output is muted after
restart. Assigning a startup-preset is strongly recommended.
Cancels the assignment of the previous start-preset.

SCENES

An existing preset can be converted into a scene. A scene contains a defined subset of the preset parameters. Select
the preset to be converted from the Preset List and press the SCENE button. The following dialog box appears:


The dialog allows selecting which parameters that exist in the preset should be applied during loading. Parameters
whose checkbox has not been selected are ignored.
When going online having the option Send All to Selected Devices selected the scenes are stored in N8000.

HINT: The Save Preset keyword of the N8000 or P 64 allows to save the edited parameters of an existing scene by
pressing a Push Button (e.g. N8000_1.DSP.Savepreset=U01).

SUPERBLOCKS
Certain DSP blocks or Task Engine blocks that are frequently used in combination can be grouped together to form a
Super Block, which, by definition, is available in the category PROCESSING OBJECTS utilities of the N8000/P 64 or the
category Advanced of the DPM 8016 and can be used like any normal DSP/Task Engine block.
The following information is stored in a Super Block:
– Number and type of an individual or several DSP/Task Engine blocks
– The wiring of the DSP/Task Engine blocks
– The parameters of the DSP/Task Engine blocks

Creating a new Super Block
Please proceed as follows to create a Super Block:
1. Create the desired DSP or Task Engine configuration exactly the same, as it is to be contained in the Super Block.
2. Mark all desired DSP/Task Engine blocks that are to be contained in the Super Block.
3. Right-click on one of the marked DSP/Task Engine blocks. The contextual menu appears.
4. Select "Create Super Block" from the contextual menu. The Super Block dialog appears.
5. Enter the desired name for the Super Block in the "Enter Super Block Name" dialog and click on OK.

The Super Block appears in the list of superblocks. It is stored in the IRIS-Net installation directory in the subdirectory
"superblocks".

Use of a Super Block
Please proceed as follows to add a Super Block to the DSP configuration:
1. Open the category PROCESSING OBJECTS utilities of the N8000/P 64 or the category Advanced of the DPM 8016.
This category contains all available Super Blocks.
2. Drag the desired Super Block over to DSP/Task Engine configuration. The DSP/Task Engine configuration of the
Super Block is displayed.
3. Move the added DSP/Task Engine blocks to the desired position. Now, the added DSP/Task Engine blocks can be
used as usual.

Changing a Super Block
Please proceed as follows to change the DSP configuration of an existing Super Block:
The category contains all available Super Blocks.
3. Apply the desired modifications to the DSP/Task Engine configuration.
4. Mark all DSP/Task Engine blocks that are to be contained in the changed Super Block.
6. Select "Create Super Block" from the contextual menu. The "Super Block" dialog appears.
7. Enter the name of the existing Super Block in the "Enter Super Block Name" dialog and click on OK. An alert-
message is displayed to inform the user that this Super Block already exists. Click on the dialog's YES button to
confirm overwriting.
The Super Block now contains the changed DSP/Task Engine configuration.

Deleting a Super Blocks
Please proceed as follows to delete an existing Super Block:
Open the Matrix Superblocks dialog in the Menu Matrix, Superblocks (See Menu “Matrix” in Menus, Commands and
Symbol bar, page 78).

1. Select the Super Block to be deleted in the Available Superblocks list.

2. Click on the DELETE SELECTED button to delete the selected Super Block.
AudioNet Dialog
HINT: The AudioNet dialog is only accessible if a CM-1 or DM-1 is assembled in the
General Dialog.
CM-1

This window provides detailed information about a CM-1 CobraNet module installed in the N8000. In addition, all
received and transmitted bundles are listed in an overview. A CM-1 allows sending up to four bundles and receiving up
to four bundles at the same time. The DSP blocks CobraNet Inputs provide the possibility to select a bundle to be
received while the DSP blocks CobraNet Outputs allow configuring one bundle each for sending, including its
contained channels.

Element Description
SYSTEM NAME Alphanumeric name of the CM-1 module within CobraNet.
CM-1 FIRMWARE Firmware version of the CM-1 module.
LATENCY Latency setting for the CM-1 module. The settings 5.33 ms, 2.67 ms or
1.33 ms are available.
The number of bundles that can be transmitted / received by the CM-1
depends on the selected latency:
5.33 ms: Up to 4 bundles (32 channels) can be transmitted and up to 4
bundles (32 channels) can be received simultaneously.
2.67 ms: Up to 4 bundles (32 channels) can be used (transmitted
and/or received) in total.
1.33 ms: Up to 2 bundles (16 channels) can be used (transmitted
and/or received) in total.
SAMPLE RATE Sample rate of all CM-1 modules. Preset to 48 kHz.
CONDUCTOR Green, if the CM-1 is the conductor (master) in the CobraNet, red, if
another unit acts as conductor within the CobraNet.
CONDUCTOR With a variety of units connected to a CobraNet, the unit that has the
PRIORITY highest conductor priority automatically becomes the conductor. When
setting the priority of a CM-1 to ”0” ensures that this CM-1 will never be
the conductor in the network. Setting a CM-1’s priority to ”255”
ensures that this CM-1 will always be the conductor in a network.
ETHERNET Displays the Ethernet port (primary/secondary) of the CM-1 that is

currently in use.
RX ACTIVE Green, if data is being received via CobraNet; otherwise red.
TX ACTIVE Green, if data is being transmitted via CobraNet; otherwise red.
RECEIVE An error has been detected during data reception via CobraNet.
TRANSMIT An error has been detected during data transmission via CobraNet.
GENERAL System fault within the CM-1 module.

AUDIO MUTE Audio transmission has been muted, because correct transmission
cannot be guaranteed.
SYNC Synchronizing the DSP system to CobraNet is not possible.
WATCHDOG The CM-1 is being reset because of a hardware or software failure.
INTERFACE An error has been detected in the communication with the CM-1
interface.
FATAL ERROR A fatal error has been detected within the CM-1.
ERROR DISPLAY Displays the corresponding error code for detected faults. 0 = no fault.
If an error code is being displayed, this button allows recalling

information about the detected error.
BUNDLE Number of the received bundle.
RECEPTION Indicates whether or not a bundle is currently received.
CHn Displays the corresponding Resolutions of all channels of the received

bundle.
LOAD A bundle’s utilization ratio in percent. The load depends on the number
and resolution of the channels transmitted in a bundle.
BUNDLE Number of the transmitted bundle.
RECEPTION Indicates whether or not another unit receives the transmitted bundle.
CHANNELS Number of channels transmitted in a bundle.
CHn Displays the corresponding Resolutions of all channels of the

transmitted bundle.
LOAD A bundle’s utilization ratio in percent. The load depends on the number
and resolution of the channels transmitted in a bundle.

DM-1

This window provides detailed information about a DM-1 Dante Interface module installed in the N8000. The DSP
blocks Dante Inputs and Dante Outputs (see DANTE INPUTS, page 384) provide the possibility to select and configure
Dante channels.

HINT: The Dante Configuration dialog (menu Tools > Dante Configuration) provides the possibility to configure the
Dante network.

Element Description
DEVICE NAME Alphanumeric name of the N8000 within the Dante network.
DM-1 FIRMWARE Firmware version of the DM-1 module.
The UPDATE button opens the web interface of the module.
LATENCY Latency setting for the DM-1 module. The settings 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms or
5.0 ms are available.
SAMPLE RATE Sample rate of all DM-1 modules. Preset to 48 kHz.
PRIMARY LINK Indicates the Ethernet speed of the primary Ethernet interface.
SECONDARY Indicates the Ethernet speed of the secondary Ethernet interface.

LINK
ONLINE STATUS Green, if the connection to the Dante network is OK; otherwise red;
CLOCK MASTER Green, if the DM-1 is the clock master in the Dante Network, grey, if
another unit acts as clock master within the Dante network.
Press the MASTER button if this DM-1 should be clock master in the
Dante network.
SYNC Synchronizing the DSP system to Dante network is not possible.
WATCHDOG The DM-1 is being reset because of a hardware or software failure.
INTERFACE An error has been detected in the internal connection between N8000
and DM-1.

Network View
Click on Tools -> DanteConfiguration to open the Network Vies dialog. This dialog allows the configuration of
transmitters and receivers in a Dante network. Left clicking the node in the matrix where the transmitter channel’s
column and the receiver channel’s line meet with the mouse does connect an output to an input. Again clicking onto
the corresponding node disconnects inputs and outputs.

Dante networks are subject to a restriction. Only one transmitter channel can be connected to a receiver channel at a
time (mixing signals is not possible). However, connecting a transmitter channel to various receiver channels is
possible.
Interface Dialog
The Interface window allows configuring the different interfaces located on the rear panel of the N8000. All REMOTE
CAN BUS, RS-232 and N8000 CONTROL PORT settings can be made in here. Configuring the Ethernet interface is done
under Network Settings in the General window. Additionally, Ethernet settings are also accessible from the Matrix >
Configuration via USB menu within IRIS-Net.
Element Description

CAN BAUD RATE Transmission rate of the CAN-Bus. All devices on the CAN-Bus must
be set to one common transmission rate. The SCAN button allows
detecting the transmission rate of a CAN-Bus that is already in
operation. Editing this parameter is possible in online mode only.
NUMBER OF DEVICES The current number of devices on the CAN-Bus.
DEVICE ADDRESSES Addresses of the devices that are currently connected to the CAN-
Bus.
CAN DEVICE LIST Opens the dialog box for configuring the connected devices.
CAN STATE Displays the current CAN-Bus status. Possible indications are: BUS
OK, Bus Heavy, Bus Off.
USED BANDWIDTH Displays the used bandwidth of the CAN-Bus.
CAN ERRORS Number of errors on the CAN-Bus that have been detected during
send (TX) or reception (RX).
Option to automatically recover data transfer on the CAN-Bus after a

Bus Off Condition.
Resetting and reestablishing the connection between N8000 and

CAN-Bus.
BAUD RATE RS-232 transmission rate.
DATA/PARITTY/STOPBITS Data transmission parameter settings for data bit, parity bit and stop
bit.
HANDSHAKE Handshake settings.
The RS-232 port is deactivated.
Accessing the N8000’s ASCII Control Protocol is possible via RS-232

interface.
Configuring the RS-232 port to act as PROMATRIX/PROANNOUNCE

DPM 4000 interface. The Config button opens a window for further
configuration.
Monitoring an external device via RS-232. The Config button opens a

window for further configuration.
Clicking with the right mouse button on the corresponding symbol of

a control input provides opens the configuration dialog of this
control input. (not yet activated)
Displays the control inputs’ current condition.

It is possible to manually change the condition of the control

outputs (Opener or Shutter). Depending on their according

configuration, control outputs are only switched as long as the
mouse button is pressed.
Clicking with the right mouse button on the corresponding symbol of

a control output provides opens the configuration dialog of this
control output. (not yet activated)
Supervision Dialog

The Supervision window shows the condition of the NetMax N8000. When on-line, all fault conditions are being
indicated. It is possible to select for each type of error whether it is displayed in a collected fault message, buffered
and/or included in the fault protocol. Further details can be set and are being displayed in the corresponding Config
and Info dialogs.
Element Description
The current condition of each type of error gets indicated. Green means no
error, red indicates that an error has been detected.
At the occurrence of a type of error for which the checkbox DETECT is ticked,
the COLLECTED ERROR STATE flag is set at the same time. The FAULT-LED on
the front panel of the NetMax N8000 lights and the FAULT relay opens.
Detected types of errors for which the checkbox HOLD is ticked are stored.
Sporadic errors are indicated until the feature is reset using the CLEAR
button.
DEVICE CONFIGURATION Error in the hardware configuration of the N8000. Pressing the INFO button
reveals more detailed information concerning the error.
WATCHDOG The Watchdog of the N8000 was activated. Press the CLEAR button to clear
this error indication.
BOOT COUNT Indicates the number of resets caused by the watchdog. Press the RESET
button to reset the number to 0.

AUDIO PROCESSING Error during the processing of audio data.
MEMORY/DATA Memory or Read/Write error.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE Error in the internal power supply unit.
AD CONVERTER Malfunction of the control inputs’ A/D converters.
TEMPERATURE Temperature overload of the N8000.
FAN SPEED Current running speed of the N8000’s fan. Possible fan speeds are Off, Slow,
Med. and High, see table below.
TEMP Current temperature on the inside of the enclosure.
USER FLAGS One or more User Flags have been set. CONFIG button for configuring User
Flags.
CAN BUS Fault condition on the CAN-Bus. The CONFIG button opens the CAN Interface
Faults dialog, see below.
COBRANET Fault condition on the CobraNet. Further details are provided via the CobraNet
dialog box.
HEARTBEAT FROM Query from the master N8000, which has been programmed to monitor this
MASTER N8000, are not received anymore.
HEARTBEAT CHECK Select this checkbox to check for heartbeat messages from other N8000s.
SLAVE DEVICE At least one NetMax N8000 that had to be monitored does not react anymore.
The CONFIG button opens a list of N8000 that have been configured as Slave
devices.
REMOTE AMPLIFIERS A connected Remote Amplifier has transferred an error message. The CONFIG
button opens the CAN Interface Faults dialog, see below.
GPI The input voltage at a control input (GPI) is too high/low.
DPM 4000 The DYNACORD DPM 4000 that is connected via RS-232 port cannot be
reached anymore.
RS-232 PORTS Malfunction has been detected for an external device, which is being
monitored via RS-232 port.
INPUT SUPERVISION Pilot tone recognition fault at the inputs of the N8000. Each input can
(PLT) separately be configured in the input blocks.
COLLECTED ERROR The FAULT-LED on the front panel of the N8000 lights at the occurrence of this
STATE type of error.

Manually setting or resetting an error.
Clears the indication of errors for which HOLD had been activated. Indication
of still existing errors is not reset.

CAN INTERFACE FAULTS
Error Description
CAN FAILURE CAN self-testing was not successful. The CAN-Bus does not function.
CAN BUS OFF The CAN-Bus is in the "Bus OFF" state.
CAN BUS PASSIVE The CAN-Bus is in "Passive" mode.
REMOTE AMPLIFIER CONFIG The RCM configuration does not represent the RCMs that are actually connected.
REMOTE AMPLIFIER FAULT Collected Error for at least one RCM has been set.

FAN SPEED
Speed Description
0 Off
1 Slow
2 Med
3 High

Task Engine Dialog

The Task Engine Window allows configuring the Task Engine by dragging inputs, links or outputs from the categories of
the FUNCTIONS AND IOS on the left corner of the screen into the Task Engine Worksheet. Elements can be freely
positioned and wired within the worksheet. Double-clicking on inputs or outputs allows configuring them in detail.
Building task engine configurations and changing the properties of task engine blocks is only possible in offline mode.
If any changes are made the new configuration must be 'sent' to the N8000 when going online. Please refer to section
“How to configure a Control” on page 20 how to assign functions and connections to a Task Engine block.

In the Task Engine, two classes of variables are available:
– Analog: variables of the type "analog" are rational numbers. Example: Level value (-80...+18) of a DSP block mono
mixer output.
– Logic: variables of the type "logic" are Boolean values, i.e. only the values "0" and "1" are allowed. Example: Mute
(0 = not muted, 1 = muted) of a DSP block mono mixer output.
In the Task Engine, different colors are used to distinguish the two types of variables. Analog blocks have blue
connection nodes and blue wiring connection lines. Logic blocks have green connection nodes and green wiring
connection lines. Connecting analog nodes to logic nodes is not allowed.


VALUES
Element Description
The Input Analog block is a variable input parameter for rational numbers which always
outputs the current value of the connection.
The Output Analog block is an output parameter for rational numbers. The value at the
input of this block is assigned to the connection.
The IO Analog block is a variable input and output parameter for rational numbers. The
value at the input of this block is assigned to the connection. The block always outputs
the current value of the connection.
The Virtual Analog block has the same behavior as the IO Analog block, but has no
connection property. Instead the rational number assigned to the
‚Value‘ property of the block will be sent to the output.
The Constant Analog block is a constant input parameter for a rational number. The
rational number entered in the „Value“ property of the block at Task Engine
configuration time will always be sent to the output. This enables the block to provide a
constant to other task engine blocks.
The Input Logic block is a variable input parameter for Boolean values which always
The Output Logic block is an output parameter for Boolean values. The value at the
input of this block is always assigned to the connection.
The IO Logic block is a variable input and output parameter for Boolean values. The
value at the input of this block is assigned to the connection. The block always outputs
the current value of the connection.
The Virtual Logic block has the same behavior as the IO Logic block, but has no
connection property. Instead the logic value entered in the ‚Value‘ property of the block
will be sent to the output.
The Constant Logic block is a constant input parameter for a Boolean value. The
Boolean value entered in the „Value“ property of the block at Task Engine configuration
time will always be sent to the output. This enables the block to provide a constant to
other task engine blocks.
The Calendar Entry blocks is a variable input parameter for Boolean values. The value at
the output of this block depends on the configuration of the block and the system time
of the N8000.

ANALOG OPERATIONS
Element Description
The rational number at the output of the Addition block is always the sum of rational
numbers of the (wired) inputs. Not all inputs have to be wired.

The Subtraction block subtracts the rational number of the lower input from the rational
number of the upper input. The output always presents the result of this arithmetic
operation.
The Multiplication block multiplies the rational number of the upper input with the
rational number of the lower input. The output always presents the result of this
arithmetic operation.
The Division block divides the rational number of the upper input by the rational number
of the lower input.
CAUTION: If the rational number "0" is present at the lower input, the rational
number "0" is always output, independent of the upper input's value.
The Switch block switches the rational number at the center or lower input through,
depending on the Boolean value at the upper input. If the Boolean value at the upper
input is false, the value of the center input appears at the output. If the Boolean value at
the upper input is true, the value of the lower input appears at the output.
The Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the
output is only true when identical numbers are present at the inputs.
The Not Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at
the output is only true when the numbers that are present at the inputs differ from each
other.
The Greater block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at
the output is only true when the rational number of the upper input is greater than the
rational number of the lower input.
The Greater Or Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean
value at the output is only true when the rational number of the upper input is greater
than or equal to the rational number of the lower input.
The Less block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the
output is only true when the rational number of the upper input is less than the rational
number of the lower input.
The Less Or Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean
value at the output is only true when the rational number of the upper input is less than
or equal to the rational number of the lower input.

LOGIC OPERATIONS
Element Description
The Boolean value at the output of the AND block is only true when all (wired)
inputs are true.
The Boolean value at the output of the OR block is only true when at least one
(wired) input is true.

The Boolean value at the output of the XOR block is only true when the number of
true (wired) inputs is odd.
The NOT block negates the Boolean value at the input.
The Memo (Flip-flop) block represents a Bistable flip-flop. The Boolean value at
the output is set to true when the input S (Set) is true. The output stays true
when the input S is false. To reset the output to false the input R (Reset) must be
true.
The Switch block switches the Boolean value at the center or the lower input
through, depending on the Boolean value at the upper input. If the Boolean value
at the upper input is false, the value of the center input appears at the output. If
the Boolean value at the upper input is true, the value of the lower input appears
at the output.
The Load Preset block is used for loading the preset of a N8000 or P 64. The
preset is loaded when the input is true.
The User Fault block is used for indicating a Boolean value by a User Fault. The
User Fault is active when the input is true. The output always presents the state
of the User Fault.
The Equal block compares the Boolean values at the inputs. The Boolean value at
the output is only true when the values at the inputs are identical (i.e. both inputs
are true or both inputs are false).
The Not Equal block compares the Boolean values at the inputs. The Boolean
value at the output is only true when the values at the inputs are different from
each other (i.e. one input is true while the other input is false).

ADVANCED
Element Description
The Timer block sets the Boolean value „State“ at the output to true for the time
„Duration“, if the Boolean value at the input changes from false to true. Following
charts illustrate the functionality of the available block parameters:
Retrigger Falling:

The Debounce block is used for debouncing the Boolean value at the input. The
debounce time is adjustable. Following chart illustrates the functionality of the
available block parameters. One key function of the debounce block is that if the input
changes from false to true and then back to false again before the debounce time has
elapsed then the output will not be set to true.
The Analog Delay block is used for delaying rational numbers at the input. The value at
the input will not be sent to the output until the delay time has elapsed. The maximum
delay time is 20 seconds.
The Logic Delay block is used for delaying Boolean values at the input. The value at the
input will not be sent to the output until the delay time has elapsed. The maximum
delay time is 20 seconds.
The Text Box allows labeling the task engine configuration. Click the Modify Properties
entry in the context menu to open the Edit Textbox dialog. This dialog allows editing
the caption and e.g. font size and font type.
Superblocks Superblocks are listed here. Please refer to page 240 how to use Superblocks.

P 64 Digital Matrix

The P 64 is a modular, network-compatible and freely configurable audio system with which complete system solutions
can be constructed. These system solutions exactly meet the customers’ requirements. Applications are all kinds of
professional audio installations, complex building sound reinforcement systems as well as concert sound applications.
The P 64 integrates all components ranging from the matrix to the speakers including system control and system
monitoring in a common audio concept. The configuration, operation and monitoring of a P 64 system are effected by
the IRIS-Net - Intelligent Remote & Integrated Supervision PC Software.
The P 64 includes up to 32 audio channels, mixer and matrix functions, signal processing and extensive control and
monitoring functions. Several P 64 can be connected via a CobraNet or Dante audio network so that a large,
decentralized audio system can be assembled.
The P 64 manages also the DYNACORD remote amplifiers including its speaker and system monitoring functions. The
connection is directly effected via CAN to P 64.
The P 64 meets all relevant safety requirements. All audio connections, interfaces and processor systems are
monitored and displayed in case of fault. By using CobraNet or Dante redundant networks can be assembled.

P 64 Device
Start by creating an P 64 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an P 64 from the Object Bar’s Devices category or from
the Devices window into the worksheet (see also chapters: Devices and Configurations menu). The following dialog
box appears:

settings. The specified number of P 64 devices will be created and displayed in the worksheet. Selected devices can be
dragged around and repositioned at will. To select a device either click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around
it or hold down the 'ctrl' key and click on the device. In either case a successfully selected device is shown with a red
border around it.
Double clicking on an P 64 device icon opens the configuration dialog window. Double clicking on a device for the first
time will open the General dialog box. Here, you can specify initial settings that are necessary for further configuration
and communication. Additional configuration windows can be navigated to by clicking on the icons at the top of the
window. However, as a basic rule, IRIS-Net will remember which window was used last and reopen to this window next
time you double click on the P 64 device icon.
The following table lists all available P 64 dialogs with a short description for each. For more detailed information,
Dialog Description
General This window allows hardware settings to be configured, e.g. input/output module
slots, network settings, device name, system time and firmware version.
DSP The DSP window lets you configure all DSP-parameters of the P 64.
Audio Net This window provides detailed information and configuration of the CobraNet
CM-1 module or Dante DM-1 module.
Interface From this window the P 64 CAN bus, RS-232 ports and GPIO control port
interfaces can all be configured.
HINT: Ethernet interface settings are explained under General dialog in the
paragraph Network Settings.
Supervisio This window provides an overview of the operational state and current fault
n status of the P 64.
Task This window lets you configure the P 64 Task Engine.

Engine
General Dialog
Double clicking on a P 64 by default opens the General dialog box. Here, the user can make basic settings that are
necessary for flawless operation. All elements of the displayed P 64 front panel are active in on-line mode and

Element Description
A click on the FIND button lets the LEDs on the front panel of
the P 64 blink. When on-line, this allows for easy identification
of the P 64 the user communicates with at the moment.
This view represents the rear panel of a P 64 with module slots

and extension cards. In off-line mode, clicking onto the slots
with the right mouse button and by exchanging, adding or
deleting extension cards, allows defining the unit’s
configuration. When on-line, the display shows the actually
installed extension cards. Differences from the off-line
configuration are recognized and marked in yellow or red.
HINT: A yellow indicator signals that the hardware equipment
differs from the software configuration. However, this
difference does not cause any problems during on-line
operation. A red indicator signals an existing conflict between
hardware and software configurations, which needs to be
remedied, either by customizing the P 64’s hardware
equipment or through modifying the software configuration.
Indicates the IP address of the P 64’s Ethernet port (factory

setting: 192.168.1.100). Enter the address of the P 64 with
which you want to establish on-line communication.
Indicates the Ethernet port’s network mask (factory setting:

255.255.255.0).
Indicates the standard gateway of the Ethernet port (factory

setting: 192.168.1.1).
Indicates the MAC address of the connected P 64 when on-line.

The MAC address of the P 64 is also shown on a label on the
unit’s rear panel.
IRIS-Net internal device name of the P 64.
IRIS-Net project filename.
INFO This button displays information concerning the IRIS-Net

project file.
Date and time of the P 64 system clock.
SET This button opens the system clock settings dialog box.
SYNC This button syncs the P 64 system clock to the PC system

clock.
Indicates the firmware version of the P 64 when on-line.
Reboots the P 64.

DSP Dialog
The DSP window lets the user configure all DSP functions of the P 64. This is possible by selecting DSP-Blocks of the
Processing Objects categories on the left side of the screen and dragging them into the DSP worksheet. DSP-Blocks
can be freely positioned and wired within the worksheet. Double clicking on a DSP-Block’s icon allows editing its
configuration and settings in detail.
Element Description
The currently active Preset is shown here. Selecting a preset is possible from the Preset List
in the Preset Manager.
The EDITED indicator lights green if the momentarily active settings correspond to the
Preset that had been loaded last. In case parameters of the loaded Preset have been
changed, the EDITED indicator lights red.
Stores the DSP configuration’s current settings in the active Preset.
Opens the Preset Manager.
Represents the hardware configuration of the P 64. Clicking with the right mouse button on
one of the slots, when in off-line mode, allows editing the configuration. The indication
represents the actual configuration when on-line. A red/yellow indicator signals differences
between actual and off-line configuration (see also General Dialog).
This indicates the DSP system’s estimated load. Adding supplementary DSP-Blocks is not
possible when the actual load (DSP LOAD or DSP RAM) reaches 100%. Adding
supplementary Delay-Blocks is not possible when the actual load (DELAY MEM) reaches
100%.

RIGHTS WHEN EDITING THE DSP CONFIGURATION
There are several ways to restrict the rights for editing the DSP configuration of a P 64. Generally, editing the DSP
configuration is only possible when logged-in in IRIS-Net as administrator. Therefore, it is advisable to create additional
user accounts in an IRIS-Net project, besides the administrator account, and to assign appropriate passwords. Please
also refer to the corresponding chapter "Password Protection Of A Project" on .
In addition, there is the option to determine for each single DSP block, whether a user that has no administrator rights
may open the associated configuration dialog box.

To prevent access to the configuration dialog of a DSP block, you must be logged in as administrator. Open the
contextual menu of the corresponding DSP block and deselect the contextual menu item "Dialog Visible".

PRESET MANAGER
The Preset Manager takes care of managing all P 64 presets. A preset holds all parameters of the current DSP
configuration, e.g. equalizer settings, matrix nodes or delay values. Presets also hold the labels of input and output
blocks, e.g. Analog Input, Analog Output, 8-Channel Mic Input, CobraNet Input and CobraNet Output. Labels of all
other DSP-Blocks, e.g. matrix labels are not included.
Presets have no influence on the DSP configuration itself - amount, type and wiring of DSP-Blocks.
Element Description
List of all P 64 presets. Selecting a preset with the left mouse button shows a
description of the correspondent preset in the Preset Description window.

Adds a new preset to the preset list that holds the DSP configuration’s current
settings. Up to 60 presets can be used.
Number of the preset. Up to 60 presets can be used.
Name of the preset.
A preset includes all dsp settings.
Audio outputs are muted during recall of the preset when the option MUTE
AUDIO DURING RECALL is activated.
Stores the preset that you have selected and all current parameters in the
preset list.
Loads the selected preset into the preset list.
Deletes the selected preset from the list.
Shows a description of the selected preset.
The preset that you have selected in the preset list is automatically loaded
upon power-on or restart of the P 64. With no startup-preset assigned, the P

64 starts using the settings that were active before it had been switched off.
HINT: If no start-up preset is assigned, under certain circumstances not all
parameter changes can be restored after a restart of the P 64. In this case
the audio output is muted after restart. Assigning a startup-preset is
strongly recommended.
Cancels the assignment of the previous start-preset.

SCENES
An existing preset can be converted into a scene. A scene contains a defined subset of the preset parameters. Select
the preset to be converted from the Preset List and press the SCENE button. The following dialog box appears:


The dialog allows selecting which parameters that exist in the preset should be applied during loading. Parameters
whose checkbox has not been selected are ignored.
When going online having the option Send All to Selected Devices selected the scenes are stored in P 64.
HINT: The Save Preset keyword of the N8000 or P 64 allows to save the edited parameters of an existing scene by
pressing a Push Button (e.g. N8000_1.DSP.Savepreset=U01).

SUPERBLOCKS
Certain DSP blocks or Task Engine blocks that are frequently used in combination can be grouped together to form a
Super Block, which, by definition, is available in the category PROCESSING OBJECTS utilities of the N8000/P 64 or the
category Advanced of the DPM 8016 and can be used like any normal DSP/Task Engine block.
The following information is stored in a Super Block:
– Number and type of an individual or several DSP/Task Engine blocks
– The wiring of the DSP/Task Engine blocks
– The parameters of the DSP/Task Engine blocks

Creating a new Super Block
Please proceed as follows to create a Super Block:
1. Create the desired DSP or Task Engine configuration exactly the same, as it is to be contained in the Super Block.
2. Mark all desired DSP/Task Engine blocks that are to be contained in the Super Block.
4. Select "Create Super Block" from the contextual menu. The Super Block dialog appears.
5. Enter the desired name for the Super Block in the "Enter Super Block Name" dialog and click on OK.

The Super Block appears in the list of superblocks. It is stored in the IRIS-Net installation directory in the subdirectory
"superblocks".

Use of a Super Block
Please proceed as follows to add a Super Block to the DSP configuration:
This category contains all available Super Blocks.
3. Move the added DSP/Task Engine blocks to the desired position. Now, the added DSP/Task Engine blocks can be
used as usual.

Changing a Super Block
Please proceed as follows to change the DSP configuration of an existing Super Block:
The category contains all available Super Blocks.
3. Apply the desired modifications to the DSP/Task Engine configuration.
4. Mark all DSP/Task Engine blocks that are to be contained in the changed Super Block.
6. Select "Create Super Block" from the contextual menu. The "Super Block" dialog appears.
7. Enter the name of the existing Super Block in the "Enter Super Block Name" dialog and click on OK. An alert-
message is displayed to inform the user that this Super Block already exists. Click on the dialog's YES button to
confirm overwriting.
The Super Block now contains the changed DSP/Task Engine configuration.

Deleting a Super Blocks
Please proceed as follows to delete an existing Super Block:
1. Open the Matrix Superblocks dialog in the Menu Matrix, Superblocks (see Menus, Commands and Symbol bar, page
78).

2. Select the Super Block to be deleted in the Available Superblocks list.

3. Click on the DELETE SELECTED button to delete the selected Super Block.
AudioNet Dialog

HINT: The AudioNet dialog is only accessible if a CM-1 or DM-1 is assembled in the General Dialog.

CM-1

This window provides detailed information about a CM-1 CobraNet module installed in the P 64. In addition, all
received and transmitted bundles are listed in an overview. A CM-1 allows sending up to four bundles and receiving up
to four bundles at the same time. The DSP blocks CobraNet Inputs provide the possibility to select a bundle to be
received while the DSP blocks CobraNet Outputs allow configuring one bundle each for sending, including its
contained channels.

Element Description
SYSTEM NAME Alphanumeric name of the CM-1 module within CobraNet.
CM-1 FIRMWARE Firmware version of the CM-1 module.
LATENCY Latency setting for the CM-1 module. The settings 5.33 ms, 2.67 ms or 1.33 ms are available.
The number of bundles that can be transmitted / received by the CM-1 depends on the
selected latency:
5.33 ms: Up to 4 bundles (32 channels) can be transmitted and up to 4 bundles (32
channels) can be received simultaneously.
2.67 ms: Up to 4 bundles (32 channels) can be used (transmitted and/or received) in total.
1.33 ms: Up to 2 bundles (16 channels) can be used (transmitted and/or received) in total.
SAMPLE RATE Sample rate of all CM-1 modules. Preset to 48 kHz.
CONDUCTOR Green, if the CM-1 is the conductor (master) in the CobraNet, red, if another unit acts as
conductor within the CobraNet.
CONDUCTOR PRIORITY With a variety of units connected to a CobraNet, the unit that has the highest conductor
priority automatically becomes the conductor. When setting the priority of a CM-1 to ”0”
ensures that this CM-1 will never be the conductor in the network. Setting a CM-1’s priority
to ”255” ensures that this CM-1 will always be the conductor in a network.
ETHERNET Displays the Ethernet port (primary/secondary) of the CM-1 that is currently in use.
RX ACTIVE Green, if data is being received via CobraNet; otherwise red.
TX ACTIVE Green, if data is being transmitted via CobraNet; otherwise red.
RECEIVE An error has been detected during data reception via CobraNet.
TRANSMIT An error has been detected during data transmission via CobraNet.
GENERAL System fault within the CM-1 module.
AUDIO MUTE Audio transmission has been muted, because correct transmission cannot be guaranteed.
SYNC Synchronizing the DSP system to CobraNet is not possible.
WATCHDOG The CM-1 is being reset because of a hardware or software failure.
INTERFACE An error has been detected in the communication with the CM-1 interface.

FATAL ERROR A fatal error has been detected within the CM-1.
ERROR DISPLAY Displays the corresponding error code for detected faults. 0 = no fault.
If an error code is being displayed, this button allows recalling information about the
detected error.
BUNDLE Number of the received bundle.
RECEPTION Indicates whether or not a bundle is currently received.
CHn Displays the corresponding Resolutions of all channels of the received bundle.
LOAD A bundle’s utilization ratio in percent. The load depends on the number and resolution of
the channels transmitted in a bundle.
BUNDLE Number of the transmitted bundle.
RECEPTION Indicates whether or not another unit receives the transmitted bundle.
CHANNELS Number of channels transmitted in a bundle.
CHn Displays the corresponding Resolutions of all channels of the transmitted bundle.
LOAD A bundle’s utilization ratio in percent. The load depends on the number and resolution of
the channels transmitted in a bundle.

DM-1

This window provides detailed information about a DM-1 Data Interface module installed in the P 64. The DSP blocks
Dante Inputs and Dante Outputs (see DANTE INPUTS, page 384) provide the possibility to select and configure Dante
channels.

HINT: The DanteConfiguration dialog (menu Tools > DanteConfiguration) provides the possibility to configure the
Dante network.


Element Description
DEVICE NAME Alphanumeric name of the P 64 within the Dante network.
DM-1 FIRMWARE Firmware version of the DM-1 module.
The UPDATE button opens the web interface of the module.
LATENCY Latency setting for the DM-1 module. The settings 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms or 5.0 ms are available.
SAMPLE RATE Sample rate of all DM-1 modules. Preset to 48 kHz.
PRIMARY LINK Indicates the Ethernet speed of the primary Ethernet interface.
SECONDARY LINK Indicates the Ethernet speed of the secondary Ethernet interface.
ONLINE STATUS Green, if the connection to the Dante network is OK; otherwise red;
CLOCK MASTER Green, if the DM-1 is the clock master in the Dante Network, grey, if another unit acts as
clock master within the Dante network.
Press the MASTER button if this DM-1 should be clock master in the Dante network.
SYNC Synchronizing the DSP system to Dante network is not possible.
WATCHDOG The DM-1 is being reset because of a hardware or software failure.
INTERFACE An error has been detected in the internal connection between P 64 and DM-1.

Network View
Click on Tools -> DanteConfiguration to open the Network Vies dialog. This dialog allows the configuration of
transmitters and receivers in a Dante network. Left clicking the node in the matrix where the transmitter channel’s
column and the receiver channel’s line meet with the mouse does connect an output to an input. Again clicking onto
the corresponding node disconnects inputs and outputs.
Dante networks are subject to a restriction. Only one transmitter channel can be connected to a receiver channel at a
time (mixing signals is not possible). However, connecting a transmitter channel to various receiver channels is
possible.

Interface Dialog
The Interface window allows configuring the different interfaces located on the rear panel of the P 64. All REMOTE CAN
BUS, RS-232 and P 64 CONTROL PORT settings can be made in here. Configuring the Ethernet interface is done under
Network Settings in the General window. Additionally, Ethernet settings are also accessible from the Matrix >
Configuration via USB menu within IRIS-Net.


Element Description
CAN BAUD RATE Transmission rate of the CAN-Bus. All devices on the CAN-Bus must be set to one common
transmission rate. The SCAN button allows detecting the transmission rate of a CAN-Bus
that is already in operation. Editing this parameter is possible in online mode only.
NUMBER OF DEVICES The current number of devices on the CAN-Bus.
DEVICE ADDRESSES Addresses of the devices that are currently connected to the CAN-Bus.
DEVICE LIST Opens the dialog box for configuring the connected devices.
CAN STATE Displays the current CAN-Bus status. Possible indications are: BUS OK, Bus Heavy, and Bus
Off.
USED BANDWIDTH Displays the used bandwidth of the CAN-Bus.
CAN ERRORS Number of errors on the CAN-Bus that have been detected during send (TX) or reception
(RX).

Option to automatically recover data transfer on the CAN-Bus after a Bus Off Condition.
Resetting and reestablishing the connection between P 64 and CAN-Bus.
BAUD RATE RS-232 transmission rate.
DATA/PARITTY/ Data transmission parameter settings for data bit, parity bit and stop bit.
STOPBITS
HANDSHAKE Handshake settings.
The RS-232 port is deactivated.
Accessing the P 64’s ASCII Control Protocol is possible via RS-232 interface.
Configuring the RS-232 port to act as PROMATRIX/PROANNOUNCE DPM 4000 interface. The
Config button opens a window for further configuration.
Monitoring an external device via RS-232. The Config button opens a window for further
configuration.
Clicking with the right mouse button on the corresponding symbol of a control input
provides opens the configuration dialog of this control input. (not yet activated)
It is possible to manually change the condition of the control outputs (Opener or Shutter).
Depending on their according configuration, control outputs are only switched as long as

the mouse button is pressed.
Clicking with the right mouse button on the corresponding symbol of a control output
provides opens the configuration dialog of this control output. (not yet activated)
Supervision Dialog
The Supervision window shows the condition of the P 64. When on-line, all fault conditions are being indicated. It is
possible to select for each type of error whether it is displayed in a collected fault message, buffered and/or included
in the fault protocol. Further details can be set and are being displayed in the corresponding Config and Info dialogs.
Element Description
The current condition of each type of error gets indicated. Green means no error, red indicates
that an error has been detected.

At the occurrence of a type of error for which the checkbox DETECT is ticked, the COLLECTED
ERROR STATE flag is set at the same time. The FAULT-LED on the front panel of the P 64 lights
and the FAULT relay opens.
Detected types of errors for which the checkbox HOLD is ticked are stored. Sporadic errors
are indicated until the feature is reset using the CLEAR button.
DEVICE Error in the hardware configuration of the P 64. Pressing the INFO button reveals more
CONFIGURATION detailed information concerning the error.
WATCHDOG The Watchdog of the P 64 was activated. Press the CLEAR button to clear this error indication.
BOOT COUNT Indicates the number of resets caused by the watchdog. Press the RESET button to reset the
number to 0.
AUDIO PROCESSING Error during the processing of audio data.
SUPPLY VOLTAGE Error in the internal power supply unit.
AD CONVERTER Malfunction of the control inputs’ A/D converters.
TEMPERATURE Temperature overload of the P 64.
FAN SPEED Current running speed of the P 64’s fan. Possible fan speeds are Off, Slow, Med. and High, see
table below.
USER FLAGS One or more User Flags have been set. CONFIG button for configuring User Flags.
CAN BUS Fault condition on the CAN-Bus. The CONFIG button opens the CAN Interface Faults dialog,
see below.
COBRANET Fault condition on the CobraNet. Further details are provided via the CobraNet dialog box.
HEARTBEAT FROM Query from the master P 64, which has been programmed to monitor this P 64, are not
MASTER received anymore.
HEARTBEAT CHECK Select this checkbox to check for heartbeat messages from other N8000s.
SLAVE DEVICE At least one P 64 that had to be monitored does not react anymore. The CONFIG button opens
a list of P 64 that have been configured as Slave devices.
REMOTE A connected Remote Amplifier has transferred an error message. The CONFIG button opens
AMPLIFIERS the CAN Interface Faults dialog, see below.
GPI The input voltage at a control input (GPI) is too high/low.
DPM 4000 The DYNACORD DPM 4000 that is connected via RS-232 port cannot be reached anymore.
RS-232 PORTS Malfunction has been detected for an external device, which is being monitored via RS-232
port.

INPUT SUPERVISION Pilot tone recognition fault at the inputs of the P 64. Each input can separately be configured
(PLT) in the input blocks.
COLLECTED ERROR The FAULT-LED on the front panel of the P 64 lights at the occurrence of this type of error.
STATE
Clears the indication of errors for which HOLD had been activated. Indication of still existing
errors is not reset.

CAN INTERFACE FAULTS
Error Description
CAN FAILURE CAN self-testing was not successful. The CAN-Bus does not function.
CAN BUS OFF The CAN-Bus is in the "Bus OFF" state.
CAN BUS PASSIVE The CAN-Bus is in "Passive" mode.
REMOTE AMPLIFIER CONFIG The RCM configuration does not represent the RCMs that are actually connected.
REMOTE AMPLIFIER FAULT Collected Error for at least one RCM has been set.

FAN SPEED
Speed Description
0 Off
1 Slow

2 Med
3 High
Task Engine Dialog

positioned and wired within the worksheet. Double-clicking on inputs or outputs allows configuring them in detail.
Building task engine configurations and changing the properties of task engine blocks is only possible in offline mode.
If any changes are made the new configuration must be 'sent' to the P 64 when going online. Please refer to section
“How to configure a Control” on page 20 how to assign functions and connections to a Task Engine block.
In the Task Engine, two classes of variables are available:

mixer output.
(0 = not muted, 1 = muted) of a DSP block mono mixer output.
In the Task Engine, different colors are used to distinguish the two types of variables. Analog blocks have blue
connection nodes and blue wiring connection lines. Logic blocks have green connection nodes and green wiring
connection lines. Connecting analog nodes to logic nodes is not allowed.

VALUES
Element Description
The Input Analog block is a variable input parameter for rational numbers which always outputs the
current value of the connection.
The Output Analog block is an output parameter for rational numbers. The value at the input of this block
is assigned to the connection.
The IO Analog block is a variable input and output parameter for rational numbers. The value at the input
of this block is assigned to the connection. The block always outputs the current value of the connection.
The Virtual Analog block has the same behaviour as the IO Analog block, but has no connection property.
Instead the rational number assigned to the
‚Value‘ property of the block will be sent to the output.

The Constant Analog block is a constant input parameter for a rational number. The rational number
entered in the „Value“ property of the block at Task Engine configuration time will always be sent to the
output. This enables the block to provide a constant to other task engine blocks.
The Input Logic block is a variable input parameter for Boolean values which always outputs the current
value of the connection.
The Output Logic block is an output parameter for Boolean values. The value at the input of this block is
always assigned to the connection.
The IO Logic block is a variable input and output parameter for Boolean values. The value at the input of
this block is assigned to the connection. The block always outputs the current value of the connection.
The Virtual Logic block has the same behaviour as the IO Logic block, but has no connection property.
Instead the logic value entered in the ‚Value‘ property of the block will be sent to the output.
The Constant Logic block is a constant input parameter for a Boolean value. The Boolean value entered in
the „Value“ property of the block at Task Engine configuration time will always be sent to the output. This
enables the block to provide a constant to other task engine blocks.
The Calendar Entry blocks is a variable input parameter for Boolean values. The value at the output of this
block depends on the configuration of the block and the system time of the P 64.

ANALOG OPERATIONS
Element Description
The rational number at the output of the Addition block is always the sum of rational numbers of the
(wired) inputs. Not all inputs have to be wired.
The Subtraction block subtracts the rational number of the lower input from the rational number of the
upper input. The output always presents the result of this arithmetic operation.
The Multiplication block multiplies the rational number of the upper input with the rational number of the
lower input. The output always presents the result of this arithmetic operation.
The Division block divides the rational number of the upper input by the rational number of the lower
input.
CAUTION: If the rational number "0" is present at the lower input, the rational number "0" is always
output, independent of the upper input's value.
The Switch block switches the rational number at the center or lower input through, depending on the
Boolean value at the upper input. If the Boolean value at the upper input is false, the value of the center
input appears at the output. If the Boolean value at the upper input is true, the value of the lower input
appears at the output.
The Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is only true
when identical numbers are present at the inputs.
The Not Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is only
true when the numbers that are present at the inputs differ from each other.

The Greater block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is only
true when the rational number of the upper input is greater than the rational number of the lower input.
The Greater Or Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output
is only true when the rational number of the upper input is greater than or equal to the rational number
of the lower input.
The Less block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is only true
when the rational number of the upper input is less than the rational number of the lower input.
The Less Or Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is
only true when the rational number of the upper input is less than or equal to the rational number of the
lower input.

LOGIC OPERATIONS
Element Description
The Boolean value at the output of the AND block is only true when all (wired) inputs are true.
The Boolean value at the output of the OR block is only true when at least one (wired) input is true.
The Boolean value at the output of the XOR block is only true when the number of true (wired) inputs is
odd.
The Memo (Flipflop) block represents a bistable flip-flop. The Boolean value at the output is set to true
when the input S (Set) is true. The output stays true when the input S is false. To reset the output to
false the input R (Reset) must be true.
The Switch block switches the Boolean value at the center or the lower input through, depending on the
The Load Preset block is used for loading the preset of a P 64. The preset is loaded when the input is
true.
The User Fault block is used for indicating a Boolean value by a User Fault. The User Fault is active when
the input is true. The output always presents the state of the User Fault.

The Equal block compares the Boolean values at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is only true
when the values at the inputs are identical (i.e. both inputs are true or both inputs are false).
The Not Equal block compares the Boolean values at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is only
true when the values at the inputs are different from each other (i.e. one input is true while the other
input is false).

ADVANCED
Element Description
The Timer block sets the Boolean value „State“ at the output to true for the time „Duration“, if the
Boolean value at the input changes from false to true. Following charts illustrate the functionality of the
available block parameters:

RetriggerFalling:

The Debounce block is used for debouncing the Boolean value at the input. The debounce time is
adjustable. Following chart illustrates the functionality of the available block parameters. One key
function of the debounce block is that if the input changes from false to true and then back to false again
before the debounce time has elapsed then the output will not be set to true.
The Analog Delay block is used for delaying rational numbers at the input. The value at the input will not
be sent to the output until the delay time has elapsed. The maximum delay time is 20 seconds.
The Logic Delay block is used for delaying Boolean values at the input. The value at the input will not be
sent to the output until the delay time has elapsed. The maximum delay time is 20 seconds.
The Text Box allows labeling the task engine configuration. Click the Modify Properties entry in the
context menu to open the Edit Textbox dialog. This dialog allows editing the caption and e.g. font size
and font type.
Superbloc Superblocks are listed here. Please refer to page 240 how to use Superblocks.
ks

N8000 and P 64
The following chapters are valid for N8000 and P 64.
DSP blocks

The library that holds all available DSP blocks (Processing Objects) is located on the left hand side of the DSP window.
The DSP blocks are separated into groups or categories. Clicking on a group opens that group and provides access to
the DSP blocks that are located inside. You can drag the desired DSP blocks from the list on to the worksheet, where
they can be freely positioned and/or virtually wired with other blocks.
The available DSP blocks are summarized in following table.

Category Description/ Input Outputs Description

Definition s
Crossover n-Way 1 1 Crossover blocks in Mono/Stereo with 1 to 5 channels.

Crossover Each crossover channel has a High Pass and a Low Pass
2
with the following parameters: type, frequency, polarity,
3 level and mute.
n-Way Stereo 2 2
Crossover
4
10
Delay Mono Delay x 1 1 Delay blocks in Mono/Stereo with 10, 100, 500 or 2000 ms
ms maximum delay. Entering values for distance and ambient
temperature is possible.

Stereo Delay x 2 2
ms
Dynamics RMS- 1 1 Compressor blocks in Mono/Stereo and RCM-24 structure.

Compressor The compressors have adjustable thresholds, attack and
Mono release times, compression rates, some have Soft Knee
characteristics, output level and side chain inputs.
RMS- 2 2
Compressor
Stereo
RMS- 1 1
Compressor
(RCM-24)
Peak-Limiter 1 1 Limiter blocks in Mono/Stereo, RCM-24 structure or Peak

Mono Anticipation algorithm. The limiters have adjustable
thresholds, attack and release times.
Peak-Limiter 2 2
Stereo
Peak-Limiter 1 1
(RCM-24)
PA-Limiter 1 1
AGC 1 1 Automatic Gain Control (AGC) in mono structure with

adjustable threshold, compression rate, Soft Knee
characteristic, hold and release times, target level and
time constants for gain increase or decrease.
ANC 2x1 1 1 Ambient Noise Control (ANC) with adjustable threshold,

PRM, hold and release times, multiple gain settings. Fader and
1 Mute button for inputs.
AMB
ANC 4x2 2 2
PRM,
2
AMB
ANC 8x4 4 4
PRM,
4
AMB
Ducker Mono 2 1 Ducker blocks in Mono/Stereo with adjustable thresholds,

ducking level, attack, hold and release times. Fader and
Ducker Stereo 3 2
Mute button for inputs.
Expander 1 1 Expander block with adjustable threshold, attack and

release times, ratio and output level.
Gate 1 1 Gate block with adjustable threshold, attack, hold and

release times and output level.

EQ - Graphic n Band Graphic 1 1 Graphic Equalizer in Mono/Stereo with 10, 15 or 31 bands.

EQ Two parametric EQs are provided as well.
n Band Stereo 2 2
Graphic EQ
EQ - n Band PEQ 1 1 Parametric Equalizer in Mono/Stereo with 1 to 32 bands.

Parametric Freely selectable filter types (PEQ, Low/High-Shelving,
n Band Stereo 2 2
Low/High/All Pass) with the following parameters: gain,
PEQ
frequency, quality/bandwidth or slope for each band.
Filter FIR Filter 1 1 Finite Impulse Response blocks with order 256, 512, 768,
1024, 1280, 1536 or 1792. Possible filter types are Low
Pass, High Pass or Band Pass.
Low Pass Mono 1 1 Low Pass blocks in Mono/Stereo with the following
parameters: frequency, slope and quality.
Low Pass 2 2
Stereo
High Pass Mono 1 1 High Pass blocks in Mono/Stereo with the following
parameters: frequency, slope and quality.
High Pass 2 2
Stereo
Band Pass 1 1 Band Pass blocks in Mono/Stereo with the following

Mono parameters: frequency and quality/bandwidth.
Band Pass 2 2
Stereo
Low Shelf 1 1 Low Shelf blocks in Mono/Stereo with the following

Mono parameters: frequency, slope and gain.
Low Shelf 2 2
Stereo
High Shelf 1 1 High Shelf blocks in Mono/Stereo with the following

Mono parameters: frequency, slope and gain.
High Shelf 2 2
Stereo
Notch Mono 1 1 Notch blocks in Mono/Stereo with the following

parameters: frequency and quality/bandwidth.
Notch Stereo 2 2
Allpass Mono 1 1 Allpass blocks in Mono/Stereo with the following

parameters: frequency and order.
Allpass Stereo 2 2
Tone Control 1 1 Tone Control blocks in Mono/Stereo with gain controls for
Mono Bass/Mid/Treble.
Tone Control 2 2
Stereo
FIR n-Way Mono 1 1 FIR Controller blocks in Mono/Stereo with 1 to 5 ways.

Controllers FIR Controller Each way has a 6- Band PEQ, a crossover with polarity,
2
alignment delay, FIR filter, level control and a compressor/
3 limiter. Importing factory-made Speaker Settings is

possible. Exporting custom parameter sets as Speaker
4 Settings is possible as well.
5
n-Way Stereo 2 2
FIR Controller
4
10
Generators Tone Generator 0 1 Tone Generator for generating a constant sine signal or
sine signal sweep.
Noise 0 1 Noise Generator for generating white/pink noise.

Generator
Inputs/ Analog Input 8 - The Analog Line Input (AI-1) has 8 analog inputs. Each
Outputs input has a fader, level meter, Mute and Invert buttons.
Analog Output - 8 The Analog Line Output (AO-1) has 8 analog outputs. Each
output has a fader, level meter, Mute and Invert buttons.
Digital Input 8 - The Digital Input (DI-1) has 8 digital inputs. Each input has
a fader, level meter, Mute and Invert buttons. For each
receiver the input source can be selected and status and
clock rate are shown.
Digital Output - 8 The Digital Output (DO-1) has 8 digital outputs. Each
output has a fader, level meter, Mute and Invert buttons.
Analog 8 - The Analog Microphone Input (MI-1) has 8 analog inputs

Microphone with sensitivities that are suitable for connecting
Input microphones. Each input has a fader, level meter, gain
control, Mute and Invert buttons. Activating phantom
power for each input is also possible.
CobraNet Input 8 - The CobraNet Input (CM-1) has 8 input channels. Selecting
a CobraNet bundle is possible by entering its number or
the assigned name. Each channel has status LEDs, word
length indication and a Mute button.
CobraNet - 8 The CobraNet Output (CM-1) has 8 output channels.

Output Selecting a CobraNet bundle is possible by entering its
number or the assigned name.
Dante Input 8 - The Dante Input (DM-1) has 8 input channels.
Dante Output - 8 The Dante Output (DM-1) has 8 output channels.
Loudspeaker n-Way LS 1 1 Loudspeaker Controller blocks in Mono/Stereo with 1 to 5

Controllers Controller ways.
2

4 Each way has a 6-Band PEQ, a crossover with polarity,

alignment delay, level control and a compressor/limiter.
5 Importing factory-made Speaker Settings for each
n-Way Stereo 2 2 Loudspeaker Controller way is possible. Exporting custom
LS Controller parameter sets as Speaker Settings is possible as well.
4
10
Matrix/Router I x O Matrix 2...32 2...32 The Matrix Mixers have between 2 and 32 inputs and
Mixer between 2 and 32 outputs.
Each input or output and each node of the matrix have
individual level controls. An arbitrary amount of existing
inputs can be mixed down to a single or several outputs.
I x O Priority 2...32 2...32 The Priority Matrix has between 2 and 32 inputs and
Matrix between 2 and 32 outputs.
Setting a priority for each input is possible. All outputs and
all nodes of the matrix have individual level controls.
I x O Matrix 2...32 2...32 The Matrix Router has between 2 and 32 inputs and
Router between 2 and 32 outputs.
All inputs and outputs have individual level controls. Each
input can be assigned to a single or several outputs.
However, only one input can be active per output.
Router 1...32 1...32 Router blocks with between 1 and 32 inputs and between
1 and 32 outputs. Each output can be fed by a single input
source signal only. However, assigning an input to several
outputs is possible.
Mixer Mono Mixer 2..32 1 The Mono or Stereo Mixers have between 2 and 32 inputs
and 1or 2 outputs. Each input has a fader, signal/clipping
Stereo Mixer 2...32 2
LEDs, Mute, Solo and Invert buttons while output channels
have a fader, signal/clipping LEDs and a Mute button.
Automixer 2 3 The Auto Mixers have 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16 or 24 inputs/

outputs and 1 additional auto mixed output.
4 5
Each input has fader, meter, signal/clipping LEDs, Mute,
6 7 Solo, Invert, Prio buttons and Auto checkbox while the
auto mixed output has a fader, meter, Mute, Invert and
8 9
Freeze Gain button.
10 11 HINT: For using the automixer block with 16 or 24 inputs
12 13 a DSP-2DSP Extension Module is required.
16 17
24 25
Utilities Signal Meter 1 - Signal Meter block indicating VU data.

Text Box Editable Text box for labeling DSP configuration.

Selectable font size, color and type.
Superblocks List of all available Superblocks.

AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL (AGC)

The DSP block Automatic Gain Control (AGC) manipulates the audio signal’s dynamics. The AGC’s
task is to control a signal (mostly spoken word) to a defined level (average effective value, target level). This is
accomplished by attenuating signals with levels that are above the target level and amplifying signals with levels that
are below the target level. When compared to a compressor, control intervals are longer because level changes should
not be obvious. An example for using the AGC in spoken word applications could be the automatic level adjustment at
a panel discussion. In music applications the AGC can be used to automatically compensate level differences between
various tracks or songs.
This meter indicates by how much the AGC is attenuating or

amplifying the signal level. A green box moving from the 0 dB mark
to the left indicates level reduction. A green box moving from the 0
dB mark to the right indicates level amplification.
-25 dBu -30...0 THRESHOLD defines the level at which the AGC sets in. The
dBu THRESHOLD value always relates to the set TARGET value.
5.0:1 1:1...15:1 RATIO defines the compression rate, i.e. to what degree the signal’s
level is reduced above the relative threshold level. A ration of 4.0 : 1
represents a signal reduction by factor 4.
+10 dB 0.1... 15 Settable bend of the compression curve below THRESHOLD. A

dB moderate ratio prevents a drop/leap in amplification at the
THRESHOLD.
0.5 s 0.3... 20 s GAIN INCREASE defines the time interval that it takes the AGC to
raise the signal level to the TARGET.
0.5 s 0.3...20 s GAIN DECREASE defines the time interval that it takes the AGC to
reduce the signal level to the TARGET.

0.05 s 0.05...60 HOLD defines how long the AGC keeps amplifying the signal after
s the signal level has dropped out of the AGC’s operational range
(below the set THRESHOLD and KNEE level, which are relative to
TARGET).
1s 0.3...20 s RELEASE defines the time that it takes to control the signal back to
unity gain after the HOLD period has passed.

0 dBu -6...+18 TARGET fader for setting the desired output level (average RMS
dBu level) for the processed audio signal.
This field shows the currently set TARGET as a numerical value.

Entering the desired target value is possible as well.
BYPASS activates (not engaged) or deactivates (engaged) the AGC,

which allows quick A / B comparison between the original signal and

the signal after AGC processing.

ALLPASS FILTER

When compared to other filter types, the All-Pass filter in the DSP block offers constant gain for all
frequencies. However, All-Pass filters have frequency-dependent phase shifting (non-linear phase response), which is
used for signal delay or phase equalization.
Switch for selecting amplitude frequency response

(magnitude) or phase response (phase) indication in
the bode plot.
Switch for scaling the amplitude axis to 25 dB (± 12.5

dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)

first first, ORDER sets the desired order of the filter. A 1st order
second All-Pass filter shifts the phase by 180°. A 2nd order All-
Pass filter shifts the phase by 360°.
1000 Hz 10 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of the

Hz...20 filter.
kHz
BYPASS activates (not engaged) or deactivates

(engaged) the filter, which allows for quick A / B

comparison between filtered and original sound signal.

Editing filters via Mouse Dragging in the Graphic Display
If the filter has been activated (BYPASS is not engaged), a white dot in the frequency response graph represents the
selected filter. Click onto this dot with the left mouse button and keep the button pressed down to change the filters
frequency by dragging the mouse to the left or right.

AMBIENT NOISE CONTROL

The DSP block Ambient Noise Control (ANC) automatically changes the level of up to 4 program signals
depending on the actual ambient or background noise (ambient level), i.e. the ambient noise level in an area controls
the volume setting, guaranteeing that the reproduction volume is always sufficient for announcements or alarm
messages to be intelligible. Ambient noise can be picked up with up to 4 calibrated standard microphones.


-25 dBu -30...0 Fader for setting the program signal level.
dBu
This field shows the currently set numerical signal level

value per fader. Entering the desired value is possible as
well.
LINK button groups neighboring input channels.
MUTE button mutes the input signal.
Text field for proving an input channel with an application

specific name.
CAUTION: Using*(asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a
name is not permissible.

-25 dBu -30...0 Fader for weighting different microphones (test signals)
dBu that are employed to register ambient noise.
This field shows the currently set numerical signal level

value per fader. Entering the desired value is possible as
well.
Shows the ambient noise signal’s RMS level.
Text field for proving an input channel with an application

specific name.
CAUTION: Using*(asterisk) and/o r=(equal) signs in a
This meter indicates the current degree of amplification/

attenuation applied to program signals.
-35 dBu -35...21 THRESHOLD defines the ambient noise level above which
dBu the program signal level is amplified.


This indicator lights red when the current ambient noise

level exceeds the THRESHOLD. It light green when the

ambient noise level is below THRESHOLD.
1.0:1 0.25:1...4: Indicates by how much the level of the program signal is
1 amplified when the ambient noise level rises by 1 dB.

-30 dB -30... 30 Defines the (minimum) level of the output signal when the
dB ambient noise level is low (below THRESHOLD).

+30 dB -30...30 Defines the maximum level of the output signal when the
dB ambient noise level is high.
1000 ms 10...3000 Time constant for increasing the program signal level when
ms the ambient noise level continuously exceeds the

THRESHOLD. The time until the new signal level is reached
is approx. 5-times the set response time.
1000 ms 10...3000 Time constant for decreasing the program signal level
ms when the ambient noise level is continuously below the

THRESHOLD.
10 ms 10...1000 HOLD defines how long the program signal is maintained

ms (amplified) when the ambient noise level falls below the

THRESHOLD.
10 ms 10...3000 RELEASE defines how long it takes until the program signal
ms level is controlled back to GAIN MIN after the HOLD time

has passed.
Clicking on FREEZE GAIN memorizes the program signal’s

current gain. The is maintained even if the ambient noise
level changes.

ANALOG LINE INPUTS

The Analog Line Inputs DSP block provides access to the eight analog inputs of an AI-1 Analog Input
card. Establishing independent settings for each input channel is possible. A fader with ramping function as well as
Mute and Invert buttons serve as controls. Each input channel has its individual level meter. Adjacent channels can be
linked together using the LINK button. This allows for the convenient synchronous setting of several input channels,
e.g. for stereo signals.
Each input channel has pilot tone detection, which, when activated, offers permanent monitoring of the output and the
connecting audio cable of an external audio device. Activating and configuring pilot tone detection is possible in off-line
mode from the Advanced Control window.

Permanent channel labeling. Channels are numbered from

LINE 1 to LINE 8.
LINK button for linking (grouping) adjacent input channels.
0.0 dB -80...+18.0 Fader for setting the input level. The Ramping Time that
dB controls the fader’s ramping can be set in the Advanced
Control window.
0.0 dB -80...+18.0 The fader display shows the numerical value of the current
dB fader setting and additionally provides the possibility for
entering a desired value.
Indicates the current input level.
The PLT button activates (engaged) or deactivates (not

engaged) pilot tone detection. The PLT button lights red
when pilot tone detection is active but without a pilot signal
being detected. With a pilot signal present, the PLT button
lights green. The PLT button appears only when pilot tone
detection has previously been activated in the Advanced
Control window.
MUTE button for muting the input signal.
INV button for inverting the input signal’s polarity.
Text field for labeling an input channel, e.g. giving it an

application specific name.

CAUTION: Using*(asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a

Click with the right mouse button on the DSP block and select Advanced Control from the pop-up context menu of the
Analog Line Input block to open the Advanced Control window.


The following settings can be configured for each input channel of the Analog Line Input DSP block:
0.001 s 0.001...20 s A ramping time can be set for a channel’s fader. When changing the signal
level via Fader or Fader Display, within the specified period of time, the new
signal level is set by means of the ramping function.
The checkbox activates the input’s pilot tone detection. The PLT-Button
only appears when pilot tone detection is active.
HINT: Det. Used can only be configured OFFLINE.
The checkbox activates a notch filter when pilot tone detection is activated.
The notch filter filters an existing pilot tone out of the input signal, so that it
will not reach components that are connected behind the Analog Line Input.
HINT: Notch Used can only be configured OFFLINE.
19000 Hz 20...20000 Hz This field sets the frequency of the pilot signal to be detected.
HINT: Freq (Hz) can only be configured OFFLINE.
-40 dBu -60...0.0 dBu This field sets the pilot tone detection’s threshold. The analysis results in
OK (green PLT button) when the level of the pilot signal exceeds the
threshold. Without a pilot tone being present or if the signal level is below

the set threshold, analysis results in a fault message on the corresponding
input channel (red PLT button).
HINT: Thresh (dBu) can only be configured OFFLINE.

ANALOG LINE OUTPUTS

The DSP block Analog Line Outputs provides access to the eight outputs of an AO-1 Analog Output
Card. Establishing independent settings for each output channel is possible. A fader with ramping function as well as
Mute and Invert buttons serve as controls. Each output channel has its individual level indicator. Adjacent channels can
be linked together using the LINK button. This allows for the convenient synchronous setting of several output
channels, e.g. for stereo signals.
Each output channel has a pilot tone generator, which, when activated, allows permanent monitoring of the output and
the connecting audio cable to an external audio device (e.g. amplifier) that has pilot detection. Activating and
configuring the pilot tone signal is only possible in off-line mode from the Advanced Control window.
Permanent channel labeling. Channels are numbered from LINE 1

to LINE 8.
LINK button for linking (grouping) adjacent output channels.
0.0 dB -80...+1 Fader for setting the output level. The Ramping Time that controls
8.0 dB the fader’s ramping can be set in the Advanced Control window.
0.0 dB -80...+1 The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader
8.0 dB setting and additionally provides the possibility for entering a
desired value.
Indicates a channel’s current output level.

The PLT button activates (engaged) or deactivates (not engaged)

the pilot tone generator. The PLT button appears only when the
pilot tone generator has previously been activated in the Advanced
Control window.
MUTE button for muting the output signal.
INV button for inverting the output signal’s polarity.
Text field for labeling an output channel, e.g. giving it an


CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a name is
not permissible.

Analog Output block to open the Advanced Control window.

The following settings can be established for each output channel of the Analog Output DSP block:
0.001 s 0.001...20 s A ramping time can be set for a channel’s fader. When
changing the signal level via Fader or Fader Display, within
the previously specified period of time, the new signal level
is set by means of the ramping function.
The checkbox activates the channel’s pilot tone generator.

HINT: Gen. Used can only be configured OFFLINE.

-35.0 dBu -60...0 dBu This field allows setting the level of the pilot tone signal.
HINT: Level (dBu) can only be configured OFFLINE.
19000 Hz 20...20000 This field allows setting the frequency of the pilot tone
Hz signal. The set frequency applies to all outputs, for which
the pilot tone signal has been activated.

AUTO MIXER

IRIS-Net provides Auto mixers with 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16 or 24 inputs. For the 16 or 24 input Auto mixers
a DSP-2 DSP extension card is required.
Activates auto mixing function of corresponding input.
The "CLIP" LED lights when the signal level nears clipping
(+21dBu).
If a signal is present at the input, the "SIG" LED lights.
0.0 dB -80...0 dB (Post-)Fader for setting the levels in corresponding inputs. This
fader works "post auto mixer algorithm", this means the level is
changed after the automated evaluation of level distribution.

0.0 dB -80...+18.0 The fader display shows the numerical value of the current
dB fader setting and additionally provides the possibility for

CAUTION: The Meter is only active, if the check box AUTO of
the input is selected.
MUTE button for muting the corresponding input signal.
INV button for inverting the input channel.
SOLO button for monitoring a single input signal.
PRIO button for increasing priority (= higher level) of input

signal.
Text field for labeling an input channel with an internal IRIS-Net

name.
CAUTION: The use of*(asterisk) and = (equal) in names is not
permissible.
Opens the Time Constants dialog.
0.0 dB -80...+18.0 Fader for setting the level of signal OUT. The meter indicates
dB the current output level.
By pressing FREEZE GAIN the current input signal gain settings

are stored and remain constant even if the level of the input
signals changes.

Time Constants


RAMP TIME 20 ms 1...20000 ms Time constant of faders
RMS IN 10 ms 1...2000 ms Time constant of RMS measurement of input signals.
RMS DUGAN 10 ms 1...2000 ms Time constant of RMS measurement of dugan-gain weighted input
signals.
DIV DUGAN 10 ms 1...2000 ms Time constant for weighting rate of input signal level, based on total
level.
DIV FINAL 10 ms 1...2000 ms Time constant for rate of level change.

BAND-PASS FILTER

A band-pass filter is a device that passes frequencies within a certain range and rejects frequencies
outside that range. The frequency and quality of the filter is adjustable.
Switches between frequency (magnitude) and phase

response (phase) indication.
Switch for selecting dB-axis scaling of 25 dB (± 12.5

dB) or 50 dB (± 25 dB).
1000Hz 20 FREQUENCY sets the center frequency of the band-

Hz...20 pass filter.
kHz
1 0.4...1 The Q-value sets the quality and thus the response of
00 the band-pass filter.

1.4 0.1...3 BANDWITH sets the quality and thus the response of
the band-pass filter.
BYPASS switches the filter ON (not engaged) or OFF

(engaged), which allows for quick A / B-evaluation of

the actual effect that the band-pass filter has on the
sound.

A white dot in the frequency response display represents an active filter (BYPASS not engaged). Clicking on this dot
with the left mouse button and keeping the mouse button pressed down allows changing the selected filter’s
frequency by moving the mouse to the left or to the right. Clicking on the dot with the right mouse button and keeping
the mouse button pressed down allows changing the Q-values of the filter.

COBRA NET INPUTS

The DSP block CobraNet Inputs is part of the CM-1 CobraNet module. The dialogue is equivalent to a
CobraNet bundle and provides 8 input channels from a CobraNet network. When on-line, the module’s or the CobraNet
bundle’s RX-status is being indicated. Selecting a CobraNet bundle by its bundle number (or the assigned name) allows
receiving up to eight pooled channels of that bundle. Signal status and resolution are individually indicated per
channel, while separately muting each channel is possible as well.
CobraNet differentiates between the following two kinds of bundles:
– Unicast Bundle: a Unicast Bundle (starting from bundle number 256) is transmitted to a single address, i.e. the
bundle’s destination is known.
– Multicast Bundle: a Multicast Bundle (bundle numbers 1 - 255) is not dedicated for one specific address. It is
distributed throughout the entire network.

Element Description
The two LEDs in the RX STATUS area indicate the module’s current reception status. Whenever
data is being received, the "ACTIVE" LED lights green. Whenever there is no data stream received
via the CobraNet, the "NOT RECEIVED" LED lights red.
Using alphanumeric characters in the name field allow the labeling of an incoming CobraNet
bundle. For assigning identification to a bundle you first have to select its bundle number in the
NUMBER field and then enter the desired name in the NAME field. Pressing the Return button
assigns the name to the selected bundle. Choosing a bundle with bundle number x which has no
name assigned to yet, is possible by selecting "No Name x".
The NUMBER field allows choosing the desired CobraNet bundle by selecting its bundle number.
If the selected bundle is a Multicast Bundle (bundle numbers in the range between 1 and 255),
the "MULTICAST" LED lights green. If the bundle number of the selected bundle is in the range of
256 up to 65535, the "UNICAST" LED lights green.
The maximum amount of channels of the selected bundle is limited to eight. They are numbered
from 1 to 8.
The ”SIG” LED lights whenever a signal is being received on the channel of the selected bundle.
The "0dB" LED light additionally, when the signal’s level is close to clipping.
The field shows the transmitted bit rate (resolution) for the corresponding channel. Possible
values are: 16, 20 and 24 Bit. The channels of a bundle can have different bit rates.
The MUTE button allows muting the corresponding channel.
Text field for assigning an exclusive IRIS-Net name to the corresponding channel.
CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) or = (equal) within a name is not permissible.

COBRANET OUTPUTS

The DSP block CobraNet Outputs part of the CM-1 CobraNet module. The dialogue is equivalent to the
one of a CobraNet bundle and offers up to 8 output channels. Send status of module or CobraNet bundle is indicated
when on-line. When selecting a CobraNet bundle by Bundle Number (or assigned name) all channels combined in this
bundle are present in the audio network. The signal status of each channel is indicated. Setting the word length (bit
resolution) and individually muting each channel is possible as well.

Element Description
The REQUESTS field in the TX STATUS area shows the sending bundle’s number of recipients, if
the (by bundle number or assigned name) selected bundle is a Unicast bundle. With Multicast
bundles the amount of recipients is unknown and therefore not indicated. The PACKET SIZE field
signals the actual load of the CobraNet in percent. The load depends on number and bit
resolution of the channels included in the sending bundle.
The Drop-Down field allows choosing a sending CobraNet bundle by selecting its assigned
alphanumerical name. When assigning a name to a bundle, first select its bundle number in the
NUMBER field and then enter the desired name in the NAME field. Pressing ”Return” actually
assigns the name to the selected bundle. Choosing a bundle with bundle number x that has no
name assigned yet is possible by selecting "No Name x".
This field allows choosing the desired CobraNet bundle by selecting its bundle number.
If the chosen bundle is a Multicast bundle (which is true for bundle numbers in the range
between 1 to 255), the "MULTICAST" LED lights green. If the bundle number of the selected
bundle is in the range between 256 and 65535, the "UNICAST" LED lights green.
The up to eight possible channels of a selected bundle are numbered from 1 to 8.
The "SIG" LED lights if a channel transmits a signal. In addition, the "0dB" LED lights whenever
the level of the signal reaches the 0dB mark, signaling that there is a chance of driving the signal
into distortion.
The Drop-Down field allows specifying the desired data word length (bit resolution) for the
corresponding channel. Possible values are16, 20 and 24 bit. When selecting none, no audio

signal is being transmitted. Simultaneously grouping channels with different word length in a
single bundle is possible.
Text field for giving a channel an internal IRIS-Net name.

CAUTION: The use of * (asterisk) and = (equal) in names is not permissible.

CROSSOVER (X-OVER)

A crossover (X-Over) allows splitting an input signal into various frequency bands to actively drive
different types of loudspeakers from a power amplifier’s outputs. Crossovers with up to 5 ways in monaural (1 input)
or stereo (2 inputs) quality are available. The following table lists the names of the respective outputs (frequency
bands):
1 Way FULLRANGE
2Ways LOW HIGH
3Ways LOW MID HIGH
4Ways SUB LOW MID HIGH
5Ways SUB LOW LOW-MID HIGH-MID HIGH

The X-Over window provides high and low pass filters, gain control and a polarity selection switch for each frequency
band. Adjusting filter characteristics and matching levels per frequency band is possible through these parameters.

The crossover’s graphic display (Bode diagram) allows selecting several different graphic renditions which are listed in
the following table:
Element Description
This switch lets you toggle between amplitude frequency response (Magnitude) and phase
response (Phase) indication.
This switch allows selecting an amplification axis scaling of 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or of 50 dB (± 25

dB)

Show Filters superimposes the individual filters' electrical transfer functions.
Separate displays the transmission function of each frequency band separately. Sum shows an
accumulated graph of all bands (ways) and the resulting transfer function of all filter and level
settings at the outputs.
This switch allows additional indication of measured loudspeaker transfer functions. This
function takes effect only if speaker data has previously been loaded via Speaker.

Channel Parameters
thru, 20 RESPONSE: This parameter block is used for configuring

Hz thru, 6dB, the HIPASS filter. The user can choose from
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/Q=0.6, different types of filters (Bessel,
12dB/Q=0.7, 12dB/Q=0.8, Butterworth, Linkwitz/Riley) with slopes
12dB/Q=1.0, 12dB/Q=1.2, between 6 dB/oct. and 24 dB/oct. and cut-

12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/Q=2.0, off frequencies of 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
12dB, Linkwitz/Riley 12dB,
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz
thru, RESPONSE: This parameter block is used for configuring

20000 Hz thru, 6dB, the LOPASS filter. The user can choose
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/Q=0.6, from different types of filters (Bessel,
12dB/Q=0.7, 12dB/Q=0.8, Butterworth, Linkwitz/Riley) with slopes
12dB/Q=1.0, 12dB/Q=1.2, between 6 dB/oct. and 24 dB/oct. and cut-

12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/Q=2.0, off frequencies of 20 Hz to 20 kHz.
Bes- sel 18dB, Butterworth
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz
The LINK-Button allows linking (grouping)

adjacent frequency bands (crossover ways).
A frequency band’s LOPASS settings are
automatically adopted to become the
HIPASS settings of the adjacent band, and
vice versa.

0 dB -30...+6 dB The TRIM control allows raising the level of

the selected frequency band’s output signal
by up to 6 dB or lowering it by as much as
30 dB. This allows for optimal level
adjustment of individual frequency bands to
match each other.
This field indicates the currently set gain

value numerically. However, manually
entering the desired value is possible as
well.
normal normal, inverted POLARITY defines the polarity setting of the

respective output. At times, inverting a
channel’s polarity (i.e. setting a negative

polarity) might become necessary,
depending on the crossover filter
characteristic. The phase responses of
some filter types can result in dropouts at
the X-Over frequency when summing two
channels. Inverting the polarity of the
output carrying the lower frequency signal
prevents this from happening. The following
list shows all filter types that require
inverting one channel of the corresponding
pair of filters.
– Bessel 12 dB
– Butterworth 12 dB
– Bessel 18 dB
– Bessel 24 dB
HINT: The effect of the polarity parameter
becomes very evident when the summed
signal is displayed (set the switch to Sum).
MUTE-Button mutes the respective

frequency band.
The arrow button allows loading a speaker

file. When Include Speakers has been
activated, the frequency response shows

the speaker transfer function included in
the selected file.

X-Over Filter Editing in the Graphic Display using the Mouse
With an X-Over filter being active (not set to OFF), the graphic display shows a colored spot on the amplitude
frequency response. This spot represents the filter. Clicking with the left mouse button on this spot and holding the
mouse button pressed down lets you adjust the frequency of the corresponding filter by dragging the spot to the left or
to the right. The name of the respective filter is displayed in color when placing the mouse cursor over a spot.


DANTE INPUTS

The Dante Inputs DSP block is part of the DM-1 Dante Interface module. The dialog provides 8 input
channels from a Dante network.

Element Description
LINK This LED indicates the input channel’s current reception status. Whenever
data is being received, the LED lights green. Whenever there is no data
stream received via Dante, the LED lights red.
DEVICE The Drop-Down field allows selecting the name or description of the
device the channel is received from.
CHANNEL The Drop-Down field allows selecting the name or description of the
received channel.
The ”SIG” LED lights whenever a signal is being received on the channel.
The "0dB" LED light additionally, when the signal’s level is close to
clipping.
Text field for assigning the Dante Channel Name to the corresponding
channel. The name is also used in the Dante Controller.
CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) or = (equal) within a name is not
permissible.

DANTE OUTPUTS

The Dante Outputs DSP block is part of the DM-1 Dante Interface module. The dialog offers up to 8
output channels. The signal status of each channel is indicated.
Element Description
The "SIG" LED lights if a channel transmits a signal. In addition, the "0dB" LED lights whenever
the level of the signal reaches the 0dB mark, signaling that there is a chance of driving the signal
into distortion.
Text field for assigning the Dante Transmit Channel Name to the corresponding channel. The
name is also used in the Dante Controller.

DELAY

The Delay DSP blocks allow the utilization of delay lines. This, for example, allows sending differently
delayed audio signals to PA towers at open-air concerts to compensate for differences in distance among individual
loudspeaker arrays. Alignment delay settings to compensate for individual transducers in a loudspeaker cabinet being
mounted on different radiation planes is also possible.
Delay blocks in monaural quality (1 input and 1 output) and stereo quality (2 inputs and 2 outputs) are available. Both
types allow for delay times of 10, 100, 500 or maximally 2000 ms.

Element Description
Delay times can be entered directly in milliseconds

(ms) or samples. Alternatively, entering a distance in
inches (in) or meters (m) is possible as well. The
appropriate delay time is calculated, taking into
account the indicated Temperature.
Temperature allows setting the current ambient

temperature in degrees Celsius (° C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (° F). The two units are automatically
converted. The temperature parameter only takes
effect if a distance value has previously been entered.
In that case, the influence of the temperature is
automatically taken into consideration during delay
time calculation.
BYPASS either activates (button not engaged) or

deactivates (button engaged) the delay which allows
for a quick A / B comparison of the effect that set
parameters have on the sound characteristics.
DEFAULT resets the temperature to 20° C or 68° F

respectively.

DIGITAL INPUTS

The Digital Inputs DSP block provides access to the eight digital inputs of an DI-1 Digital Input card.
Establishing independent settings for each input channel is possible. A fader with ramping function as well as Mute and
Invert buttons serve as controls. Each input channel has its individual level meter. Adjacent channels can be linked
together using the LINK button. This allows simultaneous setting of several input channels, e.g. for stereo signals.

The receivers are consecutively numbered from

RECEIVER 1 to RECEIVER 4, offering two input channels,
each.
Switching the receiver’s signal type. The DI-1 card’s

electrical inputs are capable of processing AES/EBU or
S/P DIF compatible audio signals. Switching between
the two formats has to be performed manually, using the
appropriate labeled buttons.
When using the optical input, select OPTICAL as the
signal type.

If the LOCK LED lights green, the input is synchronized

to the incoming signal and the audio is correctly
transmitted. When signal transmission fails, the ERROR
LED lights red.
Shows the sampling rate of the incoming signal when the

input has been successfully synchronized. Sampling
rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz are supported.
Permanent channel labeling. Channels are numbered

from CH. 1 to CH. 8.
LINK button for linking (grouping) adjacent input

channels.
0.0 dB -80...+18 Fader for setting the input level. The Ramping Time that
.0 dB controls the fader’s ramping can be set in the Advanced
Control window.
0.0 dB -80...+18 The fader display shows the numerical value of the
.0 dB current fader setting and additionally provides the
possibility for entering a desired value.
Text field for labeling an input channel, e.g. giving it an


CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a

Digital Input block to open the Advanced Control window.


0.020 s 0.001...20 s A ramping time can be set for a channel’s

fader. When changing the signal level via
Fader or Fader Display, within the specified
period of time, the new signal level is set by
means of the ramping function.

MODE Consumer, Indicates the mode of the digital signal.

Professional
COPYRIGHT Indicates if Copyright bit is set.
EMPHASIS Indicates if Emphasis bit is set.
CHANNEL MODE Not Indicates the Channel mode (in Professional

indicated, 2 mode only).
channel, 1
channel,
primary/
secondary,
stereo,
reserved for
user
applications,
SCDSR,
SCDSR
(stereo left),
SCDSR
(stereo
right),
Multichannel

CLOCK ACCURACY Level 1...3 Indicates the clock accuracy (in Consumer
mode only)
ORIGINAL Indicates if the Original bit is set.
SRC WORD LENGTH not Indicates the source word length (in
indicated, Professional mode only)
17...24
LOW GROUP DELAY Allow activating the option Low Group Delay
of the sample rate converter‘s interpolation
filter

CHANNEL BLOCK Lights red, if the transmission of the Channel

CRC Status Block was not correct.
VALIDITY Lights red, if the received audio data is not in

PCM format.
CONFIDENCE Lights red, if the signal quality is not good

(e.g. Jitter)
The first 5 bytes of the Channel Status block

are indicated for each input channel.

DIGITAL OUTPUTS

The DSP block Digital Outputs provides access to the eight outputs of an DO-1 Digital Output Card. Establishing
independent settings for each output channel is possible. A fader with ramping function as well as Mute and Invert
buttons serve as controls. Each output channel has its individual level indicator. Adjacent channels can be linked
together using the LINK button. This allows for the convenient synchronous setting of several output channels, e.g. for
stereo signals.
Permanent channel labeling. Channels are

numbered from LINE 1 to LINE 8.

LINK button for linking (grouping) adjacent

output channels.
0.0 dB -80...+18.0 dB Fader for setting the output level. The Ramping
Time that controls the fader’s ramping can be set
in the Advanced Control window.
0.0 dB -80...+18.0 dB The fader display shows the numerical value of

the current fader setting and additionally
provides the possibility for entering a desired
value.
Indicates a channel’s current output level.
INV button for inverting the output signal’s

polarity.
Text field for labeling an output channel, e.g.

giving it an application specific name.

CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) and/or = (equal)
signs in a name is not permissible.

Click with the right mouse button on the DSP block and select Advanced Control from the appearing contextual menu
of the Digital Output block to open the Advanced Control window.


0.001 s 0.001...20 s A ramping time can be set for a channel’s fader. When
changing the signal level via Fader or Fader Display,
within the previously specified period of time, the
new signal level is set by means of the ramping
function.
The checkbox allows activating the channel’s pilot

tone generator.
HINT: Gen. Used can only be configured OFFLINE.
-35.0 -60...0 dBu This field allows setting the level of the pilot tone
dBu signal.
HINT: Level (dBu) can only be configured OFFLINE.
19000 20...20000 Hz This field allows setting the frequency of the pilot
Hz tone signal. The set frequency applies to all outputs,
for which the pilot tone signal has been activated.

DUCKER

The Ducker DSP block reduces the level of a signal at the LINE input whenever a signal is present at the
MIC input. If there is no MIC signal present the LINE signal automatically returns to its preset level.

This indicator signals in dB by how much

the ducker reduces the signal level. A red
bar that increases from the right to the
left indicates the degree of gain reduction.

-6.0 dBu -15.0...+21.0 The THRESHOLD parameter defines the

dBu level value at which ducking sets in.
The LINE signal will not be reduced as
long as the signal level at the MIC input
stays below the set threshold. As soon as
the signal level at the MIC input reaches
or exceeds the threshold, the LINE signal’s
level will be reduced by to the value set in
DUCKING LEVEL.
-20.0 -100.0...-6.0 The signal level of the LINE input is

dBu dBu reduced by DUCKING LEVEL when the MIC
signal level reaches or exceeds the
THRESHOLD.
10 ms 5...1000 ms ATTACK defines how fast the gain of the

LINE signal is reduced after the MIC signal
exceeds the threshold level.
50 ms 10...2000 ms HOLD defines how long the level of the

LINE input will continue to be reduced
after the MIC signal drops below the set
threshold.
100 ms 5...1000 ms RELEASE defines how fast the gain of the

LINE signal is returned to the preset level
once the MIC signal drops below the
threshold level and the HOLD time has
elapsed.
BYPASS activates (not engaged) or

deactivates (engaged) the ducker.
0 dB -30...0 dB Fader for setting the MIC- or LINE-signal

level at the ducker outputs. The setting of
this faders has no effect on the ducking
algorithm.
The fader display shows the numerical

value of the current fader setting and
additionally provides the possibility for
MUTE button for muting the MIC or LINE

signal.

EXPANDER

An Expander is used to reduce the level of a signal when it drops below a certain threshold resulting in an
increase of the signal’s overall dynamic range.
This indicator signals in dB by how much the expander

reduces the signal level. A red bar that increases from
the right to the left indicates the degree of gain
reduction.
-60.0 dBu -84.0...-25.0 THRESHOLD defines the signal level above which the
or dBu or expander has no effect. If the signal level is below the

0.001 V 0.000...0.044 V THRESHOLD, the level is reduced according to the
RATIO setting. Entering the desired value is possible in
dBu as well as in V. The value can be entered in either
box and will automatically be converted in the other.
1.0:1 1.0:1...10.0:1 RATIO defines the compression rate, i.e. the degree of
compression below the threshold level. For example, a
ratio of 4.0 : 1 means the output signal will be reduced
by 4 dB for every 1 dB the input signal drops below the
threshold.
5 ms 5...150 ms ATTACK defines how fast the signal level will be reduced
once it drops below the threshold. A short attack time
means that even short signal dips below THRES- HOLD
are efficiently expanded. Longer attack times leave
signal dips below THRESHOLD untouched.

100 ms 10...1000 ms RELEASE defines how fast the output signal returns to
the nominal level once the threshold level is exceeded.


(engaged) the expander.
0 dB -30...0 dB Fader for setting the output level.
The fader display shows the numerical value of the

current fader setting and additionally provides the
possibility for entering a desired value.

FIR FILTER

IRIS-Net provides FIR Filter blocks (Finite Impulse Response) of order 256 up to order 1792.

Channel Parameters
Element Description
Switch for displaying frequency response (magnitude) or phase response

(phase)
Switch for scaling the amplitude axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)

After clicking onto LOAD FIR the "Open File..." dialog box appears. Enter the
After clicking on EXPORT FIR a "Save File..." dialog box appears. Enter the
(without extension). Click on the SAVE button to store the FIR filter parameters
together with the corresponding file name. ".gkf" is automatically added as file
extension.
Clears the current FIR filter settings. A Default-FIR-Filter (Thru) is activated

instead.
Clicking on the GENERATE FIR buttons opens the Filter Design dialog.

(engaged), this provides a quick A / B comparison of the processed and
unprocessed signal.
HI PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Hi pass filter.
LO PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Lo pass filter.

FIR Filter Design


200 Hz 20...20000 ms HI PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Hi pass filter.
2000 Hz 20...20000 ms LO PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Lo pass

filter.
Selects the FIR filter type of the DSP block.


FIR/FIR-DRIVE CONTROLLER

The DSP block FIR Controller or FIR-Drive Controller entirely integrates the required signal processing
for a complete PA system, providing FIR Controller or FIR-Drive Controller blocks starting from one way till up to four
ways in monaural or stereo quality. The complete parameter set for a single loudspeaker is stored in the Speaker
Setting file. IRIS-Net is shipped with a range of Speaker Setting files that hold
parameter sets which have been optimized for Electro-Voice and DYNACORD loudspeaker systems. An overview of the
standard names for the different ways is presented in the following table:
1Way FULLRANGE
2Ways LOW HIGH
3Ways LOW MID HIGH
4Ways SUB LOW MID HIGH

Flow Diagram Navigation
Element Description
The Flow Diagram Selector is available on all pages of the FIR Controller or FIR-Drive
Controller block and allows navigating through the pages. Within the Flow Diagram
Selector the user can select different DSP function blocks. The button for the currently
selected block is pressed and shows a yellow background color.

A summary of the FIR Controller or FIR-Drive Controller processing blocks is provided in the following table. A more
detailed description can be found in the corresponding paragraphs.

Element FIR Controller (original) FIR-Drive Controller
FLOW DIAGRAM The signal flow chart offers an overview of the FIR Controller or FIR-Drive Controller blocks
DSP settings. Also located in this area are all the controls for managing Speaker Settings.
CHANNEL EQ The CHANNEL EQ page provides access to the 6-Band parametric equalizers for loudspeaker
equalization.
X-OVER The X-OVER page provides access to the crossover filters and parameters Gain, Polarity and
Alignment delay for each way.
FIR FILTER This page provides access to the FIR filter.
GAIN TRIM TRIM allows matching the level of individual band passes while MUTE attenuates the
corresponding band pass output.
DYNAMICS & The DYNAMICS page provides access to a The DYNAMICS page provides access to a
PROTECT compressor and a Peak Anticipation limiter Peak Anticipation limiter and a TEMP limiter
for each way. for each way.

Flow Diagram

The FLOW DIAGRAM page shows a block diagram of the signal flow and provides a quick overview of all DSP settings.
Channel labeling, muting and level adjustment can be carried out directly on the appropriate blocks. All other DSP
parameters are accessible by clicking on the different function blocks. In addition, this window hosts all the controls
for storing and loading Speaker Settings.
Selecting the FLOW DIAGRAM window is possible by clicking on the first or the last block in the Flow Diagram
Selector.

Function blocks
Element Description
This block represents the 6 Channel EQs of the FIR/FIR-Drive controller. The graph shows the
frequency response of the Channel EQ Block. Clicking on this block opens the CHANNEL EQ
page.

This block represents the crossover of the FIR/FIR-Drive controller. The graph shows the
crossover filters currently. Three additional LEDs show the state of trim, polarity and delay.
Clicking on this block opens the X-OVER page.
This block represents the FIR filter of the FIR/FIR-Drive controller.
This block sets the level going into the Limiter stage. The setting is carried out via Up/Down
Spin controls or by directly entering a level value in dB. The MUTE button is used to mute the
signal. A left mouse click on the button will mute or unmute the signal.
This block represents the dynamics functions of the FIR/FIR-Drive controller. Two LEDs
indicate whether compressor and/or limiter or Peak and/or TEMP limiter are activated. The
graph indicates set values. Clicking on this block opens the DYNAMICS page.
or
A name for the output can be entered in the text box.
IMPORT opens a dialog box that allows loading Speaker Settings. This function imports a
complete loudspeaker parameter set into the FIR/FIR-Drive controller.
CAUTION: A loaded Speaker Setting becomes immediately audible when in the on-line
mode. Always make sure that the speakers setting that you are about to load is the desired
speaker setting containing the correct parameter set. Otherwise, under most extreme
circumstances, loading the wrong speaker set can permanently damage the connected
loudspeaker systems!
EXPORT opens a dialog box that allows saving speaker settings. This function stores the
complete settings of the FIR/FIR-Drive controller as a parameter set in a file.

Channel EQ
The parametric 6-Band equalizer is used for loudspeaker equalization. Select the Channel EQ by clicking onto the
second block in the Flow Diagram Selector or by double clicking on the CHANNEL EQ block in the large Signal flow
Diagram.



Presentation in the Graphic Display
The following table summarizes the graphical controls shown in the display:
Element Description
Switch for selecting amplitude frequency response (magnitude) or

phase response (phase) indication in the bode plot
Switch for scaling the magnitude axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50

dB (± 25 dB)
Shows the resulting transfer function of all filter and level trim
settings; the visible and audible result at the output. The audible
result is displayed in bright colors while electrical graphs are
indicated in dark colors.
The Separate switch allows indicating the individual transmission

function of the controller ways. The Sum switch allows indication of
the summed signal of all ways.
Switch for including programmed delay in the frequency or phase

response indication. The delays mainly affect phase response
indication.
Switch for additionally indicating measured speaker transfer

functions. For this function to be effective you first have to load
speaker data in the Speaker register sheet.

Filter Parameter


Loshelv. – PEQ is a parametric Peak Dip Filter with its frequency, quality (Q)

Hishelv, and gain being programmable.
Hipass, – Loshelv / Hishelv create a Low-Shelving or High-Shelving filter with
Lopass, the parameters being: frequency, slope and gain.
All- pass – Lopass / Hipass creates a Low Pass or High Pass filter with
– Allpass is a filter that has no influence on the frequency response
but on the phase response in the transmission function.
6dB/Oct 6dB/Oct, SLOPE defines the steepness or the filters order for Low-Shelving or
12dB/Oct High-Shelving filters as well as for Lo-Pass or Hi-Pass filters. Setting

different slopes in the transmission range is possible. High-Pass filter
and Q parameter together provide the possibility to program B6
alignments, which describes the raising in the cut-off frequency range.
30 / 110 / 20 Hz...20 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency for parametric EQs or, in
370 / case of Shelving and High-Pass /

1300 / 4600 / kHz Lo-Pass filters, it sets the cut-off frequency.
16000 Hz
0.7 0.4...40.0 Q sets the quality or the bandwidth of the parametric EQ. A high Q-
value results in a narrowband filter.

(PEQ), A low Q-value results in a wideband filter. Q also sets the quality and
therefore the curve progression of
0.4...2.0 Lo-Pass-, High-Pass- and All-Pass filters with 12dB/Oct slope.

(Hi-/
Lopass),
0.4...2.0
(All-
pass)
0 dB -18...+12 GAIN sets amplification (rising) or attenuation (lowering) of parametric

dB EQs or Low-Shelving- and High-Shelving filters.

first first, ORDER (All-Pass filters only) sets the desired order of an All-Pass filter.
second A 1st order All-Pass filter shifts the phase by 180°. A 2nd order All-Pass
filter shifts the phase by 360°.
BYPASS activates (not engaged) or deactivates (engaged) the

corresponding filter, which allows for quick A / B comparison between

filtered and original sound signal.

If a filter has been activated (BYPASS is not engaged), a white dot in the frequency response graph represents the
selected filter. Click onto this dot with the left mouse button and keep the button pressed down to change the
corresponding filters frequency by dragging the mouse to the left or right. Moving the mouse up or down lets you set
the filters gain (depending on the type of filter).

The name of a filter band is displayed in color whenever the mouse cursor is on top of its white dot, which improves
clarity.

X-Over
The X-Over window provides a frequency crossover with Hi- and Lo-Pass filters, Delay, Gain-Trim and a polarity switch
for each band pass of the FIR Controller or FIR-Drive Controller block. These parameters are used to separate the
frequency bands of multi-way loudspeaker systems correctly, add delay to compensate for physical alignment of
components in the loudspeaker and match the levels for each way.
Click on the third block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double click on the X-OVER block in the large Signal Flow
Diagram to select the X-Over window.

The following table summarizes the graphical controls shown in the display:
Element Description
Switch to select whether amplitude frequency response (magnitude)

or phase response (phase) are being displayed.
Switch for scaling the amplitude axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50

dB (± 25 dB).
Shows the resulting transmission function of all filter and level trim
settings, which represents the visible and audible result. The
resulting transmission function is indicated in light colors. The
electric graphs are shown in dark colors.

function of the controller ways. The Sum switch allows indication of
the summed signal of all ways.

Switch that allows including programmed delays in the frequency

response or phase response indication. Include Delays primarily
influences phase response indication.
Switch to additionally display measured loudspeaker transmission

loudspeaker data sets under Speaker.

Filter Parameter
OFF, 20 Hz RESPONSE: OFF, 6dB, This parameter block represents the HIPASS filter.
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/ Setting different filter types (Bessel, Butterworth,
Q=0.6, Linkwitz/Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct and 24
12dB/Q=0.7, 12dB/ dB/ Oct and cut-off frequencies between 20 Hz and 20
Q=0.8, kHz is possible.

12dB/Q=1.0, 12dB/
Q=1.2,
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/
Q=2.0,
Bessel 12dB,
Butterworth 12dB,
Bes- sel 18dB,
Butterworth 18dB,
Bessel 24dB,
Butterworth 24dB,
Linkwitz/Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz

OFF, 20000 RESPONSE: OFF, 6dB, This parameter block represents the LOPASS filter.
Hz 12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/ Setting different filter types (Bessel, Butterworth,
Q=0.6, Linkwitz/Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct and 24
12dB/Q=0.7, 12dB/ dB/ Oct and cut-off frequencies between 20 Hz and 20
Q=0.8, kHz is possible.

12dB/Q=1.0, 12dB/
Q=1.2,
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/
Q=2.0,
Bessel 12dB,
Butterworth 12dB,
Bes- sel 18dB,
Butterworth 18dB,
Bessel 24dB,
Butterworth 24dB,
Linkwitz/Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz
0 dB -30...+6 dB GAIN TRIM is for increasing the level of the

corresponding channel by up to 6 dB or attenuating it by
upto 30 dB, it is used to match the output levels for each
frequency band.
normal normal, inverted POLARITY allows inverting a channel, e.g. shifting its
phase by 180°. Some crossover settings need phase
inversion to prevent cancellations in the frequency

response at the crossover frequency.
0 cm 0...68643 cm DELAY is used to delay the signal of the corresponding

way. Typically, this delay is used as time alignment delay
to overcome the difference in distance between the
loudspeaker components within a cabinet.

(engaged) the corresponding delay.

The arrow sign next to SPEAKER opens a dialog for

selecting speaker files.
The text field shows the name of the currently loaded

speaker file.

General Parameter
ms ms, samples, Allows selecting the unit for delay settings.

ft, in, m, cm,
µs, s
20 °C -20...60 °C or Allows entering the ambient temperature. The

-4...140 °F temperature entered is taken into account by the
calculations IRIS-Net uses when changing
between different distance type delay units.
Temperatures can be entered in °C or °F.

Editing X-Over filters via Mouse Dragging in the Graphic Display
If a X-Over filter has been activated (filter type not set to OFF), a white dot in the frequency response graph represents
the filters cut-off frequency. Click onto this dot with the left mouse button and keep it pressed down to set the
corresponding filters frequency by dragging the mouse to the left or right.
clarity. In addition, another graph appears that represents the frequency response of the currently selected filter.

FIR Filter
Click on the fourth block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double click on the FIR block in the large Signal Flow Diagram
to select the FIR Filter window.

Element Description
Displays the resulting transfer function of all filter and level trim settings, this is a visual
representation of the audible result at the amplifier output. The audible result is displayed in
bright colors while all ”electrical” graphs are drawn in dark colors.

This switch allows including the previously programmed delays in the frequency or phase
response indication. The delays mainly affect the phase response.

This switch is for the additional activation of actually measured speaker transfer functions to be
included in the display. For this function to be effective, you have to load speaker data in the
register ”Speaker” first.

Channel Parameters
Element Description
After clicking on LOAD FIR an "Open File..." dialog box appears. Enter the
After clicking on EXPORT FIR a "Save File..." dialog box appears. Enter the
(without extension). Click on the SAVE button to store the FIR filter parameters
together with the corresponding file name. ".gkf" is automatically added as file
extension.
Clears the current FIR filter settings. A Default-FIR-Filter (Thru) is activated

instead.
Clicking the GENERATE FIR buttons opens the Filter Design dialog.

(engaged), this provides a quick A / B comparison of the processed and
unprocessed signal.
The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader setting and
additionally provides the possibility for entering a desired value.

FIR Filter Design
200 Hz 20...20000 ms HI PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Hi pass filter.
2000 Hz 20...20000 ms LO PASS sets the cut-off frequency of the Lo pass

filter.
Selects the FIR filter type of the DSP block.


Dynamics (FIR Controller original)
The Dynamics window provides access to a compressor and a Peak Anticipation limiter. This allows setting the
corresponding parameters in a band pass, so that connected loudspeaker systems are protected against dangerous
level peaks and overload.
Click on the fifth block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double click on the DYNAMICS block in the large Flow Diagram
to select the Dynamics window.



Compressor Parameter
15 dBu -9.0...+21.0 THRESHOLD defines the signal level at which the

dBu compressor sets in.
or
0.275... 8.696
V
1:1 1 : 1, 1.4 : 1, RATIO defines the degree of compression above

2 : 1, the threshold level. For example a ratio of 4.0 : 1
4: 1, 8:1 means the output signal will only increase by 1
dB for every 4 dB the input signal exceeds the
threshold.
5 ms 0...99 ms ATTACK defines how fast the signal level will be

reduced after it exceeds the threshold level.
250 ms 50...999 ms RELEASE defines how fast the output signal

returns to its normal level once it drops below
the threshold.

(engaged) the compressor, which allows for

quick A / B comparison between the compressed
and uncompressed signals.

Limiter Parameters
21 dBu -9.0...+21. THRESHOLD defines the signal level at which the PA

0 dBu limiter sets in.
or
0.275...
8.696 V

250 ms 50...999 RELEASE defines how fast the output signal returns to
ms its normal level once it drops below the threshold.

(engaged) the limiter, which allows for quick A / B
comparison between limited and unlimited signals.

Meters
Element Description
These meters indicate signal reduction of the

– compressor (COMP),
– Peak limiter (LIMITER or PEAK LIMITER) or
– TEMP limiter (TEMP LIMITER)
in dB. A yellow bar increasing from top to the bottom indicates the degree of level reduction.

Editing Compressor / Limiter parameters via Mouse Dragging in the Graphic Display
If a compressor or limiter has been activated (Bypass is not engaged), the graphic display shows white dots that re-
present the according threshold values. Click onto one of these dots with the left mouse button and keep it pressed
down to set the threshold value of the corresponding compressor or limiter by dragging the mouse up or down. Click
with the right mouse button onto the compressors white dot and keep the mouse button pressed down to edit its
ratio.

Limiters (FIR-Drive Controller)
The Limiters window provides access to a Peak limiter and a TEMP limiter. This allows setting the corresponding
parameters so that connected loudspeaker systems are protected against dangerous level peaks and overload.
Click on the fifth block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double click on the LIMITERS block in the large Flow Diagram
to select the Limiters window.

PEAK/TEMP-Limiter-Parameter
AMPLIFIER Default User, Default (39 dB), S900, S1200, If the amplifier type used is not
(39 dB) CL800, CL1200, CL1600, CL2000, available in this dropdown, select the
LX1600, LX2200, LX3000, L1000 entry „User“. Then, select the field and
(0dBu), L1000 (+6dBu), L1000 enter the gain of the amplifier. Please
(26dB), L1600 (0dBu), L1600 refer to the technical documentation of
(+6dBu), L1600 (26dB), L2400 the amplifier or ask your dealer for the
(0dBu), L2400 (+6dBu), L2400 correct gain setting.
(26dB),
H 2500 (0dBu), H 2500 (32dB), H
2500 (35dB), H 5000 (0dBu), H
5000 (32dB), H 5000 (35dB),
SL900, SL1200, SL1800, SL2400,
DSA8204, DSA8206, DSA8209,
DSA8212, Q44, Q66, CP1200,
CP1800, CP2200, CP3000S,
CP4000S, P1200 (0dBu), P1200
(+6dBu), P1200 (26dB), P2000
(0dBu), P2000 (+6dBu), P2000
(26dB), P3000 (0dBu), P3000
(+6dBu), P3000 (26dB), TG5
(0dBu), TG5 (32dB), TG5 (35dB),
TG7 (0dBu), TG7 (32dB), TG7
(35dB), Q44 MKII, Q66 MKII, Q99,
Q1212, CPS2.4, CPS2.6, CPS2.9,
CPS2.12
THRESHOL 12 Vpk THRESHOLD AMP OUTPUT determines

D AMP the audio signal level above which the
OUTPUT peak limiter starts operating. Please
refer to the technical documentation of
the used speaker for the power limit
(program power or music power).
then, use the Limiter Threshold
Calculator (Tools > Limiter Threshold
Calculator) to calculate the
corresponding voltage at the amplifier
output.
The Speaker Settings for DYNACORD
or Electro-Voice speakers already
include the correct setting for this
parameter.

THRESHOL -18.0 dBu THRESHOLD DSP LEVEL determines

D DSP the audio signal level above which the
LEVEL peak limiter starts operating. This value
may change depending on the
AMPLIFIER type that is selected, as the
sensitivity and output power are
automatically calculated with the Vpk
value to provide DSP Threshold.
The Speaker Settings for DYNACORD
include the correct setting for this
parameter.
RELEASE 100 ms 10 bis 999 ms RELEASE determines how fast the

limiter returns to normal amplification,
after the audio signal level declined the
threshold.
BYPASS BYPASS activates (not engaged) or

deactivates (engaged) the
corresponding limiter.
LIMITER The ACTIVATED LED lights green if the

ACTIVATED TEMP limiter is active.
Most Speaker Settings for DYNACORD
include the correct setting for the
TEMP limiter, the LED lights green if
settings are included.

Meters
Element Description
These meters indicate signal reduction of the

– Peak limiter (PEAK LIMITER) or
– TEMP limiter (TEMP LIMITER) in dB.
A yellow bar increasing from top to the bottom indicates the degree of level reduction.

Editing Limiter parameters via Mouse Dragging in the Graphic Display
If the limiter has been activated (Bypass is not engaged), the graphic display shows a white dot that represents the
according threshold value. Click onto one the dot with the left mouse button and keep it pressed down to set the
threshold value of the compressor by dragging the mouse up or down.

GATE

A Gate is used to mute a signal whenever its level falls below a specific threshold. This, for example, is
useful to suppress unwanted noise of an open microphone channel.
This indicator signals in dB by how much the gate

reduces the signal level. A red bar that increases from
the right to the left indicates the degree of gain
reduction.
-60.0 dBu -84.0...-25.0 The THRESHOLD parameter defines the level value up to
or dBu or which the Gate mutes the signal. As long as the signal

0.001 V 0.000...0.044 V level is below the set threshold, the signal stays muted.
As soon as the signal level at the input reaches or
exceeds the threshold, the signal is transmitted. The
signal’s level, however, is not altered..
5 ms 5...150 ms The ATTACK parameter defines the speed at which the

Gate opens. Short attack times result in the signal being
transmitted, even if it exceeds the threshold only for a
very short time.
125 ms 5...1000 ms HOLD defines how long the gate keeps transmitting the
signal after the signal level has dropped below the
threshold.
250 ms 10...1000 ms RELEASE defines the time that it takes to mute the
signal after the HOLD period has passed.


(engaged) the gate.

0 dB -18...6 dB Fader for setting the output level.
The fader display shows the numerical value of the

current fader setting and also provides the possibility for

GRAPHIC EQUALIZER

IRIS-Net provides 10, 15 and 31 band graphic equalizers in monaural and stereo quality.
Switch to select magnitude or phase indication
Switch to scale the amplification axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or

50 dB (± 25 dB)
Switch to select whether white points are visible during

frequency response indication, or not.

Switch to determine whether bandwidth BW or quality Q are

selected when setting the current filter.


Pressing ALL ACTIVATED deactivates all filters. The current

status is stored when pressing ALL ACTIVATED while a single
or several filters have been deactivated by marking the OFF
option in the according checkbox. Pressing this button once
again, e.g. activating the graphic equalizer, resets the formerly
stored state.
SYMMETRICA SYMMETRICAL Switching the graphic equalizer’s type between

LQ Q, SYMMETRICAL Q, PROPORTIONAL Q and CONSTANT Q.
PROPORTIONA SYMMETRICAL Q: The filters have an identical Q at all
L Q, CONSTANT accentuation settings. The lowering frequency responses are
Q symmetrical to the accentuation frequency responses.
PROPORTIONAL Q: A Filter’s Q increases as soon as
accentuation or lowering of the filter increases, with the
effect that the equalizer becomes ”sharper” with increased
EQ setting. The quality defined by Q corresponds to the
quality at full accentuation or lowering.
CONSTANT Q: The filter has the same Q at all accentuation or
lowering settings. The resulting accentuation or lowering
frequency response is not symmetrical.
0.7 0.4...40.0 Q set the quality of all EQ bands. A high Q value results in a
narrowband filter. A low Q value results in a wideband filter.

The fixed frequencies of EQ bands
Sets level amplification (accentuation) or reduction

(lowering) of a band. A band’s fader is indicated in red when
the band has been deactivated by marking the checkbox OFF.
Pressing the spacebar resets the currently selected fader to 0
dB.
Deactivating every single EQ-Band is possible by setting this

checkbox. Deactivating a band does not change the band’s
previously made settings.
Freely programmable LF FILTER and HF FILTER are provided

next to the 10, 15 or 31 bands.
PEQ PEQ. Loshelv. TYPE defines the desired LF FILTER or HF FILTER filter type.
His- helv, PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable
Hipass, Lopass, frequency, quality and gain.
Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high
shelving equalizer with the following editable parameters:
frequency, slope and gain.
Lopass / Hipass creates low pass respectively high pass filters
with adjustable frequency and slope.
All pass is a filter which only affects the phase but not the
frequency response of the transmission function.

0 dB -18...+18 dB GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation

(reduction) of parametric EQs or low shelving and high
shelving equalizers.
20 / 20000 20 Hz...20 kHz FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric
Hz EQ or the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass
filters.
6dB/Oct 6dB/Oct, SLOPE sets the steepness or filter-order of low or high

12dB/Oct shelving equalizers and low or high pass filters. Setting
different slopes within the transmission range is possible.
That, in conjunction with the Q-parameter, offers the
possibility for a hi-pass filter to be programmed for B6-
alignment, which describes a drastic rise in the cut-off
frequency range.
1.9 Oct or 0.04...2.86 Oct Q or BW defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ.
0.7 or A high Q-value results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-
or 0.4...40 value results in a broadband filter. The Q-value also sets the
quality and thus the response of Hi, Lo and All pass filters
with slopes of 12dB/ oct.
BYPASS switches the corresponding filter ON (not engaged)

or OFF (engaged), which allows for quick A / B-evaluation of
the actual effect that a filter has on the sound.
ALL FLAT resets all 10, 15 or 31 bands and also LF- and HF
FILTER to 0 dB.
CAUTION: Using ALLFLAT discards all gain settings.

A white dot in the frequency response display represents an active filter (BYPASS and Drag Points Off not engaged).
Clicking with the left mouse button on this dot and keeping the mouse button pressed down allows changing the
selected filter’s amplification by moving the mouse up or down.

HIGH-PASS FILTER

High-pass filters pass high frequencies and stop low frequencies. Since it is not realistically possible to
create a perfect filter that passes high frequencies totally unaltered and stops low frequencies completely, high-pass
filter design involves compromises that allow some rounding of the corner at the filter cutoff frequency and some slope
in the transition to the low frequency stop band. Different compromise schemes are given different names; examples
are Bessel, Butterworth, and Linkwitz-Riley high-pass filter types.
The cutoff frequency is defined as the frequency at which the magnitude of the filter response has fallen to -3 dB
relative to the unfiltered signal in the Bessel and Butterworth types, and to -6 dB in the Linkwitz-Riley types. The cutoff
frequency is continuously variable from 10 Hz to 20 kHz.


Switches between frequency (magnitude)

and phase response (phase) indication.
Switch for selecting dB-axis scaling of 25 dB

(± 12.5 dB) or 50 dB (± 25 dB).
6dB 6dB, 12dB, 12dB SLOPE sets the steepness or filter-order of

BS, 18 dB BS, 24 the high-pass filter..
dB BS (Bessel),
12dB BW, 18 dB
BW, 24 dB BW
(Butterworth), 12
dB LR, 24 dB LR
(Linkwitz-Riley)
1000Hz 20 Hz...20 kHz FREQUENCY sets the cut-off frequency of the

high-pass filter.
1 0.4...100 The Q-value sets the quality and thus the

response of the high-pass filter with slope of
12dB/oct. This parameter is not available at
other slopes.
BYPASS switches the filter ON (not engaged)

or OFF (engaged), which allows for quick A /

B-evaluation of the actual effect that the
high-pass filter has on the sound.

mouse button on this dot and keeping the mouse button pressed down allows changing the filter’s frequency by
moving the mouse to the left or to the right. Clicking with the right mouse button on the white dot and keeping the
mouse button pressed down allows changing the Q-values (if SLOPE is set to 12dB) of the filter.

HIGH SHELF FILTER

High shelf filters raise or lower the magnitude response at frequencies above the cut-off frequency
without altering the response at frequencies below the cut-off frequency. Since it is not realistically possible to create
a perfect filter that alters only high frequencies without affecting low frequencies, high shelf design involves
compromises that allow some rounding of the corner at the filter cut-off frequency and some slope in the transition to
the unaltered low frequencies.


dB) or 50 dB (± 25 dB).
6dB 6dB, SLOPE sets the transition band slope of the high shelf
12dB filter.
1000Hz 20 Hz... FREQUENCY sets the cut-off frequency of the high

20 kHz shelf filter.
0.0 dB -18...+18 GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or

dB attenuation (reduction) of the high shelf filter.


the actual effect that the high shelf filter has on the
sound.

moving the mouse to the left or to the right.

LOUDSPEAKER CONTROLLER

The DSP block Loudspeaker Controller entirely integrates the needed signal processing for a
complete PA system, providing Loudspeaker Controller blocks starting from one way till up to five ways in monaural or
stereo quality. An overview of the standard names for the different ways is presented in the following table:
1 Wege FULLRANGE
2 Wege LOW HIGH
3 Wege LOW MID HIGH
4 Wege SUB LOW MID HIGH
5 Wege SUB LOW LOW-MID HIGH-MID HIGH

The complete parameter set for a single loudspeaker is stored in the Speaker Setting file. IRIS-Net is shipped with a
range of Speaker Setting files that hold parameter sets which have been optimized for Electro-Voice and DYNACORD
loudspeaker systems.

Flow Diagram Selector
Element Description
The Flow Diagram Selector is available on all pages of the Loudspeaker Controller block and allows
navigating through the pages. Within the Flow Diagram Selector the user can select different DSP
function blocks. The currently selected block is indicated as engaged and in yellow.

Short descriptions of the Loudspeaker Controller blocks consecutive stages are to be found in the following table. A
more detailed description can be found in the corresponding paragraphs.
Element Description
FLOW The signal flow chart offers an overview of the Loudspeaker Controller blocks DSP settings. Also
DIAGRAM located in this area are all the controls for managing Speaker Settings.
CHANNEL EQ The CHANNEL EQ page provides access to the 6-Band parametric equalizers for loudspeaker
equalizing.
X-OVER The X-OVER area hosts the frequency crossover filters as well as parameters: Gain, Polarity and
Alignment-Delay for all ways.
TRIM TRIM allows matching the levels of individual ways, while MUTE attenuates the corresponding ways
output.
DYNAMICS The DYNAMICS page hosts a compressor and a limiter for each way.

Flow Diagram
The FLOW DIAGRAM window shows a signal flow diagram, which offers quick overview of all DSP settings. Separately
muting, matching their levels amongst each other, and labeling channels is possible directly out of the diagram. All
other DSP parameters are accessible via clicking on the different function blocks. In addition, this window hosts all
necessary controls for storing and loading Speaker Settings.
Selecting the FLOW DIAGRAM window is possible by clicking onto the first or the fifth block in the Flow Diagram
Selector.

Function blocks
Element Description
This block represents the 6 Channel EQs of the individual ways. The graph indicates the
frequency response of the Channel EQ Block. Simply clicking onto this block branches to the
CHANNEL EQ page.
This block represents the crossover of the corresponding way. The graph shows the frequency
response that results from the set X-Over parameters. Three additional LEDs signal the state of
trim, polarity and delay. Simply clicking onto this block branches to the X-OVER page.
This way allows separately setting the level. The setting is carried out via Up/Down Spin controls
or by directly entering a level value in dB. The MUTE button is used to attenuate the
corresponding way's signal. Clicking with the left mouse button on the MUTE button mutes the
corresponding way. The MUTE button is shown engaged and lights red. Again clicking onto the
button with the left mouse button deactivates the Mute function and the way is active.
This block represents the dynamics functions of the corresponding way. Two LEDs indicate
whether compressors or limiters are activated. The graph indicates set values. Simply clicking
onto this block branches to the DYNAMICS page.

The text field allows naming the corresponding way.
IMPORT opens a dialog box that allows loading Speaker Settings. This function imports a
complete loudspeaker parameter set into the corresponding way.

CAUTION: A loaded Speaker Setting becomes immediately audible when in the on-line mode.
Always make sure that the speaker setting that you are about to load is the desired speaker
setting containing the correct parameter set. Otherwise, under most extreme circumstances,
loading the wrong speaker set can permanently damage the connected loudspeaker systems!
EXPORT opens a dialog box that allows saving speaker settings. This function stores the
complete settings of the corresponding way as parameter set in a file.

Channel EQ
The parametric 6-Band equalizer is meant for loudspeaker equalization. Select the Channel EQ by clicking onto the
second block in the Flow Diagram Selector or by double clicking onto the CHANNEL EQ block in the large Signal flow
Diagram.

The following table lists the graphic displays different graphic renditions:
Element Description
Switch for selecting amplitude frequency response (magnitude) or phase response (phase)
indication

Selecting the Way
Element Description
Switch for selecting the way of the Loudspeaker Controller block for filter processing. The
actual amount of switches depends on the type of Loudspeaker Controller block.

Filter Parameter
Switch for selecting between bandwidth BW or quality

Q when setting filters.
BYPASS ALL deactivates all filters.
PEQ PEQ. TYPE defines the desired filter type.

Loshelv. PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable
Hishelv, frequency, quality and gain.
Hipass, Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively
Lopass, high shelving equalizer with the following editable
Allpass parameters: frequency, slope and gain.
Lopass / Hipass creates low pass respectively high pass
filters with adjustable frequency and slope.
Allpass is a filter which only affects the phase but not
the frequency response of the transmission function.
6dB/Oc 6dB/Oct, SLOPE defines the steepness or the filters order for
t 12dB/Oct Low-Shelving or High-Shelving filters as well as for Lo-
Pass or Hi-Pass filters. Setting different slopes in the
transmission range is possible. High- Pass filter and Q
parameter together provide the possibility to program
B6 alignments, which describes the raising in the cut-off
frequency range.
20 Hz...20 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency for

kHz parametric EQs or, in case of Shelving and High- Pass /
Lo-Pass filters, it sets the cut-off frequency.
0.7 0.4...40.0 Q sets the quality respectively the bandwidth of the

(PEQ), parametric EQ. A high Q-value results in a narrowband
0.4...2.0 filter. A low Q-value results in a wideband filter. Q also
(Hi-/ sets the quality and therefore the curve progression of
Lopass), Lo-Pass-, High-Pass- and All-Pass filters with 12dB/Oct
0.4...2.0 slope.
(Allpass)
0 dB -18...+12 dB GAIN sets amplification (rising) or attenuation

(lowering) of parametric EQs or Low-Shelving- and High-
Shelving filters.

first first, second ORDER (All-Pass filters only) sets the desired order of
an All-Pass filter. A 1st order All-Pass filter shifts the
phase by 180°. A 2nd order All-Pass filter shifts the
phase by 360°.

(engaged) the corresponding filter, which allows for
quick A / B comparison between filtered and original
sound signal.

If a filter has been activated (BYPASS is not engaged), a white dot in the frequency response graph represents the
selected filter. Click onto this dot with the left mouse button and keep the button pressed down to change the
corresponding filters frequency by dragging the mouse to the left or right. Moving the mouse up or down lets you set
the filters gain (depending on the type of filter).
clarity.

X-Over
The X-Over window provides a frequency crossover with Hi- and Lo-Pass filters, Delay, Gain-Trim and a polarity switch
for each Way of the Loudspeaker Controller block. These parameters allow separating the frequency bands of a multi-
way loudspeaker system correctly, compensate natural delays and match levels.
Click on the third block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double click on the X-OVER block in the large Signal Flow
Diagram to select the X-Over window.

The following table lists the graphic displays different graphic renditions:

Element Description
Switch to select whether amplitude frequency response

(magnitude) or phase response (phase) are being displayed.
Switch for scaling the amplitude axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50

dB (± 25 dB).
Shows the resulting transmission function of all filter and level trim
settings, which represents the visible and audible result. The
resulting transmission function is indicated in light colors. The
electric graphs are shown in dark colors.

function of the loudspeaker controller ways. The Sum switch
allows indication of the summed signal of all ways.
Switch that allows including programmed delays in the frequency

response or phase response indication. Include Delays primarily
influences phase response indication. The influence of the delays
have on the frequency response is more evident when indicating
the summation.
Switch to additionally display measured loudspeaker transmission

loudspeaker data sets under Speaker.

Channel Parameters
Name of the corresponding way. For

a loudspeaker controller block with 5
ways the standard names are: SUB,
LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID and HIGH.
thru, 20 RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the

Hz thru, 6dB, HIPASS filter. Setting different filter
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/Q=0.6, types (Bessel, Butterworth, Linkwitz/
12dB/Q=0.7, Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct
12dB/Q=0.8, 12dB/Q=1.0, and 24 dB/Oct and cut-off

12dB/Q=1.2, frequencies between 20 Hz and 20
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/Q=2.0, kHz is possible.
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz

thru, RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the

20000 Hz thru, 6dB, LOPASS filter. Setting different filter
12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/Q=0.6, types (Bessel, Butterworth, Linkwitz/
12dB/Q=0.7, Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct
12dB/Q=0.8, 12dB/Q=1.0, and 24 dB/Oct and cut-off

12dB/Q=1.2, frequencies between 20 Hz and 20
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/Q=2.0, kHz is possible.
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz
0 dB -30...+6 dB GAIN TRIM is for amplifying the level

of the corresponding channel by up
to 6 dB or attenuating it by as much
as 30 dB, which allows matching
levels of the frequency bands
amongst each other.
The Mute button allows muting the

signal of the loudspeaker controller
block's selected way.
normal normal, inverted POLARITY allows inverting a channel,

e.g. shifting its phase by 180°. Some
frequency crossover settings need

phase inversion, because otherwise,
it dropouts appear at the crossover
frequency. The influence of the
polarity parameter becomes clearly
evident in summed indication of the
two amplifier channels (switch to
Sum).
0.0 ms 0.0...500.0 ms DELAY allows delaying the signal of

the corresponding way by a settable
amount of time. Typically, this delay
is used as time alignment delay to
overcome the difference in distance
between the loudspeaker systems
within a cabinet.

deactivates (enganged) the

corresponding delay.

The arrow sign next to SPEAKER

opens a dialog for selecting speaker
files.
The text field shows the name of the

currently loaded speaker file.

General Parameters
ms ms, samples, Allows selecting the unit for delay settings.

ft, in, m, cm,
µs, s
20 °C -20...60 °C or Allows entering the ambient temperature. The

-4...140 °F entered temperature is taken into account to
correct the actual delay time if the unit for
distance has been specified for the delay.
Temperatures can be entered in °C or °F.

Editing X-Over filters via Mouse Dragging in the Graphic Display
If a X-Over filter has been activated (filter type not set to OFF), a white dot in the frequency response graph represents
the filters cut-off frequency. Click onto this dot with the left mouse button and keep it pressed down to set the
corresponding filters frequency by dragging the mouse to the left or right.
clarity. In addition, another graph appears that represents the frequency response of the currently selected filter.

Dynamics
The Dynamics window provides access to a compressor and a limiter for each way. This allows setting the
corresponding parameters in a way, so that connected loudspeaker systems are protected against dangerous level
peaks and overload. Click on the fourth block in the Flow Diagram Selector or double click on the DYNAMICS block in
the large Flow Diagram to select the Dynamics window.



Selecting a Way
Element Description
Switch for selecting the loudspeaker controller blocks way for dynamic
processing.

21 dBu -9.0...+21.0 THRESHOLD defines the signal level at

dBu which the compressor sets in.
or
0.275...
8.696 V
2:1 1: 1, 1.4: 1, RATIO defines the degree of compression

2: 1, above the threshold level. For example: A
4 : 1, 8 : 1 compression rate of 4 : 1 represents a
signal reduction by factor 4.
5 ms 0...99 ms ATTACK defines the velocity the compressor

sets in and reduces the gain when the

threshold has been exceeded.
250 ms 50...999 RELEASE defines the time it takes for the

ms compressor to return to normal level after

the signal level declined the threshold.

deactivates (engaged) the compressor,
which allows for quick A / B comparison
between the compressed and
uncompressed signals.

Limiter Parameters
21 dBu -9.0...+21. THRESHOLD defines the signal level at which

0 dBu the limiter sets in.
or
0.275...
8.696 V
5 ms 0...99 ms ATTACK defines how fast the gain is reduced

after the signal level has declined the

threshold level.

250 ms 50...999 RELEASE defines the time it takes for limiter

ms to return to normal level after the signal level


deactivates (engaged) the limiter, which
allows for quick A / B comparison between
limited and unlimited signals.

Meters
Element Description
These meters indicate signal reduction of the compressor (COMP) or limiter in dB. A yellow bar
increasing from top to the bottom indicates the degree of level reduction.

Editing Compressor / Limiter parameters via Mouse Dragging in the Graphic Display
If a compressor or limiter has been activated (Bypass is not engaged), the graphic display shows white dots that re-
present the according threshold values. Click onto one of these dots with the left mouse button and keep it pressed
down to set the threshold value of the corresponding compressor or limiter by dragging the mouse up or down. Click
with the right mouse button onto the compressors white dot and keep the mouse button pressed down to edit its
ratio.

LOW-PASS FILTER

Low-pass filters pass low frequencies and stop high frequencies. Since it is not realistically possible to
create a perfect filter that passes low frequencies totally unaltered and stops high frequencies completely, low-pass
filter design involves compromises that allow some rounding of the corner at the filter cutoff frequency and some slope
in the transition to the high frequency stop band. Different compromise schemes are given different names; examples
are Bessel, Butterworth and Linkwith-Riley lowpass filter types.
The cutoff frequency is defined as the frequency at which the magnitude of the filter response has fallen to -3 dB
relative to the unfiltered signal in the Bessel and Butterworth types, and to -6 dB in the Linkwitz-Riley types. The cutoff
frequency is continuously variable from 20 Hz to 20 kHz.

Switches between frequency (magnitude) and

phase response (phase) indication.
Switch for selecting dB-axis scaling of 25 dB (±

12.5 dB) or 50 dB (± 25 dB).
6dB 6dB, 12dB, SLOPE sets the steepness or filter-order of the

12dB BS, 18 dB low-pass filter.
BS,
24 dB BS
(Bessel), 12dB
BW, 18 dB BW,
24 dB BW
(Butter- worth),
12 dB LR, 24 dB
LR (Linkwitz-
Riley)
1000Hz 20 Hz...20 kHz FREQUENCY sets the cut-off frequency of the

low-pass filter.
1 0.4...100 The Q-value sets the quality and thus the

response of the low-pass filter with slope of
12dB/oct. This parameter is not available at
other slopes.
BYPASS switches the filter ON (not engaged)

or OFF (engaged), which allows for quick A / B-

evaluation of the actual effect that the low-
pass filter has on the sound.

mouse button pressed down allows changing the Q-values (if SLOPE is set to 12dB) of the filter.


LOW SHELF FILTER

Low shelf filters raise or lower the magnitude response at frequencies below the cut-off frequency
without altering the response at frequencies above the cut-off frequency. Since it is not realistically possible to create
a perfect filter that alters only low frequencies without affecting high frequencies, low shelf filter design involves
compromises that allow some rounding of the corner at the filter cut-off frequency and some slope in the transition to
the unaltered high frequencies.
Switches between frequency (magnitude) and phase response (phase)

indication.
Switch for selecting dB-axis scaling of 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or 50 dB (±

25 dB).
6dB 6dB, 12dB SLOPE sets the transition band slope of the low shelf filter.
1000Hz 20 Hz...20 FREQUENCY sets the cut-off frequency of the low shelf filter.
kHz
0.0 dB -18...+18 dB GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation (reduction) of

the low shelf filter.
BYPASS switches the filter ON (not engaged) or OFF (engaged), which

allows for quick A / B-evaluation of the actual effect that the low shelf

filter has on the sound.

moving the mouse to the left or to the right.

MATRIX MIXER

The DSP block Matrix Mixer allows connecting inputs and outputs. Left clicking the node in the matrix
where the output channel’s column and the input channel’s line meet with the mouse does connect an output to an
input. Again clicking onto the corresponding node disconnects inputs and outputs. Right clicking onto a node opens a
dialog box for setting levels.
Making connections is not restricted in any way, e.g. connecting various inputs to a single output is as possible as
connecting a single input to a variety of outputs. The notation I x O represents a matrix with I inputs and O outputs.

Inputs
Fixed channel labeling: channels of a matrix of the dimension I x O are numbered

from 1 to I.
Text field for providing an input channel with an internal IRIS-Net name.
0 dB -80...0 dB Setting an input channel’s signal level. The desired value can be entered in dB.
HINT: Ramping is deactivated by default.

MUTE button mutes the input channel

Outputs
0 dB -80...0 dB Fader for setting the corresponding output

channel’s level.
0 dB -80...0 dB Fader Display. This field indicates the current fader

setting as a numerical value. Entering the desired
value in dB is possible as well.
MUTE button mutes the output signal.
Text field for providing an output channel with an

internal IRIS-Net name.
CAUTION: The use of * (asterisk) and = (equal) in
names is not permissible.

Nodes
Element Description
Right clicking a node opens this dialog with a fader and fader display for setting the level and a
CONNECT-Button for setting or resetting the node’s connection. The label represents the node’s
position ("line - column") within the matrix.
This area is navigating through largely dimensioned matrixes. The red rectangle marks the
currently indicated matrix area. Changing the displayed area is possible by dragging the rectangle
with the left mouse button pressed down. MATRIX NAVIGATION appears only when the complete
matrix view does not fit in the screen.

MATRIX ROUTER

The DSP block Matrix Router allows connecting an output to only one
input. Left clicking the node in the matrix where the output channel’s
column and the input channel’s line meet with the mouse does connect
an output to an input. Again clicking onto the corresponding node
disconnects inputs and outputs.

Matrix Routers are subject to a restriction. Only one input can be connected to an output at a time. However,
connecting an input to various outputs is possible. A Matrix Router can distribute the signal of an input. Mixing input
signals is not possible. The notation I x O represents a matrix with I inputs and O outputs. The number of inputs (2 to
32) and outputs (2 to 32) can be selected when adding the DSP block to the configuration.



Inputs
Fixed channel labeling: channels of a matrix with the dimensions I x O are

numbered from 1 to I.
Text field for providing an input channel with an internal IRIS-Net name.
0 dB -80...0 dB Setting the signal level of an input channel. Entering the desired value in dB is
possible.

HINT: Ramping is deactivated by default.
MUTE button mutes the input channel.

Outputs
0 dB -80...0 Fader for setting the corresponding output channel’s level.

dB
0 dB -80...0 Fader Display. This field indicates the current fader setting as a numerical
dB value. Entering the desired value in dB is possible as well.
Text field for providing an output channel with an internal IRIS-Net name.


Element Description
currently indicated matrix area. Changing the displayed area is possible by dragging the
rectangle with the left mouse button pressed down. MATRIX NAVIGATION appears only when the
complete matrix view does not fit in the screen.

ANALOG MICROPHONE INPUT

The DSP block Analog Microphone Inputs provides access to the eight analog inputs with microphone
input sensitivity of a MI-1 Microphone Input card. Establishing independent settings for each input channel is
possible. Equivalent to the ones of the Analog Line Inputs DSP block, these settings include a fader with ramping
function as well as Mute and Invert buttons. In addition, setting the GAIN in steps of 6 dB is possible in a range
between 0 dB and +60 dB. +48 V phantom power can be activated per channel. Adjacent channels can be linked by use
of the LINK button. This allows convenient synchronous settings of several input channels, e.g. for stereo signals. Up to
three MI-1 can be used simultaneously in a N8000 or P 64.

Permanent channel labeling. Channels are numbered from

MIC 1 to MIC 8.
LINK button for linking (grouping) adjacent input channels.

The Link button does not affect Gain, PAD and Phantom
Power settings. Changing any of these three parameters in
a linked channel does not automatically change the
parameters’ setting in any of the other grouped channels.
0.0 dB 0...60 dB The input channel gain can be adjusted in steps of 6 dB.

The -18dB button (PAD) is for switching between

microphone and line input sensitivity.
The +48V button is for activating phantom power whenever

a suitable condenser microphone is being used.
0.0 dB -80...+18.0 dB Fader for setting the input level.
0.0 dB -80...+18.0 dB The fader display shows the numerical value of the current
fader setting and additionally allows entering a desired
value.
Indicates the input signal’s current level.
INV button for inverting (180° phase shift) the input

signal’s polarity.
Text field for labeling an input channel with an exclusive

IRIS-Net name.

CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) or = (equal) signs in a name
is not permissible.

MIXER

The DSP block Mixer allows mixing various input signals to output them via a single output (mono) or
two outputs (stereo). Monaural and stereo mixers with 2, 4, 8, 16, 24 and 32 inputs are available.


Fixed channel naming: input channels are numbered from CH.1 to

CH.n. Output channel(s) are labeled OUT (Mono-Mixer) or L and R
(Stereo-Mixer).
LINK button for connecting (grouping) neighboring input channels.
Stereo Balance (Stereo-Mixer only) defines the percentage of the

input signal being distributed to the left or the right.
INV button for inverting the input channel.
SOLO button for monitoring a single input signal.
MUTE button for muting the corresponding input signal.
0.0 dB -80... 0 Fader for setting the levels in corresponding inputs or outputs. If a
dB signal is present at the channel (above -40dBu), the "SIG" LED lights.
The "CLIP" LED additionally lights when the signal level nears
clipping (+21dBu).
The Fader Display indicates the current fader setting as a numerical

value and allows entering the desired value.
Text field for labeling an input channel with an internal IRIS-Net

name.
CAUTION: The use of * (asterisk) and = (equal) in names is not
permissible.

NOISE GENERATOR

The DSP block Noise Generator generates white or pink noise. Pink noise has a spectral dispersion with
constant power per relative bandwidth, whereas the octave from 20 to 40 Hz has the identical noise power as the
octave between 10000 and 20000 Hz. Every time the frequency is doubled the power is cut in half.
White noise has a spectral dispersion with constant power per absolute bandwidth, stated in Hz. The 20 Hz range
between 20 and 40 Hz has the same noise power as the 20 Hz range between 10000 Hz and 10020 Hz.


The PINK button selects "Pink Noise" mode.
The WHITE button selects "White Noise" mode.
-35 dB -60... 0 dB Fader for setting the noise signal’s level.
-35.0 dBu or 0.014 -60...0 dBu or 0.001...0.775 Entering the signal level is possible in dBu or V.
V V
Switch for activating or deactivating the noise

generator.

NOTCH FILTER

Notch filters pass all frequencies except for the notch frequency, which they stop completely. Since it is
not realistically possible to create a perfect filter that stops one frequency completely and passes all other frequencies
totally unaltered, notch filter design involves compromises that allow some (adjustable )width in the notch and less
than infinite attenuation at the notch frequency.



dB) or 50 dB (± 25 dB).
1000Hz 20 Hz...20 FREQUENCY sets the center frequency (notch

kHz frequency) of the notch filter.
1 0.4...100 The Q-value sets the quality and thus the response of
the notch filter.
1.4 0.1...3 BANDWITH sets the quality and thus the response of
the notch filter.


the actual effect that the notch filter has on the
sound..

mouse button pressed down allows changing the Q-values of the filter.

PARAMETRIC EQ

Equalizers accentuate or lower the audio signal within specific frequency ranges. IRIS-Net provides
parametric 3-, 5-, 7- as well as 12-Band equalizers in monaural (1 input and 1 output) and stereo quality (2 inputs and 2
outputs) plus, in addition, PEQs with a freely selectable amount of filters between 1 and 32.


Switch for displaying amplitude frequency response (magnitude) or

phase response (phase)
Switch for scaling the amplitude axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or 50 dB (±

25 dB)
Switch for changing between bandwidth BW and Quality Q when

setting employed filters.
Pressing BYPASS ALL switches of all filters.
Name of the corresponding filter band. Clicking with the right mouse
button onto this field opens Copy & Paste menu, which allows
comfortably copying all EQ parameters of the selected filter to any
other EQ within the same project.

Loshelv. – PEQ is a parametric Peak Dip Filter with its frequency, quality (Q)

His- helv, and gain being programmable.
Hipass, – Loshelv / Hishelv create a Low-Shelving or High-Shelving filter
Lopass, with the parameters being: frequency, slope and gain.
Allpass – Lopass / Hipass creates a Low Pass or High Pass filter with
– Allpass is a filter that has no influence on the frequency response
but on the phase response in the transmission function.


depends 20 Hz...20 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or the
on kHz cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass filters.

number
of filters

1.9 Oct or 0.04...2.8 Q or BW defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ. A high
0.7 6 Oct. Q-value results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-value results in

or 0.4...40 a broadband filter. The Q-value also sets the quality and thus the
response of Hi, Lo and All pass filters with slopes of 12dB/oct.
12dB/ equalizers and low or high pass filters. Setting different slopes within

Oct the transmission range is possible. That, in conjunction with the Q-
for B6- alignment, which describes a drastic rise in the cut-off
frequency range.




PRIORITY MATRIX

The Priority Matrix DSP block is an extended Matrix Mixer. Clicking with the left mouse button onto the
node in the matrix where the output channel’s column and the input channel’s line meet, connects an output to an
input. Again clicking onto the node separates the connection. Right clicking on a node allows editing the level. When
connecting the device to a PROMATRIX/PROANNOUNCE System, allows dynamically setting nodes in the Priority Matrix
from call stations. Please also refer to the notes in chapters RS-232 Setup and Macros.
Next to connecting inputs and outputs, assigning Priorities to input channels is possible as well. The Priority Matrix
provides the following features:
– Exactly 256 Priorities exist, numbered from 0 up to 255.
– 1 represents the lowest priority and 255 is the highest priority.
– If various input signals with different priorities are assigned to a single output at the same time, only the signal
with the highest priority is connected through to the output.
– If input signals with equal priority are assigned to a single output at the same time, a mixed signal of these input
signals is output.
– An input signal with priority 0 assigned to an output gets connected through to the output in any case. If another
signal (with another priority) is present at the output, it is mixed with the signal that has priority 0.

For priority mode "horizontal" only:

– If input signals of different priority (>0) are assigned to different outputs, only the input signal with the highest
priority is connected through to the selected output(s). No signal is present at outputs that are only connected to
inputs with low priority, this means that set nodes of inputs with low priority are ignored in priority mode
"horizontal".
Setting connections is not restricted in any way, e.g. connecting various inputs to a single output as well as assigning a
single input to a variety of outputs is possible. The notation I x O represents a matrix with I inputs and O outputs.

Inputs
Fixed channel labeling: channels are numbered from

1 to I.
Text field for providing an input channel with an

internal IRIS-Net name.
0 0...255 The Priority field shows the input channel’s set

priority. Entering the desired priority in the range

between 0 and 255 is possible.

Outputs
Elemen Default Range Description

t
0 dB -80...0 dB Fader for setting the corresponding channel's output

level.

0 dB -80...0 dB Fader-Display. This field indicates the current fader

setting as a numerical value. Entering the desired
value in dB is possible as well.
Textfeld zur Beschriftung des Eingangskanals mit

einer IRIS-Net-internen Bezeichnung.

Nodes
Element Description
Selecting priority mode of matrix. Available modes are "horizontal" and "vertical".
If the checkbox is selected a confirmation prompt appears every time nodes are set or reset.
Right clicking a node opens this dialog with a fader and fader display for setting the level and a
CONNECT-Button for setting or resetting the node's connection. The label represents the node's
position ("line - column") within the matrix.
currently indicated matrix area. Changing the displayed area is possible by dragging the
rectangle with the left mouse button pressed down. MATRIX NAVIGATION appears only when the
complete matrix view does not fit in the screen.

PEAK-LIMITER

A Limiter is used when the output signal must not exceed a specific peak level, independent of how much
the input level rises. Short attack times effectively limit overshoots. Limiters are often used as protection for the
components following them an audio chain, i.e. to prevent an amplifier from clipping or protect loudspeaker systems
against mechanical damage.

This indicator signals in dB by how much the

limiter reduces the signal level. A red bar that
increases from the right to the left indicates the
degree of gain reduction.
0.0 dBu -9.0...+21.0 The THRESHOLD parameter defines the level

or dBu or value at which the limiter sets in. Signal levels
0.775 V 0.275...8.696 below the threshold will pass through the limiter
V unaffected. As soon as the signal level reaches or
exceeds the threshold, signal limiting sets in.
Generally, the THRESHOLD of the limiter should
be set some dB higher than the compressor’s
threshold to effectively limit high level peaks.
Entering the threshold value is possible in dBu or
V. The value can be entered in either box and will
automatically be converted in the other.
5 ms 0...50 ms ATTACK defines how fast the gain is reduced

after the signal exceeds the threshold level.

250 ms 10...1000 ms RELEASE defines how fast the output signal

returns to its normal level once it drops below

the threshold.

(engaged) the Limiter, which allows for quick A /
B comparison between the limited and unlimited
audio signal.

PEAK-LIMITER (RCM-24)

components following them in an audio chain, i.e. to prevent an amplifier from clipping or protect loudspeaker systems
against mechanical damage. The characteristics of this Limiter are identical to those of the limiters used in Precision
Series power amps.

This indicator signals in dB by how much the limiter

reduces the signal level. A red bar that increases from the
right to the left indicates the degree of gain reduction.
0.0 dBu -9.0...+21.0 The THRESHOLD parameter defines the level value at
or dBu or which the limiter sets in. Signal levels below the threshold
0.775 V 0.275...8.696 will pass through the limiter unaffected. As soon as the
V signal level reaches or exceeds the threshold, signal
limiting sets in. Generally, the THRESHOLD of the limiter
should be set some dB higher than the compressor’s
threshold to effectively limit high level peaks. Entering the
threshold value is possible in dBu or V. The value can be
entered in either fox and will automatically be converted in
the other.
5 ms 0...50 ms ATTACK defines how fast the gain is reduced after the
signal exceeds the threshold level.


250 ms 10...1000 ms RELEASE defines how fast the output signal returns to its
normal level once it drops below the threshold.

BYPASS activates (not engaged) or deactivates (engaged)

the Limiter, which allows for quick A / B comparison
between the limited and unlimited audio signal.

PEAK ANTICIPATION (PA) LIMITER

components following them in an audio chain, i.e. to prevent an amplifier from clipping or protect loudspeaker systems
against mechanical damage. The Peak Anticipation Limiter calculates the gain reduction using the maximum value of
the look ahead buffer and is optimized for loudspeaker and transducer protection.
This indicator signals in dB by how much the limiter reduces

the signal level. A red bar that increases from the right to the
left indicates the degree of gain reduction.
21 dBu -9.0...+21.0 The THRESHOLD parameter defines the level value at which the
or dBu or limiter sets in. Signal levels below the threshold will pass
8.696 V 0.275...8.696 through the limiter. As soon as the signal level reaches or
V exceeds the threshold, signal limiting sets in. Generally, the
THRES- HOLD of the limiter should be set some dB higher than
the compressor’s threshold to effectively limit high level peaks.
Entering the threshold value is possible in dBu or V. The value
can be entered in either box and will automatically be
converted in the other.
0 ms 0...50 ms ATTACK defines how fast the gain is reduced after the signal
exceeds the threshold level.


100 ms 10...1000 ms RELEASE defines how fast the output signal returns to its
normal level once it drops below the threshold.

BYPASS activates (not engaged) or deactivates (engaged) the

Limiter, which allows for quick A / B comparison between the
limited and unlimited audio signal.

RMS-COMPRESSOR

The compressor reduces the dynamic range of audio signals. Once the signal exceeds a certain threshold,
the signal gets compressed, i.e. major input level changes result in minor output level changes. Narrowing the dynamic
range often allows for easier recording or mixing the audio signal.
Compressors with effective value analysis in monaural (1 input and 1 output) and stereo quality (2 inputs and 2
outputs) are provided. A side channel input allows feeding the compressor with an external control signal, which, for
example, can also be the input signal processed by an equalizer. As a result the compressor reacts to specific
frequency bands more than to others. However, using a totally different trigger signal lets you achieve various special
effects.

The attenuation (gain reduction) indicator signals

the degree of level reduction in dB. A red bar that
increases from right to left indicates the degree of
gain reduction.

0.0 dBu or -9.0...+21.0 THRESHOLD defines the signal level at which the
0.775 V dBu or Compressor sets in. Entering the desired value is
0.275...8.696 possible in dBu as well as in V. The entered value is
V automatically converted in both directions.
1.0:1 1.0:1...100.0: RATIO defines the compression rate, i.e. the degree
1 of compression above the threshold level. For

example, a rate of 4.0 : 1 represents a signal
reduction by factor 4.
0.0 dB 0.0...20 dB SOFT KNEE has an influence on the curve’s bend,

making it possible to avoid a sudden start of

compression once the signal exceeds the
THRESHOLD. When setting the parameter to a
value of n dB, slight compression already sets in at
an input signal level of THRESHOLD - n/2. If the
signal level exceeds THRESHOLD + n/2, the signal is
compressed with the set RATIO. The compression
rate increases slowly until RATIO is reached in the
range between these two values.
5 ms 5...150 ms ATTACK defines the velocity, at which the

compressor sets in. A short attack rate means that

even short signal peaks are efficiently compressed.
Longer attack rate leave signal peaks untouched.
250 ms 20...2000 ms RELEASE defines the control time interval the

compressor takes to return to an uncompressed

signal level, after the signal dropped below the set
threshold.
BYPASS activates (not engaged) or deactivates the

Compressor (engaged), which allows for quick A / B
comparison between the compressed and
uncompressed audio signal.
0.0 dB -18.0...+6.0 GAIN defines the compressor’s output amplification.

dB GAIN allows matching input and output levels if
compression lead to a level reduction of the output
signal.

RMS-COMPRESSOR (RCM-24)

The characteristics of the Compressor (RCM-24) offered by IRIS-Net is identical to the compressors used
in Precision Series power amps.
This bar meter indicates gain reduction in dB, i.e. by

how much the Compressor reduces the signal level. A
red bar that increases from right to left indicates the
degree of gain reduction.
0.0 dBu -9.0...+21.0 THRESHOLD defines the signal level at which the
or dBu or Compressor sets in. Entering the desired value is
0.775 V 0.275...8.69 possible in dBu as well as in V. The entered value is
6V automatically converted in both directions.
1.0:1 1.0:1, 1.4:1, RATIO defines the compression rate, i.e. the degree of
2.0:1, compression above the threshold level. For example, a

4.0:1, 8.0:1 rate of 4.0 : 1 represents a signal reduction by factor
4.
5 ms 5...150 ms ATTACK defines the velocity, at which the compressor

sets in. A short attack rate means that even short

signal peaks are efficiently compressed. Longer attack
rate leave signal peaks untouched.

250 ms 20...2000 RELEASE defines the control time interval the

ms compressor takes to return to an uncompressed signal

level, after the signal dropped below the set threshold.

comparison between the compressed and

TONE CONTROL

The DSP block Tone Control has three filters with rotary controls to easily control the tone of the audio
signal. Each control has affect on the gain of an otherwise pre-defined filter. Making complex filter settings is not
necessary. Operation is straightforward and known from the 3-band tone controls in a mixer’s input channels.
Switch for scaling the amplitude axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or 50

dB (± 25 dB).
0 dB -12...+12 BASS changes (amplifies or attenuates) the gain of a Bass filter

dB (Low-Shelving filter). The filter’s cut-off frequency is fixed to
666,6 Hz. The desired amplification or attenuation can be set by
directly entering the desired value or by using the rotary
control.

0 dB -12...+12 MID changes (amplifies or attenuates) the gain of a Mid-EQs

dB (Peak-Dip-Filter). The filter’s center frequency is fixed to 1 kHz.
The desired amplification or attenuation can be set by directly
entering the desired value or by using the rotary control.
0 dB -12...+12 TREBLE changes (amplifies or attenuates) the gain of a Treble

dB filter (High-Shelving-Filter). The filter’s cut-off frequency is fixed
to 1,5 kHz. The desired amplification or attenuation can be set
by directly entering the desired value or by using the rotary
control.

TONE GENERATOR
Operating the DSP block Tone Generator is possible in two different ways.
Sine mode generates a sine signal with a constant frequency. Sweep mode
generates a one-time or periodical sine sweep over a specific frequency
range.
The SINE button puts the tone generator in constant sine signal
mode.

The SWEEP button puts the tone generator in sine sweep mode.
The constant frequency of a sine signal.
The start frequency of a sine sweep.
The stop frequency of a sine sweep.
The time in seconds, it takes the sine signal to sweep through the
range marked by the start frequency and the stop frequency.

Activates the periodical repetition of a sine sweep.
-35 dB -60... 0 dB Fader for setting the signal level.
-35.0 dBu -60...0 dBu or Entering the signal level is possible in dBu or V.
or 0.001...0.775
0.014 V V
Switch for activating or deactivating the tone generator.
ASCII Control Protocol

RS-232 SETTINGS
The RS-232 interface of the device is preconfigured for full duplex operation. Set values are:
Parameter Setting
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1

The command string "*** <device> command mode entered ***" is sent to RS-232 once the device is powered up and
has completed its boot sequence. The RS-232 interface is now ready for communication.

ETHERNET SETTINGS
Factory set values of the Ethernet port are:
Parameter Setting
IP address 192.168.1.100
Network mask 255.255.255.0

Standard gateway 192.168.1.1
Telnet port 23
Username netmax
Password netmax

A Telnet session can be established with an application such as Windows HyperTerminal. Log in requires the username
and password (default values given in above table) after which the ASCII Control Protocol can be started with the
command "parser". If there is already another ASCII Control Protocol up and running, a new ASCII Control Protocol
session can be forced by using the command "parser -f". The command string "*** <device> command mode entered
***" will be displayed when the ASCII Control Protocol has started successfully. The device is now ready for ASCII
Control Protocol communication.

A simple ASCII string protocol, which is referred to as ASCII Control Protocol is implemented in the device. Commands
are organized in a tree structure with up to 5 levels. The slash "/" or a space " " can be used for separation. The
question mark "?" can be utilized to query parameter settings or commands of the corresponding level. To step down
one level you have to enter "..". Use "/" to get back to level 1.

Commands for RS-232 communication
Read
Write Values Description
/COMM /LINEFEED R/W ON, OFF Linefeed state for RS-232 communication
/PROMPT R/W ON, OFF Prompt state for RS-232 communication
/ECHO R/W ON, OFF Echo state for RS-232 communication
/LOG /state R/W ALL_ON, Log state for RS-232 communication

COMMANDS_ON, OFF
/CLEAR execute none Deletes the existing log file
/PRINT execute none Displays the existing log file
/SAVE execute none Saves the log to a file "parser.log" in

directory /flash/log

Commands for CAN-BUS communication
Read
/PARAM /CAN /MONITOR /VALUE R error! (unknown Input or output channel of

channel), amplifier (with CAN address
INPUT_A RCM: X, X) currently selected for
INPUT_B RCM: monitor bus
X,OUTPUT_A
RCM:X,
OUTPUT_B RCM:
X
/SCANSTATE /VALUE R SCAN_FAILED, State of CAN-BUS after scan

SCAN_READY
/FUNCTIONS /CAN_RESET exec none Reset of CAN-BUS
/CAN_SCAN exec none Scan CAN-BUS for new devices
/SET_BAUD_ exec 10, 20, 63, 125, Set new Baud rate of the
ALL 250, 500 device and all devices
connected to the CAN-BUS
/SET_ exec input_a, input_b, Selects Monitor Bus of a

MONITOR output_a, remote amplifier
output_b; 1-250

Commands for system queries
Read
/PARAM /LOCAL / /VALUE R Device temperature in degree Celsius

CHASSISTEMP
/FANSPEED /VALUE R/W 0, 1, 2, 3 Fan speed (0 = off, 1 = slow, 2 = mid,

3= fast)
/GPIANALOG / R 0, 1 State of GPI using analog circuit

IDX1...IDX4
/GPIDIGITAL / R 0, 1 State of GPI using digital circuit

IDX1...IDX4
/GPO / R/W 0, 1 State of GPO (0 = open, 1 = closed)

IDX1...IDX3
/ / R 0, 1 State of remote device (0 = OK, 1 =

REMOTEFAUL IDX1...IDX1 does not answer)
T 00
/ / R 0, 1 State of condition (0 = false, 1 = true)

CONDRESULT IDX1...IDX1
00

/ / R 0, 1 State of Masterfault of remote device

REMOTEMAST IDX1...IDX1 (0 = not set, 1 = set)
ERFAULT 00
/USERFAULT / R/W 0, 1 Status of user faults

IDX1...IDX8

Commands for CobraNet
Read
/ / / /VALUE R 0, 1 Shows if the device is Conductor in

PARA COBRA CONDUCTOR CobraNet
M NET STATUS
/ /VALUE R/W 0...255 Conductor priority in CobraNet

CONDUCTOR
PRIORITY
/RXBUNDLE / R/W 0...65535 Number of received Bundle

IDX1...IDX
4
/ / R/W max. 16 Name of received Bundle

RXBUNDLENA IDX1...IDX character
ME 4 s
/ / R/W max. 16 Name of channels of received Bundles

RXCHANNELN IDX1...IDX character
AME 32 s
/RXCLIP / R 0, 1 Clipping LED of channels of received

IDX1...IDX Bundles
32
/RXMUTE / R/W 0, 1 Mute of channels of received Bundles

IDX1...IDX
32
/RXSIGNAL / R 0, 1 Signal LED of channels of received

IDX1...IDX Bundles
32
/RXSTATUS / R 0, 1 Status of received Bundle (0 = NOT

IDX1...IDX RECEIVED, 1 = ACTIVE)
4
/SYSNAME /VALUE R/W max. 60 Name of device in CobraNet

character
s
/TXBUNDLE / R/W 0...65535 Number of sent Bundle

IDX1...IDX
4

/ / R/W max. 16 Name of sent Bundle

TXBUNDLENA IDX1...IDX character
ME 4 s
/ / R/W max. 16 Name of channels of sent Bundles

TXCHANNELN IDX1...IDX character
AME 32 s
/TXCLIP / R 0, 1 Clipping LED of channels of sent

IDX1...IDX Bundles
32
/TXMUTE / R/W 0, 1 Mute of channels of sent Bundles

IDX1...IDX
32
/TXSIGNAL / R 0, 1 Signal LED of channels of sent Bundles

IDX1...IDX
32

Commands for AI-1 Module
Read Write
Values Description
/ /DS / / /VALUE R/W 0...12 Linking of inputs (Linked-Button).

PARA P ANALO CHANNELINF 7 Binary representation of number
M GIN_x O is equivalent to pressed Linked-
Buttons.
/GAIN / R/W -80...2 Gain of input

IDX1...IDX 0
8, ALL
/MUTE / R/W 0, 1 0 = not muted, 1 = muted

IDX1...IDX
8, ALL
/POLARITY / R/W 0, 1 0 = normal, 1 = inverted

IDX1...IDX
8, ALL
/NAME / R/W max. Input name

IDX1...IDX 16
8, ALL charac
ters
/RAMPTIME / R/W 0.001. Ramping Time of input (seconds)

IDX1...IDX ..20
8, ALL

/ / R/W 20...2 Frequency of pilot tone to detect

PILOTDETECT IDX1...IDX 0000
.FREQ 8, ALL
/ /VALUE R 0x00... Status of pilot tone detection of

PILOTDETECT 0xFF all inputs (1 = pilot tone detected,
.FLAG 0 = pilot tone not detected). The
last of the four hexadecimal
values corresponds in binary
representation to the 8 inputs.
/ /VALUE R 0x00... Activation of pilot tone detection

PILOTDETECT 0xFF of all inputs. The last of the four
.ENABLE hexadecimal values corresponds
in binary representation to the 8
inputs.

Commands for MI-1 Module
Read
/ /DS / /GAIN / R/W -80...18 Gain of input

PARA P ANALOGMI IDX1...IDX
M CIN_x 8, ALL

IDX1...IDX
8, ALL

IDX1...IDX
8, ALL
/ /VALUE R/W Linking of inputs (Linked-

CHANNELIN Button). Binary representation
FO of number is equivalent to
pressed Linked-Buttons.
/NAME / R/W max. 16 Input name

IDX1...IDX character
8, ALL s
/RAMPTIME / R/W 0.001... Ramping Time of input

IDX1...IDX 20 (seconds)
8, ALL
/MIC.LINE / R/W 0, 1 Selects input level (0 = Mic level,

IDX1...IDX 1 = Line level)
8, ALL

/ / R/W 0, 1 Phantom Power (+48 V) of input

MIC.PHANP IDX1...IDX (0 = off, 1 = on)
OWER 8, ALL
/MIC.GAIN / R/W 0...10 Microphone gain in steps of

IDX1...IDX 6dB.
8, ALL

Commands for AO-1 Module
Read
/ /DS / /GAIN / R/W -80...18 Gain of outputs

PARA P ANALOG IDX1...IDX
M OUT_x 8, ALL

IDX1...IDX
8, ALL
/ / R/W 0, 1 0 = normal, 1 = inverted

POLARI IDX1...IDX
TY 8, ALL
/NAME / R/W max. 16 Output name

IDX1...IDX characters
8, ALL
/ / R/W 0.001...20 Ramping Time of output

RAMPTI IDX1...IDX (seconds)
ME 8, ALL

Commands for Automatic Gain Control (AGC)
Read Write
Values Description
/ /DSP / /BYPASS /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 =

PARA AGC_ Bypass activated
M x
/ /VALUE R/W 300...20000 GAIN DECREASE time in ms

DECREASE
_TIME
/GAIN /VALUE R/W -6...18 Target Level in dB
/ /VALUE R -30...30 Current Gain change as full scale

GAINREDU value (32 bit)
CTION Transform given value into dB
by: 20 log (0x7FFFFF/ value)
/HOLD /VALUE R/W 50...60000 Hold time in ms

/ /VALUE R/W 30...20000 GAIN INCREASE time in ms

INCREASE_
TIME
/KNEE /VALUE R/W 0.1...15 Knee in dB
/RATIO /VALUE R/W 1...15 Compressor ratio
/RELEASE /VALUE R/W 300...20000 Release time in ms
/ /VALUE R/W -30...0 Threshold in dB (example: -8.5)

THRESHOL
D

Commands for Ambient Noise Control (ANC)
Read
/ /DS / / /VALUE R 0, 1 0 = Ambient level below

PARA P ANC_x AMBABOV Threshold, 1 = Ambient level
M ETH- above Threshold
RESH
/BYPASS /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 =

Bypass activated
/ /VALUE R/W 10...3000 Time for GAIN DECREASE in ms

DECREAS
ETIME
/ /VALUE R/W 0, 1 Freeze current gain values (0 =

FREEZEG variable, 1 = freeze)
AIN
/GAIN / / R/W -60...0 Gain of inputs

IDX1...I VALU
DXn E
/ /VALUE R/W -29.9...30 Maximum gain of output signals

GAINMAX
/GAINMIN /VALUE R/W -30...29.9 Minimum gain of output signals
/GAINVU / / R Input level

IDX1...I VALU Transform given value into dB
DXn E by: 20 log (256 * value /
0x7FFFFF) + 10 log (2)
/ /VALUE R/W 10...3000 Time for GAIN INCREASE in ms

INCREASE
TIME

/LINK /VALUE R/W 0...7 Linking of inputs (Linked-

Button). Binary representation
of number is equivalent to

IDX1...I
DXn
/RATIO /VALUE R/W 0.3...4 Ratio of program level change to

ambient level change
/ /VALUE R/W -35...21 Threshold in dB

THRESHO
LD
/VU /VALUE R/W Gain reduction as full scale value

(32 bit) Transform given value
into dB by: 20 log (0x7FFFFF/
value)

Commands for Auto mixer
Read
/ /DSP /AUTO /AUTO / R/W 0, 1 Automatic mixing of inputs

PARA MIXER_x IDX1...I
M DXn
/CLIP / R 0, 1 Clipping LED of inputs and

IDX1...I outputs
DXn
/ /VALUE R/W 0, 1 Freeze gain of auto mixer

FREEZEG
AIN
/GAININ / R/W -80...0 Gain of inputs

IDX1...I
DXn
/GAINOUT /VALUE R/W -80...18 Gain of output
/ / R/W 0, 1 Polarity of inputs (0 = normal, 1

POLARITY IDX1...I = inverted)
IN DXn
/ /VALUE R/W 0, 1 Polarity of output (0 = normal, 1

POLARITY = inverted)
OUT

/MUTEIN / R/W 0, 1 Mute of inputs (0 = not muted, 1

IDX1...I = muted)
DXn
/ /VALUE R/W 0, 1 Mute of output (0 = not muted, 1

MUTEOUT = muted)
/PRIO /VALUE R/W 0...n Number of input with high

priority
/ /VALUE R/W 1...20000 Time constant (in ms) of faders

RAMPTIM
E
/SIGNAL / R 0, 1 Signal LED of inputs and outputs

IDX1...I
DXn
/SOLO / R/W 0, 1 Solo of inputs

IDX1...I
DXn
/ /VALUE R/W 1...2000 Time constant (in ms) for

TAUDIVD weighting rate of input signal
UGAN level, based on total level.
/ /VALUE R/W 1...2000 Time constant (in ms) for rate of

TAUDIVFI level change.
NAL
/ /VALUE R/W 1...2000 Time constant (in ms) of RMS

TAURMSD measurement of dugan-gain
UGAN weighted input signals.
/ /VALUE R/W 1...2000 Time constant (in ms) of RMS

TAURMSI measurement of input signals.
N
/VUIN / R Input level

IDX1...I Transform given value into dB
DXn by: 20 log (256 * value /
0x7FFFFF) + 10 log (2)
/VUOUT /VALUE R value1 Output level

value2 Transform given values into dB
by: 20 log (value1 / 0x7FFFFF) +
value2

Commands for Compressor
Read
/ /DSP / /ATTACK / R/W 5...150 Attack time in ms

PARA COMPRESS VALU
M OR_x E
/BYPASS / R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 =

VALU Bypass activated
E
/ / R Gain reduction as full scale value

GAINREDU VALU (32 bit) Transform given value
CTION E into dB by: 20 log (0x7FFFFF/
value)
/ / R/W -18...6 Gain of compressor output in

MAKE_UP_G VALU dB, not available for RCM24
AIN E compressor
/RATIO / R/W 1...100 Compressor ratio

VALU
E
/RELEASE / R/W 10...1000 Release time in ms

VALU
E
/SOFTKNEE / R/W 0...20 Soft knee in dB, not available for

VALU RCM24 compressor
E
/ / R/W -9...21 Threshold in dB

THRESHOL VALU
D E

Commands for Delay
Read
/ /DSP / /BYPASS /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 =

PARA DELA Bypass activated
M Y_x

/ /VALUE R/W -20...60 Temperature in degree Celsius

TEMPERA
TURE
/VALUE /VALUE R/W einheitenabh Delay time including unit. The

äng ig maximum delay time depends on
the used DSP block. Available
units are ms (millisecond), smp
(samples), ft (Foot), inch, m
(meter), cm (centimeter), us
(microsecond) and s (seconds).
Example: 588.235 ms

Commands for DI-1 Module
Read
/ /DSP / /CHANNELINFO /VALUE R/W 0...127 Linking of inputs (Linked-

PARA DIGITAL Button). Binary representation
M IN_x of number is equivalent to
pressed Linked-But- tons.
/ / R 0...FF Channel mode of input signal 0 =

CHANNELMOD IDX1...IDX Not indicated,
E 4 1 = 2 channel,
2 = 1 channel,
3 = primary/secondary,
4 = stereo,
5 / 6 = reserved for user
applications,
7 = SCDSR,
8 = SCDSR (stereo left), 9 =
SCDSR (stereo right), FF
=Multichannel
/ / R First five bytes of Channel

CHANNELSTAT IDX1...IDX Status Block.
USBYTES 40
/ / R 0...3 Clock accuracy of input signal

CLOCKACCURA IDX1...IDX (Consumer mode only)
CY 4 0 = Level 2 (+/- 1000 ppm)
1 = Level 3 (variable pitch)
2 = Level 1(+/- 50 ppm, high
accuracy)
3 = reserved
/COPYRIGHT / R 0, 1 Copyright bit of input signal

IDX1...IDX
4

/ERROR / R 00...FF State of signal transmission

IDX1...IDX (Bit[2]
4 = Confidence Error, Bit[3] =
Validity, Bit[5] = Channel Status
Block CRC)
/EMPHASIS / R 0, 1 Emphasis bit of input signal

IDX1...IDX
4
/GAIN / R/W -80...18 Gain of input

IDX1...IDX
8, ALL
/LOCK / R 0, 1 Synchronization of DI-1 input to

IDX1...IDX input signal (0 = not
4 synchronized, 1
= synchronized)
/ / R/W 0, 1 Low group delay option in

LOWGROUPDE IDX1...IDX interpolation filter of sample
LAY 4 rate converter
/MODE / R 0, 1 Mode of signal transmission 0 =

IDX1...IDX consumer mode
4 1 = Professional mode

IDX1...IDX
8, ALL

IDX1...IDX
8, ALL
/NAME / R/W max. 16 Input name

IDX1...IDX charact
8, ALL ers
/ORIGINAL / R 0, 1 Original bit of input signal

IDX1...IDX
4
/RAMPTIME / R/W 0.001... Ramping Time of faders (in

IDX1...IDX 20 seconds)
8, ALL
/SAMPLERATE / R Sample rate of input signal

IDX1...IDX
8
/SRCBYPASS / R/W 0, 1 Sample Rate Converter Bypass

IDX1...IDX (0 = Bypass not activated, 1 =
4 Bypass activated)

/ / R Source word length of input

SRCWORDLEN IDX1...IDX signal (professional mode only)
GTH 4
/ / R/W 1...3 Source selection of input signal

SOURCESELEC IDX1...IDX 1 = AES/EBU,
T 4 2 = S/P DIF,
3 = OPTICAL

Commands for DO-1 Module
Read Write
Values Description
/ /DSP / / /VALUE R/W 0...127 Linking of outputs (Linked-

PARA DIGITALO CHANNEL Button). Binary representation
M UT_x INFO of number is equivalent to
/GAIN / R/W -80...18 Gain of output

IDX1...I
DX8,
ALL

IDX1...I
DX8,
ALL
/ / R/W 0, 1 0 = normal, 1 = inverted

POLARITY IDX1...I
DX8,
ALL
/NAME / R/W max. 16 Output name

IDX1...I charact
DX8, ers
ALL
/ / R/W 0.001... Ramping Time of faders (in

RAMPTIM IDX1...I 20 seconds)
E DX8,
ALL

Commands for Ducker
Read Write
Values Description

PARA DUCKE VALU
M R_x E
/BYPASS / R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 = Bypass

VALU activated
E
/ / R/W -100...-6 Ducking level in dB

DUCKINGLE VALU
VEL E
/ / R Gain reduction as full scale value (32

GAINREDU VALU bit) Transform given value into dB by:
CTION E 20 log (0x7FFFFF/ value)
/HOLD / R/W 10...200 Hold time in ms

VALU 0
E
/LINEMUTE / R/W 0, 1 Mute of LINE input (0 = not muted, 1

VALU = muted)
E
/MICMUTE / R/W 0, 1 Mute of MIC input (0 = not muted, 1 =

VALU muted)
E
/MIXLINE / R/W -30...0 Gain of LINE input

VALU
E
/MIXMIC / R/W -30...0 Gain of MIC input

VALU
E

VALU
E
/ / R/W -15...21 Threshold in dB

THRESHOL VALU
D E

Commands for Expander
Read Write
Values Description

PARA EXPANDE VALUE
M R_x
/BYPASS / R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 = Bypass

VALUE activated
/ / R Gain reduction as full scale value (32

GAINRED VALUE bit)
UC- TION Transform given value into dB by: 20
log (0x7FFFFF/ value)
/ / R/W -18...6 Gain of compressor output in dB, not

MAKE_UP VALUE available for RCM24 compressor
_GAIN
/RATIO / R/W 1...10 Compressor ratio

VALUE

VALUE
/ / R/W -84...-25 Threshold in dB

THRESHO VALUE
LD

Commands for FIR Filter
Read Write
Values Description
/ /DSP /FIR_x /BYPASS /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 =

PARA Bypass activated
M
/FS /VALUE R 20...2000 Sampling frequency of filter

0
/ /VALUE R 20...2000 Frequency of high pass

HIPASS.FREQ 0
/ /VALUE R 20...2000 Frequency of low pass

LOPASS.FRE 0
Q
/MAXORDER /VALUE R Maximum order of filter
/ORDER /VALUE R Order of loaded filter
/SLOPE /VALUE R 21...100 Slope of filter (in dB)
/TYPE /VALUE R 0 = Low Type of filter

Pass, 1 =
High
Pass, 2 =
Band
Pass

Commands for DSP Presets
Read Write
Values Description
/ /DSP / /DELETE_PRESET exec 1...60 Delete preset

PARA FUNCTIO
M NS
/LOAD_PRESET exec 1...60 Load preset
/ exec 1...60 Read description of preset

PRESET_INFO_READ
/PRESET_SET_DESC W 1...60 Set description of preset (max.

descrip- 32 characters)
tion
/PRESET_SET_PROP W 1...60 Set mute/unmute of preset

MUTE/ during load
NOMUTE

/SAVE_PRESET 1...60 Save preset with selectable

NOCOMP compression and mute/ unmute
/ during load
WITHCO
MP
MUTE/
NOMUTE
/STARTUP_PRESET exec 1...60 Set preset as startup preset
/ /VALUE R 1...60 Currently active preset

ACTIVEPR
ESET

Commands for Gate
Read
/ /DSP / /ATTACK /VALUE R/W 5...150 Attack time in ms

PARA GATE_x
M

Bypass activated
/ /VALUE R Gain reduction as fullscale value

GAINREDUC (32 bit)
TION Transform value into dB by: 20
/ /VALUE R/W -18...6 Gain of output

MAKE_UP_G
AIN
/ /VALUE R/W -84...-25 Threshold in dB

THRESHOLD

Commands for graphical Equalizer (GEQ)
Read
/ /DSP / / /IDX1...IDXn R / W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 =

PARA GRAPHIC BYPASS Bypass activated
M EQ_x
/ /VALUE R/W 20...1000 Frequency of LF FILTER

LOWFR
EQ

/ /VALUE R/W 1000...20 Frequency of HF FILTER

HIGHFR 000
EQ
/GAIN /IDX1...IDXn R / W -12...12 Gain of filter. Index 1

corresponds to the LF FIL- TER,
index n corresponds to the HF
FILTER.
/ /IDX1 R/W 0.4...40 Quality of LF FILTER

QUALIT
Y
/IDX2 R/W 3...10 Quality of filter 1 to n
/IDX3 R/W 0.4...40 Quality of HF FILTER
/SLOPE /IDX1 R/W 1 = 6dB/ Slope of LF FILTER

Oct,
2=
12dB/Oct
/IDX2 R/W 1 = 6dB/ Slope of HF FILTER

Oct,
2=
12dB/Oct
/TYPE /IDX1 R/W 0 = PEQ, Type des LF FILTER

1=
Loshelv,
2=
Hishelv,
3=
Hipass,
4=
Lopass
/IDX2 R/W for future use
/IDX3 R/W 0 = PEQ, Type of HF FILTER

1=
Loshelv,
2=
Hishelv,
3=
Hipass,
4=
Lopass

Commands for Limiter
Read
/ /DSP / /ATTACK /VALUE R/W 0...50 Attack time in ms

PARA LIMITER_x
M

Bypass activated
/ /VALUE R Gain reduction as full scale value

GAINREDU (32 bit)
CTION Transform value into dB by: 20

THRESHOL
D

Commands for Loudspeaker Controller
Read
/ /DSP / /CHn / /VALUE R/W 5...50 Attack time in ms.

PARA LSPKBLO COMPRESSO
M CK_x R.ATTACK
/ /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not

COMPRESSO activated, 1 = Bypass
R.BYPASS activated
/ /VALUE R Gain reduction as full

COMPRESSO scale value (32 bit)
R.GAINREDU Transform value into
CTION dB by: 20 log
(0x7FFFFF/ value)
/ /VALUE R/W 1...8 Compressor ratio

COMPRESSO
R.RATIO
/COMPRES- /VALUE R/W 50...999 Release time in ms

SOR.RELEAS
E

COMPRESSO
R.THRESHOL
D


DELAY.BYPAS activated, 1 = Bypass
S activated
/EQ.BYPASS / R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not

IDX1...IDX activated, 1 = Bypass
6 activated
/EQ.FREQ / R/W 20...2000 Frequency of equalizer

IDX1...IDX 0 band in Hz.
6
/EQ.GAIN / R/W -18...12 Gain of equalizer band

IDX1...IDX in dB
6
/EQ.QUALITY / R/W 0.4...40 Quality of equalizer

IDX1...IDX band
6
/EQ.SLOPE / R/W 1, 2 Slope of equalizer

IDX1...IDX band (1 = 6dB/Oct, 2 =
6 12 dB/ Oct)
/EQ.TYPE / R/W 0...5 0 = PEQ, 1 = Loshelv, 2

IDX1...IDX =
6 Hishelv, 3 = Hipass, 4 =
Lopass, 5 = Allpass
/ /VALUE R/W 0...50 Attack time in ms

LIMITER.ATTA
CK

LIMITER.BYPA activated, 1 = Bypass
SS activated
/ /VALUE R Gain reduction as

LIMITER.GAIN fullscale value (32 bit)
REDUCTION Transform value into
dB by: 20 log
(0x7FFFFF/ value)
/ /VALUE R/W 10...999 Release time in ms

LIMITER.RELE
ASE

LIMITER.THR
ESHOLD
/XOVER.GAIN /VALUE R/W -30...6 Gain of crossover

ways.

/XOVER.MUTE /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = not muted, 1 =

muted
/ /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = normal, 1 =

XOVER.POLA inverted
RITY
/XOVER.LINK /VALUE R/W 2, 4, 6, 8 , Links the LOPASS and

10, HIPASS of adjacent
12, 14, 16 ways. Link-Numbers
are used for linking
two ways, for linking
more than two ways
the sum of the cor-
responding Link-
Numbers is used.
/ /VALUE R/W 20...2000 Frequency of lopass.

XOVER.LOPA 0
SS.FREQ
/ /VALUE R/W 0...17 Type of lopass.

XOVER.LOPA 0 = Off, 1 = 6dB-
SS.TYPE Butter-
worth, 2 = 12dB/Q0.5,
3
= 12dB/Q0.6, 4 =
12dB/ Q0.7, 5 = 12dB/
Q0.8, 6
= 12dB/Q1.0, 7 =
12dB/ Q1.2, 8 = 12dB/
Q1.5, 9
= 12dB/Q2.0, 10 =
12dB-Bessel, 11 =
12dB-Butterworth, 12
=
12dB-Linkwitz, 13 =
18dB-Bessel, 14 =
=
24dB-Bessel, 16 =
= 24dB-Linkwitz

/ /VALUE R/W 20...2000 Frequency of hipass.

XOVER.HIPAS 0
S.FREQ
/ /VALUE R/W 0...17 Type of hipass.

XOVER.HIPAS 0 = Off, 1 = 6dB-
S.TYPE Butter-
worth, 2 = 12dB/Q0.5,
3
= 12dB/Q0.6, 4 =
12dB/ Q0.7, 5 = 12dB/
Q0.8, 6
= 12dB/Q1.0, 7 =
12dB/ Q1.2, 8 = 12dB/
Q1.5, 9
= 12dB/Q2.0, 10 =
12dB-Bessel, 11 =
=
12dB-Linkwitz, 13 =
18dB-Bessel, 14 =
=
24dB-Bessel, 16 =
= 24dB-Linkwitz

Commands for Matrix Mixer
Read
/ /DSP / /CONNECTCROSSPOINT / R/W 0, 1 Connection of crosspoint.

PARA MATRI IDX1...IDX Crosspoints are
M X_x c numbered column by
column from top left to
bottom right. (0 = not
connected, 1 =
connected)
/GAINCROSSPOINT / R/W -80...0 Gain of crosspoint.

IDX1...IDX Crosspoints are
c numbered column by
column from top left to
bottom right.
/GAININ / R/W -80...0 Gain of inputs 1 to n of

IDX1...IDX matrix
n

/GAINOUT / R/W -80...0 Gain of output 1 to m of

IDX1...IDX matrix
m
/MUTEIN / R/W 0, 1 Mute of input 1 to n of

IDX1...IDX matrix
n
/MUTEOUT / R/W 0, 1 Mute of output 1 to m of

IDX1...IDX matrix
m

Commands for Mixer
Read Write
Values Description
/ /DSP / /CLIP /IDX1...IDXn R 0, 1 Clipping LED of inputs

PARA MIXER_x and outputs
M
/GAININ /IDX1...IDXn R/W -80...0 Gain of inputs
/ /IDX1 R/W -80...18 Gain of output L (only for

GAINOUT stereo mixer)
/IDX2 R/W -80...18 Gain of output R
/LINK /VALUE R/W 0x00...0x Linking of inputs (Linked-

FF Button). Binary
representation of number
is equivalent to pressed
Linked-Buttons.
/MUTEIN /IDX1...IDXn R/W 0, 1 Mute of inputs (0 = not

muted, 1 = muted)
/ /IDX1 R/W 0, 1 Mute of output L (only for

MUTEOU stereo mixer)
T
/IDX2 R/W Mute of output R
/PAN /IDX1...IDXn R/W -50...+50 Pan of input (only for

stereo mixer, -50 = left,
+50 = right)
/ /IDX1...IDXn R/W 0, 1 0 = normal, 1 = inverted

POLARITY
/SIGNAL /IDX1...IDXn R 0, 1 Signal LED of inputs and

outputs
/SOLO /IDX1...IDXn R/W 0, 1 Solo of inputs

Commands for Noise Generator
Read Write
Values Description
/ /DSP /NOISE /ENABLE /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = off, 1 = on

PARA GENERATOR_
M x
/GAIN /VALUE R/W -60...0 Gain of noise in dB
/TYPE /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = white noise, 1 = pink

noise

Commands for parametric Equalizer (PEQ)
Read
/ /DSP / / / R/W 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 = Bypass

PARA PEQ_x BYPAS IDX1...IDXn activated
M S
/FREQ / R/W 20...20000 Frequency in Hz

IDX1...IDXn
/GAIN / R/W -18...12 Gain of equalizer band

IDX1...IDXn
/ / R/W 0.4...40 Quality of equalizer band

QUALIT IDX1...IDXn
Y
/SLOPE / R/W 1, 2 Slope of equalizer band (1 = 6dB/

IDX1...IDXn Oct, 2 = 12dB/Oct)
/TYPE / R/W 0,1,2,3,4,5 0 = PEQ, 1 = Loshelv, 2 = Hishelv, 3 =

IDX1...IDXn Hipass, 4 = Lopass, 5 = Allpass

Commands for Priority Matrix
Rea
d Values Description
Writ
e
/ /DS /PRIORITY / /IDX1...IDXn R/ see Connection of crosspoint. Crosspoints

PAR P MATRIX_x CONNECTPA W Descripti are numbered column by column from
AM GINGLINE on top left to bottom right. (0 = not
connected, 1 = connected)
/ /IDX1...IDXn R/ -80...0 Gain of crosspoint. Crosspoints are

GAINCROSS W numbered column by column from top
POINT left to bottom right.
/GAINOUT /IDX1...IDXm R / -80...0 Gain of outputs.

W
/MUTEIN /IDX1...IDXn R/ 0, 1 Mute of inputs (0 = not muted, 1 =

W muted)
/MUTEOUT /IDX1...IDXm R / 0, 1 Mute of outputs (0 = not muted, 1 =

W muted)
/ /IDX1...IDXn R/ 0...255 Priority of inputs

PRIORITYPA W
GINGLINE

Commands for Router
Rea
Writ
e
/ /DS / /ROUTING / R/ 0...n Connected crosspoint of output 1

PARA P ROUTER POINTS IDX1...IDX W to m of router
M _x m

Commands for Tone Control
Read
/PARAM /DS /TONE /GAIN / R/W -18...1 Gain of band

P CONTROL_x IDX1...IDX3 2

Commands for Tone generator
Read
/ /DS /TONE /ENABLE /VALUE R/W 0, 1 0 = off, 1 = on

PARA P GENERATOR_x
M
/FREQ /VALUE R/W 20...2000 Constant frequency (for

0 SINE mode)
/GAIN /VALUE R/W -60...0 Gain of generated tone
/SWEEPREP /VALUE R/W 0, 1 Selection of a single or

periodic sweep (0 = one
time, 1 = periodic)
/SWEEPSTART /VALUE R/W 20...2000 Lower (or upper)

0 frequency of sweep
/SWEEPSTOP /VALUE R/W 20...2000 Upper (or lower)

0 frequency of sweep
/SWEEPTIME /VALUE R/W 5...120 Time of sweep in seconds
/TYPE /VALUE R/W 0, 1 Selection of SINE or

SWEEP mode (0 = SINE, 1
= SWEEP)

Commands for Crossover
Rea
Writ
e
/PARAM /DS / /GAIN / R/ -30...6 Gain of crossover ways. Ways are

P XOVER IDX1...IDXn W numbered top-down.
_x (e.g. IDX1 = HIGH, IDX2 = MID, IDX3 =
LOW)
/ / R/ 20...2000 Frequency of hipass. Ways are

HIPASS.FR IDX1...IDXn W 0 numbered top-down.
EQ (e.g. IDX1 = HIGH, IDX2 = MID, IDX3 =
LOW)

/ / R/ 0...17 Type of hipass.

HIPASS.TY IDX1...IDXn W 0 = Off, 1 = 6dB-Butterworth, 2 =
PE 12dB/Q0.5, 3 =
12dB/Q0.6, 4 = 12dB/Q0.7, 5 =
12dB/Q0.8, 6 =
12dB/Q1.0, 7 = 12dB/Q1.2, 8 =
12dB/Q1.5, 9 =
12dB/Q2.0, 10 = 12dB-Bessel, 11 =
12dB-Butter- worth, 12 = 12dB-
Linkwitz, 13 = 18dB-Bessel, 14 =
18dB-Butterworth, 15 = 24dB-Bessel,
16 = 24dB- Butterworth, 17 = 24dB-
Linkwitz
/LINK /VALUE R/ 2, 4, 6, 8 , Links the LOPASS and HIPASS of

W 10, adjacent ways. Link- Numbers are
12, 14, 16 used for linking two ways, for linking
more than two ways the sum of the
corresponding Link-Numbers is used.
/ / R/ 20...2000 Frequency of lopass. Ways are

LOPASS.FR IDX1...IDXn W 0 numbered top-down.
EQ (e.g. IDX1 = HIGH, IDX2 = MID, IDX3 =
LOW)
/ / R/ 0...17 Type of lopass.

LOPASS.TY IDX1...IDXn W 0 = Off, 1 = 6dB-Butterworth, 2 =
PE 12dB/Q0.5, 3 =
12dB/Q0.6, 4 = 12dB/Q0.7, 5 =
12dB/Q0.8, 6 =
12dB/Q1.0, 7 = 12dB/Q1.2, 8 =
12dB/Q1.5, 9 =
12dB/Q2.0, 10 = 12dB-Bessel, 11 =
12dB-Butter- worth, 12 = 12dB-
Linkwitz, 13 = 18dB-Bessel, 14 =
18dB-Butterworth, 15 = 24dB-Bessel,
16 = 24dB- Butterworth, 17 = 24dB-
Linkwitz
/MUTE / R/ 0, 1 0 = not muted, 1 = muted

IDX1...IDXn W
/POLARITY / R/ 0, 1 0 = normal, 1 = inverted

IDX1...IDXn W

Commands for RCM-24
Rea
Writ
e
/ / / / /VALUE R 10, 20, Baud rate of CAN-BUS

PARA RCM2 COMM CANBAUD 63, 125,
M 4 ON RATE 250, 500
/ / R/ max. 30 Amplifier name

AMPNAM IDX1...IDX250 W character
E s
/CONFIG /VALUE R List of configured amplifiers
/POWER / R/ 0, 1 Switch amp ON / OFF or read out ON /

IDX1...IDX250 W OFF state (0 = off, 1 = on)
/ / R/ 1...127 Power-On-Delay in steps of 20ms. 0 sets

POWERD IDX1...IDX250 W the default value, dependent on amp
ELAY address.
/THERMO / R Current amplifier temperature in degree

IDX1...IDX250 Celsius
/ / R/ 20...150, Temperature limit and hysteresis for OVER

THERMO IDX1...IDX250 W 0...40 TEMPERATURE flag in degree Celsius
RANGE
/ / exec 1...8 Loads a amplifier preset. 1 = U01, 2 =

FUNCTI LOAD_PR "amps" U02,..., 8 = U08; "amps" is hexadecimal
ONS ESET representation of amps.
/ exec 1...8 Saves a amplifier preset. 1 = U01, 2 =

SAVEPRE „amps) U02,..., 8 = U08; "amps" is hexadecimal
SET representation of amps.
/INFO R Information about connected RCM-24

amplifiers
/INPA /NAME / R/ max. 30 Name of input A

IDX1...IDX250 W character
s
/ / R/ 0, 1 0 = Bypass not activated, 1 = Bypass

DELAYBY IDX1...IDX250 W activated
PASS
/ /
DELAYVAL IDX1...IDX250
UE

EQ1BYPA IDX1...IDX250 W activated
SS

/EQ1TYPE / R/ 0, 1 ,2, 3, 0 = PEQ, 1 = Loshelv, 2 = Hishelv, 3 =

IDX1...IDX250 W 4 Hipass, 4 = Lopass
/ / R/ 1, 2 Slope of equalizer 1 (1 = 6dB/Oct, 2 =

EQ1SLOP IDX1...IDX250 W 12dB/Oct)
E
/ / R/ 20...2000 Frequency of equalizer 1 in Hz

EQ1FREQ IDX1...IDX250 W 0
/EQ1GAIN / R/ -18...12 Gain of equalizer 1

IDX1...IDX250 W
/ / R/ 0.4...40 Quality of equalizer 1

EQ1QUAL IDX1...IDX250 W
ITY
/EQ2... (same as above, but for equalizer 2 to 5)
...
/EQ5...
/INPB ... (same as above, but for input B)
/OUTPA /NAME / R/ max. 30 Name of output A

IDX1...IDX250 W character
s
/LEVEL / R/ -128...6 Gain of output A

IDX1...IDX250 W
/ / R/ -30...6 Gain Trim (in dsp block Crossover)

TRIMLEVE IDX1...IDX250 W
L

DELAYBY IDX1...IDX250 W activated
PASS
/ /
DELAYVAL IDX1...IDX250
UE
/MUTE / R/ 0, 1 0 = not muted, 1 = muted

IDX1...IDX250 W
/ / R/ 0, 1 0 = normal, 1 = inverted
POLARITY IDX1...IDX250 W
/ROUTE / R/ 0, 1, 2 Routing of output A (0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = A+B)

IDX1...IDX250 W

COMPBY IDX1...IDX250 W activated
PASS

/ / R/ 0, 1, 2, 3, Compressor ratio (0 = 1/1, 1= 1/1.4, 2 =

COMPTYP IDX1...IDX250 W 4 1/2, 3 = 1/4, 4 = 1/8)
E
/ / R/ -30...0 Threshold of compressor in dB (-30

COMPTH IDX1...IDX250 W corresponds to -9 dB, 0 corresponds to
RESH +21 dB)
/ / R/ 0...99 Attack time of compressor in ms

COMPATT IDX1...IDX250 W
ACK
/ / R/ 10...999 Release time of compressor in ms

COMPRE IDX1...IDX250 W
LEASE

LIMITBYP IDX1...IDX250 W activated
ASS
/ / R/ -30...0 Threshold of limiter in dB (-30

LIMITTHR IDX1...IDX250 W corresponds to -9 dB, 0 corresponds to
ES +21 dB)
/ / R/ 10...999 Release time of limiter in ms

LIMITREL IDX1...IDX250 W
EASE
/ / R/ 0...17 0 = Off, 1 = 6dB-Butterworth, 2 = 12dB/

XOVERHIT IDX1...IDX250 W Q0.5, 3 = 12dB/Q0.6, 4 = 12dB/Q0.7, 5 =
YPE 12dB/Q0.8, 6 = 12dB/Q1.0, 7 = 12dB/
Q1.2, 8 = 12dB/Q1.5, 9 = 12dB/Q2.0, 10
= 12dB-Bessel, 11 = 12dB-Butterworth, 12
= 12dB-Linkwitz, 13 = 18dB-Bessel, 14
= 18dB-Butterworth, 15 = 24dB-Bessel,
16 = 24dB-Butterworth, 17 = 24dB-
Linkwitz
/ / R/ 20...2000 Frequency of crossover-hipass of output A

XOVERHIF IDX1...IDX250 W 0
REQ
/ / R/ 0...17 0 = Off, 1 = 6dB-Butterworth, 2 = 12dB/

XOVERLO IDX1...IDX250 W Q0.5, 3 = 12dB/Q0.6, 4 = 12dB/Q0.7, 5 =
TYPE 12dB/Q0.8, 6 = 12dB/Q1.0, 7 = 12dB/
Q1.2, 8 = 12dB/Q1.5, 9 = 12dB/Q2.0, 10
= 12dB-Bessel, 11 = 12dB-Butterworth, 12
= 12dB-Linkwitz, 13 = 18dB-Bessel, 14
= 18dB-Butterworth, 15 = 24dB-Bessel,
16 = 24dB-Butterworth, 17 = 24dB-
Linkwitz

/ / R/ 20...2000 Frequency of crossover-lopass of output A

XOVERLO IDX1...IDX250 W 0
FREQ

EQ1BYPA IDX1...IDX250 W activated
SS
/EQ1TYPE / R/ 0, 1, 2, 3, 0 = PEQ, 1 = Loshelv, 2 = Hishelv, 3 =

IDX1...IDX250 W 4, 5 Hipass, 4 = Lopass, 5 = Allpass
/ / R/ 1, 2 Slope of equalizer 1 (1 = 6dB/Oct, 2 =

EQ1SLOP IDX1...IDX250 W 12dB/Oct)
E
/ / R/ 20...2000 Frequency of equalizer 1 in Hz

EQ1FREQ IDX1...IDX250 W 0
/EQ1GAIN / R/ -18...12 Gain of equalizer 1

IDX1...IDX250 W
/ / R/ 0.4...40 Quality of equalizer 1

EQ1QUAL IDX1...IDX250 W
ITY
/EQ2... / (same as above, but for equalizer 2 to 5)

IDX1...IDX250
...
/EQ5...
/OUTPB ... (same as above, but for output B)

Commands for RCM-810
Read
/ /AMP / / /REVISION R Firmware version of RCM-810

PARA ADR1... COMM
M 250 ON
/POWER R/W 0, 1 Switch amp ON / OFF or read out ON /

OFF state (0 = off, 1 = on)
/STATEFLAGS R 0x00...0xF 32 Bit state flags of the amplifier in

F, hexadecimal format. 1: delayed power
0x00...0xF switch
F, 2: standby state
0x00...0xF 3: polling timeout from CAN master 4:
F, error in non volatile or tag memory 5:
0x00...0xF collection result of local stateflags
F 6: global state of monitored collect
stateflags 7: overtemp (in any channel)
8 to 16 : unused
17: routing switch 'bridged' instead of
'normal' 18: mode switch 'parallel'
instead of 'dual'
19 to 21: unused
22: thermal shutdown flag from atmel 23
to 26: unused
27: mains voltage warning 28 to 32:
unused
/COLLECT R 0x00...0xF Bit mask for state flag selection in

F, hexadecimal format.
0x00...0xF
F,
0x00...0xF
F,
0x00...0xF
F
/GLBERR R 0x00...0xF Global error state of external can

F, devices, 1 bit per CAN device (1=error,
0x00...0xF 0=OK)
F
/GPISTATE R 0, 1 per State of the two GPIs.

GPI The value 0 means „not activated“, so the
input is open (high impedance). The
value 1 means „activated“, so the input is
connected (low impedance) to signal
earth.

/GPOSTATE R/W 0, 1 per State of the two GPOs.

GPO The value 0 means „not activated“ (high
impedance). The value 1 means the
output is „activated“, so the output is
connected (low impedance) to signal
earth.
/MASTERERROR R 0, 1 Current COLLECTED ERROR STATE of

the RCM-810 (0
= not active, 1 = active)
/IN1...8 /NAME R max. 30 Description (name) of input channel

characters
/ /NAME R max. 30 Description (name) of output channel

OUT1... characters
8
/STATEFLAGS R 0x00...0xF 24 Bit state flags of the output channel in

0x00...0xF : SMPS reports overload
F, : amp reports excessive Hf level
0x00...0xF : low impedance load or short-circuit
F detect 4 : thermal protection active
5 : in general: protect-mode active 6 :
protection mute active
7 : amp output relay off 8 : unused
9 : protection gain reduction active 10
and 11: unused
12 : load value result valid 13 :
speakerload shorted 14 : speakerload
opened 15 : pilot not detected
: unused
: thermal headroom below minimum
/COLLECT 0x00...0xF Bit mask for state flag selection in

0x00...0xF
F,
0x00...0xF
F
/MUTE R/W 0, 1 0 = not muted, 1 = muted

Link-Numbers for linking adjacent ways of a crossover
Number of crossover ways 5 4 3 2 1
Link-Number 8 2
16 4

Hexadecimal representation of remote amplifiers connected to the device
CAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ... 246 247 248 249 250

Address
Decimal 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 ... 4 2 1 8 4
value
Example X X X X
Ox3A
Configuration via USB

Apart from the Ethernet network interface the N8000 also supports a USB interface. The USB driver is located in the
\IRIS-Net\Driver\USB Netmax Driver folder and must be installed before the USB interface can be used. The N8000 can
then be configured using the USB interface by selecting the Configuration via USB menu item in the Netmax menu of
IRIS-Net.

HINT: To avoid configuration problems when using the USB interface only one NetMax N8000 should be connected
at a time. The use of a USB hub to connect several N8000's simultaneously will result in device conflicts and is not
recommended.

Element Description
IP ADDRESS Displays the IP address of the N8000 Ethernet interface (factory default: 192.168.1.100).
To ensure trouble free communication with IRIS-Net each N8000 on the network must
have a unique IP address.
NETWORK MASK Setting and indication of the network mask for the Ethernet interface. (factory default:
255.255.255.0)

GATEWAY ADDRESS Setting and indication of the Standard Gateway for the Ethernet interface. (factory
default: 192.168.1.1)
MAC ADDRESS Displays the MAC address of the connected N8000. The MAC address of the N8000 can
also be found on a label attached to the rear panel of the device.
Get IP address from If the Ethernet network contains a DHCP server, it can be used to automatically and
DHCP server conveniently configure the N8000’s Ether- net interface.
NAME Internal IRIS-Net name of the N8000.
ACTIVE PRESET Name of the currently loaded preset. Changing presets is possible via the Preset Manager.
START-UP PRESET Name of the currently selected start-up preset. Changing presets is possible via the
Preset Manager.
FIRMWARE VERSION Displays the firmware version of the N8000.
Allows an Image File of the entire operating system configuration to be downloaded from
an N8000 to a PC. This function is typically used to create a backup of the N8000's
configuration but uploading the image file to other N8000's also provides a convenient
way to transfer settings to a number of identically configured devices.
Allows an Image File to be uploaded from a PC to an N8000. Typically used to restore a

previously saved backup file.
Opens the File Transfer dialog box used to transfer individual operating system files
between the N8000 and PC.

FILE TRANSFER
The File Transfer dialog window allows experienced users to transfer individual operating system files between the
N8000 and PC.

Caution!
File Transfer is an advanced operation which should only be carried out by experienced users
who are fully conversant with the N8000 file system. Deleting or replacing critical N8000
! operating system files can lead to malfunction and/or damage to the device. If in doubt DO NOT
ATTEMPT TO USE THIS FUNCTION!
Consequences

DM-1 Firmware Update

For updating the DM-1 Dante Network Module firmware the web interface of the module is used. Execute following
steps to update the firmware:
1. Connect the DM-1 to be updated to your PC via Ethernet.
2. Power on the N8000 or P 64.
3. Start the IRIS-Net application.
4. Drag & drop a N8000 or P 64 to the project and add a DM-1 module in the General dialog of the N8000 or P 64.
5. Open the Audio Net dialog and click on the UPDATE button. The web interface of the DM-1 is opened in your
browser.
HINT: If the web interface of the DM-1 does not open, go online with option “Send All to Selected Devices” to
set the DEVICE NAME of the DM-1. After this, press the UPDATE button again.
6. Click on the Upgrade Firmware button in the DM-1 Web Interface.

An open file dialog appears.
7. Open the folder /Firmware/DM-1 in the installation directory of IRIS-Net.
8. Select the file webupd-dlm-x-y-z.dnt (x, y and z are optional version numbers) and start the update process.
9. Power cycle the N8000 or P 64 after the update has finished.
10. Reload the DM-1 Web Interface in the browser after the power cycle.
13. Select the file DLM-failsave-update.dnt and start the update process.

16. Select the file NetMax_N8000-capability-update.dnt and start the update process.
17. Power cycle the N8000 or P 64 after the update has finished.
18. The DM-1 Dante Network Module can now be used.

HINT: The DM-1 Firmware Update fails if a DM-1 module with a firmware version older than V3.4.2 shall be updated
to the newest Version V3.4.3-RC2. A complete firmware update to V3.4.2 (including failsafe & capability image) has
to be done before the module is updated to the newest firmware version V3.4.3.
N8000 Browser Interface

The browser interface of the N8000’s integrated web server is part of IRIS-Net’s existing possibilities for configuring
and operating the N8000. The use of a current Internet Browser is recommended to access the N8000 browser
interface. The following Internet Browsers are qualified to fulfill this task:
– Microsoft Internet Explorer
– Mozilla Firefox (recommended)

HINT: Java Script and CSS have to be activated in the Internet Browser.

Enter the N8000’s IP-address in the Internet Browser of your choice to access the browser interface. The Login page
appears. The following table lists the default IP address (next to other information for configuring the network) of the
NetMax N8000 System Controller.
Parameter Value
IP address 192.168.1.100
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 192.168.1.1
DHCP deactivated

LOGIN
The browser interface login page allows users to enter username and associated password, where the factory-set pass-
word corresponds to the actual firmware version installed in the N8000 (as listed in the table below). Only one user at
a time will be able to access the N8000 browser interface..
Parameter Value
Username netmax
Passwort firmware < V0.17.0a1 nmuser
firmware >= V0.17.0a1 netmax


The main window System Settings appears upon entering the correct login information and pressing the Login button.
As shown in the screenshot below, a warning appears when you try to log in while another user already employs the
browser interface. Completing the login at this point will exclude (log out) any other user from the active session.

SYSTEM SETTINGS
The N8000 Browser Interface is divided into three main windows, System Settings, Task Manager and Administration.
Menu entries of the System Settings window are listed in the following table:
Menu entry Description
Network Setup Network configuration settings of the Ethernet port
Clock Setup Date/Time settings and automatic DST-switching
Error Management Error status of the N8000 and error types configuration
Heartbeat Timer Activating/Deactivating the Heartbeat Timer
RS-232 Setup Configuration of the two RS-232 ports
Event Logging Selecting the event types to be included in the Event Log

Network Setup
The Network Setup window allows the configuration of the N8000’s Ethernet port.
The following table shows the default network configuration of the N8000:
Parameter Value
IP address 192.168.1.100
Gateway 192.168.1.1
DHCP deactivated

Clock Setup
The Clock Setup page allows setting the date and time of the N8000’s system clock. When enabling automatic DST-
switching you also have to specify two dates on which the time will be shifted. Whether adjusting the clock takes place
when enabling automatic DST-switching depends on the current date and the set switching dates.

HINT: CEST - Central European Summer (Daylight Saving) Time - starts on the last Sunday in March when at 2:00
AM CET clocks are forwarded one hour to 3:00 AM CEST. CEST ends on the last Sunday in October when at 3:00
AM CEST clocks are set back one hour to 2:00 AM CET.


Element Description
Adjustment time Specifies the point in time at which the clock is forwarded when DST starts. When
DST ends, the clock is set back to this time value.
Adjustment amount Specifies the period of time by which the clock is shifted at the begin/end of DST.
Adjust to DST (move clock Specifies the date on which, at the specified Adjustment Time and by the specified
forward) Adjustment Amount, automatic STANDARD-to-DST shifting takes place.
Adjust to Normal Time (move Specifies the date on which automatic DST-to-STANDARD shifting takes place. Time
clock back) shifts back by the specified Adjustment Amount to the specified Adjustment Time.

Error Management
The Error Management page shows an actual overview of all types of NetMax N8000 errors. The current status for each
type of error is displayed. Setting On and Hold options is possible.
Option Description
On The FAULT-LED on the N8000’s front panel (see also Collected Error State) signals any occurrence of errors
for which the On option has been selected. In addition, all errors are logged with date and time stamps in
the N8000 Log File.
Hold The signaling of errors for which the Hold option has been selected is not reset, even if they occur only
temporarily. This option is especially useful for detecting sporadic network errors.

Master Fault
Error Description
Collected Error State The FAULT-LED on the front panel of the N8000 lights at the occurrence of this error.
Audio Processing General DSP fault, please refer to the table DSP Faults for further detail
Remote Amplifiers General Remote Amplifier fault, please refer to the table RCM Faults for further detail
CobraNet Error within the CobraNet-System (CM-1)
DPM 4000 The DPM 4000 connected to the RS-232 port cannot be accessed
CAN Bus General CAN Bus error, please refer to the table RCM Faults for further detail
Slave Devices A Remote Device signals an error or cannot be accessed
User Fault The Error Code of at least one User Fault has been set to ≠ 0
Watchdog from Master The Heartbeat Timer‘s time limit has been exceeded
AD Converter Malfunction in the A/D converter of control inputs (GPI)
Supply Voltages Error in the N8000’s internal power supply
GPI The input voltage of a control input (GPI) is to low/high
RS-232 Ports A unit connected to the RS-232 shows a malfunction
Configuration Data Memory/Configuration data error, please refer to tables DSP Faults and RCM Faults for
Fault further detail
Hardware Hardware Configuration fault in the N8000, please refer to table DSP Faults for further detail
Configuration
Input Supervision Fault in Pilot Tone Detection

(PLT)
Temperature N8000 thermal overload

Audio Interface Faults
Error Description
Boot Booting the DSP system failed, Audio Processing is not possible. Please refer to the
correspondent Log File entries
Delay RAM Delay RAM fault. Audio Processing using the concerned RAM areas is not possible. Please
refer to the correspondent Log File entries
Watchdog One processor of the DSP system signals the occurrence of an error. Please refer to the
correspondent Log File entries
Pilot Tone Detection At least one of the pilot tone detections in the N8000’s DSP configuration is not able to
detect the pilot signal
R/W Base Config Error while reading or writing the DSP Base Configuration
R/W Config Error while reading or writing the DSP Configuration
Invalid Config Unable to process invalid DSP Configuration
R/W Preset Error while reading or writing a DSP Preset
Invalid Preset Unable to process an invalid DSP Preset
Incompatible Preset Selected DSP Preset and current DSP Configuration are not compatible
OS Memory An error occurred when the operating system of the N8000 tried to access the memory
HW Config Slot 1 The DSP configuration of Audio Slot 1 does not represent the actual hardware configuration
HW Config Ext. Slot The DSP configuration requires an extension board connected to the extensions port, but
there is no board connected
HW Config Cobranet The DSP configuration requires a CobraNet board installed in the network module slot, but
there is no board installed
Cobranet Interface An error occurred during communication with the CM-1 interface

Cobranet Watchdog A hardware or software error causes a reset of the CM-1
Cobranet Sync Synchronizing the DSP system with CobraNet is not possible
Cobranet General System fault in the CM-1 module
Cobranet Receive An error occurred while receiving data from CobraNet.
Cobranet Transmit An error occurred while sending data via CobraNet.
Cobranet Audio Mute Audio output has been muted, because assuring correct transmission was in question.
Cobranet Fatal Error A fatal error occurred in the CM-1

CAN Interface Faults
Error Description
CAN Failure CAN self-testing was not successful. The CAN-Bus does not function.
CAN Bus OFF The CAN-Bus is in the "Bus OFF" state.
CAN Bus Passive The CAN-Bus is in "Passive" mode.
Remote Amplifier Configuration The RCM configuration does not represent the RCMs that are actually connected.
Remote Amplifier Fault Collected Error for at least one RCM has been set.
Config File Fault An error occurred while reading the Configuration File.

Heartbeat Timer
If the Heartbeat Timer of a N8000 (from here on referred to as "N8000 slave unit") has been activated, another N8000
(from here on referred to as "N8000 master unit") has to monitor/poll the slave unit. Therefore, it is necessary to enter
the N8000 slave unit in the N8000 master unit’s list of Remote Devices, so that the N8000 master unit periodically
sends a request via Ethernet which the N8000 slave unit has to answer. The N8000 slave unit signals a Heartbeat Fault
whenever the periodic request has not been received while the N8000 server, on the other hand, signals a Remote
N8000 Fault.


RS-232 Setup
The two RS-232 ports of a N8000 can be used to monitor other devices, for sending and receiving commands and for
the connection of a ProMatrix/ProAnnounce DPM 4000.

HINT: Simultaneous utilization of the two RS-232 ports as Command parser and DPM4000 Interface is not possible.

If the Error check of connected device configuration is selected for one of the RS-232 ports, the user can use the
corresponding Configure button to open the Error Check Parameters window to set interface transmission method and
polling parameters.



If the user selects the configuration DPM 4000 Interface for one of the RS-232 ports, the user can use the
corresponding Configure button to open the DPM 4000 Parameters window. Connecting the N8000 to a ProMatrix/
ProAnnounce DPM 4000 allows setting nodes of a N8000’s paging matrix from the DPM 4000. Defining call inputs is
limited to a maximum of four call inputs per N8000.
Element Description
Zone Offset specifies the first DPM 4000 calling zone in which the paging matrix begins in the
respective matrix row. The entered value has to be in the range of 1 and 100 because the

maximum number of possible calling zones is 100.
Zone Width defines how many consecutive nodes of the corresponding matrix row a DPM 4000
can access. DPM 4000 calling zones to be served by a paging matrix need to be numbered in

consecutive order. The entered value has to be in the range of 1 and 32 because the maximum
number of nodes included in a row of a priority matrix is 32.

The Object ID specifies the DSP object of the N8000 to be accessed. It is identical for all call
inputs of a single paging matrix. However, when using a variety of matrixes, the Object ID has to

be different for each matrix. Find the Object ID via Modify Properties --> DSP. Priority
Matrix_x.Connect Paging Line OID of the DSP block Priority Matrix.
This parameter defines the paging matrix input, i.e. the matrix row, which will be used as call
input. The entered value has to be in the range of 1 and 32 because a priority matrix can include
a maximum of 32 rows.
Enter the number of rows of the priority matrix.
Enter the number of columns of the priority matrix.
This parameter defines which types of audio signals (DPM 4000 internal and external) will trigger
a specific input of the paging matrix.

Telnet Setup
The Telnet Setup page allows activating the telnet connection of the device. To activate the telnet connection select
the checkbox “Accept Telnet Connections”, then click Save Settings.


The Set Telnet Password dialog appears. Enter a password and click Set Password.
Notice!
A minimum password length of 8 characters is strongly recommended.


After a reboot of the device you can connect via Telnet.

Event Logging
The Event Logging page allows specifying which types of events will be written to the Log File.
– Problems (errors) that occurred in the NetMax system and
– System status or change in state messages are referred to as events. Event types can be selected in two different
ways: by event level or by event facility, where the latter describes a specific system part of the N8000.

Event Levels

Element Description
Fatal Errors Severe operating system errors which can lead to a system crash
Errors Errors on the application level
Warnings Warnings
Infos Information
Debug Infos Detailed debugging information

Event Facilities
Element Description
Macros Information about the Task Manager making a Macro-Call
User Fault Information about changing the Error Code of User Faults
Heartbeat Information concerning the Heartbeat Timer
VCC Information concerning internal Supply Voltages
RS-232 Information concerning the RS-232 port
DSP DSP system information
CobraNet CobraNet system information
CAN CAN interface information
Hardware Configuration Information about the Hardware Configuration
NCP Communication NCP protocol information
Web Server Web Server information
Master Fault Information about changing the Master Fault
Remote Control Information concerning the RCM
ADC Information concerning the A/D converter
GPI Information concerning the Control Port (General Purpose Interface)
NetMax Local Information about local events within the N8000
Remote Amplifier Information concerning the monitoring of Remote Amps
DPM ProMatrix application information
Configuration Data Configuration Data information
Pilot Tone Detection Pilot Tone Detection information
Parser ASCII Control Protocol information
Wall station Information concerning connected Wall stations

The Event Log window lists the events in consecutive order including date and time stamp.

Element Description
Rereads the Event Log of the N8000.
The entire Event Log currently existing in the N8000 will be deleted.
The entries in the Event Log are numbered in ascending order.
Date and time of the event.
Indicates the level of an event. The Event Log only lists events for which an Event Level has been
specified on the Event Logging page.
Indicates the subsystem for the concerned event. The Event Log only includes entries for which a
Facility has been specified on the Event Logging page.

Description of an event.

TASK MANAGER
The N8000 Browser Interface is divided into three main windows: System Settings, Task Manager and Administration.
Menu entries of the Task Manager window are listed in the following table:
Main Setup Activating/Deactivating the Task Manager
Conditions Configuration of up to 100 conditions
Macros Configuration of up to 100 macros
Triggers Configuration of up to 100 triggers
Remote Devices Configuration of up to 100 remote devices

Main Setup
The Main Setup page allows activating or deactivating the Task Manager of the N8000.
HINT: Editing Conditions, Macros and Triggers is only possible when the Task Manager is deactivated.


Editing conditions, macros and triggers is not possible with the Task Manager being active because their menus are
grayed out and cannot be accessed.

Conditions
The N8000 is capable of managing up to 100 Conditions. Whether commands are being executed depends on
Conditions. Commands to be executed are defined as Macros. Whether a Conditions result is true or false depends on
the type of Condition and its respective parameters.


The N8000 provides the following types of conditions:

– Digital Input
– Analog Input
– Master Fault
– User Fault
– Temperature
– Combined
– Calendar/Time
– Amplifier Status
The following section explains each type and the related parameters for each condition. Condition names can be
composed of maximally 10 characters.
Digital Input: Using the four control inputs of the Control Port as digital inputs is possible. The status of a control input
is Low (Open) when it is not connected to the reference voltage of 10 V. In case it is connected to a reference voltage
of 10 V, the status of a control input is High (Closed). 2.5 V marks the threshold between High and Low. The condition
has the same status as the selected control input.
Example:
The screenshot on the left represents the condition "Mute All", which monitors a switch of control input 2. The
conditions result equals true" as long as the normally open contact is closed, i.e. the control input 2 is connected to 10
volts.

Analog Input: The input voltage at the control input of the Control Port can be measured and the result can be
compared with upper and lower thresholds. The condition uses the result of this comparison. The conditions result is
true (or false when choosing Invert Condition instead), as long as the input voltage is within the specified voltage
range.
Example:
The screenshot on the left shows the condition "IN2_OK" that monitors the voltage level of control input 2. This
example represents a case, when a control input is used as digital input. The status is defined in the voltage ranges of
0V...2V and 8V...10V only. On the other hand, if the input voltage is in the range of 2 volts and 8 volts, that is, if the
input voltage is in a voltage range that is not feasible for using the inputs as digital input, the condition is true which
results in error indication.


Master Fault: A condition can depend on a selected internal N8000 error. The conditions result is true (or false when
choosing Invert Condition instead) if one or various errors of the selected type occur.
Example:
The screenshot on the left shows the condition "EInterface". The conditions result is true whenever a fault is
recognized on the N8000 interface. The following types of errors are available to select from: CobraNet, CAN Bus, GPI
and RS-232 interface.

User Fault: It is possible to select a User Fault on which a condition depends. The conditions result is true (or false
when choosing Invert Condition instead) once the User Fault occurs.

HINT: A User Fault occurs if the associated Error Code is not equal 0. The User Fault macro is always used when
setting a User Fault.

Example:
The screenshot on the left shows the condition "UserFault2OK". This conditions result is true if the User Fault 2 has not
been set, i.e. its Error Code equals 0.

Temperature: The temperature within the N8000 System Controllers enclosure is constantly being monitored. The
condition depends on the compliance with upper and lower thermal thresholds. Limit values have to be entered in °C.
The conditions result is true (or false when choosing Invert Condition instead) as long as the actual temperature stays
within the defined temperature range.
HINT: Converting temperature values from degrees Fahrenheit °F to degrees Celsius °C is done according to the
following formula: degree Celsius = (degree Fahrenheit - 32) * 5/9
Example:
The screenshot on the left shows the condition "Temp High". This conditions result is true as long as the temperature
stays above the maximum allowable temperature of 50°C.


Combined: This condition allows logically combining up to four other conditions. Logical operators that can be used
are AND, OR and XOR. The conditions result is true (or false when choosing Invert Condition instead) if the logic
operation of the selected condition is true.
Example:
The screenshot on the left shows the condition "TpInf_OK". This conditions result is true as long as the temperature
has not exceeded the upper limit value and at the same time no error has occurred at the interfaces of the N8000. This
is achieved by inverting Condition 1 "TempHigh" and Condition 2 "EInterface" and combining the results with the logic
operation AND.


Calendar/Time: The condition compares the current time (according to the system clock) with user-definable non-
recurring or periodically recurring time spans. The conditions result is true within the defined time span(s). Example:
The screenshot on the left shows the condition "LunchMusic". This conditions result is true for 30 minutes on each day
at noon (except for Saturdays and Sundays).

Amplifier Status: This condition depends on the status of a (or the identical states of several) power amp(s). Amps
specified in the amplifier list with "Amplifier X" represent remote amps with the CAN address X that are connected to
the CAN bus. The conditions result is true if one or all of the selected amplifiers are in the selected status.
Example:
The screenshot on the left shows the condition "All Amps On". This conditions result is true whenever all power amps
with CAN addresses between 1 and 4 are powered on.

Macros
The N8000 is capable of managing up to 100 macros. Macros are used to change the state of the N8000 or the states of
connected remote amps.


The N8000 provides the following macro types:
– Amplifier Power
– Set Amplifier Preset
– Digital Output
– Remote Macro
– User Fault
– Sequence
– Paging Line
– Save Amplifier Preset
– Load Preset
– Set Level From GPI
– Save N8000 Preset
Amplifier Power: Execution of this macro switches power amps on or off. Amps specified in the amplifier list as
"Amplifier X" represent remote amps with CAN address ”X” that are connected to the CAN bus.

Set Amplifier Preset: Execution of this macro loads the selected Preset into memory of a single or a variety of power
amps. Amps specified in the amplifier list as „Amplifier X“ represent remote amps with CAN address „X“ that are
connected to the CAN bus.

Digital Output: Execution of this macro changes the (digital) state of a control output of the N8000. It is possible to
– set (relay contact closed, i.e. connected to ground),
– reset (relay contact open) or
– invert a control output.


Remote Macro: Execution of this macro executes a freely selectable macro on another N8000. Defining the N8000s
that appear in the Device list has to be done in the Remote Devices window.

User Fault: Execution of this macro assigns a random numerical Error Code to the selected User Fault..
HINT: ErrorCode"0"represents"noerror".


Sequence: Execution of this macro sequentially executes up to five other macros. Each macro of a sequence can
depend on a condition. Conditions are defined on the Conditions page.


Paging Line: Connecting the N8000 to a ProMatrix/ProAnnounce DPM 4000 allows setting nodes of a N8000’s paging
matrix from the DPM4000. Therefore, it is necessary to select the macro’s Parameters Object ID, Object Index and
Paging Lines.

Save Amplifier Preset: The current settings of the selected amps are stored in a selected User Preset. Amps specified
in the amplifier list as „Amplifier X“ represent remote amps with CAN address „X“ that are connected to the CAN bus.

LoadN8000Preset.Execution of this macro loads a selected Preset into the N8000.

Set Level From GPI: This macro allows using a control voltage with definable value range for the level control of a
N8000 DSP block. Therefore, it is necessary to select the DSP block’s parameters Object ID and Object Index. The Min
Voltage and. Max Voltage fields are for defining an allowable value range of the voltage present at the selected input.
The Min Level (dB) and Max Level (dB) fields define the value range for the absolute level, which, in relation to the
applied voltage, is sent to an object.

Save N8000 Preset: The macro saves the current settings of the N8000’s DSP configuration in a Preset. Preset number
and preset name are user-definable.


Triggers
Triggers control the execution of macros depending on a specific state of a Condition. Up to 100 triggers can be
employed.

Element Description
Nr Triggers are numbered in ascending order. It is possible to manage up to 100 triggers.
Condition The status change of this Condition “triggers” the execution of macros.
On Macro The selected macro is executed exactly one time when the condition’s state changes from “false” to
“ true”.
Repeat Choosing this option repeats the On macro for the Debounce Time period as long as the condition’s
result is „true“. For example, this becomes necessary when the Set Level From GPI macro is
triggered by the Analog Input condition.
Off Macro The selected macro is executed exactly one time when the condition’s state changes from “true” to
“false”.
Debounce Time It is possible to stipulate a very short time interval during which the status change of a condition
(ms) needs to be maintained. Execution of the macro is discarded if the status changes back before the
Debounce Time has elapsed.

Remote Devices
The Remote Devices page allows configuring the remote N8000 devices used in remote macro calls.
Element Description
Device Up to 100 remote N8000 can be used in remote macros.
Enable Allows deactivating a remote N8000 temporarily.
IP Address The IP address of the remote N8000.
Password The password of the user account „netmax“ of the remote N8000.

ADMINISTRATION
The browser interface is divided into three main windows: System Settings, Task Manager and Administration. The
following table lists the menu entries in the Administration window:
Firmware Update Updates the firmware of the N8000.
Upload Configuration Replaces the N8000’s current configuration with a previously saved configuration file.
Save Configuration Stores the N8000’s current configuration in a configuration file on a PC.
Set Factory Defaults Resets all parameters of the N8000 to their factory default values.
Reboot Restarts the N8000.
Set Password Allows the currently logged-in user to change their password.

Firmware Update
The Firmware Update page provides a convenient mechanism for updating the N8000 firmware.
Caution!
The N8000 firmware should be updated only, if problems with the firmware used so far exist and
! these can be fixed by using a new firmware version.
Consequences

The Browse... button allows the user to navigate through hard drives or storage media (e.g. a CD-ROM) for the
appropriate for firmware files. Pressing the Upload Firmware button loads the selected firmware file into the memory
buffer of the N8000.

Pressing the Update button writes the new firmware into the N8000, which automatically reboots upon successfully
completing the update process.


Upload Configuration
The Upload Configuration page allows transferring configuration data (stored in a backup file via Save Configuration)
back to the N8000. The Browse... button allows searching through any available data storage medium for configuration
files. Hitting the Upload button loads the previously selected configuration file into the memory buffer of the N8000.

The selected backup file also contains information about the Ethernet port’s network configuration. Consequently,
storing the newly loaded configuration data into memory of the N8000 also affects the current network configuration. If
this is not desired, maintaining the current network configuration is possible by ticking the Keep existing TCP/IP set-
tings... checkbox. Pressing the Store Configuration button actually stores the uploaded configuration data in the
N8000.

Save Configuration
It is possible to transfer the N8000’s entire configuration to the PC and store it in a configuration backup file. This
provides an easy option to backup an entire N8000. In addition, loading a backup file (via Upload Configuration) into a
number of N8000 System Controllers offers a quick and very convenient way to configure several N8000 absolutely
identically.

Set Factory Defaults

The Set Factory Defaults page allows the resetting of the N8000 to its factory defaults. The Keep TCP/IP settings
option allows the N8000 to be reset to its factory defaults while retaining its network configuration in a situation where
the N8000 is currently part of an existing Ethernet network and settings such as IP address must be retained.

Reboot
The Reboot page allows rebooting the N8000. Rebooting the N8000 also terminates the current session of the browser
interface.

Set Password
The Set Password page allows specifying a new password for the present user of the N8000 browser interface.

HINT: The password has to be composed of at least 5 and up to a maximum of 12 alphanumeric characters; i.e. only
alphabetic characters and symbols. The use of special characters is not permissible. The password is case-sensitive.

When logged in as administrator, the Change User Password page allows the assignment of new passwords to all
users.

BOOT SETTINGS
The Boot Settings page is only accessible if you are logged in as administrator. Changing parameters on this page is not
recommended. If you are in doubt, please, leave the pre-set values as they are.

IRIS-Net TOUCH PANELS | en 524
TOUCH PANELS
TPI-5
TPI-5 Device
First, create a TPI-5 Device in your IRIS-Net project, by selecting it from the Object List in the category Accessories and
Misc. Hardware > Touchpanels. Alternatively select and drag and drop it to the worksheet from the window Accessories
and Misc. Hardware > Touchpanels.
The following dialog appears:
Please enter the number of devices and the Communication Interface and confirm with the OK button. After that one or
several TPI-5 Devices appear on the worksheet. The TPI-5 devices can be selected and placed in the worksheet. By
right clicking on a TPI-5 Device > Configuration you get to the Configuration Dialog.
TPI-5 Configuration Dialog

Dialog Description
Configuration In this dialog the graphical user interface of the TPI-5 can be designed. Several
standard IRIS-Net Controls like e.g. Switch Button, Fader or LED are available.
Diagnostics On this page different fault states are shown.

Element Description
By clicking this button, the graphical user interface will be exported as a

project file (*ds)
Enter here the IP address matching the hardware IP address. The

default IP address of the TPI-5 is 192.168.1.102.
A name can be assigned to each touch panel to specify its use or

position. Click on the yellow entry field and enter the desired name.

Press Return on the keyboard to acknowledge the entered name.

Following properties can be used for advanced configuration of the TPI-5:
Property Description
Brightness Allows adjusting the display brightness (0 = dark, 100 =

bright)
Layer after screensaver active Select the layer to be shown after activation of the
screensaver.
Startup layer Select the layer to be shown after power-on of the TPI-5.
Element Description
Select one of the Electro-Voice NetMax N8000 or DYNACORD P 64 operated by the TPI-5.
MASTER Master-Fault-Flag for all N8000 / P 64 used on the TPI-5 and the TPI-5 itself.
Network Error Network Error between a TPI-5 and a connected N8000 / P 64.
Password Mismatch If the password is wrong the TPI-5 can not connect to a N8000 / P 64.
MAX Connection If too many users are connected to the N8000 / P64, the TPI-5 can not connect to the N8000 /
Limit P64.
DSP Config Mismatch If the DSP structure saved in the TPI-5 is not identical with the DSP Structure of the N8000 /
P64, then the TPI-5 can't go online with the N8000 / P 64.
General Error General Error in the TPI-5.
N8000 Master Fault The Master Fault Flag of a N8000 / P64, which is connected to the TPI-5, is active.

Editing TPI properties

Following table lists properties of the TPI-5 touch panel.
Property Range Description
Brightness 0 to 100 Display brightness, 0 = minimum brightness, 100 = maximum

brightness
Layer after screensaver 1 to 32 Enter the number of the layer to be displayed after the screen
active saver was active.
Startup layer 1 to 32 Enter the number of the layer to be displayed after power-on.
Editing network settings

Default network settings of the TPI-5:
Parameter Value
IP address 192.168.1.102
Gateway IP address 192.168.1.1
DHCP server off

1. Connect the network connection of your PC to the Ethernet interface of the TPI-5 with a crossover cable, or with a
patch cable and a hub/switch.
2. Activate the power supply system of the TPI-5.
After some seconds an IRIS-Net project signals the successful start activity of the TPI-5.
3. Start the IRIS-Net software on your PC.
4. Click on Tools > Device Scan.
The Device Scan dialog appears.
5. Select the entry IRIS-Net TPI in the Device Type list.

In der Devices Liste werden alle gefundenen Touch Panels angezeigt.

6. By double-clicking on the TPI-5 Device which's network settings you want to change the Network Configuration
dialog opens.
7. Change the network settings and confirm with the OK button.

The TPI-5 takes the new settings and reboots.
Updating the IRIS-Net project file

Usually the project file of the TPI-5 is transferred to the TPI-5 during the Going Online procedure shown on the Go
Online Dialog. Alternatively a project file can be exported from the Configuration Dialog of a TPI-5 and then be updated
as described below. In the following it is assumed that the file to be transferred is available at the PC and the network
settings are set to factory defaults.
Caution!
Project files including Dante configuration can not be used with TPI-5 touch panel.
! Consequences

After some seconds a IRIS-Net project signals the successful start activity of the TPI-5.

3. On your PC click on Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
The window Command Prompt appears.
4. . Enter telnet 192.168.1.102 and tap the return button.
The message "Welcome to IRIS" is indicated.
5. Enter doc*update=start and tap the return button.
Figure 5.1: The IRIS-Net Update Server dialog appears on the screen of the TPI-5. The TPI-5 is now ready to receive.
6. Start the IRIS-Net application on your PC.

The dialog Device Scan appears.


All connected Touch Panels are shown in the Devices list.
9. Select the Touch Panel from the Devices list that has to be updated.
10. Right click on the entry in the Devices list.

The Update Dialog appears.

11. In the Update Dialog click on button...

The window Open appears.
12. Select the file to be transferred in the window Open and click on the Open button.
The file type Project Files (*.ds) can be selected.
HINT: The project file must be renamed to "TPConfig.ds" before sending it, so that after a reboot of the TPI-5 it
can automatically be opened.
13. Click on button Send Project in the Update Dialog.
The file is now sent to the TPI-5. During the transmission a progress bar will pop up.
After successful transmission the name of the transmitted project file is indicated in the IRIS-Net Update Server
dialog on the touch panel.
14. Click on button Reload latest Project in the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog at the Touch Panel. .
The new project is loaded

15. Check the new project on the Touch Panel.

16. Click on button OK in the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog on the Touch Panel.

Updating the IRIS-Net application file

The purpose of this procedure is to build a connection between a PC and a TPI-5 and updating the IRIS-Net project file
of the TPI-5. In the following it is assumed that the file to be transferred is available at the PC and the network settings
are set to factory defaults.
After some seconds a IRIS-Net project signals the successful start activity of the TPI-5.
3. On your PC click on Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
The window Command Prompt appears.
4. Enter telnet 192.168.1.102 and tap the return button.
The message "Welcome to IRIS" is indicated.
Figure 5.2: The IRIS-Net Update Server dialog appears on the screen of the TPI-5. The TPI-5 is now ready to receive.

6. Start the IRIS-Net application on your PC.




The Update Dialog appears.
11. Click on the button Send Application Package in the Update Dialog.
The application file is now sent to the TPI-5. During the transmission a progress bar will pop up.

Figure 5.3: After successfull transmission the file size and date of the application file is indicated in the IRIS-Net Update Ser- ver dialog
on the TPI-5.
12. Click on button Update Application in the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog on the Touch Panel. The new Application
Package will be extracted and installed. The new project will be loaded automatically.
13. Click on button OK in the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog on the Touch Panel.

Windows 7
When using Windows 7 the integrated firewall has to be configured for using the TPI-5. The following section describes
how to configure the firewalll before and after updating the project file or IRIS-Net application.
1. Open the directory /Tools in the IRIS-Net installation directory.
2. Open the context menu of the file WIN7_FTP_Rule_ENABLE.BAT using the right mouse button and click on the
“Run as administrator” entry.
3. If requested, enter the administrator password of Windows 7. A DOS window will appear indicating the successful
configuration of the firewall.
4. Now, update the project file or IRIS-Net application as described in the corresponding chapters.
5. Open the context menu of the file WIN7_FTP_Rule_DISABLE.BAT using the right mouse button and click on the
“Run as administrator” entry.

6. If requested, enter the administrator password of Windows 7. A DOS window will appear indicating the successful
re-configuration of the firewall.
TPI-8/TPI-12
Updating the IRIS-Net project file

HINT: The following description refers to IRIS-Net version V2.0 or newer. The IRIS-Net version installed at the TPI
must be V1.8.0 or newer. For older version of IRIS-Net (e.g. V1.7.1) please see page 404.
Caution!
Project files including Dante configuration can not be used with TPI-8/TPI-12 touch panels.
! Consequences

The purpose of this procedure is to build a connection between a PC and a TPI-8/TPI-12 and updating the IRIS-Net
project file of the TPI-8/TPI-12. In the following it is assumed that the file to be transfered is available at the PC.
1. Connect the network connection of your PC to the Ethernet interface of the TPI-8/TPI-12 directly with a crossover
cable, or with a patch cable and a hub/switch.
2. Activate the power supply system of the TPI-8/TPI-12.
After some seconds an IRIS-Net project signals the successful start activity of the TPI-8/TPI-12.
3. Click on Start > All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
The window command prompt appears.
The message “Welcome to IRIS” is indicated.

Figure 5.4: The dialog IRIS-Net Update Server appears at the screen of the TPI-8/TPI-12. The TPI-8/TPI-12 is now ready-to- receive.
6. Start IRIS-Net application on your PC.


8. Select the entry IRIS-Net in the Device Type list.

The dialog Update Dialog appears.
11. Click on button...in the Update Dialog dialog.


12. Select the file to be transferred in the window Open and click on the Open button.
The file type Project Files (*.ds) can be selected.
13. Click on button Send Project in the Update Dialog dialog.
The file is now sent to the TPI-8/TPI-12. The successful transmission is indicated by the name of the project file in
the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog at the TPI-8/TPI-12.
14. Click on button Reload latest Project in the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog at the Touch Panel.
The new project is loaded.
15. Check the new project at the Touch Panel.

16. If the new project works, click on button Save changes + Reboot in the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog..
17. To restore the previous project file, turn off the power supply system of the Touch Panel. The old project will be
loaded when switching on the Touch Panel next time.

Updating the IRIS-Net application file

HINT: The following description refers to IRIS-Net version V2.0 or newer. The IRIS-Net version installed at the TPI
must be V1.8.0 or newer. For older version of IRIS-Net (e.g. V1.7.1) please see page 404.

The purpose of this procedure is to build a connection between a PC and a TPI-8/TPI-12 and updating the IRIS-Net
project file of the TPI-8/TPI-12. In the following it is assumed that the file to be transferred is available at the PC.

After some seconds a IRIS-Net project signals the successful start activity of the TPI-8/TPI-12.
The message “Welcome to IRIS“ is indicated.
Figure 5.5: The dialog IRIS-Net Update Server appears at the screen of the TPI-8/TPI-12. The TPI-8/TPI-12 is now ready-to- receive.


8. Select the entry IRIS-Net in the Device Type list.

The dialog Update Dialog appears.

11. If Archive not yet created! is indicated next to the Create Application Package button, click on the Create
Application Package button.
Figure 5.6: An application package is generated from the currently running IRIS-Net application. The file size and date of the generated
package is indicated next to the Create Application Package button when finished.
12. Click on the button Send Application Package in the Update Dialog dialog.
Figure 5.7: The application file is now sent to the TPI-8/TPI-12. The successful transmission is indicated by the file size and date of the
application file in the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog at the TPI-8/TPI-12.
HINT: If the indicated application file size is not identical at the PC and the Touch Panel, repeat sending the file.
13. Click on button Extract Application in the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog.
The received Application Package is prepared for installation.
14. Click on button Reload latest Project in the IRIS-Net Update Server dialog.
The new IRIS-Net version is started and the latest project file is loaded.
15. Check if the project file works in the new IRIS-Net version.
16. If the new IRIS-Net version should be used, click on button Save changes and reboot in the IRIS-Net Update Server
dialog.

17. To restore the previous version of IRIS-Net, turn off the power supply system of the Touch Panel. The previous
version of IRIS-Net will be loaded when switching on the Touch Panel next time.
Hot to update for IRIS-Net V1.8.3 and older

HINT: The following description refers to IRIS-Net versions older than V2.0.

The purpose of this procedure is to build a connection between a PC and a TPI-8/TPI-12 with factory network settings
(see Going On-Line, page 13) and updating the IRIS-Net project file or IRIS-Net application of the TPI-8/TPI-12. In the
following it is assumed that the file to be transferred is available at the PC.
After some seconds a IRIS-Net project signals the successful start activity of the TPI-8/TPI-12.
The message “Welcome to IRIS” is indicated.
Figure 5.8: The dialog Update Mode and a onscreen keyboard appears at the screen of the TPI-8/TPI-12. The TPI-8/TPI-12 is now ready-
to-receive.
7. Click on Configuration > Update Touch Panel.
The dialog Update Mode appears.

8. Type 192.168.1.101 in the Enter Remote Address.. input field and tap the return button.
9. Click on Send File...button in the Update Mode dialog.
10. Select the file to be transferred in the window Open and click on the Open button. The file types Project Files
(*.ds) and Application Archives (*.zip) can be selected.
The file is now sent to the TPI-8/TPI-12. The successful transmission is indicated by message “success” in the
Update Mode dialog at the PC and also the TPI-8/TPI-12.
11. Enter doc*update=reboot and tap the return button.
The TPI-8/TPI-12 reboots and uses the new IRIS-Net project file or IRIS-Net application.

IRIS-Net DIGITAL SOUND PROCESSOR | en 544
DIGITAL SOUND PROCESSOR

DX38 Digital Sound Processor

The Dx38 is an universal Digital Sound System Processor that provides 2 inputs and 4 outputs; plus internal summing
of the inputs 1 and 2. Via Matrix it is possible to assign the outputs to any input or to the sum of the inputs. It is further
possible to establish the following configurations: Stereo or Dual 2-Way systems, 3-Way + Direct and 4-Way systems,
each with Mono Sub-channel, but also full range systems.
High and low-pass filters are provided for the frequency crossover functions in all operation modes. The selection
includes Linkwitz-Riley, Butterworth and Bessel type filters with switchable slopes between 6, 12, 18 and 24 dB/oct. A
huge number of additional filters offers extremely flexible correction of the frequency response. Each input
incorporates a 5- band equalizer, allowing to assign high and low-pass, high and low-shelving or parametric peak-dip
filters to its individual filter sections. Next to the frequency crossover filters, four additional filters are employed in
each output channel, which also can be set to work as high or low-pass, high or low-shelving filters, parametric peak-
dip filters, or all-pass filters. Additional filtering is provided through 2. order high-passes for the realization of B-6
alignment, or special LPN- filters (Low-Pass Notch filters) for correcting the frequency and phase responses of
optimally vented woofer cabinets. Each channel additionally provides a delay, a polarity switch, a programmable level
control and a digital compressor / limiter while the master delays are located in the input channels.
The user can choose between two operation modes: the ”No Edit Mode” allows to simply select the required
combination of loudspeaker systems from the factory preset program list. Afterwards, the appliance is optimally
matched to the sound system and can be operated instantly. The ”Full Edit Mode” on the other hand offers access to
all parameters, allowing to freely program and store basically any setting. A total number of 80 memory addresses - 50
preset and 30 freely assignable user-programs - are available.
Within the Dx38, AD/DA conversion is taken care of by linear 24-bit converters; where the AD-section employs 128
times oversampling, gain-ranging Sigma-Delta converters. The DA-section offers 128 times oversampling Sigma-Delta
converters. The overall signal processing is performed by two 24-bit Motorola signal processors.
Additional Features are:
– FLASH memory for software and preset updates via serial interfaces
– PC-based operation and configuration software IRIS-Net
– Standard MIDI-interface and RS-232 interface
– RS-485 interface or switching contacts optionally available
– Back-lit graphic-display with 122 x 32 dots
– Inputs and outputs are electronically balanced, XLR-type connectors
– Input transformer-balancing is optionally available
– Input / Output level controls, Output-Mute switch, channel function indicators SUB, LO, MID, HI
– Input / Output meter instruments, compressor and clipping LEDs

Dx38 Device
Start by creating an Dx38 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an Dx38 from the Object Bar’s Devices category or from
box appears:
Enter the requried number of devices and select a communication interface. Click on the OK button to accept these
settings. The specified number of Dx38 Devices will be created and displayed in the worksheet. Selected devices can
be dragged around and repositioned at will. To select a device either click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle
around it or hold down the Ctrl key and click on the device. In either case a successfully selected device is shown with
Double clicking on an Dx38 device icon opens the Userpanel.

CONFIGURATION OF THE INTERFACE
For using the Dx38 device in IRIS-Net the used COM port of the PC has to be selected. When using an USB-RS-485
adapters the system internal COM port can be found in the Control Panel, see following picture.

In this example COM port 3 is used by the adapter. The value „COM3” must be entered for the Property „hardware” of
the serial interface in IRIS-Net.


Reference
DX38 USER PANEL
The Dx38 User panel provides access to the controls and indications at the Dx38 front panel. The complete
functionality available at the Dx38 LC-Display can be accessed via pressing the DSP button.

Indications and Functions of the Dx38 User panel
Element Description
The level meter instruments are meant for optical monitoring of the input signal levels, individually
showing the peak value of the correspondent input signal. The input control should be set to a
position so that the meter instruments indicate a level between -6 and -12 dB. To prevent internal
clipping, make sure that the CLIP LEDs are not lit.
Line 1 displays the description of the selected User Memory. Line 2 displays the description of the
device and its address at the RS-485 bus.
These LEDs indicate, which frequency band the corresponding channel is set to. If a channel is
configured for full range operation, all its function-LEDs are simultaneously lit.

These keys allow to mute the output signal of the corresponding output channels. Pressing a key
once switches the mute-function ON; the key’s red LED lights. Pressing the button again switches

the mute-function OFF; the key’s LED is dimmed again.
These LEDs indicate the peak level of the corresponding outputs. The Dx38 should be operated in a
range, so that the clip-LEDs are not lit. Otherwise, this could lead to internal clipping. The COMP/
LIMIT-LEDs light, when the compressor / limiter of the corresponding channel is activated; e. g.:
when the audio signal level exceeded the previously set threshold and therefore the output level is
compressed or limited.
These controls are used to set the output levels of channels 1 to 4, allowing to match the Dx38 to
the input levels of the devices chained in sequence. Correctly setting these controls results in an
improved S/N ratio. In most cases, good results are achieved when setting the controls to "-6". The
digital output gain control should be used when higher output levels are needed. Use the controls
OUT 1 - 4 to attenuate the output levels. It is not recommended to use the digital output gain
control for massive attenuation, since this would decline the dynamic range of the D/ A-converters.
Label of input or output channels.
Clicking on the DSP button opens the Setup & Control window, which provides access to all DSP
and speaker parameters.
DSP
The DSP pages provide overview and access to all DSP parameters of the sound system processor. Within this window
you can use the Flow Diagram Selector to link to different function groups.



Element Description
FLOW DIAGRAM The signal flow display provides an overview of an amplifier’s DSP settings. This
area also includes all controls for the preset location/file management,
configuration settings and RACE file import.
MASTER EQ The MASTER EQ page provides access to the two 5-band parametric equalizers of
the sound system processor inputs.

MASTER DELAY This page allows the programming of delay lines for the channels A and B as well as
for the summed input A+B.
CHANNEL EQ The CHANNEL EQ page offers access to the 4-band parametric equalizers of the
sound system processor outputs for speaker equalization.
X-OVER Frequency crossover-filters as well as the parameters gain, polarity and alignment-
delay for all output channels are located in the X-OVER area.
DYNAMICS This page provides access to compressor and limiter of each channel.

The FLOW DIAGRAM window shows a signal flow diagram, which offers a quick overview of all DSP setting of the
sound system processor. Labeling and routing channels, editing trim and mute can be done directly in the diagram.
Clicking onto the corresponding function blocks lets you access all other DSP parameters. All parameters that are
necessary for using presets, configurations and RACE files are also accessible from this window.
The FLOW DIAGRAM window opens when clicking on the first, fourth or eight block in the Flow Diagram Selector.

Function Blocks
Element Description
Input Block:
A click with the right mouse button onto IN 1 or IN 2 opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows

copying all parameters of the corresponding input channel (Master EQ, Master Delay) to any other
input channel within the same project.
Master EQ Block:
The Master EQ block displays the 5 Master EQs of the corresponding input channel. The 5 LEDs
indicate which EQ-bands are being used while the graph shows the frequency response of the Master
EQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the MASTER EQ page.
Master Delay Block:

This displays the Master Delay of the input channels. The corresponding LED signals whether a delay
has been programmed or not. The delay-value is displayed together with the measurement unit next to
the LED. The graph shows the approximate usage of delay memory capacity. A single click with the left
mouse button onto this block opens the MASTER DELAY page. Clicking with the right mouse button
opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding Master Delay
Routing Block:
Here you can assign the output channel routing. The selection can be performed using the four
combination boxes. A click with the right mouse button onto routing block opens the Copy & Paste
menu of all DSP settings, which allows copying all DSP parameters of an sound system processor to
any other sound system processor within the same project.
Channel EQ Block:
The Channel EQ block displays the 4 Channel EQs of the corresponding output channel. The 4 LEDs
indicate which EQ-bands are being used while the graph shows the frequency response of the Channel
EQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the CHANNEL EQ page.

X-Over Block:
status of gain trim, polarity and delay. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens
the X-OVER page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows
copying all parameters of the corresponding X-Over block to any other X-Over block within the same
project.
Level Block:
The numerical field is identical to the numerical field below the level controls in the Userpanel. The
MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding output to –∞. Clicking the MUTE
button with the left mouse button mutes the corresponding output. The MUTE button is virtually
mute-function and the amplifier output is again active. The MUTE button is virtually disengaged and
not lit.
Dynamics Block:
This block provides graphical display of the dynamics functions of the corresponding output. The two
LEDs indicate whether compressor or limiter have been activated. The graph provides indication of the
set values. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the DYNAMICS page.
project.
Output Block:
The text field allows specifying a name for the corresponding output channel. A click with the right
mouse button onto OUT 1 to OUT 4 opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all

parameters of the corresponding output channel (Routing, Channel EQ, X-Over, Dynamics) to any
other output channel within the same project. However, it is important to bear in mind that the DSP
data only is being copied. Impedance or speaker data is not copied.

Status Indication
Element Description
Shows the number of the actually audible preset. However, this is only true if the EDITED
LED lights green, i.e. no DSP parameter has been changed since the last RECALL.

Indicates the name of the actually audible preset.

The Dx38 offers 7 pre-defined configurations. A configuration is a basic setting that

includes the routing of inputs and outputs, the function of the outputs (Sub, Lo, Mid, Hi,

Fullrange), as well as the kind and amount of parameters. If you do not want to use one of
the pre-defined configurations, you have also the possibility to operate the Dx38 in Full
Edit mode. This mode offers access to all parameters and basically any input/output
routing can be programmed. Additionally, the output assignment (output function - Sub,
Lo, Mid, Hi, Fullrange) is also freely definable.
If the sound system processor is operated in Full Edit Mode, clicking the button LED
Config opens the LED Configuration dialog.

Recall a Presets
Element Description
DClicking the button RECALL... opens the Recall Preset dialog, where you can
select and recall a Preset.


Caution!
The loaded preset becomes instantly audible when in on-line mode. Be sure to select the
! desired preset with the correct set of parameters. In the worst case, this could lead to severe
Consequences

Store a Presets
Element Description
STORE saves all momentary set DSP parameters together with the entered name
into the specified preset. Store is only possible if a user program number is
selected.
Clicking the STORE TO.... button opens the Store To Preset dialog. In this dialog
the Program Number can be selected and the corresponding Program Name can
be entered.

Import / Export a Preset

IRIS-Net allows the storing of all DSP parameters of an sound system processor together with the according preset
name in a file, and to load sound system processor parameters from these files. Therefore, IRIS-Net creates a sub-
directory \Presets during installation, where all factory-presets are saved in to. It is recommended to save your own
presets in this directory as well. For improved organization, creating more sub-directories within the directory \Presets
is permissible.
Element Description
After clicking onto IMPORT PRESET appears an “Open File …” dialog box. Enter the
desired preset file to be opened. This loads and afterwards displays all DSP
CAUTION: The loaded preset becomes instantly audible when in on-line mode. Be
sure to select the desired preset with the correct set of parameters. In the worst
case, this could lead to severe damage to the connected loudspeaker cabinets
due to improper signal processing!
After clicking onto EXPORT PRESET a “Save File …” dialog box appears. Enter the
(without extension). Click onto the SAVE button to store all DSP parameters
together with the corresponding file name. ”.ds” is automatically added as file
extension.


IRIS-Net allows importing loudspeaker presets that have been created in Electro-Voice RACE.

Element Description
Clicking IMPORT RACE FILE opens the Import RACE File dialog.

up to 31 EV Dx38, you need to continue by selecting the desired device from the RACE file within the dialog ”SELECT
DEVICE FROM RACE FILE”. Clicking onto ”OK” button completes the process.

Caution!
Consequences

MASTER EQ

Both input channels of the sound system processor employ 5-band parametric equalizers each, which allow
programming highly variable full-range speaker equalization to match a PA-system to different environmental and
acoustical requirements. In many cases post-mixing console parametric equalization becomes redundant. The Master-
EQ is selected by clicking on the second block of the flow diagram selector or on the MASTER EQ block in the full-scale
flow diagram.



Element Description

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting input 1 (IN 1) or input 2 (IN 2) for filter editing.

copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other EQ-filter bank within the same
project.

Filter Parameters

Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of

Loshelv. – PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable frequency,

Hishelv, Q and gain.
Hipass, – Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high shelving
Lopass equalizer with the following editable parameters: frequency, slope
and gain.
– Lopass / Hipass creates low pass respectively high pass filters with

range.

Hz

0.4...2.0 response of Hi, Lo and All pass filters with slopes of 12dB/oct.
(Hi-/
Lopass)






pressed down allows changing the Q-values of parametric EQs. For an improved overview the name of the
corresponding filter band appears in color as soon as the mouse cursor is positioned over its white dot.

MASTER DELAY

You can select the master delay window by clicking onto the third block in the Flow Diagram Selector or onto the
MASTER DELAY block in the flow diagram.

Channel Parameters
Channel name
2.0 ms 2...900 DELAY allows delaying the corresponding input

ms channel’s audio signal by an adjustable period of time.

deactivating (button engaged) the corresponding delay.

General Parameters
ms ms, This lets you select the unit of measurement for the
samples, delays.
ft, in, m,
cm, µs, s
20 °C -20...60 Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here.

°C In case you have chosen a distance value as unit of
-4...140 measurement for the delay, delay times are corrected in
°F relation to temperature. Temperatures can be entered as
°C or °F.

the right or the left, which results in a change of the selected channel’s delay time. A delay’s title ”lights” in color as

CHANNEL EQ

All output channels of the sound system processor employ 4-band parametric equalizers each, mainly for speaker
equalization. Except for the possibility to select ”All pass” as filter type, these filters are identical to the ones of the
Master-EQ's.
The Channel-EQ is selected by clicking on the fifth block of the flow diagram selector or by on the CHANNEL EQ block
in the full-scale flow diagram.



Element Description
result at the sound system processor outputs. The audible result is displayed in bright colors
while “electrical” graphs are indicated in dark colors.
Selecting ”separate” results in a separated display of the sound system processor channels’
transfer functions while ”sum” shows the summed signal of the sound system processor
channels.

delays mainly affect phase response indication. Indicating the sound system processor channels’
summed signal reveals very clearly the effect that the delays have on the frequency response, e.g.
as notch filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting output 1, 2, 3 or output 4 for filter editing.


EQs of the corresponding output to any other EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters

Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of

Loshelv. His- – PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable

helv, Hipass, frequency, Q and gain.
Lopass, – Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high
Allpass shelving equalizer with the following editable parameters:
– Lopass / Hipass creates low pass respectively high pass filters
– Allpass is a filter which only affects the phase but not the
12dB/ Oct equalizers and low or high pass filters. Setting different slopes within

for B6-alignment, which describes a drastic rise in the cut-off
frequency range.
79 / 316 / 20 Hz...20 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or

1261 / kHz the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass filters.

5023Hz
(PEQ), results in a narrowband filter,

0.4...2.0 (Hi-/ while a small Q-value results in a broadband filter. The Q-value also
sets the quality and thus the

0.4...2.0 (All-
pass)
0 dB -18...+12 dB GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation (reduction)

of parametric EQs or low shelving and high shelving equalizers.

first first, second ORDER (only available with All pass filters) sets the desired filter
order of an All pass filter. A 1st order All pass filter rotates the phase
by 180°, a 2nd order All pass filter rotates the phase by 360°.




X-OVER

polarity selector switch, which are provided for each output channel of a sound system processor. By means of these
Clicking on the sixth block in the Flow Diagram Selector or on the X-OVER block in the large signal flow diagram opens
the X-Over window.



includes all effects of filters that are located pre X-Over (Master EQ, Channel EQ), which always provides precise
Element Description
Switch for scaling the amplifier axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)
Displays the resulting transfer function of all filter and level trim settings and therefore the visible
respectively audible result at the sound system processor outputs. The audible result is displayed
in bright colors while all ”electrical” graphs are drawn in dark colors.
The ”Separate” switch allows separate indication of the two amplifier channels’ transfer
functions. The ”Sum” switch causes display of the summed signal of the two channels.

summed signals reveals very clearly the effect that the delays have on the frequency response,
e.g. as notch filter effect.
effective you first have to load speaker data in the ”Speaker” register sheet.

Channel Parameters
Channel name

the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all X-Over
parameters of the corresponding output to any other X-
Over within the same project.
thru, 43 / RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the HI-PASS filter.

200 / thru, 6dB, Different types of filters (Bessel, Butterworth, Linkwitz/
928 / 4308 12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/Q=0.6, Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct. and 24 dB/Oct.
Hz 12dB/Q=0.7, can be set as filter response. Selecting filter frequencies
12dB/Q=1.2, A click with the right mouse button onto the HIPASS
12dB/Q=1.5, 12dB/Q=2.0, field opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows
Bessel 12dB, Butterworth copying all parameters of the corresponding HI-PASS
12dB, Linkwitz/Riley 12dB, filter to any HI-PASS filters within the same project.
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz
thru, 92 / RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the LO-PASS filter.

2000 / 9283 12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/Q=0.6, Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct. and 24 dB/Oct.
Hz 12dB/Q=0.7, can be set as filter response. Selecting filter frequencies
12dB/Q=1.2, A click with the right mouse button onto the LOPASS
Bessel 12dB, Butterworth copying all parameters of the corresponding LO-PASS
12dB, Linkwitz/Riley 12dB, filter to any LO-PASS filters within the same project.
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz


corresponding channel by up to 6 dB or lowering it by up
to 30 dB to allow level adjustment among individual

frequency bands.
normal normal, inverted The POLARITY parameter offers the possibility to invert a
channels audio signal,
i.e. to rotate its phase by 180°. Inverting the signal may
become necessary for some specific crossover settings
to eliminate the risk of sound cancellation at the
crossover frequency. The effect of the polarity parameter
becomes obvious when displaying the summed signal of
the two amplifier channels (switch set to”Sum”).


delay to overcome negative sound effects like they
speakers in a PA-installation that otherwise would cause
a high amount of natural delay.


General Parameters
ft, in, m, cm,
µs, s
20 °C -20...60 °C Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In case you
delay times are corrected in relation to temperature. Temperatures can
be entered as °C or °F.

Editing X-Over Filters by “Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display

DYNAMICS

Each output channel of the sound system processor offers a compressor and a limiter. These functions can be
accessed via the dynamics window to change the corresponding parameters providing reliable protection for the

Channel Parameters
Element Description
Channel name
A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all

dynamics parameters of the corresponding channel to any other channels within the same project.

& Paste menu, which allows copying all compressor parameters
same project.
21 dBu -9.0...+21.0 dBu The THRESHOLD parameter determines the audio signal level
or above which the compressor starts operating.

0.27...8.70 V
5 ms 0...99 ms ATTACK determines how fast the compressor reduces


250 ms 50...999 ms RELEASE determines how fast the compressor returns to normal

2:1 1: 1, 1.4: 1, 2: RATIO determines the amount of compression that the audio
1, signal is compressed when exceeding the threshold. The setting

4: 1, 8:1 of 4 : 1 for example relates to a reduction of the audio signal by
the factor 4.
BYPASS switches the compressor on (button is not engaged) or


the compressed and non-compressed audio signals.

Limiter Parameters
& Paste menu, which allows copying all limiter parameters of the
corresponding channel to any other channels within the same
project.
21 dBu -9.0...+21.0 dBu THRESHOLD determines the audio signal level above which the
or limiter starts operating.

0.27...8.70 V

BYPASS switches the limiter on (button is not engaged) or off

(button is engaged). This allows quick A / B-comparison of the

limited and non-limited audio signals.

General Parameters
dBu dBu / This lets you select the unit for the threshold parameter. The selected
Volts setting applies to compressor and limiter as well.
dig. Clip dig. Clip, This lets you set the absolute level for margin indication. You can select
Limiter between ”Digital Clip” (relates to
Thresh +21 dBu) and ”Limiter Threshold”.
The margin level indicates the distance between signal level and the set
absolute level. The displayed margin always relates to the highest actual
signal level reading.

Indications
Element Description
These indicator shows the reduction in dB that is applied to the audio signal by the compressor
(COMP) or limiter. Level reduction is indicated as vertical yellow bar graph.
changes from green to red as soon as the signal level reaches or exceeds the set absolute level
(Digital Clip / Limiter Threshold). A click with the right mouse button onto the margin level followed
by click onto Reset re-sets indication.

Editing Compressor / Limiter Parameters by “Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display
Active compressors or limiters (bypass button is not engaged) are indicated by a white dot in the graphics display
representing its function. A click with the left mouse button onto this dot and keeping the mouse button pressed down
A compressor’s / limiter’s title “lights” in color as soon as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding

Speaker
The Speaker Dialog offers the possibility to load the datasets of different loudspeaker systems, assign it to the sound
system processor channels and display the acoustic results. The speaker system datasets, which are provided as
“speaker files” (*.spk), contain factory-measured frequency- and phase responses of loudspeaker systems. The speaker
data as well as any settings made in this window have no direct influence on the transfer function of the sound system
processor. Nevertheless, they provide the user with the possibility for creating loudspeaker systems presets of a higher

user to customize the filter parameters. The summing display mode shows the result of sound system processor plus
speaker transfer functions.

Element Description
Switch for toggling between frequency response (magnitude) and phase response (phase)
display
Switch for adjusting the scale of the amplifier axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)
Switching the display of the corresponding speaker data for an sound system processor channel
on/off is performed using the ”Show Speaker 1” to ”Show Speaker 4” switches.

Channel Parameters
Channel name.
Clicking the button LOAD SPEAKER FILE opens a dialog that allows the
selection of the desired speaker file.
The name of the loaded loudspeaker model is shown in the black-shaded

field.

1 1...8 The NUMBER OF SPEAKERS parameter allows the user to specify the
number of speaker systems connected to the corresponding channel.
Doubling the number of speakers results in a level increase of 6 dB within

the selected channel. Setting an amount from 1 to 8 is possible.
Clicking the CLEAR SPEAKER DATA button clears the previously loaded
measured speaker data of the selected channel.

DSP 244

The DYNACORD DSP 244 is a universal Digital Sound System Processor that provides 2 inputs and 4 outputs; plus
internal summing of the inputs 1 and 2. Via matrix it is possible to assign the outputs to any input or to the sum of the
inputs. It is further possible to establish the following configurations: Stereo or Dual 2-Way systems, 3-Way + Direct
and 4-Way systems, each with Mono Sub-channel, but also full range systems.
High and low-pass filters are provided for the frequency crossover functions in all operation modes. The selection
includes Linkwitz-Riley, Butterworth and Bessel type filters with switchable slopes between 6, 12, 18 and 24 dB/oct. A
huge number of additional filters offer extremely flexible correction of the frequency response. Each input incorporates
a 5-band equalizer, allowing assigning high and low-pass, high and low-shelving or parametric peak-dip filters to its
individual filter sections. Next to the frequency crossover filters, four additional filters are employed in each output
channel, which also can be set to work as high or low-pass, high or low-shelving filters, parametric peak-dip filters, or
all-pass filters. Additional filtering is provided through 2. Order high-passes for the realization of B-6 alignment, or
special LPN filters (Low-Pass Notch filters) for correcting the frequency and phase responses of optimally vented
woofer cabinets. Each channel additionally provides a delay, a polarity switch, a programmable level control and a
digital compressor / limiter while the master delays are located in the input channels.
The user can choose between two operation modes: the ”No Edit Mode” allows to simply select the required
combination of loudspeaker systems from the factory preset program list. Afterwards, the appliance is optimally
matched to the sound system and can be operated instantly. The ”Full Edit Mode” on the other hand offers access to
all parameters, allowing to freely program and store basically any setting. A total number of 80 memory addresses - 50
preset and 30 freely assignable user-programs - are available.
Within the DSP 244, AD/DA conversion is taken care of by linear 24-bit converters; where the AD-section employs 128
times oversampling, gain-ranging Sigma-Delta converters. The DA-section offers 128 times oversampling Sigma-Delta
converters. The overall signal processing is performed by two 24-bit Motorola signal processors.
Additional features are:
– FLASH memory for software and preset updates via serial interfaces
– PC-based operation and configuration software IRIS-Net
– Standard MIDI-interface and RS-232 interface
– RS-485 interface or switching contacts optionally available
– Back-lit graphic-display with 122 x 32 dots
– Inputs and outputs are electronically balanced, XLR-type connectors
– Input transformer-balancing is optionally available
– Input / Output level controls, Output-Mute switch, channel function indicators SUB, LO, MID, HI
– Input / Output meter instruments, compressor and clipping LEDs

DSP 244 Device

Start by creating an DSP 244 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an DSP 244 from the Object Bar’s Devices category
or from the Devices window into the worksheet. The following dialog box appears:

settings. The specified number of DSP 244 Devices will be created and displayed in the worksheet. Selected devices
can be dragged around and repositioned at will. To select a device either click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle
around it or hold down the Ctrl key and click on the device. In either case a successfully selected device is shown with
Double clicking on an DSP 244 device icon opens the Userpanel.
CONFIGURATION OF THE INTERFACE
For using the DSP 244 device in IRIS-Net the used COM port of the PC has to be selected. When using an USB-RS-485
adapters the system internal COM port can be found in the Control Panel, see following picture.


In this example COM port 3 is used by the adapter. The value „COM3” must be entered for the Property „hardware” of
the serial interface in IRIS-Net.


Reference
DSP 244 USERPANEL
The DSP 244 Userpanel provides access to the controls and indications at the DSP 244 front panel. The complete
functionality available at the DSP 244 LC-Display can be accessed via pressing the DSP button.

Indications and Functions of the DSP 244 Userpanel
Element Description
The level meter instruments are meant for optical monitoring of the input signal levels, individually
showing the peak value of the correspondent input signal. The input control should be set to a
position so that the meter instruments indicate a level between -6 and -12 dB. To prevent internal
clipping, make sure that the CLIP LEDs are not lit.
Line 1 displays the description of the selected User Memory. Line 2 displays the description of the
device and its address at the RS-485 bus.
These LEDs indicate, which frequency band the corresponding channel is set to. If a channel is
configured for full range operation, all its function-LEDs are simultaneously lit.
These keys allow to mute the output signal of the corresponding output channels. Pressing a key
once switches the mute-function ON; the key’s red LED lights. Pressing the button again switches

the mute-function OFF; the key’s LED is dimmed again.
These LEDs indicate the peak level of the corresponding outputs. The Dx38 should be operated in a
range, so that the clip-LEDs are not lit. Otherwise, this could lead to internal clipping. The COMP/
LIMIT-LEDs light, when the compressor / limiter of the corresponding channel is activated; e. g.:
when the audio signal level exceeded the previously set threshold and therefore the output level is
compressed or limited.
These controls are used to set the output levels of channels 1 to 4, allowing to match the Dx38 to
the input levels of the devices chained in sequence. Correctly setting these controls results in an
improved S/N ratio. In most cases, good results are achieved when setting the controls to "-6". The
digital output gain control should be used when higher output levels are needed. Use the controls
OUT 1 - 4 to attenuate the output levels. It is not recommended to use the digital output gain
control for massive attenuation, since this would decline the dynamic range of the D/ A-converters.
Label of input or output channels.
Clicking on the DSP button opens the Setup & Control window, which provides access to all DSP
and speaker parameters.
DSP

Element Description
FLOW DIAGRAM The signal flow display provides an overview of an amplifier’s DSP settings. This area
also includes all controls for the preset location/file management, configuration
settings and RACE file import.
MASTER EQ The MASTER EQ page provides access to the two 5-band parametric equalizers of the
sound system processor inputs.
MASTER DELAY This page allows the programming of delay lines for the channels A and B as well as
for the summed input A+B.
CHANNEL EQ The CHANNEL EQ page offers access to the 4-band parametric equalizers of the sound
system processor outputs for speaker equalization.

X-OVER Frequency crossover-filters as well as the parameters gain, polarity and alignment-
delay for all output channels are located in the X-OVER area.
DYNAMICS This page provides access to compressor and limiter of each channel.

The FLOW DIAGRAM window shows a signal flow diagram, which offers a quick overview of all DSP setting of the
sound system processor. Labeling and routing channels, editing trim and mute can be done directly in the diagram.
Clicking onto the corresponding function blocks lets you access all other DSP parameters. All parameters that are
necessary for using presets, configurations and RACE files are also accessible from this window.
The FLOW DIAGRAM window opens when clicking on the first, fourth or eight block in the Flow Diagram Selector.

Function Blocks
Element Description
Input Block:
A click with the right mouse button onto IN 1 or IN 2 opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows

copying all parameters of the corresponding input channel (Master EQ, Master Delay) to any other
input channel within the same project.
Master EQ Block:
The Master EQ block displays the 5 Master EQs of the corresponding input channel. The 5 LEDs
indicate which EQ-bands are being used while the graph shows the frequency response of the Master
EQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the MASTER EQ page.
Master Delay Block:

This displays the Master Delay of the input channels. The corresponding LED signals whether a delay
has been programmed or not. The delay-value is displayed together with the measurement unit next to
the LED. The graph shows the approximate usage of delay memory capacity. A single click with the left
mouse button onto this block opens the MASTER DELAY page. Clicking with the right mouse button
opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding Master Delay
Routing Block:
Here you can assign the output channel routing. The selection can be performed using the four
combination boxes. A click with the right mouse button onto routing block opens the Copy & Paste
menu of all DSP settings, which allows copying all DSP parameters of an sound system processor to
any other sound system processor within the same project.
Channel EQ Block:
The Channel EQ block displays the 4 Channel EQs of the corresponding output channel. The 4 LEDs
indicate which EQ-bands are being used while the graph shows the frequency response of the Channel
EQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the CHANNEL EQ page.

X-Over Block:
status of gain trim, polarity and delay. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens
the X-OVER page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows
copying all parameters of the corresponding X-Over block to any other X-Over block within the same
project.
Level Block:
The numerical field is identical to the numerical field below the level controls in the Userpanel. The
MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding output to –∞. Clicking the MUTE
button with the left mouse button mutes the corresponding output. The MUTE button is virtually
mute-function and the amplifier output is again active. The MUTE button is virtually disengaged and
not lit.
Dynamics Block:
This block provides graphical display of the dynamics functions of the corresponding output. The two
LEDs indicate whether compressor or limiter have been activated. The graph provides indication of the
set values. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the DYNAMICS page.
project.
Output Block:
The text field allows specifying a name for the corresponding output channel. A click with the right
mouse button onto OUT 1 to OUT 4 opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all

parameters of the corresponding output channel (Routing, Channel EQ, X-Over, Dynamics) to any
other output channel within the same project. However, it is important to bear in mind that the DSP
data only is being copied. Impedance or speaker data is not copied.

Status Indication
Element Description
Shows the number of the actually audible preset. However, this is only true if the EDITED
LED lights green, i.e. no DSP parameter has been changed since the last RECALL.

Indicates the name of the actually audible preset.

The DSP 244 offers 7 pre-defined configurations. A configuration is a basic setting that
includes the routing of inputs and outputs, the function of the outputs (Sub, Lo, Mid, Hi,

Fullrange), as well as the kind and amount of parameters. If you do not want to use one of
the pre-defined configurations, you have also the possibility to operate the DSP 244 in
Full Edit mode. This mode offers access to all parameters and basically any input/output
routing can be programmed. Additionally, the output assignment (output function - Sub,
Lo, Mid, Hi, Fullrange) is also freely definable.
If the sound system processor is operated in Full Edit Mode, clicking the button LED
Config opens the LED Configuration dialog.

Recall a Presets
Element Description
Clicking the button RECALL... opens the Recall Preset dialog, where you can select and recall a
Preset.


Caution!
The loaded preset becomes instantly audible when in on-line mode. Be sure to select the desired
! preset with the correct set of parameters. In the worst case, this could lead to severe damage to
the connected loudspeaker cabinets due to improper signal processing!
Consequences

Store a Presets
Element Description
STORE saves all momentary set DSP parameters together with the entered name into the specified
preset. Store is only possible if a user program number is selected.

Clicking the STORE TO.... button opens the Store To Preset dialog. In this dialog the Program Number
can be selected and the corresponding Program Name can be entered.



name in a file, and to load sound system processor parameters from these files. Therefore, IRIS-Net creates a sub-
directory \Presets during installation, where all factory-presets are saved in to. It is recommended to save your own
presets in this directory as well. For improved organization, creating more sub-directories within the directory \Presets
is permissible.
Element Description
After clicking onto IMPORT PRESET appears an ”Open File …” dialog box. Enter the correct path of
the directory in which the desired file is located and select the desired preset file to be opened.

This loads and afterwards displays all DSP parameters that are stored within that file.
CAUTION: The loaded preset becomes instantly audible when in on-line mode. Be sure to select
the desired preset with the correct set of parameters. In the worst case, this could lead to severe
After clicking onto EXPORT PRESET a ”Save File …” dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of
the directory that you want to save the data in. Enter a file name (without extension). Click onto the

SAVE button to store all DSP parameters together with the corresponding file name. ”.ds” is

Import of CrossMax Files
IRIS-Net allows importing loudspeaker presets that have been created in CrossMax.
Element Description
Clicking IMPORT CrossMax FILE opens the Import CrossMax File dialog.


First, you have to select the desired CrossMax file by use of the Browse... button. Because a CrossMax file can hold the
data of up to 31 DSP 244, you need to continue by selecting the desired device from the CrossMax file within the
dialog ”SELECT DEVICE FROM CrossMax FILE”. Clicking onto ”OK” button completes the process.

Caution!
Consequences

MASTER EQ
programming highly variable full-range speaker equalization to match a PA-system to different environmental and
acoustical requirements. In many cases post-mixing console parametric equalization becomes redundant. The Master-
EQ is selected by clicking on the second block of the flow diagram selector or on the MASTER EQ block in the full-scale
flow diagram.


Element Description

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting input 1 (IN 1) or input 2 (IN 2) for filter editing.

copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other EQ-filter bank within the same
project.

Filter Parameters

Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of


Hishelv, and gain.
gain.

range.

Hz

(Hi-/
Lopass)







MASTER DELAY
You can select the master delay window by clicking onto the third block in the Flow Diagram Selector or onto the MAS-
TER DELAY block in the flow diagram.


Channel Parameters
Channel name
2.0 ms 2...900 ms DELAY allows delaying the corresponding input channel’s audio signal by
an adjustable period of time.
BYPASS allows activating (button not engaged) or deactivating (button

engaged) the corresponding delay.

General Parameters
ft, in, m, cm,
µs, s
20 °C -20...60 °C Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In case you have
-4...140 °F chosen a distance value as unit of measurement for the delay, delay times are
corrected in relation to temperature. Temperatures can be entered as °C or
°F.

Editing Delays by “Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display
the right or the left, which results in a change of the selected channel’s delay time. A delay’s title “lights” in color as

CHANNEL EQ
All output channels of the sound system processor employ 4-band parametric equalizers each, mainly for speaker
equalization. Except for the possibility to select “All pass” as filter type, these filters are identical to the ones of the
Master- EQ's.
The Channel-EQ is selected by clicking on the fifth block of the flow diagram selector or by on the CHANNEL EQ block
in the full-scale flow diagram.



Element Description
result at the sound system processor outputs. The audible result is displayed in bright colors
while “electrical” graphs are indicated in dark colors.
Selecting ”separate” results in a separated display of the sound system processor channels’
transfer functions while ”sum” shows the summed signal of the sound system processor
channels.

summed signals reveal very clearly the effect that the delays have on the frequency response, e.g.
as notch filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting output 1, 2, 3 or output 4 for filter editing.


EQs of the corresponding output to any other EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters

Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of

Loshelv. His- PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable frequency, Q

helv, Hipass, and gain.
Lopass, Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high shelving
Allpass equalizer with the following editable parameters: frequency, slope
and gain.
response of the transmission function.
12dB/ Oct equalizers and low or high pass filters. Setting different slopes

within the transmission range is possible. That, in conjunction with
the Q-parameter, offers the possibility for a hi-pass filter to be
programmed for B6-alignment, which describes a drastic rise in the
cut-off frequency range.
79 / 316 / 20 Hz...20 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or

1261 / kHz the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass filters.

5023Hz
(PEQ), results in a narrowband filter,

0.4...2.0 (Hi-/ while a small Q-value results in a broadband filter. The Q-value also
sets the quality and thus the

0.4...2.0 (All-
pass)
0 dB -18...+12 dB GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation (reduction)

of parametric EQs or low shelving and high shelving equalizers.

first first, second ORDER (only available with All pass filters) sets the desired filter
order of an All pass filter. A 1st order All pass filter rotates the phase
by 180°, a 2nd order All pass filter rotates the phase by 360°.




X-OVER
polarity selector switch, which are provided for each output channel of a sound system processor. By means of these
Clicking on the sixth block in the Flow Diagram Selector or on the X-OVER block in the large signal flow diagram opens
the X-Over window.



Element Description
Switch for scaling the amplifier axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)
Displays the resulting transfer function of all filter and level trim settings and therefore the visible
respectively audible result at the sound system processor outputs. The audible result is displayed
The ”Separate” switch allows separate indication of the two amplifier channels’ transfer
functions. The ”Sum” switch causes display of the summed signal of the two channels.

summed signals reveals very clearly the effect that the delays have on the frequency response,
e.g. as notch filter effect.
effective you first have to load speaker data in the ”Speaker” register sheet.

Channel Parameters
Channel name

the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all X-Over
parameters of the corresponding output to any other X-
Over within the same project.
thru, 43 / RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the HI-PASS filter.

928 / 4308 12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/Q=0.6, Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct. and 24 dB/Oct.
Hz 12dB/Q=0.7, can be set as filter response. Selecting filter fre-
12dB/Q=0.8, 12dB/Q=1.0, quencies between 20 Hz and 20 kHz is possible as well.
12dB/Q=1.2, A click with the right mouse button onto the HIPASS
Bessel 12dB, Butterworth copying all parameters of the corresponding HI-PASS
12dB, Linkwitz/Riley 12dB, filter to any HI-PASS filters within the same project.
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz
thru, 92 / RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the LO-PASS filter.

2000 / 9283 12dB/Q=0.5, 12dB/Q=0.6, Riley) with slopes between 6 dB/Oct. and 24 dB/Oct.
Hz 12dB/Q=0.7, can be set as filter response. Selecting filter fre-
12dB/Q=0.8, 12dB/Q=1.0, quencies between 20 Hz and 20 kHz is possible as well.
12dB/Q=1.2, A click with the right mouse button onto the LOPASS
Bessel 12dB, Butterworth copying all parameters of the corresponding LO-PASS
12dB, Linkwitz/Riley 12dB, filter to any LO-PASS filters within the same project.
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz...20 kHz


corresponding channel by up to 6 dB or lowering it by up
to 30 dB to allow level adjustment among individual fre-

quency bands.
normal normal, inverted The POLARITY parameter offers the possibility to invert a
channels audio signal,
i.e. to rotate its phase by 180°. Inverting the signal may
become necessary for some specific crossover settings
to eliminate the risk of sound cancellation at the
crossover frequency. The effect of the polarity parameter
becomes obvious when displaying the summed signal of
the two amplifier channels (switch set to”Sum”).


delay to overcome negative sound effects like they
speakers in a PA-installation that otherwise would cause
a high amount of natural delay.


General Parameters
ft, in, m, cm,
µs, s
20 °C -20...60 °C Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In case you
delay times are corrected in relation to temperature. Temperatures can
be entered as °C or °F.

improved overview and handling. An extra white graph is displayed in addition, representing the frequency response
of the corresponding selected filter.

DYNAMICS

Each output channel of the sound system processor offers a compressor and a limiter. These functions can be
accessed via the dynamics window to change the corresponding parameters providing reliable protection for the

Channel Parameters
Element Description
Channel name
A click with the right mouse button on this field opens the Copy & Paste menu, which allows copying all

dynamics parameters of the corresponding channel to any other channels within the same project.

& Paste menu, which allows copying all compressor parameters
same project.
21 dBu -9.0...+21.0 dBu The THRESHOLD parameter determines the audio signal level
or above which the compressor starts operating.

0.27...8.70 V
5 ms 0...99 ms ATTACK determines how fast the compressor reduces


250 ms 50...999 ms RELEASE determines how fast the compressor returns to normal

2:1 1: 1, 1.4: 1, 2: RATIO determines the amount of compression that the audio
1, signal is compressed when exceeding the threshold. The setting

4: 1, 8:1 of 4 : 1 for example relates to a reduction of the audio signal by
the factor 4.
BYPASS switches the compressor on (button is not engaged) or


the compressed and non-compressed audio signals.

Limiter Parameters
& Paste menu, which allows copying all limiter parameters of the
corresponding channel to any other channels within the same
project.
21 dBu -9.0...+21.0 dBu THRESHOLD determines the audio signal level above which the
or limiter starts operating.

0.27...8.70 V

BYPASS switches the limiter on (button is not engaged) or off

(button is engaged). This allows quick A / B-comparison of the

limited and non-limited audio signals.

General Parameters
dBu dBu / Volts This lets you select the unit for the threshold parameter. The selected
setting applies to compressor and limiter as well.
dig. Clip dig. Clip, This lets you set the absolute level for margin indication. You can select
Limiter between ”Digital Clip” (relates to
Thresh +21 dBu) and ”Limiter Threshold”.
The margin level indicates the distance between signal level and the set
absolute level. The displayed margin always relates to the highest actual
signal level reading.

Indications
Element Description
These indicator shows the reduction in dB that is applied to the audio signal by the compressor (COMP)
or limiter. Level reduction is indicated as vertical yellow bar graph.
changes from green to red as soon as the signal level reaches or exceeds the set absolute level (Digital
Clip / Limiter Threshold). A click with the right mouse button onto the margin level followed by click onto
Reset re-sets indication.

Editing Compressor / Limiter Parameters by ”Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display
Active compressors or limiters (bypass button is not engaged) are indicated by a white dot in the graphics display re-
presenting its function. A click with the left mouse button onto this dot and keeping the mouse button pressed down
A compressor’s / limiter’s title ”lights” in color as soon as the mouse cursor is positioned on top of the corresponding

Speaker
The Speaker Dialog offers the possibility to load the datasets of different loudspeaker systems, assign it to the sound
system processor channels and display the acoustic results. The speaker system datasets, which are provided
as ”speaker files” (*.spk), contain factory-measured frequency- and phase responses of loudspeaker systems. The
speaker data as well as any settings made in this window have no direct influence on the transfer function of the sound
system processor. Nevertheless, they provide the user with the possibility for creating loudspeaker systems presets of
a higher quality. Overlaying the measured frequency- and phase responses in the equalizer and crossover windows
enables the user to customize the filter parameters. The summing display mode shows the result of sound system
processor plus speaker transfer functions.

Element Description
display
Switch for adjusting the scale of the amplifier axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)
Switching the display of the corresponding speaker data for an sound system processor channel
on/off is performed using the ”Show Speaker 1” to ”Show Speaker 4” switches.

Channel Parameters
Channel name.
Clicking the button LOAD SPEAKER FILE opens a dialog that allows
the selection of the desired speaker file.
The name of the loaded loudspeaker model is shown in the black-

shaded field.
1 1...8 The NUMBER OF SPEAKERS parameter allows the user to specify the
number of speaker systems connected to the corresponding channel.
Doubling the number of speakers results in a level increase of 6 dB
within the selected channel. Setting an amount from 1 to 8 is possible.
Clicking the CLEAR SPEAKER DATA button clears the previously

loaded measured speaker data of the selected channel.

DSP 600 FIR-TUNE

The DYNACORD DSP 600 Digital System Processor is a universal two-input, six-output digital signal processor with the
configuration flexibility to handle a multitude of audio system needs and applications; installed sound, house of
worship, convention & meeting facilities, concert touring, club, portable sound reinforcement and more.
The internal signal processing structure can be configured as 2-way stereo + full-range, 3-way stereo, 4-way mono + full
range, 5-way mono + full range, 3-way stereo with a mono sub + full-range, 4-way stereo with mono sub and low
frequency and finally as a freely assignable 2 x 6 matrix router.
The DSP 600 replaces entire racks of signal processors previously needed to properly configure and control sound
reinforcement systems with a single Dual-Core DSP processor. The substantial advantages of the DSP 600 over
discrete signal processing racks include:
– 24-bit, 48 kHz digital signal path
– No patch cables to fail or add noise
– Optimal gain structure throughout all stages of signal processing; no gain matching from processor to processor
– Recallable factory and user presets; instant system reconfiguration for differing applications and performances
– Easy, intuitive operation and editing with a PC and IRIS-Net

FIR-TUNE
The DSP 600 includes Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filters at each output for loudspeaker linearization. Using FIR
filters has the following advantages, compared to using IIR filters (e.g. Bessel, Butterworth,…).:
– extremely linear frequency response
– very high stop-band attenuation
– linear phase systems
To sum up, FIR-TUNE allows the linearization of frequency and phase of your DYNACORD loudspeakers. Activating
FIRTUNE is as easy as loading a FIR Speaker Setting in the output channel of the DSP 600. The IRIS-Net software is
used for loading Speaker Settings, and lots of DYNACORD FIR Speaker Settings are included. Please refer to the
documentation of IRIS-Net for more details about using Speaker Settings.
Each DSP 600 Digital System Processor includes the following signal processing blocks:

INPUTS
– Pilot tone detection
– VU Metering of input signal
– Analog or digital (AES/EBU) Inputs
– 24-bit, 48 kHz A/D converters
– 10-band parametric equalizer

– 31-band graphic equalizer

– Delay

MATRIX ROUTER / MIXER
– Two inputs (stereo)
– Summed left / right (mono) input
– Six assignable outputs

OUTPUTS (EACH)
– Array control (5-band equalizer +delay)
– Cross-over (hi-pass / low-pass filters), with selectable filter types
– FIR filter with 512 Taps
– Delay
– Polarity
– Look-ahead Peak limiter with Peak RMS detection
– TEMP Limiter for long-term loudspeaker protection
– Level & Mute
– 24-bit, 48kHz D/A converters
– Pilot tone generator
– VU Metering
– Output assignment display LEDs; sub, low, mid & high
– Mute button
– Gain reduction meters

ADDITIONAL FEATURES INCLUDE:
– Electronically balanced XLR inputs and outputs
– XLR thru connectors (analog + AES/EBU)
– -6 dB switchable input level PAD
– Test generator (Sine, pink noise, white noise)
– Contact closure interface
– USB port (front) and Ethernet port (rear) for connection to PC with IRIS-Net software; preset editing and real time
parameter control and monitoring.
– Firmware updates via USB port or Ethernet port
– FLASH memory for preset storage and firmware upgrades
– 192 x 32 back-light graphic LCD display
– LCD navigation / editing controls
– DSP block direct access controls
– Auto-ranging internal power supply; 100-240 V AC, 50-60 Hz
– Standard IEC A.C. inlet with external, replaceable fuse

DSP 600 Device

Start by creating an DSP 600 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an DSP 600 from the Object Bar’s Devices category
or from the Devices window into the worksheet (see also chapters: Devices and Configurations menu). Selected
devices can be dragged around and repositioned at will. To select a device either click and drag the mouse to draw a
rectangle around it or hold down the Ctrl key and click on the device. In either case a successfully selected device is
shown with a red border around it.
Double clicking on an DSP 600 device icon opens the Userpanel.

DSP 600 Userpanel

The DSP 600 Userpanel provides access to the controls and indications on the DSP 600 front panel.
Indications and Functions of the DSP 600 Userpanel
Element Description
The level meter displays are meant for visual monitoring of the input signal levels,
individually showing the peak value of the correspondent input signal in dBu. The input
control should be set to a position so that the meter instruments indicate a level
between -6 and -12 dB. To prevent internal clipping, make sure that the CLIP LEDs are
not lit.
In online mode the LCD display is identical on the DSP 600 Userpanel and the device.
These LEDs indicate the peak level of the corresponding outputs. The level is shown as
headroom relative to the D/A clip or limiter threshold, as selected in the DSP 600
menu. The DSP 600 should be operated in a range, so that the clip-LEDs are not lit.
Otherwise, this could lead to internal clipping.
Each output channel has a four-segment gain reduction meter that shows the gain
reduction of the output channel Limiter on output signal; from -3dB to -12dB.
Each output channel has a four-segment function display for informational purposes
only. For any given configuration possible with the DSP 600, an output channel may
be identified as a sub, low, low/mid, mid, mid/hi, hi or full range output. One or two
adjacent LED are displayed to indicate all possible output bandpasses. (Full range is
indicated by no lit LED’s.)
Each output channel has a lighted Mute button. Pressing the Mute button turns off the
output of that channel. The button lights red as an alert. Press the Mute button again

to restore the output channel’s signal.
These controls are used to set the output levels of channels 1 to 6, allowing the
matching of the DSP 600 to the input levels of the devices chained in sequence.
Correctly setting these controls results in an improved S/N ratio. The digital output
gain control should be used when higher output levels are needed. Use the controls to
attenuate the output levels. It is not recommended to use the digital output gain
control for massive attenuation, since this would reduce the dynamic range of the D/A-
converters.
Label of input or output channels, the labels can be edited at the Config & Info
window.

Clicking on the DSP button opens the Configuration Panel, which provides access to all
DSP and speaker parameters.
Indicates the IP address of the DSP 600’s Ethernet port (factory setting:
192.168.1.100). Click to edit the address.
A click on the FIND button lets the LEDs on the front panel of the DSP 600 blink. When
on-line, this allows for easy identification of which DSP 600 the user is currently

communicating with. Click on the FIND button again to stop the LEDs blinking.
A click on the KPD button opens the Keypad dialog. When on-line, the buttons in the
Keypad dialog have the same function as the buttons on the front panel.

Keypad
Configuration Panel
Clicking on the „SET“ soft key in the DSP 600 Userpanel or selecting the entry DSP600 UI Dialog from the context
menu of the device opens the Configuration Panel. The Configuration Panel allows configuration of all DSP 600
parameters. It also provides access to different test functions. The window is divided into several pages according to
the corresponding function groups:

Dialog Description
Config & Info This page provides information about the DSP 600 and allows making several basic settings as well
DSP The DSP page provides an overview plus access to all DSP functions (Input, Array and Speaker) of
the DSP 600.
Speaker This page allows the loading and displaying speaker data.
Supervision & This page provides access to several settings for test generator and pilot tone detection.
Test
Frontpanel This page allows selection of which parameters should be visible or editable from the front panel.
Access

Config & Info

The Config & Info window provides information and basic settings for the selected DSP 600. Additionally, editing labels
and configuration of control port functions is possible as well.



Device Info
Element Description
DEVICE Shows the signal processor type

MODEL
FIRMWARE Shows the software‘s version number.
UPTIME Shows the uptime of the DSP 600.

Network Settings
Element Default Description
IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.100 IP address of the DSP 600
MAC ADDRESS MAC address of the DSP 600

Master/Slave Settings
MODE off The master/slave settings only work if more than one DSP 600 device
is connected to a network. Devices that are Master or Slave have
always identical parameter settings.
Select „Master“, if this DSP 600 should write the parameter settings
to one or more other DSP 600 (Slave). Select „Slave“, if the
parameter settings of this DSP 600 should be read from another DSP
600 (master). Select „off“, if the parameter settings of this DSP 600
should be independent from other devices.
NETWORK ID 0 Each master DSP 600 connected to the network must have an unique
network id. Enter the id of the Master DSP 600 the parameters
should be read from if this DSP 600 is used as „Slave“. Multiple DSP
600s can be Slaves to a single Master, if desired.
all groups If the MODE „Slave“ is selected, choose the parameter groups that
selected this DSP 600 should read from the Master DSP 600. Following groups
are available:
D: Parameters of the device
A or B: Parameters of input A or B
1 to 6: Parameters of output 1 to 6

Input Settings
MODE Analog Analog, Select the analog or the digital (AES/EBU) audio inputs of the DSP
AES/EBU 600.
INPUT GAIN 0 dB -60 to +12 dB Adjust the input gain of the audio input.
ADC OVFL The LED lights red for 2 seconds if there is an overflow of the A/D
converter.
-6dB PAD off on, off Input levels to the DSP 600 can be reduced 6dB prior to the A/D
converter to compensate for higher-level output from mixers and
other audio devices. For ideal signal to noise performance when
connecting the DSP 600 to high output level devices engage the 6dB
PAD („on“) rather than turning down the output of the connected
device.

Digital Input
LOCKED, ERROR If the LOCKED LED lights green, the input is synchronized to the
incoming signal and the audio is correctly transmitted. When signal
transmission fails, the ERROR LED lights red.
AES/EBU SAMPLE - 32 to 192 Shows the sampling rate of the incoming signal when the input has
RATE kHz been successfully synchronized.


Device & Channel Labels
Element Description
The labels of the DSP 600 and its input and output channels are shown in a clear
structure. All labels can be edited. Changes are immediately reflected in the
different panels and windows (User panel, flow diagram). The DEVICE label is
indicated on the display at the DSP 600 front panel.
CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) and / or = (equal) signs in a name is not
permissible.

Control Port
The Control Port of the DSP 600 provides five control inputs and a reference connection for ground. The control inputs
can be used for the recall of presets. For more information and electrical specifications of the control port, please refer
to the DSP 600 manuals.
Element Description
Description and current state of the input. The LED lights green if the input is connected
to ground.
Description of the preset to be recalled by the input.
Clears the preset assignment to the input.
Opens the Preset Recall for Port x dialog. This dialog allows assignment of a factory or
user preset to the input.

Preset Recall for Port x
This dialog lists the 60 Factory Presets and 30 User Presets of the DSP 600.


Element Description
Factory / User Switch between the Factory Presets or User Presets.
1-10, 11-20, 21-30, ... Select the preset group that should be listed.
U01...U10 Press the button of the preset that should be assigned to the input.

DSP
Element Description
The current preset is in Edit mode if the yellow EDIT button is indicated. Pressing
the EDIT button „compares“ the edited preset, if parameters have been altered, to

the original unedited preset. This compare function will audibly switch between
the altered parameters and the previously stored settings, allowing you to hear
the effect of any DSP changes that have been made. Use this feature to monitor
progress in editing or creating presets. Subsequently recalling a new preset will
prompt you to save changes, which you may do or not.

block is displayed in a light grey engaged field.

Element Description
Flow Diagram The signal flow display provides an overview of the DSP settings. This area also includes all
controls for the preset location/file management and configuration settings.
Input Parametric The Input Parametric EQ page provides access to the two 10-band parametric equalizers of the
EQ sound system processor inputs.
Input Graphic EQ The Input Graphic EQ page provides access to the two 31-band graphic equalizers of the sound
system processor inputs.
Input Delay This page allows the programming of delay lines for the input channels A and B.
Array Parametric The Array Parametric EQ page offers access to the 5-band parametric equalizers of the sound
EQ system processor outputs.
Array Delay This page allows the programming of delay lines for the output channels.
Output Parametric The Output Parametric EQ page offers access to the 6-band parametric equalizers of the sound
Output X-Over Frequency crossover-filters as well as the parameters gain and polarity for all output channels are
located in the Output X-Over area.
Output FIR This page provides a FIR-Filter for each output channel.
Output Delay This page allows the programming of delay lines for the output channels.
Output Limiters This page provides access to Peak limiter and TEMP limiter of each output channel.

FLOW DIAGRAM
The Flow Diagram window shows a signal flow diagram, which offers a quick overview of all DSP setting of the DSP
600.
– Output muting,
– routing channels,
– setting output level,
– editing configuration LEDs (Free Configuration mode only),
– import and export of Speaker Settings
can be done directly in the diagram. Clicking onto the corresponding function blocks lets you access all other DSP
parameters. All parameters that are necessary for the saving, loading and previewing of presets are also accessible
from this window.
The FLOW DIAGRAM window opens when clicking on the first (IN), fifth (RTG) or 13. block (OUT) in the Flow Diagram
Selector.



Function blocks
The caption below the function blocks is shown in green if the function, or at least one filter of the block, is activated.
Element Description
INPUT PEQ Block:

the Input Parametric EQ page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu,

which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding EQ block to any other DSP 600 INPUT
PEQ block within the same project.

INPUT GEQ Block:

The INPUT GEQ block displays the 31 graphical EQs of the corresponding input channel. The graph
shows the frequency response of the GEQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this
block opens the Input Graphic EQ page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy &

Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding GEQ block to any other DSP
600 GEQ block within the same project.
INPUT DELAY Block:

measurement unit. The graph shows the approximate usage of delay memory capacity. A single click
with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Input Delay page.

parameters of the corresponding Delay block to any other Input Delay block within the same
project.
ROUTING Block:
Here you can assign the output channel routing. The circles next to A and B allow selecting the input
signal for the corresponding output channel. The circle next to the + allows selecting the summed
input signal for the corresponding output channel.
ARRAY PEQ Block:



ARRAY DELAY Block:


project.

response of the PEQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the

Output Parametric EQ page.

frequency response that results from the set X-Over parameters. Three additional LEDs indicate the
status of gain trim (TRIM), polarity (INV) and delay (DLY). A single click with the left mouse button

DSP 600 X-Over block within the same project.

frequency response that results from the set FIR parameters. The LED indicate if the FIR Filter is

project.

together with the measurement unit. The graph shows the approximate usage of delay memory
capacity. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Speaker Processing

Delay page.
parameters of the corresponding Delay block to any other DSP 600 Speaker Delay block within the
same project.



parameters of the corresponding Limiters block to any other DSP 600 Limiters block within the
same project.
Output Block:
For any given configuration possible with the DSP 600, an output channel may be identified as a
sub, low, low/mid, mid, mid/hi, hi or full range output. One or two adjacent LED are displayed to

indicate all possible output band passes. (Full range is indicated by no lit LED’s.) When Free
Configuration is selected the LEDs can be set manually. In online mode the LEDs here and at the
front panel are identical.
A click with the right mouse button onto OUT 1 to OUT 6 opens the Copy & Paste menu, which
allows copying of all parameters of the corresponding output channel to any other DSP 600 output
channel within the same project.
The numerical field is identical to the numerical field below the level controls in the User panel,
click to edit the value. The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding
output to -∞. Clicking the MUTE button with the left mouse button mutes the corresponding output.
The MUTE button is virtually pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with the
left mouse button disables the mute- function and the output is again active. The MUTE button is
allows editing the description of the Speaker Setting file to be exported. Importing a Speaker
Setting automatically imports the corresponding Speaker File.

Status Indication
Element Description
Displays the number according to the actually audible preset. However, this is only true if
the EDITED LED lights green, i.e. no DSP parameter has been changed since the last

RECALL.
Indicates the name of the actually audible preset. Click to edit the preset name.
The EDITED indicator provides information whether a parameter has been altered since the
last RECALL. If the indicator lights red, parameters have been edited and therefore differ

from the ones of the preset that is shown.

The DSP 600 offers 7 pre-defined configurations. A configuration is a basic setting that
includes the routing of inputs and outputs, the function of the outputs (Sub, Lo, Mid, Hi,
Fullrange), as well as basic X-Over parameters. If you do not want to use one of the pre-
defined configurations, you have also the possibility to operate the DSP 600 in Free
Configuration mode. This mode offers access to all parameters and basically any input/
output routing can be programmed. Additionally, the output assignment (output function -
Sub, Lo, Mid, Hi, Fullrange) is also freely definable.
The DSP 600 defaults to Standard Edit mode wherein input and output channel parameters
are appropriately linked. In Full Edit mode, no parameter links are enforced, regardless of
the configuration selected. When switching from Full Edit mode to Standard Edit mode,
parameters are linked again. At the same time parameters settings in linked channels (upper
numbers) will be overwritten.

Recall a Preset
Element Description
Clicking the RECALL... button opens the Recall Preset dialog, where you can select and recall a Preset.
Caution!
Consequences

Store a Preset
Element Description
STORE saves all currently set DSP parameters together with the entered name into the current preset.
Store is only possible if a user program number is selected.

Clicking the STORE TO.... button opens the Store Preset... dialog. In this dialog the Program Number can
be selected.

Setting a Startup presets
Element Description
The indicated preset is loaded after power on or reset of the DSP 600.
Clicking the ASSIGN .. button opens the Set Initial Preset... dialog. In this dialog a factory preset or user
preset can be selected as startup preset.


name in a file on a PC, and to load sound system processor parameters from these files. Therefore, IRIS-Net creates a
sub- directory \Presets during installation, where all factory-presets are saved in to. It is recommended to save your
own presets in this directory as well. For improved organization, creating more sub-directories within the directory
\Presets is permissible.
Element Description
After clicking onto IMPORT PRESET an ”Open File …” dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the
After clicking onto EXPORT PRESET a ”Save File …” dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the
directory that you want to save the data in. Enter a file name (without extension). Click the SAVE
button to store all DSP parameters together with the corresponding file name. ”.ds” is automatically

INPUT PARAMETRIC EQ
programming highly variable speaker equalization to match a PA-system to different environmental and acoustical
requirements.
The Master-EQ is selected by clicking on the second block (PEQ) of the flow diagram selector or on the INPUT
PROCES-SING PEQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.



Element Description

Channel Selection
Element Description
copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other DSP 600 Input PEQ filter bank within the
same project.

Filter Parameters

the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which allows convenient
copying all EQ-parameters of the according filter to any

Hishelv, frequency, Q and gain.
Hipass, Loshelv / Hishelv creates a low shelving respectively high
Lopass shelving equalizer with the following editable parameters:

12dB/ shelving equalizers and low or high pass filters. Setting
Oct different slopes within the transmission range is possible.
31 / 63 / 20 Hz to FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a

125 / 20 kHz parametric EQ or the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi /
250 / Lo pass filters.
500 / 1k /
2k / 4k /
8k / 16k
Hz
0.7 0.4 to Q defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ. A

40.0 high Q-value results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-

(PEQ), value results in a broadband filter. The Q-value also sets
0.4 to 2.0 the quality and thus the response of Hi, Lo and All pass
(Hi-/ filters with slopes of 12dB/oct..
Lopass)
0 dB -18 to +12 GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation

dB (reduction) of parametric EQs or low shelving and high
The caption of this button indicates the current state of

the filter. Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the filter
(Bypass), which allows for quick A / B-evaluation of the
actual effect that a filter has on the sound.
Press the EQ FLAT button to reset the gain of all filters to

0 dB.



INPUT GRAPHIC EQ
Both input channels employ 31-band graphic equalizers each, which allow programming highly variable speaker
equalization to match a PA-system to different environmental and acoustical requirements.
The Master-EQ is selected by clicking on the third block (GEQ) of the flow diagram selector or on the INPUT PROCES-
SING GEQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.

Element Description

Channel Selection
Element Description

copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other DSP 600 Graphic EQ filter bank within the
same project.

Filter Parameters
SYMMETRICA SYMMETRICA Switching the graphic equalizer’s type between SYMMETRICAL

LQ L Q, Q, PROPORTIONAL Q and CONSTANT Q.
PROPORTIO SYMMETRICAL Q: The filters have an identical Q at all
NAL Q, accentuation settings. The lowering frequency responses are
CONSTANT Q symmetrical to the accentuation frequency responses.
accentuation or lowering of the filter increases, with the effect
that the equalizer becomes ”sharper” with increased EQ setting.
The quality defined by Q corresponds to the quality at full
accentuation or lowering.
4.3 3.0 to 10.0 Q sets the quality of all EQ bands. A high Q value results in a

Sets level amplification (accentuation) or reduction (lowering)

of a band. A band’s fader is indicated in red when the band has
been deactivated by marking the checkbox OFF. Pres- sing the
spacebar resets the currently selected fader to 0 dB.

Press the EQ FLAT button to reset the gain of all filters to 0 dB.


A white dot in the frequency response display represents an active filter (Checkbox OFF not engaged). Clicking with
the left mouse button on this dot and keeping the mouse button pressed down allows changing the selected filter’s
amplification by moving the mouse up or down. Clicking with the right mouse button on the white dot and keeping the
mouse button pressed down allows changing the Q-value of the filters by moving the mouse up or down.
For an improved overview the fader of the corresponding filter band appears in color as soon as the mouse cursor is

INPUT DELAY
Individual input delays can be set for each input channel of the DSP 600.
HINT: The Input Delay parameter is especially useful for delay lines. In this case the required delay depends only on the
position of the delay line and is identical for all ways, e.g. output channels of the DSP 600. By editing the Input Delay
parameter the delays of all output channels routed to this input are adjusted automatically.
You can select the input delay window by clicking onto the fourth block (DLY) in the Flow Diagram Selector or onto the
INPUT PROCESSING DELAY block in the flow diagram.

Channel Parameters
Channel name.



delay.

General Parameters
ft, in, mtr,
cm, µs, s
°C or °F.


ARRAY PARAMETRIC EQ
The Array Parametric EQ is selected by clicking on the sixth block (PEQ) of the flow diagram selector or onto the
ARRAY CONTROL PEQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.



Element Description
displaying the audible result at the sound system processor outputs.




filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting output 1, 2, 3, 4. 5 or output 6 for filter editing.

A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which allows

convenient copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other DSP 600
Array EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters


Lopass, shelving equalizer with the following editable parameters:
Allpass frequency, slope and gain.
Allpass is a filter which only affects the phase but not the


1k / 5k Hz Lo pass filters.


Allpass)


first first, ORDER (only available with Allpass filters) sets the desired
second filter order of an All pass filter. A 1st order All pass filter
rotates the phase by 180°, a 2nd order All pass filter
rotates the phase by 360°.



ARRAY DELAY

Individual array delays can be set for each output channel of the DSP 600.


You can select the Array Delay window by clicking onto the seventh block (DLY) in the Flow Diagram Selector or onto
the ARRAY CONTROL DELAY block in the flow diagram.



Channel Parameters
Channel name.




General Parameters
ft, in, mtr,
cm, µs, s
°C or °F.


The Output Parametric EQ is selected by clicking on the eight block (PEQ) of the flow diagram selector or on the
SPEAKER PROCESSING PEQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.



Element Description
Switch for scaling the dB- axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)




signals reveals very clearly the effect that the delays have on the frequency response, e.g. as notch
filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description


EQs of the corresponding output to any other DSP 600 Output EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters


menu, which allows convenient copying all EQ-parameters of the

Loshelv. PEQ is a parametric Peak-Dip-Filter with programmable frequency, Q and
Hishelv, gain.
Lopass, equalizer with the following editable parameters: frequency, slope and
Allpass gain.
6dB/Oct 6dB/Oct, SLOPE sets the steepness or filter-order of low or high shelving equalizers
12dB/ Oct and low or high pass filters. Setting different slopes within the
transmission range is possible.
20 / 62 / 20 Hz to 20 FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric EQ or the cut-

250 / 1k kHz off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass filters.
/ 4k / 16k Hz
0.7 0.4 to 40.0 Q defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ. A high Q-value
(PEQ), 0.4 to results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-value results in a broadband
2.0 filter. The Q-value also sets the quality and thus the response of Hi, Lo and
(Hi-/Lo-/ All pass filters with slopes of 12dB/oct..
Allpass)
0 dB -18 to +12 GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation (reduction) of


first first, second ORDER (only available with Allpass filters) sets the desired filter order of
an All pass filter. A 1st order All pass filter rotates the phase by 180°, a
2nd order All pass filter rotates the phase by 360°.
The caption of this button indicates the current state of the filter. Press
the ACTIVE button to deactivate the filter (Bypass), which allows for

quick A / B-evaluation of the actual effect that a filter has on the sound.


OUTPUT X-OVER
Clicking on the ninth block (XOV)in the Flow Diagram Selector or on the SPEAKER PROCESSING X-OVER block in the
large signal flow diagram opens the X-Over window.



Element Description
displaying the audible result at the sound system processor outputs. The audible result is displayed




filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description


X-Over settings of the corresponding output to any other X-Over within the same project.

Channel parameter

18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz to 20 kHz

thru, 16 kHz RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the LO-PASS filter.

Bessel 12dB, Butterworth parameters of the corresponding LO-PASS filter to any
12dB, Linkwitz/Riley 12dB, LO-PASS filters within the same project.
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz to 20 kHz

allow level adjustment among individual frequency bands.
summed signal of the two amplifier channels (switch set
to “Sum”).
delay values are included in DYNACORD Speaker
Settings and should not be edited.
Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the delay (Bypass),

which allows for quick A / B-evaluation of the actual effect

that the delay has on the sound.


OUTPUT FIR
Each output of the DSP 600 offers a 512 taps FIR filter.

The Output FIR is selected by clicking on the tenth block (FIR) of the flow diagram selector or on the SPEAKER PRO-
CESSING FIR block in the full-scale flow diagram.
Element Description




filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description

A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying of

all FIR filter settings of the corresponding output to any other FIR filter within the same project.

Channel Parameters
Element Description




The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader setting and additionally provides
the possibility for entering a desired value.


FIR-Filter Design
Hz
Hz
Allows selection of the FIR filter type of the corresponding

output channel.

OUTPUT DELAY

Individual output delays can be set for each output channel of the DSP 600.


HINT: The DSP 600’s output delays can be used to compensate for the positioning of cabinets or speaker arrays
relative to each other or the original sound source, for example aligning the PA to the stage or aligning the full-
range loudspeakers to the subwoofers. The Output Delay parameter determines the delay time of the

You can select the output delay window by clicking onto the eleventh block (DLY) in the Flow Diagram Selector or on
the SPEAKER PROCESSING DELAY block in the flow diagram.

Channel Parameters
Channel name.
A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which

allows convenient copying all delay parameters of the corresponding output
to any other delay within the same project.
0 ms 0 to 1000 Delay allows delaying the corresponding output channel’s audio signal by an
ms adjustable period of time.
Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the output delay.

General Parameters
ms ms, This lets you select the unit of measurement for the delays.
samples,
ft, in, mtr,
cm, µs, s
0 -20 to 60 Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In

°Celsiu °C case you have chosen a distance value as unit of
s -4 to 140 measurement for the delay, delay times are corrected in
°F relation to temperature. Temperatures can be entered as °C
or °F.


OUTPUT LIMITERS

Each output channel of the sound system processor offers a peak limiter and a TEMP limiter. These functions can be
accessed via the Output Limiters window to change the corresponding parameters providing reliable protection for the
Clicking on the 12. block (LIM) in the Flow Diagram Selector or double clicking on the SPEAKER PROCESSING
LIMITERS block in the large flow diagram opens the Output Limiters window.



Channel Selection
Element Description
Switch for selecting output 1, 2, 3, 4. 5 or output 6 for limiter editing.


limiter settings of the corresponding output to any other limiter within the same project.

Limiter Parameters
Default (39 Default (39 dB), S900, S1200, Select the amplifier type connected to output of the
dB) CL800, CL1200, CL1600, DSP 600.

CL2000, LX1600, LX2200,
LX3000, L1000 (0dBu), L1000
(+6dBu), L1000 (26dB), L1600
(0dBu), L1600 (+6dBu), L1600
(26dB), L2400 (0dBu), L2400
(+6dBu), L2400 (26dB), H
2500 (0dBu), H 2500 (32dB), H
2500
(35 dB), H 5000 (0dBu), H
5000 (32dB), H 5000 (35dB),
SL900, SL1200, SL1800,
SL2400, DSA8204, DSA8206,
DSA8209, DSA8212
123 Vpk AMP THRESH determines the audio signal level

above which the peak limiter starts operating.
2 dBu DSP THRESH determines the audio signal level

above which the peak limiter starts operating. This
value may change depending on the AMP- LIFIER
type that is selected, as the sensitivity and output
power are automatically calculated with the Vpk
User User, Hi, Mid, Lo, Sub TYPE allows a user to select a bandpass type, and
the software will enter appropriate default time
constants for the bandpass selected. DYNACORD
speaker settings include factory-defined time

100 ms 10 bis 1000 ms RELEASE determines how fast the limiter returns to

limiter.

is active.

Element Description
These indicators shows the reduction in dB that is applied to the audio signal by the Peak limiter
(PEAK) or the TEMP limiter (TEMP LIMITER). Level reduction is indicated as vertical yellow bar graph.

Editing Limiter Parameters by ”Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display

Speaker

The Speaker Dialog offers the possibility to load the acoustic measurement data of different loudspeaker systems,
assign it to the sound system processor channels and display the acoustic results. The speaker system datasets, which
are provided as “speaker files” (*.spk), contain factory-measured frequency- and phase responses of loudspeaker
systems.
sound system processor. Nevertheless, they provide the user with the possibility for creating loudspeaker systems
presets of a higher quality. Overlaying the measured frequency- and phase responses in the equalizer and crossover
windows enables the user to customize the filter parameters. The summing display mode shows the result of sound
system processor plus speaker transfer functions.
Clicking on the Speaker tab in the Configuration Panel opens the Speaker Dialog.


Element Description
display
Switch for adjusting the scale of the dB-axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)

Channel Parameters

field.

speakers results in a level increase of 6 dB within the selected channel.
Supervision & Test

The Supervision window allows configuration of the test and pilot tone generator, additionally the status of the pilot
tone detection is indicated.



Test generator
Sine Sine, White Select the mode of the test generator.

Noise, Pink
Noise
0 kHz 20 Hz to 20 Set the frequency of the generated sine signal. The FREQ parameter is
kHz only available is MODE Sine is selected.
Off On / Off Activate the test generator for input channel A and/or input channel B.
0 dBu -80 to 0 dBu Enter the signal level for input channel A or B in dBu.


Pilot tone
Off On / Off The checkbox activates a notch filter in input A or B. The notch filter filters
an existing pilot tone out of the input signal.
0 dBu -80 to 0 dBu This field sets the pilot tone detection’s threshold.
The pilot tone detection results in OK (LED lights green) when the level of
the pilot signal exceeds the threshold. Without a pilot tone being present
or if the signal level is below the set threshold, analysis results in a fault
message on the corresponding input channel (LED does not light).
Off On / Off Checkbox for activating or deactivating the pilot tone generator.
0 dBu -128 bis 0 Enter the pilot tone signal level in dBu.
dBu
Frontpanel Access
This dialog allows selecting which parameters should be visible and/or editable on the front panel of the DSP 600. By
default all parameters are visible (eye icon set) and can be edited (lock icon not set). Remove the eye icon of a
parameter that should not be visible on the front panel. Activate the lock icon of a parameter that should not be
editable at the front panel.



Dx46 FIR-DRIVE
The Electro-Voice Dx46 Digital System Processor is a universal two-input, six-output digital signal processor with the
configuration flexibility to handle a multitude of audio system needs and applications; installed sound, house of
worship, convention & meeting facilities, concert touring, club, portable sound reinforcement and more. The internal
signal processing structure can be configured as 2-way stereo + full-range, 3-way stereo, 4-way mono + fullrange, 5-way
mono + full range, 3-way stereo with a mono sub + full-range, 4-way stereo with mono sub and low frequency and
finally as a freely assignable 2 x 6 matrix router.
The Dx46 replaces entire racks of signal processors previously needed to properly configure and control sound
reinforcement systems with a single Dual-Core DSP processor. The substantial advantages of the Dx46 over discrete
signal processing racks include:
– 24-bit, 48 kHz digital signal path
– No patch cables to fail or add noise
– Optimal gain structure throughout all stages of signal processing; no gain matching from processor to processor
– Recallable factory and user presets; instant system reconfiguration for differing applications and performances
– Easy, intuitive operation and editing with a PC and IRIS-Net

FIR-DRIVE
The Dx46 includes Finite Impulse Response (FIR) filters at each output for loudspeaker linearization. Using FIR filters
has the following advantages, compared to using IIR filters (e.g. Bessel, Butterworth,…).:
– extremely linear frequency response
– very high stop-band attenuation
– linear phase systems
To sum up, FIR-DRIVE allows the linearization of frequency and phase of your Electro-Voice loudspeakers. Activating
FIRDRIVE is as easy as loading a FIR Speaker Setting in the output channel of the Dx46. The IRIS-Net software is used
for loading Speaker Settings, and lots of Electro-Voice FIR Speaker Settings are included. Please refer to the
documentation of IRIS-Net for more details about using Speaker Settings.
Each Dx46 Digital System Processor includes the following signal processing blocks:

INPUTS
– Pilot tone detection
– VU Metering of input signal
– Analog or digital (AES/EBU) Inputs
– 24-bit, 48 kHz A/D converters
– 31-band graphic equalizer
– Delay

MATRIX ROUTER / MIXER
– Two inputs (stereo)
– Summed left / right (mono) input
– Six assignable outputs

OUTPUTS (EACH)
– Array control (5-band equalizer +delay)
– Cross-over (hi-pass / low-pass filters), with selectable filter types
– FIR filter with 512 Taps
– Delay
– Polarity
– Look-ahead Peak limiter with Peak RMS detection
– TEMP Limiter for long-term loudspeaker protection
– Level & Mute
– 24-bit, 48kHz D/A converters
– Pilot tone generator
– VU Metering
– Output assignment display LEDs; sub, low, mid & high
– Mute button
– Gain reduction meters

ADDITIONAL FEATURES INCLUDE:
– Electronically balanced XLR inputs and outputs
– XLR thru connectors (analog + AES/EBU)
– -6 dB switchable input level PAD
– Test generator (Sine, pink noise, white noise)
– Contact closure interface
– USB port (front) and Ethernet port (rear) for connection to PC with IRIS-Net software; preset editing and real time
parameter control and monitoring.
– Firmware updates via USB port or Ethernet port
– FLASH memory for preset storage and firmware upgrades
– 192 x 32 back-light graphic LCD display
– LCD navigation / editing controls
– DSP block direct access controls
– Auto-ranging internal power supply; 100-240 V AC, 50-60 Hz
– Standard IEC A.C. inlet with external, replaceable fuse
Dx46 Device
Start by creating an Dx46 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an Dx46 from the Object Bar’s Devices category or from
the Devices window into the worksheet (see also chapters: Devices and Configurations menu). Selected devices can be
it or hold down the Ctrl key and click on the device. In either case a successfully selected device is shown with a red
border around it.
Double clicking on an Dx46 device icon opens the User panel.

Dx46 Userpanel
The Dx46 User panel provides access to the controls and indications on the Dx46 front panel.

Indications and Functions of the Dx46 Userpanel
Element Description
The level meter displays are meant for visual monitoring of the input signal levels,
individually showing the peak value of the correspondent input signal in dBu. The input
control should be set to a position so that the meter instruments indicate a level
between -6 and -12 dB. To prevent internal clipping, make sure that the CLIP LEDs are
not lit.
In online mode the LCD display is identical on the Dx46 User panel and the device.
These LEDs indicate the peak level of the corresponding outputs. The level is shown as
headroom relative to the D/A clip or limiter threshold, as selected in the Dx46 menu.
The Dx46 should be operated in a range, so that the clip-LEDs are not lit. Otherwise,
this could lead to internal clipping.
Each output channel has a four-segment gain reduction meter that shows the gain
reduction of the output channel Limiter on output signal; from -3dB to -12dB.
Each output channel has a four-segment function display for informational purposes
only. For any given configuration possible with the Dx46, an output channel may be
identified as a sub, low, low/mid, mid, mid/hi, hi or full range output. One or two
adjacent LEDs are displayed to indicate all possible output band-passes. (Full range is
indicated by no lit LED’s.)
Each output channel has a lighted Mute button. Pressing the Mute button turns off the
output of that channel. The button lights red as an alert. Press the Mute button again

to restore the output channel’s signal.
These controls are used to set the output levels of channels 1 to 6, allowing the
matching of the Dx46 to the input levels of the devices chained in sequence. Correctly
setting these controls results in an improved S/N ratio. The digital output gain control
should be used when higher output levels are needed. Use the controls to attenuate
the output levels. It is not recommended to use the digital output gain control for
massive attenuation, since this would reduce the dynamic range of the D/A-converters.
Label of input or output channels, the labels can be edited at the Config & Info
window.

Clicking on the DSP button opens the Configuration Panel, which provides access to all
DSP and speaker parameters.
Indicates the IP address of the Dx46’s Ethernet port (factory setting: 192.168.1.100).
Click to edit the address.
A click on the FIND button lets the LEDs on the front panel of the Dx46 blink. When on-
line, this allows for easy identification of which Dx46 the user is currently

communicating with. Click on the FIND button again to stop the LEDs blinking.
A click on the KPD button opens the Keypad dialog. When on-line, the buttons in the
Keypad dialog have the same function as the buttons on the front panel.

Keypad

Configuration Panel
Clicking on the „SET“ soft key in the Dx46 Userpanel or selecting the entry „Dx46 UI Dialog“ from the context menu of
the device opens the Configuration Panel. The Configuration Panel allows configuration of all Dx46 parameters. It also
provides access to different test functions. The window is divided into several pages according to the corresponding
function groups:
Dialog Description
Config & Info This page provides information about the Dx46 and allows making several basic settings as well as
programming control functions.
DSP The DSP page provides an overview plus access to all DSP functions (Input, Array and Speaker) of
the Dx46.
Speaker This page allows the loading and displaying speaker data.
Supervision & This page provides access to several settings for test generator and pilot tone detection.
Test
Frontpanel This page allows selection of which parameters should be visible or editable from the front panel.
Access
Config & Info

The Config & Info window provides information and basic settings for the selected Dx46. Additionally, editing labels
and configuration of control port functions is possible as well.


Device Info
Element Description
DEVICE Shows the signal processor type

MODEL
FIRMWARE Shows the software‘s version number.
UPTIME Shows the uptime of the Dx46.

Network Settings
IP ADDRESS 192.168.1.100 IP address of the Dx46
MAC ADDRESS MAC address of the Dx46

Master/Slave Settings
MODE off The master/slave settings only work if more than one Dx46 device is
connected to a network. Devices that are Master or Slave have always
idential parameter settings.
Select „Master“, if this Dx46 should write the parameter settings to
one or more other Dx46 (Slave). Select „Slave“, if the parameter
settings of this Dx46 should be read from another Dx46 (master).
Select „off“, if the parameter settings of this Dx46 should be
independent from other devices.
NETWORK ID 0 Each master Dx46 connected to the network must have an unique
network id. Enter the id of the Master Dx46 the parameters should be
read from if this Dx46 is used as „Slave“. Multiple Dx46s can be
Slaves to a single Master, if desired.
all groups If the MODE „Slave“ is selected, choose the parameter groups that
selected this Dx46 should read from the Master Dx46. Following groups are
available:
– D: Parameters of the device
– A or B: Parameters of input A or B
– 1 to 6: Parameters of output 1 to 6

Input Settings
MODE Analog Analog, Select the analog or the digital (AES/EBU) audio inputs of the Dx46.
AES/EBU
INPUT GAIN 0 dB -60 to +12 dB Adjust the input gain of the audio input.
ADC OVFL The LED lights red for 2 seconds if there is an overflow of the A/D
converter.
-6dB PAD off on, off Input levels to the Dx46 can be reduced 6dB prior to the A/D
converter to compensate for higher- level output from mixers and
other audio devices. For ideal signal to noise performance when con-
necting the Dx46 to high output level devices engage the 6dB PAD
(„on“) rather than turning down the output of the connected device.

Digital Input
LOCKED, ERROR If the LOCKED LED lights green, the input is synchronized to the
incoming signal and the audio is correctly transmitted. When signal
transmission fails, the ERROR LED lights red.
AES/EBU SAMPLE - 32 to 192 Shows the sampling rate of the incoming signal when the input has
RATE kHz been successfully synchronized.

Device & Channel Labels

Element Description
The labels of the Dx46 and its input and output channels are shown in a clear
structure. All labels can be edited. Changes are immediately reflected in the
different panels and windows (Userpanel, flow diagram). The DEVICE label is
indicated on the display at the Dx46 front panel.

Control Port
The Control Port of the Dx46 provides five control inputs and a reference connection for ground. The control inputs
can be used for the recall of presets. For more information and electrical specifications of the control port, please refer
to the Dx46 manuals.
Element Description
Description and current state of the input. The LED lights green if the input is connected
to ground.
Description of the preset to be recalled by the input.
Clears the preset assignment to the input.
Opens the Preset Recall for Port x dialog. This dialog allows assignment of a factory or
user preset to the input.

Preset Recall for Port x
This dialog lists the 60 Factory Presets and 30 User Presets of the Dx46.

Element Description
Factory / User Switch between the Factory Presets or User Presets.
1-10, 11-20, 21-30, ... Select the preset group that should be listed.
U01...U10 Press the button of the preset, that should be assigned to the input.
DSP
Element Description
The current preset is in Edit mode if the yellow EDIT button is indicated. Pressing
the EDIT button „compares“ the edited preset, if parameters have been altered, to
the original unedited preset. This compare function will audibly switch between
the altered parameters and the previously stored settings, allowing you to hear

the effect of any DSP changes that have been made. Use this feature to monitor
progress in editing or creating presets. Subsequently recalling a new preset will
prompt you to save changes, which you may do or not.

block is displayed in a light grey engaged field.

Element Description
Flow Diagram The signal flow display provides an overview of the DSP settings. This area also includes all
controls for the preset location/file management and configuration settings.
Input Parametric The Input Parametric EQ page provides access to the two 10-band parametric equalizers of the
EQ sound system processor inputs.
Input Graphic EQ The Input Graphic EQ page provides access to the two 31-band graphic equalizers of the sound
system processor inputs.
Input Delay This page allows the programming of delay lines for the input channels A and B.
Array Parametric The Array Parametric EQ page offers access to the 5-band parametric equalizers of the sound
Array Delay This page allows the programming of delay lines for the output channels.
Output Parametric The Output Parametric EQ page offers access to the 6-band parametric equalizers of the sound
Output X-Over Frequency crossover-filters as well as the parameters gain and polarity for all output channels are
located in the Output X-Over area.
Output FIR This page provides a FIR-Filter for each output channel.
Output Delay This page allows the programming of delay lines for the output channels.
Output Limiters This page provides access to Peak limiter and TEMP limiter of each output channel.

FLOW DIAGRAM
The Flow Diagram window shows a signal flow diagram, which offers a quick overview of all DSP setting of the Dx46.
– Output muting,
– routing channels,
– setting output level,
– editing configuration LEDs (Free Configuration mode only),
– import and export of Speaker Settings
can be done directly in the diagram. Clicking onto the corresponding function blocks lets you access all other DSP
parameters. All parameters that are necessary for the saving, loading and previewing of presets are also accessible
from this window.
The FLOW DIAGRAM window opens when clicking on the first (IN), fifth (RTG) or 13. block (OUT) in the Flow Diagram
Selector.



Function blocks
The caption below the function blocks is shown in green if the function, or at least one filter of the block, is activated.
Element Description
INPUT PEQ Block:

the Input Parametric EQ page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy & Paste menu,

which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding EQ block to any other Dx46 INPUT PEQ
block within the same project.

INPUT GEQ Block:

The INPUT GEQ block displays the 31 graphical EQs of the corresponding input channel. The graph
shows the frequency response of the GEQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this
block opens the Input Graphic EQ page. Clicking with the right mouse button opens the Copy &

Paste menu, which allows copying all parameters of the corresponding GEQ block to any other Dx46
GEQ block within the same project.
INPUT DELAY Block:

with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Input Delay page.

parameters of the corresponding Delay block to any other Input Delay block within the same
project.
ROUTING Block:
Here you can assign the output channel routing. The circles next to A and B allow selecting the input
signal for the corresponding output channel. The circle next to the + allows selecting the summed
input signal for the corresponding output channel.
ARRAY PEQ Block:



ARRAY DELAY Block:


project.

response of the PEQ block. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the

Output Parametric EQ page.

frequency response that results from the set X-Over parameters. Three additional LEDs indicate the
status of gain trim (TRIM), polarity (INV) and delay (DLY). A single click with the left mouse button

Dx46 X-Over block within the same project.

frequency response that results from the set FIR parameters. The LED indicate if the FIR Filter is

project.

together with the measurement unit. The graph shows the approximate usage of delay memory
capacity. A single click with the left mouse button onto this block opens the Speaker Processing

Delay page.
parameters of the corresponding Delay block to any other Dx46 Speaker Delay block within the
same project.



parameters of the corresponding Limiters block to any other Dx46 Limiters block within the same
project.
Output Block:
For any given configuration possible with the Dx46, an output channel may be identified as a sub,
low, low/mid, mid, mid/hi, hi or full range output. One or two adjacent LED are displayed to

indicate all possible output bandpasses. (Full range is indicated by no lit LED’s.) When Free
Configuration is selected the LEDs can be set manually. In online mode the LEDs here and at the
front panel are identical.
A click with the right mouse button onto OUT 1 to OUT 6 opens the Copy & Paste menu, which
allows copying of all parameters of the corresponding output channel to any other Dx46 output
channel within the same project.
The numerical field is identical to the numerical field below the level controls in the Userpanel, click
to edit the value. The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding output to
-∞. Clicking the MUTE button with the left mouse button mutes the corresponding output. The
MUTE button is virtually pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with the left
mouse button disables the mute- function and the output is again active. The MUTE button is
allows editing the description of the Speaker Setting file to be exported. Importing a Speaker
Setting automatically imports the corresponding Speaker File.

Status Indication
Element Description
Displays the number according to the actually audible preset. However, this is only true if
the EDITED LED lights green, i.e. no DSP parameter has been changed since the last

RECALL.
Indicates the name of the actually audible preset. Click to edit the preset name.
The EDITED indicator provides information whether a parameter has been altered since the
last RECALL. If the indicator lights red, parameters have been edited and therefore differ

from the ones of the preset that is shown.

The Dx46 offers 7 pre-defined configurations. A configuration is a basic setting that includes
the routing of inputs and outputs, the function of the outputs (Sub, Lo, Mid, Hi, Fullrange),
as well as basic X-Over parameters. If you do not want to use one of the pre- defined
configurations, you have also the possibility to operate the Dx46 in Free Configuration
mode. This mode offers access to all parameters and basically any input/output routing can
be programmed. Additionally, the output assignment (output function - Sub, Lo, Mid, Hi,
Fullrange) is also freely definable.
The Dx46 defaults to Standard Edit mode wherein input and output channel parameters are
appropriately linked. In Full Edit mode, no parameter links are enforced, regardless of the
configuration selected. When switching from Full Edit mode to Standard Edit mode,
parameters are linked again. At the same time parameters settings in linked channels (upper
numbers) will be overwritten.

Recall a Preset
Element Description
Clicking the RECALL... button opens the Recall Preset dialog, where you can select and recall a Preset.
Caution!
Consequences

Store a Preset
Element Description
STORE saves all currently set DSP parameters together with the entered name into the current preset.
Store is only possible if a user program number is selected.

Clicking the STORE TO.... button opens the Store Preset... dialog. In this dialog the Program Number can
be selected.

Setting a Startup presets
Element Description
The indicated preset is loaded after power on or reset of the Dx46.
Clicking the ASSIGN .. button opens the Set Initial Preset... dialog. In this dialog a factory preset or user
preset can be selected as startup preset.


name in a file on a PC, and to load sound system processor parameters from these files. Therefore, IRIS-Net creates a
sub- directory \Presets during installation, where all factory-presets are saved in to. It is recommended to save your
own presets in this directory as well. For improved organization, creating more sub-directories within the directory
\Presets is permissible.
Element Description
After clicking onto IMPORT PRESET an ”Open File …” dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the
After clicking onto EXPORT PRESET a ”Save File …” dialog box appears. Enter the correct path of the
directory that you want to save the data in. Enter a file name (without extension). Click the SAVE
button to store all DSP parameters together with the corresponding file name. ”.ds” is automatically

INPUT PARAMETRIC EQ

programming highly variable speaker equalization to match a PA-system to different environmental and acoustical
requirements.
The Master-EQ is selected by clicking on the second block (PEQ) of the flow diagram selector or on the INPUT
PROCESSING PEQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.



Element Description

Channel Selection
Element Description
copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other Dx46 Input PEQ filter bank within the
same project.

Filter Parameters


Lopass shelving equalizer with the following editable parameters:


250 / Lo pass filters.
500 / 1k /
2k / 4k /
8k / 16k
Hz


(Hi-/ filters with slopes of 12dB/oct..
Lopass)



0 dB.



INPUT GRAPHIC EQ

Both input channels employ 31-band graphic equalizers each, which allow programming highly variable speaker
equalization to match a PA-system to different environmental and acoustical requirements.
The Master-EQ is selected by clicking on the third block (GEQ) of the flow diagram selector or on the INPUT PROCES-
SING GEQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.

Element Description

Channel Selection
Element Description

copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other Dx46 Graphic EQ filter bank within the
same project.

Filter Parameters
SYMMETRICA SYMMETRICA Switching the graphic equalizer’s type between SYMMETRICAL

LQ L Q, Q, PROPORTIONAL Q and CONSTANT Q.
PROPORTIO SYMMETRICAL Q: The filters have an identical Q at all
NAL Q, accentuation settings. The lowering frequency responses are
CONSTANT Q symmetrical to the accentuation frequency responses.
accentuation or lowering of the filter increases, with the effect
that the equalizer becomes ”sharper” with increased EQ setting.
The quality defined by Q corresponds to the quality at full
accentuation or lowering.
4.3 3.0 to 10.0 Q sets the quality of all EQ bands. A high Q value results in a

Sets level amplification (accentuation) or reduction (lowering)

of a band. A band’s fader is indicated in red when the band has
been deactivated by marking the checkbox OFF. Pres- sing the
spacebar resets the currently selected fader to 0 dB.



A white dot in the frequency response display represents an active filter (Checkbox OFF Off not engaged). Clicking
with the left mouse button on this dot and keeping the mouse button pressed down allows changing the selected
filter’s amplification by moving the mouse up or down. Clicking with the right mouse button on the white dot and
keeping the mouse button pressed down allows changing the Q-value of the filters by moving the mouse up or down.
For an improved overview the fader of the corresponding filter band appears in color as soon as the mouse cursor is

INPUT DELAY
Individual input delays can be set for each input channel of the Dx46.
HINT: The Input Delay parameter is especially useful for delay lines. In this case the required delay depends only on
the position of the delay line and is identical for all ways, e.g. output channels of the Dx46. By editing the Input
Delay parameter the delays of all output channels routed to this input are adjusted automatically.
You can select the input delay window by clicking onto the fourth block (DLY) in the Flow Diagram Selector or onto the
INPUT PROCESSING DELAY block in the flow diagram.

Channel Parameters
Channel name.



delay.

General Parameters
ft, in, mtr,
cm, µs, s
°C or °F.


ARRAY PARAMETRIC EQ

possibility to select “All pass” as filter type, these filters are identical to the ones of the input EQ's.
The Array Parametric EQ is selected by clicking on the sixth block (PEQ) of the flow diagram selector or onto the
ARRAY CONTROL PEQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.



Element Description




filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description


convenient copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other Dx46 Array
EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters




1k / 5k Hz Lo pass filters.


Allpass)



the filter. Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the filter

A white dot in the frequency response display represents an active filter (ACTIVE not engaged). Clicking with the left

ARRAY DELAY

Individual array delays can be set for each output channel of the Dx46.


You can select the Array Delay window by clicking onto the seventh block (DLY) in the Flow Diagram Selector or onto
the ARRAY CONTROL DELAY block in the flow diagram.



Channel Parameters
Channel name.




General Parameters
ft, in, mtr,
cm, µs, s
°C or °F.



The Output Parametric EQ is selected by clicking on the eight block (PEQ) of the flow diagram selector or on the
SPEAKER PROCESSING PEQ block in the full-scale flow diagram.



Element Description




filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description


convenient copying all EQs of the corresponding output to any other Dx46 Output
EQ-filter bank within the same project.

Filter Parameters




250 / 1k 20 kHz parametric EQ or the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi /
/ 4k / 16k Lo pass filters.
Hz



Allpass)



0 dB.


OUTPUT X-OVER
Clicking on the ninth block (XOV)in the Flow Diagram Selector or on the SPEAKER PROCESSING X-OVER block in the
large signal flow diagram opens the X-Over window.



Element Description




filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description

A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying

all X-Over settings of the corresponding output to any other X-Over within the same project.

Channel parameter
thru, 35 Hz RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the HIPASS filter.

18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz to 20 kHz

thru, 16 kHz RESPONSE: This parameter block represents the LOPASS filter.
Bessel 12dB, Butterworth parameters of the corresponding LO-PASS filter to any
12dB, Linkwitz/Riley 12dB, LO-PASS filters within the same project.
18dB, Bessel 24dB,
Riley 24dB
FREQ:
20 Hz to 20 kHz

allow level adjustment among individual frequency
bands.
summed signal of the two amplifier channels (switch set
to “Sum”).
delay values are included in Electro-Voice Speaker
Settings and should not be edited.
Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the delay


actual effect that the delay has on the sound.


OUTPUT FIR


Each output of the Dx46 offers a 512 taps FIR filter.

The Output FIR is selected by clicking on the tenth block (FIR) of the flow diagram selector or on the SPEAKER PRO-
CESSING FIR block in the full-scale flow diagram.

Element Description



filter effect.

Channel Selection
Element Description

A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy & Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying

of all FIR filter settings of the corresponding output to any other FIR filter within the same project.

Channel Parameters
Element Description




The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader setting and additionally provides
the possibility for entering a desired value.


FIR-Filter Design

Hz
Hz

Allows selection of the FIR filter type of the corresponding

output channel.

OUTPUT DELAY
Individual output delays can be set for each output channel of the Dx46.
HINT: The Dx46’s output delays can be used to compensate for the positioning of cabinets or speaker arrays
relative to each other or the original sound source, for example aligning the PA to the stage or aligning the full-
range loudspeakers to the subwoofers. The Output Delay parameter determines the delay time of the
You can select the output delay window by clicking onto the eleventh block (DLY) in the Flow Diagram Selector or on
the SPEAKER PROCESSING DELAY block in the flow diagram.


Channel Parameters
Channel name.
A click with the right mouse button opens the ”Copy

& Paste” menu, which allows convenient copying all
delay parameters of the corresponding output to any
other delay within the same project.
0 ms 0 to 1000 Delay allows delaying the corresponding output

ms channel’s audio signal by an adjustable period of
time.
Press the ACTIVE button to deactivate the output

delay.

General Parameters
ms ms, This lets you select the unit of measurement for the delays.
samples,
ft, in, mtr,
cm, µs, s
0 -20 to 60 Entering the actual ambient temperature is possible here. In

°Celsiu °C case you have chosen a distance value as unit of
s -4 to 140 measurement for the delay, delay times are corrected in
°F relation to temperature. Temperatures can be entered as °C
or
°F.


OUTPUT LIMITERS
Each output channel of the sound system processor offers a peak limiter and a TEMP limiter. These functions can be
accessed via the Output Limiters window to change the corresponding parameters providing reliable protection for the
Clicking on the 12. block (LIM) in the Flow Diagram Selector or double clicking on the SPEAKER PROCESSING
LIMITERS block in the large flow diagram opens the Output Limiters window.



Channel Selection
Element Description


convenient copying all limiter settings of the corresponding output to any other
limiter within the same project.

Limiter Parameters
Default (39 User, Default (39 dB), Q44, Select the amplifier type connected to output of the
dB) Q66, CP1200, CP1800, Dx46.

CP2200, CP3000S, CP4000S,
P1200 (0dBu), P1200 (+6dBu),
P1200 (26dB), P2000 (0dBu),
P2000 (+6dBu), P2000 (26dB),
P3000 (0dBu), P3000 (+6dBu),
P3000 (26dB), TG5 (0dBu),
TG5 (32dB), TG5 (35dB), TG7
(0dBu), TG7 (32dB), TG7
(35dB), Q44 MKII, Q66 MKII,
Q99, Q1212, CPS2.4, CPS2.6,
CPS2.9, CPS2.12
123 Vpk AMP THRESH determines the audio signal level

above which the peak limiter starts operating.
2 dBu DSP THRESH determines the audio signal level

above which the peak limiter starts operating. This
value may change depending on the AMP- LIFIER
type that is selected, as the sensitivity and output
power are automatically calculated with the Vpk
User User, Hi, Mid, Lo, Sub TYPE allows a user to select a bandpass type, and
the software will enter appropriate default time
constants for the bandpass selected. Electro- Voice
speaker settings include factory-defined time

100 ms 10 bis 1000 ms RELEASE determines how fast the limiter returns to

limiter.

is active.

Element Description
These indicators show the reduction in dB that is applied to the audio signal by the Peak limiter
(PEAK) or the TEMP limiter (TEMP LIMITER). Level reduction is indicated as vertical yellow bar graph.

Editing Limiter Parameters by “Dragging the Mouse” in the Graphics Display

Speaker
The Speaker Dialog offers the possibility to load the acoustic measurement data of different loudspeaker systems,
assign it to the sound system processor channels and display the acoustic results. The speaker system datasets, which
are provided as ”speaker files” (*.spk), contain factory-measured frequency- and phase responses of loudspeaker
systems.
sound system processor. Nevertheless, they provide the user with the possibility for creating loudspeaker systems
presets of a higher quality. Overlaying the measured frequency- and phase responses in the equalizer and crossover
windows enables the user to customize the filter parameters. The summing display mode shows the result of sound
system processor plus speaker transfer functions.
Clicking on the Speaker tab in the Configuration Panel opens the Speaker Dialog.



Element Description
display
Switch for adjusting the scale of the dB-axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or to 50 dB (± 25 dB)

Channel Parameters

field.


speakers results in a level increase of 6 dB within the selected channel.
Supervision & Test

The Supervision window allows configuration of the test and pilot tone generator, additionally the status of the pilot
tone detection is indicated.

Test generator
Sine Sine, White Select the mode of the test generator.

Noise, Pink
Noise
0 kHz 20 Hz to 20 Set the frequency of the generated sine signal. The FREQ parameter is
kHz only available is MODE Sine is selected.
Off On / Off Activate the test generator for input channel A and/or input channel B.
0 dBu -80 to 0 dBu Enter the signal level for input channel A or B in dBu.

Pilot tone
Off On / Off The checkbox activates a notch filter in input A or B. The notch filter filters
an existing pilot tone out of the input signal.
0 dBu -80 to 0 dBu This field sets the pilot tone detection’s threshold.
The pilot tone detection results in OK (LED lights green) when the level of
the pilot signal exceeds the threshold. Without a pilot tone being present
or if the signal level is below the set threshold, analysis results in a fault
message on the corresponding input channel (LED does not light).
Off On / Off Checkbox for activating or deactivating the pilot tone generator.
0 dBu -128 bis 0 Enter the pilot tone signal level in dBu.
dBu
Frontpanel Access
This dialog allows selecting which parameters should be visible and/or editable on the front panel of the Dx46. By
default all parameters are visible (eye icon set) and can be edited (lock icon not set). Remove the eye icon of a
parameter that should not be visible on the front panel. Activate the lock icon of a parameter that should not be
editable at the front panel.



Dx46 and DSP 600

The following chapters are valid for Dx46 and DSP 600.

The ASCII Control Protocol allows controlling and polling all parameters. It can be used as interface for the connection
of media control systems or facility management systems. Communication is performed via USB port or Ethernet port
(telnet) using an easy to implement ASCII protocol which allows easy integration of the device in media and/or touch
panel applications. For programming notes and a complete description of the protocol please refer to the following
chapters.

RS-232 SETTINGS
When connecting the Dx46/DSP 600 to the PC via USB, the RS-232 interface of the device appears as a virtual port in
the operating system. The virtual port is preconfigured for full duplex operation. Set values are:
Parameter Setting
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1

The command string "*** Dx46 command mode entered ***" or "*** DSP 600 command mode entered ***" is sent to RS-
232 once the device is powered up and has completed its boot sequence. The RS-232 interface is now ready for
communication.

ETHERNET SETTINGS
Factory set values of the Ethernet port are:
Parameter Setting
IP address 192.168.1.100
Telnet port 21

A Telnet session can be established with an application such as Windows HyperTerminal. The command string "***
Dx46 command mode entered ***" or "*** DSP 600 command mode entered ***" will be displayed when the ASCII
Control Protocol has started successfully. The device is now ready for ASCII Control Protocol communication.

A simple ASCII string protocol, which is referred to as ASCII Control Protocol is implemented in the device. Commands
are organized in a tree structure with up to 4 levels. The slash "/" or a space " " can be used for separation. The
question mark "?" can be utilized to query parameter settings or commands of the corresponding level. To step down
one level you have to enter "..". Use "/" to get back to level 1.

Rea
Ebene1 Ebene2 Ebene3 Ebene4 d Values Description
Writ
e
/COMM /LINEFEED R/ ON, OFF Linefeed Status for RS232

W communication
/PROMPT R/ ON, OFF Prompt Status for RS232 communication

W
/ECHO R/ ON, OFF Echo Status for RS232 communication

W

Commands for device front
/FRONT /CONTRAST R/ -10 to +10 Contrast of displays

W
/ R/ 0 to 10 Brightness of displays
BRIGHTNESS W
/INTENSITY R/ 0 to 10 Brightness of LEDs

W
/VU /MODE R/ FAST, SLOW, Mode of VU meter

W PEAK
/REF R/ CLIP, LIMIT Reference for VU meter

W
/SAVER R/ ON, OFF State of screen saver

W

Commands for Control Port
/ /PINS R 0, 1 State of control inputs (1 = open, 0 =

CONTR closed)
OL
/STATE R Indicates the highest number of all

control inputs with state „0“.
/PORT1 R/ Preset to be loaded when Port 1 is

W closed.
... R/
W
/PORT5 R/ Preset to be loaded when Port 5 is

W closed.


Commands for Master/Slave settings
/DCMS /MODE R/ OFF, MAS- The mode setting only works if more
W TER, SLAVE than one Dx46/DSP 600 device is
connected to an Ethernet. Devices that
are Master or Slave have always identical
parameter settings. Select „MASTER“, if
this Dx46/ DSP 600 should write the
parameter settings to one or more other
Dx46/DSP 600 (Slave). Select „SLAVE“,
if the parameter settings of this
Dx46/DSP 600 should be read from
another Dx46/DSP 600 (master). Select
„OFF“, if the parameter settings of this
Dx46/DSP 600 should be independent
from other devices.
/ID R/ 0 to 255 Each master Dx46/DSP 600 connected

W to the Ethernet must have an unique
network id. Enter the id of the Master
Dx46/DSP 600 the parameters should be
read from if this Dx46/DSP 600 is used
as “SLAVE”.
/MASK R/ DEV, A, B, 1, If the mode „SLAVE“ is selected, choose

W 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 the parameter groups that this DSP 600
should read from the Master DSP 600.
Following groups are available:
DEV: Parameters of the device
A or B: Parameters of input A or B
1 to 6: Parameter of output 1 to 6

Service commands
/ /VER R Read software version

SERVIC
E
/AES /LOCKED R ON, OFF Read locked state
/ERROR R ON, OFF Read error state (OFF = no error)
/ R Read sample rate in kHz

SMPRATE
/ETH /MAC R/ Read MAC address

W
/IP R/ Read or write IP address

W

/MASK R/ Read or write network mask

W
/ R/ Read or write default gateway

GATEWAY W
/ONTIME R Read uptime of the device
/PILOT R Read pilot supervision of inputs

Commands for DSP parameter and

presets
/ /PRM /DEVICE /IDX00 R/ Read and write of device parameter

PRESET W values via index numbers. For further
details please refer to Device Parameter
...
Index Table
/IDX0B R/
W
/IN_A /IDX00 R/ Read and write of input channel A DSP

W parameter values via index numbers. For
...
Parameter Index Table.
/IDX86 R/
W
/IN_B ... Same as above for input channel B
/OUT_1 /IDX00 R/ Read and write of output channel 1 DSP

W parameter values via index numbers. For
...
Parameter Index Table
/IDX62 R/
W
...
/OUT_6 ... Same as above for output channel 6
/ /LOAD R/ U01 to U30, Read last loaded/saved preset. If the

PRESET W F01 to F60 preset was edited, "(edited)" is
indicated. Write to load a preset.
/SAVE W U01 to U30 Write to save a user preset.
/LIST R List of all presets.

DEVICE PARAMETER INDEX TABLE
Index Parameter Values Description
/IDX00 lock flag list for device NONE, 0 to 9 “Set” means locked
parameters

/IDX01 hide flag list for device NONE, 0 to 9 “Set” means hidden
parameters
/IDX02 device name max. 30

characters
/IDX03 audio input 0/1 0 = analog input, 1 = AES input
/IDX04 air temperature -20 to +60 Air temperature in degree Celsius
/IDX05 Test generator mode 0, 1, 2 0 = sine, 1 = white noise, 2 = pink noise
/IDX06 Test generator frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX07 sample rate 1 1 = 48 kHz
/IDX08 preset title max. 30

characters
/IDX09 preset configuration 0 to 6 0 = 2way stereo+FR 1 = 3way stereo

2 = 4way+FR
3 = 5way+FR
4 = free configuration
5 = 3way stereo monosub 6 = 4way stereo monosub
/IDX0A analog 6dB input damp 0/1 0 = 0 dB

1 = 6dB analog damp at analogue audio inputs
/IDX0B Edit mode 0/1 0 = standard (link handling active)

1 = full (independent parameter access to all
channels / xovers)

Input channel A or B
/IDX00 lock flag list for device NONE, 0 to „Set“ means locked
parameters 84
/IDX01 hide flag list for device NONE, 0 to „Set“ means hidden
parameters 84
/IDX02 Test generator enable 0/1 0 = disable, 1 = enable
/IDX03 Test generator level -80 to 0 signal level in dBu
/IDX04 pilot 19kHz detection -80 to 0 signal level in dBu

threshold
/IDX05 pilot 19kHz notch filter 0/1 0 = disable, 1 = enable
/IDX06 parametric eq1 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX07 parametric eq1 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 = allpass
/IDX08 parametric eq1 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX09 parametric eq1 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz

/IDX0A parametric eq1 gain -18 to 12 dB
/IDX0B parametric eq1 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX0C parametric eq2 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX0D parametric eq2 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 = allpass
/IDX0E parametric eq2 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX0F parametric eq2 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX10 parametric eq2 gain -18 to 12 dB
/IDX11 parametric eq2 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX1A parametric eq4 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX1B parametric eq4 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX1C parametric eq4 gain -18 to 12 dB
/IDX1D parametric eq4 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX1E parametric eq5 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX1F parametric eq5 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 = allpass
/IDX2A parametric eq7 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass

/IDX2B parametric eq7 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 = allpass
/IDX2C parametric eq7 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX2D parametric eq7 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX2E parametric eq7 gain -18 to 12 dB
/IDX2F parametric eq7 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX3A parametric eq9 gain -18 to 12 dB
/IDX3B parametric eq9 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX3C parametric eq10 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX3D parametric eq10 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 = allpass
/IDX3E parametric eq10 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX3F parametric eq10 20 to 20000 Hz

frequency
/IDX42 graphic eq type 0 to 2 0 = symQ

1 = const.Q
2 = prop.Q
/IDX43 graphic eq quality 3 to 10
/IDX44 graphic eq bypass band 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass

20Hz
/IDX45 graphic eq gain band -12 to +12 dB

20Hz

25Hz

25Hz


31.5Hz

31.5Hz
/IDX4A graphic eq bypass band 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass

40Hz
/IDX4B graphic eq gain band -12 to +12 dB

40Hz
/IDX4C graphic eq bypass band 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass

50Hz
/IDX4D graphic eq gain band -12 to +12 dB

50Hz
/IDX4E graphic eq bypass band 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass

63Hz
/IDX4F graphic eq gain band -12 to +12 dB

63Hz

80Hz

80Hz

100Hz

100Hz

125Hz

125Hz

160Hz

160Hz

200Hz

200Hz

250Hz

250Hz


315Hz

315Hz

400Hz

400Hz

500Hz

500Hz

630Hz

630Hz

800Hz

800Hz

1kHz
/IDX67 graphic eq gain band 1kHz -12 to +12 dB

1.25kHz

1.25kHz

1.6kHz

1.6Hz

2kHz
/IDX6D graphic eq gain band 2kHz -12 to +12 dB

2.5kHz

2.5kHz


3.15kHz

3.15kHz

4kHz

5kHz

6.3kHz

6.3kHz

8kHz

10kHz

10kHz

12.5kHz

12.5kHz

16kHz

16kHz

20kHz

20kHz
/IDX82 delay bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX83 delay 0 to 1000 default milliseconds, units can be appended (ms, samples, feet,
inch, meter, cm, us, sec)
/IDX84 input mute 0/1 0 = normal, 1 = muted

/IDX85 input channel name max. 30

characters
/IDX86 audio input gain -60 to +12 audio input gain in dB

Output channel 1 to 6
/IDX00 lock flag list for output NONE, 0 to 61 „Set“ means locked
parameters
/IDX01 hide flag list for output NONE, 0 to 61 „Set“ means hidden
parameters
/IDX02 connected amp model ASCII chars Default, User or Dynacord/ EV amp types
/IDX03 gain of amp model „User“ 0 to 60 dB
/IDX04 Pilot generator enable 0/1 0 = off, 1 = on
/IDX05 Pilot generator level -128 to 0 dB
/IDX06 route A, A+B, B selects the input signal
/IDX07 array delay bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX08 array delay 0 to 100 default milliseconds, units can be appended (ms, samples,
feet, inch, meter, cm, us, sec)
/IDX09 xover delay bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX0A xover delay 0 to 20 default milliseconds, units can be appended (ms, samples,
/IDX0B output delay bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX0C output delay 0 to 1000 default milliseconds, units can be appended (ms, samples,
/IDX0D array peq 1 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX0E array peq 1 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX0F array peq 1 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX10 array peq 1 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX11 array peq 1 gain -18 to +12 dB
/IDX12 array peq 1 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX13 array peq 2 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX14 array peq 2 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX15 array peq 2 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB

/IDX1A array peq 3 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX1B array peq 3 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX1C array peq 3 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX1D array peq 3 gain -18 to +12 dB
/IDX1E array peq 3 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX1F array peq 4 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass

allpass

allpass
/IDX2A array peq 5 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX2B speaker peq 1 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX2C speaker peq 1 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX2D speaker peq 1 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX2E speaker peq 1 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX2F speaker peq 1 gain -18 to +12 dB
/IDX30 speaker peq 1 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX31 speaker peq 2 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX32 speaker peq 2 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX33 speaker peq 2 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX34 speaker peq 2 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz

/IDX35 speaker peq 2 gain -18 to +12 dB

allpass
/IDX3A speaker peq 3 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX3B speaker peq 3 gain -18 to +12 dB
/IDX3C speaker peq 3 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX3D speaker peq 4 bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX3E speaker peq 4 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX3F speaker peq 4 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB

allpass
/IDX4A speaker peq 6 type 0 to 5 0 = peq, 1 = loshelv, 2 = hishelv, 3 = locut, 4 = hicut, 5 =

allpass
/IDX4B speaker peq 6 slope 1/2 1 = 6dB, 2 = 12dB
/IDX4C speaker peq 6 frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX4D speaker peq 6 gain -18 to +12 dB
/IDX4E speaker peq 6 quality 0.4 to 40
/IDX4F hipass xover type 0 to 17 0 = off, 1 = butter6, 2 = s12q05, 3 = s12q06, 4 = s12q07, 5

= s12q08, 6 =
s12q10, 7 = s12q12, 8 = s12q15, 9 = s12q20, 10 =
bessel12, 11 = butter12, 12
= linkwz12, 13 = bessel18, 14 = butter18, 15 = bessel24, 16
= butter24, 17 = linkwz24

/IDX50 hipass xover frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX51 lopass xover type 0 to 17 0 = off, 1 = butter6, 2 = s12q05, 3 = s12q06, 4 = s12q07, 5

= s12q08, 6 =
s12q10, 7 = s12q12, 8 = s12q15, 9 = s12q20, 10 =
bessel12, 11 = butter12, 12
= linkwz12, 13 = bessel18, 14 = butter18, 15 = bessel24, 16
= butter24, 17 = linkwz24
/IDX52 lopass xover frequency 20 to 20000 Hz
/IDX53 FIR filter bypass 0/1 0 = active, 1 = bypass
/IDX54 FIR filter max. 41 read only

characters
/IDX55 polarity 0/1 0 = Normal, 1 = Invertiert
/IDX56 mute 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = MUTE
/IDX57 level -128 to +6 dB
/IDX58 level trim -30 to +6 dB
/IDX59 limiter bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX5A limiter type 0 to 4 0 = user, 1 = hi, 2 = mid, 3 = lo, 4 = sub
/IDX5B limiter threshold +11 to +71 dBu at amp output
/IDX5C limiter attack time 0 to 50 milliseconds
/IDX5D limiter release time 10 to 999 milliseconds
/IDX5E config type 0 to 15 binary LED pattern
/IDX5F config description max. 18

characters
/IDX60 input channel name max. 30

characters
/IDX61 thermo limiter bypass 0/1 0 = ON, 1 = BYPASS
/IDX62 thermo limiter setting set of 12 values whitespace separated complete list of values in the order:
r_vc c_vc r_m c_m z brms ctime atime rtime t_max t_wall
t_knee

Updating the firmware

The Device Scan dialog allows updating the firmware of the Dx46/DSP 600.

Caution!
The Dx46/DSP 600 firmware should be updated only, if problems with the firmware used so far
! exist and these can be fixed by using a new firmware version.
Consequences

1. Connect the Dx46/DSP 600 to your PC via Ethernet or USB.
2. Start the IRIS-Net application.
3. Selecting the entry Device Scan in the Tools menu lets you access the Device Scan dialog.
4. Select the entry DX46 or DSP600 in the Device Type List. All found devices are listed in the Devices list.
5. Right click the device to be updated in the Devices list. The Firmware Update Dialog appears.
6. The actual firmware file including version number is indicated and can be selected in the line “Firmware”. The
IRIS-Net software package always includes the most up-to-date firmware version. The corresponding file is located
in the directory: \IRIS-Net\Firmware\DX46 or \IRIS-Net\Firmware\DSP600. This path also appears in the line

7. The actual firmware file including version number is indicated and can be selected in the line “Factory Preset
Bank”. The IRIS-Net software package always includes the most up-to-date factory presets version. The
corresponding file is located in the directory: \IRIS-Net\Firmware\DX46 or \IRIS-Net\Firmware\DSP600. This path
also appears in the line “Location”. If you want to install a different (preferably newer) factory preset version, you
have to copy the corresponding file into this directory first.
8. Clicking onto “Start Update” starts the upgrade procedure. After the upgrade the Dx46/DSP 600 resets and is
ready for operation. The upgrade procedure is finished and you can close the dialog window.

IRIS-Net PWS PROGRAMMABLE WALL STATION | en 705
PWS PROGRAMMABLE WALL STATION
PWS series wall stations allow local operation and control of different devices and systems via CAN-Bus. Proceeding
different functions, like for example source selection, volume control, muting or switching devices on or off is possible.
If, in addition, a suitable central control unit is used, controlling building tasks (lighting, heating/air conditioning, etc.)
is possible as well.
The minimal configuration for a wall station consists of:
– a front user panel (e.g. PWS-4)
– a CAN-Bus coupler (PWS-C)
– an in IRIS-Net programmed software configuration that has been transferred to the wall station via CAN-Bus
– a to be controlled system controller (e.g. Electro-Voice NetMax N8000)
Front user panels are the parts of a wall station that are viewable for the user. A variety of front user panels with
different controls and indicators are available. Up to three user panels can be combined in a single wall station using a
single CAN-Bus coupler for all of them. The CAN-Bus coupler PWS-C provides connection between the front user panels
and the CAN-Bus. The maximum number of devices on a CAN-Bus (e.g. PWS-C, Remote Amplifier, etc.) depends on the
employed central control unit. Please refer to the documentation shipped together with your device.
The complete configuration for wall stations needs to be programmed in IRIS-Net, where you define the number and
nature of the wall stations employed in your system. It is also here, where you assign the functions to controls and
indicators.
The configuration procedure including all different possibilities will be explained in the following chapters. Please refer
to the PWS owner's manual in directory /IRIS-Net/Documentation/Wall Station also.
PWS Device
Begin by creating a PWS device in your IRIS-Net project, by dragging a PWS from the Devices category into the Object
List or from the Devices window over the Worksheet (see also chapter Devices and Menu Configurations). The
following dialog appears:


Specify the desired number of devices and the communications interface and acknowledge your selection with OK. A
single or more PWS devices will appear in the worksheet. Devices can be selected (marked) and freely dragged around
or placed within the worksheet.
Double clicking on a PWS device opens the user dialog box. For configuration select the entry Configuration from the
contextual menu of the PWS.
Operation
A previously configured wall station can be operated on-line as well as off-line under IRIS-Net. Double click on a PWS in
the IRIS-Net worksheet to display the wall station’s front panel. All front panel controls can be operated using the
mouse. Meters and indicators show the status of corresponding controls or the controlled parameters respectively.
Offline
IRIS-Net allows Offline-Simulation of a configured wall station to check the programming of indicators and controls
prior to actually putting the PWS hardware into operation.
Online
If the wall station is on-line, IRIS-Net shows the actual status of the device’s indicators and controls in real-time.
Changes are displayed immediately on the wall station when operating the PWS in IRIS-Net. However, the wall station’s
configuration possibilities are limited when in on-line mode.
Configuration
Configuring a wall station is entirely done in the corresponding Configuration Dialog which can be opened by selecting
Configuration in the contextual menu of the PWS. A maximum number of up to 3 front user panels can be combined in
a single wall station. Assigning any functions to controls and indicators of a front user panel is possible.
Please proceed as follows to configure a wall station:
1. Add the preferred front user panels in the Configuration Dialog at the free positions within the shown triple frame.
Add front user panels one by one and from left to right. You can add front user panels either via Drag & Drop
operation - out of Front Units of the PWS Objects library or using the entries Add PWS-x of the contextual menu of
the corresponding field within the triple-frame.

2. Left-click with the mouse in the desired triple-frame field to select a front user panel for configuration. Use the
respective entry in the contextual menu of a front user panel to reposition or delete that panel.
3. Left-click on a front user panel’s control to select it for further configuration. Selecting individual controls via the
SELECT PWS CONTROL drop-down menu is possible as well.
4. Assign the desired button type to the selected control using the BUTTON TYPE drop-down menu.
5. Enter the desired name for a control in the LABEL field. (Names can be printed using the PRINT LABELS button)
6. Change the ON VALUE and OFF VALUE parameters of a control, if necessary. Notes on how to manually assign
parameter values are provided in the ASCII Control Protocol documentation of the system controller to be
controlled.
7. Click on MODIFY FUNCTIONS / CONNECTIONS to set the assigned functionality/parameter of a control. Notes on
how to edit function and connections of a control are provided in the chapter IRIS-Net > Editing Objects > Add
Control Elements.
HINT: Up to 12 connections can be assigned to a control.
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 for all front user panels and their controls.
Element Description
Text field for entering a name for each wall station to keep records of its use or
position. Click within the grey label field and enter the preferred name and hit Return
to accept this name.
The Online / Offline indicator signals the status of the corresponding wall station
within the network. The red OFFLINE indicator signals that this wall station is not
connected to the network and therefore communication is not possible. OFFLINE also
appears when the wall station has not been allocated a network connection in IRIS-
Net. Please check the entries in Administrate Connections. The green ONLINE
indicator signals that this wall station is connected to the network. Data can be
transferred and received. When in on-line mode, all parameter changes are
immediately transferred and become immediately active.
Clicking on the ID buttons lets the LEDs of the wall station’s selected front user panel
and the status LED on the PWS-C CAN Bus coupler blink, which facilitates identifying
the momentarily accessed PWS, when in on-line mode.

Type of the selected PWS front user panel.
Number of the selected PWS front user panel. Front user panels are numbered in
ascending order if a wall station includes more than one panel of the same type.
Opens a dialog for printing out label field names.

Element Description
Allows setting a CAN address and indicates the set CAN address. Left-click in
the entry field and enter the desired wall station address in the range between
1 and 250. Hit Return to accept the set address. The entered address and the
setting of the address selection switch on the PWS-C CAN Bus coupler have to
be identical and may exist only once on a specific CAN Bus. When adding new
wall stations to an IRIS-Net project, CAN addresses are automatically allocated
in ascending order.
Baud rate of the CAN-Bus to which the wall station is connected. Indication is
only provided when in on-line mode. For detailed information on setting the
correct baud rate of the System Controller or PWS-C CAN Bus coupler to be
controlled, please refer to the according documentation.
Lets you select a control of the selected PWS front user panel. Selecting the
control directly via left-click in the GUI of the front user panel is possible as
well.
Lets you select the desired button type for the selected control. Controls can be
used as Action Button (execute action, e.g. .B. loading a preset)
Push Button (single push button), Radio Group (a variety of switches that
trigger each other – for switching different functions or parameters, e.g. source
selection),
Switch Button (switch – for switching between two states, e.g. muting) or
Channel Selection (only PWS-4, switching parameters edited by up/down
buttons).
Assign a name to the currently selected control.
/ The control’s state when activated. Notes on how to manually assign parameter
values are provided in the ASCII Control Protocol documentation of the system
controller to be controlled.
The control’s state when deactivated. Notes on how to manually assign

parameter values are provided in the ASCII Control Protocol documentation of
the system controller to be controlled.
Lets you select the action executed when using BUTTON TYPE Action Button.

Lets you select the preset number to be loaded when using BUTTON TYPE
Action Button and Action Load N8000 Preset.
Lets you select the number of parameters to be edited by up/down buttons

when using BUTTON TYPE Channel Selection.
Opens the Modify Functions & Connections dialog for allocating functions to a
control. Information on how to allocate Functions & Connections to a control

are provided in the chapter IRIS-Net > Editing Objects > Add Control Elements.
Button Types
Action Button
Upon activation (the status changes from OFF to ON), an Action Button carries out a function of a Control. The
following example for the usage of the BUTTON TYPE Action Button shows how to configure a PWS-6 to switch
between presets in a conference room. Therefore, it is assumed that the IRIS-Net project includes a NetMax N8000
with three presets: MUSIC (U01, background music), SPEECH (U02, e.g. for presentations) and MUTE (U03). The three
upper buttons of the PWS-6 shall be configured to switch between these three presets.
1. Select “Configuration” from the contextual menu of the PWS Device in the IRIS-Net worksheet. The Configuration
dialog appears.
2. Add a front unit of the type PWS-6 to the left-hand frame of the three-frame window of the Configuration Dialog.
Either use the “drag and drop” method to drag the PWS-6 out of the category Front Units of the PWS objects
library or select the entry “Add PWS-6” from the left-hand frame’s contextual menu in the window.
3. Select the first Control on the top of the added PWS-6 using the left mouse button. As an alternative, select the
Control by choosing the entry “Button 1” from the SELECT PWS CONTROL dropdown menu.
4. Use the BUTTON TYPE dropdown menu to assign the button type “Action Button” to the selected Control.
5. Name the first preset by entering “MUSIC” into the LABEL input field.
6. Use the ACTION dropdown menu to assign the action-type “Load N8000 Preset” to the selected Control.
7. Number the first preset by entering “U01” into the PRESET NUMBER input field.
8. Click onto the MODIFY CONNECTIONS button and select the N8000.
9. Repeat steps 4 to 9 to assign the preset “U02” to the second Control and the preset “U03” to the third Control as
well as to name the presets accordingly. The following illustration shows the Configuration Dialog after
configuration of the third button is finished.

Channel Selection
If the Up/Down buttons of a PWS-4 shall serve to set different parameters, switching between parameters is
accomplished using the BUTTON TYPE Channel Selection.
The following example for the usage of the BUTTON TYPE Channel Selection shows how to configure the buttons of a
PWS-4 so that the Up/Down buttons can be used to individually control the volume setting for announcements and
background music. Therefore, it is assumed that the IRIS-Net project includes a NetMax N8000 with a 2x1 monaural
mixer. Announcements shall be fed to input 1 and the background music to input 2. The two upper buttons of the PWS-
4 are to be used to select the desired signal (i.e. the corresponding mixer input) and the Up/Down buttons can be used
to control the volume setting of the selected input channel.
dialog appears.
4. Use the BUTTON TYPE dropdown menu to assign the button type “Channel Selection” to the selected Control. The
same button type is assigned to the second Control automatically.
5. Name the button by entering “Durchsage” into the LABEL input field.
6. Select the last Control of the PWS-4 using the left mouse button. As an alternative, select the Control by choosing
the entry "Button 5" from the SELECT PWS CONTROL dropdown menu.
7. Use the BUTTON TYPE dropdown menu to assign the button type "UpDown Meter" to the selected Control.
8. Click on button MODIFY FUNCTIONS / CONNECTIONS and select function "Level" and connection
"N8000_1.DSP.Mixer_1.ChIn1".
9. Select the second Control on the top of the added PWS-4 using the left mouse button. As an alternative, select the
10. Name the button by entering “Musik” into the LABEL input field.
11. Select the last Control of the PWS-4 using the left mouse button. As an alternative, select the Control by choosing
the entry "Button 5" from the SELECT PWS CONTROL dropdown menu.
12. Use the BUTTON TYPE dropdown menu to assign the button type "UpDown Meter" to the selected Control.
13. Click on button MODIFY FUNCTIONS / CONNECTIONS and select function "Level" and connection
"N8000_1.DSP.Mixer_1.ChIn2". The following illustration shows the Configuration Dialog after configuration of the
button is finished.

Push Button
A Pushbutton represents a regular button, i.e. it is only activated (ON) as long as the regular button is being pressed.
Otherwise, the status of the CONTROL is OFF.
The following example for the usage of the button type "Pushbutton" shows how to configure a button of a PWS-6 to
serve as "Push-to-Talk button". Threrefore, it is assumed that the IRIS-Net project includes a NetMax N8000 with a 4 x 4
priority matrix and the signal of a microphone is being fed to input 1 of that matrix. The uppermost button of the PWS-
6 shall be used to mute the input channel.
dialog appears.
4. Use the BUTTON TYPE dropdown menu to assign the button type “Push Button” to the selected Control.
5. Name the button by entering “Sprechen” into the LABEL input field.
6. Enter 0 into the ON VALUE input field, so the parameter MUTE is set to 0 (= not muted) when the button is
pressed.
7. Enter 1 into the OFF VALUE input field, so the parameter MUTE is set to 1 (= muted) when the button is not
pressed.
8. Click on button MODIFY FUNCTIONS / CONNECTIONS and select function "Mute" and connection
"N8000_1.DSP.PriorityMatrix_1.Input1". The following illustration shows the Configuration Dialog after
configuration of the button is finished.
Radio Group
A Radio Group allows switching different values of a parameter. Buttons of a Radio Group disengage each other, i.e.
only one button of a group can be activated at a time.
The following example for the usage of the button type "Radio Group" shows how to configure four buttons of a PWS-6
for source selection. Therefore, it is assumed that the IRIS-Net project includes a NetMax N8000 with a 4 x 1 router,
with different signal sources being fed to the router’s inputs. The buttons of the PWS-6 shall be used to route exactly
one signal source (i.e. the corresponding input on the router) to the router’s output.
dialog appears.

4. Use the BUTTON TYPE dropdown menu to assign the button type “Radio Group” to the selected Control.
5. Enter "1,2,3,4" into the ON VALUE input field. This defines the size of the group as four and at the same time the
parameter value set by each of the four radio buttons. The ON VALUE is set automatically for all members of the
radio group.
6. Enter 0 into the OFF VALUE input field. This is the parameter to be set when no button is pressed. The OFF VALUE
is set automatically for all members of the radio group.
7. Click on button MODIFY FUNCTIONS / CONNECTIONS and select function "Input" and connection
"N8000_1.DSP.Router_1.Output1". The function and connection is set automatically for all members of the radio
group.
8. Enter the name of the signal at input 1 of the Router into the LABEL input field, e.g. "DVD".
9. Repeat step 9 for buttons 2, 3 and 4. Enter the corresponding signal names (e.g. VCR, MIC, AUX) ein. The
following illustration shows the Configuration Dialog after configuration of the radio group is finished.
Switch Button
A Switch Button represents a regular switch, i.e. the switch setting changes every time when switching from ON to OFF
or from OFF to ON. Otherwise, the current state is remained (latching button). The following example for the usage of
the BUTTON TYPE “Switch Button” shows how to configure the buttons of a PWS-6 to be able to select different sound
reinforcement zones of a building. Therefore, it is assumed that the IRIS-Net project includes a NetMax N8000
equipped with an AO-1 Analog Output Card, with the card’s outputs 1 to 3 representing the different areas in a
building. The upper three buttons of the PWS-6 shall serve to mute the corresponding output signals.
dialog appears.
4. Use the BUTTON TYPE dropdown menu to assign the button type “Radio Group” to the selected Control.
5. Enter „ROOM 1“ into the LABEL input field.

6. Enter 0 into the ON VALUE input field, so the parameter MUTE is set to 0 (= not muted) when the button is
pressed.
7. Enter 1 into the OFF VALUE input field, so the parameter MUTE is set to 1 (= muted) when the button is not
pressed.
8. Click on button MODIFY FUNCTIONS / CONNECTIONS and select function "Mute" and connection
"N8000_1.DSP.AnalogOut_1.Ch1".
9. Repeat steps 4 to 9 for Button 2 (label "ROOM 2", connection "N8000_1.DSP.AnalogOut_1.Ch2") and Button 3
(label "ROOM 3", connection "N8000_1.DSP.AnalogOut_1.Ch3"). The following illustration shows the Configuration
Dialog after configuration of the third button is finished.

IRIS-Net PROMATRIX 8000 | en 714
PROMATRIX 8000
Please note the following when using project files in different versions of IRIS-Net.
“old” IRIS-Net version “new” IRIS-Net version Updates
2.2 2.3 The Task Engine of the DPM 8016 has changed, updating all
Task Engine blocks is necessary.
2.3 2.4 No updates of project file necessary.
2.4 2.4.1 Level of alarm and chime was increased by 12 dB, the level
settings in the project file have to be updated after updating
the firmware of the DPM 8016.
2.4.1 2.5 The functionality of the ESC button of the call station has
changed in DPC firmware version 1.2.0. Now the ESC button
stops the buzzer of the call station only, if a error message
appears.
The property “FaultMaskGround” of all DPA amplifiers must
be set to 0 for correct function of the ground fault indication.
2.5 2.6 No updates of project file necessary.
2.6 2.6.1 The AudioNet dialog of the DPM 8016 has replaced the „PM
AudioNet Cfg“ user control. The user control is no longer
available.
The properties "AudioNetwork.IsMaster",
"AudioNetwork.IsSlave" and "AudioNetwork.IsStandalone" are
no longer available.
The Task Engine checks if more than one assignment to a
single element (e.g. relais) is done. In this case an error
message appears. Use OR / AND blocks for assigning multiple
values to one target.
2.6.1 2.7.1 No updates of project file necessary.
2.7.1 2.7.2 Adjust the detection settings of the new error types „CM-1
PRIMARY LINK“ or „CM-1 SECONDARY LINK“ (see AudioNet
dialog of the DPM 8016) to your project needs.
2.9.2 2.10.0 The existing property for BGM source selection is no longer
used; instead new properties for program assignment have
been added. The property is converted into the new
properties automatically by IRIS-Net.
At the internal message management with PMX-MM-2, some
properties have been added. The new properties are added
to existing messages automatically.


LIMITS OF THE PROMATRIX 8000 SYSTEM
Property DPM 8016 System with n DPM 8016 (nmax = 10)
Speaker zones, in total 500 1000
– Lines (A/B) per zone 2
Priority relays, in total 1800 3600
– per zone 5
Control relays, in total 1800 3600
– per zone 5
Groups, in total 500
Call stations per PCA port 4
Call stations, in total 16 n * 16
Background music program (without 1 n

audio network)
Remote control amplifiers per DPM 99 n * 99
Amplifier output channels 396 n * 396
Input modules (with two audio 8 n*8

channels each)
Output modules (with two audio 8 n*8

channels each)
DCS 801R 15 n * 15
DCS 408R or DCS 409R connected to 17 n * 17

a DCS 801R
DCS 412R connected to a DCS 801R 5 n*5
DCS 412R, in total 75 n * 75
Logical inputs, in total 500 n * 500 500 n * 500
DCS 416 connected to a DCS 801 5 n *5
DCS 416, in total 75 n * 75
Supervised inputs from a central fire 30 n * 30

alarm system
Relay modules, in total (DCS 408 or 255 n * 255

DCS 409)
Number of relays, in total 2000 n * 2000
Task Engine blocks 1024 n * 1024
Task Engine connections per block 48
Network channels 16

Property DPM 8016 System with n DPM 8016 (nmax = 10)
Signal trigger 200 n * 200
Internal Alarm generators 2 n*2
Internal Chime generators 2 n*2
EOL modules (direct topology only) 250 n * 250
EOL modules per amplifier channel 30
Remote control connections (e. g. 20 n * 20

IRIS-Net, DPM 8016)
Number of MM-2 modules per DPM 2
Number of message per MM-2 100
Total length of messages per MM-2 85 minutes
DPM 8016 Paging Manager

The DPM 8016 is the modular, network controlled paging manager of the PROMATRIX 8000 system. Eight audio slots
can be assembled with a combination of audio-input and audio-output cards providing a number of flexible
configuration options. The DPM 8016 provides all the audio processing, supervision and control functions for a
complete PROMATRIX 8000 system. A single DPM 8016 will support up to 16 call stations and 500 paging zones. For
larger systems up to 10 DPM 8016 can be interconnected using a digital audio and control network.

Additional DPM 8016 features:
– Integrated audio signal processing - 32 x 16 Routing/Mixer Matrix, EQs, Dynamics, Automatic Gain Control
– Internal supervision with event log - fulfils current requirements of the relevant national and international
standards
– Various connection possibilities - Ethernet, CAN-Bus, RS-232, CobraNet, GPIOs
DPM 8016 Device

Start by creating an DPM 8016 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an DPM 8016 from the Object Bar’s Devices
category or from the Devices window into the worksheet (see also chapters: Devices and Configurations menu). The
following dialog box appears:


settings. The specified number of devices will be created and displayed in the worksheet. Selected devices can be
border around it.
Double clicking on an device icon opens the configuration dialog window. Double clicking on a device for the first time
will open the General dialog box. Here, you can specify initial settings that are necessary for further configuration and
communication. Additional configuration windows can be navigated to by clicking on the icons at the top of the
time you double click on the device icon.
The following table lists all available device dialogs with a short description for each. For more detailed information,
Dialog Description
General This window allows hardware settings to be configured, e.g. input/output module slots,
network settings, device name, system time and firmware version.
Supervision This window provides an overview of the operational state and current fault status of the
device.
DSP This window allows editing the DSP configuration of the device.
Task Engine This window lets you configure the Task Engine of the device.
Pagings This window lets you configure dynamic add/sub zones (VAR pattern).
User Mix This window lets you configure background music.
Interface From this window the DPM 8016 CAN bus, RS-232 ports and GPIO control port interfaces can
all be configured.
HINT: Ethernet interface settings are explained under General dialog in the paragraph
Network Settings.
Power Management From this window the power management of the device can be configured.
Line Supervision The line supervision of the device can be controlled and supervised from this window.
AudioNet This window lets you configure the audio network and provides an overview of the current
fault status of the audio network.
HINT: This window is only visible if a CM-1 module is included in the configuration.
General Dialog
Double clicking on a DPM 8016 by default opens the General dialog box. Here, the user can make basic settings that
are necessary for flawless operation. All elements of the displayed DPM 8016 front panel are active in on-line mode and
Notice!
System language Korean or Chinese
For using system languages Korean or Chinese the call station firmware type “CST_Vx.x.xA” has to
be used. Please be patient when uploading this firmware to the call station.

Element Description
This view represents the rear panel of a DPM 8016 with module slots and
extension cards. In off-line mode, clicking onto the slots with the right mouse
button and by exchanging, adding or deleting extension cards, allows
defining the unit’s configuration. When on-line, the display shows the actually
installed extension cards. Differences from the off-line configuration are
recognized and marked in yellow or red.
HINT: A yellow indicator signals that the hardware equipment differs from
the software configuration. However, this difference does not cause any
problems during on-line operation. A red indicator signals an existing
conflict between hardware and software configurations, which needs to be
remedied, either by customizing the DPM 8016’s hardware equipment or
through modifying the software configuration.
IP ADDRESS Indicates the IP address of the DPM 8016’s Ethernet port (factory setting:
192.168.1.100). Enter the address of the DPM 8016 with which you want to
establish on-line communication.

NETWORK MASK Indicates the Ethernet port’s network mask (factory setting: 255.255.255.0).
GATEWAY ADDRESS Indicates the standard gateway of the Ethernet port (factory setting:
192.168.1.1).
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address of the connected DPM 8016 when on-line. The
MAC address of the DPM 8016 is also shown on a label on the unit’s rear
panel.
NAME IRIS-Net internal device name of the DPM 8016.
BUZZER Select ON to indicate a connection failure to a call station (selectable via the
drop down field) via the integrated buzzer of the DPM 8016.
SYSTEM LANGUAGE Select the system language of the PROMATRIX 8000 system. Please note to
update the call station firmware when selecting Korean or Chinese.
VOICE ALARM STATE This indicator shows “ACTIVE” if the device is in voice alarm state, else “NOT
ACTIVE”.
RESET Press the RESET button to deactivate the voice alarm state.
PRIORITY Select the priority (70–100) of the voice alarm. Select OFF to disable the
voice alarm handling of the device.
AUTO EXIT Select this checkbox if the voice alarm state should be stopped automatically
after the alarm signal is stopped/muted (e.g. no alarm request present).
DATE/TIME Date and time of the DPM 8016 system clock.
Opens the system clock settings dialog box.

INTERNAL CLOCK
DCF77 SYNCHRONIZATION Select this option to synchronize the internal clock of the DPM 8016 with the
DCF77 signal. Please refer to the manual how to connect an external DCF77
receiver.
DCF77 SIGNAL STATUS Indicates the DCF77 signal strength:

– Green: Signal strength OK
– Red: Signal strength not OK
DPM 4000 SYNCHRONIZATION Select this option to synchronize the internal clock of the DPM 8016 with a
connected DPM 4000 system.
NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION Select this option to synchronize the internal clock of this DPM 8016 with
the internal clock of another DPM 8016 connected via Ethernet.
TIME MASTER Select the DPM 8016 (connected via Ethernet) to synchronize the internal
clock with. This drop down can only be used if the NETWORK
SYNCHRONIZATION option is selected.
ENABLE SLAVE CLOCK Select this checkbox if slave clocks are connected to the DPM 8016.
CURRENT SLAVE CLOCK TIME Set the time for the slave clocks.
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the DPM 8016 when on-line.

Opens the firmware update dialog.
Reboots the DPM 8016.
Security Dialog
In this dialog the password of the devices can be edited.
Element Description
LOCK PASSWORD (ACCESS LEVEL 2) Press the change button to edit the setting of the password for locking call
stations.
CST SETUP PASSWORD (ACCESS Press the change button to edit the setting of the password for th setup of
LEVEL 3) call stations.
GO ONLINE PASSWORD (ACCESS Press the change button to edit the setting of the password for going online
LEVEL 3) in IRIS-Net.
FIRMWARE UPDATE PASSWORD Press the change button to edit the setting of the password for updating the
(ACCESS LEVEL 4) firmware of the system.
Supervision Dialog
The Supervision window shows the condition of the DPM 8016. When on-line, all fault conditions are being indicated. It
is possible to select for each type of error whether it is displayed in a collected fault message, buffered and/or
indicated at the call station displays.

Element Description
The current condition of each type of error gets indicated. Green means no error,
red indicates that an error has been detected.
At the occurrence of a type of error for which the checkbox DETECT is ticked, the
COLLECTED ERROR STATE flag is set at the same time. Additionally the FAULT-
LED on the front panel of the DPM lights, the FAULT relay opens and a signal
sound.
Detected types of errors for which the checkbox HOLD is ticked are stored.
Sporadic errors are indicated until the corresponding HOLD checkbox is
unchecked.

OPEN INTERFACE Select the checkboxes of the error types to be available via the ASCII Control
Protocol of the DPM.
If DPC 8015 call stations are configured for error indication, the text entered here
is indicated in the call station display if the error occurs. The maximum number of
characters is 11 when using system languages Korean or Chinese. The maximum
number of characters is 20 when using other system languages.
HINT: The meaning of the parameter %u is described at the error types below.
WATCHDOG Watchdog error of the DPM. This error type is logged conforming to standards,
press the CLEAR button to reset the error.
FIRMWARE The DPM firmware version is not compatible with the IRIS-Net version used. A
firmware update is recommended.
MODULES Invalid module configuration of the DPM 8016. The parameter %u gives the slot
number of the invalid module.
HARDWARE Error in the power supply or the A/D converters of the DPM 8016.
TEMPERATURE Temperature overload of the DPM 8016.
AUDIO Error during the processing of audio data.

PROCESSING
INPUT PILOT Pilot tone detection fault at the inputs of the DPM 8016. The parameter %u gives
DETECTION the number of the input. The inputs of the UI-1 modules are numbered ascending.

Example:

The parameter %u has the value 6 if there is a detection fault at the IN B/C input
of the UI-1 module in slot 8.
PMX-MM-2 Error in the PMX-MM-2 module. Please refer to page 525 for details.
MODULE

CAN BUS Fault condition on the CAN bus. Further details are provided in the Interface
dialog.
PCA BUS Fault condition on the PCA bus. Further details are provided in the Interface
dialog. The parameter %u gives the slot number of the erroneous module.
AUDIO NET Fault condition on the audio network.

DPC DEVICE A connected DPC call station has transferred an error message. The parameter
%u gives the address of the erroneous call station.
DPA DEVICES A connected DPA power amplifier has transferred an error message. The
parameter %u gives the address of the erroneous amplifier.
DCS DEVICES A connected DCS system has transferred an error message. The parameter %u
gives the address of the erroneous DCS system.
PWS DEVICES A connected PWS wall station has transferred an error message. The parameter
%u gives the address of the erroneous wall station.
POWER SUPPLY Fault condition in the power supply of the DPM 8016.
SPEAKER LINE Fault condition in the speaker line supervision.

FAULT The parameter %u gives the number of the erroneous speaker line, the number
has following meaning:
1 to 500: Zone A
501 to 1000: Zone B
USER FAULT 1 to One or more USER FAULTS have been set

10 HINT: Use the DPM Task Engine to configure USER FAULTS.
COLLECTED The FAULT-LED on the front panel of the DPM 8016 lights at the occurrence of
ERROR this type of error.
DSP Dialog

In this dialog the DSP configuration of the DPM 8016 is shown. Double clicking on a DSP-Block’s icon allows editing its



INPUT

The Input block provides access to the inputs of an UI-1 Universal Input Module. The slot number,
name and gain values of the input channels are indicated in the block. Double click the block to open the Input dialog.
Select the entry Advanced Control from the context menu of the block to open the Advanced Control dialog.

IN A or IN Permanent channel labeling.

B/C
0.0 dB 0 to 60 dB The gain of the input channels can be adjusted in 6 dB steps.
The +48V button is for activating phantom power whenever a suitable

condenser microphone is being used.
0.0 dB -80 to +18.0 Fader for setting the input level.

dB
0.0 dB -80 to +18.0 The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader setting
dB and additionally allows entering a desired value.
The PLT button activates (engaged) or deactivates (not engaged) pilot

tone detection. The PLT button lights red when pilot tone detection is
active but without a pilot signal being detected. With a pilot signal
present, the PLT button lights green.
Text field for labeling an input channel, e.g. giving it an application

specific name.

CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a name is not
permissible.

Advanced Control
The checkbox activates a notch filter when pilot tone detection is

activated. The notch filter filters an existing pilot tone out of the input
signal, so that it will not reach components that are connected behind
the input.
19000 Hz 20 to 20000 This field sets the frequency of the pilot signal to be detected.
Hz
-40 dBu -60 to 0.0 This field sets the pilot tone detection’s threshold. The analysis results
dBu in OK (green PLT button) when the level of the pilot signal exceeds the
threshold. Without a pilot tone being present or if the signal level is
below the set threshold, analysis results in a fault message on the
corresponding input channel (red PLT button).
10.0 s A pilot tone detection error is indicated if the pilot tone is missing
longer than the time entered in this field.

MESSAGE MANAGER MM-2

The MM-2 block provides access to the messages of an MM-2 Message Manager Module. Up to two
MM-2 modules can be used in one DPM 8016. The slot number is indicated in the block. Double click the block to open
the MM-2 dialog.

Element Description
MESSAGES
Active Indicates the messages that are currently active (marked with a “X”).
Module Gives the number of the module, where the message is stored. The Location can be set when
adding messages.
Description The unique name or description of the uploaded message. Use the corresponding text field to
edit the description. The description can be edited in offline or online mode.

Type Available message types are EVAC, Chime or Business. The Type can be set when adding
messages.
Duration The duration of the uploaded message, given in format “minutes:seconds”.
Level Indicates the level of the message. Level ranges from -80 dB to +18 dB. Default level is 0.0 dB.
Use the corresponding spin control to edit the level. The level can be edited in offline or online
mode.
Info The memory usage is indicated for all MM-2 modules.
ADD Press the ADD button to upload a new message. A file selection dialog appears (see screenshot
below) that allows selecting a message in WAV file format (mono, 48 kHz). You have to assign a
description and a message type (EVAC; Chime or Business) to the message before uploading. If
there are two MM-2 modules available, the location for the message has to be selected.
HINT: A selection of standard evacuation messages in different languages is available in the
Download area at www.dynacord.com
DELETE Press the DELETE button to delete the message selected in the message list.
REPLACE Press the REPLACE button to replace the message selected in the message list, the message
type and location can not be changed. In online mode only business messages can be replaced.
ERROR STATES
ERROR flag is set at the same time. Additionally the FAULT-LED on the front panel of the DPM
lights, the FAULT relay opens and a signal sounds.
MODULE Hardware or configuration error in the MM-2 module.
MESSAGE Error during message storage.

STORAGE
PLAYBACK Error in the playback memory.

MEMORY
WATCHDOG Watchdog error of the DPM. This error type is logged conforming to standards.
TEMPERATURE Temperature of module is too high.
COLLECTED The FAULT-LED on the front panel of the DPM 8016 lights at the occurrence of this type of error.
ERROR
FALLBACK
SIGNALS
Fallback Evac Select the default evacuation signal to use if no message is uploaded to the MM-2 module. This
settings is valid for all DPM 8016 in the PROMATRIX system.
Fallback Pre-/ Select the default chime or pre-chime signal to use if no chime is uploaded to the MM-2 module.
Chime This settings is valid for all DPM 8016 in the PROMATRIX system.


HINT: For creating audio messages the software Audacity from http://audacity.sourceforge.net/ can be used.

3 BAND PEQ

Equalizers accentuate or lower the audio signal within specific frequency ranges. Two parametric 3-
Band equalizers are available for each UI-1 Universal Input Module or MM-2 Message Manager Module.

Switch for displaying amplitude frequency response

(magnitude) or phase response (phase)
Switch for scaling the amplitude axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or

50 dB (± 25 dB)
Switch for changing between bandwidth BW and Quality Q

when setting employed filters.

Name of the corresponding filter band. Clicking with the right

mouse button onto this field opens Copy & Paste menu,
which allows comfortably copying all EQ parameters of the
selected filter to any other EQ within the same project.

Hishelv, Hipass, – PEQ is a parametric Peak Dip Filter with its frequency,
Lopass, Allpass quality (Q) and gain being programmable.
– Loshelv / Hishelv create a Low-Shelving or High-Shelving
filter with the parameters being: frequency, slope and
gain.
– Lopass / Hipass creates a Low Pass or High Pass filter
– Allpass is a filter that has no influence on the frequency
response but on the phase response in the transmission
function.
0 dB -18 to +18 dB GAIN defines the amplification (increase) or attenuation



63 Hz, 1 kHz, 20 Hz to 20 kHz FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric
16 EQ or the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass

kHz filters.
1.9 Oct or 0.01 to 6.67 Oct. Q or BW defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ.

0.1 to 40 (PEQ) value results in a broadband filter. The Q-value also sets the
0.1 to 2.0 (Hi-/ quality and thus the response of Hi, Lo and All pass filters
Lopass) with slopes of 12dB/ oct.

frequency range.



COMPRESSOR

The compressor reduces the dynamic range of audio signals. Once the signal exceeds a certain
threshold, the signal gets compressed, i.e. major input level changes result in minor output level changes. Narrowing
the dynamic range often allows for easier recording or mixing the audio signal. Two compressors are available for each
UI-1 Universal Input Module.

+12.0 dBu -9.0 to +21.0 dBu THRESHOLD defines the signal level at which the
or or Compressor sets in. Entering the desired value is

3.085 V 0.275 to 8.696 V possible in dBu as well as in V. The entered value is
automatically converted in both directions.

1.0:1 1.0:1 to 8.0:1 RATIO defines the compression rate, i.e. the degree
of compression above the threshold level. For
5 ms 0 to 99 ms ATTACK defines the velocity, at which the

even short signal peaks are efficiently com-
pressed. Longer attack rate leave signal peaks
untouched.
250 ms 0 to 999 ms RELEASE defines the control time interval the

threshold.

comparison between the compressed and

DELAY

The Delay block allows to delay the audio signal of AO-1 output modules by up to 220 ms.


Element Description
DELAY Delay times can be entered directly in milliseconds (ms).

Alternatively, entering a distance in inches (in) or meters
(m) is possible as well. The appropriate delay time is
calculated, taking into account the indicated
Temperature.
TEMPERATURE Temperature allows setting the current ambient

temperature in degrees Celsius (° C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (° F). The two units are automatically
converted. The temperature parameter only takes effect if
a distance value has previously been entered. In that
case, the influence of the temperature is automatically
taken into consideration during delay time calculation.
BYPASS BYPASS either activates (button not engaged) or

deactivates (button engaged) the delay which allows for a
quick A / B comparison of the effect that set parameters
have on the sound characteristics.
DEFAULT DEFAULT resets the temperature to 20° C or 68° F

respectively.
Notice!
The delay block is available for the first 6 output channels (e.g. 3 AO-1 modules) only.
Notice!
The graphics display shows the speaker symbol in color as soon as a delay has been activated.
Clicking with the left mouse button onto the speaker icon and keeping the mouse button pressed
allows dragging the symbol to the right or the left, which results in a change of the selected delay
time.

5 BAND PEQ

Equalizers accentuate or lower the audio signal within specific frequency ranges. Two parametric 5-
Band equalizers are available for each AO-1 Analog Output Module.


Switch for displaying amplitude frequency response

(magnitude) or phase response (phase)
Switch for scaling the amplitude axis to 25 dB (± 12.5 dB) or

50 dB (± 25 dB)
Switch for changing between bandwidth BW and Quality Q

when setting employed filters.



Lopass, Allpass quality (Q) and gain being programmable.
gain.
– Allpass is a filter that has no influence on the frequency
response but on the phase response in the transmission
function.



63 Hz, 250 20 Hz to 20 kHz FREQ (frequency) sets the center frequency of a parametric
Hz, 1 EQ or the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass

kHz, 4 kHz, filters.
16 kHz
1.9 Oct or 0.01 to 6.67 Oct. Q or BW defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ.

0.1 to 2.0 (Hi-/ quality and thus the response of Hi, Lo and All pass filters
Lopass) with slopes of 12dB/ oct.

frequency range.



LIMITER

A Limiter is used when the output signal must not exceed a specific peak level, independent of how
much the input level rises. Short attack times effectively limit overshoots. Limiters are often used as protection for the
components following them an audio chain, i.e. to prevent an amplifier from clipping or protect loudspeaker systems
against mechanical damage.
+6.0 dBu or -9.0 to +21.0 dBu The THRESHOLD parameter defines the level value
1.546 V or at which the limiter sets in. Signal levels below the

0.275 to 8.696 V threshold will pass through the limiter unaffected.
As soon as the signal level reaches or exceeds the
threshold, signal limiting sets in. Entering the
threshold value is possible in dBu or V. The value
can be entered in either box and will automatically
be converted in the other.
5 ms 0 to 50 ms ATTACK defines how fast the gain is reduced after

the signal exceeds the threshold level.

100 ms 10 to 1000 ms RELEASE defines how fast the output signal returns
to its normal level once it drops below the
threshold.
(engaged) the Limiter, which allows for quick A / B

comparison between the limited and unlimited
audio signal.

OUTPUT

The Output block provides access to the outputs of an AO-1 Analog Output Module. The slot
number, name and gain values of the out channels are indicated in the block. Double click the block to open the
Output dialog. Select the entry Advanced Control from the context menu of the block to open the Advanced Control
dialog.

Permanent channel labeling.
0.0 dB -80 to +18.0 Fader for setting the output level.

dB
dB and additionally provides the possibility for entering a desired value.
The PLT button activates (engaged) or deactivates (not engaged) the

pilot tone generator. The PLT button appears only when the pilot tone
generator has previously been activated in the Advanced Control window.

INV button for inverting the output signal’s polarity.
Text field for labeling an output channel, e.g. giving it an application

specific name.

CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a name is not
permissible.
HARDWAREJUM 6 dBu or 18 Indicates the jumper setting of the AO-1 module in online mode.
PER dBu
-45.0 dBu -60 to 0 dBu This field allows setting the level of the pilot tone signal.
19500 Hz 20 to 20000 This field allows setting the frequency of the pilot tone signal. The set
Hz frequency applies to all outputs, for which the pilot tone signal has been
activated.

ALARM CHIME

The Alarm Chime dialog allows the configuration of the internal alarm and chime generators.

Alarm
Configuration
-3.0 dB -80 to 0 dB Fader for setting the alarm level.

-3.0 dB -80 to 0 dB The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader setting
and additionally provides the possibility for entering a desired value.
Chime
Configuration
-9.0 dB -80 to 0 dB Fader for setting the chime level.

MATRIX

Double click on the Matrix 20x16 to open the Matrix 16x16 dialog (the 4 missing inputs in this dialog are used for the
internal generators of the DPM 8016). The Matrix 16x16 allows connecting inputs and outputs. Left clicking the node in
the matrix where the output channel’s column and the input channel’s line meet with the mouse does connect an
output to an input. Clicking again onto the corresponding node disconnects inputs and outputs.
Please note following restrictions for making connections in the matrix:
– BGM inputs can only routed via a DPC call station, so this is not possible in this dialog
– Unused inputs can not be routed
– Inputs used for alarms, announcements etc. can not be routed
– Inputs used for a MM-2 Message Module can not be routed
– Manual routings override existing BGM routings
–

DUCKING -40 dB -85 to 0 dB The signal level of the back ground music is reduced by the level entered here
when the in input signal, signal level reaches or exceeds a set threshold.
FADE IN 0.02 s 0.01 to 4 s FADE IN defines how fast the gain of the background music signal is reduced
after the input signal exceeds the threshold level.
FADE OUT 0.02 s 0.01 to 0.4 FADE OUT defines how fast the gain of the background music signal is returned
s to the preset level once the input signal drops below the threshold level.
Right clicking a node opens this dialog with a fader and fader display for setting
the level and a CONNECT-Button for setting or resetting the node’s connection.
The label represents the node’s position ("line - column") within the matrix. This
dialog only appears if a zone is configured for the corresponding output.
Task Engine Dialog

positioned and wired within the worksheet. Double clicking on inputs or outputs allows configuring them in detail.
Copy & paste of blocks allow convenient editing of the Task Engine configurations. The size of the worksheet
automatically increases when a block is moved to the current border.
Configuring the Task Engine as well as wiring DSP blocks is possible only in offline mode. Please refer to section “How
to configure a Control” on page 20 how to assign functions and connections to a Task Engine block.


In the Task Engine, one differentiates between two classes of variables:
mixer output.
(0 = not muted, 1 = muted) of a DSP block monaural mixer output.
In the Task Engine, different colors are used to distinguish the two types of variables. Inputs and outputs that are not
wired are marked blue, whenever variables of the type "analog" are being processed or transmitted. Inputs and outputs
that are not wired are marked green, whenever variables of the type "logic" are being processed or transmitted.

VALUES
Element Description
The Input Analog block is a variable parameter for rational numbers which
always outputs the current value of the connection. The color of the block is
yellow if a remote DPM is connected.
HINT: Initialization and updating of Remote Analog Values depends on the
connection to the remote DPM 8016.
The Output Analog block is a variable parameter for rational numbers which
always assigns the current value at the input to the connection. The color of
the block is yellow if a remote DPM is connected.
The IO Analog block is a variable parameter for rational numbers which always
outputs the current value of the connection. The current value at the input is
assigned to the connection. The color of the block is yellow if a remote DPM is
connected.
The Virtual Analog Value block is similar to the IO Analog block, but has no
connection. The keyword Value of the block is used instead of a connection.
The keyword Persistent is used for persistent storage of the value:
– Persistent = 1: The value is stored in non-volatile memory, so the value is
still available after a reset of the DPM.
– Persistent = 0: The value is stored in volatile memory.
The Constant Analog block is a constant parameter for rational numbers. The
block always outputs the value assigned to its keyword Value during Task
Engine configuration.
The Input Logic is a variable parameter for Boolean values which always
outputs the current value of the connection. The color of the block is yellow if
a remote DPM is connected.
HINT: Initialization and updating of Remote Boolean Values depends on the
The Output Logic block is a variable parameter for Boolean values which
always assigns the current value at the input to the connection.
The IO Logic block is a variable parameter for Boolean values which always
assigned to the connection.

The Virtual Logic block is similar to the IO Logic block, but has no connection.
The keyword Value of the block is used instead of a connection. he keyword
Persistent is used for persistent storage of the value:
The Constant Logic block is a constant parameter for Boolean values. The
The Calendar Entry block is being used to create time-dependant Boolean

values. The outputted Boolean value depends on the configuration of this
block and the current system time.

ANALOG OPERATIONS
Element Description
The Addition block provides 2 inputs for rational numbers. The rational number at the output is always
the sum of rational numbers of the (wired) inputs.
upper input. The output always presents the result of this analog operation.
The Multiplication block multiplies the rational number of the upper input with the rational number of
the lower input. The output always presents the result of this analog operation.
input.
Boolean value at the upper input. If the Boolean value at the upper input is false, the value of the
center input appears at the output. If the Boolean value at the upper input is true, the value of the
lower input appears at the output.
The Convert block converts a Boolean value to a rational number. The Boolean value 0 is converted to
the rational number 0.0, the Boolean value 1 is converted to the rational number 1.0.
The Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is only
true when identical numbers are present at the inputs.
The Not Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is
only true when the numbers that are present at the inputs differ from each other.
true when the rational number of the upper input is greater than the rational number of the lower
input.

The Greater Or Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the
output is only true when the rational number of the upper input is greater or equal than the rational
The Less block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output is only
true when the rational number of the upper input is lower than the rational number of the lower input.
The Less Or Equal block compares the rational numbers at the inputs. The Boolean value at the output
is only true when the rational number of the upper input is lower or equal than the rational number of
the lower input.
The Range Check block allows the range check of a rational number. The Boolean value at the output is
only true when the rational number at the input is greater or equal than the property
TE.RANGE_CHECK_1.range.min and lower or equal than the property TE.RANGE_CHECK_1.range.max
– range.max: Enter the upper bound of the range to be checked
– range.min: Enter the lower bound of the range to be checked

LOGIC OPERATIONS
Element Description
The AND block provides 2 inputs for Boolean values. The Boolean value at the output is only true when all
(wired) inputs are true.
The OR block provides 2 inputs for Boolean values. The Boolean value at the output is only true when at
least one (wired) input is true.
The XOR block provides 2 inputs for Boolean values. The Boolean value at the output is only true when
exactly one (wired) input is true.
The Memo (Flip-flop) block provides 2 inputs for Boolean values. The upper input sets the flip flop, the
lower input resets the flip flop.
The Convert block converts a rational number to a Boolean value. The rational number 0.0 is converted to
the Boolean value 0, the rational number 1.0 is converted to the Boolean value 1.

when the values at the inputs are identical (e.g. both inputs are true, or both inputs are false).
true when the values at the inputs are different from each other (e.g. one input is true while the other
input is false).

ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Element Description
The Alarm block is used to trigger an alarm. Double click the block to edit the alarm settings (see
screenshot below).
– PRIORITY: Priority of the alarm (0 to 100).
– ALARM: Select the alarm type to be triggered, see table below.
– INPUT CHANNEL: When using ALARM = EXTERN select the input channel of the DPM 8016,
where the external alarm signal is present.
– DESTINATIONS: Select the destination zone(s) or group(s) for the alarm.

The Manual Alarm is similar to the Alarm block. The additional input T acts like a pushbutton and
allows to switch the alarm signal on or off. Double click the block to edit the alarm settings (see
screenshot below).
– INPUT CHANNEL: When using ALARM = EXTERN select the input channel of the device, where
the external alarm signal is present.

The Announcement block is used to trigger an announcement. Double click the block to edit the
announcement settings (see screenshot below).
– PRIORITY: Priority of the announcement (0 to 100).
– PRECHIME TYPE: Select the pre chime (see table below). Select NO, if there should be now
pre chime
– INPUT CHANNEL: Select the input channel of the device, where the announcement signal is
present.
– DESTINATIONS: Select the destination zone(s) or group(s) for the announcement.

The Announcement OFF block is used to stop an announcement. Double click the block to edit the
– STOP PRIORITY: Enter the priority (0 to 100) that is used to stop an announcement.
present.
– DESTINATIONS: Select the destination zone(s) or group(s), where the announcement should
be stopped.
The Chime block is used to trigger a chime. Double click the block to edit the chime settings.
– PRIORITY: The priority of the chime (0 to 100).
– TYPE: Select the type of the chime.
– LOOP: Select this checkbox to repeat the chime automatically.
– HOLD: Hold means that the message is stopped at the loop end.
– DESTINATIONS: Select the destination zone(s) or group(s) for the chime.

The EVAC Message or Business Message block is used to trigger a MM-2 message. Double click the
block to edit the message settings (see screenshot below).
– PRIORITY: The priority of the message (0 to 100).
– MESSAGE NAME: Select the (EVAC or Business) message to start.
– LOOP: Select this checkbox to repeat the message automatically.
– DESTINATIONS: Select the destination zone(s) or group(s) for the message.

The Timer block sets the state at the output to true for an adjustable duration, when the Boolean
value at the input changes from false to true.
– Duration: Enter the duration in seconds, without unit.
– Hold: See illustration below.
– Retrigger Falling: See illustration below.
– Retrigger Rising: See illustration below.
– State: State of the block (1 = time running)
– Timer Value


This block is used for indicating a text message at the LC display of one or more call stations.
Depending on the software or hardware version used this block is called “CST Text block” or “DPC
Text block”. The illustration left shows the CST Text block.
– Acknowledge: Enter 1 if pressing the ESC button at the call station should discard the text at
the display.
– Address: Enter the CAN address of the call station, where the text should be indicated. Enter
0 if the text should be indicated at all call stations.
– Buzzer: Enter 1 if the buzzer should signal the text indication additionally.
– Clear: Enter 1 if the text should be cleared when the input changes from true to false.
– Duration: Enter the time in seconds (without unit), how long the text should be indicated.
– State: State of the block (1 = text is indicated)
– Text: Enter the text to be indicated at the display. The maximum length is 20 characters,
including space and special characters. See table below for available characters.
The Impedance Measurement block is used for executing a line measurement.

– Lines By Name = ALL
– State: State of the block (1 = measurement active)
– Test Function = LINETEST
The Debounce block is used for debouncing a signal.

– Falling Edge: Enter 1 if the falling edge (change from true to false) at the input should be
debounced.
– Rising Edge: Enter 1, if the rising edge (change from false to true) at the input should be
debounced.
– State: State of the block
– Time: Enter the debounce time in seconds (without unit)
The Loop block allows building feedback loops in the Task Engine. Unstable conditions are
prevented by the block. To point out the function of this block, the input is at the right side, the
output is at the left side.
context menu to open the Edit Textbox dialog. This dialog allows editing the caption and e.g. font

size and font type.

The Input Supervision block allows supervision of a rational number, especially an input signal
from a CIE (Control and Indicating Equipment/fire alarm system). Two ranges can be defined, the
Active range and the Ok range. Depending on the ranges the Boolean value at the output (e.g. for
triggering an alarm) and a USER FAULT (e.g. for error indication of invalid input values) will be set.
The Active range is defined by:
– range_active.max: Upper bound of the Active range
– range_active.min: Lower bound of the Active range
The Boolean value at the output is true if the rational number assigned via Function & Connection
is within the Active range. The Boolean value at the output is false if the rational number at the
input is below or above the Active range.
The Ok range is defined by:
– range_ok.max: Upper bound of the Ok range.
– range_ok.min: Lower bound of the Ok range.

HINT: If the value of the assigned Function & Connection leaves the Ok range, the State does
not change (“state value is latched“)

The USER FAULT is set to 0 if the rational number assigned via Function & Connection is within the
Ok range. The USER FAULT is set to 1 if the rational number at the input is below or above the Ok
range. Following properties are used to select the USER FAULT:
– userfault_connection
– userfault_idx

The Busy Condition block allows to check if a specific signal source or signal type is active in a
selection of zones or groups. Double click the block to edit the settings (see screenshot below).
– SELECTOR: Select if the status (busy condition) of a SIGNAL TYPE or SIGNAL SOURCE should
be checked.
– GLOBAL/LOCAL SIGNALS (SELECTOR = SIGNAL TYPE): Select one or more signal types to
check. Set the minimum priority of the signal types via the ABOVE PRIORTY field. Only if
signals types above this priority are active in the zones/groups they will be indicated as busy.
– LOCAL SIGNAL SOURCES (SELECTOR = SIGNAL SOURCE). Select the announcements,
alarms, evac messages or programs to be checked.
– ZONES/GROUPS: Select one or more zones or groups to be checked. Use the OR-combined or
AND-combined radio buttons to select if busy should be indicated if a signal is present in at
least one or all of the selected zones/groups.

Alarm Types
Type Graphical Illustration
Extern -
DIN Alarm
Slow Whoop

Siren
Two-Tone Alarm
Telephone Alarm
Ship Alarm 1
Ship Alarm 2
Ship Alarm 3
Ship Alarm 4
Ship Alarm 5
Ship Alarm 6
Ship Alarm 7
Ship Alarm 8
Ship Alarm 9
Ship Alarm 10

Ship Alarm 11
Ship Alarm 12
Ship Alarm 13
Ship Alarm 14
Ship Alarm 15
Ship Alarm 16
Ship Alarm 17
SILENCE -

Chime types
Typ
1_TONE
2_TONE
3_TONE
4_TONE
2x2_TONE
2_TONE_PRE

Characters for CST Text block
Available characters for text messages at DPC 8015 display
! " # $ % &
' ( ) * + ,
- . / 0 1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8
9 : ; < = “space”
A a O o U u
s ? A B C D
E F G H I J
K L M N O P
Q R S T U V
W X Y Z [ \
] ^ _ ` a b
c d e f g h
i j k l m n
o p q r s t
u v w x y z
{ | } ~
Pagings Dialog
The paging dialog allows the configuration of pagings (e.g. alarm or EVAC message) with dynamic destinations.

Element Description
TYPE A paging can be either of type PULSE or of type STATIC. By default a paging is of
type STATIC.
CONDITION The status of the condition selected here starts the paging, e.g. the contact of a
CIE connected to a GPI of the device.
INVERT Set the checkbox to invert the condition that starts the paging.
START/ADD TRIGGER The value used to trigger the start of (or addition of destinations to) an active
paging. The rising edge of the value is evaluated.
STOP/SUB TRIGGER The value used to trigger the stop of (or subtraction of destinations from) an
active paging. The rising edge of the value is evaluated.
PAGING The paging initiated by the condition.
DESTINATIONS The destinations (zones or groups) of the paging.
REQUEST Indicates if the paging condition is active or inactive.
STATUS Indicates if the paging is ON or OFF.

Element Description
STOP SIGNALS (TYPE PULSE) Select a common stop condition for all signals of type PULSE. All available
condition elements are listed. This element is visible only if the type PULSE is
configured for at least on paging.
INVERT (TYPE PULSE) Select this Checkbox to invert the stop condition for all signals of type PULSE.
This element is visible only if the type PULSE is configured for at least on paging.
DELETE Press the DELETE button to delete the paging selected in the paging list.
UPDATE Press the UPDATE button to apply the settings in the lower section of the dialog
to paging selected in the paging list.
NEW Press the NEW button to create a new paging using the settings in the lower
section of the dialog and adds it to the paging list.
CONDITION
FILTER and condition list Select the condition to start a paging from the list. Enter a string (e.g. GPI) in the
text field FILTER to list only the conditions containing this string.
START/ADD TRIGGER
IMMEDIATE Select IMMEDIATE if the paging should start immediately or the zones should be
added immediately.
TRIGGERED Select TRIGGERED if the paging should be triggered by the value selected below.
NEXT SEQUENCE Select NEXT SEQUENCE if zones should be added only after the message ended.
When selected, the paging is started immediately.
Can only be used for MM-2 Messages.
FILTER and trigger list Select the trigger condition from the list. Enter a string (e.g. GPI) in the text field
FILTER to list only the conditions containing this string.
STOP/SUB TRIGGER
IMMEDIATE Select IMMEDIATE if the paging should stop immediately or the zones should be
removed immediately.
NEXT SEQUENCE Select NEXT SEQUENCE if zones should be removed only after the message
ended. When selected, the paging is stopped immediately
after the message ended. Can only be used for MM-2 Messages.
PAGING
EXISTING Select EXISTING to select an existing paging from the dropdown menu.
NEW/EDIT Select NEW/EDIT to edit the settings of the paging.
TYPE Select the paging type from the dropdown.
LABEL Enter the name of the paging.

PRIORITY Select the priority of the paging.
ALARM If the selected paging TYPE = ALARM you can select the alarm type from this
dropdown.
PRECHIME TYPE If the selected paging TYPE = ANNOUNCEMENT you can select the prechime type
from this dropdown.
CHIME TYPE If the selected paging TYPE = CHIME you can select the chime type from this
dropdown.
MESSAGE NR If the selected paging TYPE = EVAC Message you can select the message number
from this dropdown.
INPUT CHANNEL If the selected paging TYPE= ANNOUNCEMENT or TYPE = ALARM (and ALARM =
Extern) you can select the audio input channel for the paging.
DESTINATIONS Select the zones or groups of the paging.
Notice!
Setting of routing delay
In large PROMATRIX systems the internal routing of pagings can take quite some time. The
property “DPM8000_x.Matrix.Paging.RoutingDelay” allows to delay the activation of the audio
signal source for up to 10000 ms. This allows the system to finalize all routing settings and avoids
the cut off of pre-chimes or other signals.
Programs Dialog
The Programs dialog allows to configure 16 programs for back ground music.

Element Description
# Number of the program.
LABEL Name of the program.
PRIORITY The priority of the program.
LEVEL Level of the program.
INPUT CHANNELS Input channel of the program. Select more than one input channel to mix the
audio signals.
CALL STATIONS The call stations where this program is listed in the menu and can be selected by
the call station user.
LABEL Text field for labeling a program (max. 20 characters), e.g. giving it an application
specific name.
Note: Using “,” (comma) in a name is not permissible.
PRIORITY Edit the priority of the program selected in the program list (range: 1 to 69).
LEVEL (dB) Edit the level of the program selected in the program list (range: -80 to 0 dB).
Only the level can be edited in online mode.

Element Description
Local Select this option to use one or more local inputs of UI-1 modules (channel A or
B) as audio source of the selected program.
Shared Select this option to use an existing program of another DPM (connected via
Ethernet) as audio source of the selected program.
CALL STATIONS Select the call stations where the selected program will be listed in the menu.
UserMix Dialog
The UserMix window allows configuring audio routings (e.g. background music) in the PROMATRIX 8000 system.

Element Description
CONDITION The condition that starts the background music, e.g. a switch connected to a GPI of
the device.
INVERT Set the checkbox to invert the condition that starts the back ground music.

SOURCE The source of the background music.
DESTINATIONS The destinations (zones or groups) of the background music.
REQUEST Indicates the current status (active or inactive)
Element Description
DELETE Press the DELETE button to delete the entry selected in the list.
UPDATE Press the UPDATE button to apply the settings in the lower section of the dialog to
entry selected in the list.
NEW Press the NEW button to create a new background music using the settings in the
lower section of the dialog and adds it to the list.
Element Description
CONDITION
FILTER and condition list Select the condition to start background music from the list. Enter a string (e.g.
GPI) in the text field FILTER to list only the conditions containing this string.
SOURCE
EXISTING Select EXISTING to select an existing source for background music from the
dropdown menu.
NEW/EDIT Select NEW/EDIT to edit the settings of the source.
LABEL Enter the name of the background music.
INPUT CHANNEL Select the audio input channel for the background music.
DESTINATIONS Select the zones or groups of the background music.
Interface Dialog
The Interface window allows configuring the different interfaces located on the rear panel of the DPM 8016. All
REMOTE CAN BUS and DPM 8016 CONTROL PORT settings can be made in here. Configuring the Ethernet interface is
done under Network Settings in the General window.


Element Description
CAN INTERFACE
CAN BAUD RATE Transmission rate of the CAN-Bus. All devices on the CAN-Bus must be set to one
common transmission rate.
HINT: Editing the CAN BAUD RATE setting is possible in offline mode only.
CAN STATE Displays the current CAN-Bus status. Possible indications are: BUS OK, Bus
Heavy, Bus Off.
CAN DEVICE LIST Opens the dialog box for configuring the connected devices.
OPEN INTERFACE
ENABLE Set the checkbox to activate the ASCII control protocol of the DPM.
PASSWORD If password protection of the ASCII control protocol is required, enter the
password here. Repeat the password in the CONFIRM
PASSWORD field. Go online (write) to set the password in the DPM.
HINT: Editing the password setting is possible in offline mode only.
TCP Port TCP port of the ASCII control protocol. The default port is 6273.

NUMBER OF LOGIC VALUES Enter the number of logic values of the task engine to be available via the ASCII
control protocol.
NUMBER OF ANALOG VALUES Enter the number of analog values of the task engine to be available via the ASCII
control protocol.
IS ALIVE PERIOD (s) Enter the is alive period of the ASCII control protocol in seconds.
DPM 4000 INTERFACE Please see section below for details about purpose and configuration.
ENABLE Set the checkbox to activate the RS-232 interface between a DPM 4000 and the
DPM 8016.
AUDIO OUTPUT Select the audio output of the DPM 8016, that should output the audio signal to
the DPM 4000.
AUDIO INPUT Select the audio input number of the DPM 4000.
MEMOFLAG BROKEN LINE The DPM 4000 memo flag selected here is used for supervising the RS-232
connection.
CONTROL PORT
Clicking with the right mouse button on the corresponding symbol of a control
input provides the configuration dialog of this control input. (not yet activated)
It is possible to manually change the condition of the control outputs (normally

open contact / normally closed contact). Depending on their according

configuration, control outputs are only switched as long as the mouse button is
pressed.
Clicking with the right mouse button on the corresponding symbol of a control
output provides opens the configuration dialog of this control output. (not yet
activated)

DPM 4000 Interface
The DPM 4000 interface of the DPM 8016 gives the possibility of extending an existing Promatrix 4000 system by
additional zones / call stations / amplifier power, etc.
Following hardware is required:
– a DPM 8016 controller with modules
– at least one DPC call station
– at least one DPA amplifiers
DCS 400 relay cards are optional. The DPC 8015 call station enables to do announcements into the existing Promatrix
4000 zones and new Promatrix 8000 zones. Background music (BGM) assignment is also possible from the DPC 8015.
The Promatrix 4000 system may be seen as time master for the complete system. Control communication between the
two systems is done via the RS-232 interface. Audio transmission is done from an AO-1 audio output module of the
DPM 8016 to a Mic/Line input of the DPM 4000.
Configuration
The configuration of the DPM 4000 interface is done in the corresponding section of the DPM 8016 Interfaces dialog.
When selecting the checkbox “ENABLE” a specific topology with 100 zones is created automatically. Please take care
to start with this topology, as then the first 100 zones are reserved for the Promatrix 4000 system. Existing zones may
be deleted.

Open the “Topology / Zones” dialog and add a non-DPA amplifier, select the DPM Audio output to be used for the
PM4000. Connect the non-DPA amplifier with the PM4000 topology. Go back to “Interfaces” dialog and check correct
DPM8016 audio output (comboBox “AUDIO OUTPUT”). Choose an audio input at the PM4000 (selection field “AUDIO
INPUT”). Please ensure that the PM 4000 system offers a free input (re-programming may be necessary).
For fault indication (fault interface), a Memo Flag can be programmed in the PM 4000 system which is triggered via the
PM 8000 by setting the “MEMOFLAG BROKEN LINE” selection field accordingly.
If the PM 4000 time shall be used as system time, the PM 8000 system can act as time slave. In this case, at the DPM
8016 dialog “General”, the time synchronization has to be set to “DPM 4000 synchronisation”.
Power Management dialog

The Power Management dialog allows configuring the standby mode of the DPM 8016 in detail.

Element Description
POWER ON/OFF SIGNAL Select the GPO contact or the virtual TE value for signaling the DPM
operating mode. In standby mode the GPO is open.
EXTERNAL ON/STANDBY Select the digital GPI or virtual TE value to be used for switching to
standby mode.

MAINS POWER Select the digital GPI or virtual TE value that is used for signaling
„mains power OK“.
BATTERY POWER Select the digital GPI or virtual TE value that is used for signaling
„battery power OK“.
CHARGER STATUS Select the digital GPI or virtual TE value that is used for signaling
„charger status OK“.
BATTERY 90% Select the digital GPI or virtual TE value that is used for signaling
„battery status at least 90%“.
PERIPHERAL DEVICE STATUS Set the checkbox to monitor the status of peripheral devices..
COMBINED POWER STATE This LED is green, if all selected power supply status are OK.
MAINS MODE If mains power is used for running the system, the DPM is in MAINS
MODE and the LED lights green. You can edit the name of this mode in
the text field.
STANDBY MODE If the system is in STANDBY MODE, this LED lights green. You can edit
the name of this mode in the text field.
BATTERY MODE If battery power is used for running the system, the DPM is in
BATTERY MODE and the LED lights green. You can edit the name of
this mode in the text field.
AMPLIFIERS Select this option if Amplifiers should switch to standby mode if mains
power fails.
CONTROLLER Select this option if the Controller should switch to standby mode if
mains power fails..
MAINS MODE Enter the minimum priority a signal (e.g. chime) must have to switch
the system on, if the system is in standby mode and mains power is
available.
BATTERY MODE Enter the minimum priority a signal (e.g. chime) must have to switch
not available (battery mode).

HINT: The “Power Calculator” tool can be used to calculate the power consumption of a DPM 8016 or a complete
PROMATRIX 8000 system. The tool can be found in directory “/Tools” or can be requested from the IRIS-Net
support team.
HINT: The properties “Operating Mode” and “Standby LED” can be used for advanced power management
configuration via the Task Engine, please refer to section Properties, page 782.

LineSupervision dialog
The Line Supervision dialog allows configuring and control of the DPM line supervision. Line supervision can be done
via line impedance measurement method or the End of Line (EOL) method.
– When using the impedance measurement method the impedance of the speaker line is calculated using a voltage
and current measurement. A fault message is indicated in the event that the measurement exceeds or falls short of
the tolerance range. The impedance measurement method is not suitable for permanent line supervision. The
upper and lower bounds of the impedance measurement, e.g. frequency or impedance value, depend on the
amplifier type used, please refer to the amplifier owner‘s manual.
– When using EOL 8001 modules the amplifier is communicating with the modules. A fault message is indicated if
the communication fails, e.g. because of a short circuit or wire break. The EOL method allows permanent
supervision, acoustic signals do not interrupt or affect the supervision. Usage of EOL 8001 modules is only
possible if direct topology is used.

LINE SUPERVISION TABLE
Element Description
ZONE/LINE System internal description of the zone or line.

ZONE/LINE NAME Description of the zone or line.
IGNORE Check this checkbox, if the result of the line measurement should be ignored. A
error of this zone or line will not be indicated in the system. Regular
measurements are carried out anyway.
HINT: If the checkbox is checked a short cut will not be indicated. If the zone is
connected via a line relay, the relay will be deactivated.
GROUND FAULT This LED lights red, if a ground fault error has occurred.
IMP FAULT This LED lights red, if the measured impedance is out of the tolerance range.
SHORT FAULT This LED lights red, if there is a short cut at the zone or line (measured
impedance value below 25% of reference value). In this case the system will not
start calls or alarms in this zone or line.
HINT: If the zone is connected via a line relay, the relay will be deactivated
when there is a short cut (short cut protection for other lines on the same
amplifier).
EOL FAULT This LED lights red, if a EOL error has occurred.
FREQ [Hz] Enter the frequency of the measurement signal.
LEVEL [dB] Enter the level of the measurement signal, based on the maximum output level.
Example: A setting of -20dB corresponds to a output level of 10 Veff when using a
100 Veff amplifier output.
IMP-REF [Ohm] Indicates the impedance reference value of the zone or line.
-TOL [%] Maximum negative deviation of the impedance value of the zone or line from the
reference value, given in procent.
+TOL [%] Maximum positive deviation of the impedance value of the zone or line from the
reference value, given in procent.
IMPEDANCE [Ohm] Indicates the impedance value of the zone or line of the last successful
measurement.
VOLT [V] Indicates the voltage of the measurement signal of the last successful
measurement.
CURRENT [mA] Indicates the current of the measurement signal of the last successful
measurement.
EOL Q/A Indicates the quantity and addresses of the EOL modules in the zone or line.
STATUS Indicates the status of the measurement.
SELECT ALL All zone or lines are selected.
START MEAS. Starts the line measurement in all selected zones or line.
SET REF. Press this button to store the values of the last measurement as new reference
values for the selected zones or lines.
EXPORT All measurement data of the LINE SUPERVISION TABLE are exported to a csv file.
Open the file in a spreadsheet for further processing.

DAILY MEASUREMENT Check this checkbox, if a daily measurement should be done automatically. Enter
the time the measurement should start.
TRANSFORMER COMPENSATION Check this checkbox to optimize the impedance measurement for high
impedance speaker lines (e.g. one speaker only).
RELAY SWITCHING Enter the number of relay switching cycles, which should be done before the
measurement starts. This is only valid for line relays, priority relays, control relays
or call relays.
PRIORITY Priority of the line measurement signal.

The Line Supervision table is automatically generated from the available zones filled with default values.

HINT: Use copy & paste to copy configurations from one element to another element in the line supervision table.

IMPEDANCE METHOD

The values of frequency, level and tolerance can be edited and adapted to the real conditions. To generate the
reference values a first line measurement must be performed, the resulting measurement values are stored as
reference values. The measurement of the lines and the comparison with the reference values is done automatically
every day at the scheduled time if the line is not busy. Each audio signal on the line interrupts the line measurement.
The measurements will be continued automatically if the line is free again.

EOL METHOD

To enable the EOL supervision for a zone or line in the column EOL Q / A in the first line the number of EOL modules
connected to the line must be entered, in the following lines the addresses of the modules must be entered. Enter 0 to
disables the EOL method for the corresponding line.

HINT: For power supply of the EOL modules a pilot tone is required, so the pilot tone generator of the power
amplifier shall be activated.

For more information and technical data for the two measurement methods please refer to the DPA 8000 Owners
Manual.
Topology/Zones Dialog
The Topology/Zones dialog window allows configuration of Topologies and Zones. Zones are configured in a topology,
each zone can be selected to be member of a Group.


Icon bar
Element Description
Non-DPA Amp Click on this button to add a non-DPA amplifier to the Topology/Zone configuration.
New Topology Click on this button to add a new Topology to Topology/Zones configuration.
Relay List Click on this button to generate excel sheet report of the configured relays. The report
includes relay names, configured zones, type, invert status, topology and relay system
object name.
Note: If Microsoft Excel is not installed on your computer, a CSV report is generated.
New Group Click on this button to create a new Group. The All group, including all zones, is created
automatically. For every new group the zones can be selected via the checkboxes in the
group column.

Element Description
Group List Click on this button to generate excel sheet report of all Groups configured in the
PROMATRIX 8000 system. The report includes the caption and object id of systems zones
and the assignment of zones to system groups.
Note: If Microsoft Excel is not installed on computer, a CSV report is generated.
Manage Groups Click on this button to open the Manage Group Dialog. This dialog allows to add or delete
Groups and to add or remove Zones from a selected Group.

Non-DPA amplifier settings dialog
Element Description
Name Name of the amplifier.
IN Select the input source of the amplifier. This Combo box lists all output channels of AO-1
modules of the DPM 8016.
Notice!
This dialog can be useful to check or edit connections between DPM outputs and amplifier inputs
in large systems.

Amplifier settings dialog
This dialog can be opened by doubled clicking on any of the amplifier blocks. This dialog can be used to create or edit
connections between output channels of AO-1 modules and amplifier input channel.
Element Description
Name Name of the amplifier.
IN1 to IN4 Select the input source of the amplifier channel. This Combo box lists all output channels of
AO-1 modules of the DPM 8016. There is a combo box for each channel of the amplifier (1,
2 or 4).

Topologies
This dialog allows adding new topologies to the Topology/Zones configuration. Following four topology types are
available:
– 1 in N
– Direct
– Direct AB
– Prog/Call
Following tables describe the elements of the four topology setting dialogs and maximized topology blocks.
1 IN N topology
Element Description
Name Name of topology
Type This combo box lists all type of topologies that can be created in the Promatrix 8000
system.
Number Of Zones Number of zones to be created in the selected topology.
First relay Number of the first relay to be assigned to first zone created in this topology. Relays are
automatically assigned to the subsequent Zones in ascending order starting from the
first relay.
Note: The Relay Name is given as “Relay No (Device_x/Channel or Slot)” with x as
number of the device. An example for making this numbering clearer is listed below.
If No Relay is selected as first relay, zones are created without assigning any physical
device relays to them. In this case the relays have to be assigned manually.
IN Select the output channel of the amplifier to be used as input for this topology.

Element Description
INV Press the INV button to invert the status of all relays in the topology.
Press this button to minimize or maximize the zones or relays dialog.
+Prio Press this button to add a priority relays to the zone.

Note: Up to 5 priority relays can be configured in a zone.
+Cont Press this button to add a control relays to the zone.

Note: Up to 5 control relays can be configured in a zone.
X Press this button to delete the corresponding zone or relay.
This combo box lists all available relays of DCS or DPA devices in the PROMATRIX 8000
system.
Enter a name for the zone.
This control allows setting the priority value of a priority relay.
+Zone Click on this button to add a new zone to the topology.

DIRECT topology
Element Description
system.
automatically assigned to the subsequent Zones in ascending order starting from the first
relay.
Note: The Relay Name is given as “Relay No (Device_x/Channel or Slot)” with x as number
of the device. An example for making this numbering clearer is listed below.
IN A or B Select the output channel of the amplifier to be used as input for part A or B of this
topology

Element Description
INV Press the INV button to invert the status of all relays in
the topology.
Press this button to minimize or maximize the zones or

relays dialog.


X Press this button to delete the corresponding zone or

relay.
This combo box lists all available relays of DCS or DPA

devices in the PROMATRIX 8000 system.
This control allows setting the priority value of a priority

relay.

DIRECT AB
Element Description
system.

Element Description
first relay.
IN A or B Select the output channel of the amplifier to be used as input for part A or B of this
topology
Element Description


This combo box lists all available relays of DCS or DPA devices in the PROMATRIX
8000 system.

PROG CALL
Element Description
system.
first relay.
First Relay (Call) Number of the first relay to be assigned to first call line created in this topology. Relays
are automatically assigned to the subsequent Zones in ascending order starting from
the first relay.
First Relay (Prog) Number of the first relay to be assigned to first program line created in this topology.
Relays are automatically assigned to the subsequent Zones in ascending order starting
from the first relay.
IN (Call) Select the output channel of the amplifier to be used as input for the call line of this
topology
IN (Prog) Select the output channel of the amplifier to be used as input for the program line of
this topology



This combo box lists all available relays of DCS or DPA devices in the
PROMATRIX 8000 system.
+Zone Click on this button to add a new zone to the topology.

Relay numbering
Following table lists the names given to relays of a two channel DPA 8225 amplifier.
Relais of amplifier Internal name used in topology settings dialog
Relay 1 of channel 1 1(DPA8000_1/1)

Manage group dialog
This dialog allows to create, edit or delete groups. It is also possible to add or remove zones from a selected Group. To
remove a zone from a group, select the zone in the GROUP MEMBERS section and press the delete button.


Element Descripiton
SYSTEM GROUPS Lists all groups of the PROMATRIX 8000 system.
New Group Press this button to create a new group.
Delete Group Press this button to delete the group selected in the SYSTEM GROUPS list.
SYSTEM ZONES Lists all zones of the PROMATRIX 8000 system.
Add >> Adds the zones selected in the SYSTEM ZONES list to the group selected in the
SYSTEM GROUPS list.
GROUP MEMBERS Lists the zones currently included in the group selected in the SYSTEM GROUPS
list.
AudioNet Dialog

The AudioNet dialog allows the configuration and supervision of an audio network, consisting of two or more DPM
8016 connected via CM-1 CobraNet modules. The AudioNet tab will only be displayed when a CM-1 CobraNet module is
configured. With AudioNet it is possible to transmit audio signals from one DPM to one or more other DPM. One DPM
needs to be configured as AudioNet master.
All other DPM within the project are automatically configured as AudioNet slave. Both CobraNet interface (audio) and
Ethernet (control data) are required for setting up a AudioNet. Upon failure of the primary or the secondary CobraNet
interface the other interface will be activated automatically. In case of failure of the Ethernet AudioNet Redundancy is
enabled. This function allows transmitting a signal in a predefined zone pattern to all DPMs, if the function is activated
and a Destination is defined.


Element Description
AUDIO NET Select the DPM 8016 from the Dropdown menu that should be used as master
MASTER in the audio network.
HINT: In large networks usage of a network metric, e.g. betweenness
centrality is recommended for selecting the master.
ENABLE Check this checkbox, if a redundant audio network is used.
DESTINATION Click the ... button to open the Destinations dialog. The Destinations dialog
allows selecting a zone/group. If there is an error in the audio network, the
audio signal is transmitted to the selected zone/group.
HINT: Selecting the “all” group is recommended.
At the occurrence of a type of error for which the checkbox DETECT is ticked,
the COLLECTED ERROR AUDIO NET flag is set at the same time.
The current condition of each type of error gets indicated. Green means no
error, red indicates that an error has been detected.

CM-1 Error in CM-1 module of the DPM 8016.
CM-1 PRIMARY Error in the connection of the PRIMARY LINK interface to another network
LINK device (e.g. switch, router, DPM).
CM-1 SECONDARY Error in the connection of the SECONDARY LINK interface to another network
LINK device (e.g. switch, router, DPM).
AUDIO NET BUS Error in audio network (CobraNet).
AUDIO NET Error in connection to audio network (Slave DPM has no Ethernet connection to
CONNECTION Master DPM).
AUDIO NET The number of devices connected to the audio network (Ethernet) is not
COMPLETE identical to the number of configured devices.
COLLECTED This error is indicated as “AUDIO NET” error in the Supervision dialog.
ERROR AUDIO NET

Properties
BUZZER CONTROL
The DPM8016_1.BuzzerControl property of the DPM 8016 allows configuring the integrated buzzer. Following settings
are available:
Value Description
on Buzzer is activated is a new error appears.
off Buzzer is deactivated.
DPC_1 Buzzer is activated if the call station (DPC_1, DPC2,...) is not connected.

OPERATION MODE
The “DPM8016_1.System.PowerManagement.OperatingMode” property allows setting the current operation mode of
the DPM 8016 and connected devices. High priority signals prevent changing into standby mode. Following settings are
available:
Value Description
0 Switch DPM 8016 in standby mode
1 Switch DPM 8016 in operating mode

HINT: The mode of peripheral devices connected to the DPM 8016 is set automatically.

STANDBYLED
The Standby LED of the DPM 8016 lights, when the device is in standby mode. The corresponding property
“DPM8016_1.System.StandbyLED” can be used to query the current mode.
Value Description
0 DPM 8016 is in operating mode
1 DPM 8016 is in standby mode

The Controller can be easily integrated into media or touch panel controls via the Ethernet interface. This section
describes how to connect via Ethernet and the available options of the control protocol.
ETHERNET CONNECTION
To connect an external device to the Controller via Ethernet, the Ethernet port of the Controller must be configured.
Following table lists the keywords of the Controller for Ethernet configuration.

Keyword Values Default Description
OpenIntActive 0, 1 0 This keyword allows activating or deactivating the ASCII

Control Protocol. If deactivated, a connection via Ethernet is
not possible.
– OpenIntActive = 1: The ASCII Control Protocol is activated
– OpenIntActive = 0: The ASCII Control Protocol is not
activated
OpenIntPort 6273 The Ethernet port for the TCP connection between the
Controller and the external device.

Following table lists the default setting of the Controller’s Ethernet port.
Parameter Default
IP address 192.168.1.100
Port 6273

HINT: Only one single Ethernet connection can be used at one time.
HINT: The password protection of the ASCII Control Protocol can be configured at the Interfaces dialog of the
Controller.

ZONE STATUS
Whenever the output status of the local zones changes, a zone status string is sent via the ASCII Control Protocol. The
format of the zone status string is: <Idx.y> <Change> <Pm> <Zone Pattern>
Element Description
Idx.y Unique identifier:

x is the number x in the IRIS-Net internal device name, e.g. „Device_x“
y is a unique paging request number of the local Controller
Change ON, if the paging request Idx.y has activated one or more local audio outputs of the Controller
OFF, if the paging request was terminated and the corresponding local audio outputs of the
Controller have been deactivated
Pm Priority of the paging request
Zone Pattern List of activated local zones of the Controller.

Examples:
Id3.7 ON P12 Z2-3
Id3.7 OFF
Notice!
The zone pattern lists the zone numbers, this numbers can be found in the Line Supervision table
of the DPM 8016


WATCHDOG FUNCTION
If the ASCII Control Protocol is activated and also the watchdog string output is activated, following string is sent via
the ASCII Control Protocol at regular intervals: “Open IntIs Alive”
Keyword Range Default Description
Open IntIs Alive 0, 1,..., 100 0 This keyword is used to active or deactivate
Period the output of the watchdog string. When
activated the output time period can be
adjusted.
– Open IntIs Alive Period = 0: No output of
the watchdog string.
– Open IntIs Alive Period = 1...100: The
watchdog string is output every 1...100
seconds.
Example:
Open IntIs Alive Period = 15: The watchdog
string is output every 15 seconds.

INPUT VIA THE ASCII CONTROL PROTOCOL
The ASCII Control Protocol allows entering values for input parameters (rational numbers or Boolean values) of the
Controller’s Task Engine. The number of logic or analog values is set in the Interfaces dialog.
Logic values
Following format is used to edit the value of a logic value: <LVal><id> <value>
Element Description
LVal Indicates the use of a logic value in the Task Engine
id Unique identifier of the logic value in the Task Engine
value Boolean value to be assigned to the logic value

Example:
LVal1 0
For assigning a Boolean value via the ASCII Control Protocol the Task Engine block type „Input Logic“ is used. The
value of the block‘s property function must be set to <LVal><id>. The value of the block‘s property connection must be
set to DPM8016_x.OpenInterface


Analog values
Following format is used to edit the value of a analog value: <AVal><id> <value>
Element Description
AVal Indicates the use of a analog value in the Task Engine
id Unique identifier of the analog value in the Task Engine
value Rational number to be assigned to the analog value

Example:
AVal7 -30.222
For assigning a rational number via the ASCII Control Protocol the Task Engine block type „Input Analog“ is used. The
value of the block‘s property function must be set to <AVal><id>.

OUTPUT VIA THE ASCII CONTROL PROTOCOL
The ASCII Control Protocol allows to query values (rational numbers or Boolean values) of the Controller’s Task Engine.
Logic values
Following format is used to query the value of a logic value: <LVal><id> ?
Element Description
? Question mark

Example:
Query: “LVal 7?”
Reponse: “LVal7 1”
Analog values
Following format is used to query the value of a analog value: <AVal><id> ?
Element Description

? Question mark

Example:
Query: “AVal 7”
Response: “AVal7 -30.2222”

Caution!
Query-response sequences are not synchronized. E.g. zone status messages could be output
! between query and response, see following example.
Consequences
Example of unsynchronized output:

AVal 7?
Id3.4 ON P12 Z3,Z5-12,Z15 AVal7 -30.2222

FAULT REPORTING
The ASCII Control Protocol can be used to report faults to external systems. The set of error types to be output via the
ASCII Control Protocol can be configured at the Supervision dialog of the Controller.
Following format is used to report faults: Fault <Id>#<Parameter> <State> “<Text>”
Element Description
Id Stable fault number of fault IDs, see table below.
Parameter Stable fault parameter of error value, see table below.
State 0 if fault disappeared, 1 if fault occurred
Text User defined error message including the variable %u substituted with a parameter value

Examples:
– Module fault on module 2 occurred: Fault INT-4#2 1 “Module fault: #2”
– Temperature fault disappeared: Fault INT-6#1 0 “Temperature fault”

Following table lists the system error types and corresponding fault IDs of the ASCII control protocol.
SYSTEM OPEN INTERFACE TASK ENGINE AND

GROUP LOGGING FAULT
ERRORTYPE PARAMETER FAULT PARAMETER FAULT OUTPUT
GROUPS
ID
INTERNAL MEMORY / INT-1 Fault INT-1#1 1 Fault group 17:1

DATA „DPM Data fault“ asserted
WATCHDOG INT-2 Fault INT-2#1 1 Fault group 3 asserted

„Watchdog fault“
FIRMWARE INT-3 Fault INT-3#1 1 Fault group 18 asserted

„DPM software
fault“

MODULES Slot nr. of INT-4 Slot nr. of Fault INT-4#2 1 Fault group 5:2 asserted
faulty faulty „Module fault:#2“
module in module in
ascending ascending
order order
HARDWARE INT-5 Fault INT-5#1 1 Fault group 4 asserted

„DPM hardware
fault“
TEMPERATUR INT-6 Fault INT-6#1 1 Fault group 2 asserted

E „Temperature
fault“
AUDIO INT-7 Fault INT-7#1 1 Fault group 7 asserted

PROCESSING „DSP system
fault“
INPUT PILOT Nr. of faulty INT-8 Nr. of faulty Fault INT-8#2 1 Fault group 16:2
DETEC- TION input input „Audio In asserted
channel in channel in fault:#2“
ascending ascending
order order
INTERFACES CAN BUS IF-1 Fault IF-1#1 1 Fault group 8 asserted

„Can bus fault“
PCA BUS Slot nr. of IF-2 Slot nr. of Fault IF-2#2 1 Fault group 9 asserted
faulty faulty „PCA bus
module in module in fault:#2“
ascending ascending
order order
AUDIO NET IF-3 Fault IF-3#1 1 Fault group 10 asserted

„AudioNet fault“
EXTERNAL DPC DEVICES Address of EXT-1 Address of Fault EXT-1#2 1 Fault group 13:2
faulty DPC faulty DPC „DPC fault:#2“ asserted
DPA DEVICES Address of EXT-2 Address of Fault EXT-2#2 1 Fault group 12:2
faulty DPA faulty DPA „DPA fault:#2“ asserted
DCS DEVICES Address of EXT-3 Address of Fault EXT-3#2 1 Fault group 11:2
faulty DCS faulty DCS „DCS fault:#2“ asserted
POWER EXT-4 Fault EXT-4#1 1 Fault group 19 asserted

SUPPLY „Power fault“
SPEAKER LINE Line-Nr. of EXT-5 Line-Nr. of Fault EXT-5#100 1 Fault group 16:100
FAULT faulty line faulty line „Line fault:#100“ asserted
with 1 to
500: Zone
A, 501 to
1000:
Zone B

USER USER FAULT 1 User defined USR-1 User defined Fault USR-1#17 1 Fault group 20:17
„User fault 1:#17“ asserted
USER FAULT 2 User defined USR-2 User defined Fault USR-2#17 1 Fault group 21:17
USER FAULT 8 User defined USS-8 User defined Fault USR-8#17 1 Fault group 27:17
“User fault 9:#17” asserted
USER FAULT User defined USR-1 User defined Fault USR-10#17 Fault group 29:17
10 0 1 “User fault asserted
10:#17”

See also
– Supervision Dialog, page 721
DPC 8000 Call Station
The DPC 8015 is a call station for the PROMATRIX 8000 system. The call station employs a permanently supervised
gooseneck microphone with windscreen, a total of 20 buttons, a lighted LC-display and an integrated loudspeaker. The
15 function keys can be permanently assigned for discrete zone addressing. The call station can be expanded to
specific requirements with up to five DPC 8120 call station extensions with 20 freely programmable function or zone
keys per DPC 8120.

Additional DPC 8015 Features:
– Five pre-programmed function keys - Green LED for each button
– 15 freely programmable function/zone keys - Two LEDs (green/yellow) for each button
– Labeling with transparent cover - Easy editing of key labeling with template file
– Usable as desktop version as well as mounted in consoles/racks
– Internal supervision with event log - fulfills all requirements of relevant national and international standards
DPC 8015 Device

DPC 8015 Device
Start by creating an DPC 8016 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag a DPC 8015 from the Object Bar’s Devices



Select the UI-1 Universal Input Module of the DPM 8016 the call station is connected to.
Specify the desired number of devices, the address of the call station and number of call station extensions (it is not
possible to add extensions to a call station kit). Click on the OK button to accept these settings.
The specified number of Call Stations will be created and displayed in the worksheet. Selected devices can be dragged
around and repositioned at will. To select a device either click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around it or
hold down the 'ctrl' key and click on the device. In either case a successfully selected device is shown with a red
border around it.
Double clicking on a Call Station device icon opens the configuration dialog window. Double clicking on a device for
the first time will open the Configuration dialog box. Here, you can specify initial settings that are necessary for further
window next time you double click on the Call Station device icon.
The following table lists all available DPC 8015 dialogs with a short description for each. For more detailed
information, please refer to the appropriate chapters.
Dialog Description
Configuration This window allows hardware settings to be configured, e.g. button configuration,
network settings, device name.
Diagnostics This window provides an overview of the operational state and current fault status of
the call station.
Configuration
This page allows making basic settings and retrieve information, for example of button functions, network settings,
device name, firmware version, etc.


Element Description
When there are several DPM 8016 in the project or there are several call
stations connected to a single UI-1 Universal Input Module you can select
the call station (kit) to configure here.

Select the desired button type and drag it from this dialog box onto the
button of a call station or a call station extension. Detailed information
about different types of buttons is provided on the following pages.
The Online / Offline indicator signals whether the call station is included
in the network or off-line. The red OFFLINE indicator signals that the
corresponding call station is off-line and that therefore no
communication is possible.

The green ONLINE indicator shows that the corresponding call station is
on-line and that sending and receiving data is possible. When on-line,
any parameter changes are immediately transmitted and active.
CAN ADDRESS Displays and lets the user enter the CAN address of the call station. Left-
click in the ENTER field and enter the desired address in the range from
1 to 16. The entered value is adopted by pressing RETURN. The entered
address has to match the setting in the call station's menu and may only
exist once on the CAN-Bus. When adding new call stations to an IRIS-Net
project, CAN addresses are automatically assigned in ascending order.
CAN TERMINATION Press this button (ON) to activate the internal termination resistor of the
CAN bus in the call station.
BAUDRATE The baud rate of the call station. Defining the baud rate is performed via
the UI-1 Universal Input Module of the DPM 8016.
CONNECTION Name of the UI-1 module and the DPM 8016, the call station is
connected to.
SLOT Number of the slot, the UI-1 module is assembled to.
EXTENSION Number of DPC 8120 extensions.
COMPRESSOR Press this button (ON) to activate the internal compressor of the call
station.
PILOT TONE Press this button (ON) to activate the pilot tone supervision of the call
station.
HINT: When using the pilot tone supervision only one call station can
be connected to a PCA bus.
FAULT MSG Press this button (ON) if error messages should be indicated in the LC-
display of the call station.
BUZZER Press this button (ON) if errors should be signaled via the integrated
buzzer.

PROGRAM Press this button (ON) if the BGM menu should be accessible in the LC-
NUMERIC KEYS Press this button (ON) to allow numeric entry of zone numbers.
LCD POWER MAN. Press this button (ON) to indicate power management states in the
When pressing this button, the backlight of the call station's LCD screen
blinks regularly in quick succession. The status indicator of the call
station Device in IRIS-Net blinks at the same time. This function serves
for checking communication and for identification or search of a call
station in a larger system.
Switching between the following views of a call station and (if existing)
call station extensions:

– Scroll View
– Overall View
– Selective View
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the DPC when on-line.
UPDATE Press this button to update the firmware of the call station.

TYPES OF SWITCHES

Talk
A switch of the type "Talk" allows configuring a TALK button. Specific Zones and/or Groups can be pre-selected for this
key. Pressing the button on the call station automatically selects the Zones and/or Groups in which the spoken
message is being heard.
Notice!
Different behavior of the TALK button can be configured for locked or unlocked state.
Element Description
Destination Clicking onto the button „..." opens the Destinations Dialog for selecting desired Zones and/or
Groups.

Audio Input Select one of the following audio sources for the announcement:
– Internal Mic
– External Mic
– External Line
Locked Behavior Selecting this checkbox allows the user to press the button even though the call station has been
(Active When locked. The following parameters can be set independently from the default unlocked state.
Locked)
Trigger Type Select the desired functionality for a button on a call station; available are:
– Push (pushbutton)
– Trigger (triggers a function)
Priority Select the button's priority (0 to 9).
Prechime Type Select the desired type of pre-gong (chime) signal. The list includes default signals and chime
signals uploaded to the MM-2 module (if available). Following default signals are available:
– No Prechime
– 1-Tone
– 2-Tone
– 3-Tone
– 4-Tone
– 2x2-Tone
– 2-Tone Pre-Chime

Selection
A switch of the type "Selection" allows configuring a SELECT button. Pressing the button on the call station selects the
Zones and/or Groups that have been configured here.

Element Description
Destinatio Clicking onto the button „..." opens the Destinations Dialog for selecting desired Zones and/or Groups.
n

Clear Key
A switch of the type "Clear Key" allows configuring an ALL/CLEAR button. Pressing the button on the call station
selects or deselects all Zones and/or Groups.


Element Description
Mode Select the function that is to be executed when pressing the button on the call station:
– Toggle between all and clear = Each press of the button alternately selects or deselects all Zones
and/or Groups.
– Select All = Pressing the button selects all Zones and/or Groups of the whole system.
– Deselect All = Pressing the button deselects all Zones and/or Groups.

Logical Key
A switch of the type "Logical Key" allows setting the value of a logic variable (0 or 1). Pressing the button on the call
station sets the logic variable to the desired value. The adjacent LED is operated according to the resulting parameter.

Element Description
Mode Select the desired parameter change that is to be executed when pressing the button on the call
station:
– Set Value = sets the value of the logic variable to "1". It remains "1", even after the button is being
released.
– Reset Value = sets the value of the logic variable to "0". It remains "0", even after the button is
being released.
– Push = sets the value of the logic variable to "1", but only as long as the button is being pressed.
– Toggle = inverts the value of the logic variable each time the button is being pressed.
– LED only = indicates the value of the logic variable, the value is not changed by the button
On Select the LED of the button that should indicate the value „1“ of the logic variable:
– Primary LED (green/red)
– Secondary LED (yellow)
– None

Off Select the LED of the button that should indicate the value „0“ of the logic variable:
– None
Parameter The logic variable whose value is being changed.
Active when Selecting this checkbox allows the user to press the button even though the call station has been
locked locked.

Arithmetical Key
A switch of the type "Arithmetical Key" allows changing the value of a numerical variable. Pressing the button on the
call station either increases or decreases the value of the numerical variable.

Element Description
Mode Select the desired parameter change that is to be executed when pressing the button on the call station:
– Up = increases the value of the numerical variable
– Down = decreases the value of the numerical variable
Parameter The numerical variable whose value is being changed.
Min The lower limit of the value range. Using the "Down" mode decreases the value of the numerical variable
till down to this value.
Max The upper limit of the value range. Using the "Up" mode increases the value of the numerical variable till
up to this value.
Step Size Lets the user enter the step width by which the value is to be changed when pressing the button on the
call station.
Repeat Lets the user enter a value for the time interval in milliseconds after which (when keeping the button
Time pressed) the numerical value is being changed by the set step width art any one time. Entering "0"
changes the value only once, even when keeping the button pressed over a longer period of time.
Active Selecting this checkbox allows the user to press the button even though the call station has been locked.
when
locked

Menu Key
A switch of the type "Menu Key" displays the menu on the LCD screen of a call station.

Element Description
Jump to Select the position in the menu structure that is to be displayed:

– Select Program Assignment to open the Program Assignment dialog in the display of the call station.
– Select Monitoring to open the Audio Monitoring dialog in the display of the call station.

Stop Key
A switch of the type "Stop" allows canceling a process that is currently running on the system.

Element Description
Stop Type Select the function that is to be executed when pressing the button on the call station:
– This concsole signals (local actions) = stops only the types of actions that have been
launched from this specific call station
– System signals = stops all selected types of actions system-wide, even if they have not been
Stop Priority Select the maximum priority for the signals that will be stopped when pressing the button on the
call station.
locked locked.
Stop Signal Paging Pressing the button on the call station stops pagings.
Stop Signal Chime Pressing the button on the call station stops chimes.
Stop Signal Alarm Pressing the button on the call station stops alarms.
Stop Signal Text Pressing the button on the call station stops signal texts.

Alarm key
A switch of the type "Alarm" allows starting an Alarm on the system.

Element Description
Groups.
Priority Select the alarm priority (0 to 100).
– Toggle (switches between two states)
Alarm Select the desired signal that is to be used for alarming:

– Extern
– DIN Alarm
– Slow Whoop
– Siren
– Two-Tone Alarm
– Telephone Alarm
– Ship Alarm 1
– Ship Alarm 2
– Ship Alarm 3
– Ship Alarm 4
– Ship Alarm 5
– Ship Alarm 6
– Ship Alarm 7
– Ship Alarm 8
– Ship Alarm 9
– Ship Alarm 10
– Ship Alarm 11
– Ship Alarm 13
– Ship Alarm 14
– Ship Alarm 15
– Ship Alarm 16
– Ship Alarm 17

Input Channel Enter the audio input at which the externally generated alarm signal is present.
locked locked.

Chime Key
A switch of the type "Chime Key" allows the launch of a gong (chime) signal in the system.

Element Description
Groups.
Priority Select the chime priority (0 to 100).
Chime Type Select the desired type of gong (chime) signal. The list includes default signals and chime signals
uploaded to the MM-2 module (if available). Following default signals are available:
– 1-Tone
– 2-Tone
– 3-Tone
– 4-Tone
– 2x2-Tone
locked locked.

Talk over Alarm Key
A switch of the type "Talk over Alarm Key" allows making an announcement during an alarm. During the announcement
the alarm signal is off, and is started again after the announcement.


Element Description
Priority Select the priority (0 to 100) of the announcement. Must be higher than the alarm signal
priority.
Alarm Type Select the alarm type.
Active when locked Selecting this checkbox allows the user to press the button even though the call station has
been locked.

On Key
A switch of the type “On” allows switching the PROMATRIX 8000 system on or off (standby) using a button of the call
station.

Element Description
Switch on priority Select the priority (0 to 100) of the button.
been locked.

Lock Key
A switch of the type “Lock” allows locking the buttons of the call station. This button type can be assigned to a key
switch only.

Notice!
If a button should stay active even if the call station is locked, the „Active when locked“ checkbox
of this button has to be selected.

EVAC Message Key or Business Message Key
A switch of the type "EVAC Message Key" or “Business Message Key” allows starting a prerecorded message of type
EVAC ore Business Message from the Message Manager.

Element Description
Groups.
Priority Select the priority (0 to 100) of the message.
– Trigger
Message Name Select the message by name. If the voice alarm recording feature of the device is activated
(PAVIRO or Promatrix 6000 only) the recorded messages are available with description
“Recorded message”
been locked.
Loop Select this checkbox to automatically repeat the selected message.
System Fault Ack/Res

A switch of the type “System Fault Ack/Res” allows to acknowledge or reset a system fault that is indicated at the call
station. This type can be assigned to the DEL button (or an optional Alarm button) only.

Diagnostics
The diagnostics dialog is used for supervision of the call station.


Element Description
The current condition of each type of error gets indicated. Green means no error, red
indicates that an error has been detected.
COLLECTED ERROR STATE flag is set at the same time and the FAULT-LED at the DPC
lights.
DEVICE CONNECTED The PCA bus connection between DPM and DPC is broken.
SLOT POSITION The call station is not connected to the correct slot position.
MEMORY Memory error in DPC.
WATCHDOG + CLEAR Watchdog error in DPC. This error type is logged according standards, press the
CLEAR button to reset the error.
FIRMWARE The firmware version of the DPC is to old.

EXTENSION The number of call station extensions is to high or the addresses of the extensions
are not correct.
MICROPHONE Microphone error in DPC.
ALARM BUTTON Supervision fault of the alarm button or the key switch.
POWER SUPPLY Power supply out of range.
COLLECTED ERROR STATE: The FAULT-LED at the call station lights at the occurrence of this type of error.
DPC DEVICE

PMX-CSK Call Station Kit

The PMX-CSK is a call station kit for the PROMATRIX 8000 system. The call station kit allows connection of a
permanently supervised microphone, a total of 20 buttons, a lighted LC-display and a loudspeaker. The 15 function
keys can be permanently assigned for discrete zone addressing.

Additional PMX-CSK Features:
– Five pre-programmed function keys - LED for each button
– 15 freely programmable function/zone keys - Two LEDs for each button
– Internal supervision with event log - fulfills all requirements of relevant national and international standards
PMX-CSK Device
Start by creating an PMX-CSK Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an PMX-CSK from the Object Bar’s Devices category
or from the Devices window into the worksheet (see also chapters: Devices and Configurations menu). The following
dialog box appears:



Select the UI-1 Universal Input Module of the DPM 8016 the call station is connected to. Specify the desired number of
devices and the address of the call station. Click on the OK button to accept these settings.
The specified number of PMX-CSK devices will be created and displayed in the worksheet. Selected devices can be
border around it.
Double clicking on an PMX-CSK device icon opens the configuration dialog window. Double clicking on a device for the
first time will open the Configuration dialog box. Here, you can specify initial settings that are necessary for further
window next time you double click on the PMX-CSK device icon.
The following table lists all available PMX-CSK dialogs with a short description for each. For more detailed information,
Dialog Description
Configuration This window allows hardware settings to be configured, e.g. button

configuration, network settings, device name.
Supervision This window provides an overview of the operational state and current fault
status of the call station.
Configuration


Element Description
This paragraph provides explanation of how to select the proper call

station for configuration, when several call stations are connected to a
single UI-1 Universal Input Module.

button of the call station kit. Detailed information about different types
of buttons is provided on the following pages.
The Online / Offline indicator signals whether the call station kit is
included in the network or off-line. The red OFFLINE indicator signals
that the corresponding call station is off-line and that therefore no

The green ONLINE indicator shows that the corresponding call station kit
is on-line and that sending and receiving data is possible. When on-line,
any parameter changes are immediately transmitted and active.
click in the ENTER field and enter the desired address in the range from
1 to 16. The entered value is adopted by pressing RETURN. The entered
address has to match the setting of DIP switch S22 on the call station kit
and may only exist once on the CAN- Bus. When adding new call stations
to an IRIS-Net project, CAN addresses are automatically assigned in
ascending order.
CAN TERMINATION Please refer to the PMX-CSK owner‘s manual for details about CAN
termination.
BAUDRATE The baud rate of the call station kit. Defining the baud rate is performed
via the UI-1 Universal Input Module of the DPM 8016.
CONNECTION Name of the UI-1 module and the DPM 8016, the call station kit is
connected to.
SLOT Number of the slot, the UI-1 module is assembled to.
EXTENSION Number of paging console extensions.
station kit.
station kit.
be connected to a PCA bus.
display of the call station kit.
buzzer.

BGM Press this button (ON) if the BGM menu should be accessible in the LC-
display of the call station kit.
DECADIC SELECT Press this button (ON) to activate decadic zone selection via function/
zone keys.
LCD LINE MON. Press this button (ON) to activate the indication of line monitoring
messages in the LC-display.
LCD POWER MAN. Press this button (ON) to activate the indication of power management
messages in the LC-display.
When pressing this button, the backlight of the call station's LCD screen
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the DPC when on-line.
UPDATE Opens the firmware update dialog.

NOTE: The default password for the firmware update is “0000”.
Supervision
The diagnostics dialog is used for supervision of the call station kit.


Element Description
COLLECTED ERROR: DPC DEVICE flag is set at the same time and the FAULT-LED output
of the CSK is activated.
DEVICE CONNECTED The PCA bus connection between DPM and CSK is broken.
SLOT POSITION The call station kit is not connected to the correct slot position.
MEMORY Memory error in CSK.
WATCHDOG + CLEAR Watchdog error in CSK. This error type is logged according standards, press the button
connected to ESC_K to reset the error.
FIRMWARE The firmware version of the CSK is to old.
MICROPHONE Microphone error in CSK.

ALARM BUTTONS Supervision fault of the alarm button or the key switch.
COLLECTED ERROR: The FAULT-LED at the call station lights at the occurrence of this type of error.
DPC DEVICE

DPA 8000 Power Amplifier

The DPA 8000 Series power amplifiers are Class-D amplifiers which have been designed for AC mains as well as for DC
operation. The output voltage is galvanically isolated and constantly monitored for ground fault. A power saving mode
and temperature controlled fans allow for energy efficient and nearly noiseless operation. Control and monitoring are
carried out via the REMOTE CAN BUS. The amplifiers have been designed for use in an evacuation system. Control
usually is taken care of by the DPM 8016 Paging Manager and the configuration by means of IRIS-Net. If amplifiers are
operated without employing a DPM 8016, the configuration can be created in IRIS-Net and permanently be stored in
the amplifier, so that the desired state (preset) is activated, each time the device is powered ON.
All power amplifiers have the following common features:
– Floating 100 V power outputs (internally configurable to 70 or 50 V)
– Amplifier blocks in Class-D technology
– Outputs are protected against idling and short-circuit
– Mains operation 230 V/120 V AC and/or 24 V DC emergency power
– Electronically balanced inputs
– Temperature monitoring
– Pilot tone and ground fault monitoring
– Fault message via floating READY contact
– All functions are processor-controlled
– Watchdog circuit for monitoring the processor system
– Nonvolatile FLASH memory for storing the configuration data
– Internal monitoring
– Integrated audio relays
– Line monitoring
DPA 8000 Device

Start by creating an DPA Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an DPA from the Object Bar’s Devices category or from
box appears:



Select the DPM 8016 the amplifier is connected to. Specify the desired number of devices and the address of the
amplifier. Click on the OK button to accept these settings.
The specified number of devices will be created and displayed in the worksheet. Selected devices can be dragged
border around it.
Control Panel


Element Description
Amplifier Type
Info page. CAUTION: Using * (asterisk) and/or = (equal) signs in a name is not permissible.
receiving data is possible.
The amplifier channels are named channel 1 to 4, depending on the amplifier type. A name can be
assigned to each channel to easily identify its allocation and use. Using the left mouse button, click

in the entry field and enter the desired name for the channel. Press Return on the keyboard to
acknowledge your entry.

The level controls are for adjusting the overall amplification of the DIRECT IN input signal of the
corresponding amplifier channel. Setting the level controls to a value of 6dB provides full output
capacity. The numerical field below the level controls indicates the set level, by which the output
amplification is attenuated, in dB.
HINT: This level control does not indicate the level of the AEC input, even if the AEC input
routing is selected in the Config&Info window. Use the numerical field available in the
Config&Info window to set the AEC input level.

The AC LED lights if mains power is available. The DC LED lights if battery power is available.
actual operational status.
These indicators show the amp’s actual operational status. STANDBY lights whenever the amplifier
is in stand-by mode. POWER lights whenever the amplifier is powered-on and ready for operation. If
neither one of the indicators lights, the amplifier is either off-line or powered-off.
Config & Info

The Config & Info window provides information and basic settings for the selected amplifier. To select the page click
on the Configuration & Information tab in the Setup & Control Window.


Element Description
MODEL Shows the amplifier type
NAME IRIS-Net internal name of the amplifier
FIRMWARE Shows the amplifier‘s software version number (operating system, firmware)
PRV / DIR / AEC For each amplifier output channel the signal of the direct input (DIR), the AEC input (AEC) or the
previous input (PREV) can be selected.
The numerical field of the DIRECT input is identical to the numerical field below the level controls
in the Amplifier Control Panel. So the field indicates the actually set attenuation, by which the

internally specified amplification is attenuated, in dB.
The numerical field of the AEC input allows to set the attenuation of this input independently.

The MUTE button is for attenuating the output level of the corresponding amplifier output to -∞.
Clicking the MUTE button with the left mouse button mutes the corresponding amplifier output.
The MUTE button is virtually pressed and lights red. Clicking the MUTE button once again with
the left mouse button disables the mute-function and the amplifier output is again active. The
MUTE button is virtually disengaged and not lit.
The text field allows specifying a name for the corresponding output channel.
The output voltage of the output channel can be set to 50, 70 or 100 Volts. The configuration in
IRIS-Net must be identical to the hardware configuration of the amplifier, please refer to the

owner‘s manual for details.
For each output channel, the output relays A and B can be switched between the input signal of
the channel and the signal of the input X.
The text field allows specifying a name for the corresponding output relay.
Select the input signal to be used if the connection to the DPM is lost:
– Normal Routing: The current setting (PREL. / DIRECT /AEC) will not be changed if the

connection is lost.
– AEC Routing: For all output channels the signal of the AEC input will be used.
OFF / ON / NC Select the preferred status of the output relay if the connection to the DPM is lost: OFF: Relays
open
ON: Relays closed
NC: Status of relays does not change
CONTROL PORT This provides a listing of the three control ports.
IN / OUT Select if the port should be used as control input (IN) or as control output (OUT).
STATUS In online mode the state of the port is indicated.

When used as control input:
– ON: Input voltage below 5 Volt.
– OFF: Input voltage above 10 Volt.

When used as control output:
– ON: The output is closed to ground.
– OFF: The output has high impedance.
NAME The text field allows specifying a name for the control port.
Supervision & Test

The Supervision & Test Dialog integrates functions for testing and monitoring power amps. You have the option to
choose, which errors are combined and indicated in a general fault message.


Element Description
COLLECTED ERROR STATE flag is set at the same time and the FAULT-LED at the DPA front
panel lights. Additionally the ready relays changes to „not operational“ state.
DEVICE LOST The CAN bus connection between DPM and DPA is broken.
AMPLIFIER MODEL Amplifier type in IRIS-Net and actually connected hardware do not match.

WATCHDOG Watchdog error in DPA. This error type is logged according standards, press the CLEAR
button to reset the error.
FIRMWARE The firmware version of the DPA is not compatible with the DPM firmware version. A
PROTECT When the red PROTECT / REDUCTION indicator lights, one of the internal protections has
been activated.
COOLING Temperature overload of the DPA.
POWER SUPPLY Power supply mains error.

MAINS
POWER SUPPLY Power supply battery error.

BATTERY
PROTECT When the red PROTECT / REDUCTION indicator lights, one of the internal protections of the
output channel has been activated.
INPUT PILOT This indicator lights when the pilot tone at the DIRECT input is missing.
DETECTION
OUTPUT PILOT This indicator lights when the pilot tone at the amplifier output is missing.
DETECTION
The PILOT GEN button allows activating the pilot tone generator of the amplifier channels.
Default: Deactivated, 6 V, 19600 Hz

The property: PilotHighGain=1 allows to increase the pilot tone level to 12 V.
The property: PilotTone.Freq allows adjusting the frequency of the generated signal in the
range 15000 Hz to 25000 Hz.
GROUND FAULT A ground fault error at the amplifier output occurred. Press the CLEAR button to reset the
error.
AEC INPUT PILOT This indicator lights when the pilot tone at the AEC input is missing.
DETECTION
COLLECTED ERROR The FAULT LED at the DPA front panel lights at the occurrence of this type of error.
STATE
Press this button to activate the COLLECTED ERROR STATE manually.

DCS Digital Control System

Introduction
DCS 400 Series modules expand the system control possibilities in an IRIS-Net system in many respects. Expanding the
DCS system is also possible after installation, in case additional functions are needed. A DCS system consists of a
single, two or three DCS 400 frames which can host different relay boards, logic input boards, and analog level input/
output boards. Connecting the DCS system with an IRIS-Net system controller is always accomplished using a DCS
801R controller module which gets connected via CAN-Bus to an IRIS-Net system controller. The maximum number of
DCS 801R modules that can be connected to an IRIS-Net system controller is 15; i.e. an IRIS-Net system controller can
maximally host 15 individual DCS systems. The complete configuration of a DCS system is created in IRIS-Net, where
you define the number and type of DCS cards to be used in the system as well as the functions of individual inputs and
outputs. The procedure of creating a configuration as well as the different options available during this process is
explained in detail in the following chapters.
DCS Device
First of all, create a new DCS device in your IRIS-Net project by dragging a DCS with the desired number of height units
(HU) from the Object List's Devices category or out of the Devices Window into the worksheet (please also refer to the
chapter "Configuration of Devices and Menus").

HINT: Before being able to add a DCS Device, a DPM 8016, N8000 or P 64 have to exist in the project already. Only
1 U units shall be used for EN 54 compliant systems.

Always make sure to add a DCS with a sufficient number of card slots in your IRIS-Net project. Subsequent
"heightening" of a DCS, e.g. from DCS 1HU to DCS 2HU, is not possible. The following dialog appears:


Please specify the number of desired devices (max. 15), the CAN address of the first DCS system (1 to 15), and the
communication interface. Confirm your settings with OK. The desired number of DCS Devices appears in the
worksheet. The devices can be marked and freely arranged and positioned within the worksheet.
Double clicking on a DCS Device opens the configuration dialog box.
Configuration dialog
Double clicking on a DCS Device in the IRIS-Net worksheet opens the Configuration Dialog box which allows making all
the settings that are necessary for starting up the DCS system.


Element Description
This field indicates and allows entering the DCS system address. Left-click in the input field
and enter the desired address in a range from 1 to 15. Press "Return" to apply the address.
The entered address has to correspond to the setting of the address selection switch on the
front panel of the DCS 801R. The DCS system address is exclusive; i.e. it may exist only
once in the system. When creating new DCS Devices in IRIS-Net, addresses are
automatically assigned in ascending order.
Indicates the CAN bus transfer rate when in on-line mode.
Indicates the DCS firmware version when in on-line mode.
UPDATE Opens the firmware update dialog.

EQUIPMENT
A DCS system may consist of a single, two or three DCS 400 frames. Drag & dop cards from the DCS Objects list to
empty slots to equip the DCS 400 frame. Right click a slot to open the context menu. The context menu includes
commands to equip, delete or move cards.
When equipping these frames, the following rules need to be observed:
– Frame 1: Slot 1 always has to be equipped with a DCS 801R. IRIS-Net automatically adds a DCS 801R. Rearranging
or deleting the DCS 801R is not possible. If the DCS system consists of only one frame, slots 2 to 10 can be
equipped with the following card types: DCS 408R, DCS 409R, DCS 412R, DCS 416R, DCS 406R. If a second
frame is included, the last slot from the left has to be equipped with a DCS 405R.
– Frame 2: Slot 1 always has to be equipped with a DCS 405 R. If the DCS system consists of only two frames, slots
2 to 10 can be equipped with the following card types: DCS 408R, DCS 409R, DCS 412R, DCS 416R, DCS 406R. If
a third frame is included, the second frame has to be equipped with a DCS 405R (like in the first frame).
– Frame 3: Slot 1 always has to be equipped with a DCS 405 R. Slots 2 to 10 can be equipped with the following
card types: DCS 408R, DCS 409R, DCS 412R, DCS 416R, DCS 406R.
– Number and type of cards in a DCS system: A DCS system can maximally be equipped with 17 relay modules (DCS
408R / DCS 409R), 5 logic input modules (DCS 412R) or 5 analog input/output modules (DCS 416R) respectively.
– Gaps between individual cards are not allowable. If necessary, gaps have to be filled using cards of the type DCS
406R.
DCS card types

DCS 801R CONTROLLER MODULE
The DCS 801R module is used as an interface for relay boards, logic input boards, analog level
input/output boards, and rotary encoders. Control takes place via REMOTE CAN BUS
interface. A DCS 801R control module can maximally host 17 relay modules (DCS 408R /DCS
409R), 5 logic input modules (DCS 412R), 5 analog input/output modules (DCS 416R), and 2
rotary encoders.

Element Description
Name of the module


Rotary encoder step size (voltage change)
Maximum voltage of rotary encoder
Minimum voltage of rotary encoder
Rotary encoder voltage after power-on

DCS 405R EXTENSION MODULE
The DCS 405R module is used for connecting one DCS-400 frame to another DCS-400 slide-in
card and/or for adapting additional DCS-400 cards. This can be advantageous in situations,
where the number of modules that a DCS 801R is equipped with exceeds the maximum number
of modules that a DCS-400 rack can host.
Element Description
Name of the module



DCS 406R SHIELDING MODULE

The DCS 406R module is used as a shielding between 100 volts modules (DCS
408R) and low-voltage modules.
Element Description
Name of the module


DCS 408R LINE / AF RELAY MODULE
The DCS 408R module offers relay-switching contacts for the switching of audio signals
or other control functions. The module is mainly used for switching 70 volts or 100
volts loudspeaker lines. It can also be used to provide switching contacts when higher
voltages and/or currents exist.

Element Description
Name of the module



Name of the relay

State of the relay during a RESET of the DCS system. The DCS system is reset for example
after changing the configuration or after a power outage.
State of the relay in error condition. Detailed information about the "error condition" of a DCS
system is provided in the description of the DCS 801R module.

DCS 409R LINE / AF RELAY MODULE
The DCS 409R module offers relay-switching contacts for the switching of (line level)
audio signals or other control functions.

Element Description
Name of the module


Name of the relay

State of the relay during a RESET of the DCS system. The DCS system is reset for example
after changing the configuration or after a power outage.
State of the relay in error condition. Detailed information about the "error condition" of a DCS
system is provided in the description of the DCS 801R module.

DCS 412R LOGIK INPUT MODULE

The DCS 412R module is used for connecting control lines, buttons, switches, and sensors
to be able to evaluate their statuses (on, off) in the IRIS-Net system.

Element Description
Name of the module


Name of the digital input


DCS 416R ANALOG INPUT / OUTPUT MODULE
The DCS 416R module offers analog inputs and outputs for them to be used in control and
monitoring functions. Voltages from 0 to 10 V DC with 256 different levels can be applied to the
inputs as well as to the outputs. Potentiometers for volume control can be connected using the
reference voltage output.


Element Description
Name of the module


Name of the analog input

Name of the analog output

Voltage at the analog output during a RESET of the DCS system. The DCS system is reset for
example after changing the configuration or after a power outage.
Voltage at the analog output in error condition.
Supervision Dialog
The Supervision dialog is used for supervision of the DCS. You have the option to choose, which errors are combined
and indicated in a general fault message.
HINT: This Supervision dialog is only available when the DCS is connected to a DPM 8016.


Element Description
COLLECTED ERROR: DCS DEVICES flag is set at the same time.
DEVICE CONNECTED The CAN bus connection between DPM and DCS is broken.
MEMORY Memory or Read/Write error.
WATCHDOG Watchdog error in DCS. This error type is logged according standards, press the CLEAR
button to reset the error.
FIRMWARE The firmware version of the DCS is not compatible with the DPM firmware version. A
DCS MODULES The module configuration of the DCS in IRIS-Net does not match the actual module
configuration.
POWER SUPPLY Supply voltage out of range.
COLLECTED ERROR: DCS The state of this error is forwarded to the DPM 8016, see Supervision Dialog, page 721.
DEVICES
Press this button to activate the COLLECTED ERROR: DCS DEVICES manually.

PROMATRIX 6000
PMX-4CR12
The PMX-4CR12 controller is the central paging manager for the PROMATRIX 6000 system. Eight local audio inputs can
be switched to four audio outputs. A two channel message manager is integrated. The controller provides all the audio
processing, supervision and control functions for a complete PROMATRIX 6000 system. A single controller supports up
to 16 call stations and 492 paging zones. The controller is equipped with 12 zones, 18 GPIs and 19 GPOs. One
controller can handle up to 2000 W loudspeaker load. Additional zones and power can be added by using up to 20
external routers and 40 amplifiers with each 2 ✕ 500 W. The zone indicator lights on the front indicate the current
status of every zone:
– Green: Zone in use for non emergency purpose
– Red: Zone in use for emergency purpose
– Yellow: Zone fault detected
– Off: Zone in idle condition

PMX-4CR12 Device
Start by creating a Controller Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag a Controller from the Object Bar’s Devices category
or from the Devices window into the worksheet (see also chapters: Devices and Configurations menu).
Dialog Description
General This window allows hardware settings to be configured, e.g. network settings, device name,
system time and firmware version.
Security This window allows editing passwords.
device.
UserMix This window lets you configure background music.
Interface From this window the interfaces (e.g. CAN bus, GPIO control port) can all be configured.
HINT: Ethernet interface settings are edited under General dialog in the paragraph Network
Settings.
LineSupervision The line supervision of the device can be controlled and supervised from this window.
Topology/Zones This windows lets you configure topologies and zones of the system.

General Dialog
Double clicking on a PMX-4CR12 by default opens the General dialog box. Here, the user can make basic settings that
are necessary for flawless operation. All elements of the displayed PMX-4CR12 front panel are active in on-line mode
and correspond to the actual indicators on the unit.
Notice!

Element Description
IP ADDRESS Indicates the IP address of the PMX-4CR12’s Ethernet port (factory setting:
192.168.1.100). Enter the address of the PMX-4CR12 with which you want to

192.168.1.1).
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address of the connected PMX-4CR12 when on-line. The
MAC address of the PMX-4CR12 is also shown on a label on the unit’s rear
panel.
NAME IRIS-Net internal device name of the PMX-4CR12.
drop down field) via the integrated buzzer of the PMX-4CR12.
SYSTEM LANGUAGE Select the system language of the PROMATRIX 6000 system. Please note to
update the call station firmware when selecting Korean or Chinese.
ACTIVE”.
after the alarm signal is stopped/muted (e.g. no alarm request present). This
checkbox is disabled if the voice alarm priority is set to OFF.
VOICE ALARM RECORDING Select this checkbox if the signals above voice alarm priority should be
recorded automatically. By default it is unchecked and is enabled only in
offline mode. It is disabled if the voice alarm priority is OFF.
VOICE ALARM ANNOUNCEMENTS Select this radio button if only announcements (live signals from a CST or
emergency microphone) above voice alarm priority should be recorded. This
control is enabled only in the offline mode, when VOICE ALARM RECORDING
is checked and It is selected by default. It is disabled if the voice alarm
priority is OFF.
ALL VOICE ALARM SIGNALS Select this radio button if all signals above voice alarm priority should be
recorded. This control is enabled only in the offline mode, when VOICE
ALARM RECORDING is checked. It is disabled if the voice alarm priority is
OFF.
DATE/TIME Date and time of the PMX-4CR12 system clock.

INTERNAL CLOCK
DCF77 SYNCHRONIZATION Select this option to synchronize the internal clock of the PMX-4CR12 with
the DCF77 signal. Please refer to the manual how to connect an external
DCF77 receiver.


DPM 4000 SYNCHRONIZATION Select this option to synchronize the internal clock of the PMX-4CR12 with a
connected DPM 4000 system.
ENABLE SLAVE CLOCK Select this checkbox if slave clocks are connected to the PMX-4CR12.
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the PMX-4CR12 when on-line.

Reboots the PMX-4CR12.
Security Dialog
Element Description
stations.
Supervision Dialog
The Supervision window shows the condition of the PMX-4CR12. When on-line, all fault conditions are being indicated.
It is possible to select for each type of error whether it is displayed in a collected fault message, buffered and/or

Element Description
STATE The current condition of each type of error gets indicated. Green means no error,
NOTIFICATON At the occurrence of a type of error for which the checkbox DETECT is ticked, the
LED on the front panel of the device lights, the FAULT relay opens and a signal
sound.
HOLD Detected types of errors for which the checkbox HOLD is ticked are stored.
unchecked.
LOG

CONTROLS
CST TEXT If call stations are configured for error indication, the text entered here is
indicated in the call station display if the error occurs. The maximum number of
INTERNAL
WATCHDOG Watchdog error of the device. This error type is logged conforming to standards,
FIRMWARE The device firmware version is not compatible with the IRIS-Net version used. A
HARDWARE Error in the power supply or the A/D converters of the device.
TEMPERATURE Temperature overload of the device.
Temperature Current temperature inside of the device (main board).

control

PROCESSING
MESSAGE Error in the message manager.

MANAGER

INTERFACES
dialog.
CST INTERFACE Fault condition on the PCA bus. Further details are provided in the Interface

INT. ROUTER
DSP Error in the digital signal processing (DSP) of the device.
HARDWARE Hardware error.
PG / LT Temperature overload of the device.

TEMPERATURE
GPI SUPERVISED Voltage at supervised GPI out of range.

AMP INPUTS
PILOT DETECTION x- Missing pilot tone at input 1 of cluster A or B.

IN1

IN2
PILOT DETECTION A- Missing pilot tone at spare input 1 of cluster A.

S1
PILOT DETECTION B- Missing pilot tone at spare input 2 of cluster B.

S2
EXTERNAL
CALL STATIONs A connected DPC call station has transferred an error message. The parameter
AMPLIFERS A connected DPA power amplifier has transferred an error message. The
ROUTERS A connected DCS system has transferred an error message. The parameter %u
POWER SUPPLY Fault condition in the power supply of the PMX-4CR12.

1 to 500: Zone A
501 to 1000: Zone B
USER

10 HINT: Use the device Task Engine to configure USER FAULTS.
MASTER
COMBINED FAULT The FAULT indicator light on the front panel of the device lights at the occurrence of this type
STATE of error.
DSP Dialog
In this dialog the DSP configuration of the Controller is shown. Double clicking on a DSP-Block’s icon allows editing its


Input
The Input block provides access to the audio inputs of the device. The name and gain values of the input channels are
indicated in the block. Double click the block to open the Inputs dialog.

CST 1 to 4; Permanent channel labeling.

MIC/LINE
1,2; AUX 1,2
CAN TERM/ Press the OFF button to activate the internal CAN termination resistor
STATE of the corresponding CST bus. The digit next to the button indicates the
total number of termination resistors activated. The number must
always be “2”.
0.0 dB 0 to 60 dB The gain of the MIC/LINE input channels can be adjusted in 6 dB steps.
The +48V button of the MIC/LINE input channels is for activating

phantom power whenever a suitable condenser microphone is being
used.


dB

LINE/MIC Press the LINE button if the line level audio input (LINE port) of the call
station is used. Press the MIC button if the microphone of the call
station is used, this loads a preset for the input 3 Band PEQ and
Compressor of CST1-4.

MESSAGE MANAGER
The Message Manager block provides access to the messages of the internal Message Manager. Double click the block
to open the Message Manager dialog.
Notice!
Recorded messages
The recorded messages are displayed in the Message Manager dialog only in online mode. To
download the recorded messages to your PC open following address in your web browser: http://
<ipAddressOfController>:8080/mm2/messages.html
Element Description
MESSAGES
edit the description. The description can be edited in offline or online mode. For recorded
messages the description is “Voice Alarm Rec. [date/time]”.
Type Available message types for uploaded messages are EVAC, Chime or Business. The Type can be
set when adding messages. For recorded messages the type is “VA Rec”.
mode.
Info The memory usage is indicated for all MM-2 modules. If the voice alarm recording feature of the
device is activated 40 minutes will be reserved for recording.

If the voice alarm recording feature of the device is activated up to 95 messages can be
uploaded.
ERROR STATES
ERROR flag is set at the same time. Additionally the FAULT-LED on the front panel of the DEVICE

STORAGE

MEMORY
WATCHDOG Watchdog error of the DEVICE. This error type is logged conforming to standards.
COLLECTED The FAULT-LED on the front panel of the PMX-4CR12 lights at the occurrence of this type of
ERROR error.
FALLBACK
SIGNALS
settings is valid for all PMX-4CR12 in the PROMATRIX system.
Chime This settings is valid for all PMX-4CR12 in the PROMATRIX system.


3 BAND PEQ
Equalizers accentuate or lower the audio signal within specific frequency ranges. Eight parametric 3-Band equalizers
are available.


CST 1-4, MIC/LINE Press the input channel button to view or edit the
1-2, AUX 1-2 corresponding PEQ settings.
LINE/MIC Press the LINE button if the line level audio input (LINE port)
of the call station is used. Press the MIC button if the
microphone of the call station is used.
Pressing BYPASS ALL switches off all filters.


Lopass quality (Q) and gain being programmable.
gain.

kHz, 16 kHz EQ or the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass
filters.
0.7 0.1 to 100 (PEQ) Q defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ. A high
0.1 to 2.0 (Hi-/ Q-value results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-value
Lopass) results in a broadband filter. The Q-value also sets the quality
and thus the response of Hi and Lo pass filters with slopes of
12dB/ oct.

frequency range.


COMPRESSOR
The compressor reduces the dynamic range of audio signals. Once the signal exceeds a certain threshold, the signal
gets compressed, i.e. major input level changes result in minor output level changes. Narrowing the dynamic range
often allows for easier recording or mixing the audio signal. Eight compressors are available.

CST 1-4, MIC/LINE 1-2, AUX Press the input channel button to view or edit the
1-2 corresponding Compressor settings.
LINE/MIC Press the LINE button if the line level audio input
(LINE port) of the call station is used. Press the
MIC button if the microphone of the call station is
used.

untouched.

threshold.


5 BAND PEQ
Equalizers accentuate or lower the audio signal within specific frequency ranges. Four parametric 5-Band equalizers
are available.

OUT 1-4 Press the output channel button to view or edit the
corresponding Parametric EQ settings.



gain.

Hz, 1 kHz, 4 EQ or the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass
kHz, 19 kHz filters.
0.7 0.01 to 6.67 Oct. Q or BW defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ.
or A high Q-value results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-
0.1 to 2.0 (Hi-/ quality and thus the response of Hi and Lo pass filters with
Lopass) slopes of 12dB/ oct.

frequency range.


LIMITER
A Limiter is used when the output signal must not exceed a specific peak level, independent of how much the input
level rises. Short attack times effectively limit overshoots. Limiters are often used as protection for the components
following them an audio chain, i.e. to prevent an amplifier from clipping or protect loudspeaker systems against
mechanical damage.

corresponding Peak Limiter settings.


threshold.

audio signal.

OUTPUT
The Output block provides access to the outputs of the device. The name and gain values of the out channels are
indicated in the block. Double click the block to open the Output dialog.

OUT 1-4 Permanent channel labeling.

dB
-10.0 dB -60 to +6 dB The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader setting

pilot tone generator.

ALARM CHIME
Alarm
Configuration

NEW ALARM Press this button to ad a new alarm to the alarm list.
PLAY ALARM Press this button to playback the alarm selected in the alarm list.
Chime
Configuration
PLAY CHIME Press this button to playback the chime selected in the chime list.

MATRIX

internal generators of the PMX-4CR12). The Matrix 10x4 allows connecting inputs and outputs. Left clicking the node in
– BGM inputs can only routed via a call station, so this is not possible in this dialog
– Inputs used for the Message Manager can not be routed


TaskEngine Dialog

In the Task Engine, one differentiates between two classes of variables:
mixer output.
(0 = not muted, 1 = muted) of a DSP block monaural mixer output.
In the Task Engine, different colors are used to distinguish the two types of variables. Inputs and outputs that are not
wired are marked blue, whenever variables of the type "analog" are being processed or transmitted. Inputs and outputs
that are not wired are marked green, whenever variables of the type "logic" are being processed or transmitted.

VALUES
Element Description
always outputs the current value of the connection.


still available after a reset of the device.


ANALOG OPERATIONS
Element Description

input.
input.
the lower input.
LOGIC OPERATIONS
Element Description

input is false).

ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Element Description
screenshot below).

screenshot below).

pre chime
present.

present.
be stopped.


– Timer Value


the display.


debounced.
debounced.

size and font type.



– userfault_idx

be checked.
Chime types
Typ
1_TONE
2_TONE
3_TONE
4_TONE
2x2_TONE
2_TONE_PRE
Alarm Types

Extern -
DIN Alarm
Slow Whoop
Siren
Two-Tone Alarm
Telephone Alarm
Ship Alarm 1
Ship Alarm 2
Ship Alarm 3
Ship Alarm 4
Ship Alarm 5
Ship Alarm 6
Ship Alarm 7

Ship Alarm 8
Ship Alarm 9
Ship Alarm 10
Ship Alarm 11
Ship Alarm 12
Ship Alarm 13
Ship Alarm 14
Ship Alarm 15
Ship Alarm 16
Ship Alarm 17
SILENCE -
Pagings Dialog
This dialog allows the configuration of pagings (e.g. alarm or EVAC messags) with dynamic destinations.

Element Description
type STATIC.

Element Description
CONDITION
START/ADD TRIGGER
added immediately.
STOP/SUB TRIGGER
PAGING

dropdown.
from this dropdown.
dropdown.
from this dropdown.
Programs Dialog

Element Description
audio signals.
specific name.
CONTROLLER INPUT CHANNEL: Select the controller input channel to be used as audio source of the selected
MIC/LINE 1-2, AUX 1-2 program.
AMPLIFIER INPUT CHANNEL Select the amplifier input channel to be used as local audio source.
UserMix Dialog
This dialog allows configuring audio routings (e.g. background music) in the system.

Element Description
the device.
Element Description

Element Description
CONDITION
SOURCE
dropdown menu.
Interfaces Dialog
The Interface window allows configuring the different interfaces located on the rear panel of the device. All REMOTE
CAN BUS and CONTROL PORT settings can be made in here. Configuring the Ethernet interface is done under Network
Settings in the General window.

Element Description
CAN INTERFACE
BAUD RATE Transmission rate of the CAN-Bus. All devices on the CAN-Bus must be set to one
Heavy, Bus Off.
CAN DEVICE LIST Lists the connected devices.
OPEN INTERFACE
ENABLE Set the checkbox to activate the ASCII control protocol of the device.
control protocol.

control protocol.
password here. Repeat the password in the CONFIRM PASSWORD field. Go
online (write) to set the password in the device.
DPM 4000 INTERFACE
ENABLE Set the checkbox to activate the RS-232 interface between a DPM 4000 and the
PMX-4CR12.
AUDIO OUTPUT Indicates the audio output of the PMX-4CR12, that outputs the audio signal to the
DPM 4000.
AUDIO INPUT Select the audio input number of the DPM 4000.
MEMOFLAG BROKEN LINE The DPM 4000 memo flag selected here is used for supervising the RS-232
connection.
CONTROL IN
STATE Displays the control inputs’ current state.
VOLTAGE Displays the control inputs’ current voltage.
FAULT MON Set the checkbox of supervised control inputs to activate the supervision.
ACTIVE Set the upper and lower bound (voltage) of the ACTIVE state of the supervised
control inputs.
OK Set the upper and lower bound (voltage) of the OK state of the supervised
control inputs.
CONTROL OUT
STATE It is possible to manually change the condition of the control outputs (normally
open contact / normally closed contact).
PowerManagement Dialog
The Power Management dialog allows configuring the standby mode of the device in detail.

Element Description
POWER ON/OFF SIGNAL Select the GPO contact or the virtual TE value for signaling the
controllers’ operating mode. In standby mode the GPO is open.
standby mode.
POWER SUPPLY STATUS
„mains power OK“. Set the checkbox to monitor this status.
„battery power OK“. Set the checkbox to monitor this status.
„charger status OK“. Set the checkbox to monitor this status.
„battery status at least 90%“. Set the checkbox to monitor this status.
SYSTEM OPERATION MODE

& CST TEXT

MAINS MODE If mains power is used for running the system, the Controller is in
MAINS MODE and the LED lights green. You can edit the name of this
mode in the text field. Press the POWER button to power on/off the
device.
BATTERY MODE If battery power is used for running the system, the Controller is in
MAINS POWER FAIL

BEHAVIOR
power fails.
mains power fails.
ROUTERS Select this option if Routers should switch to standby mode if mains
power fails.
SWITCH ON PRIORITY
available.
Notice!
The “Power Calculator” tool can be used to calculate the power consumption of the system. The
tool can be found in directory “/Tools” or can be requested from the IRIS-Net support team.
Notice!
The properties “Operating Mode” and “Standby LED” can be used for advanced power
management configuration via the Task Engine, please refer to section Properties, page 782.
LineSupervision Dialog
The Line Supervision dialog allows configuring and control of the Controller line supervision. Line supervision can be
done via line impedance measurement method or the End of Line method using EOL 8001 or Plena EOL modules.
Please refer to the Controller manual for details about the different measurement methods.

Element Description
SPEAKER OUT System internal description of the zone or line.
amplifier).

LEVEL [V] Enter the level of the measurement signal.
reference value, given in percent.
measurement.
measurement.
measurement.
SUPV TYPE Select the supervision method used for the zone. Possible methods are:
– IMP = impedance method
– EOL = EOL method using EOL 8001 modules
– PEOL = EOL method using Plena EOL modules
START MEASUREMENT Starts the line measurement in all selected zones or line.
(SELECTED).
SET MEAS. TO REFERENCE Press this button to store the values of the last measurement as new reference
(SELECTED). values for the selected zones or lines.
EXPORT DATA TO FILE All measurement data of the LINE SUPERVISION TABLE are exported to a csv file.
DAILY Set this checkbox, if a daily measurement should be done automatically. Enter
PERMANENT Set this checkbox, if line measurement should be done permanently.

Notice!
Use copy & paste to copy configurations from one element to another element in the line
supervision table.

IMPEDANCE METHOD
either permanently or every day at the scheduled time if the line is not busy. Each audio signal on the line interrupts
the line measurement. The measurements will be continued automatically if the line is free again.
Notice!
Impedance reference values (IMP-REF) shall be measured and set for all used loudspeaker lines.
The reference values are necessary not only if supervision type IMP is selected, but also for short
circuit detection if supervision type EOL or PEOL is selected. The reference values are further
needed for an impedance measurements triggered by an amplifier overload detection.

EOL METHOD
Notice!
For power supply of the EOL modules a pilot tone is required, so the pilot tone generator of the
power amplifier shall be activated.
IRIS-Net offers basic validation checks if the connections are valid. If a rule is not followed correctly, the connection
line turns red.
The following rules apply:
– One amplifier output can be connected to one or more router cluster inputs in parallel please refer to Line
topology. Only identical inputs of router clusters can be connected in parallel, e.g. if a amplifier output is
connected with the AMP IN1 input of one router cluster, the amplifier output can only be connected to AMP IN1
inputs of other router clusters. The same is valid for the router cluster input AMP IN 2. So it is not allowable to
connect different types of router cluster inputs to one amplifier output.
– One amplifier output can always be used for one topology only. E.g. if a amplifier output is connected to a router
cluster set to 1-in-N topology, the amplifier output can not be connected to a router cluster using another type of
topology (e.g. 2-in-N).
– If the two output channels of an amplifier are used for a 2-in-N or Program/Call topology and the outputs are
connected to more than one router cluster, the outputs have to be connected to the same input (e.g. always AMP
IN 1) of the router clusters.
– If a 2-in-N or Program/Call topology is selected, going online is not possible if the identical amplifier output is
connected to both inputs.
– Do not connect an amplifier output to a “regular” input of a router cluster (AMP IN 1, AMP IN 2) and a spare
amplifier input (S1, S2,) at the same time.
– If router clusters with EOL8001 supervision are used, always connect one amplifier output to router clusters of
one device only.

Notice!
If router clusters with EOL8001 supervision are used, switching router clusters within one device
is possible. This allows creating 1-in-24 or 2-in-24 topologies with EOL 8001 supervision.
– If a 1-in-N topology is selected, the connections of the router cluster inputs (IN1 or IN2) have to be set correctly.
E.g. every loudspeaker output has to be connected to a router cluster input, and the router cluster input has to be
connected to a amplifier output.

For spare amplifier switching, the following rules apply:
– Automatic spare amplifier switching can be activated for every amplifier channel in the system. One spare
amplifier channel is possible for an amplifier channel connected to the AMP IN 1 or AMP IN 2 input of a router
cluster. The spare amplifier channel as to be connected to the S1 or S2 input of the same router cluster.
– If an amplifier output channel is connected to the inputs of more than one router clusters in parallel and should be
backed up by a spare amplifier, the channel of the spare amplifier has to be connected to the same router clusters
in parallel.
If a 2-in-N or Program/Call topology is selected and the amplifier should be backed up by a spare amplifier, two spare
amplifier channels are required. It is not allowed to backup both channels of the topology with one spare amplifier
channel only.


Icon bar
Element Description
Program Channels Select the number of program channels in the Controller.
GPO List Click on this button to generate a CSV report of all GPOs configured in the system.
New Group Click on this button to create a new Group. The “All” group, including all zones, is created
group column.
Group List Click on this button to generate a CSV report of all Groups configured in the system. The
report includes the caption and object id of systems zones and the assignment of zones to
system groups.
Element Description
1_IN_N, 2_IN_N, PROG_CALL Select the topology for the 2-in-6 cluster.
+Priority Press this button to add a priority relays to the zone.

+Control Press this button to add a control relays to the zone.

Device dropdown Select the device to be used for controlling the control or priority relay.
GPO dropdown Select the GPO (of the selected device) for controlling the control or priority relay.
INV Press the INV button to invert the status of the control or priority relay.
X Press this button to delete the corresponding priority or control relay.
Manage group dialog


Element Description
SYSTEM GROUPS Lists all groups of the system.
SYSTEM ZONES Lists all zones of the system.
SYSTEM GROUPS list.
list.8
Properties
OPERATION MODE
The “PMXCON_1.System.PowerManagement.OperatingMode” property allows setting the current operation mode of
the PMX-4CR12 and connected devices. High priority signals prevent changing into standby mode. Following settings
are available:
Value Description
0 Switch PMX-4CR12 in standby mode
1 Switch PMX-4CR12 in operating mode

HINT: The mode of peripheral devices connected to the PMX-4CR12 is set automatically.

STANDBYLED
The Standby LED of the PMX-4CR12 lights, when the device is in standby mode. The corresponding property
“PMXCON_1.System.Info.StandbyLED” can be used to query the current mode.
Value Description
0 PMX-4CR12 is in operating mode
1 PMX-4CR12 is in standby mode

ETHERNET CONNECTION

not possible.
activated

Parameter Default
IP address 192.168.1.100
Port 6273

Controller.
ZONE STATUS
Element Description



Examples:
Id3.7 ON P12 Z2-3
Id3.7 OFF
WATCHDOG FUNCTION
adjusted.
seconds.
Example:

Logic values
Element Description
Example:
LVal1 0

set to PMX-4CR12_x.OpenInterface

Analog values

Element Description

Example:
AVal7 -30.222
Logic values
Element Description
? Question mark

Example:
Analog values
Element Description
? Question mark

Example:
Query: “AVal 7”

Caution!
Consequences

AVal 7?
Id3.4 ON P12 Z3,Z5-12,Z15 AVal7 -30.2222

FAULT REPORTING
Element Description
PMX-4R24
The PMX-4R24 24 Zone Router is a zone extension for the PROMATRIX 6000 system. The PMX-4R24 adds 24 zones, 20
GPIs, 24 GPOs and 2 control relays to the system and is controlled and supervised via the CAN bus by the PMX-4CR12
(Controller). Up to 20 external routers can be connected to one controller. One router can handle up to 4000 W
speaker load. The maximum load of one zone is 500 W.
The zone indicator lights on the front indicate the current status of every zone:

PMX-4R24 Device
Start by creating a PMX-4R24 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag a PMX-4R24 from the Object Bar’s Devices category
dialog box appears:
border around it.


Configuration Dialog
Element Description
MODEL Indicates PMX-4R24, so you know the model of the device.
NAME IRIS-Net internal device name of the Router.
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the Router when on-line.

ADDRESS Indicates the CAN address of the device.
FIND Press the find button to activate the find function of the device.

OPERATING STATUS Indicates the operating status of the Router.
CONTROL IN
ACTIVE Set the upper and lower bound (voltage) of the ACTIVE state of the
supervised control inputs.
control inputs.
CONTROL OUT
STATE It is possible to manually change the condition of the control outputs

(normally open contact / normally closed contact).
Supervision Dialog

Element Description
COLLECTED ERROR STATE flag is set at the same time. Additionally the FAULT
indicator light on the front panel of the controller lights, the FAULT relay opens
and a signal sound.
unchecked.
LOG
CONTROLS

ROUTER
DEVICE CAN connection between Controller and Router broken.

CONNECTED
MEMORY Memory error.
FIRMWARE The firmware version is not compatible with the IRIS-Net version used. A firmware
update is recommended.
POWER SUPPLY Error in the power supply of the device.

TEMPERATURE

AMP INPUTS

IN1

IN2

S1

S2
MASTER
STATE of error.
PMX-15CST
The PMX-15CST is a call station for the PROMATRIX 6000 system. As standard, the call station has a gooseneck
microphone with pop shield and permanent monitoring, a total of 20 buttons, an illuminated LC display, and an
integrated loudspeaker. The call station can be modified to suit the user’s requirements by connecting up to five
PMX-20CSE call station extensions, each with 20 customizable selection buttons.
Other properties:
– Five menu/function keys (pre-programmed) – one green or one yellow indicator light per button
– 15 selection buttons (customizable) – two indicator lights (green/red) per button
– Label with transparent covering – the label can be changed at any time
– Can be used as a standing or desk/rack flush-mounted device

– Internal monitoring with error logging – complying with all relevant national and international standards
– Easy configuration – use of the Configuration Wizard or IRIS-Net software

PMX-15CST Device
Start by creating an PMX-15CST device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an PMX-15CST from the Object Bar’s Devices
Select the call station bus the device is connected to.

border around it.


Element Description
When there are several call stations connected to the CST busses of the
Controller you can select the call station (kit) to configure here.


on-line and that sending and receiving data is possible. When on-line, any
parameter changes are immediately transmitted and active.
NAME Name of the device.
click in the field and enter the desired address in the range from 1 to 16.
The entered value is adopted by pressing RETURN. The entered address
has to match the setting in the call station's menu and may only exist
once. When adding new call stations to an IRIS-Net project, CAN
addresses are automatically assigned in ascending order.
FIND When pressing this button, the backlight of the call station's LCD screen
BAUDRATE The baud rate of the call station.
CONNECTION Name of the Controller the call station is connected to.
EXTENSION Number of Call Station extensions.
station.
station.
be connected to a CST bus.
buzzer.
PROGRAM Press this button (ON) if the Program Assignment menu should be
accessible in the LC-display of the call station.
MONITORING Press this button (ON) to indicate monitoring is enabled on call station
(PAVIRO only).


– Scroll View
– Overall View
– Selective View
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the Call Station when on-line.

Talk
Notice!
Element Description
Groups.
– Internal Mic
– External Mic
– External Line
Locked)

– No Prechime
– 1-Tone
– 2-Tone
– 3-Tone
– 4-Tone
– 2x2-Tone
Selection

Element Description
n
Clear Key

Element Description
and/or Groups.
Logical Key


Element Description
station:
released.
being released.
– None
– None
locked locked.
Arithmetical Key


Element Description
up to this value.
call station.
when
locked
Menu Key


Element Description

Stop Key

Element Description
call station.
locked locked.
Alarm key


Element Description
Groups.

– Extern
– DIN Alarm
– Slow Whoop
– Siren
– Two-Tone Alarm
– Telephone Alarm
– Ship Alarm 1
– Ship Alarm 2
– Ship Alarm 3
– Ship Alarm 4
– Ship Alarm 5
– Ship Alarm 6
– Ship Alarm 7
– Ship Alarm 8
– Ship Alarm 9
– Ship Alarm 10
– Ship Alarm 11
– Ship Alarm 13
– Ship Alarm 14
– Ship Alarm 15
– Ship Alarm 16
– Ship Alarm 17
locked locked.

Chime Key

Element Description
Groups.
– 1-Tone
– 2-Tone
– 3-Tone
– 4-Tone
– 2x2-Tone
locked locked.
Talk over Alarm Key



Element Description
priority.
been locked.
On Key
station.

Element Description
been locked.
Lock Key
A switch of the type “Lock” allows locking the buttons of the call station. When assigned to a selection button the
password set in the Security tab of the Controller has to be entered at the call station..
Notice!



Element Description
Groups.
– Trigger
been locked.



Supervision Dialog
Element Description
NOTIFICATON At the occurrence of a type of error for which the checkbox NOTIFICATON is ticked,
the COMBINED FAULT STATE is set at the same time and the FAULT indicator light at
the Call Station lights.
DEVICE CONNECTED The CST bus connection between Controller and Call Station is broken.
INPUT NUMBER The call station is not connected to the correct CST bus.
MEMORY Memory error in the Call Station.
WATCHDOG + CLEAR Watchdog error in the Call Station. This error type is logged according standards,
FIRMWARE The firmware version of the Call Station is too old.

are not correct.
MICROPHONE Microphone error in the Call Station.

MASTER
STATE of error.
PMX-CSK
Please refer to section PMX-CSK Call Station Kit, page 804.
PMX-2P500
The PMX-2P500 class-D amplifier is a 2 ✕ 500 W professional audio amplifier for evacuation purposes. It can be
operated from both the mains and a DC supply. The output voltage is galvanically insulated and is constantly monitored
for ground fault. An energy-saving mode and temperature-controlled fans reduce energy consumption and noise levels.
The control and monitoring functions are performed via CAN bus. This amplifier is designed for operation in an
emergency evacuation system. The amplifiers are usually controlled via a controller and configured using IRIS-Net.
The power amplifier has the following features:
– Floating 100 V or 70 V power outputs
– High efficient amplifier blocks in class-D technology
– Outputs idling and short circuit-protected
– Mains operation 120–240 V (50/60 Hz) and/or 24 V DC emergency backup
– Temperature monitoring function
– Pilot tone and ground fault monitoring function via PMX-4CR12 controller or PMX-4R24 router
– Processor control of all functions
– Monitoring of the processor system via watchdog circuit
– Non-volatile FLASH memory for configuration data
– Internal monitoring function
– Line monitoring function
The power amplifier is processor-controlled and equipped with extensive monitoring functions. Line monitoring for the
CAN bus and for audio transmission allows line interruptions and short-circuits to be detected and indicated to the
user.

PMX-2P500 Device
Start by creating an PMX-2P500 device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an PMX-2P500 from the Object Bar’s Devices

border around it.


Element Description
MODEL Indicates PMX-2P500, so you know the model of the device.
NAME IRIS-Net internal device name of the Amplifier.
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the Amplifier when on-line.

POWER SUPPLY Indicates the status of the AC or DC supply voltage.

OPERATING STATUS Indicates the operating status of the Amplifier.
LEVEL METER The level meters of the two output channels indicate the signal level of the
audio output signal.
Supervision Dialog
The Supervision tab shows the condition of the PMX-2P500. When on-line, all fault conditions are being indicated. It is
possible to select for each type of error whether it is displayed in a combined fault message, buffered and/or indicated
at the call station displays.
Element Description

and a signal sound.
CONTROLS
Error types
DEVICE CAN connection between Controller and Amplifier broken.

CONNECTED
PROTECT Protect mode of amplifier activated.
OVERHEAT Temperature overload of the device.
POWER SUPPLY Error in the mains power supply of the device.

MAINS
POWER SUPPLY Error in the battery power supply of the device.

BATTERY
OUTPUT PILOT Missing pilot tone at the amplifier output channel 1 or 2.

DETECTION
INPUT x PILOT Missing pilot tone at the amplifier input channels 1 to 4.

DETECTION
MASTER
STATE of error.

IRIS-Net PAVIRO | en 900
PAVIRO
PVA-4CR12
The PVA-4CR12 Controller is the central paging manager for the PAVIRO system. Eight local audio inputs can be
switched to four audio outputs. A two channel message manager is integrated. The controller provides all the audio
processing, supervision and control functions for a complete PAVIRO system. A single controller supports up to 16 call
stations and 492 paging zones. The controller is equipped with 12 zones, 18 GPIs and 19 GPOs. One controller can
handle up to 2000 W loudspeaker load. Additional zones and power can be added by using up to 20 external routers
and 40 amplifiers with each 2 ✕ 500 W. The zone indicator lights on the front indicate the current status of every zone:

PVA-4CR12 Device
Start by creating a Controller Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag a Controller from the Object Bar’s Devices category
or from the Devices window into the worksheet (see also chapters: Devices and Configurations menu).
Dialog Description
General This window allows hardware settings to be configured, e.g. network settings, device name,
system time and firmware version.
Security This window allows editing passwords.
device.
UserMix This window lets you configure background music.
Interface From this window the interfaces (e.g. CAN bus, GPIO control port) can all be configured.
HINT: Ethernet interface settings are edited under General dialog in the paragraph Network
Settings.
LineSupervision The line supervision of the device can be controlled and supervised from this window.
Topology/Zones This windows lets you configure topologies and zones of the system.

General Dialog
Double clicking on a PVA-4CR12 by default opens the General dialog box. Here, the user can make basic settings that
are necessary for flawless operation. All elements of the displayed PVA-4CR12 front panel are active in on-line mode
and correspond to the actual indicators on the unit.
Notice!
Element Description
IP ADDRESS Indicates the IP address of the PVA-4CR12’s Ethernet port (factory setting:
192.168.1.100). Enter the address of the PVA-4CR12 with which you want to

192.168.1.1).
MAC ADDRESS Indicates the MAC address of the connected PVA-4CR12 when on-line. The
MAC address of the PVA-4CR12 is also shown on a label on the unit’s rear
panel.
NAME IRIS-Net internal device name of the PVA-4CR12.
drop down field) via the integrated buzzer of the PVA-4CR12.
SYSTEM LANGUAGE Select the system language of the PAVIRO system. Please note to update the
call station firmware when selecting Korean or Chinese.
ACTIVE”.
after the alarm signal is stopped/muted (e.g. no alarm request present).
DATE/TIME Date and time of the PVA-4CR12 system clock.

INTERNAL CLOCK
DCF77 SYNCHRONIZATION Select this option to synchronize the internal clock of the PVA-4CR12 with
the DCF77 signal. Please refer to the manual how to connect an external
DCF77 receiver.

ENABLE SLAVE CLOCK Select this checkbox if slave clocks are connected to the PVA-4CR12.
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the PVA-4CR12 when on-line.

Reboots the PVA-4CR12.
Security Dialog

Element Description
stations.
Supervision Dialog

Element Description
LED on the front panel of the device lights, the FAULT relay opens and a signal
sound.
unchecked.
LOG

CONTROLS
CST TEXT If call stations are configured for error indication, the text entered here is
indicated in the call station display if the error occurs. The maximum number of
INTERNAL
FIRMWARE The device firmware version is not compatible with the IRIS-Net version used. A
HARDWARE Error in the power supply or the A/D converters of the device.
TEMPERATURE Temperature overload of the device.
Temperature Current temperature inside of the device (main board).

control

PROCESSING
MESSAGE Error in the message manager.

MANAGER
INTERFACES
dialog.
CST INTERFACE Fault condition on the PCA bus. Further details are provided in the Interface
FIRE PANEL Fault condition of the fire panel interface (FPA 5000).
INTERFACE

INT. ROUTER

TEMPERATURE

AMP INPUTS

IN1

IN2

S1

S2
EXTERNAL
CALL STATIONs A connected DPC call station has transferred an error message. The parameter
AMPLIFERS A connected DPA power amplifier has transferred an error message. The
ROUTERS A connected DCS system has transferred an error message. The parameter %u
POWER SUPPLY Fault condition in the power supply of the PMX-4CR12.

1 to 500: Zone A
501 to 1000: Zone B
USER

10 HINT: Use the device Task Engine to configure USER FAULTS.
MASTER
STATE of error.

DSP Dialog
In this dialog the DSP configuration of the Controller is shown. Double clicking on a DSP-Block’s icon allows editing its


Input
The Input block provides access to the audio inputs of the device. The name and gain values of the input channels are
indicated in the block. Double click the block to open the Inputs dialog.

CST 1 to 4; Permanent channel labeling.

MIC/LINE
1,2; AUX 1,2
CAN TERM/ Press the OFF button to activate the internal CAN termination resistor
STATE of the corresponding CST bus. The digit next to the button indicates the
total number of termination resistors activated. The number must
always be “2”.
0.0 dB 0 to 60 dB The gain of the MIC/LINE input channels can be adjusted in 6 dB steps.
The +48V button of the MIC/LINE input channels is for activating

phantom power whenever a suitable condenser microphone is being
used.


dB

LINE/MIC Press the LINE button if the line level audio input (LINE port) of the call
station is used. Press the MIC button if the microphone of the call
station is used, this loads a preset for the input 3 Band PEQ and
Compressor of CST1-4.

MESSAGE MANAGER
The Message Manager block provides access to the messages of the internal Message Manager. Double click the block
to open the Message Manager dialog.
Notice!
Recorded messages
The recorded messages are displayed in the Message Manager dialog only in online mode. To
download the recorded messages to your PC open following address in your web browser: http://
<ipAddressOfController>:8080/mm2/messages.html
Element Description
MESSAGES
edit the description. The description can be edited in offline or online mode. For recorded
messages the description is “Voice Alarm Rec. [date/time]”.
Type Available message types for uploaded messages are EVAC, Chime or Business. The Type can be
set when adding messages. For recorded messages the type is “VA Rec”.
mode.
Info The memory usage is indicated for all MM-2 modules. If the voice alarm recording feature of the
device is activated 40 minutes will be reserved for recording.

If the voice alarm recording feature of the device is activated up to 95 messages can be
uploaded.
ERROR STATES
ERROR flag is set at the same time. Additionally the FAULT-LED on the front panel of the DEVICE

STORAGE

MEMORY
WATCHDOG Watchdog error of the DEVICE. This error type is logged conforming to standards.
COLLECTED The FAULT-LED on the front panel of the PMX-4CR12 lights at the occurrence of this type of
ERROR error.
FALLBACK
SIGNALS
settings is valid for all PMX-4CR12 in the PROMATRIX system.
Chime This settings is valid for all PMX-4CR12 in the PROMATRIX system.


3 BAND PEQ
Equalizers accentuate or lower the audio signal within specific frequency ranges. Eight parametric 3-Band equalizers
are available.


CST 1-4, MIC/LINE Press the input channel button to view or edit the
1-2, AUX 1-2 corresponding PEQ settings.
LINE/MIC Press the LINE button if the line level audio input (LINE port)
of the call station is used. Press the MIC button if the
microphone of the call station is used.
Pressing BYPASS ALL switches off all filters.


gain.

kHz, 16 kHz EQ or the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass
filters.
0.7 0.1 to 100 (PEQ) Q defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ. A high
0.1 to 2.0 (Hi-/ Q-value results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-value
Lopass) results in a broadband filter. The Q-value also sets the quality
and thus the response of Hi and Lo pass filters with slopes of
12dB/ oct.

frequency range.


COMPRESSOR
The compressor reduces the dynamic range of audio signals. Once the signal exceeds a certain threshold, the signal
gets compressed, i.e. major input level changes result in minor output level changes. Narrowing the dynamic range
often allows for easier recording or mixing the audio signal. Eight compressors are available.

CST 1-4, MIC/LINE 1-2, AUX Press the input channel button to view or edit the
1-2 corresponding Compressor settings.
LINE/MIC Press the LINE button if the line level audio input
(LINE port) of the call station is used. Press the
MIC button if the microphone of the call station is
used.

untouched.

threshold.


5 BAND PEQ
Equalizers accentuate or lower the audio signal within specific frequency ranges. Four parametric 5-Band equalizers
are available.

corresponding Parametric EQ settings.



gain.

Hz, 1 kHz, 4 EQ or the cut-off frequency of shelving and Hi / Lo pass
kHz, 19 kHz filters.
0.7 0.01 to 6.67 Oct. Q or BW defines the quality or bandwidth of a parametric EQ.
or A high Q-value results in a narrowband filter, while a small Q-
0.1 to 2.0 (Hi-/ quality and thus the response of Hi and Lo pass filters with
Lopass) slopes of 12dB/ oct.

frequency range.


LIMITER
A Limiter is used when the output signal must not exceed a specific peak level, independent of how much the input
level rises. Short attack times effectively limit overshoots. Limiters are often used as protection for the components
following them an audio chain, i.e. to prevent an amplifier from clipping or protect loudspeaker systems against
mechanical damage.

corresponding Peak Limiter settings.


threshold.

audio signal.

OUTPUT
The Output block provides access to the outputs of the device. The name and gain values of the out channels are
indicated in the block. Double click the block to open the Output dialog.

OUT 1-4 Permanent channel labeling.

dB
-10.0 dB -60 to +6 dB The fader display shows the numerical value of the current fader setting

pilot tone generator.

ALARM CHIME
Alarm
Configuration

NEW ALARM Press this button to ad a new alarm to the alarm list.
PLAY ALARM Press this button to playback the alarm selected in the alarm list.
Chime
Configuration
PLAY CHIME Press this button to playback the chime selected in the chime list.

MATRIX

internal generators of the PMX-4CR12). The Matrix 10x4 allows connecting inputs and outputs. Left clicking the node in
– BGM inputs can only routed via a call station, so this is not possible in this dialog
– Inputs used for the Message Manager can not be routed


TaskEngine Dialog
VALUES
Element Description
always outputs the current value of the connection.


still available after a reset of the device.

ANALOG OPERATIONS
Element Description
input.

input.
the lower input.
LOGIC OPERATIONS
Element Description

input is false).
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Element Description
screenshot below).

screenshot below).

pre chime
present.

present.
be stopped.


– Timer Value


the display.


debounced.
debounced.

size and font type.



– userfault_idx

be checked.
Chime types
Typ
1_TONE
2_TONE
3_TONE
4_TONE
2x2_TONE
2_TONE_PRE
Alarm Types

Extern -
DIN Alarm
Slow Whoop
Siren
Two-Tone Alarm
Telephone Alarm
Ship Alarm 1
Ship Alarm 2
Ship Alarm 3
Ship Alarm 4
Ship Alarm 5
Ship Alarm 6
Ship Alarm 7

Ship Alarm 8
Ship Alarm 9
Ship Alarm 10
Ship Alarm 11
Ship Alarm 12
Ship Alarm 13
Ship Alarm 14
Ship Alarm 15
Ship Alarm 16
Ship Alarm 17
SILENCE -

Pagings Dialog
This dialog allows the configuration of pagings (e.g. alarm or EVAC messags) with dynamic destinations.

Element Description
type STATIC.

Element Description
CONDITION
START/ADD TRIGGER
added immediately.
STOP/SUB TRIGGER
PAGING

dropdown.
from this dropdown.
dropdown.
from this dropdown.
Programs Dialog


Element Description
audio signals.
specific name.
CONTROLLER INPUT CHANNEL: Select the controller input channel to be used as audio source of the selected
MIC/LINE 1-2, AUX 1-2 program.
AMPLIFIER INPUT CHANNEL Select the amplifier input channel to be used as local audio source.
UserMix Dialog
This dialog allows configuring audio routings (e.g. background music) in the system.

Element Description
the device.
Element Description

Element Description
CONDITION
SOURCE
dropdown menu.
Interfaces Dialog
The Interface window allows configuring the different interfaces located on the rear panel of the device. All REMOTE
CAN BUS and CONTROL PORT settings can be made in here. Configuring the Ethernet interface is done under Network
Settings in the General window.

Element Description
CAN INTERFACE
BAUD RATE Transmission rate of the CAN-Bus. All devices on the CAN-Bus must be set to one
Heavy, Bus Off.
CAN DEVICE LIST Lists the connected devices.
OPEN INTERFACE
ENABLE Set the checkbox to activate the ASCII control protocol of the device.
control protocol.

control protocol.
password here. Repeat the password in the CONFIRM PASSWORD field. Go
online (write) to set the password in the device.
FPA 5000 INTERFACE
ENABLE Set the checkbox to activate the connection between a FPA 5000 and the
PMX-4CR12 via Ethernet.
TCP Port TCP port of the FPA 5000 interface. The default port is 9401.
USERNAME Enter the username defined in the FPA.
PASSWORD Enter the password defined in the FPA.
CONTROL IN
ACTIVE Set the upper and lower bound (voltage) of the ACTIVE state of the supervised
control inputs.
control inputs.
CONTROL OUT
STATE It is possible to manually change the condition of the control outputs (normally
open contact / normally closed contact).
PowerManagement Dialog
The Power Management dialog allows configuring the standby mode of the device in detail.

Element Description
POWER ON/OFF SIGNAL Select the GPO contact or the virtual TE value for signaling the
controllers’ operating mode. In standby mode the GPO is open.
standby mode.
POWER SUPPLY STATUS
„mains power OK“. Set the checkbox to monitor this status.
„battery power OK“. Set the checkbox to monitor this status.
„charger status OK“. Set the checkbox to monitor this status.
„battery status at least 90%“. Set the checkbox to monitor this status.
SYSTEM OPERATION MODE

& CST TEXT

MAINS MODE If mains power is used for running the system, the Controller is in
MAINS MODE and the LED lights green. You can edit the name of this
mode in the text field. Press the POWER button to power on/off the
device.
BATTERY MODE If battery power is used for running the system, the Controller is in
MAINS POWER FAIL

BEHAVIOR
power fails.
mains power fails.
ROUTERS Select this option if Routers should switch to standby mode if mains
power fails.
SWITCH ON PRIORITY
available.
Notice!
The “Power Calculator” tool can be used to calculate the power consumption of the system. The
tool can be found in directory “/Tools” or can be requested from the IRIS-Net support team.
Notice!
The properties “Operating Mode” and “Standby LED” can be used for advanced power
management configuration via the Task Engine, please refer to section Properties.
LineSupervision Dialog
The Line Supervision dialog allows configuring and control of the Controller line supervision. Line supervision can be
done via line impedance measurement method or the End of Line method using PVA-1WEOL or Plena EOL modules.
Please refer to the Controller manual for details about the different measurement methods.

Element Description
SPEAKER OUT System internal description of the zone or line.
amplifier).

LEVEL [V] Enter the level of the measurement signal.
measurement.
measurement.
measurement.
SUPV TYPE Select the supervision method used for the zone. Possible methods are:
– IMP = impedance method
– EOL = EOL method using EOL 8001 modules
– PEOL = EOL method using Plena EOL modules
START MEASUREMENT Starts the line measurement in all selected zones or line.
(SELECTED).
SET MEAS. TO REFERENCE Press this button to store the values of the last measurement as new reference
(SELECTED). values for the selected zones or lines.
EXPORT DATA TO FILE All measurement data of the LINE SUPERVISION TABLE are exported to a csv file.
DAILY Set this checkbox, if a daily measurement should be done automatically. Enter
PERMANENT Set this checkbox, if line measurement should be done permanently.

Notice!
Use copy & paste to copy configurations from one element to another element in the line
supervision table.

IMPEDANCE METHOD
either permanently or every day at the scheduled time if the line is not busy. Each audio signal on the line interrupts
the line measurement. The measurements will be continued automatically if the line is free again.
Notice!
Impedance reference values (IMP-REF) shall be measured and set for all used loudspeaker lines.
The reference values are necessary not only if supervision type IMP is selected, but also for short
circuit detection if supervision type EOL or PEOL is selected. The reference values are further
needed for an impedance measurements triggered by an amplifier overload detection.

EOL METHOD
Notice!
For power supply of the EOL modules a pilot tone is required, so the pilot tone generator of the
power amplifier shall be activated.

IRIS-Net offers basic validation checks if the connections are valid. If a rule is not followed correctly, the connection
line turns red.
The following rules apply:
– One amplifier output can be connected to one or more router cluster inputs in parallel please refer to Line
topology. Only identical inputs of router clusters can be connected in parallel, e.g. if a amplifier output is
connected with the AMP IN1 input of one router cluster, the amplifier output can only be connected to AMP IN1
inputs of other router clusters. The same is valid for the router cluster input AMP IN 2. So it is not allowable to
connect different types of router cluster inputs to one amplifier output.
– One amplifier output can always be used for one topology only. E.g. if a amplifier output is connected to a router
cluster set to 1-in-N topology, the amplifier output can not be connected to a router cluster using another type of
topology (e.g. 2-in-N).
– If the two output channels of an amplifier are used for a 2-in-N or Program/Call topology and the outputs are
connected to more than one router cluster, the outputs have to be connected to the same input (e.g. always AMP
IN 1) of the router clusters.
– If a 2-in-N or Program/Call topology is selected, going online is not possible if the identical amplifier output is
connected to both inputs.
– Do not connect an amplifier output to a “regular” input of a router cluster (AMP IN 1, AMP IN 2) and a spare
amplifier input (S1, S2,) at the same time.
– If router clusters with EOL8001 supervision are used, always connect one amplifier output to router clusters of
one device only.

Notice!
If router clusters with EOL8001 supervision are used, switching router clusters within one device
is possible. This allows creating 1-in-24 or 2-in-24 topologies with EOL 8001 supervision.
– If a 1-in-N topology is selected, the connections of the router cluster inputs (IN1 or IN2) have to be set correctly.
E.g. every loudspeaker output has to be connected to a router cluster input, and the router cluster input has to be
connected to a amplifier output.

For spare amplifier switching, the following rules apply:
– Automatic spare amplifier switching can be activated for every amplifier channel in the system. One spare
amplifier channel is possible for an amplifier channel connected to the AMP IN 1 or AMP IN 2 input of a router
cluster. The spare amplifier channel as to be connected to the S1 or S2 input of the same router cluster.
– If an amplifier output channel is connected to the inputs of more than one router clusters in parallel and should be
backed up by a spare amplifier, the channel of the spare amplifier has to be connected to the same router clusters
in parallel.
If a 2-in-N or Program/Call topology is selected and the amplifier should be backed up by a spare amplifier, two spare
amplifier channels are required. It is not allowed to backup both channels of the topology with one spare amplifier
channel only.


Icon bar
Element Description
Program Channels Select the number of program channels in the Controller.
GPO List Click on this button to generate a CSV report of all GPOs configured in the system.
New Group Click on this button to create a new Group. The “All” group, including all zones, is created
group column.
Group List Click on this button to generate a CSV report of all Groups configured in the system. The
report includes the caption and object id of systems zones and the assignment of zones to
system groups.
Element Description
1_IN_N, 2_IN_N, PROG_CALL Select the topology for the 2-in-6 cluster.
+Priority Press this button to add a priority relays to the zone.

+Control Press this button to add a control relays to the zone.

Device dropdown Select the device to be used for controlling the control or priority relay.
GPO dropdown Select the GPO (of the selected device) for controlling the control or priority relay.
INV Press the INV button to invert the status of the control or priority relay.
X Press this button to delete the corresponding priority or control relay.
Manage group dialog


Element Description
SYSTEM GROUPS Lists all groups of the system.
SYSTEM ZONES Lists all zones of the system.
SYSTEM GROUPS list.
list.8
Properties
BUZZER CONTROL
The “PVACON_1.BuzzerControl” property of the PVA-4CR12 allows configuring the integrated buzzer. Following settings
are available:
Value Description
on Buzzer is activated is a new error appears.
off Buzzer is deactivated.
CST_1 Buzzer is activated if the call station (CST_1, CST_2,...) is not connected.

OPERATION MODE
The “PVACON_1.System.PowerManagement.OperatingMode” property allows setting the current operation mode of the
PVA-4CR12 and connected devices. High priority signals prevent changing into standby mode. Following settings are
available:
Value Description
0 Switch PVA-4CR12 in standby mode
1 Switch PVA-4CR12 in operating mode

HINT: The mode of peripheral devices connected to the PVA-4CR12 is set automatically.
STANDBYLED
The Standby LED of the PVA-4CR12 lights, when the device is in standby mode. The corresponding property
“PVACON_1.System.Info.StandbyLED” can be used to query the current mode.
Value Description
0 PVA-4CR12 is in operating mode
1 PVA-4CR12 is in standby mode

ETHERNET CONNECTION

not possible.
activated

Parameter Default
IP address 192.168.1.100
Port 6273


Controller.
ZONE STATUS
Element Description


Examples:
Id3.7 ON P12 Z2-3
Id3.7 OFF
WATCHDOG FUNCTION
adjusted.
seconds.
Example:

Logic values
Element Description

Example:
LVal1 0

set to PVA-4CR12_x.OpenInterface

Analog values
Element Description

Example:
AVal7 -30.222
Logic values
Element Description
? Question mark

Example:
Analog values
Element Description
? Question mark

Example:
Query: “AVal 7”

Caution!
Consequences

AVal 7?
Id3.4 ON P12 Z3,Z5-12,Z15 AVal7 -30.2222
FAULT REPORTING
Element Description
PVA-4R24
The PVA-4R24 24 Zone Router is a zone extension for the PAVIRO system. The PVA-4R24 adds 24 zones, 20 GPIs, 24
GPOs and 2 control relays to the system and is controlled and supervised via the CAN bus by the PVA-4CR12
(Controller). Up to 20 external routers can be connected to one controller. One router can handle up to 4000 W
speaker load. The maximum load of one zone is 500 W.
The zone indicator lights on the front indicate the current status of every zone:
PVA-4R24 Device
Start by creating a PVA-4R24 Device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag a PVA-4R24 from the Object Bar’s Devices category
dialog box appears:

border around it.

Element Description
MODEL Indicates PVA-4R24, so you know the model of the device.
NAME IRIS-Net internal device name of the Router.
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the Router when on-line.

OPERATING STATUS Indicates the operating status of the Router.
CONTROL IN
ACTIVE Set the upper and lower bound (voltage) of the ACTIVE state of the
supervised control inputs.
control inputs.

CONTROL OUT
STATE It is possible to manually change the condition of the control outputs

(normally open contact / normally closed contact).
Supervision Dialog
The Supervision window shows the condition of the PVA-4CR12. When on-line, all fault conditions are being indicated.
Element Description
and a signal sound.

unchecked.
LOG
CONTROLS
ROUTER
DEVICE CAN connection between Controller and Router broken.

CONNECTED
POWER SUPPLY Error in the power supply of the device.

TEMPERATURE
AMP INPUTS

IN1

IN2

S1

S2
MASTER
STATE of error.

PVA-15CST
The PVA-15CST is a call station for the PAVIRO system. As standard, the call station has a gooseneck microphone with
pop shield and permanent monitoring, a total of 20 buttons, an illuminated LC display, and an integrated loudspeaker.
The call station can be modified to suit the user’s requirements by connecting up to five PVA-20CSE call station
extensions, each with 20 customizable selection buttons.
Other properties:
– Five menu/function keys (pre-programmed) – one green or one yellow indicator light per button
– 15 selection buttons (customizable) – two indicator lights (green/red) per button
– Label with transparent covering – the label can be changed at any time
– Can be used as a standing or desk/rack flush-mounted device
– Internal monitoring with error logging – complying with all relevant national and international standards
– Easy configuration – use of the Configuration Wizard or IRIS-Net software
PVA-15CST Device
Start by creating an PMX-15CST device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag an PMX-15CST from the Object Bar’s Devices

border around it.

Element Description


station.
station.
buzzer.
(PAVIRO only).


– Scroll View
– Overall View
– Selective View
Talk
Notice!
Element Description
Groups.
– Internal Mic
– External Mic
– External Line
Locked)

– No Prechime
– 1-Tone
– 2-Tone
– 3-Tone
– 4-Tone
– 2x2-Tone
Selection

Element Description
n
Clear Key

Element Description
and/or Groups.
Logical Key


Element Description
station:
released.
being released.
– None
– None
locked locked.
Arithmetical Key


Element Description
up to this value.
call station.
when
locked
Menu Key


Element Description

Stop Key

Element Description
call station.
locked locked.
Alarm key


Element Description
Groups.

– Extern
– DIN Alarm
– Slow Whoop
– Siren
– Two-Tone Alarm
– Telephone Alarm
– Ship Alarm 1
– Ship Alarm 2
– Ship Alarm 3
– Ship Alarm 4
– Ship Alarm 5
– Ship Alarm 6
– Ship Alarm 7
– Ship Alarm 8
– Ship Alarm 9
– Ship Alarm 10
– Ship Alarm 11
– Ship Alarm 13
– Ship Alarm 14
– Ship Alarm 15
– Ship Alarm 16
– Ship Alarm 17
locked locked.

Chime Key

Element Description
Groups.
– 1-Tone
– 2-Tone
– 3-Tone
– 4-Tone
– 2x2-Tone
locked locked.
Talk over Alarm Key



Element Description
priority.
been locked.
On Key
station.

Element Description
been locked.
Lock Key
A switch of the type “Lock” allows locking the buttons of the call station. When assigned to a selection button the
password set in the Security tab of the Controller has to be entered at the call station..
Notice!



Element Description
Groups.
– Trigger
been locked.



Supervision Dialog
Element Description

are not correct.
MASTER
STATE of error.
PVA-CSK
The PVA-CSK call station kit is a call station printed circuit board (PCB) for the PAVIRO system. The circuit board
allows an application-specific call station to be installed, such as a fire department call station.
The call station kit is based on the call station, but has been optimized so that it is easy to adapt to different
application areas. In addition to the stem microphone familiar from the PVA-15CST, a dynamic EMERGENCY
microphone such as the DBB 9081 can also be connected. The call station kit equipped with an illuminated LC display
(122 x 32 pixels). The call station has the following features:
– Possible to connect microphone with pre-amplifier and compressor/limiting switch
– Possible to connect five pre-programmed menu/function buttons
– Possible to connect up to 15 function and selection buttons, programmable button assignment
– Possible to connect up to three alarm buttons or key switches
– Possible to connect an external microphone or audio source
– Possible to connect a loudspeaker
– High-resolution LC display
– Comprehensive parameter settings menu on the actual call station
– Microphone and line monitoring
– Error message via LED and buzzer, and error text in the LC display
The call station is processor-controlled, and equipped with extensive monitoring functions. Line monitoring for the CAN
bus and for audio transmission allows line interruptions and short-circuits to be detected and indicated to the user.
The microphone, PTT button, alarm button and key switch monitoring allows line interruptions and short-circuits to be
detected and reported.
The call stations for the PAVIRO system can be configured quickly and easily using IRIS-Net. A graphical and dialog-
based user interface allows the user to define all button functions, priorities, options, and other properties.
PVA-CSK Device
Start by creating a PVA-CSK device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag a PVA-CSK from the Object Bar’s Devices category or
from the Devices window into the worksheet (see also chapters: Devices and Configurations menu). The following
dialog box appears:


border around it.

Configuration

Element Description


station.
station.

buzzer.
(PAVIRO only).

– Scroll View
– Overall View
– Selective View

Supervision
Element Description

PTT/ALARM BUTTON Supervision fault of the PTT microphone or alarm button.
MASTER
STATE of error.
PVA-2P500
The PVA-2P500 class-D amplifier is a 2 ✕ 500 W professional audio amplifier for evacuation purposes. It can be
operated from both the mains and a DC supply. The output voltage is galvanically insulated and is constantly monitored
for ground fault. An energy-saving mode and temperature-controlled fans reduce energy consumption and noise levels.
The control and monitoring functions are performed via CAN bus. This amplifier is designed for operation in an
emergency evacuation system. The amplifiers are usually controlled via a controller and configured using IRIS-Net.
The power amplifier has the following features:
– Floating 100 V or 70 V power outputs
– High efficient amplifier blocks in class-D technology
– Outputs idling and short circuit-protected
– Mains operation 120–240 V (50/60 Hz) and/or 24 V DC emergency backup
– Temperature monitoring function
– Pilot tone and ground fault monitoring function via PVA-4CR12 Controller or PVA-4R24 Router
– Internal monitoring function
– Line monitoring function
The power amplifier is processor-controlled and equipped with extensive monitoring functions. Line monitoring for the
CAN bus and for audio transmission allows line interruptions and short-circuits to be detected and indicated to the
user.

PVA-2P500 Device
Start by creating a PVA-2P500 device in your IRIS-Net project. Drag a PVA-2P500 from the Object Bar’s Devices

border around it.


Element Description
MODEL Indicates PVA-2P500, so you know the model of the device.
NAME IRIS-Net internal device name of the Amplifier.
FIRMWARE Indicates the firmware version of the Amplifier when on-line.

POWER SUPPLY Indicates the status of the AC or DC supply voltage.

OPERATING STATUS Indicates the operating status of the Amplifier.
LEVEL METER The level meters of the two output channels indicate the signal level of the
audio output signal.
Supervision Dialog
The Supervision tab shows the condition of the PVA-2P500. When on-line, all fault conditions are being indicated. It is
possible to select for each type of error whether it is displayed in a combined fault message, buffered and/or indicated
at the call station displays.
Element Description

and a signal sound.
CONTROLS
Error types
DEVICE CAN connection between Controller and Amplifier broken.

CONNECTED
PROTECT Protect mode of amplifier activated.
OVERHEAT Temperature overload of the device.
POWER SUPPLY Error in the mains power supply of the device.

MAINS
POWER SUPPLY Error in the battery power supply of the device.

BATTERY
OUTPUT PILOT Missing pilot tone at the amplifier output channel 1 or 2.

DETECTION
INPUT x PILOT Missing pilot tone at the amplifier input channels 1 to 4.

DETECTION
MASTER
STATE of error.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Robert-Bosch-Ring 5
85630 Grasbrunn
Germany
www.dynacord.com
© Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH, 2015

IRIS Net Dokumentati Online Help All 20338629771

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IRIS Net Dokumentati Online Help All 20338629771

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IRIS Net Dokumentati Online Help All 20338629771

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

9.5 PMX-2P500 895

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

Notes on The IRIS-Net Documentation

IRIS-Net System Requirements

OS Windows 7 (32-Bit or 64-Bit), Windows 8 or Windows 8.1

RAM 2 GB (more is recommended)

Hard Disk 2 GB of free space

Video 1024x768, High Color (16 Bit)

Network Ethernet port and/or 1 USB port per 100 amplifiers

IRIS-Net Directory Structure

IRIS_readme.pdf ReadMe document offering additional information.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

Creating A New Project

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

How to edit an existing project?

Ethernet On-line Dialog

Name of the device. The checkbox in front of the name of a device

The IP address of the device in IRIS-Net. Connection fails, if the IP

Indicates the current connection status of the device.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

CAN On-line Dialog

Name of the Remote Amplifier.

Indicates the current connection status of the device.

Name of the PC-to-Remote Amplifier interface.

Reads all settings and presets of the Remote Amplifier(s).

Project Password Protection

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

A project's password protection can be activated or deactivated.

The layers that can be accessed by the user.

Creates a new user account and adds it to the List of Users.

This field allows entering the user's name.

This field allows entering a password for the user.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

The Controls category lists all available controls.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

If an appropriate interface (between PC and device) already exists in the IRIS-

Select an interface from the drop-down field, to automatically include it in the

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

Specify the amount of units of the selected type.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

Element Name Description

Element Name Description

Fader Fader for setting parameter values

Knob Knob for setting parameter values

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

Element Name Description

LED LED indicator for signaling operational states or errors

Scale Scale for labeling vertical bar graph indicators

Image List Image List for switching between different images

Element Name Description

MasterEQ PEQ user panel for a single or a group of Master EQs

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH User Manual 05-Dec-2015 | 3.1.0 | F.01U.119.956

ChannelEQ PEQ user panel for a single or a group of Channel EQs

Mini Delay Delay block for displaying delay settings

Mini Dynamics Dynamic block for displaying settings of dynamic

Mini MasterEQ Master EQ Block for displaying Equalizer settings

Mini Channel EQ Block for displaying Equalizer settings